100,000 non-UK fingerprints recorded each month

0

Immigration officials dab hands at biometrics

By Steve Ranger

The government is recording over 100,000 fingerprints a month from foreign nationals while overseas and applying to come to the UK.

Visa applicants in 100 countries worldwide are required to provide fingerprints if they want to visit to the UK for work, study or tourism. The biometric programme has been running since last September with the aim of recording the fingerprints of every foreign national applying for a UK visa by April 2008.

Fingerprints taken as part of the visa application process are checked against government records to see if the individual is already known to the Border and Immigration Agency.

This has already seen over 8,000 sets of prints matched to individuals “of concern” which the government said proves the effectiveness of the biometric checks.

Immigration minister Liam Byrne said it’s not just abroad that these fingerprint records are used. Once these individuals are in the UK the Immigration Services use the same database for enforcement activity, such as illegal working operations.

The government said over 700,000 sets of prints had been collected by the end of August.

Tech suppliers get ID card lowdown

0

By Tim Ferguson

Companies interested in becoming suppliers to the government’s controversial ID card scheme have been given the lowdown on what to expect if they are successful.

The Identity and Passport Service (IPS) staged a bidders’ conference last week for companies to learn how the procurement process for the National Identity Scheme (NIS) will work and what kinds of projects they could be involved in.

The conference took place in London last Friday with around fifty potential suppliers attending.

Bill Crothers, the IPS commercial director, said the aim of the conference was to explain the procurement process and how the IPS wants to do business to ensure value for money for the taxpayer.

He added that the conference was well attended and marked the successful conclusion of the latest stage of the procurement process.

Following the conference potential suppliers have two weeks to complete a prequalification questionnaire to express their interest in bidding for a contract.

The NIS procurement framework was unveiled in August and published in the Official Journal of the European Union, inviting potential suppliers to register their interest.

Successful bidders will build, deploy and maintain the various IT systems needed to complete the NIS project as well as provide business process and IT outsourcing services.

Microchipping of Alzheimer’s patients begins in Florida

1

By David Gutierrez

The Delray Beach, Fla.-based company VeriChip Corp. has announced plans to implant 200 Alzheimer’s patients in Palm Beach County with radio-frequency identification chips as part of a pilot study to test the new technology.

The VeriMed microchip is approximately the size of a grain of rice and contains a 16-digit patient identification number, which is available to anyone who scans the device with the right technology. This number can then be entered into a database to retrieve a patient’s medical information. The FDA has approved the chip for human implantation.

According to VeriChip’s CEO Scott Silverman, the VeriMed chip will eventually provide peace of mind to the families of Alzheimer’s patients by providing a safety net in case a patient should get lost.

“When an Alzheimer’s patient gets lost, once their arm is scanned, it would identify who they are and that they are an Alzheimer’s patient,” Silverman said.

The chip is not a GPS device, Silverman emphasized, and cannot be used to track people in whom it is implanted. All the participants in the two-year study are volunteers, and Silverman expressed pleasure with the study’s reception so far.

“We had an excellent turn-out at the educational seminars and virtually 100% enrollment,” he said. “This overwhelming acceptance underscores the value of the VeriMed system not only for Alzheimer’s patients, but their caregivers as well.”

But privacy and patients’ rights advocates have criticized the project, charging that it strips Alzheimer’s patients of their dignity.

The organization Consumers Against Supermarket Privacy Invasion and Numbering (CASPIAN), owner of the web sites spychips.com and antichips.com, has accused VeriChip of testing a potentially unsafe technology on the “most vulnerable” segment of the population, questioning whether Alzheimer’s patients are truly capable of giving their consent to be involved in such a study. CASPIAN has warned that the chips may cause adverse tissue reactions, problems with medical devices, electrical hazards and may place patients at risk of having their private information stolen.

Consumer health advocate Mike Adams added, “These Alzheimer’s patients are being used as guinea pigs as part of a campaign that intends to eventually microchip the entire population. Today, it’s senior citizens, pets and children… in the near future, it will be everyone.”

Iraq shootout firm loses licence

0

Iraq has cancelled the licence of the private security firm, Blackwater USA, after it was involved in a gunfight in which at least eight civilians died. The Iraqi interior ministry said the contractor, based in North Carolina, was now banned from operating in Iraq.

The Blackwater workers, who were contracted by the US state department, apparently opened fire after coming under attack in Baghdad on Sunday.

Thousands of private security guards are employed in lawless Iraq.

They are often heavily armed, but critics say some are not properly trained and are not accountable except to their employers.

The interior ministry’s director of operations, Maj Gen Abdul Karim Khalaf, said authorities would prosecute any foreign contractors found to have used excessive force.

“We have opened a criminal investigation against the group who committed the crime,” he told the AFP news agency.

All Blackwater personnel have been told to leave Iraq immediately, with the exception of the men involved in the incident on Sunday.

They will have to remain in the country and stand trial, the ministry said.

US investigation

The convoy carrying officials from the US state department came under attack at about 1230 local time on Sunday as it passed through Nisoor Square in the predominantly Sunni neighbourhood of Mansour.

The Blackwater security guards “opened fire randomly at citizens” after mortars landed near their vehicles, killing eight people and wounding 13 others, interior ministry officials said.

Most of the dead and wounded were bystanders, the officials added. One of those killed was a policeman.

A spokeswoman for the US embassy in Baghdad later confirmed there had been an incident in which state department security personnel reacted to a car bomb “in the proximity”, and that they had been shot at.

“We are taking it very seriously indeed,” she told the BBC, adding that discussions were still taking place about Blackwater’s status now that they had been ordered to leave.

When asked if Blackwater was complying with the order, the spokeswoman said she could not comment because the investigation into the incident was still in progress.

A spokesman for the US Secretary of State, Condoleezza Rice, said she wanted to ensure that everything was being done to avoid the loss of innocent life and to make sure this kind of incident never happened again.

She is also expected to telephone Iraqi Prime Minister Nouri Maliki to reassure him that the US had launched its own investigation.

Blackwater is reputed to have a contract worth $300m (£150m) with the state department to protect its diplomatic staff and equipment in Iraq.

The company, whose personnel have no combat immunity under international law if they engage in hostilities, has so far refused to comment on the shootings.

Civilian toll

Sunday’s violence followed the publication of a survey of Iraqis which suggested that up to 1.2m people might have died because of the conflict in Iraq.

A UK-based polling agency, Opinion Research Business (ORB), said it had extrapolated the figure by asking a random sample of 1,461 Iraqi adults how many people living in their household had died as a result of the violence rather than from natural causes.

The results lend weight to a 2006 survey of Iraqi households published by the Lancet, which suggested that about 655,000 Iraqi deaths were “a consequence of the war”.

However, these estimates are both far higher than the running total of reported civilian deaths maintained by the campaign group Iraq Body Count which puts the figure at between 71,000 and 78,000.

http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/world/middle_east/6998788.stm

Google Calls For Global Privacy Standards

0

Executives with the search engine want to start a discussion about international privacy standards which work to protect everyone’s privacy on the Internet.

Privacy today is the exception; Google on Friday called for privacy to be the rule.In a post on the Google Public Policy blog on Friday, Peter Fleischer, Google’s Global Privacy Counsel, said that privacy standards need to be harmonized worldwide.

“As I’ve noted before, everyone has a right to privacy online — and governments have an obligation to keep their citizens safe,” said Fleischer. “Yet despite the international scope of even the most ordinary Internet activity, the majority of the world’s countries offer virtually no privacy standards to their citizens and businesses. And even if every country in the world did have its own privacy standards, this alone would not be sufficient to protect user privacy, given the Web’s global nature. Data may move across six or seven countries, even for very routine Internet transactions. It is not hard to see why privacy standards need to be harmonized and updated to reflect this reality.”

As Fleischer notes, concern about the ease with which data can be disseminated around the world and the impact that access to that data has on privacy isn’t new. In 1980, the Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development issued guidelines that laid out fair information practices.

Former Sun CEO Scott McNealy’s now infamous declaration twenty years later that “privacy is dead” hints at how effective the OECD guidelines have been. Just because there are guidelines — we have both 1948’s Universal Declaration of Human Rights and ongoing human rights violations around the globe — doesn’t mean those guidelines will be widely respected.

Nonetheless, Google deserves credit for trying. Having fought the U.S. Department of Justice’s demand for search data when its competitors caved and having agreed to anonymize search records after 18 months, the company clearly isn’t deaf to privacy concerns, even if it hasn’t matched bolder moves from Ask.com.

“…Google is calling for a discussion about international privacy standards which work to protect everyone’s privacy on the Internet,” said Fleischer. “These standards must be clear and strong, mindful of commercial realities, and in line with oftentimes divergent political needs. Moreover, global privacy standards need to reflect technological realities, taking into account how quickly these realities can change.”

Though Google may grasp the technological realities of privacy better than most, its call for discussions about international privacy standards suggests a naive attitude about the ease with which “divergent political needs” can be brought “in line.” Things which diverge, by definition, don’t line up. Harmonizing privacy rights across U.S., Europe, China, Russia, and the rest of the nations of the world might well be compared to herding cats with a lightning rod during a thunderstorm. It won’t be quick or easy.

And when it comes to dealing with difficult issues like censorship — which is closely related to privacy — Google, like Microsoft and Yahoo, has found it easier to pass the buck to the U.S. government than deal with the issue itself. All three have asked Uncle Sam to treat censorship as a trade barrier, and to press censorious countries to be more open, so they don’t have to.

Perhaps privacy rights will prove easier to establish on a global basis than free speech rights. But more likely, the nations of the world, and the businesses operating therein, will manage, at best, a formal agreement to disagree.

Let the talks begin.

McDonalds Starts RFID Trial in Korea

Evan Schuman

McDonalds is experimenting with the ultimate line-buster in South Korea, where customers purchase food on their cell phones, which then ring when the order is ready.

But this trial is much more an RFID effort than a traditional mobile experiment. Most of the phone’s communications capabilities and its display are barely used, with customers having to download a McDonalds application into their phone.

“At each table, there is an RFID reader and a menu that has built-in RFID chips. Customers plug the reader into their mobile phones and point them at the item on the menu that they wish to eat or drink,” said a story in The Korea Times.

“The bill is charged through the mobile phone. When the meal is ready, the system sends a short message to the phone so the customer can pick up the ready tray at a designated counter.”

The trial is being managed by McDonalds and South Korea’s SK Telecom, which has dubbed the effort the “Touch Order” menu. It was unveiled at McDonald’s Shinchon branch in western Seoul near Yonsei University.

The McDonalds trial is interesting, if for no other reason than it is demonstrating yet another way to deploy mobile commerce. Some use the phone’s calling capabilities and screen while others leverage the phone’s digital camera to do some 2D barcode-selling.

Payments can be handled through the cell phone’s number–as McDonalds is apparently doing in the South Korea trial–or through an embedded RFID chip, which turns the smartphone into something akin to a contactless credit card.

The McDonalds trial does this one step better, using an RFID interface through a physical plug-in but not at all for payment.

Bush calls for permanent US military occupation of Iraq

0

By Barry Grey

President Bush’s nationally televised speech, delivered Thursday evening from the Oval Office, was the low point of a week of lies and absurdities designed to justify the United States’ bloody colonial war in Iraq. The ugly farce began with the congressional testimony Monday and Tuesday of Gen. David Petraeus, the top US commander in Iraq, and US Ambassador Ryan Crocker.

Bush cited their fraudulent assessment of the “success” of the military “surge” to outline a perspective for continuing the American occupation of Iraq and transforming the country into a permanent American protectorate, whose vast oil resources will be exploited by US oil companies, and whose territory will be used as a staging ground for military attacks on Iran and a strategic base for American domination of the Middle East.

Bush was, as usual, shameless in his piling up of lie upon lie, beginning with his portrayal of a gradual reduction in the 30,000 additional combat troops sent to Iraq in the military escalation he announced last January as a “new phase” in the war that could see a significant decline in fighting and troop levels. As is well known, the phasing out of the surge is dictated by the lack of additional forces to replace troops whose tours of duty will be coming to an end.

Once again, Bush portrayed the US occupation as a struggle for “freedom” against “terrorists and extremists,” denying that the real enemy of US imperialism is the broad mass of the Iraqi people, who form the backbone of the popular resistance to the hated American occupiers.

The surge, he said, was aimed at “securing the Iraqi population” and bridging “sectarian divides.” In fact, recent studies have shown that the number of Iraqis fleeing their homes has doubled since the surge began, and the country has become far more polarized along sectarian lines, with ethnic cleansing of neighborhoods in Baghdad and elsewhere proceeding at an accelerated pace.

Bush spoke of peace and security breaking out in regions, such as Anbar and Diyala, which have been “cleared”–a euphemism for bloody repression and military violence. He gave an absurd picture of an almost idyllic Baghdad, with schools and markets reopening and sectarian violence receding. In fact, large parts of Baghdad have been turned into virtual concentration camps, enclosed by high concrete walls, patrolled by US armored vehicles, and kept under permanent curfew.

The so-called “security” of the Iraqi people has taken the form of tens of thousands of additional people rousted from their homes and thrown into prisons. So hellish is the situation that a recent poll of Iraqis reported 79 percent favoring the withdrawal of US troops and 59 percent supporting violent attacks against them.

Bush again warned that the withdrawal of American troops would result in a “humanitarian nightmare,” an apt description of the social destruction and human horror that US is perpetrating every day it remains in the country.

At times Bush’s pronouncements seemed delirious, as when he thanked the “36 nations who have troops on the ground in Iraq.”

Perhaps the greatest absurdity is the claim, made by Petraeus and Crocker and repeated by Bush, that Sunni Anbar province proves the success of the surge and vindicates the US strategy in Iraq. In fact, the US has achieved a fragile peace with Sunni sheiks in the province by bribing them with tens of millions of dollars in “reconstruction” funds.

If anything, the turn to an alliance with Sunni forces is more a sign of desperation and perplexity than of strategic foresight. Less than a year ago, US strategy in Iraq was based on an alliance with Shia sectarian forces, who continue to dominate the puppet government in Baghdad. When that policy collapsed, the US turned to its opposite, laying the basis for a further division of the country along sectarian lines and an intensification of civil warfare.

Just how stable the US position in Anbar really is was demonstrated by the assassination only hours before Bush’s speech of the Sunni sheik who had led the tribal leaders aligned with the US, and with whom Bush had met ten days previously.

The heart of Bush’s speech was an allusion to the perspective of permanent US military and political control over Iraq. Iraqi leaders, Bush said, “understand that their success will require US political, economic and security engagement that extends beyond my presidency. These Iraqi leaders have asked for an enduring relationship with America.”

The speech was punctuated by threats against Iran, pointing to the growing danger that the war cabal in Washington will expand the conflict, with incalculable and tragic consequences. Bush spoke of “Iranian-backed militants” and “the destructive ambitions of Iran,” and declared that the “efforts by Iran and Syria to undermine [the Iraqi] government must end.”

The fact that Bush feels himself in a position to even make such a speech is due, above all, to the cowardice and complicity of the Democratic Party. Ten months after congressional elections in which the electorate voted against the Bush administration and the war and brought the Democratic Party into power in both houses of Congress, troop levels are substantially higher and all talk within the political establishment of an early end to the war has virtually ceased.

In his speech, Bush made a calculated appeal to the Democrats, knowing that their opposition to the war is fraudulent and that sections of the congressional Democrats are looking for a way to back the administration. Addressing “members of the United States Congress,” he said, “Let us come together on a policy of strength in the Middle East. I thank you for providing crucial funds and resources for our military. And I ask you to join me in supporting the recommendations General Petraeus has made and the troop levels he has asked for.”

In the Democratic response, Rhode Island Senator Jack Reed failed to even mention the November 2006 elections. He spoke of “redefining” and “changing” the US mission in Iraq, not ending it. This is in line with the decision of the Democratic congressional leadership to drop any demand for deadlines or timetables for withdrawing troops.

As one CNN commentator aptly noted, the actual difference between the Bush administration and the Democrats comes down to whether troop levels by the end of the current administration should be 130,000 or 100,000.

The Democratic Party, which provided Bush with the votes he needed for congressional authorization of the war, has supported every request for war funding, and is preparing to support another $190 billion for the wars in Iraq and Afghanistan. The Democrats have worked deliberately and systematically since gaining control of Congress to divert, contain and exhaust popular opposition to the war.

On the eve of Bush’s speech, the Democratic-controlled Senate Appropriations Committee approved a $459.6 billion Pentagon funding bill, including a $40 billion increase in military programs. Combined with the $190 billion in supplemental war funds, the total military budget for the new fiscal year will be $650 billion–an 11 percent increase over current levels and, in real terms, far higher than total defense spending at the height of the Vietnam War.

Hundreds held in US anti-war march

0

Nearly 200 protesters have been arrested during a march in Washington DC held to demand the return of troops from Iraq and the impeachment of George Bush, the US president.

Organisers said 100,000 people attended Saturday’s protest, but police did not confirm the figure.

The arrests took place as police used chemical sprays on protesters attempting to climb over barricades outside the Capitol building.

Up to 1,000 counter-protesters gathered close by and chanted angrily at the anti-war protesters as they marched to the Capitol.

Demonstrators had gathered outside the White House before heading toward the US Capitol building.

The demonstrations come days after General David Petraeus, the senior US commander in Iraq, testified to the US congress on conditions in Iraq.

“One of the differences with this demonstration is that it is being led by Iraqi war veterans,” she said.

Veterans protest

Phil Aliff, 21, marched as a member of Iraq Veterans Against the War.

“I stayed [in Iraq] for a year, in Abu Ghraib and outside Fallujah,” he said.

“When we arrived, we were told we were here to bring stabilisation to the country.

“But we were not rebuilding anything. The Iraqis had only two hours of electricity. And I saw the atrocities committed by the Americans there.”

The arrests came after several dozen protesters carried out a “die-in”, lying on their backs in front of congress in an attempt to draw attention to the rising death toll in Iraq.

Many were arrested without a struggle after they jumped over a waist-high barrier.

But some grew angry as police with shields and riot gear attempted to push them back and police used chemical spray on at least two people.

‘Trust eroded’

Relatives of soldiers who are serving or had served in Iraq were a key group within the public demonstration.

Diane Santoriello held a photograph of her son Neil, who was killed in Iraq in August 2004.

“I am here to get congress to de-fund the war,” she said.

Brian Becker from the Answer (Act Now to Stop War and End Racism) coalition, the group organising the anti-war march, said Iraqi civilians wanted US forces out of their country.

“The vast majority of the people in the US want the war ended and the troops brought home now,” he said.

Speakers at the anti-war demonstration included Cindy Sheehan, an activist whose son was killed while serving in Iraq.

US public support for the war is at an all-time low, with 62 per cent of Americans believing that invading Iraq was a mistake, according to a New York Times/CBS poll published last week.

Counter-protest

Counter-protesters gathered near the anti-war march, frequently chanting “U-S-A” and waving US flags.

Retired Air Force Lt. Col. Robert ‘Buzz’ Patterson, speaking from a stage to crowds of people clad in camouflage, American flag bandanas and Harley Davidson jackets, said he wanted to send three messages.

“Congress, quit playing games with our troops. Terrorists, we will find you and kill you,” he said.

“And to our troops, we’re here for you, and we support you.”

E-numbers adviser paid by supermarket giant

0

Jo Revill
The Observer

A scientist with a leading role in the decision over whether food additives are damaging children’s behaviour is also a paid consultant to Tesco and Unilever, companies whose brands use the chemicals under suspicion.Food policy experts and MPs say the dual role of Dr Sue Barlow, who chairs the European scientific panel assessing the risk of additives, raises serious questions about her suitability to perform such a crucial role. The panel will advise the European Commission on whether to ban the controversial additives, which include a series of E numbers.

It comes after a new study raised fears that a combination of colourings and preservatives commonly used in cakes, drinks and sweets are making children more unruly and aggressive.

Tim Lang, professor of food policy at City University, said: ‘Parents who are worried about these artificial additives will look at the decision her committee makes and wonder how reliable it really is. Of course, there is a role for people in industry, but to have someone with such a clear manufacturing and retailing interest in the chair, however much integrity she has as a scientist, sends out completely the wrong signal.’

Barlow, a toxicology expert, will chair a meeting of the additives, foods and chemicals panel of the European Food Standards Authority (Efsa) in two weeks’ time. Partly funded by the British taxpayer through the Food Standards Agency, the panel’s task is to advise the European Commission on whether there is a clear risk that additives contribute to hyperactive behaviour in children.

It follows a study at Southampton University, published in The Lancet, which found that children without a history of hyperactive behaviour became unruly and impulsive after consuming a cocktail of colourings which use a particular preservative, sodium benzoate.

Some companies, such as Cadbury Trebor Bassett, are beginning to remove the chemicals, but they are still widely used in thousands of products, particularly those targeted at children.

In May 2006, the panel rejected the argument that there might be a link between the sweetener aspartame and cancer. MEPs complained about the role of Barlow, who at that stage worked for the International Life Sciences Institute, a body funded by sweetener manufacturers and major aspartame users such as Coca-Cola, PepsiCo, Nestle and Monsanto. Barlow had been an observer, not chairwoman, at the aspartame meeting, Efsa said. Aspartame is not one of the chemicals currently under investigation.

Barlow said: ‘My interests are fully declared, they can be seen by everyone on the Efsa website. I am an employee of Efsa and it is for them to decide whether they represent a conflict of interests.’

She added: ‘I can understand why people ask that question, as I am a consultant to Tesco, but Tesco markets food right across the board. My role is to advise them on chemical problems, nothing to do with which products they use.’

Barlow said that she had given advice on additives and had spoken to Tesco about the Southampton study. ‘From our [panel’s] perspective, it’s important to review this study in the context of all the previous work that has gone on – we can’t just take it in isolation. We have to establish that there is something there. Do we consider that the reported behavioural changes in children have been well demonstrated or not?’

A Tesco spokeswoman said: ‘Susan Barlow is an independent consultant and an expert on toxicology whose work is well recognised. Any suggestion that such a professional would be influenced by Tesco is complete nonsense. As you would expect, we work with many independent experts from the food industry and we all have the same aim, which is to ensure food safety for our customers.’

A spokeswoman for Efsa, which is based in Parma, Italy, said: ‘If Dr Barlow is chair of the meeting, then it must mean that there is no conflict of interest.’

· Why won’t the government intervene on healthy eating? Join the conversation on our food blog

· Additional reporting by Joanna Tomlin

Iraq conflict has cost 1.2 million lives, claims civilian survey

0

Peter Beaumont
The Observer

A startling new household survey of Iraqis released last week claims as many as 1.2 million people may have died because of the conflict in Iraq – apparently lending weight to a 2006 survey in the Lancet that reported similarly high levels.More than one million deaths were already being suggested by anti-war campaigners, but such high counts have consistently been rejected by US and UK officials. The estimates, extrapolated from a sample of 1,461 adults around the country, were collected by a British polling agency, ORB, which asked Iraqis how many people living in their household had died as a result of the violence rather than from natural causes.

Previous estimates, most prominently collected by the Johns Hopkins Bloomberg School of Public Health, reported in Lancet in October 2006, suggested almost half this number, 654,965, as a likely figure in a possible range of 390,000 to 940,000.

Although the household survey was carried out by a polling organisation, rather than by epidemiological researchers operating under the discipline of scientific peer review, it has again raised the spectre that the 2003 invasion of Iraq has caused a far more substantial death toll than officially acknowledged by the US or UK governments or the Iraqi Ministry of Health.

The ORB survey follows an earlier report by the organisation which suggested one in four Iraqi adults had had a family member killed. Their latest survey suggests that in Baghdad that number is as high as one in two. The poll also questioned the surviving relatives on how their loved ones were killed. It reveals 48 per cent died from a gunshot wound, 20 per cent from the impact of a car bomb, nine per cent from aerial bombardment, six per cent by accident and six per cent from another blast or ordnance.

If true, the latest figures would suggest the death toll in Iraq now exceeds that of the Rwandan genocide when 800,000 died.

The new effort to estimate the number of dead in Iraq is certain to reignite the controversy over the lack of any proper accounting of the number of civilian dead in Iraq, rejected by US commander General Tommy Franks who said: ‘We don’t do death counts.’ The problem has been exacerbated by the unwillingness of the Iraqi government to release proper accounting of the death toll which has led to suspicion of the figures being estimated deliberately downwards.

An absolute minimum of just under 80,000 deaths has been established by the British group Iraq Body Count. The Lancet survey was criticised by some experts and rubbished by George Bush and British officials. In private, however, the Ministry of Defence’s chief scientific adviser Sir Roy Anderson described it as ‘close to best practice’.

Gitmo “Illegal Briefs” Investigated

0

Smuggling Concerns Raised When Prisoners Are Discovered Wearing Contraband Underwear

Guards at the Guantanamo Bay prison camp found two prisoners sporting unauthorized underwear, and the U.S. military is investigating to determine how they got the contraband.

Both prisoners were caught wearing Under Armour briefs and one also had on a Speedo bathing suit, items the military said were not issued by Guantanamo personnel or sent through the regular mail, according to a Defense Department letter obtained Friday by The Associated Press.

Army Lt. Col. Ed Bush, a spokesman at the jail holding some 340 men on suspicion of terrorism or links to al Qaeda and the Taliban, said more was involved than just an uproar over skivvies.

He said the appearance of contraband raised serious concerns about the potential for smuggling other items that could be used by detainees to harm themselves or staff.

“There is no room for error when working in a dangerous environment, and constant vigilance is of the utmost importance,” Bush said.

Detainees are given cotton briefs similar to those issued to U.S. soldiers in basic training, he said.

The letter, sent last month by the Office of the Navy Judge Advocate General to a lawyer for one of the prisoners involved noted both detainees are represented by the British human rights group Reprieve and suggested attorneys might have “surreptitiously” provided the garments.

“We are investigating this matter to determine the origins of the above contraband and ensure that parties who may have been involved understand the seriousness of this transgression,” said the letter, which was provided to AP by one of the attorneys, Clive Stafford Smith.

Stafford Smith called the suggestion that he or the other lawyer, Zachary Katznelson, smuggled underwear to prisoners “patently absurd.”

“Neither I, nor Mr. Katznelson, nor anyone else associated with us has had anything to do with smuggling ‘unmentionables’ into these men, nor would we ever do so,” he wrote in response the letter.

Stafford Smith noted lawyers are searched when they enter the detention center and a camera monitors them while they visit clients.

“The idea that we could smuggle in underwear is farfetched,” he wrote in his reply.

He said Under Armour briefs are popular with members of the military and suggested investigators check to see if the offending underwear was purchased at the U.S. Navy base where the prison is housed.

One of the detainees – the one with the Speedo and Under Armour

is Shaker Aamer, a Saudi Arabian nicknamed “the professor” by Guantanamo guards who is considered a leader among the detainees.

A former resident of Britain, Maryland and Georgia, Aamer has been accused by the U.S. of once sharing an apartment with convicted terror plotter Zacarias Moussaoui and receiving a stipend directly from Osama bin Laden. He denies the allegations, and the British government has called for his release.

The other detainee was identified in the letter as Muhammed al-Qareni, who military records show was born in Saudi Arabia but is a citizen of Chad. He has been accused of being an al Qaeda fighter in Afghanistan, an allegation he has denied.

Both have been held at Guantanamo for more than five years.

At the time the letter was received, Aamer had not seen his lawyer for a year and al-Qareni had not been visited by Katznelson for four months, Stafford Smith said.

Stafford Smith has previously accused the military of attempting to falsely link him to the June 2006 suicides of three prisoners at Guantanamo, saying at least one of his clients reported being questioned about whether the lawyer had any role in the incident.

U.S. officials did not comment on the claim but the former commander has said in court papers that he had asked investigators to try to determine whether the suicides were “encouraged, ordered or assisted by other detainees or third persons.”

http://www.cbsnews.com/stories/2007/09/14/terror/main3263128.shtml

‘Water boarding’ torture banned by CIA

0

President George W Bush signed an order requiring the CIA to comply with the Geneva Conventions against torture. The CIA has banned the controversial interrogation technique known as “water boarding”, which simulates drowning to persuade suspects to talk, ABC News reported on Friday.

ABC said it had been told by former and current CIA officials that CIA director Michael Hayden banned the practice sometime last year at the recommendation of his deputy, Steve Kappes, and with the approval of the White House.

CIA spokesman Mark Mansfield it was the agency’s policy not to comment on interrogation techniques other than to emphasise that they have been, and continue to be, lawful.

But a US official, speaking on condition he not be identified, told Reuters: “It would be wrong to assume programmes of the past moved into the future unchanged.”

President George W Bush signed an executive order in July requiring the CIA interrogators to comply with the Geneva Conventions against torture – five years after he exempted al Qaeda and Taleban members from the Geneva provisions.

Many human rights groups consider water boarding – which involves pouring water over a suspect’s mouth and nose to stimulate a drowning reflex – to be torture.

Bush, who insists the United States does not use torture, has faced pressure at home and abroad over interrogation techniques used on suspected militants held at secret CIA prisons and other locations, including the US military prison at Guantanamo Bay, Cuba.

http://www.nzherald.co.nz/section/2/story.cfm?c_id=2&objectid=10463830

Files prove that MI5 spied on SNP

0

MARC HORNE

Watched: SNP politician William Wolfe's phone...  THE SNP was spied on by British secret service agents, previously classified Government files seen by Scotland on Sunday have finally proved.

Claims of surveillance of nationalist politicians by intelligence officers have circulated for years, but the new papers provide the first incontrovertible evidence that the state spied on the SNP in the 1950s.

Agents from MI5 and Special Branch infiltrated the party as part of a campaign to undermine support for Scottish independence, the papers show.

The revelations have put First Minister Alex Salmond – who in opposition complained about closed Government files on the SNP – under pressure to close a legal loophole that allows the secret services to intercept the calls of Scottish parliamentarians.

The files, which have been opened and placed in the UK National Archives in Kew, show that throughout the 1950s Special Branch officers posed as nationalist supporters and attended party meetings and rallies.

The dossiers contain first-hand accounts from numerous unnamed agents of party meetings, and also include names of SNP members and sympathisers. They also provided transcripts of speeches and give particular attention to members they believed were on the more radical and militant wing of the party.

The dozens of documents also contain the remarkable claim that Dr Robert McIntyre, the then SNP leader, wanted Scotland to pull out of the UK and apply to be the 49th state of the USA.

A number of present-day MSPs, including former SNP leadership contender Alex Neil, claim MI5 still monitors pro-independence politicians and may even have stepped up surveillance since the Nationalists won power in May.

So far the new SNP administration has rejected calls to extend the “Wilson Doctrine” – which bans the secret services from tapping the phones of MPs – to Holyrood.

Alex Neil, deputy convener of Holyrood’s European and External Relations Committee, said: “It does not surprise me in the least to have it confirmed that the UK Government has used dirty tricks against the SNP in the past.

“I would certainly not discount the idea that the British state is still acting to undermine the SNP, especially given the substantial progress it has made recently.

“We need to get clear assurances from Westminster that nothing is being done to undermine the democratic wishes of the Scottish people.”

Margo MacDonald, the independent nationalist MSP and former SNP deputy leader, added: “Scotland is strategically important and energy rich, and I think it would be extraordinary if the security services weren’t taking a close interest in recent developments in Scotland.

Fellow SNP member Christine Grahame, convener of Holyrood’s Health and Sport Committee, is disappointed that Justice Minister Kenny MacAskill has so far rejected her calls to outlaw the monitoring of MSPs’ phone calls.

MacAskill said: “The Scottish Government has no plans to seek to extend the Wilson Doctrine to cover MSPs, nor to introduce a convention to prevent police Special Branches carrying out covert surveillance in circumstances that meet the strict tests of necessity required by law.”

A spokesman for the Home Office, which deals with UK intelligence services, said: “We neither confirm nor deny operational matters.”

A Scottish Government spokesman confirmed that the First Minister has the power to sign warrants to bug telephones in Scotland.

Files open on curious case of spooks, SNP and Idi Amin

THE SETTING was Hyde Park in the centre of London. The speaker was a young and charismatic politician who had broken the mould.

The crowd was mainly made up of his supporters who gathered to hear his views on self-rule, daring raids on the establishment and possible alliance with a foreign power.

Except for one. He was the “spook” from MI5 and he duly delivered his report on the enemy within – the Scottish National Party – to his political masters in Whitehall.

Scotland on Sunday can reveal today for the first time the official papers that prove that MI5 and Special Branch spied on the SNP during the 1950s because of fears over independence.

According to the documents lodged at the National Archives in Kew, government agents routinely attended party meetings to compile lists of SNP members and where they lived, focusing on the more militant individuals. They also provided detailed transcripts of speeches.

The files show that in April, 1951, a government agent attended the party gathering in Hyde Park to keep a close eye on party leader Robert McIntyre, who had made history by becoming the first SNP MP after winning a by-election in Motherwell six years earlier.

A detailed report on his remarks and conduct states: “Dr McIntyre said the party was a constitutional one, but as such it had been ignored by the English. It was only when unconstitutional methods, such as the removal of the Stone of Destiny from Westminster Abbey [in 1950], were used that this country become aware of Scotland’s wish for self-rule.

“He thought that Scotland would in fact be better off as the 49th state of the United States, both from an economic and defence aspect.”

This revelation is at odds with the SNP’s stance as a predominantly left-of-centre party, which remained suspicious of the US brand of unfettered free-market capitalism. The files include detailed reports of a meeting held by the London branch of the SNP in Conway Hall, Holborn, on May 31, 1954.

It states: “Attached is a list of the present paid-up members of the Scottish National Party, a list of members from 1953 and a list of names and addresses taken from a ‘contact book’, which includes the names of people who have expressed their sympathy with the Party at meetings and rallies.”

Another Special Branch member filed a report on an SNP rally that took place in Trafalgar Square on April 19, 1953.

It lists those who attended, including McIntyre, who died in 1998, and states: “All of the speeches were moderate in tone and no references were made to Coronation, but, as I have detailed, two of the speakers did briefly comment on the title of HM the Queen.”

The files record that SNP members eventually became suspicious of government infiltration and proposed that all new members be vouched for by a regular member. The Special Branch agent recorded: “This was on the grounds that a Mr Douglas, who was well versed in politics and spoke well, was regarded as a police spy.”

SNP elder statesman said they were “shocked” their suspicions had finally been confirmed.

William Wolfe, who joined the SNP in the late 1950s and led the party between 1969 and 1979, said: “We always suspected that the party was being infiltrated by government agents, but it is still shocking to have that suspicion finally confirmed.

“I remember one individual in particular who claimed he had spent many years in America before joining the party.

“Something about him just didn’t add up and we all suspected he was some sort of government informer. A lot of us used to joke about having moles in our midst, but it now appears that it was no laughing matter.”

Wolfe added: “It is quite, quite wrong for a legitimate and democratic party to be put under surveillance in this way. I have absolutely no doubt that the UK Government will have several files on me, but I have nothing to hide.”

Wolfe, 83, insists he was put under surveillance by M15 as late as the 1970s after he received a bizarre telex from the Ugandan dictator Idi Amin offering support for Scottish independence.

“It was a very strange incident, but I had it confirmed from the police that it led to my phone being tapped.”

Security experts said the Home Office would have considered the SNP a legitimate target for surveillance.

Terrorism expert Paul Wilkinson, professor of international relations at St Andrews University, said: “This was the era when the taking of the Stone of Destiny from Westminster Abbey had become a huge national issue. I’m sure there was concern in Westminster and Whitehall that there was a more militant wing within supporters of Scottish independence which posed a threat of illegal actions and it is the job of MI5 to monitor potential dangers of that kind.”

Thousands of foreign nationals’ fingerprints taken

0

Tom Young

And more than 8000 have been turned back thanks to biometrics, says the government

Picture of a fingerprint The government has collected fingerprints from more than 700,000 foreign nationals applying for UK visas since last September.

And upwards of 8000 sets of prints have already been matched to individuals of concern, and thus refused entry.

‘Biometric checks allow us to screen each visa applicant before they are given the right to enter the UK, meaning tighter border controls and increased security,’ said immigration minister Liam Byrne.

Applicants in 100 countries worldwide are required to provide fingerprints at embassies if they want to visit the UK. The biometrics are then checked against UK government records to see if individuals are flagged up by the Border and Immigration Agency.

Biometrics are not only use to prevent unwanted individuals entering the country. If individual applicants are successful, the records are kept to help crack down on illegal working practices and illegal immigration.

National Academy of Sciences Member Calls for New 9/11 Investigation

0

By Alan Miller    

Official Explanation a “Fraud”

World renowned scientist, Lynn Margulis, Ph.D., has severely criticized the official account of 9/11 and called for a new investigation, “I suggest that those of us aware and concerned demand that the glaringly erroneous official account of 9/11 be dismissed as a fraud and a new, thorough, and impartial investigation be undertaken.”


Lynn Margulis, PhD


One of America’s most prominent scientists, Dr. Margulis is Distinguished University Professor in the Department of Geosciences, University of Massachusetts – Amherst. She was elected to the National Academy of Sciences in 1983 and served as Chairman of the Academy’s Space Science Board Committee on Planetary Biology and Chemical Evolution. In 1999, President Bill Clinton presented Dr. Margulis with the National Medal of Science, America’s highest honor for scientific achievement, “for her outstanding contributions to understanding of the development, structure, and evolution of living things, for inspiring new research in the biological, climatological, geological and planetary sciences, and for her extraordinary abilities as a teacher and communicator of science to the public.”

In her statement on PatriotsQuestion911.com, Dr. Margulis referred to 9/11 as “this new false-flag operation, which has been used to justify the wars in Afghanistan and Iraq as well as unprecedented assaults on research, education, and civil liberties”. She compared 9/11 to several self-inflicted attacks that had been used in the past to arouse people’s fear and hatred and justify war, including the sinking of the USS Maine in Havana Harbor, the Reichstag Fire, and Operation Himmler, which Germany used to justify the invasion of Poland, the trigger for World War II.

In her statement, Dr. Margulis cites “the research and clear writing by David Ray Griffin in his fabulous books about 9/11” as a useful source of information and analysis of problems with the official account of 9/11. She specifically lauded The New Pearl Harbor and The 9/11 Commission Report: Omissions and Distortions, “which provides overwhelming evidence that the official story is contradictory, incomplete, and unbelievable.”

Internationally acclaimed for her ground-breaking scientific work, Dr. Margulis is an elected member of The World Academy of Art and Science, an organization of 500 of the world’s leading thinkers, chosen for eminence in art, the natural and social sciences, and the humanities. And in 2006, she was selected as one of “The 20th Century’s 100 Most Important Inspirational Leaders” by the editors of Resurgence magazine.

Dr. Margulis’ full statement can be read at PatriotsQuestion911.com. More information about Dr. Margulis’ career can be found at http://www.sciencewriters.org.

U.S. Navy ‘Top Gun’ Pilot Questions 9/11

0

By Alan Miller 

U.S. Navy ‘Top Gun’ pilot, Commander Ralph Kolstad, started questioning the official account of 9/11 within days of the event. “It just didn’t make any sense to me,” he said. And now 6 years after 9/11 he says, “When one starts using his own mind, and not what one was told, there is very little to believe in the official story.”

Now retired, Commander Kolstad was a top-rated fighter pilot during his 20-year Navy career. Early in his career, he was accorded the honor of being selected to participate in the Navy’s ‘Top Gun’ air combat school, officially known as the U.S. Navy Fighter Weapons School. The Tom Cruise movie, “Top Gun” reflects the experience of the young Navy pilots at the school. Eleven years later, Commander Kolstad was further honored by being selected to become a ‘Top Gun’ adversary instructor. While in the Navy, he flew F-4 Phantoms, A-4 Skyhawks, and F-14 Tomcats and completed 250 aircraft carrier landings.

Commander Kolstad had a second career after his 20 years of Navy active and reserve service and served as a commercial airline pilot for 27 years, flying for American Airlines and other domestic and international careers. He flew Boeing 727, 757 and 767, McDonnell Douglas MD-80, and Fokker F-100 airliners. He has flown a total of over 23,000 hours in his career.

Commander Kolstad is especially critical of the account of American Airlines Flight 77 that allegedly crashed into the Pentagon. He says, “At the Pentagon, the pilot of the Boeing 757 did quite a feat of flying. I have 6,000 hours of flight time in Boeing 757’s and 767’s and I could not have flown it the way the flight path was described.”

Commander Kolstad adds, “I was also a Navy fighter pilot and Air Combat Instructor and have experience flying low altitude, high speed aircraft. I could not have done what these beginners did. Something stinks to high heaven!”

He points to the physical evidence at the Pentagon impact site and asks in exasperation, “Where is the damage to the wall of the Pentagon from the wings? Where are the big pieces that always break away in an accident? Where is all the luggage? Where are the miles and miles of wire, cable, and lines that are part and parcel of any large aircraft? Where are the steel engine parts? Where is the steel landing gear? Where is the tail section that would have broken into large pieces?”

But no major element of the official account of 9/11 is spared from Commander Kolstad’s criticism. Regarding the alleged impact site of United Airlines Flight 93 near Shanksville, PA, he asks, “Where is any of the wreckage? Of all the pictures I have seen, there is only a hole! Where is any piece of a crashed airplane? Why was the area cordoned off, and no inspection allowed by the normal accident personnel? Where is any evidence at all?”

Commander Kolstad also questions many aspects of the attack on the World Trade Center. “How could a steel and concrete building collapse after being hit by a Boeing 767? Didn’t the engineers design it to withstand a direct hit from a Boeing 707, approximately the same size and weight of the 767? The evidence just doesn’t add up.”

“Why did the second building collapse before the first one, which had been burning for 20 minutes longer after a direct hit, especially when the second one hit was just a glancing blow? If the fire was so hot, then why were people looking out the windows and in the destroyed areas? Why have so many members of the New York Fire Department reported seeing or hearing many ‘explosions’ before the buildings collapsed?”

Commander Kolstad summarized his frustration with the investigation and disbelief of the official account of 9/11, “If one were to act as an accident investigator, one would look at the evidence, and then construct a plausible scenario as to what led to the accident. In this case, we were told the story and then the evidence was built to support the story. What happened to any intelligent investigation? Every question leads to another question that has not been answered by anyone in authority. This is just the beginning as to why I don’t believe the official ‘story’ and why I want the truth to be told.”

Commander Kolstad is just one of the many military and commercial pilots who have publicly expressed serious concerns about the official account of 9/11. Statements from more than 30 other pilots are available at http://PatriotsQuestion911.com .

Greenspan attacks Bush on economy

0

Alan Greenspan on 6 September 2007 The former chairman of the US Federal Reserve Alan Greenspan has said President George W Bush pays too little attention to financial discipline.

In a book to be published next week, Mr Greenspan says Mr Bush ignored his advice to veto “out-of-control” bills that sent the US deeper into deficit.

And Mr Bush’s Republicans deserved to lose control of Congress in last year’s elections, he charges.

Mr Greenspan, 81, stepped down last year after nearly 19 years in the post.

In The Age of Turbulence: Adventures in a New World, Mr Greenspan – who has described himself as a “lifelong libertarian Republican” – spares no criticism of the Republican party.

He writes that he advised the White House to veto some bills to curb “out-of-control” spending at the time Republicans controlled Congress.

President Bush’s failure to do so “was a major mistake”, he said.

“Little value was placed on rigorous economic policy debate or the weighing of long-term consequences,” he says of the Bush administration.

And he charges that Republicans in Congress “swapped principle for power” and “ended up with neither”.

“They deserved to lose.”

Mr Greenspan retired in early 2006 after serving under six US presidents – either as Federal Reserve chairman or adviser.

He now runs a private consulting company – and is an honorary adviser to the UK government.

http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/world/americas/6996713.stm

PUT BUSH ON TRIAL

0

By Jon Leyne

Ayatollah KhameneiThe supreme leader of Iran has launched a scathing attack on United States President George W Bush.

Speaking at Friday prayers, Ayatollah Ali Khamenei said he was sure President Bush would be tried in an international court for what had happened in Iraq.

It was a particularly tough message, accusing the US of invading Iraq partly to undermine Iran’s Islamic system.

It follows Mr Bush’s speech to the US on Thursday in which he criticised Iran’s ambitions in the Middle East.

Ayatollah Khamenei said the US had been defeated in its plan for the Middle East, and he went on to talk of the complete defeat of the United States in its plan to weaken Iran.

He said he was convinced President Bush would be tried in an international court for what he had done in Iraq – and even likened him to Hitler and Saddam Hussein.

“Americans will have to answer for why they don’t end occupation of Iraq and why waves of terrorism and insurgency have overwhelmed the country,” he said.

These strong comments suggest that the Supreme Leader is giving his full backing to President Ahmadinejad in the confrontation with the West over Iran’s nuclear programme.

President Ahmadinejad has said several times that he believes the dispute over the nuclear plan is now over; this is a very similar message from Iran’s Supreme Leader.

9/11 Truth Festival presents the case for an “unimpeachable” investigation into 9/11

By Camille S.
Indybay

To mark the 6th anniversary of the terrorist attack on September 11, 2001, the Northern California 9/11 Truth Alliance held a two day festival on September 10 and 11th at the Grand Lake Theater in Oakland, CA with films, talks and a presentation by architect Richard Gage, AIA, founder of Architects and Engineers for 9/11 Truth, all presenting a critical examination of the events of 9/11.

grandmarquee.jpg
grandmarquee.jpg

The two day event, hosted by “Guns & Butter’s” Bonnie Faulkner, was well attended with hundreds of people coming in and out during the day and evening to watch a series of films that presented a different perspective to the official narrative of what happened on September 11, as well as to hear discussions by Bay Area 9/11 Truth activists who spoke on various topics. The films and speakers were then followed by a presentation by keynote speaker, architect Richard Gage who discussed evidence that the buildings were brought down by controlled demolition to a sold out crowd at the 500-plus seat main theater.

The event opened with a commemorative to the victims of 9/11 called “Remembrance” by Janette MacKinley, a 9/11 survivor, mother and artist whose condo was directly across from the twin towers when they were hit. MacKinley related her experience of the events of that day and emphasized the need to heal from the psychological trauma of America’s own “Shock and Awe” event. MacKinley, with her friend and art collaborator Nicholas Sikelianos, brought on stage a five-foot bamboo representation of the twin towers in which Janette did a live presentation of the Japanese flower-arranging art of Ikebana, weaving green and red bamboo shafts connecting the two towers together.

Films shown at the festival were “Hijacking Catastrophe: 9/11, Fear & the Selling of American Empire” which examines how a radical fringe in the government has used the trauma in the terrorist attacks of 9/11 to advance a pre-existing agenda; “9/11 Press for Truth” which documents the “Jersey Girls” call for a 9/11 investigation and their betrayal by the 9/11 Commission; “We Were Also Killed on 9/11: First Responders” featuring firemen and other 9/11 first responders and the serious health problems they are experience due to their exposure to the dust on the pile; “‘Hasta La Victoria Siempre!’ with William Pepper,” which presents an international human rights lawyers pursuit for justice; and “9/11 Mysteries Part 1: Demolitions” by Sophia Shafquat and Brad Waddell, which examines the forensic evidence that demolition brought down the buildings.

Three new films were also introduced at the festival including “Let’s Get Empirical” by Ken Jenkins which features David Ray Griffin discussing his latest book “Debunking 9/11 Debunking”; “Zeitgeist,” a critical look at propaganda techniques used throughout the ages; and a new dramatic feature film called “The Reflecting Pool” which tells the story of a 9/11 family member and a journalist pursuing the truth as to what happened on 9/11. This film was followed by discussion with award-winning filmmaker Jarek Kupsc, producer Jodie Baltazar, and critically acclaimed actor Joseph Culp.

In between films were analysis and discussion by authorities in the 9/11 Truth Movement including Mickey S. Huff, a professor of history and critical thinking at Berkeley City College, and founder of the Media Education Foundation who discussed “Hijacking Catastrophe.” Mickey spoke on how populations are swayed through propaganda and fear. He also examined the issue as to why many progressive journalists and editors were reluctant to examine 9/11.

Other speakers included Ken Jenkins who discussed his latest film “Let’s Get Empirical,” Dr. Paul Rea on “9/11 Press for Truth,” and Jim Hoffman who giving a detailed analysis of evidence for demolition in “9/11 Mysteries.”

The highlight of the two day event was the presentation “9/11: Blueprint for Truth – 130 Architects and Engineers Examine the Evidence,” by architect Richard Gage, AIA, a 20-year architect who worked on numerous steel-framed buildings, who makes a strong case that the buildings were brought down with controlled demolition.

Grand Lake Theater owner and long-time community activist Allen Michaan, introduced Gage and spoke about why 9/11 was the key issue to stop the war. “911 truth is the achilles heel of the administration and when the truth eventually emerges into the mainstream news as is slowly happening these criminals will quickly be removed from office and face prosecution,” said Michaan.

Gage starts his presentation by introducing people to his background as an architect and proceeding to make his case for a need for a new investigation based on the irregular collapses of three World Trade Center buildings, including Building 7, a 47-story high-rise, in a 1:45 min Powerpoint presentation. Some of the evidence Gage presented went into the evidence that a explosive incendiary device called Thermate was used to cut the steel beams of the World Trade Towers, explaining that it gives off key by-products like sulfur and magnesium and would account for the molten iron which burned hot under the twin towers and WTC Building 7 weeks after the attacks.

Gage explained how physics would not account for the virtually free-fall collapse of all three buildings as it violates Newton’s Law of Conservation of Momentum. The prevailing theory by by NIST and FEMA is that the buildings feel down because of weakened trusses due to fire causing “progressive pancake collapse,” However, according to Gage, this doesn’t explain how the buildings could fall at free-fall speed by taking into account this law. Gage: “through the path of greatest resistance — at free-fall speed – the columns gave no resistance.”

Gage also discussed eyewitness testimony of first responders seeing flashes and hearing explosions and presented other incongruities in the official story. “What we need is a new unimpeachable investigation, with supeaona powers, as to what really happened that day,” said Gage. “The 9/11 Commission could not be considered an unimpeachable investigation.” He encouraged the public get over the fear, talk with friends and colleagues and call their representatives to demand a new investigation.

His conclusion was followed by a rousing standing ovation from the audience and a lengthy Q & A session.

Carol Brouillet, founder of the Northern California 9/11 Truth Alliance, and who was tabling at the event, had this to say about the No. California 9/11 Truth Alliance and Richard’s presentation: “People show up, out of the blue, at our meetings and offer us their amazing gifts – journalists, film makers, researchers, professors, artists, musicians, architects. Richard was one of them whose life was transformed by a talk by David Ray Griffin and was inspired to help with his unique architectural background to lend more credibility to the movement. His perseverance, energy, and sheer hard work has helped all of us and casted a larger light on some of the most critical suppressed facts surrounding 9/11. It was a delight to see a full house, knowing how much work Richard, and the many, many others put into promoting, and organizing the Film Festival. it was a tremendous success on multiple levels.”

Judy Shelton, an activist and volunteer for the event commented that “the energy was wonderful and there’s a sense of something beginning to break around 9/11.”

“People who are on the fence about this issue are going to be convinced. It just solidified the facts. The evidence is irrefutable,” said Diane Ferchel, a native Californian who is now living in Ecuador.

To hear and read more about Richard Gage and Architects and Engineers for 9/11 Truth visit ae911truth.org. Northern California 9/11 Truth Alliance has meetings bi-monthly, alternating between San Francisco and Oakland. For more details, visit sf911truth.org.

Pentagon Censors 9/11 Suspect’s Tape

0

By PAULINE JELINEKAssociated Press Writer

WASHINGTON (AP) – The Pentagon has censored an audio tape of the suspected mastermind of the Sept. 11 attacks speaking at a military hearing – cutting out Khalid Sheikh Mohammed’s explanation for why Islamic militants waged jihad against the United States.

After months of debate by several federal agencies, the Defense Department released the tape Thursday. Cut from it were 10 minutes of the more than 40-minute closed court session at Guantanamo Bay to determine whether Mohammed should be declared an “enemy combatant.”

Since the March hearing, he has been assigned “enemy combatant” status, a classification the Bush administration says allows it to hold him indefinitely and prosecute him at a military tribunal.

Officials from the CIA, FBI, State Department and others listened to the tape and feared it could be copied and edited by other militants for use as propaganda, officials said.

“It was determined that the release of this portion of the spoken words of Khalid Sheikh Mohammed would enable enemies of the United States to use it in a way to recruit or encourage future terrorists or terrorist activities,” said Pentagon spokesman Bryan Whitman. “This could ultimately endanger the lives and physical safety of American citizens and those of our allies.”

Calling Mohammed a “notorious figure,” Whitman added, “I think we all recognize that there is an obvious difference between the potential impacts of the written versus the spoken word.”

Some of the statements deleted from the tape have already been widely reported because the Pentagon released a 26-page written transcript of the hearing several days after it was held. Others statements were cut both from the audio and the transcript because of security and privacy concerns, officials said.

Mohammed was the first of 14 so-called “high-value” detainees who were held in secret CIA prisons before being transferred to the Pentagon facility at the U.S. naval base in Guantanamo Bay, Cuba.

At the hearing, he portrayed himself as al-Qaida’s most active operational planner, confessing to the beheading of American journalist Daniel Pearl and to playing a central role in 30 other attacks and plots in the U.S. and worldwide that killed thousands.

The attacks range from the suicide hijackings of Sept. 11, 2001 – which killed nearly 3,000 – to a 2002 shooting on an island off Kuwait that killed a U.S. Marine.

Among statements that appeared in the transcript, but were cut from the audio, was Mohammed saying he felt some sorrow over Sept. 11.

“I’m not happy that 3,000 been killed in America,” the transcript quoted him as saying in broken English. “I feel sorry even. I don’t like to kill children and the kids.”

But he says there are exceptions in war.

“The language of the war is victims,” Mohammed said in a part of the transcript that was cut from the audio. He compared al-Qaida leader Osama bin Laden to George Washington, saying Americans view Washington as a hero for his role in the Revolutionary War and many Muslims view bin Laden in the same light.

“He is doing same thing. He is just fighting. He needs his independence,” Mohammed said.

During much of Mohammed’s hearing, he spoke in English. The audio released by the Pentagon includes Mohammed responding to questions.

Audio tapes of other high-value detainees have been released by the Pentagon. Whitman said he did not know if any of those have been used as propaganda by extremist groups on the Internet.

The audio tape also includes a number of other redactions that reflect portions of the written transcript that were deleted, because of security and privacy concerns, when it was first released.

One of the sections initially held back by the Pentagon, but later released, was Mohammed’s confession to the beheading of Pearl. “I decapitated with my blessed right hand the head of the American Jew, Daniel Pearl, in the city of Karachi, Pakistan,” Mohammed said in a written statement read by his U.S.-appointed representative for the hearing.

Officials at first held back the section to allow time for his family to be notified, Whitman said at the time.

AP Washington reporter Lolita Baldor contributed to this report.

Court Case of Suspected Terrorist‏

0

WILMA RILEY

A JURY in the trial of a student accused of terror offences must decide if he is “a wannabe suicide bomber” or a “foolishly stupid young man” simply researching Islamic terrorism.

Prosecutor Brian McConnachie, QC, yesterday told the members of the jury they should convict Mohammed Atif Siddique, 21, of three out of four terror charges he faces.

Siddique’s counsel said the suggestion was “unpalatable and ridiculous” and argued it was legitimate for the accused to access information to understand Muslim terrorists’ behaviour.

Siddique, of Alva, Clackmannanshire, denies the terror charges and a breach of the peace.

Summing up the case for the prosecution, Mr McConnachie said: “This is not someone who is systematically carrying out research into Islamic politics and the difficulties facing Muslims in the Middle East, this is a wannabe suicide bomber.”

And, referring to documents and videos allegedly found on Siddique’s computer and a CD discovered under a carpet in his family home, Mr McConnachie added: “The whole ethos is to get the message across as to what people should be doing.

“It is saying if you are a Muslim you should be going to [wage] Jihad [holy war].”

Mr McConnachie said it was very significant that Siddique allegedly took the name Yah Yah Ayash as one of his aliases during online chats.

Ayash was Hamas’s chief bomb-maker, responsible for making the explosives used by suicide bombers in Palestinian and a man revered by both Hamas and al-Qaeda.

Donald Findlay, QC, defending, began his speech by quoting from the Koran and said the jury should not be “bound into a conviction” through a “fear or alarm” of Islam.

And Mr Findlay claimed that the suggestion that Siddique wanted to be a suicide bomber “has no crumb of evidence”.

The QC criticised a website run by terrorist expert Evan Kohlmann, who earlier gave evidence against Siddique, – claiming its content, such as the beheading of a US hostage, was the “most horrific ever shown to a jury”.

He added: “It is not challenged that he [Siddique] downloaded material. If it was training, then so is Evan Kohlmann’s [material].

“Instead of being brought from the US to be put in the witness box, he should have been put in the dock.

“Is it not legitimate that Mr Siddique can find out why young Muslim men like him act the way they do? It would not matter if he had 100 times the amount of material he had. You, the jury, have to be satisfied that it was for a terrorist attack.”

Mr Findlay concluded: “He [Siddique] is a young man who has said things that are distasteful, which you may not agree with. However, that does not make him a suicide bomber.

“You cannot put someone on trial for what he says or thinks.

In this country, we have the right, protected by law, and the freedom to do, say and think what you like.

“We also have the freedom to be wise or foolish.”

The jury is expected to retire to consider its verdict today.

Dems Reject Bush Iraq Plan

0

Senate Democrats Lack the 60 Votes Necessary to Force Bush to Withdraw Troops

pelosi reid

Speaker of the House Nancy Pelosi (D-CA) and Senate Majority Leader Harry Reid (D-NV) speak to reporters following a meeting with U.S. President George W. Bush at the White House in Washington September 11, 2007. (Kevin Lamarque/Reuters)

By Z. BYRON WOLF

Calling President Bush’s anticipated announcement Thursday to end the surge the “illusion of change,” Senate Democrats called again on Republicans to break with the White House on Iraq policy next week.

Senate Majority Leader Harry Reid, D-Nev., said, “The president is dug in and unwilling to realize that his strategy places all the burden on our military, and its not working.

“His plan is neither a drawdown or a change in mission,” Reid said at a press conference on Capitol Hill. “His plan is more of the same. It keeps at least 130,000 troops, American troops, in the midst of a civil war. That is unacceptable to me. It’s unacceptable to the American people. I hope the Senate Republicans realize it’s time to come over and work with us.”

Read more on the Bush plan here

Reid probably has his sights on Republicans like Virginia Sen. John Warner, who is retiring after 2008 and, while he has criticized the president’s policy, has never supported a Democratic withdrawal plan.

Minnesota Republican Sen. Norm Coleman has also never voted with Democrats, but at yesterday’s Foreign Relations Committee hearing, he told Gen. David Petraeus, the commander of forces in Iraq, that Americans want to see “a light at the end of the tunnel.”

Coleman faces a tough re-election battle in 2008. Democrats will find themselves wooing the centrist votes of Republicans and have every intention of using the war as a campaign issue before the ’08 general election.

It is a tough political game, a less binding Democratic plan that could gain some support from Republicans but at the same time cost the votes of liberal lawmakers.

Reid would not describe specifics of what Iraq policy amendments Democrats would offer to the defense policy bill that will be on the Senate floor next week, but he said Democrats would reach out to middle-of-the-road Republicans uncomfortable with the president’s leadership on Iraq.

This would be a new political strategy for Democrats, who in past months have tried to force waffling Republicans to support mandating withdrawal of combat troops or nothing at all.

It remains to be seen how Democrats in the House of Representative would react to a bill that had sufficient flexibility to win the support of Republicans. Liberal Democrats in the House have said they would not support any tactic that does not fully defund the war.

“Those of us in Congress have the power, and the responsibility, to make sure that the only funding that we approve is used to fully fund the safe and orderly withdrawal of our troops and military contractors and bring them home to their families. The American public voted Democrats into office last November on this very issue, and it is far past time that we live up to the trust that they have shown in us,” said Congressional Progressive Caucus co-chair Lynn Woolsey. “If we fail to stand up to the president, we will fail our country politically, morally and economically.”

And liberal support may be difficult to keep in the Senate as well. Sen. Russ Feingold of Wisconsin is planning to reintroduce his own bill to cut off funding for the war and bring all troops out of Iraq.

Sen. Carl Levin, who appeared at the press conference with Reid, said the amendments would take U.S. troops out of a combat role.

“If he’s going to change course, he has got to go below presurge levels, go to limited missions,” Levin said. “The amendments that will be offered will have that limited mission and the reduction of troops below presurge levels.”

While Petraeus told Congress and Americans in a media blitz this week that the surge has lowered violence in Iraq, Reid said, “The surge has had ample time to run its course. Every objective assessment has shown the surge has failed.”

Levin pointed to Petraeus’ testimony as supporting Democrats’ plans to withdraw combat troops.

Levin pointed out that in his testimony, “Petraeus was helpful in a number of ways. He agreed readily that there is no military solution. … He agreed that the purpose of the surge, to give the Iraqi politicians room, had not been achieved.” Levin also argued that there are Iraqi units capable of taking a leading role but that have not been given that responsibility because of the surge.

Levin also pointed to a statement by Petraeus at the end of the hearing in which he “committed to continue reductions below the presurge levels.”

Levin said this is an important difference between what Bush is expected to call for Thursday and what Petraeus recommended — the commitment to continue lowering the number of combat troops. He said that commitment is not in the president’s plan.

“A commitment now is what we are prepared to put into law,” Levin said.

Syria says Israel aims to torpedo peace

0

By Evelyn Leopold

UNITED NATIONS (Reuters) – Syria’s U.N. ambassador said on Wednesday that Israel’s motive in flying warplanes into its airspace was to torpedo the peace process, but he did not make a specific request for the U.N. Security Council to meet.

Israel has refused to comment on the air strikes on September 6 but U.S. officials have confirmed them. Analysts say likely targets were weapons caches Iran may have sent through Syria for Lebanon’s Hezbollah guerrillas.

Syrian Ambassador Bashar Ja’afari warned the Security Council and U.N. Secretary-General Ban Ki-moon, in letters on Tuesday, of consequences for the region and denounced Israel for a “flagrant defiance of international law.

“We think the Israeli purpose behind such an aggressive act is to torpedo the peace process, to torpedo the idea of holding an international conference,” Ja’afari told reporters.

“So the issue in itself might not be a pure military one but having a very important diplomatic and political background,” he added.

Asked why he did not call for a Security Council meeting, Ja’afari said it was not his job to do so. Instead he said he wanted to inform the 15-member body about Israel’s action so they could “assume their responsibility in the maintenance of peace and security.”

“If they don’t act appropriately, then it would be a jungle law and there would be no need for the Security Council. ”

But the usual procedure for a council reaction is a request from the secretary-general or any U.N. member nation, and none has yet emerged. “If Syria had wanted a reaction of the council, they would have said so in a letter,” a council member said. 

One possible reason for the lack of council action is that no one is certain what happened. Syria, in its letter, said Israeli aircraft “dropped some munitions but without managing to cause any human casualties or material damage.” Israel has not said if it hit anything.

Asked about Hezbollah’s weapons, Ja’afari said, “This is blah, blah. This is nonsense, this is an unfounded statement. It is not up to the Israelis or anyone else to assess what we have in Syria.”

“There was no target,” he added. “They dropped their munitions. They were running away after they were confronted by our air defence.”

Ja’afari said the purpose of his letter also was to warn the Israeli government “about the consequences of such an irresponsible act perpetrated against our sovereignty and to let the Security Council know that.”

Asked if he would take the issue to the General Assembly, the ambassador said it was too early to consider that.

Israeli planes last struck Syria in 2003 across a border that remains tense but largely quiet some 34 years after the last war between the two neighbours ended in an edgy cease-fire.

The Coincidence Theorist’s Guide to 9/11

0

There are no coincidences

The Coincidence Theorist’s Guide to 9/11

-That governments have permitted terrorist acts against their own people, and have even themselves been perpetrators in order to find strategic advantage is quite likely true, but this is the United States we’re talking about. -That intelligence agencies, financiers, terrorists and narco-criminals have a long history together is well established, but the Nugan Hand Bank, BCCI, Banco Ambrosiano, the P2 Lodge, the CIA/Mafia anti-Castro/Kennedy alliance, Iran/Contra and the rest were a long time ago, so there’s no need to rehash all that. -That was then, this is now! -That Jonathan Bush’s Riggs Bank has been found guilty of laundering terrorist funds and fined a US-record $25 million must embarrass his nephew George, but it’s still no justification for leaping to paranoid conclusions.

-That George Bush’s brother Marvin sat on the board of the Kuwaiti-owned company which provided electronic security to the World Trade Centre, Dulles Airport and United Airlines means nothing more than you must admit those Bush boys have done alright for themselves.

-That George Bush found success as a businessman only after the investment of Osama’s brother Salem and reputed al Qaeda financier Khalid bin Mahfouz is just one of those things – one of those crazy things.

-That Osama bin Laden is known to have been an asset of US foreign policy in no way implies he still is.

-That al Qaeda was active in the Balkan conflict, fighting on the same side as the US as recently as 1999, while the US protected its cells, is merely one of history’s little aberrations.

-The claims of Michael Springman, State Department veteran of the Jeddah visa bureau, that the CIA ran the office and issued visas to al Qaeda members so they could receive training in the United States, sound like the sour grapes of someone who was fired for making such wild accusations.

-That one of George Bush’s first acts as President, in January 2001, was to end the two-year deployment of attack submarines which were positioned within striking distance of al Qaeda’s Afghanistan camps, even as the group’s guilt for the Cole bombing was established, proves that a transition from one administration to the next is never an easy task.

-That so many influential figures in and close to the Bush White House had expressed, just a year before the attacks, the need for a “new Pearl Harbor” before their militarist ambitions could be fulfilled, demonstrates nothing more than the accidental virtue of being in the right place at the right time.

-That the company PTECH, founded by a Saudi financier placed on America’s Terrorist Watch List in October 2001, had access to the FAA’s entire computer system for two years before the 9/11 attack, means he must not have been such a threat after all.

-That whistleblower Indira Singh was told to keep her mouth shut and forget what she learned when she took her concerns about PTECH to her employers and federal authorities, suggests she lacked the big picture. And that the Chief Auditor for JP Morgan Chase told Singh repeatedly, as she answered questions about who supplied her with what information, that “that person should be killed,” suggests he should take an anger management seminar.

-That on May 8, 2001, Dick Cheney took upon himself the job of co-ordinating a response to domestic terror attacks even as he was crafting the administration’s energy policy which bore implications for America’s military, circumventing the established infrastructure and ignoring the recommendations of the Hart-Rudman report, merely shows the VP to be someone who finds it hard to delegate.

-That the standing order which covered the shooting down of hijacked aircraft was altered on June 1, 2001, taking discretion away from field commanders and placing it solely in the hands of the Secretary of Defense, is simply poor planning and unfortunate timing. Fortunately the error has been corrected, as the order was rescinded shortly after 9/11.

-That in the weeks before 9/11, FBI agent Colleen Rowley found her investigation of Zacarias Moussaoui so perversely thwarted that her colleagues joked that bin Laden had a mole at the FBI, proves the stress-relieving virtue of humour in the workplace.

-That Dave Frasca of the FBI’s Radical Fundamentalist Unit received a promotion after quashing multiple, urgent requests for investigations into al Qaeda assets training at flight schools in the summer of 2001 does appear on the surface odd, but undoubtedly there’s a good reason for it, quite possibly classified.

-That FBI informant Randy Glass, working an undercover sting, was told by Pakistani intelligence operatives that the World Trade Center towers were coming down, and that his repeated warnings which continued until weeks before the attacks, including the mention of planes used as weapons, were ignored by federal authorities, is simply one of the many “What Ifs” of that tragic day.

-That over the summer of 2001 Washington received many urgent, senior-level warnings from foreign intelligence agencies and governments – including those of Germany, France, Great Britain, Russia, Egypt, Israel, Morocco, Afghanistan and others – of impending terror attacks using hijacked aircraft and did nothing, demonstrates the pressing need for a new Intelligence Czar.

-That John Ashcroft stopped flying commercial aircraft in July 2001 on account of security considerations had nothing to do with warnings regarding September 11, because he said so to the 9/11 Commission.

-That former lead counsel for the House David Schippers says he’d taken to John Ashcroft’s office specific warnings he’d learned from FBI agents in New York of an impending attack — even naming the proposed dates, names of the hijackers and the targets — and that the investigations had been stymied and the agents threatened, proves nothing but David Schipper’s pathetic need for attention.

-That Garth Nicolson received two warnings from contacts in the intelligence community and one from a North African head of state, which included specific site, date and source of the attacks, and passed the information to the Defense Department and the National Security Council to evidently no effect, clearly amounts to nothing, since virtually nobody has ever heard of him.

-That in the months prior to September 11, self-described US intelligence operative Delmart Vreeland sought, from a Toronto jail cell, to get US and Canadian authorities to heed his warning of his accidental discovery of impending catastrophic attacks is worthless, since Vreeland was a dubious character, notwithstanding the fact that many of his claims have since been proven true.

-That FBI Special Investigator Robert Wright claims that agents assigned to intelligence operations actually protect terrorists from investigation and prosecution, that the FBI shut down his probe into terrorist training camps, and that he was removed from a money-laundering case that had a direct link to terrorism, sounds like yet more sour grapes from a disgruntled employee.

-That George Bush had plans to invade Afghanistan on his desk before 9/11 demonstrates only the value of being prepared. The suggestion that securing a pipeline across Afghanistan figured into the White House’s calculations is as ludicrous as the assertion that oil played a part in determining war in Iraq.

-That Afghanistan is once again the world’s principal heroin producer is an unfortunate reality, but to claim the CIA is still actively involved in the narcotics trade is to presume bad faith on the part of the agency. Mahmood Ahmed, chief of Pakistan’s ISI, must not have authorized an al Qaeda payment of $100,000 to Mohammed Atta days before the attacks, and was not meeting with senior Washington officials over the week of 9/11, because I didn’t read anything about him in the official report.

-That Porter Goss met with Ahmed the morning of September 11 in his capacity as Chairman of the House Permanent Select Committee on Intelligence has no bearing whatsoever upon his recent selection by the White House to head the Central Intelligence Agency.

-That Goss’s congressional seat encompasses the 9/11 hijackers’ Florida base of operation, including their flight schools, is precisely the kind of meaningless factoid a conspiracy theorist would bring up.

-It’s true that George HW Bush and Dick Cheney spent the evening of September 10 alone in the Oval Office, but what’s wrong with old colleagues catching up? And it’s true that George HW Bush and Shafig bin Laden, Osama’s brother, spent the morning of September 11 together at a board meeting of the Carlyle Group, but the bin Ladens are a big family.

-That FEMA arrived in New York on Sept 10 to prepare for a scheduled biowarfare drill, and had a triage centre ready to go that was larger and better equipped than the one that was lost in the collapse of WTC 7, was a lucky twist of fate.

Newsweek’s report that senior Pentagon officials cancelled flights on Sept 10 for the following day on account of security concerns is only newsworthy because of what happened the following morning.

-That George Bush’s telephone logs for September 11 do not exist should surprise no one, given the confusion of the day.

-That Mohamed Atta attended the International Officer’s School at Maxwell Air Force Base, that Abdulaziz Alomari attended Brooks Air Force Base Aerospace Medical School, that Saeed Alghamdi attended the Defense Language Institute in Monterey merely shows it is a small world, after all.

-That Lt Col Steve Butler, Vice Chancellor for student affairs of the Defense Language Institute during Alghamdi’s terms, was disciplined, removed from his post and threatened with court martial when he wrote “Bush knew of the impending attacks on America. He did nothing to warn the American people because he needed this war on terrorism. What is…contemptible is the President of the United States not telling the American people what he knows for political gain,” is the least that should have happened for such disrespect shown his Commander in Chief.

-That Mohammed Atta dressed like a Mafioso, had a stripper girlfriend, smuggled drugs, was already a licensed pilot when he entered the US, enjoyed pork chops, drank to excess and did cocaine, was closer to Europeans than Arabs in Florida, and included the names of defence contractors on his email list, proves how dangerous the radical fundamentalist Muslim can be.

-That 43 lbs of heroin was found on board the Lear Jet owned by Wally Hilliard, the owner of Atta’s flight school, just three weeks after Atta enrolled — the biggest seizure ever in Central Florida — was just bad luck.

-That Hilliard was not charged shows how specious the claims for conspiracy truly are. That Hilliard’s plane had made 30-round trips to Venezuela with the same passengers who always paid cash, that the plane had been supplied by a pair of drug smugglers who had also outfitted CIA drug runner Barry Seal, and that 9/11 commissioner Richard ben-Veniste had been Seal’s attorney before Seal’s murder, shows nothing but the lengths to which conspiracists will go to draw sinister conclusions.

Reports of insider trading on 9/11 are false, because the SEC investigated and found only respectable investors who will remain nameless involved, and no terrorists, so the windfall profit-taking was merely, as ever, coincidental.

-That heightened security for the World Trade Centre was lifted immediately prior to the attacks illustrates that it always happens when you least expect it.

-That Hani Hanjour, the pilot of Flight 77, was so incompetent he could not fly a Cessna in August, but in September managed to fly a 767 at excessive speed into a spiraling, 270-degree descent and a level impact of the first floor of the Pentagon, on the only side that was virtually empty and had been hardened to withstand a terrorist attack, merely demonstrates that people can do almost anything once they set their minds to it.

-That none of the flight data recorders were said to be recoverable even though they were located in the tail sections, and that until 9/11, no solid-state recorder in a catastrophic crash had been unrecoverable, shows how there’s a first time for everything.

-That Mohammed Atta left a uniform, a will, a Koran, his driver’s license and a “how to fly planes” video in his rental car at the airport means he had other things on his mind.

-The mention of Israelis with links to military-intelligence having been arrested on Sept 11 videotaping and celebrating the attacks, of an Israeli espionage ring surveiling DEA and defense installations and trailing the hijackers, and of a warning of impending attacks delivered to the Israeli company Odigo two hours before the first plane hit, does not deserve a response.

-That the stories also appeared in publications such as Ha’aretz and Forward is a sad display of self-hatred among certain elements of the Israeli media.

-That multiple military wargames and simulations were underway the morning of 9/11 — one simulating the crash of a plane into a building; another, a live-fly simulation of multiple hijackings — and took many interceptors away from the eastern seaboard and confused field commanders as to which was a real hijacked aircraft and which was a hoax, was a bizarre coincidence, but no less a coincidence.

-That the National Military Command Center ops director asked a rookie substitute to stand his watch at 8:30 am on Sept. 11 is nothing more than bad timing.

-That a recording made Sept 11 of air traffic controllers’ describing what they had witnessed, was destroyed by an FAA official who crushed it in his hand, cut the tape into little pieces and dropped them in different trash cans around the building, is something no doubt that overzealous official wishes he could undo.

-That the FBI knew precisely which Florida flight schools to descend upon hours after the attacks should make every American feel safer knowing their federal agents are on the ball.

-That a former flight school executive believes the hijackers were “double agents,” and says about Atta and associates, “Early on I gleaned that these guys had government protection. They were let into this country for a specific purpose,” and was visited by the FBI just four hours after the attacks to intimidate him into silence, proves he’s an unreliable witness, for the simple reason there is no conspiracy.

-That Jeb Bush was on board an aircraft that removed flight school records to Washington in the middle of the night on Sept 12th demonstrates how seriously the governor takes the issue of national security. To insinuate evil motive from the mercy flights of bin Laden family members and Saudi royals after 9/11 shows the sickness of the conspiratorial mindset. Le Figaro’s report in October 2001, known to have originated with French intelligence, that the CIA met Osama bin Laden in a Dubai hospital in July 2001, proves again the perfidy of the French.

-That the tape in which bin Laden claims responsibility for the attacks was released by the State Department after having been found providentially by US forces in Afghanistan, and depicts a fattened Osama with a broader face and a flatter nose, proves Osama, and Osama alone, masterminded 9/11.

-That at the battle of Tora Bora, where bin Laden was surrounded on three sides, Special Forces received no order to advance and capture him and were forced to stand and watch as two Russian-made helicopters flew into the area where bin Laden was believed hiding, loaded up passengers and returned to Pakistan, demonstrates how confusing the modern battlefield can be.

-That upon returning to Fort Bragg from Tora Bora, the same Special Operations troops who had been stood down from capturing bin Laden, suffered a unusual spree of murder/suicides, is nothing more than a series of senseless tragedies.

-Reports that bin Laden is currently receiving periodic dialysis treatment in a Pakistani medical hospital are simply too incredible to be true.

-That the White House went on Cipro September 11 shows the foresightedness of America’s emergency response.

-That the anthrax was mailed to perceived liberal media and the Democratic leadership demonstrates only the perversity of the terrorist psyche.

-That the anthrax attacks appeared to silence opponents of the Patriot Act shows only that appearances can be deceiving.

-That the Ames-strain anthrax was found to have originated at Fort Detrick, and was beyond the capability of all but a few labs to refine, underscores the importance of allowing the investigation to continue without the distraction of absurd conspiracy theories.

-That Republican guru Grover Norquist has been found to have aided financiers and supporters of Islamic terror to gain access to the Bush White House, and is a founder of the Islamic Institute, which the Treasury Department believes to be a source of funding for al Qaeda, suggests Norquist is at worst, naive, and at best, needs a wider circle of friends.

-That the Department of Justice consistently chooses to see accused 9/11 plotters go free rather than permit the courtroom testimony of al Qaeda leaders in American custody looks bad, but only because we don’t have all the facts.

-That the White House balked at any inquiry into the events of 9/11, then starved it of funds and stonewalled it, was unfortunate, but since the commission didn’t find for conspiracy it’s all a non issue anyway.

-That the 9/11 commission’s executive director and “gatekeeper,” Philip Zelikow, was so closely involved in the events under investigation that he testified before the the commission as part of the inquiry, shows only an apparent conflict of interest.

-That commission chair Thomas Kean is, like George Bush, a Texas oil executive who had business dealings with reputed al Qaeda financier Khalid bin Mafouz, suggests Texas is smaller than they say it is.

-That co-chair Lee Hamilton has a history as a Bush family “fixer,” including clearing Bush Sr of the claims arising from the 1980 “October Surprise”, is of no concern, since only conspiracists believe there was such a thing as an October Surprise.

-That FBI whistleblower Sibel Edmonds accuses the agency of intentionally fudging specific pre-9/11 warnings and harboring a foreign espionage ring in its translation department, and claims she witnessed evidence of the semi-official infrastructure of money-laundering and narcotics trade behind the attacks, is of no account, since John Ashcroft has gagged her with the rare invocation of “State Secrets Privilege,” and retroactively classified her public testimony. For the sake of national security, let us speak no more of her.

-That, when commenting on Edmond’s case, Daniel Ellsberg remarked that Ashcroft could go to prison for his part in a cover-up, suggests Ellsberg is giving comfort to the terrorists, and could, if he doesn’t wise up, find himself declared an enemy combatant.

http://thepeacetree.blogspot.com/2007/09/conspiracy-theory.html

Watchdog asks: Why is Bush’s kid brother getting federal bucks?

0

By Nick Juliano

An independent watchdog agency has asked the Department of Education to investigate why President Bush’s younger brother, Neil, has received money earmarked for the president’s signature education initiative to sell a curriculum program that has not been subjected to the rigorous evaluation it deserves.

Neil Bush, 52, who has no background in education, founded Ignite! Learning in 1999 with donations from his parents and a slate of international business interests. The company produces “Curriculum on Wheels” devices — computer/projectors that are pre-loaded with software aimed at preparing students for standardized tests that are the central tenet of the president’s No Child Left Behind law.

The “COWs” are sold to school districts at a cost of $3,800 to $4,200, although they have not been subjected to peer-reviewed scientific studies, according to Citizens for Responsibility and Ethics in Washington. CREW says nearly $1 million has been spent on the systems in 16 school districts, mostly in Texas, where George W. Bush served as governor before his election in 2000, and Florida, where brother Jeb Bush is governor.

The watchdog group is requesting an investigation from the Education Department’s inspector general, alleging that the Ignite! systems do not meet the standards laid out by Congress dictating how NCLB funds can be spent.

“It is astonishing that taxpayer dollars are being spent on unproven educational products to the financial benefit of the president’s brother,” Melanie Sloan, CREW’s executive director, said in a news release. “The IG should investigate whether children’s educations are being sacrificed so that Neil Bush can rake in federal funds.”

Neil Bush first attracted public scrutiny for his role in the Savings and Loan scandals of the late 1980s when a Colorado S&L on whose board he served failed. The scandal cost taxpayers $1.6 billion.

Some school districts identified by CREW spent hundreds of thousands of dollars in federal money on the mobile projectors, which include curriculum for math, science or social studies. In addition to their baseline cost — $3,800 for a single-subject COW or $4,200 for one covering all three subjects — the units impose on schools a $1,000 annual licensing and upkeep fee, CREW says. Schools also have the option of purchasing lifetime contracts for $6,800, according to the New York Times.

Although there’s no direct evidence of presidential nepotism on behalf of his baby brother, Neil Bush did benefit from his mother’s largesse in the wake of Hurricane Katrina last year. Barbara Bush donated an undisclosed amount of money to a hurricane relief fund overseen by former Presidents George H. W. Bush and Bill Clinton, and earmarked part of those funds for purchases of Ignite! software.

In an interview earlier this year with the New York Times, Neil Bush denied using his brother’s position to push his product. He claimed he was inspired to start the company after struggling with dyslexia while he was in school.

Ignite’s Web site includes anecdotal testimonials from teachers who have used the program. But some teachers are less than impressed with the system, saying it supplants rote memorization for critical thinking skills.

“As a review, it uses catchy phrases and tunes,” Jeremy Siefker, a middle school science teacher who’s used the program, told the Times, “but as far as scientific investigation and inquiry, I don’t think it’s very good.”

Ironically, among the schools that have shunned the program is a Texas elementary school named for Neil Bush’s father.

“After reviewing the program, Bush is not interested,” Jill Arthur, principal of George H. W. Bush Elementary in Midland, TX, wrote in an e-mail to Ignite! obtained by CREW. “We feel our money is best spent elsewhere.”

US confirms Israeli air strike on Syria

0

By Tim Butcher in Tel Aviv

A US official has confirmed that Israeli warplanes carried out an air strike “deep inside” Syria, escalating tensions between the two countries.

  • Israel considers retaliation in Gaza

    The target of the strike last Thursday remained unclear but Israeli media reported that a shipment of Iranian arms crossing Syria for use by the Iranian-backed Hezbollah militia in Lebanon was attacked.

     
    Israeli army Merkeva tanks on the Golan Heights,  US confirms Israeli air strike on Syria
    Israeli army Merkeva tanks on the Golan Heights

    Syria first reported the incident on the day, saying its air defences had engaged five Israeli planes, but did not say what their target was. Israel remained uncharacteristically silent, pointedly refusing to deny that its warplanes were involved in an operation. The closest it came to acknowledging the affair happened was when it made an undertaking to Turkey to investigate how an Israeli long-range fuel tank was dropped on Turkish territory near the Syrian border.

    Another theory gaining ground yesterday was that Israel was deliberately attacking the Russian-made Pantsyr air defence system recently bought by Damascus. The sale includes provision for the Pantsyr system to be shipped on to Iran and it is possible the Israeli attack was co-ordinated with America to probe the effectiveness of the system. It is believed that Iran would use the Pantsyr system to defend its nuclear facilities.

    Syria has sought to keep the incident in the public arena, saying yesterday that it had complained formally to the United Nations, accusing Israel of unjustified aggression.

    Syria and Israel have fought major wars on three occasions, in 1948, 1967 and 1973, as well as numerous other skirmishes. The two nations remain formally at war although an uneasy calm has largely held for the past three decades. Meanwhile, Israel was contemplating a retaliatory strike on Gaza last night after a Palestinian qassam rocket injured 69 of its soldiers, five seriously, at the Zikim army base. Many of the Israelis were hit by shrapnel as they slept under canvas.

    While the rocket was fired by members of the Islamic Jihad party, Israel said it would hold Hamas accountable because the group is the main authority in the Gaza strip since it drove out its Fatah rivals in June.

    The Israeli prime minister, Ehud Olmert, convened an emergency meeting yesterday with military and security commanders to discuss a response to the attack.

  • Post codes help Big Brother keep an eye on us

    0

    By Roger Highfield and Nic Fleming

    Postcodes: not just for post anymore
    Post codes: not just for post anymore

    Jason and Samantha, the “burdened optimists” of Chatham ME5, are young, ambitious and reckless. They are in unskilled or semi-skilled jobs and need two salaries to have any chance of affording a mortgage.

    Meanwhile, Sebastian and Olivia, the “globally connected”, live in very expensive housing in Hampstead NW3, and are either wealthy foreigners or travel abroad a lot.

    These fictional characters from a commercial database show how traditional class distinctions and stereotypes are being swept away as big business and government now control out lives based on where we live.

    They are using post codes, cross-referenced with census data, marketing information, utility bills, and store cards to determine insurance premiums, where to locate shops, how to target a marketing campaign, and where we are placed in call centre queues.

    Prof Roger Burrows of the University of York analysed four post codes in detail, talking to residents, estate agents and others, and found existing predictions made by the databases were “surprisingly accurate”.

    Speaking at the British Association Festival of Science today, he said: “What is so amazing is the amount of work people do to give up data that marketing organisations have been trying to get out of them for years.

    “I am not sure that people are aware that data they give up ever day is leading to the construction of very nuanced ‘data doubles’ and there is a whole range of organisations using this data.

    “It has an impact on buildings insurance, contents insurance, increase in car insurance, the junk in letter box, how they are queued in call centres, and were we locate stores and services,”.

    For one real example, W5 3PL, is the home of “Tim and Claudia” in Ealing, London, says one database. They are defined as “city adventurers”, well-educated, twenty something singles on extremely high salaries who spend little time in their smart studio flats.

    Prof Burrows added that with the rise of GPS, insurers can track car movements, for instance to work, and this data ” will increasingly be used to determine car insurance.”

    Using caller ID to call up a post code, company call centres can move you to the front of a queue if they think you are more likely to buy their goods, divert you to a call to a call centre in India, or let you hang on if you are likely to sap their profits.

    Once classified this way, it is difficult to alter, Prof Burrows said. However, it is possible and it could be that, when people realise the power of their postcode, they could try to change it, for instance by gentrification.

    While postcodes can help more efficiently distributed resources, it could mean, for example, that the wine lover who has eight lager louts in their post code could lose out when a chain of wine stores decided where to build a new local store. “The actions of other people who live next door or down the street contribute to how you are being characterised,” he said.

    These classifications could reinforce stereotypes and generate ghettoes: they are increasingly used abroad, such in the US and Australia, to help people to match who they are to where they want to live. “You say I can afford £500,000 in Sydney, show me the geodemographic types I can life in.”

    The influence of post codes adds a new twist to the old anxiety about “not wanting to be in Slough but in Windsor,” he said.

    The most widely used system is the Mosaic classification owned by the global data corporation Experian. The Mosaic system classifies each of the 1.7 million postcodes in the UK to one of 11 different Mosaic Groups and 61 different Mosaic Types. “We also found that, for the most part, the characterisations on offer ‘rang true’ for us,” said Prof Burrows.

    It seems that the nightmare vision of the sixties cult sci fi series The Prisoner has become true without most of us realising it. Episodes feature the imprisoned former agent, labelled “Number Six” by his captors who refuse to use names, failing to escape “the Village”, and declaring “I am not a number – I am a free man!”

    Today, we are not numbers but postcodes, which give governments and big business a glimpse of our personal life that would impress Big Brother himself.

    Chair of 9/11 Commission admits official evidence was ‘far from the truth’

    0

    Peter Tatchell

    Even the chair of the 9/11 Commission now admits that the official evidence they were given was ‘far from the truth’.

    Six years after 9/11, the American public have still not been provided with a full and truthful account of the single greatest terror attack in US history.

    What they got was a turkey. The 9/11 Commission was hamstrung by official obstruction. It never managed to ascertain the whole truth of what happened on September 11 2001.

    The chair and vice chair of the 9/11 Commission, respectively Thomas Kean and Lee Hamilton, assert in their book, Without Precedent, that they were “set up to fail” and were starved of funds to do a proper investigation. They also confirm that they were denied access to the truth and misled by senior officials in the Pentagon and the federal aviation authority;
    and that this obstruction and deception led them to contemplate slapping officials with criminal charges.

    Despite the many public statements by 9/11 commissioners and staff members acknowledging they were repeatedly lied to, not a single person has ever been charged, tried, or even reprimanded, for lying to the 9/11 Commission.

    From the outset, the commission seemed to be hobbled. It did not start work until over a year after the attacks. Even then, its terms of reference were suspiciously narrow, its powers of investigation curiously limited and its time-frame for producing a report unhelpfully short – barely a year to sift through millions of pages of evidence and to interview hundreds of key witnesses.

    The final report did not examine key evidence, and neglected serious anomalies in the various accounts of what happened. The commissioners admit their report was incomplete and flawed, and that many questions about the terror attacks remain unanswered. Nevertheless, the 9/11 Commission was swiftly closed down on August 21 2004.

    I do not believe in conspiracy theories. I prefer rigorous, evidence-based analysis that sifts through the known facts and utilises expert opinion to draw conclusions that stand up to critical scrutiny. In other words, I believe in everything the 9/11 Commission was not.

    The failings of the official investigation have fuelled too many half-baked conspiracy theories. Some of the 9/11 “truth” groups promote speculative hypotheses, ignore innocent explanations, cite non-expert sources and jump to conclusions that are not proven by the known facts. They convert mere coincidence and circumstantial evidence into cast-iron proof. This is no way to debunk the obfuscations and evasions of the 9/11 report.

    But even amid the hype, some of these 9/11 groups raise valid and important questions that were never even considered, let alone answered, by the official investigation. The American public has not been told the complete truth about the events of that fateful autumn morning six years ago.

    What happened on 9/11 is fundamentally important in its own right. But equally important is the way the 9/11 cover-up signifies an absence of democratic, transparent and accountable government. Establishing the truth is, in part, about restoring honesty, trust and confidence in American politics.

    There are dozens of 9/11 “truth” websites and campaign groups. I cannot vouch for the veracity or credibility of any of them. But what I can say is that as well as making plenty of seemingly outrageous claims; a few of them raise legitimate questions that demand answers.

    Four of these well known “tell the truth” 9/11 websites are:

    1) Scholars for 9/11 Truth, which includes academics and intellectuals from many disciplines.

    2) 250+ 9/11 ‘Smoking Guns’ a website that cites over 250 pieces of evidence that allegedly contradict, or were omitted from, the 9/11 Commission report.

    3) The 911 Truth Campaign that, as well as offering its own evidence and theories, includes links to more than 20 similar websites.

    4) Patriots Question 9/11, perhaps the most plausible array of distinguished US citizens who question the official account of 9/11, including General Wesley Clark, former Nato commander in Europe, and seven members and staffers of the official 9/11 Commission, including the chair and vice chair. In all, this website documents the doubts of 110+ senior military, intelligence service, law enforcement and government officials; 200+ engineers and architects; 50+ pilots and aviation professionals; 150+ professors; 90+ entertainment and media people; and 190+ 9/11 survivors and family members. Although this is an impressive roll call, it doesn’t necessarily mean that these expert professionals are right. Nevertheless, their scepticism of the official version of events is reason to pause and reflect.

    More and more US citizens are critical of the official account. The respected Zogby polling organisation last week found that 51% of Americans want Congress to probe President Bush and Vice-President Cheney regarding the truth about the 9/11 attacks; 67% are also critical of the 9/11 Commission for not investigating the bizarre, unexplained collapse of the 47-storey World Trade Centre building 7 (WTC7). This building was not hit by any planes. Unlike WTC3, which was badly damaged by falling debris from the Twin Towers but which remained standing, WTC7 suffered minor damage but suddenly collapsed in a neat pile, as happens in a controlled demolition.

    In a 2006 interview with anchorman Evan Soloman of CBC’s Sunday programme, the vice chair of the 9/11 Commission, Lee Hamilton, was reminded that the commission report failed to even mention the collapse of WTC7 or the suspicious hurried removal of the building debris from the site – before there could be a proper forensic investigation of what was a crime scene. Hamilton could only offer the lame excuse that the commissioners did not have “unlimited time” and could not be expected to answer “every question” the public asks.

    There are many, many more strange unexplained facts concerning the events of 9/11. You don’t have to be a conspiracy theorist to be puzzled and want an explanation, or to be sceptical concerning the official version of events.

    Six years on from those terrible events, the survivors, and the friends and families of those who died, deserve to know the truth. Is honesty and transparency concerning 9/11 too much to ask of the president and Congress?

    What is needed is a new and truly independent commission of inquiry to sort coincidence and conjecture from fact, and to provide answers to the unsolved anomalies in the evidence available concerning the attacks on the World Trade Centre and the Pentagon. Unlike the often-stymied first investigation, this new commission should be granted wide-ranging subpoena powers and unfettered access to government files and officials. George Bush should be called to testify, without his minders at hand to brief and prompt him. America – and the world – has a right to know the truth.

    Castro says US lied about 9/11 attacks

    0

    Mark Tran and agencies
    Guardian UnlimitedA video image shows an explosion at the Pentagon on September 11 2001. Photograph: AP
    Fidel Castro has accused America of spreading disinformation about an explosion at the Pentagon on September 11 2001. Photograph: AP
     

    Fidel Castro today joined the band of September 11 conspiracy theorists by accusing the US of spreading disinformation about the attacks that took place six years ago.In a 4,256-word article read by a Cuban television presenter last night, the country’s leader asserted that the Pentagon was hit by a rocket, not a plane, because no traces were found of its passengers.

    “Only a projectile could have created the geometrically round orifice created by the alleged airplane,” he said. “We were deceived as well as the rest of the planet’s inhabitants,” he said.

    In fact, the remains of the bodies of the crew and passengers of American Airlines flight 77 were found at the Pentagon crash site, and positively identified by DNA.

    As for the attacks on the World Trade Centre in New York, Mr Castro wrote that the way the passenger jets crashed into the twin towers on September 11 and the data from the plane’s black boxes “do not correspond with the criteria of mathematicians, seismologists, and information and demolition specialists”.

    But in a glaring omission, Mr Castro’s conspiracy theory failed to mention Osama bin Laden, who this week issued a video praising one of the hijackers who crashed into the World Trade Centre, and his militant Islamist al-Qaida network.

    In his article, Mr Castro said the truth behind the attacks with hijacked planes that killed nearly 3,000 people would probably never be known.

    The Cuban government originally condemned the September 11 attacks on New York and Washington hours after they occurred.

    Within days it had organised a rally to express solidarity with Americans and Mr Castro said Cuba offered to donate blood.

    Mr Castro has not appeared in public since mid-2006, when he underwent intestinal surgery and ceded power to his younger brother Raul. In late March, he began writing occasional essays on mostly international themes.

    Mr Castro himself was the target of several failed assassination attempts by the US after he took power in 1959.

    He also claimed in his essay that Cuba tipped off US security services in 1984 about a plan to kill the then president, Ronald Reagan, while he was campaigning for re-election in North Carolina.

    The information provided by Cuba led to the arrest of a group of would-be assassins and foiled the plot, he wrote.

    Paddy Ashdown was a spy

    0

    EX-LIB Dem leader Lord Paddy Ashdown has been outed as a spy by successor Sir Menzies Campbell.

    Ashdown, a former Royal Marine who served with the elite Special Boat Service, was long suspected to have been a real life James Bond. Now Sir Menzies has confirmed he worked for MI6.

    The North East Fife MP revealed: “Put it this way, when he was in the Foreign Office, I think he was in the more shadowy side of Foreign Office activity.”

    http://www.dailyrecord.co.uk/news/news/tm_headline=ashdown-was-a-spy%26method=full%26objectid=19782904%26siteid=66633-name_page.html

    Government Did Not Take Action After Spinach E. coli Breakout

    0

    Government regulators never acted on calls for stepped-up inspections of leafy greens after last year’s deadly E. coli spinach outbreak, leaving the safety of America’s salads to a patchwork of largely unenforceable rules and the industry itself, an Associated Press investigation has found. The regulations governing farms in this central California region known as the nation’s “Salad Bowl” remain much as they were when bacteria from a cattle ranch infected spinach that killed three people and sickened more than 200. AP’s review of data obtained through the Freedom of Information Act found that federal officials inspect companies growing and processing salad greens an average of just once every 3.9 years. Some proposals in Congress would require such inspections at least four times a year. In California, which grows three-quarters of the nation’s greens, processors created a new inspection system but with voluntary guidelines that were unable to keep bagged spinach tainted with salmonella from reaching grocery shelves last month. Despite widespread calls for spot-testing of processing plants handling leafy greens following last year’s E. coli outbreak, California public health inspectors have not conducted any such tests and are not required to under current regulations, the AP review found. And some farms in the fertile Salinas Valley are still vulnerable to bacteria-carrying wildlife and other dangerous conditions. “We have strict standards for lead paint on toys, but we don’t seem to take the same level of seriousness about something that we consume every day,” said Darryl Howard, whose 83-year-old mother, Betty Howard, of Richland, Wash., died as a result of E. coli-related complications. She was one of two elderly people to die in the outbreak that began in August 2006 and also included the death of a child and sicknesses reported from more than 200 people from Maine to Arizona. By mid-September, the U.S. Food and Drug Administration issued a two-week nationwide warning not to eat fresh spinach. Authorities eventually traced the likely source of the E. coli to a cattle ranch about 40 miles east of Salinas. But a regulatory backlash never happened. State Sen. Dean Florez, a Central Valley Democrat who sponsored three failed bills to enact mandatory regulations for leafy greens earlier this year, said momentum faded as the E. coli case dropped from the headlines and the industry lobbied hard for self-regulation. “That legislation was held up waiting for this voluntary approach for food safety to see if it works,” said Florez, who is skeptical of that approach. “It only took one 50-acre parcel to poison 200 people and bring the industry to its knees,” he said. “We don’t get why the industry would be playing this game of roulette with our food.” Among the AP’s other findings: — Since September 2006, federal Food and Drug Administration staff inspected only 29 of the hundreds of California farms that grow fresh “stem and leaf vegetables,” a broad category the agency uses to keep track of everything from cauliflower to artichokes. Agency officials said they did not know how many of those grew leafy greens. — Since raw vegetables, especially leafy greens, are minimally processed, they have surpassed meat as the primary culprit for food-borne illness. Produce caused nearly twice as many multistate outbreaks than meat from 1990-2004, but the funding has not caught up to this trend. The U.S. Department of Agriculture branch that prevents animal diseases gets almost twice the funding as the FDA receives to safeguard produce. — California lettuce and spinach have been the source of 13 E. coli outbreaks since 1996. But if salad growers or handlers violate those new guidelines, they are not subject to any fines, are not punishable under state law and may be allowed to keep selling their products. Last year’s outbreak prompted a temporary downturn in sales of salad greens, but more than 5 million bags of salad are now sold each day nationwide, a number the industry says will grow as health-conscious consumers opt for more greens and vegetables. Much of those sprout near Salinas, where the fog lifted on a recent morning over fields of romaine and iceberg already wilting in the August sun. Men in sweat shirts and baseball caps cut heads of lettuce from the ground and loaded them into cardboard boxes to be taken to a nearby plant owned by Castroville-based packager Ocean Mist Farms. From there, they would be shipped out to supermarkets and buyers as far away as Japan. In an attempt to reassure wary customers, Ocean Mist’s vice president recently helped organize a group to police food safety, run entirely by the $1.7 billion leafy greens industry. Some 118 salad processors have signed on to the California Leafy Green Products Handler Marketing Agreement, which uses its own voluntary food safety guidelines. Public health inspectors can impose mandatory food-safety rules on the farm only after an outbreak, said Patrick Kennelly, chief of the food safety section at California’s Department of Public Health. Some scientists question the approach. “Mandatory measures give a level playing field and make sure everybody responds,” said Martin Cole, a food safety expert at the Illinois Institute of Technology. But in the absence of federal regulations, 10 auditors from the California Department of Food and Agriculture are monitoring the fields, including Roxann Bramlage, who tramped down the rows of lettuce with a checklist. “When somebody cuts their finger and it bleeds, what will you do?” Bramlage asked foreman Fernando Vasquez, standing next to a harvester machine rolling gently over the beds. “When he cuts his finger, even if it’s a small cut, I take him to the edge of the field,” Vasquez said in Spanish. “Then I put a border around the area where he was working and I don’t let anyone cut in it.” That was the right answer. Ocean Mist passed Bramlage’s field audit because the company could prove its growers protected their crops against pathogens, which gave them the right to use a state seal telling consumers the product was grown safely. Growers say that seal sends a powerful message to consumers. “Once they join, there’s nothing voluntary about the program,” said Scott Horsfall, who oversees the marketing agreement. “If a handler is decertified, buyers will definitely react.” The industry-led approach isn’t foolproof, however. On Aug. 29, Metz Fresh, a grower and shipper in King City, 30 miles south of Salinas, recalled 8,000 cartons of fresh spinach tainted with salmonella. Auditors had visited the company a few weeks before, but inspected a field where the produce was clean. So they noted nothing unusual in their report. No one knows how the bacteria got into the leaves. But the news rekindled fears among consumers and legislators who say they are skeptical of the government’s willingness to let the industry police itself. “Some will say the system is working and that we are catching the problem and recalling products, but the average consumer wouldn’t know that,” said U.S. Sen. Tom Harkin, D-Iowa, who chairs the Senate Committee on Agriculture, Nutrition and Forestry. “Last year, it was E. coli; this year, salmonella.” Harkin and Rep. Rosa DeLauro, D-Conn., are both working on bills to develop a set of mandatory national guidelines to supercede the current patchwork of food safety regulations. Similar proposals were developed a year ago, but none have gone forward. In March, the Bush Administration issued a draft of its guidance to minimize microbial hazards of fresh-cut fruits and vegetables. Unlike the strict hazard-control program governing meat and poultry, the guidance included no new laws. Many growers and producers are either unaware of the guidelines or simply aren’t complying, according to the Center for Science in the Public Interest, a Washington-based consumer advocacy group.”Inspection alone isn’t going to fix the problem, unless the farmers utilize food-safety plans that are effective for controlling pathogens,” said Caroline Smith DeWaal, director of the center’s food safety division. “They’re not getting at the source of the contamination: on the farm.”

    http://www.ktvu.com/news/14101549/detail.html

    Guantanamo: “Ghost” Prisoners Speak At Last

    0

    The Guantánamo Transcripts: “Ghost” Prisoners Speak After Five And A Half Years, And “9/11 hijacker” Recants His Tortured Confession

    By ANDY WORTHINGTON

    In another resounding demonstration of the importance of legally constituted checks and balances on executive power in the United States, the Associated Press, after filing a request to the Pentagon under the Freedom of Information Act, has secured 58 transcripts from the latest round of annual Administrative Review Boards at Guantánamo, convened to assess whether the detainees still pose a threat to the US, or if they are still presumed to have ongoing “intelligence value.”

    This is just the latest in a series of important actions undertaken by the AP with regard to Guantánamo. Previously, the agency secured the right to reproduce 60 habeas petitions, and obtained the 517 Summaries of Evidence for the Combatant Status Review Tribunals (CSRTs) held at Guantánamo. Used to assess whether the detainees had been correctly designated as “enemy combatants,” these documents were analyzed by Mark and Joshua Denbeaux of Seton Hall Law School to produce a ground-breaking report in February 2006, which demonstrated that, according to the government’s own allegations, only 8 percent of the detainees were accused of having any kind of affiliation with al-Qaeda, 55 percent were not determined to have committed any hostile acts against the US or its allies, and 86 percent were not captured by US forces, but by their Pakistan and Afghan allies, at a time when the Americans were making bounty payments, equivalent to an average worker’s lifetime salary, for the delivery of al-Qaeda and Taliban suspects.

    Subsequent revelations have done little to suggest that even these lowly figures are reliable, and the recent testimony of Lt. Col. Stephen Abraham, who was involved in compiling the “evidence” for the Tribunals, has been particularly damaging to the government’s case. Abraham declared that the gathering of materials for use in the tribunals was severely flawed, and frequently consisted of intelligence “of a generalized nature — often outdated, often ‘generic,’ rarely specifically relating to the individual subjects of the CSRTs or to the circumstances related to those individuals’ status,” and concluded that the whole system was geared towards rubber-stamping the detainees’ prior designation as “enemy combatants.”

    In spring 2006, the AP secured its greatest victory, after taking the government to court over its refusal to reveal the names and nationalities of the Guantánamo detainees, as well as 8,000 pages of transcripts from their CSRTs and the first round of ARBs. A treasure trove of information (though not necessarily in the way that Donald Rumsfeld had in mind when he declared, in December 2001, that the first prisoners captured crossing from Afghanistan to Pakistan “should be a treasure trove” of intelligence leads), these documents not only revealed — for the first time in four years, scandalously — who was actually held in Guantánamo, but also provided, through the transcripts, the first opportunity for the detainees to tell their stories to the world.

    Although the tribunals and review boards were — and are — as monstrously illegal as the rest of the Guantánamo regime, with lawyers excluded from the hearings and decisions based largely on secret evidence obtained through torture, coercion and bribery, the information contained in the transcripts was so compelling that, when cross-referenced with the detainees’ names and arranged chronologically, it provided the basis for my forthcoming book The Guantánamo Files, which unveils the story of Guantánamo and the majority of its detainees for the first time.

    The latest documents secured by the AP have just been released to the public by the Department of Defense, and it would, I think, be fair to say that they are the second most important set of documents relating to Guantánamo that have been released by the Pentagon (following the spring 2006 documents described above). As well as containing the 58 transcripts from the Second Round of the ARBs, the documents also include, for the first time, the ”evidence” — in the form of the Unclassified Summaries of Evidence so heavily criticized by Stephen Abraham — for all the Tribunals with the names of the detainees included (they were previously redacted), as well as all the Unclassified Summaries for both rounds of the ARBs. Also included are transcripts of the habeas corpus petitions of 179 detainees, and the whole set of documents is indexed so thoroughly that it appears, implausibly, to have been compiled as a testament to the importance of Freedom of Information legislation, with the aim of facilitating a greater understanding of Guantánamo and its detainees than has previously been possible.

    These documents will provide lawyers, human rights activists and researchers with an invaluable base from which to gain at least a glimpse into the lives of the many dozens of detainees without legal representation, who have never taken part in any tribunals or review boards and whose stories were hitherto completely unknown. More crucially, perhaps, they will also enable critics of the regime to follow the ways in which additional allegations — produced under dubious circumstances in countless interrogations both at Guantánamo and in secret prisons — have mounted up against the detainees during the long years of their illegal imprisonment.

    The only disappointment is that the documents relating to the decisions made by the review boards about whether to release detainees, or to continue to hold them, are so heavily redacted as to be all but useless, but even on this point other documents — the “Indexes to Transfer and Release Decisions” — provide invaluable, and previously concealed information about who has been released, and, more crucially, about the many dozens of detainees — at least 70, according to my first analysis — who have been cleared for release through the ARBs but are still held at Guantánamo because the US government cannot reach a satisfactory agreement with their home governments (as in the cases of the Yemenis), or is unwilling to return them to regimes where, ironically, after years of lawless and brutal detention in US custody, they face the prospect of torture or other ill-treatment. While information about who has been cleared is made available to individual detainees’ lawyers, the value of these documents is that they enable this information to be extended to those particularly vulnerable individuals without legal representation.

    Of particular interest, for now, are the transcripts of the ARBs, especially as the AP trailed the release of the documents with a series of press releases over the weekend, picking out a few stories that contain important information. Chief amongst these is the transcript of the review board hearing of Mohammed al-Qahtani, one of several men presumed to be the intended “20th hijacker” on 9/11. Al-Qahtani’s story has been widely reported, particularly in 2005 when Time obtained a day-to-day transcript of the “enhanced interrogation techniques” to which he was subjected over a 50-day period from November 2002 to January 2003, when he was, amongst other things, interrogated and kept awake for 20 hours a day on most days, stripped naked, sexually humiliated, and forced to bark like a dog.

    Although al-Qahtani’s lawyer reported in March 2006 that he had recanted his confession, the transcript of his ARB hearing is the first time that he has denied the 9/11 allegations in person, telling his review board, “this is the first statement I am making of my own free will and without coercion or under the threat of torture,” and stating, “I am a businessman, a peaceful man. I have no connection to terrorism, violence or fighters.” Refuting allegations that he admitted traveling to Afghanistan in 2001, that he attended a training camp, and that met Osama bin Laden and agreed to participate in a “martyr mission” for al-Qaeda, al-Qahtani said that the statements were not true and that he had only admitted to them while he was being “tortured” at Guantánamo, and included his allegations of torture in a statement that was read out to the board.

    In other press releases over the weekend, Andrew O. Selsky and Ben Fox of the AP focused on the story of Ayman Batarfi, a Yemeni doctor caught up in the failed Tora Bora campaign, in November and December 2001, when the US military allowed Osama bin Laden, Ayman al-Zawahiri and numerous other senior figures in al-Qaeda and the Taliban to escape across the unguarded Pakistani border. Explaining that he was not a terrorist but had been caught up with al-Qaeda in the Tora Bora mountains, Batarfi said that he met Osama bin Laden in the mountains, to explain to him that the defense of Tora Bora was a lost cause, because “Most of all the total guns in the Tora Bora area was 16 Kalashnikovs and there are 200 people.” He noted, however, that bin Laden “did not prepare himself for Tora Bora and to be frank he didn’t care about anyone but himself. He came for a day to visit the area and we talked to him and we wanted to leave this area. He said he didn’t know where to go himself and the second day he escaped and was gone.” Abandoned in the mountains, Batarfi said that he struggled to tend to the wounded and dying, who were overwhelmed by American air power. “I was out of medicine and I had a lot of casualties,” he explained. “I did a hand amputation by a knife and I did a finger amputation with scissors, and if someone was injured badly I was just operating on the table.”

    Batarfi’s story is not widely known, although I was able to cover it in depth in my book because he has taken part in previous tribunals and review boards. As a result, I was more interested in uncovering the stories of other detainees whose voices had, until these documents were released, not been heard at all despite having spent over five and half years in US custody. Although these men are not strictly “ghost” prisoners — because their names and nationalities were released under duress last year, as opposed to the thousands of unknown, unrepresented and unreported prisoners held in Afghanistan, Iraq and other undisclosed locations — there is still something deeply disturbing about the fact that, after all this time, in which they have been held without charge or trial, in conditions of almost total isolation that would be difficult for even the most hardened of convicted criminals on the US mainland to endure, the voices of these men are being heard for the first time.

    They include Hani al-Khalif, a former Saudi soldier, who served with US soldiers during the first Gulf War, who maintained that he had traveled to Afghanistan in the winter of 2000 to fight with the Taliban against the Northern Alliance, and explained, “The Taliban government is the right side to belong to because the other side has come out of the Taliban which is wrong,” and another Saudi — who didn’t wish to be identified — who said that he “wanted to participate in jihad for religious purposes to help people in need of food distribution,” because this would “strengthen his relationship with God,” and described how he had made the decision “because of emotion, because I saw a picture of a little baby that had dirty clothes and her hair was not combed or cut.” He insisted that “his goal was to help for two months and then return home,” but said that on arrival in Afghanistan he was tricked into attending the al-Farouq camp (a camp for Arab recruits that was affiliated with al-Qaeda), where he was dismayed to discover that it was “a terrorist training camp with political motivations, not religious goals.”

    Also included is the testimony of Hisham Sliti, a Tunisian client of the London-based legal charity Reprieve, which represents dozens of Guantánamo detainees. Clive Stafford Smith, Reprieve’s legal director, reported Sliti’s story in his book Men: Guantánamo and the Secret Prisons, in which he portrayed an affable former drug addict, imprisoned for many years in prisons in Italy and Belgium, who reminisced at length about the quality of the European prisons compared to Guantánamo. “In Italy the prison was wide open for six hours a day,” he explained. “You could have anything in your room — I had a little fornello, a gas cooker. Can you imagine the Americans allowing that? Here, we call a plastic spoon a ‘Camp Delta Kalashnikov,’ as the soldiers think we’re going to attack them with it.” In the first hearing that Sliti deigned to attend, he lived up to Stafford Smith’s character sketch, explaining at length his various exploits in Europe, and telling the board that he only ended up in Afghanistan because he had begun attending mosques in Belgium, where the country had been portrayed as “a clean, uncorrupted country where he could study Sharia and further his religious education,” but that what he found instead was that “I didn’t care for the country. It was very hot, dusty and [the] women were ugly. The atmosphere and environment didn’t agree with me.”

    Another first-time testimony is that of Ravil Mingazov, the last of eight Russians in Guantánamo, who, it turns out, was actually born in Tajikistan. A former soldier in the Russian army, Mingazov explained that, although he had been honored for excellent service early in his career, he subsequently converted to Islam and fell out of favor with the KGB to such an extent that he deserted the army, left his wife and family, and fled to Afghanistan with the help of members of the Taliban-affiliated Islamic Movement of Uzbekistan. Refuting allegations that he trained at al-Farouq, he said that he had made up these stories while imprisoned at the US airbase in Bagram, and added that he had in fact fled from the IMU, traveling to Pakistan, where he stayed at a center run by the missionary organization Jamaat-al-Tablighi in Lahore. He explained that he was captured, with 16 other Guantánamo detainees, after moving to a guest house used by university students in Faisalabad, which was, unfortunately, owned — or otherwise connected to — the “high-value” al-Qaeda suspect Abu Zubaydah.

    Sadly — given its undiluted focus on anti-American militancy — the only other first-time story, that of the Saudi Abdul Rahman al-Zahri, was the only one of the previously unheard voices picked up by the AP, which reported that he “proudly proclaimed himself a holy warrior and ‘an enemy of the United States.’” As the AP described it, al-Zahri “praised the Sept. 11 attacks and other terrorist strikes and said they were retaliation “for your criminal acts and your military invasion [of] the Islamic countries.” While this was a fair précis of his story — although it did not mention that he was not a member of al-Qaeda, stating instead that he would have been “honored” to have been chosen as a member — it was, as I have indicated above, unrepresentative of the majority of the stories reported in the transcripts.

    On the sixth anniversary of 9/11, al-Zahri’s “confession” will no doubt assure some Americans that the Bush administration’s unprecedentedly lawless and brutal conduct over the last six years is justified, but I believe that what the majority of the documents reveal — both through some of the examples cited above, and through the many stories of wronged men betrayed by rivals or through false intelligence that are scattered throughout the transcripts — is exactly the opposite. From my particular perspective, as someone who has studied the stories of the detainees in depth for the last 18 months, the most heart-rending aspect of the transcripts is the confusion and despair shown by detainees who, year after year in their review boards, and often more frequently in their interrogations, have painstakingly repeated their stories ad nauseam, refuting wild and unsubstantiated allegations, and at a loss to understand why they, in particular, have been singled out for inclusion in a never-ending cycle of total isolation and evidence-free crimes. To give just one example, the Afghan Mohammed Zahir, a 54-year old teacher who had fled to Iran during the time of the Taliban, has been telling his captors, since he was seized in 2003, that he had returned to Afghanistan to serve the new government of Hamid Karzai by teaching in a secular school, but received threatening night letters from the Taliban, who betrayed him to the Americans. “You captured me because I am an Afghan or a Muslim,” he told his review board, “but I haven’t done anything. I was teaching the children under the tree.”

    In conclusion, then, the release of these documents — which was perhaps contrived by the Pentagon to coincide with 9/11, in the hope that they would be conveniently brushed under the carpet — does not vindicate the government’s post-9/11 policy, when, as CIA director Cofer Black so memorably described it, “the gloves came off,” but hints rather at the true legacy of 9/11: torture, “disappearances” and a regime of secret prisons that should be anathema to those living in a country — the United States — that was founded on the rule of law, and that should only be able to regard itself unflinchingly as a beacon of civilized values if it returns to these foundations, insisting that those in charge of the country return to the rule of law that they have flouted so outrageously, with such damaging consequences for America’s reputation abroad, and a concomitant disregard for the rights of Americans themselves (as the hidden history of torture in the case of Jose Padilla recently showed).

    In the reflected world in which America admires itself, the prisoners revealed in these transcripts should be charged with crimes and prosecuted in a recognized court of law, rather than being consigned to an extra-legal black hole, where men’s futures are dealt with in a paranoid and gullible atmosphere in which allegations obtained through torture, coercion or bribery are regarded as the truth, abuse is rife, and the presumption of innocence has been done away with completely. 9/11 was a crime — a monstrous crime — but it should not have provided an opportunity for the nation’s supposed defenders to embark on a counter-campaign that has ended up mocking the very values that it purported to defend.

    Senate Intelligence Panel Seeks CIA Nominee’s Withdrawal

    0

    By Joby Warrick

    Members of the Senate intelligence committee have requested the withdrawal of the Bush administration’s choice for CIA general counsel, acknowledging that John Rizzo’s nomination has stalled because of concerns about his views on the treatment of terrorism suspects.

    The decision followed a private meeting this week in which committee leaders concluded that the troubled nomination could not overcome opposition among Democratic members. It comes less than a month after a key member, Sen. Ron Wyden (D-Ore.), announced his intention to block the nomination indefinitely.

    Rizzo, a career CIA lawyer, has drawn fire from Democrats and human rights groups because of his support for Bush administration legal doctrines permitting “enhanced interrogation” of terrorism detainees in CIA custody.

    Two U.S. officials familiar with the committee’s decision said the request for Rizzo’s withdrawal has been conveyed to Gen. Michael Hayden, the CIA’s director. The officials, who insisted on anonymity because of the sensitive nature of the committee’s discussions, said lawmakers had hoped to avoid the formality of a negative vote on Rizzo’s nomination out of respect for his long service at the intelligence agency. Rizzo has served with the CIA since 1976 and acted as interim general counsel from 2001 to 2002 and from August 2004 to the present.

    CIA officials declined comment on whether a formal request had been received, but a spokesman said Hayden continues to support Rizzo’s nomination. “Director Hayden believes Mr. Rizzo is a fine lawyer and is well-qualified for the post,” agency spokesman Mark Mansfield said. “This has been, and continues to be, his view.”

    The White House also signaled its continued support for Rizzo. “We continue to support Mr. Rizzo’s nomination and believe he is well-qualified to serve in this important position,” spokeswoman Emily Lawrimore said.

    Wyden declined yesterday to discuss the status of Rizzo’s nomination but said he remains strongly opposed to it. “It is clearly not in the interest of the country and not in the interest of the many hardworking professionals at the CIA,” Wyden said in a phone interview. He said Rizzo’s views on interrogation are “light-years from what we need.”

    During his confirmation hearing in June, Rizzo testified that he did not object to an administration memo in 2002 that deemed legal some extremely harsh interrogation techniques for CIA detainees. According to the memo, a technique was not considered to be torture unless it inflicted pain “equivalent in intensity to the pain accompanying serious physical injury, such as organ failure, impairment of body function, or even death.” Rizzo testified that the legal opinion “on the whole was a reasonable one.”

    Rizzo also said the CIA does not condone torture, and stressed that the agency’s actions must remain “in full compliance with the Constitution, U.S. law and U.S. obligations under international treaties.”

    Rizzo’s positions and his support for harsh interrogations conducted by the CIA at secret prisons have made him a target of human rights and civil liberties groups. On Tuesday, a coalition of organizations issued a statement urging the Senate to reject Rizzo’s nomination. “When Mr. Rizzo failed to object to legal arguments that defended torture, he failed to protect his clients — the president, his CIA colleagues and the American people,” said the statement signed by Human Rights Watch, Physicians for Human Rights and three other groups.

    Researcher Julie Tate contributed to this report.

    FBI Official Charged With Abduction, Assault

    0

    Man Accused of Terrorizing Woman; Defense Says Allegations ‘Out of Character’

    By Daniela Deane

    For nearly six hours, a senior FBI official terrorized his Arlington County girlfriend, at times holding her at knifepoint in her closet, dragging her around the apartment by her hair and forcing a gun into her mouth in a jealous, drunken rage, police allege in court documents.

    Carl L. Spicocchi, 54, a former head of the FBI’s Toledo office who was on a temporary assignment in Washington, is being held without bond at the Arlington jail on two felony counts — abduction with intent to defile and a firearms charge, police said.

    Spicocchi, who ran the Joint Terrorism Task Force in Toledo, has also been charged with misdemeanor assault and battery in the alleged Aug. 23 incident at the luxury high-rise Buchanan apartment building in Crystal City.

    “The allegations against agent Spicocchi are totally out of character,” one of his attorneys, Thomas Abbenante, said yesterday. “He has an unblemished record in law enforcement and has dedicated his life to law enforcement and service to his country.”

    At a bond hearing last month, another attorney for Spicocchi said his client has never been in trouble and is an upstanding FBI agent whose wife attended the hearing to support him. The couple live in the Toledo area, where they own a home, property records show.

    Prosecutors said bond should be denied because of Spicocchi’s access to firearms through his job and his knowledge of surveillance and because of the alleged terrorization.

    The alleged domestic incident, which sources said started because the woman wanted to break up with Spicocchi, ended when a neighbor called Arlington police at 10:36 p.m. to report that a woman was screaming that someone was trying to kill her, according to an affidavit for a search warrant filed in Arlington Circuit Court. Spicocchi had called in sick to work days before that, the affidavit said. The sources spoke on the condition of anonymity because the case has not gone to trial.

    Spicocchi was a supervisor in the Toledo office about 18 months ago, when he was temporarily transferred to FBI headquarters in Washington, said Special Agent Scott T. Wilson, a spokesman for the FBI office in Cleveland. Wilson said the FBI would investigate the allegations.

    Spicocchi lived in a rented apartment in a luxury high-rise building in Crystal City around the corner from the woman.

    According to the affidavit, the woman, who called herself his girlfriend, said the two had stayed at her place the night before the alleged assault and had gotten up at 6 a.m. She then made him lunch, and he left the apartment.

    As she drove away from the building later in the morning, she saw Spicocchi ducking in his car at the corner, watching her. She confronted him, telling him that she didn’t want to see him again until the next day, according to court records. “He admitted to following her and said that he thought she had another boyfriend,” the affidavit said.

    He called her repeatedly throughout the day — the last time sounding very drunk about 3 p.m., she told officers.

    When she returned to the apartment at South 23rd Street about two hours later, he was hiding in the closet, a kitchen knife and tape in his hands, she told police. He held her in the closet for about an hour, thrusting the knife at her throat several times, according to records.

    Another time, he held her in the bathroom, where he fired his gun and forced it into her mouth several times, she told police. He repeatedly slapped her and threatened to kill her, she said.

    The woman told police that she got away after hours of being detained by Spicocchi, who, she said, had thrown her on the kitchen floor and tried to punch her. She told police that he had been following her and that he had told her he “had a file on her and was going to ruin her,” according to court documents.

    She also told police that she thought he was recording the incident with a silver device and that he owned four guns.

    Police found Spicocchi in a hallway of the building after the neighbor’s call, they said. A preliminary hearing is scheduled for Oct. 18.

    Is Government ID the next Government IT failure?

    Now that the government has officially put the various contracts for the ID card project out to tender, the mutterings are starting to turn into a clamour: is the latest massive public sector IT project about to become the latest blank cheque from taxpayers to IT services giants?

    After all, it’s not as if the government has a great history of successful IT procurement: the NHS electronic patient records scheme is the most high-profile example, but there are plenty of other examples, such as the Rural Payments fiasco, as reported by CUK on Monday. Taking on the job of Chief Executive of the Identity and Passports Agency cannot have been an easy decision for its latest incumbent, James Hall — after all, his last job was running Accenture’s now-defunct IT contract with the NHS. Talk about exchanging one poisoned chalice for another.

    But in a way, there are few people more uniquely qualified to run a project with such similar scale and objectives. Apart, perhaps, from Richard Granger, the NHS IT chief due to depart from his post later this year. Granger has presided over what is possibly the most criticised IT project ever — and also unarguably the largest, at least in the civilian world.

    And it appears that Hall has learned some lessons from his former client. The project will not rely on a brand-new centralised database, instead aggregating from existing databases. This development was announced in December 2006, just three months after Hall took on the role — perhaps a lesson learned from the NHS.

    Nor will the project suffer from the NHS IT project’s primary problem — a central authority imposing unwanted solutions on local, autonomous trusts. Whilst there will be multiple suppliers, they will not be the regional monopolies imposed by the NHS. Instead, suppliers will bid for individual areas of responsibility — for example, designing the biometric systems used to uniquely identify people. Nor will suppliers have an automatic contract renewal from one phase of the project to another, so suppliers who seek to blame each other for failures will, it appears, be penalised. There will be no more ten-year, multi-billion dollar blank cheques, and the Home Office won’t have to resort to legal action to extract itself from contracts with failing contractors.

    But it seems the system might not be free of the delays that have plagued the NHS. The government has already admitted the system will not launch in 2008, as originally planned, but in 2009 instead. It was originally planned to put the IT contracts out to tender in March last year, but that did not happen until last month. It is believed the tender was partly delayed to benefit from the ‘clean air’ of a new Prime Minister in Gordon Brown.

    And the cloak of secrecy around the project cannot help public perceptions. In March, the Government entered into an Information Tribunal battle with the Information Commissioner to keep under wraps a so-called “Gateway” review of the business case for the ID card programme. The Office of Government Commerce, a branch of the Treasury, accused Information Commissioner Richard Thomas of “failing to live in the real world”. The case has now gone to the High Court after the Government lost its case in the tribunal.

    But whether previous mistakes have been avoided or new ones have been made, it is clear there remains one battle that hasn’t been won — the battle of hearts and minds. Gordon Brown has a long way to go to make the British public identify with ID.

    Graham Taylor

    http://www.contractoruk.com/news/003444.html

    US troops who criticised Iraq war strategy killed in Baghdad

    0

    · Article claimed Bush’s policy was total failure
    · Deaths reported on eve of presidential address

    Suzanne Goldenberg in Washington
    Thursday September 13, 2007
    The Guardian

    Two US soldiers who helped write a critique from the front saying America had “failed on every promise” in the war have been killed in Iraq, it was reported yesterday.Staff Sergeant Yance Gray, 26, and Sergeant Omar Mora, 28, were among a group of seven soldiers serving in Iraq who wrote a piece excoriating America’s conduct of the war. The piece was published in the New York Times last month.

    The men were killed in Baghdad when the cargo truck in which they were riding rolled over, the Associated Press and local news outlets reported yesterday. The Pentagon had yet to confirm their deaths early yesterday.

    The criticism caused a flurry of public debate because of the candour with which the men, all serving in the 82nd Airborne, described the situation in Iraq.

    There was also speculation they could face severe penalties for being so openly critical of the war. Another US soldier, Private Scott Beauchamp, who wrote a shocking account in New Republic magazine about a soldier treating a piece of a child’s skull as a souvenir, had his mobile phone and laptop confiscated.

    “Four years into our occupation, we have failed on every promise,” the seven wrote. “When the primary preoccupation of average Iraqis is when and how they are likely to be killed, we can hardly feel smug as we hand out care packages.”

    The peril of service in Iraq was underlined during the course of writing the article: one of the co-authors, a Ranger, was shot in the head and flown to the US for treatment.

    The men directly challenged official claims of progress in the war, calling the debate in Washington “surreal”.

    They also skewered the military’s only real success story from the war – much discussed this week in congressional hearings on the war – the decision by Sunni groups in Anbar province, west of Baghdad, to join the fight against al-Qaida. “Armed Sunni tribes have indeed become effective surrogates, but the enduring question is where their loyalties would lie in our absence,” the men wrote.

    “We operate in a bewildering context of determined enemies and questionable allies.”

    The men’s deaths were reported the day before George Bush is due to give a televised address in which he will try to persuade a war-weary public to support the war at least until the middle of next year. Mr Bush is expected to announce the withdrawal of 30,000 troops over the next nine months, which will bring US force strength to the levels earlier this year. But he is also expected to say he does not envisage the bulk of US forces leaving Iraq before he leaves the White House in January 2009.

    In their testimony to Congress this week, General Davis Petraeus, the US commander in Iraq, and Ryan Crocker, the US ambassador, accused Iran of arming and training Shia militias to fight a “proxy war” that risks further destabilising Iraq.

    Yesterday, Gen Petraeus told a press conference that Iran was attempting to create a Hizbullah-like force that was trying to exert influence in Iraq.

    Condoleezza Rice, the secretary of state, amplified that warning.

    “Iran is a very troublesome neighbour,” she told NBC television yesterday, warning that Tehran would try to fill any power vacuum created by the withdrawal of US forces. “What we are prepared to do is to complete the security gains that we’ve been making, to create circumstances in which an Iraqi government and local officials can find political accommodation, as they are doing in Anbar, and to be able then, from Iraq, with allies in the war on terror, to resist both terrorism and Iranian aggression.”

    Rudy Giuliani accused of exploiting 9/11 role

    0

    Rudy Giuliani was criticised for giving a reading at the 9/11 memorial event yesterday
    (Chip East/Reuters)
    Rudy Giuliani was criticised for giving a reading at the 9/11 memorial event yesterday

    Rudy Giuliani risked a controversial appearance at Ground Zero in New York yesterday as rival presidential candidates battled over the legacy of the September 11 terror attacks. The Republican presidential contender, hailed as “America’s Mayor” for his leadership during the 2001 attacks that almost buried him, made a brief statement at the sixth anniversary ceremony that critics claimed could give him an unfair boost in his political campaign.

    “On that day six years ago and on the days that followed in the midst of our grief and turmoil we also witnessed strength and resilience as a people. It was a day with no answers but with an unending line of those who came forward to help one another,” Mr Giuliani said, before reading a short passage from the Auschwitz survivor Elie Wiesel.

    The former New York Mayor has spoken at the commemoration every year, but his appearance at yesterday’s ceremony provoked a furious reaction from some firemen and victims’ families. They accuse him of trying to exploit the event for political gain in the presidential race, and are angry about their treatment for illnesses that they say resulted from the attacks and prolonged clean-up.

    “They should have every other single presidential candidate then, because this is outrageous,” Sally

    Regenhard, whose fireman son was killed, complained before the ceremony. “This is going to be seen across the country as a blanket endorsement from us. It is totally inappropriate.”

    Mr Giuliani responded: “I was there when it happened and I’ve been there every year since then. If I didn’t, it would be extremely unusual. As a personal matter, I wouldn’t be able to live with myself. That’s personal, that’s not political. I will do that for as long as they have a ceremony out there.”

    Hillary Clinton, the Democratic presidential front-runner, also attended the ceremony but did not speak.

    None of the victims’ relatives attending the commemoration made any conspicuous protest against Mr Giuliani’s presence, and many voiced support. “He is here as an American. This is not closed to anybody. There is enough blame to go around,” said John Napolitano Sr, a former police officer who lost his fireman son, John, in the attack. “You have to remember the Clintons were in office for eight years and there were terrorist attacks and we did not take action.”

    Lenny Crisci, also a former policeman, who lost his fireman brother, Johnny, said: “Giuliani needs to be here because he was part of this. When Clinton was in office the World Trade Centre was bombed \ and Clinton did not even show up because only six people died.”

    It is a measure of the symbolism of 9/11 in the 2008 presidential campaign that leading candidates in both parties hail from New York, which was long considered to be outside the mainstream of American politics.

    Mr Giuliani insists that he is not running for the presidency based on his record during 9/11, but he has made the attacks a theme of his campaign – and is therefore particularly vulnerable to criticism. He got into trouble this summer, however, by suggesting that he had been “exposed to exactly the same things” as the firemen who claim they are suffering from respiratory ailments because of toxins at the burning site.

    The New York Times did a detailed analysis of Mr Giuliani’s presence at Ground Zero – excluding the chaotic first six days after the attack – and found he had spent 29 hours there from September 17, 2001, to December 16, 2001, while rescue workers were routinely working 12-hour shifts.

    On the campaign trail with his wife in recent weeks, former President Bill Clinton has taken aim at Mr Giuliani by criticising the treatment of firemen who suffered respiratory ailments after 9/11. The strategy is seen as an effort by Mrs Clinton to knock Mr Giuliani off his 9/11 pedestal.

    Secret Power of Water: John Blacker MSc IMI

    0

    25th. Sept. at Sands Arts Centre 7.30 p.m.

    Talk and practical demo by John Blacker MSc IMI (Physical Systems)
     re water power for your car and home.

    Plus Dr. Masaru Emoto DVD and film illustrating work of Stanley Meyer and his fuel cell invention. His work was suppressed and he paid the ultimate price, but his family wish his efforts to be made public.

    Tell the Dems to keep AT&T on the hook for NSA wiretapping

    0

    Having caved to the President’s outrageous demands for more spying powers in August, Congress is now considering extending this power grab and letting telco giants like AT&T off the hook for their role in the NSA’s illegal, warrantless surveillance of ordinary Americans. Legislation could be considered within the next 6 weeks! To help ensure that congressional leaders hear from the public, EFF has launched a new site, stopthespying.org.The site makes it easy to pick up the phone and make your voice heard, by contacting Speaker Nancy Pelosi, Senate Majority Leader Harry Reid and your own representatives. Demand that they agree to the following pledge:

    Stop warrantless surveillance of ordinary Americans. Congress must stop the NSA’s domestic spying, repeal the “Protect America Act,” and ensure that whenever a U.S. person is the intended or unintended subject of surveillance, the government must first get a warrant.

    Don’t legislate in the dark. Congress should oppose any expansion of spying authority until a full, thorough, and public investigation is complete.

    Don’t let the phone companies off the hook. Congress must allow the courts to rule on the president’s program by rejecting efforts to give private entities immunity for illegally assisting the government’s spying.

    http://www.boingboing.net/2007/09/11/stopthespying-tell-t.html

    Guantanamo Brit To Sue Security Services

    0

    A man who was held in Guantanamo Bay is to launch legal action for damages against MI5 and MI6.

    Detainee in Cuba prison

    Detainee in Cuba prison

    Tarek Dergoul, 29, claims the agencies knew he was being tortured while in US custody, it has been claimed.

    Mr Dergoul also accuses British agents of benefiting from intelligence gathered from his alleged mistreatment and wants the court to ban them from using similar tactics in the future.

    If the High Court rules in his favour, it could prevent both the security and special intelligence services from interrogating British nationals who are being held and tortured abroad.

    Mr Dergoul, who is a British citizen, claims British agents repeatedly questioned him when he was held both at the Cuba camp and in Afghanistan and were therefore complicit in his treatment.

    The Guardian says he will be represented in the case by Rabinder Singh QC.

    A spokesman for the Foreign Office said: “The Government is aware of Mr Dergoul’s accusations.”

    http://news.sky.com/skynews/article/0,,30100-1283683,00.html?f=rss

    National ID card plan faces flaw

    0

    By Clive Cookson

    A “fundamental flaw” in the government’s proposed ID cards and photo surveillance systems is the difficulty both people and computers have in recognising faces from photographs, the BA Festival of Science in York heard yesterday.

    “This routine task, performed hundreds of times every day by passport officers, security guards and police officers turns out to be highly error-prone,” said Rob Jenkins, a psychologist studying the problem at Glasgow University.

    Dr Jenkins and colleagues have come up with a technical solution – combining a dozen images of one individual to produce an “average” face that is far easier to recognise than any single photo – that could help the authorities in specific cases. But implementing this on a mass scale would be extremely expensive and controversial.

    The researchers worked on the principle that it is much easier to recognise familiar than unfamiliar faces in a photograph. “To model increased exposure, we collected several different images of each person and averaged them to make a single image for each face,” said Dr Jenkins.

    Averaging photographs is relatively straightforward with up-to-date image-processing software. Only a dozen photos were required to stabilise the image, with any extra images after that making little difference. Dr Jenkins said: “The resulting images are quite uncanny, seeming to bring out the true essence of each face.” The Glasgow team then checked averaged faces against the individual faces from which they were made. Both humans and machines were far better at recognising the average picture.

    “This is because the averaging process washes out aspects of the image that are unhelpful, such as lighting effects, while consolidating aspects of the image that are diagnostic of identity, such as the physical structure of the face,” said Dr Jenkins.

    “This boost in face recognition accuracy has major implications for crime prevention and national security policies. It also demonstrates that with face recognition, as with so many other problems, we can improve machine performance by mimicking nature’s solution.”

    With the national identity card scheme expected to start in 2009, the breakthrough in better-than-photo recognition accuracy raises the question of whether face databases and ID documents should contain identityaverages, rather than standard photographs. In practice, this would be difficult to achieve, Dr Jenkins conceded. “Is there a willingness among the population to do this? I doubt it,” he said. “Imagine having to submit a dozen pictures from your photo album with your passport application.”

    As far as passports and ID cards are concerned, the authorities will just have to live with their limitations – and not rely too much on photos to identify people.

    CCTV surveillance market to grow 12.4%

    0

    The global CCTV market is anticipated to grow at a CAGR of 12.4% for the period spanning from 2005 to 2008. However, the global demand for conventional CCTV systems is showing downward trend with the escalating demand for IP-based CCTV surveillance.

    At country level, Japan remains the largest player in CCTV market and it is among the largest markets for biometric application in ATM.

    The RFID industry is expected to represent a CAGR of over 19% for the period from 2007 to 2016. The driving factors include various initiatives that worldwide countries are assuming in order to get benefits from RFID technology.

    What if the government was behind 9/11?

    0

    We must be on lookout for domestic US terrorists – What if the Government did 911 or helped the terrorists on 911?

    By J A Blacker
    RINF Alternative News

    “The price of freedom is eternal vigilance,” Thomas Jefferson once said.

    The New York Police Department has now shown that, to protect against the rising threat of home-grown terrorism, Americans must exert a far more robust brand of vigilance than has been done to date. That should include all vigilance, surely?

    What if the government did 911? That would explain why the air force scrambled no jets, why the rubble was removed from ground zero without due process and why the towers fell at freefall speed (explosives). In fact if the government did 911 it is consistent with most of the available evidence.

    We should bolster our efforts to find the terrorist plots that are simmering in homegrown cells within those government departments.

    That means that, as Americans, we should eschew the reflexive criticism to which we often subject our society and understand that, in the battle for hearts and minds, we can be our nation’s best ambassadors.

    Most of all, what we learn is that, as Americans, we all have a role to play in protecting ourselves from homegrown terrorism. We cannot subcontract the task to law enforcement, as they may be corrupt.

    We must open our eyes and ears a bit wider, and we must become a bit more willing to pass along what we see and hear. It’s our job to speak up when we see any evidence the government was involved in 911 such as for example Marvin Bush was in charge of security at both the WTC and the airport prior to 911.

    Why did the CIA chief have millions in AA PUT options, and who did fund the terrorists — why has the government failed to tell us even these simple fact?

    Protesters take on NATO generals

    0

    High-level meetings inside Hotel Grand Pacific attract 200 for noon rally

    Louise Dickson, with files from Richard Watts

    Despite police fences surrounding the Hotel Grand Pacific, 200 noisy protesters managed to deliver a document to NATO officials yesterday accusing its generals of war crimes, crimes of genocide and crimes against humanity.

    The notice of summons “charged” North Atlantic Treaty Organization military committee members meeting inside the hotel with 36 counts of International Criminal Court crimes.

    Lt.-Col. Tony White, a NATO public information officer, said he had received and read the summons and will pass it to NATO’s legal team in Brussels when he returns in a few days.

    “It will not be ignored,” said White. “I read it was alleging war crimes in Yugoslavia. It would take a legal expert to give an opinion on it.”

    Protesters had earlier warned they would fight back if police tried to remove them from outside the hotel, but in the end, only one man was picked up by police — a protester riding his bike naked, towing two Scottish terriers in a yellow trailer.

    Inside, where the high-level meetings were being held, chiefs of defence from NATO’s 26 member nations had “frank and open” discussions on the role of the military alliance and its upcoming missions, said Gen. Ray Henault.

    “The demand is there. I can assure you NATO has a lot of work to do,” the Canadian general and chairman of NATO’s Military Committee said at a press briefing yesterday afternoon.

    Henault said the discussions largely focused on the future, although the topic of the mission in Afghanistan inevitably arose. “This is a very new NATO,” he said. “It used to be a static NATO and one that was designed really to counter the Soviet threat that is no longer there.

    “We are now in a NATO that knows it must have an expeditionary capability, and that expeditionary capability is very much embedded in the Afghanistan mission.”

    Meanwhile, a coalition of local peace groups chanted “NATO killers” as they marched from the legislature to the Hotel Grand Pacific. Although a few military men looked on from their waterfront balconies, no one came down to address the crowd.

    Jodi Wood joined the rally to protest Canada’s involvement in NATO. “We’re a democratic nation and I think we should have a right as a civilian society to make the decision to pull Canada out of what is basically world terrorism,” said Wood.

    Marla Renn, an education student at Simon Fraser University, came to protest “atrocities” she said NATO is committing in Afghanistan. “There’s an untold amount of civilian deaths and brutality for women over there. We’re making things harder and worse over there.”

    Camosun student Shawn Haley questioned NATO’s role in providing security. “Security against what?” asked Haley. “They are the most powerful entity in the world and they’re using illegal weapons and killing people.”

    Many, like Haley, accused NATO of using prohibited weapons such as cluster bombs, white phosphorous and depleted uranium to kill and maim civilians. Raging Granny Fran Thoburn found pictures on the Internet of babies deformed by depleted uranium and had them laminated on posters.

    “It’s the hardest things I’ve ever done for the peace movement,” said Thoburn. “We need to get our heads out of the sand and realize we are killing and maiming total populations, including our own.”

    Members of the military committee were surprised by the protest’s focus on illegal weapons, said White. After consulting with senior officers, White told the press NATO does not use cluster munitions or depleted uranium in Afghanistan.

    “Depleted uranium was an issue in Kosovo and Bosnia several years ago. Some nations were using it, but there was no proof it harmed people,” said White, adding Canadian Forces are unlikely to have used depleted uranium because they don’t have the airplanes to disperse it.

    White argued that NATO is still relevant at 60, noting the United Nations, as representative of the international community, “is the one asking us to go to Afghanistan and Darfur.”

    “We’re not imposing ourselves on other countries.”

    In the past five years, demands on NATO have been increasing, said White, who says the international community sees NATO as a highly successful, responsible and professional force.

    “You have to go to Afghanistan to see the progress. The GDP [gross domestic product] is up 14 per cent. Young girls are in school. Afghanistan is much better off than it was two years ago. If they listen to our soldiers, they’ll know we’re doing a lot more good than bad.”

    9/11 Truth Demo in Washington DC on 9/11

    Press Release
    dc911truth.org

    Hello to all the leaders of the 9/11 Truth movement:

    This September, Come Together in Washington DC – Come for the Truth, Stay for the Peace and Justice

    I am writing to thank you for all you have done in the past to further the Truth about 9/11 and to ask you to please take another leadership role in a very important action for the 911 Truth movement.

    As you may know dc911truth.org is hosting a Rally for Truth, Peace and Justice in Washington, DC on 9/11/07 and Lobby days from 9/12-9/14/07. We are hosting these events so that 911 Truth activists from all over the nation can come to Washington and speak Truth to Power!

    Tuesday, 9/11: Noon – Rally at the White House (Lafayette Park) We will be welcoming to Washington DC, 3 groups of walkers for Peace, Truth and Justice converging from across the nation that day at noon at Lafayette Park across from the White House. We will have a rally then march up to the Capitol and split into 2 groups taking petitions of redress to the offices of Rep. Nancy Pelosi and Sen. Harry Reid.

    The rally will include live music and will feature the following distinguished speakers: Adam Kokesh, former Marine combat vet, director IVAW – Iraq Vets Against War Webster Tarpley, historian and author of, “9/11 Synthetic Terror: Made in USA” Ralph Schoenman and Mya Shone, hosts of the radio program, “Taking Aim” David Lindorff, co-author of “The Case for Impeachment” Carlo Hawk Walker, native American, Vietnam veteran and peace maker. Rev. Graylan Hagler, Pastor, Plymouth Congregational Church, Washington, DC William Pepper, Barrister and Lawyer, author of “An Act of State”

    Tuesday, 9/11: Evening Reception and Panel Discussion In the evening, we will host a reception at 5:30pm and a panel discussion from 7- 9pm at the Mott House, featuring many of the day’s speakers.

    Wednesday, 9/12: Morning – Lobby training, Afternoon – Lobbying Learn how to lobby effectivly from expert advisers such as Susan Udry from United For Peace and Justice, Tina Richards and Dr. Bob Bowman. We will be printing up packets of talking points and a leave behind sheet for every Congressional visit. But of course you are certainly welcome to write up, print off and bring your own literature and lobby tools as well.

    Thursday, 9/13: Lobby activities and support This is the big day for our lobbying activities. We will be based at the Stewart Mott House just one block from the Capitol, where we will have lobby training and support available to assist you.

    Thursday, 9/13: 7pm-9pm – Movie at the Mott House Special excluisive preview showing of a new Hollywood movie about 9/11.

    Friday, 9/14: 7pm-9pm – Evening Presentation and mixer at the Mott House Speakers at the Stewart Mott House: Joan Mellen, temple University Professor and author of A Farewell to Justice and John Judge, researcher/investigator, Co- Founder of 9/11 Citizens Watch and Founder of 9/11 Research Project – speaking on “From the Inception of the National Security State to the Counter-Terrorism State”.

    The Mott House is located at 122 Maryland St, very near the Senate buildings. It is an easy walk from all the Capitol buildings. We will also be providing snacks and small refreshments to keep you energized while you are speaking Truth to Power.

    See the dc911truth.org website for all the details.

    From Dallas to 9/11 to Iraq: The War on the Truth

    0

    By Daniel Hopsicker

    It’s déjà vu all over again.

    Its enough to give anyone old enough to remember Vietnam a nightmarish sense of having been right here–exactly here–before.

    The surge in Iraq is not what it was advertised to be–a last gasp effort to clutch victory from the jaws of defeat–but a transparent ploy to subvert the will of the American people as expressed in the last election.

    A bait and switch tactic successfully employed in 1968 to make Richard Nixon President has been dusted off, and used again against the American people. Nixon was elected because he had–he said–a secret plan to end the Vietnam War.

    Americans, rocked by a decade of assassinations and what was nearly a nuclear war over Cuba, were desperate to convince themselves that –for once–he might be telling the truth.

    It didn’t start with 9/11… Or Iraq

    Of course, he wasn’t. And even if he did, he was in no particular hurry to carry it out. By the time the last helicopter left the roof of the American Embassy in Saigon, it had taken longer to end the Vietnam war than it took to fight and win World War II.

    (And even that wasn’t long enough for Howard Hughes, who was reportedly frantically looking for someone to bribe to keep it going a little longer.)

    There is a direct echo of this today in Iraq.

    Allied armies swept across France and Germany, across North Africa, up the Burma Trail in South Asia, and island-hopped across the Pacific, all in less time than its taken to clear the road in from the airport in Baghdad.

    It’s been during our lifetimes that America began measuring its wars–not in years–but generations. Baby boomers were the Vietnam Generation. Whatever they’re calling teenagers today will one day being remembered as the Iraq Generation. Or maybe the Iraq-Iran Generation.

    Out-Orwelling Orwell

    “Those who control the present, control the past,” George Orwell wrote. So the real question that needs to be asked isn’t why they do it… It’s how.

    How they do it is by “preparing the battlefield.”

    We have a few ideas on the subject. The reason is that we’ve just finished a summer-long post-graduate course in how they do it, facing the very real prospect of being hounded out of business after being hauled (once again) into court.

    Instead of reporting the latest in the various outrages we’d normally be following: the 5.5 -ton Homeland Security Cocaine One DC9; the murder beef in South Florida for which Jack Abramoff is apparently getting a “pass;” the criminal dereliction of our national press in covering the story of the 9/11 terrorist conspiracy at its base of operations in Venice, Florida… Here’s what we learned: They are always preparing the battlefield, for a struggle that will take place one day sometime in the indeterminate future over what happened in Venice, Florida.

    So we spent our summer vacation preparing to go to court.

    How I Spent My Summer Vacation

    A Sarasota County Courthouse was the site two weeks ago of the latest skirmish in the organized effort to suppress, discredit, and/or remove from the public record what little evidence has been unearthed, almost all of it by our investigation, about the activities and associates in Florida of Mohamed Atta’s cadre of terrorist hijackers during the 18-month run-up to the 9/11 attack.

     

    The effort to suppress has so far included:

    • two lawsuits;
       

    • the emergence of a “second Mohamed in Venice, a French-Tunisian man who–despite looking nothing like Mohamed Atta–claimed it was he who had been misidentified as the terrorist ringleader by numerous witnesses, including an American girl, Amanda Keller, with whom he lived for several months;
       

    • a brief and unconvincing retraction of her highly-detailed account from Keller herself, in the Sarasota Herald-Tribune, one of three newspapers which initially reported her account, and the corroborating accounts of a half-dozen credible eyewitnesses;
       

    • and a concerted attempt to roll back the startling information that a half-dozen of Atta’s closest associates while he was in Florida weren’t Arabs, but German, Swiss, and Austrian.

    Pecked to Death by Ducks

    What New Orleans was to the Kennedy Assassination, Venice is to the 9/11 terrorist conspiracy: the operation’s nerve center. Instead of Clay Shaw, picture secretive financier Wallace J. Hilliard. For David Ferrie, pencil in Rudi Dekkers.

    But because there has been no courageous prosecuting attorney like Jim Garrison exposing elements of the conspiracy, it’s unlikely the story will ever have an Oliver Stone to being it to life.

    Jim Garrison discovered that the faint outline of what really happened in Dallas was still visible in New Orleans several years after the murder of JFK. Today some of the wiring for what became the 9/11 attack is still exposed in Venice, FL.

    Therein lies the rub, and the reason we’re being pecked to death by ducks.

    The minions of a huge, shadowy, and unnamed organization–the ducks– hauled us back into court for a hearing in front of Robert Bennett, Jr., the Chief Judge of the Sarasota Circuit Court. He was considering a motion to hold us in contempt of the settlement agreement reached last year with one of the German pilots we’d identified, in “Welcome to TERRORLAND,” as a close associate of Atta’s.

    Inconvenient facts I’m still allowed to mention

    The Miami lawyer representing the German pilot indignantly told the Sarasota Herald Tribune at the time, “He’s constantly reporting that my client somehow has had something to do with terrorists, which is a total lie.”

    The pilot who sued us–who we’d admitted we’d been in error in identifying as an associate of Atta’s–is a convicted smuggler living, at the time he sued us, in the Naples Florida home of a Hungarian Mobster named who was convicted of money laundering in 1991 while serving as the manager of the Indian Casino on the reservation of the Morongo Indian Tribe in Cabazon, CA.

    It’s a little far afield for a Hungarian Mobster to be running an Indian Casino in California. Either that, or an excellent example of the globalization of organized crime.

    This same German pilot–who, again, wasn’t an associate of Mohamed Atta’s–bought a business in Naples, Florida, from another German pilot, a man named Wolfgang Bohringer.

    Return of the Snake-Oil Standard

    Subsequently, the mysterious Bohringer became the subject of a terror alert issued by the FBI in the South Pacific last summer. Exposing the fact that a close associates of Atta’s in Florida included non-Arabs, like Wolfgang Bohringer, will be seen someday to have been as important to the true story of the 9/11 attack as the exposure of New Orleans as the operations center for the pre-assassination planning for the Kennedy Assassination.

    It was Amanda Keller’s identification of Bohringer as a close associate of Atta’s, combined with his suspicious activities, which formed the basis for the terror alert.

    But despite–or maybe because of–that fact the Sarasota Herald Tribune offered no explanation for why any woman would want to pass herself off as the former girlfriend of a man responsible for murdering almost 3000 innocent people.

    “They want to put us back on the snake-oil standard again,” Kurt Vonnegut once said.

    “It was ‘my bad,’” Amanda Keller supposedly said.

    Spy Satellites Turned on the U.S.

    0

    Dems Call for Moratorium on Program, Expressing Privacy and Legal Concerns

    satellites pentagon

    Government satellites have been used in the past to show areas affected by disasters, such as these photos that reveal the changes at the Pentagon after the Sept. 11 attacks. (Space Imaging/Department of Homeland Security)

    By JASON RYAN

    Traditionally, powerful spy satellites have been used to search for strategic threats overseas ranging from nuclear weapons to terrorist training camps.

    But now the Department of Homeland Security has developed a new office to use the satellites to secure U.S. borders and protect the country from natural disasters.

    Department of Homeland Security officials testified Thursday before the House Homeland Security Committee about the program and faced extensive criticism about the privacy and civil liberty concerns of the new office, called the National Applications Office.

    The purpose of the National Applications Office is to provide the Department of Homeland Security and civil, state and local emergency planners with imagery and data from satellites run by the National Reconnaissance Office and the National Geospatial Intelligence Agency.

    Homeland Security Chief Intelligence Officer Charlie Allen said overhead imagery was used extensively after Hurricanes Katrina and Rita in 2005, and has been used by the Secret Service for security preparations for events such as the Super Bowl.

    “Some Homeland Security and law enforcement users also in the past routinely accessed imagery and other technical intelligence directly from the intelligence community, especially in response to national disasters such as hurricanes and forest fires,” Allen said.

    Committee members expressed concern about abuse of the satellite imagery, charging that Homeland Security had not informed the oversight committee about the program.

    “What’s most disturbing is learning about it from The Wall Street Journal,” said Committee Chairman Rep. Bennie Thompson, D-Miss.

    The lawmakers also expressed concern about using military capabilities for U.S. law enforcement and Homeland Security operations, potentially a violation of the Posse Comitatus Act, which bars the military from serving as a law enforcement body within the United States, except where specifically authorized by Congress or the Constitution.

    In written testimony, Dan Sutherland, the Homeland Security officer for Civil Rights and Civil Liberties, assured the committee, “We will assist the NAO by keeping a watchful eye on several key civil liberties issues.”

    Department of Homeland Security officials said that the National Applications Office would review requests from agencies such as the FBI and the border patrol for the imagery.

    “We will not be able to penetrate buildings … there could be some infrared capabilities,” Allen said.

    Committee members said that in addition to not being informed about the National Applications Office program, they had not yet been provided with documents defining the limits and legal guidance about the program.

    Late Thursday, top Democrats on the committee sent a letter to Homeland Security saying, “We are so concerned that, as the department’s authorizing committee, we are calling for a moratorium on the program.”

    Homeland Security Committee Chairman Thompson, along with subcommittee chairs Reps. Jane Harman, D-Calif., and Chris Carney, D-Pa., also wrote, “Today’s testimony made clear that there is effectively no legal framework governing the domestic use of satellite imagery for the various purposes envisioned by the department. … The use of geospatial information from military intelligence satellites may turn out to be a valuable tool in protecting the homeland.”

    The committee members have asked that Homeland Security provide the committee with legal documents and the standard operating procedures for the program before they consider the issue further.

    Referring to the recent controversy over the potential abuse of the National Security Agency’s warrantless wiretapping program, Rep. Harman said at Thursday’s hearing that the Bush administration “has been making security policy in the executive branch without full regard for the laws that Congress has passed.”

    Allen said the National Applications Office would operate “in accordance with the laws.”

    Although Homeland Security had notified the appropriations committee of the program, Allen apologized to the members of the Homeland Security Committee for not being more forward with them.

    “You briefed the appropriators, not the authorizers,” Thompson charged.

    9/11 Truth: The 9/11 Cover-Up

    Thousands of New Yorkers were endangered by WTC debris–and government malfeasance.

    Michael Mason

    In the aftermath of the first explosion, the air over Lower Manhattan transformed instantly.

    “The sky was glittering with glass,” says Nina L., a Tribeca resident who asked not to be further identified. She ran to her window and saw a shower of flaming jet fuel cascading from one of the towers.

    “This can’t be a good thing to have my windows open,” she immediately thought to herself.

    Nina closed her windows and shut her air conditioner flues. As a former jeweler, she’d worked around dangerous chemicals before and understood the hazards of toxic fumes. From her apartment seven blocks north of the World Trade Center, she sat transfixed until a second explosion jolted her into action.

    Nina tore up an old pillowcase, fashioned a makeshift bandanna over her face, packed her cats into cages, and trekked northward.

    “The whole neighborhood was blanketed in a gray snow,” she recalls. “Some people were walking by in moon suits.”

    Although Nina could not have known it at the time, she had just entered one of the most dangerous atmospheric conditions ever to occur on American soil, and she suffers the consequences. She had chronic bronchitis until 2003 and still has esophagitis and sinusitis. Many health professionals believe others like her won’t experience the harsher, suffocating symptoms for several more years.

    Up to 70 percent of first responders are ill as a result of 9/11 contamination. If a similar rate of illness holds true for those who lived and worked near the Twin Towers, the number of seriously ill New Yorkers could climb to 300,000 in the near future. About 70,000 New Yorkers so far have listed themselves with the World Trade Center Health Registry, a database that tracks the health impact of the 9/11 attacks. The registry has been criticized for excluding large numbers of those potentially sickened outside a designated one-square-mile area. Despite the insistent denials of city and federal officials, tens of thousands of New Yorkers were unnecessarily exposed to a chemical brew without even the most rudimentary precautions. Today New York City is still mired in a fog of cover-ups and half-truths regarding its environmental welfare.

    Civil rights attorney Felicia Dunn Jones, who worked a block from the towers, was caught in the initial deluge of dust when the towers fell. Although her family rejoiced upon her return home, Dunn Jones developed a serious cough the following January. She died barely five weeks later of sarcoidosis, an immune disorder caused by toxic exposure. Dunn Jones’s name will be added to the list of victims when the memorial is completed in 2009, and the honor isn’t just a token gesture. The addition of her name is a hard-won acknowledgment that exposure to 9/11 contaminants can lead to death.

    David Worby, a personal injury lawyer, is representing more than 10,000 individuals who claim they’ve suffered serious illness as a result of 9/11. Already, 130 of them have died of causes similar to Dunn Jones’s, though Dunn Jones was not a client of Worby’s. Worby is critical of government officials for their overly sanguine assurances about the safety of the air and is especially critical of the city’s lax enforcement of federal requirements that respirators be worn at contaminated sites.

    “They are getting sick because of people like Christie Todd Whitman and Rudy Giuliani,” Worby says. Whitman was administrator of the Environmental Protection Agency, and Giuliani was the mayor at the time the towers fell. “My people don’t want their names to be on the wall, because they are not victims of terrorists–they’re victims of bad government. Giuliani should be banned from public office for what he did.”

    New York City, the Port Authority, and the contractors who were responsible for the cleanup (Bovis and Turner Construction) are all defendants in the Worby lawsuit.

    “I started this suit on behalf of one cop that got sick,” Worby says of his class-action lawsuit filed in 2004. “Nobody would touch the case with a 10-foot pole because it was considered unpatriotic to say anything against the cleanup or the EPA. We have come a long way. They once called the 9/11 cough a badge of honor. Now they know that the whole thing is a catastrophic government disaster.”

    Since the attacks, various scientific studies have demonstrated that New Yorkers are engulfed in billows of illness and disease related to 9/11. First the 9/11 cough and mental health problems caught the attention of local doctors. Then chronic respiratory and gastrointestinal conditions began to surface. Recently a program at Mount Sinai noted the emergence of rare blood cancers among 9/11 first responders. Experts predict that more problems will surface in the next few decades.

    While the progression of diseases continues to unnerve New York residents, more people are asking why basic health and safety standards were ignored and violated in the wake of the attacks. One nonprofit organization, the New York Committee for Occupational Safety and Health (NYCOSH), keeps a diligent watch on 9/11-related issues.


    Image courtesy of NOAA

    “The first indication I knew something was wrong was that by September 12 there was no evidence of or even consideration of organization,” says David Newman, an industrial hygienist with ­NYCOSH. Newman was consulting on environmental hazards at 9/11 from day one. “There was no health or safety plan at the site, and this is Safety 101.”

    Asbestos was most likely in various construction materials used to build the World Trade Center, an EPA memo stated. It explained that short-term exposure to asbestos can cause respiratory, skin, or eye irritation. The information was dangerously incorrect.

    “If our purpose was to save lives and avoid injury and illnesses, we did not have years, months, or even weeks to wait for corrective actions,” said former Occupational Safety and Health Administration chief John Henshaw in a recent House Judiciary Subcommittee hearing. OSHA played an advisory role during the WTC cleanup.

    Inhalable asbestos particles are microscopic and completely unidentifiable without the aid of a microscope. Exposure to asbestos is dangerous in part because it does not cause obvious irritation; contamination manifests itself over the course of years and decades, not days. It’s an invisible, deadly, and patient toxin. The only effective protection against airborne asbestos is a special respirator.

    “I was down there watching people working without respirators,” Newman says. “Others took off their respirators to eat. It was a surreal, ridiculous, unacceptable situation.”

    Stringent protocols govern asbestos contamination cleanup. After a specialized training period, health exam, and certification, licensed technicians must wear industrial-grade respirators and asbestos-resistant suits. New York City has a history of properly addressing asbestos contamination. Back in 1989, a relatively small steam pipe explosion on Gramercy Park South sent 200 pounds of asbestos blowing onto neighboring buildings. As a precaution, the entire building was covered in protective plastic sheeting, and city environmental officials complained that the cleanup would require more than four weeks of painstaking procedures for outdoor decontamination alone. More than 200 area tenants were displaced for weeks following the accident.

    The World Trade Center had been, by some accounts, the largest fireproofing project in the world, with possibly 400 to 1,000 tons of asbestos, which was released during the collapse. Bureaucrats aired their assurances to the world.

    “The air is safe as far as we can tell, with respect to chemical and biological agents,” Giuliani pronounced two days after the attack.

    On September 12, a regional EPA office volunteered to send 30 to 40 electron microscopes to Ground Zero to test bulk dust samples for the presence of asbestos fibers, according to EPA whistle-­blower Cate Jenkins, yet the local EPA office declined the offer, opting for the less effective polarized light microscopy testing method instead. Jenkins had further alleged that regional office personnel were told by the local EPA office: “We don’t want you fucking cowboys here. The best thing they could do is reassign you to Alaska.”

    Three days after 9/11, following questionable air sampling techniques, a spokesperson for the EPA said that levels of asbestos were either at low levels, negligible, or undetectable.

    “I am glad to reassure the people of New York and Washington, D.C., that the air is safe to breathe and their water is safe to drink,” Whitman said one week after 9/11.

    Under the gray, noxious air, trusting residents returned to their homes in Lower Manhattan, unsuspecting children returned to their schools, and hundreds of thousands of downtown workers trudged to their desks. In the following year, the EPA gave more than 50 public assurances concerning the toxic exposure. At least another 15 came from New York City officials.

    The systemic failures began occurring almost immediately following the disaster, in part because of an unclear chain of command. In times of environmental crisis, a blueprint for a federal response, called the National Contingency Plan, entitles the EPA to oversee safety and cleanup efforts–but it does not obligate the EPA to do so. During 9/11, New York City initiated a lead role in the environmental crisis response, and as a result, the mayor’s leadership has been called into question.

    “We didn’t have the authority to do that [health and safety] enforcement, but we communicated that to the people who did,” Whitman said in a 60 Minutes interview. “Really, the city was the primary responder.” Whitman’s office repeatedly declined an invitation to speak with DISCOVER.


    Image courtesy of EPA

    At a time that demanded clear thought and action, a brazen can-do attitude emerged from the rubble, and nobody embodied the reactionary spirit more than New York City’s mayor.

    “You smell it, and you feel there must be something wrong,” Giuliani said. “But what I’m told is that it is not dangerous to your health.” Days later he encouraged New Yorkers to “go back to normal.”

    Once praised for his heroic response, Giuliani has now made New York City vulnerable to a billion-dollar lawsuit that addresses many haphazard health violations that occurred under his watch. Fewer than 30 percent of Ground Zero workers, for example, wore respirators. After repeated phone calls and e-mails, Giuliani would not return calls or send comments.

    The president’s 2002 proposal establishing the Department of Homeland Security addressed the lead-agency issue in the event of future crisis as follows: “After a major incident, the EPA will be responsible for decontamination of affected buildings and neighborhoods and providing advice and assistance to public-health authorities in determining whether it is safe to return to the areas.”

    Nevertheless, a lengthy 2003 report (pdf) from the EPA’s Office of the Inspector General (OIG) hammered the EPA for not fully utilizing its abilities, for making uninformed assurances to New Yorkers, for not taking a proactive approach, and for deferring the onus of environmental decision making to ill-prepared New York City officials.

    With NYC officials and local landowners left to head up sampling and cleaning facilities, a number of private interests could easily sway air-testing results. An opportunity for collusion exists between the city and landlords: If buildings were found contaminated, property owners could lose millions due to asbestos-blighted buildings, devaluing one of the most lucrative real estate locations in the world. It was in the financial interest of Manhattan’s most wealthy citizens to see their properties up and running at capacity again.

    Initially, the New York City Department of Health (NYCDOH) took the lead in implementing an indoor cleanup program, which placed the responsibility for asbestos removal directly on landlords and residents themselves, in direct violation of city, state, and federal laws and at an enormous potential health risk.

    Nina, for example, returned to her Tribeca apartment a week after 9/11. She found the entire place salted with what appeared to be a fine coating.

    “This stuff goes through clothes, cracks, everything,” says Nina.

    In the mail, she received a letter from the NYCDOH instructing her how to clean her apartment: Use a wet rag and use a High Efficiency Particulate Airfilter vacuum. (A study cited in the EPA’s OIG report shows that most residents failed to follow cleaning instructions appropriately.) Only trained, respirator-equipped professionals should conduct asbestos cleanup. Shortly after returning to her apartment, Nina developed crippling headaches and respiratory problems–troubles she never had before.

    Eventually, in May 2002, the EPA reclaimed the initiative for indoor air cleanup. It offered a more involved testing for contaminants, but it still did not adhere to the minimum criteria for protecting human health under the EPA’s own guidelines for a Superfund site. As a result, the cleanup efforts received little public trust. In the first cleanup attempt, 4,166 entities had registered; only 295 residents and building owners participated in the second program. Outdoor air sampling and cleaning was another matter.

    “Our rooms were microcosms for what was going on in the neighborhood,” Nina says.

    A toxic cloud composed of industrial waste and human remains crept out from the aching, smoldering pit at Ground Zero and wound its way into the adjoining streets. Its vapors circled around and up buildings, pumped in and out of nostrils, mouths, and lungs, and stung the eyes of every woman, child, man, bird, and beast within a wide range. It spread itself on building walls and inside boiler rooms and left its trail on parked cars, handrails, and public benches. That day, New York City was blinded by a perpetually sickening haze. It poisoned the minds of politicians who acted with hubris and paranoia. It obscured the vision of responders and residents, many of whom acted with heroism and reckless bravado, never thinking that their actions might be endangering themselves, their families, their cities, and their very future. The cloud billowed southward, over the river, enveloping everything in the dust and debris of blown-apart lives.

    Teroy Canfield, now a music producer in Tulsa, Oklahoma, was a student at the Institute of Audio Research in Manhattan in September 2001. On the day of the attacks, he remembers getting a “light dusting” following the collapse of the towers. Several hours later, he joined thousands in their exodus across the Manhattan Bridge toward Brooklyn.

    When Canfield returned to his apartment near Clark and Henry Streets in Brooklyn Heights, loose papers and other debris were blowing across the area. His home was in the path of the cloud but supposedly far from the designated danger areas.

    “There was dust on our air-conditioning units and on the vents,” Canfield recalls. “When we turned it on, the dust would blast into the room. We had wet bandannas and T-shirts, and we would put them on our faces when we went to sleep.”

    Canfield couldn’t decide which was worse–to suffer the heat, to have an air-conditioning unit blowing dust into the room, or to open the windows and endure the noxious odors that were creeping their way into Brooklyn. More often than not, they chose to run the air. As Canfield explains, he simply thought the dust was just dust–skin cells, fibers, whatever.

    In the following week, Canfield noticed that his dorm room rapidly collected an inordinate amount of the gray stuff, which prompted him and his roommate to clean the place three separate times that week. Neither of them had heard of, nor followed, any precautions. School had already resumed, and nobody there seemed to be talking about toxins or asbestos, so why worry, he thought.

    About six months later, Canfield developed a catch in his throat.

    “It was like if you swallowed a piece of rice and your instinct is to hack,” he said. “A dry, hard hack. I might cough three or four times a day, or a week.”

    Every so often, the hacking would yield a small clump of tissue–different from phlegm or anything else Canfield had ever seen.

    “It was sometimes brown and pinkish-bloody,” says Canfield, who has never smoked. “It didn’t hurt, so I figured it would go away.”

    Canfield says that he no longer coughs as frequently as he used to, but he has developed a breathing sensitivity. Ordinary smoke from indoor cooking or an outdoor barbecue seems to bother him the most.

    “Some people were buried in the dust,” explains Noah Green­span, a cardiopulmonary specialist at the Pulmonary Wellness and Rehabilitation Center in midtown Manhattan. “There were a lot of toxins in the air, a lot of things that are very hard to clean out of the lungs, things like fiberglass and asbestos. If you inhale those things in large quantities, it’s very difficult for the body to recover from that completely.”

    Greenspan has conducted a number of breathing tests on New Yorkers and expressed concern that many people don’t know that pulmonary rehabilitation is a helpful treatment option. He explained that some victims won’t even show any signs of disease for years.

    “Smokers can smoke for 25 years before they become symptomatic,” he says. “I think we are going to see a similar trend for people who were exposed to 9/11.”

    No agency has tracked the number of former residents like Canfield who have since left New York and fanned out across the globe, nor is there an agency outside of state lines devoted to meeting their health-care needs. At best, former residents are advised to download a treatment guideline from the NYCDOH Web site and pass it on to their doctors. Canfield, who has no health insurance, tells me that he doesn’t plan on seeing a specialist anytime soon.

    “I just treat myself if I have to–just eat some soup and my veggies, you know?” he says. “I don’t have money to go to a doctor.”

    Even those who conducted air sampling in 2001 have suffered. While the EPA was conducting its own measurements, outdoor air had to be tested for radioactive materials, too, and that required the help of an elite group of government scientists from the National Nuclear Security Administration (NNSA).

    Before 9/11, Steve Centore ran four miles a day, led an active family life as the father of three boys and a daughter, and held a security clearance earned from more than 25 years in government service. As a physicist with NNSA, he was among the first sent onto the scene following 9/11. The New York City Department of Health asked Centore to conduct air sampling at Ground Zero, but when he showed up at their makeshift command center on Chambers Street, the NYCDOH simply handed him a hard hat and a painter’s mask and told him to get to work.

    “We weren’t worried about contamination, and we were told we didn’t need respirators,” Centore says. Even though he was a scientist, he still had to rely on the EPA’s findings for his own safety.

    Centore spent the next four months working among the steaming ruins, looking for radioactive material in both the pile and the debris being carted off to various sites. The radioactive air samplings came back negative–he claims everything had been burned up and swept into the air.

    Centore didn’t think much about the cough he had developed until several months later, when it got so persistent that he ruptured a blood vessel in his upper torso.

    “It turned half my chest black and blue,” he says.

    The bruise initiated a succession of doctor’s visits, but with little relief. By 2005 Centore was a different man–not just physically but mentally. He could no longer exercise, and he seemed detached much of the time. His list of medications steadily increased. For the first time in his life, he began drinking heavily. His wife began to take notice of strange behavior.

    “She would find me in the middle of the night standing in the driveway, wearing my pajamas and shaking,” Centore says. A psychiatrist gave him a diagnosis of post-traumatic stress disorder and put him on psychotropic medications for his panic attacks. He took a leave of absence from work, knowing that he would probably never return.

    By the spring of 2006, however, a more serious set of symptoms emerged. Centore’s organs began deteriorating. First his gallbladder failed him, then his spleen and liver began to malfunction. He would require a liver transplant eventually.

    “I started bleeding everywhere–out of my ears, mouth, penis, and anus, and none of the doctors could figure out why,” Centore says. “I was in the hospital for four weeks, and I can’t tell you how many colonoscopies I had in that time.”

    When Centore asked the doctors if he could leave the hospital after four weeks’ worth of testing, he was surprised by their answer. Centore had been moved to number one in line on the liver transplant list, and doctors told him that he might only have hours to live. A liver was harvested in time, and Centore survived the operation. It has taken him a while to be weaned down from 34 daily medications to only 19, but he’s grateful he has his life. Although he believes his health problems are related to 9/11 contaminants, he no longer holds grudges.

    “Every once in a while I still have panic attacks,” Centore says, “and I go to the doctor all the time, at least once a week. I am not out of the woods by a long shot.”

    Heat up a ballpoint pen, a computer, an office sofa, electric wire, or any other object you might find in a high-rise and there comes a point when you can inhale it. The Twin Towers contained tens of thousands of computer terminals, each housing about four pounds of lead, and an untold number of fluorescent bulbs that contained mercury. Released metal particles from the smoldering pit of the World Trade Center were so fine that they could easily slip past a paper face mask and reach deep into lung tissue, where they are poorly soluble in lung fluid. Metals and glass can remain trapped there for long periods of time and make their way into the heart.


    Image courtesy of NOAA

    Though the list of known toxins released into the air keeps expanding, it doesn’t deter the ongoing investigations of Thomas Cahill, a professor of physics and atmospheric sciences at the University of California at Davis. Cahill has led some of the most exhaustive scientific studies of 9/11-related toxins, and he has discovered a large number of health-threatening substances from air samples taken in the weeks and months after 9/11.

    “There were two separate pollution events, and the first was an initial dust cloud,” Cahill explains. “What must not be forgotten is that the later effects from the smoldering pile were far, far worse.”

    Unlike the publicly lambasted EPA tests and findings, Cahill’s studies, which were published in peer-reviewed forums, were widely praised for their accuracy. Though the University of California at Davis has offered the conclusions to the EPA, the Senate, and New York City health officials, Cahill says he isn’t aware of a single state or federal agency that has acted on his findings. Through sample analysis, Cahill first discovered that 21 percent of the initial dust cloud contained finely powdered, highly caustic cement–thought to be responsible for the “9/11 cough.” Cahill noticed that the heat generated by the piles was converting gases into highly toxic, very fine aerosols. His study “Analysis of Aerosols From World Trade Center Attack” indicated that the contaminated air sometimes descended to ground level over a mile from Ground Zero, far outside the safety zones established by the EPA. Within a few hours’ time, a person exposed to the fumes could ingest toxins that would otherwise take a year to accumulate in a typical environment.

    “The fuming World Trade Center debris pile was a chemical factory that exhaled toxins in a particularly dangerous form that could penetrate deep into the lungs of rescue workers and local residents,” Cahill and his fellow researchers concluded.

    It’s painful just listening to Susan talk on the phone. Her gasps and wheezes and long pauses in conversation give you the impression that she may not make it through an entire conversation, and I caught her on a good day. A bad day means that she won’t even be able to make the trek from Queens to her office downtown.

    “The public isn’t aware of just how bad the effects have been,” Susan says.

    “Susan,” an anonymous source, was one of 386,000 people who worked in Lower Manhattan before the attacks. A week after the attacks, she returned to her job downtown.

    “Within 24 hours of returning to work, I had a problem,” she warbles. “I could not breathe at the office.”

    Even though she had heard the assurances of officials on television, today she bears the signs of serious toxic exposure: internal chemical burns, chronic respiratory infections, and severe asthma attacks.

    For average citizens like Susan, New York City offers only one publicly funded treatment option: the WTC Environmental Health Center (WTC-EHC) at Bellevue Hospital, a new program launched in January 2007 that will expand to treat about 6,000 New Yorkers with 9/11-related health problems. The World Trade Center Medical Monitoring and Treatment Program based at Mount Sinai and the Fire Department of New York’s Bureau of Health Services programs offer services to first responders. Politicians have proposed $1.9 billion in funding over the course of six years.

    “We get about 100 to 200 calls a week,” says Dr. Joan Reibman, director of Bellevue’s WTC-EHC. “We have a couple of hundred people waiting, so to get an appointment takes six weeks.”

    The Bellevue clinic currently serves about 1,300 patients in all. Although the three WTC treatment programs have been praised by Mayor Bloomberg’s office, Reibman explained to me that the WTC treatment programs were initiated by private organizations.

    “Neither the city or the federal government asked anyone to start any of the programs,” she says. Eventually the programs drew the support of city officials and gained funding.

    Critics of the WTC health programs contend that there is no central entity that integrates the gathered information, which could provide a greater understanding of disease incidence as well as a certain level of continuity of treatment.

    “We [the WTC health programs] all work together on the development of guidelines,” Reibman says. “We all share our information with each other. We have different populations, so our questionnaires are different.”

    Although it still makes her ill, Susan continues to plod downtown to work. She says sometimes the air in her workspace makes her eyes burn, but she doesn’t have a choice–disability payments won’t cover the rent or put food on the table.

    “You can’t dwell on it every single minute,” she says. “If people dwelled on what happened, nobody would live downtown because they would be too frightened.”

    Curious about whether the workers and residents of Lower Manhattan are still haunted by health problems like Susan’s, Nina’s, and Teroy’s, I took a walk through the streets surrounding the 9/11 reconstruction site. Although six years have passed since the attacks, the number of people I encountered seemingly with residual health problems surprised me.

    “They told us it would be OK to come back here,” recalls Nicholas Rowe, a silver-haired bartender at a nearby Blarney Stone restaurant and bar. In an Irish lilt, Rowe chose colorful words to denounce the EPA’s assurances, none of them printable.

    “Three months after the attacks, we would open the bar doors each day,” Rowe recalls. “And every time I would wipe off the bar counter, there was black dust. Now I have nose and throat and sinus infections that keep coming back, and I never had those before. My regulars come in with problems too.”

    Just a couple of blocks from the Blarney Stone, I stopped and chatted with Jim Moock, a director of business development at CQG, a market-data provider located in a Broadway high-rise.

    “Some people had painter’s masks on their faces, apparently the cops were giving them out,” Moock said, recalling the day of the attacks. “I didn’t get one. It was chaotic, and the only clear thought I had was, ‘Why didn’t I get one [of the masks]?’”

    Moock developed a dry, hacking cough about two weeks after the attacks. Finally, after two months of aggravation, Moock scheduled a visit with a pulmonologist. That visit has resulted in the first of many subsequent checkups throughout the years.

    “He gives me a test every year or two, and it has shown diminished [lung] capacity,” explained Moock. “He has me on two forms of inhaled medications that I take daily every morning. One is steroid based, and I’ve been on them since 2001.”

    Moock believes he was exposed to the toxic dust in a number of different ways. “When it got to be windy, you would see it blow off the window ledges, and I would be outside and see it land on the sidewalk, and it would just sit there like a clump, not like ashes that would just blow away,” Moock said. “This went on for months. I remember watching it rain on this stuff, and it took a lot of rain to get rid of the dust because it was so dense.”

    Moock claims he hasn’t seen the familiar pockets of dust for a long time, but does it mean the city is now clean and safe?

    In March 2004, in an attempt to “get greater input” regarding the health concerns of New Yorkers, the EPA convened the World Trade Center Expert Technical Review Panel, made up of 18 professionals from academia and public-health organizations. The panel’s goal was to assess any remaining exposures and risks, ascertain any public-health needs that were unmet, and then to offer a recommended course of action. In order to arrive at educated suggestions, the panel needed solid data.

    “The whole process [of gathering data] has been extraordinarily poor in terms of understanding the extent to which people were exposed and possibly remain exposed, and if there are pockets of pollution left,” says Jeanne Stellman, a professor of public health at Columbia University, who served on the panel.

    Various panel members criticized the EPA’s testing methods, suggesting that the data obtained weren’t sound enough to draw the conclusions the EPA had acted on. “There is only a limited amount of data available on what the nature of the exposure was, which varied day to day and hour to hour,” Stellman explains. “There was remarkably little sampling and analysis.”

    With so little data available, the panel wasn’t able to determine if the city still required cleanup or not. Too many questions remained unanswered. “At any rate, the issue of cleanup was never resolved,” Stellman says. “And we never got up to the public-health aspects that we were charged with doing.”

    The EPA disbanded the WTC Expert Technical Review Panel in December 2005 without explanation. Few recommendations made it into the public record as a result. Instead of continuing the panel, the EPA decided to implement a second program launched in December 2006. The plan intended to address the cleaning and abatement needs of residents of Lower Manhattan, in the exact same locations it had addressed in its first criticized attempt.

    In its June 2007 congressional testimony, the Government Accountability Office (GAO) reviewed the WTC panel’s recommendations and corroborated its assessments. The GAO review stated that the EPA’s decision to incorporate only some, rather than all, of the panel’s recommendations undermined the validity of the second program.

    “The majority of panel members do not support EPA’s second program,” the GAO report concluded. “[The second program] was not responsive to the concerns of residents and workers . . . it was scientifically and technically flawed.”

    Robert Gulack, an attorney with the federal government, thought he had escaped the toxic environment caused by 9/11. When his department relocated into the Woolworth Building following the destruction of 7 World Trade Center, it took him only a few days to notice the effect on his breathing.

    “Three days later I woke up with a severe asthma attack,” Gulack says. “More than half of my coworkers raised their hands during a meeting and said they had illness since coming into the building.”

    To the alarm of his coworkers, Gulack began wearing a double-canister respirator to work every day. The precautions couldn’t deter the onset of problems from the contamination he had already suffered, though.

    “I was certified as a scuba diver, and I had great lung capacity,” he says. “Now a scan shows damage to my lungs and hyperreactivity to irritants.” Once Gulack was rushed to the hospital for pneumonia following a number of bronchial infections. Now his illness carries a diagnosis of reactive airway disorder.

    Gulack explained that even though his agency had received assurances about the building’s air quality from both the landlord and the EPA, later testing (by a private company) proved the area was dangerously contaminated.
     


    Image courtesy of CDC

    “I know that I was exposed to things that no human being should be exposed to,” Gulack says. “Not only have I been exposed to asbestos but probably a number of other life-threatening contaminants. I’m 53, I have a wife and kids, and I don’t want to be taken away from them. There was no reason to subject me to those dangers–no justification for this at all.”

    As a union steward, Gulack has advocated for employee health concerns and has closely monitored the EPA’s actions since 9/11. He believes that instead of learning from all its mistakes, the EPA remains unprepared for another crisis.

    “New victims are being claimed every day as a result of this contamination,” Gulack says. “The EPA has officially taken their bad choices and made it their model. Now all crises will be handled politically, through the White House.”

    The EPA’s calamitous handling of the 9/11 cleanup brings White House involvement into question. The damning OIG report showed that important public-health information was held back by Bush’s Council on Environmental Quality, and evidence also suggests that critical press releases were altered, making them contradict scientific fact. As the report noted, “the White House Council on Environmental Quality . . . influenced, through the collaboration process, the information that EPA communicated to the public through its early press releases when it convinced EPA to add reassuring statements and delete cautionary ones.”

    Gulack’s concerns are substantiated by another indictment of the EPA–this time in their handling of the hurricane Katrina disaster in New Orleans. A June 2007 report from the GAO contains an eerily reminiscent passage: “EPA’s assurance that the public health is being protected from the risks associated with the inhalation of asbestos fibers is limited because the agency has not deployed air monitors in and around New Orleans neighborhoods where demolition and renovation activities are concentrated.”

    Within sight of Ground Zero quietly stands the Statue of Liberty, seemingly ignored in our post-9/11 world. But like an oracle from a distant time, she offers prophetic words of concern. In the shadow of the attacks, the inscription at her base no longer seems to address immigrants but rather speaks directly to New Yorkers who now find themselves disenfranchised and suffocating with disease: “Give me your tired, your poor/Your huddled masses yearning to breathe free.”

    Yet some leaders are speaking up for sickened New Yorkers. Representatives Carolyn Maloney and Vito Fossella of New York introduced the James Zadroga 9/11 Health and Compensation Act, which would expand the current health programs for first responders, area residents, office workers, and students. New York representative Jerrold Nadler tirelessly champions decisive action on behalf of New Yorkers who are still susceptible to toxins.

    “We have to clean this up; it was never done properly,” says Nadler, who also says cleanup efforts could run several billion dollars, but there is no exact figure because nobody knows how extensive the contamination is and if it extends to Brooklyn as well.

    Because adequate testing has yet to be conducted, nobody knows for certain just how toxic Lower Manhattan remains, but there are plenty of indicators that the 9/11 attacks are still dismantling the downtown infrastructure. Two former Deutsche Bank buildings downtown will soon be demolished as a direct result of 9/11 contamination, and more demolitions are expected.

    “To clean it up, it costs between $10,000 and $20,000 per apartment,” Nadler says about the current price of adequate cleaning. “Are you going to ask a resident to pay that?”

    On June 25, 2007, former EPA administrator Christie Todd Whitman testified before a congressional hearing and repeatedly denied any wrongdoing or culpability in the EPA’s handling of the disaster. Nadler, who represents nearly all of Lower Manhattan, presided over the hearings.

    “Let’s be clear: There are people to blame,” Whitman said. “They are the terrorists who attacked the United States.”

    Nadler offered me a distinction.

    “I divide the population of affected people in different ways,” he says. “First are the ones that were killed, and you can blame the terrorists for those. Then there was the plume–we think about 30,000 people were caught in it. And those people were also sickened by the terrorists. But the others are first responders on the pile, and most of those are sick due to exposure–there you can blame public officials who permitted them to work on the pile.” Nadler also includes area residents and workers among the victims of public officials.

    During the hearings, Whitman acknowledged that some first responders were sickened by the contamination because they did not wear respirators.

    “After the first three days, it is not a rescue operation,” Nadler says. “It is simply a cleanup, and there is no excuse for not doing it properly. At the Pentagon site, nobody got sick there because they enforced the safety laws.” Workers who did not comply with safety regulations were not permitted on-site at the Pentagon-run cleanup.

    “Every action taken by the EPA during the response to this horrific event was designed to provide the most comprehensive protection and the most accurate information to the residents of Manhattan,” Whitman stated in a press release. Her remarks, however, only served to enrage already traumatized New Yorkers.

    Through a spokesperson, Whitman declined to answer any questions for this article, instead offering a prepared statement citing her congressional testimony.

    “It is clear there are laws and regulations that were in place, which, had they been followed, would have prevented all this,” Nadler says. “They weren’t followed.”

    While the courts try to determine who is responsible for the environmental debacle following 9/11, countless New Yorkers continue to live and work near Lower Manhattan with the assumption that it is safe. The dust is now out of sight, out of mind, and possibly in their lungs, hearts, and bloodstreams.

    Science is being distorted to promote political and corporate agendas

    1

    By Mike Adams

    In the United States today, science is no longer a pure study. The science primarily publicized today is science that supports the interest of business. You see this in many areas, but most notably in medical and environmental science. Let’s start with the environment, because the censorship of environmental science has been blatant and extreme.

    Under the Bush Administration, government-employed scientists are routinely told they cannot report results indicating the progression of global warming. The United States is the last among industrialized nations to claim that carbon dioxide emissions produced by human civilization have no impact whatsoever on the world climate. This is an utterly ridiculous position, and yet one that U.S. policymakers insist upon. These policymakers go out of their way to censor scientists whose data and conclusions might run counter to the desired belief.

    The United States is the only advanced nation that refuses to ratify the Kyoto treaty, and, to support its justification, the U.S. government has for a long time insisted there’s no such thing as global warming. To make that claim, it must distort science. The science clearly shows that human civilization is having a marked and destructive impact on the global ecosystem.

    Medicine is another field where so-called science stops resembling science. Instead, it becomes propaganda designed to sell drugs. The clinical trials used by the Food and Drug Administration to make drug approval decisions are conducted almost entirely by the drug companies themselves. These companies go out of their way to hire scientists willing to design and run these studies to produces precisely the result that the drug companies want. This is easy to accomplish; any researcher refusing to play along with this fraudulent science game is not offered additional work. In the worst cases, they are terminated and blackballed from the industry.

    This manipulation of drug trials is routine today. Drug companies are able to support almost any conclusion, no matter how ridiculous or preposterous, by pumping enough money into the studies. They can then picking the studies they want to forward to the FDA and make sure that on-the-take researchers are involved at every stage of the game. The FDA then bases its drug approvals on these junk science manipulations.

    Junk science and the discrediting of alternative medicine

    While distorted science is used to promote synthetic chemicals that are extremely dangerous and almost universally ineffective, the same sort of distortion is used to attack anything that could compete with high-profit pharmaceuticals. Bad science is used to attack vitamins, nutrients, and all natural therapies that powerful corporations can’t patent to make real money.

    Vitamin E was routinely discredited in the mainstream media, for example, using remarkably bad science. Researchers tested synthetic, low-dose versions of vitamin E on populations with high risks of heart attack or stroke. When deaths occurred within the sample population group, the headlines read, “Vitamin E causes Heart Attack!” It’s a preposterous conclusion; but this is how deeply distorted science has become today in its quest to promote the interests of corporations. (In truth, researchers weren’t even using vitamin E, they were using a synthetic chemical with a molecular structure that isn’t the same as vitamin E from plants.)

    Residents of the United States like to think they live in a nation based on solid science. Although there is plenty of rigorous science taking place within the United States, much of the most important science produced today is based entirely on creating the illusion that something sold by a corporation is good, or that new regulations that require businesses to conduct themselves with environmental responsibility are not necessary. It’s interesting that science always seems to reflect the interests of corporations here in the United States, and rarely the interests of the People, the planet or the future of human civilization.

    Consider NASA

    How good is science in the United States? Let’s take a look at one of the most prestigious scientific organizations, the National Aeronautics Space Administration, better known as NASA. NASA’s science is so bad that the organization spent $300 million to launch — and crash — a satellite into planet Mars. One of the scientists failed to convert the metric system to the English system, and as a result, some of the navigation computations were off and $300 million went up in a cloud of red Martian dust.

    Last year, NASA deleted the phrase, “to understand and protect our home planet” from the NASA mission statement. Apparently, protecting Earth is not high on the priorities list for an agency that has become the Science Mythology Department of the United States government. Ever since Bush appointed NASA administrator Michael Griffin to the head post in 2005, NASA’s scientific reputation has nosedived into the ground faster than a poorly programmed Mars orbiter. The question on everybody’s mind is, simply: What the heck happened to NASA? And why is the agency’s top bureaucrat now officially denying that global warming is a problem?

    It’s true: In a recorded interview that aired on National Public Radio a few weeks ago, NASA head Michael Griffin actually said, on the air, that it was arrogant and unfair to believe that global warming was a problem that needed solving. This left all the other NASA scientists gasping for air and e-mail blasting their resumes out to private-sector institutions that still remember what “scientific thinking” really means.

    NASA is also the organization that launched the twin robot rovers to Mars, also at a cost of several hundred million dollars. Before the launch, NASA didn’t bother to test the robots to see if they could take pictures without overloading their memory and constantly rebooting. NASA scientists apparently decided they would only start debugging the software that controls the Mars Rover after the robot was on the surface of Mars. It was a laughable mistake. By some miracle, NASA scientists were able to make the rovers work, but only at great expense and while running the risk of total mission failure.

    NASA was a great organization back in the 1960s and pulled off some amazing feats, but today it’s a joke; a bloated bureaucratic agency whose only skill seems to be burning up taxpayer dollars in the high atmospheres of various planets. I’m not saying rocket science is easy, but at least NASA could bother to test its equipment before rocketing it off to distant planets.

    The (fake) search for a cure

    When it comes to cancer, the “search for the cure” is also a sad joke. We’ve had tens of thousands of people working on a cure for cancer for decades. The “search for the cure” industry is absolutely huge, and yet with all the scientists and all the money and all the research, we still have no cure from the world of medicine. Not only that, they have delivered no cures for Alzheimer’s, diabetes, depression, fibromyalgia, chronic fatigue syndrome, heart disease, strokes, dementia, osteoporosis, or kidney disease. In fact, after decades of research and tens of billions of dollars in funding, conventional medicine has cured nothing!

    What have the scientists been doing all this time with all this money? Members of the public are running around in circles raising money, funding the “race for the cure,” dumping their hard-earned cash into a huge financial black hole of so-called research. We’re standing by waiting for cures from a scientific community that, it turns out, isn’t even interested in curing disease. The industry is far more interested in treating and managing disease, because that’s where the profits are found.

    If the US medical research companies were interested in real science, they would stop trying to research the disease and start trying to research the causes of the disease. If you identify the causes of cancers — which is quite possible without a $100 million government grant — then you can halt the diseases. At least 90 percent of all cancers are directly preventable, for example, through simple low-cost or free solutions. There is no need for cancer to be an epidemic in our society today. Cancer is easy to prevent. Recent research shows that vitamin D supplements (or sunlight exposure, which produces vitamin D), slash cancer risk by an astonishing 77% in women (and that includes ALL cancers).

    There will never be a chemical cure for cancer, because cancer is not a disease based on germs, an infection, parasite or virus. There is no chemical that can cure cancer, but there are many natural remedies and prevention strategies that very effectively eliminate cancer. Scientists aren’t looking for those, however. They’re steeped in the world of synthetic chemical medicine.

    Where has the real science gone?

    These are just a few examples of the ways in which America’s version of science is failing. Science today seems largely dedicated to conning people out of their money or conning people into believing falsehoods about health or the environment. Junk science has become the tool of corporate and government con artists, and sadly, the public isn’t educated well enough about skeptical thinking to know the difference between real science and junk science. For example, few people understand the difference between absolute vs. relative statistics on the efficacy of drugs, and because of that, drug companies are able to convince people their drugs are effective for nearly everyone when, in reality, many drugs only work on about 5% of the population.

    Science needs to divorce itself from business interests and politics. If we are to engage in real science in America, it needs to be based on the quest for knowledge and understanding, independent of business or political interests. We should not predetermine what scientific outcomes we wish to see; we should learn to adapt and evolve as a civilization, allowing science to teach us important things about ourselves and our world.

    Because science without ethics isn’t science at all… it’s just propaganda for either profit or power.

    Prescription drugs cause nutritional deficiencies

    0

    All prescription drugs have unintended side effects, and many drugs deplete the body of essential nutrients. Today, most consumers are not being told about these drug-induced nutritional deficiencies, and they continue taking pharmaceuticals without knowing they are often leaving their body in a dangerous state of nutrient depletion that can lead to chronic degenerative disease. Cholesterol-lowering statin drugs, for example, greatly interfere with Coenzyme Q10 production (a nutrient essential for cellular energy), but instead of being told to take supplemental CoQ10, many patients suffering from fatigue and exhaustion on statin drugs are simply diagnosed with another disease and given yet another prescription drug to take.

    Antidepressant drugs, as another example, interfere with the metabolism of carbohydrates. Most people taking antidepressants are deficient in the B vitamins (especially folic acid). Supplementing with B vitamins has been found to either make the antidepressant drugs seem more effective or eliminate the need for the drugs altogether.

    The NewsTarget DrugWatch database aims to teach consumers how to protect themselves from the nutrient depletions caused by pharmaceuticals by compensating with nutrient supplementation through either foods or dietary supplements. When pharmaceuticals cause an accelerated loss of vitamins, minerals or other important nutrients, consumers can protect their health by either finding a natural way to end dependence on the pharmaceutical or by supplementing with the proper nutrients to avoid the inevitable onset of nutritional deficiency diseases.

    The NewsTarget DrugWatch resource also lists warnings about which nutrients should be avoided while taking certain drugs, along with notes about which nutrients may actually potentiate the pharmaceuticals, allowing patients to safely take a lower dose (under the supervision of a qualified health professional, of course). Herbal interactions are listed, covering herbs like Ginkgo Biloba and St. John’s Wort, among many others.

    Over 540 brand-name drugs are listed in the NewsTarget DrugWatch database, including Amoxicillin, Celebrex, Prozac, Ibuprofen, Risperdal and others. Each health caution is backed by cited references. The data for this consumer guide was provided by Applied Health (www.AppliedHealth.com), a nutritional research and solutions company specializing in restorative nutritional therapies.

    The NewsTarget DrugWatch database is updated monthly to reflect the latest research about drug-induced nutrient deficiencies. It is financially supported by the presence of Google advertising on each page, keeping it free to the public.

    The NewsTarget DrugWatch database can be accessed here:
    http://www.NewsTarget.com/DrugWatch_Home.html

    ###

    About the author: Mike Adams is a consumer health advocate with a passion for teaching people how to improve their health He has authored and published thousands of articles, interviews, consumers guies, and books on topics like health and the environment, reaching millions of readers with information that is saving lives and improving personal health around the world. Adams is a trusted, independent journalist who receives no money or promotional fees whatsoever to write about other companies’ products. In 2007, Adams launched EcoLEDs, a maker of super bright LED light bulbs that are 1000% more energy efficient than incandescent lights. He also founded an environmentally-friendly online retailer called BetterLifeGoods.com that uses retail profits to help support consumer advocacy programs. He’s also a noted pioneer in the email marketing software industry, having been the first to launch an HTML email newsletter technology that has grown to become a standard in the industry. Adams volunteers his time to serve as the executive director of the Consumer Wellness Center, a 501(c)3 non-profit organization, and pursues hobbies such as Pilates, Capoeira, nature macrophotography and organic gardening. Known on the ‘net as ‘the Health Ranger,’ Adams shares his ethics, mission statements and personal health statistics at www.HealthRanger.org

    http://www.newstarget.com/022022.html

    Author under gag order assails producer, ABC for ‘Path to 9/11’

    Peter Lance

    Last Wednesday, in a front page LA Times Calendar piece “Clinton and the missing DVD,” reporter Martin Miller gave voice to the latest series of charges from the mini-series’ neo-con writer/producer Cyrus Nowrasteh who now claims that out of deference to Hillary Clinton, ABC is shelving the five hour mini-series which was hyper-critical of her husband’s counter-terrorism record.

    Nowrasteh, an Iranian-American who wrote the much criticized Showtime docudrama The Day Reagan Was Shot, has enjoyed a second career over the last year, working the right-wing lecture circuit and giving interviews to conservative webmags like FrontPageMag.com charging that ABC had watered down his original vision and that he’s received “death threats” for speaking out.

    In his latest FrontPage booking, Nowrasteh whines, “Last year at this time it was a coordinated effort from the Clintons, Sandy Berger, the DNC, and the far-left loony blogosphere to swamp ABC with emails and phone calls and threats to get them to block the broadcast, or recut the movie. Since then it’s been more subtle. I know there have been phone calls to top execs at Disney from President Clinton himself, and friends of the Clintons, of which there are many in Hollywood.”

    Seemingly without challenge, the LA Times’ Miller reported that “The $40 million… ABC miniseries, which recently received seven Emmy nominations…” is listed as “currently unavailable” on Amazon.com. “With no date for the release, questions are being raised about whether political pressure is behind its current status as a stalled or discarded DVD project.”

    Miller seemed so taken with Nowrasteh that he elevated him to the status of First Amendment gladiator: “Whatever anybody may think about me or this movie,” he quotes Cyrus, “This is a dangerous precedent, to allow a movie to be buried… I think the town needs to stand up.”

    The other side of The Path to 9/11 story

    As the author of one of the three books on which The Path was based, I’m now weighing in — despite a gag order – to suggest that ABC may have other reasons for shelving Nowrasteh’s Clinton bash; a mini-series that virtually blames 9/11 on the ex-President’s failures to get bin Laden, yet gives a pass to Bush 41 for failing to stop the first World Trade Center bombing and Bush 43 for “The Day Of;” arguably the greatest defense failure in US history.

    How do I know this? First because my book 1000 Years For Revenge, was one of the three works on which ABC based the mini. They acquired it for a quarter of a million dollars in 2005 under threat of litigation, after they’d lost the book in a bidding war with NBC.

    Nowrasteh then proceeded to launder most of my critical findings on negligence by the FBI and the two Bush administrations and give Path a twisted pro-Bureau slant through the eyes of ex-ABC News correspondent John Miller, who now works as Assistant Director of Public Affairs for the FBI.

    Like Miller I was a former correspondent for ABC News. In the mid 1980’s, I won two Emmys for my investigative reporting on 20/20 and multiple awards for reporting on Nightline and World News Tonight. After almost a decade as a screenwriter, I returned to investigative reporting full time after Sept. 11.

    I’ve published three investigative books for HarperCollins on the failures of the FBI and Justice Department on the “path” to 9/11 including Cover Up: What The Government is Still Hiding about the War on Terror (2004) and Triple Cross: How bin Laden’s Master Spy Penetrated the CIA, the FBI and the Green Berets (2006).

    1000 Years, which ABC bought, was read by 9/11 Commission Chairman Tom Kean, who arranged for me to testify in March of 2004. Kean became an advisor to ABC for The Path and in early 2005, ABC’s Touchstone Television division entered into a competition with NBC to acquire the book.

    The bidding war

    Nowrasteh begged me to let him “convince” me that he would be the best interpreter of my work, which was hypercritical of the FBI’s New York Office (NYO) and the Office of The U.S. Attorney for the Southern District of New York (SDNY), the two bin Laden “offices of origin.”

    At the end of January, 2005, he met me and proffered a copy of 1000 Years, which he had dog-eared and underlined throughout. He said that he was interested in telling all three of the untold intersecting stories from the book:

    • the saga of how Ramzi Yousef, the original WTC bomber, had set the 9/11 plot in motion in Manila in 1994, concocting the “planes as missile” scenario later executed by his uncle Khalid Shaikh Mohammed (KSM);
    • the story of FBI special agent Nancy Floyd who’d almost stopped Yousef as he built the first WTC bomb in 1992 only to have her career tanked by superiors in the NYO; and
    • the Ronnie Bucca tragedy. An ex-Green Beret and firefighter with the FDNY’s elite Rescue One, Bucca later became a fire marshal and had top secret security clearance via an Army Reserve M.P. unit where he was posted at The Defense Intelligence Analysis Center at Bolling AFB in D.C.

    There, he saw the raw intelligence on how the FBI had burned Floyd and blown multiple opportunities to stop bin Laden’s juggernaut on Bush 41’s watch. More important, he uncovered probative evidence of an al Qaeda “mole” in the FDNY in 1999 only to have the intel rejected by Det. Lou Napoli, an NYPD cop assigned to the NYO’s Joint Terrorist Task Force.

    It was Napoli and his hapless partner FBI Special Agent John Anticev, whom, I reported, had failed to track members of Yousef’s bombing cell in the fall of 1992 after Floyd got a tip from undercover asset Emad Salem. It was a lead that could have led straight to Yousef’s Jersey City bomb factory and interdicted the plot which killer six and injured 1000 a month into Clinton’s presidency.

    Napoli and Anticev were Salem’s control agents, but rarely available to debrief him, so Floyd (working Russian counter-intelligence) had to do all the heavy lifting.

    For an overview of my findings in all three books click here.

    During Cyrus’s pitch to me he brought up John Miller’s Hyperion/Disney book The Cell which covered much of the same ground. “This guy didn’t even mention Nancy Floyd,” Nowrasteh snapped, disparaging Miller. It was a glaring sin of omission. Like telling the story of John Dillinger’s takedown without mentioning FBI agent Melvin Purvis.

    The “only book” ABC wants

    Later when NBC upped the ante in the bidding war, Cyrus sent me this e-mail bad mouthing the competition:

    NBC is out “mopping up” every book they can get their hands on… acquiring nearly a dozen properties. The impression I get Peter, is that your book is pretty low on the totem-pole of NBC priorities.

    ABC asked last week if there are any books I’m interested in and I told them one: “1000 Years For Revenge” by Peter Lance! That’s it. That’s all. The only book I’ve asked them to go after. You’re it. On our project you’ll be working directly with me. Period. On their project you’ll just be another participant in the gang-bang. – Cyrus

    Ultimately, I decided to sell the book to Kevin Reilly, then President of NBC, who had acquired it earlier when he was at FX. The deal was for a $50,000 up front option against another $200,00.00 when the mini-series aired.

    For the next three months I worked as a consultant to NBC’s exec producer Graham Yost (“Band of Brothers”; “Speed”). NBC paid me $65,000 of the anticipated $250K, but in June of 2005, due to a ratings slump, the project was shelved.

    Rewriting “History”

    Now, in July as the cameras began rolling on what ABC first called “the History Project,” something told me that I should get a look at Cyrus’s script. When I turned to the first page of “Night One,” I saw that Nowrasteh had lifted much of my book, scene by scene, dialogue for dialogue. He’d even titled the first two hours, “The Mozart of Terror,” the name I’d coined for Yousef.

    But beyond the hijacking of 1000 Years, what was most galling, was how Cyrus, hungry for some book on which to hang his story, had now embraced The Cell, the very book he’d bad-mouthed to me and elevated John Miller, who was about to take a job as chief FBI flak, to a lead character.

    Worse, he’d taken the hapless Det. Lou Napoli — who had ignored Ronnie Bucca’s warnings and failed to follow the WTC bombers — and turned him into a lead member of the FBI posse out to stop bin Laden, a bullpen of real and fictional characters now led by John O’Neill.

    Unable to legally acquire my book, Nowrasteh had simply appropriated it and used what he wanted from it and then set up The Cell with its pro-FBI slant as the “based on” underlying work for his re-telling of “History.”

    It was such a wholesale lift that I convinced L. Stanton Larry Stein, one of LA’s top entertainment litigators, to represent me against my former network. In October, 2005 he wrote this letter to ABC:

    “It is particularly insidious that in much of his script Mr. Nowrasteh mirrors Mr. Lance’s accurate portrayal of FBI failures — then, by utilizing the character of Mr. Miller as a narrative device, he ends up turning FBI failures into successes.

    “One of the most glaring examples is a long sequence at the end of the two-hour script (encompassing 45 of 238 scenes and 22 of 96 script pages) in which Mr. Nowrasteh — per John Miller’s point of view — recounts the capture of Ramzi Yousef, the original World Trade Center bomber and architect of the 9/11 attacks on whom Mr. Lance reported uniquely in his Book.

    “The incident, Mr. Lance accurately reported, was directed entirely by agents of the State Department’s Diplomatic Security Services (“DSS”) and agents from the Drug Enforcement Administration (“DEA”) with minimal FBI involvement. Yet Mr. Nowrasteh, per Mr. Miller, has John O’Neill, the FBI official elevated to the role of central hero in the mini-series, directing the Yousef takedown operation — when, in fact, as Mr. Lance reported, the FBI had no up-front involvement in the apprehension of Yousef.

    “The distorted pro-FBI slant in the script is particularly troubling in light of the fact that Mr. Miller recently took a job as chief spokesman for the FBI in Washington, D.C.”

    It would have been bad enough if ABC had emphasized the “drama” and minimized the “documentary” aspects of the mini, but network brass claimed that it was strictly fact-based, with “The 9/11 Commission Report” as its primary source.

    In a July 2005 Variety piece announcing that Gov. Kean had been signed on as an advisor, ABC Entertainment President Steve McPherson” compared Path to its “seminal ABC pic” The Day After. Variety quoted Path exec producer Marc Platt as promising that “his miniseries will not be a Hollywood-style overdramatization of the events leading to 9/11.”

    “If you read the (Commission) report, sadly, it reads like fiction,” he said. “It’s riveting and compelling just based on the facts. One need not bring anything more to it. The events speak for themselves.”

    The settlement and the gag order

    Finally, after months of negotiating with ABC, Larry Stein called me in December of 2005 to say that my former network had agreed to pay a settlement of $250,000.00 to acquire the mini-series rights to 1000 Years For Revenge.

    But the deal contained a “non-disparagement” clause and gag order. In order to keep me from telling the real truth behind their distortion of my work, ABC would hold off paying me the final $50K until a month after The Path to 9/11 aired.

    Though imdb.com properly credits my book as one of the three source works for the mini-series, ABC’s website mentions only The Cell and Sam Katz’s book Relentless Pursuit which ABC was to forced to buy after I informed Katz that Cyrus had lifted “Relentless” for his coverage of the Yousef arrest.

    Until now I’ve been silent about all of this, but given Nowrasteh’s allegations, it’s time the full truth came out.

    For me the conflict with ABC was never solely about the theft of a book. It was a matter of principle. It represented the utter distortion of an investigative reporter’s work by a network’s entertainment division.

    In 1000 Years, I was equally critical of the FBI’s failures across three administrations, yet Nowrasteh chose to put virtually all of the blood on Bill Clinton’s hands.

    In his fifth script draft, just days before production began, he utilized every possible opportunity to slam Clinton, National Security Advisor Sandy Berger and Secretary of State Madeline Albright, but in the last two hours, on the day of 9/11, he left George W. Bush virtually unscathed.

    The script never even included the “deer in the headlights” performance by Dubya, the Commander in Chief who stayed in a Florida schoolroom for almost 10 minutes after he’d been told by his Chief of Staff that “America is under attack.”

    The missing war games and the F-16’s

    Cyrus dramatized multiple scenes with Lt. Col Dawn Deskins, the mission crew chief at NEADS — The Northeast Air Defense Sector of NORAD — who was monitoring the hijackings of AA and UA flights that fateful morning. But he never mentioned the fact that at least three war games were in progress and that Deskins became confused.

    Though he referenced “F-15 Eagles” which “streak across the sky” to establish a “combat air patrol of Manhattan,” Cyrus failed to underscore the significance of the two fighters being scrambled out of Otis Air National Guard (ANG) base on Cape Cod, 188 miles from Ground Zero; arriving too late to interdict UA #175 which had hit the South Tower.

    By the time he’d written the script, Nowrasteh had read my second 9/11 book Cover Up and he knew — per a Dec. 5, 2003 Bergent Record story quoting his advisor Gov. Tom Kean – that there were two F-16’s from an identical ANG base in Atlantic City which could have reached Manhattan in under eight minutes that day.

    But they were never scrambled by NEADS or NORAD; a glaring omission left out of Kean’s 9/11 Commission Report that any desk assistant for ABC News could have uncovered with a simple search on Google.

    Predictably, the script ended with actual video of Bush addressing a joint session of Congress of Sept. 20th 2001: “I will not forget this wound to our country and those who inflicted it. I will not yield; I will not rest; I will not relent in waging this struggle for freedom and security for the American people.”

    Per Cyrus’s stage direction: “As CONGRESS stands; applauds…” he FADES TO BLACK.

    Asking ABC to set the record straight

    Five years after the greatest mass murder in US history, the network that I served proudly as a correspondent used my investigative work to whitewash the true story and spun it in a way that favored the current administration.

    As part of my settlement, I demanded a meeting with ABC’s mini-series vice president Quinn Taylor. He agreed to see me in his office in Burbank on the Disney lot in late February of 2006, six months before “The Path” aired. I warned him that ABC might look foolish using my book which was highly critical of the Bureau and then fronting the docu-drama with John Miller, the FBI’s chief PR man.

    I urged Taylor to fix the wholesale distortions in Nowrasteh’s script and warned that history would judge the network harshly — given its celebrated news division — if it put out what amounted to a valentine to the very Bureau that blew multiple chances to prevent the attacks.

    Taylor smiled and assured me that “we had lawyers in my office each night before we shot to insure that this script was factually bulletproof. I’ve been over every line of dialogue and stage direction with a fine tooth comb.”

    I suspect now, in the cold light of day — that ABC has come to its senses. Surely someone in the news division, which boasts savvy correspondents like Brian Ross, has filtered word of the script’s factual holes up to the Disney brass.

    If the Path to 9/11 was released on DVD in the form that it was telecast, the Clintons wouldn’t be the only losers. ABC’s well-earned reputation for news excellence could be irreparably harmed as well. After all, the average viewer doesn’t easily separate fact from fiction when the ABC logo appears on the lower third of the screen.

    On the sixth anniversary of 9/11, it’s time for ABC to own up to the great disservice it did to this country in rewriting “history” for its project. And Cyrus Nowrasteh, ought to come clean about how he turned ABC’s most important mini-series since The Day After, into a work worthy of Leni Riefenstahl.

    Arctic Ice the Size of Florida Gone in a Week

    0

    Arctic Ice Florida

    Scientists report that arctic ice the size of the state of Florida has melted in the last six days. (ABCNEWS)

    By CLAYTON SANDELL

    An area of Arctic sea ice the size of Florida has melted away in just the last six days as melting at the top of the planet continues at a record rate.

    2007 has already broken the record for the lowest amount of sea ice ever recorded, say scientists, smashing the old record set in 2005.

    Currently, there are about 1.63 million square miles of Arctic ice, according to the National Snow and Ice Data Center in Boulder, Colo. That is well below the record of 2.05 million square miles set two summers ago and could drop lower before the final numbers are in.

    North Pole’s Ice Disappears

    In just the last six days, researchers say 69,000 square miles of Arctic ice has disappeared, roughly the size of the Sunshine State.

    Scientists say the rate of melting in 2007 has been unprecedented, and veteran ice researchers worry the Arctic is on track to be completely ice-free much earlier than previous research and climate models have suggested.

    “If you had asked me a few years ago about how fast the Arctic would be ice free in summer, I would have said somewhere between about 2070 and the turn of the century,” said scientist Mark Serreze, polar ice expert at the NSIDC. “My view has changed. I think that an ice-free Arctic as early as 2030 is not unreasonable.”

    Sea ice melt will likely reach the absolute minimum in the next few days as temperatures at the North Pole cool and refreezing begins.

    Worldwide Climate Implications

    Melting sea ice, unlike land-based glaciers like the ones in Greenland and elsewhere, does not raise sea level. But it does play a major role in regulating the planet’s climate by affecting air and ocean currents.

    “It will shift some of the weather patterns in ways that we are just beginning to understand,” said Robert Correll, a scientist who chairs the Arctic Climate Impact Assessment and is also the climate change director at the Heinz Center for Science, Economics and the Environment in Washington, D.C.

    Correll said that white sea ice also acts as a mirror at the top of the planet, reflecting much of the sun’s energy back into space. As it melts, it reveals darker water that absorbs more energy from the sun — further warming the ocean in a process scientists call a “feedback.”

    “If there is no ice, the ocean is going to continue to heat, and that is going to accelerate the global warming process,” said Correll.

    In coastal villages throughout the Arctic, less sea ice also means less protection from wind and waves that erode the shoreline. Less ice also means less habitat for animals like polar bears and other marine animals.

    Last week, the United States Geological Survey issued a report that found if the ice continued to decline at the current rate, two-thirds of the world’s polar bear population will disappear by 2050.

    “Our results do give me some concern,” said Steve Armstrup, a Polar Bear Project Leader with the USGS. “In Northern Alaska, where I’ve been working for these years, there may not be polar bears. So as Polar bears go, that probably reflects to a great extent a lot of things that are happening to other organisms in the Arctic system.”

    Northwest Passage Opening

    The melting ice is also opening up the fabled Northwest Passage, long-sought by explorers and shipping companies as a short cut between Europe and East Asia.

    Historically, that debate has been largely theoretical because the passage has been frozen and impassable. But in August, satellite images showed the passage has now become more navigable than ever, fueling a hot debate between the United States and Canada over who should control it.

    At a summit last month in Montebello, Canada, the leaders of the two nations expressed their disagreement.

    “Canada’s position is that we intend to strengthen our sovereignty in the Arctic area, not only military, but economic, social, environmental and others,” said Canadian Prime Minister Stephen Harper.

    “We believe it’s an international passageway,” President Bush countered a moment later.

    The latest satellite image shows a clear, wide path running through the Arctic that has major implications for global commerce.

    For example, ships that must currently go around South America’s Cape Horn because they are too big to traverse the Panama Canal could save about 10,000 miles out of their shipping route.

    The passage also saves about 5,000 miles when shipping between Europe and Asia.

    Canada, the United States and Denmark are also competing for resources as melting Arctic ice reveals potential deposits of oil and gas.

    A mini-submarine placed a Russian flag at the North Pole last month in a symbolic claim to that country’s share of Arctic resources.

    Environmental groups worry that increased traffic through the Arctic could put the natural resources in jeopardy if there is an oil spill or other disaster in the remote region.

    Bin Laden’s beard baffles chief US spy

    0

    AFP

    Photo from the SITE Intelligence Group shows Al-Qaeda chief Osama bin Laden in a chilling new video. Osama bin Laden's beard seen in a new video tape has baffled the top US spy.(AFP/Site)

     Osama bin Laden’s beard seen in a new video tape featuring the Al-Qaeda supremo has baffled the top US spy.

    The traditional gray beard of the terror mastermind looked trimmed and dyed in black in the video released last week, his first of appearance since October 2004.

    Questions over the elusive Saudi extremist’s beard cropped up at a Congressional hearing Monday featuring top US security experts, including Director of National Intelligence Michael McConnell.

    “First, is this his beard?” Republican Senator Norm Coleman asked the spy chief. “Do we expect that — is it a signal?”

    McConnell swiftly rejected any possibility that the hair in his chin was intended to send any signal to his Al-Qaeda members.

    “So far, we do not think there’s been a signal. He’s done this periodically, as has (Ayman al-) Zawahiri (the group’s second-in-command), and there has not been a correlation necessarily between one of these tapes or a public statement and a particular event,” McConnell said.

    But he wondered whether Bin Laden’s beard was genuine.

    “The big question in the community this morning, ‘Is that beard real,’ because as you know, just a few years ago, the last time he appeared, it was very different,” he said.

    “So we don’t know if it’s dyed and trimmed or real, but that’s one of the things we’re looking at. But no specific message.”

    US ‘delayed UK pull-out from Basra’

    0

    By Thomas Harding in Basra

    The split between the UK and the US over Iraq was further inflamed last night after a senior British officer claimed troops could have withdrawn from Basra Palace five months ago if America had not issued a plea for them to stay.

     
    Brigadier James Bashall, the commander of 1 Mechanised Brigade
    Brigadier James Bashall says it is time for Iraqi military leaders to be ‘self reliant’

    The Army’s commander in Iraq said American pressure caused them to stay in the exposed outpost, after which 11 soldiers were killed and 62 wounded in months of intense fighting.

    British forces were finally pulled out of the palace and back to Basra airport a week ago.

    But Brigadier James Bashall, the commander of 1 Mechanised Brigade, told The Daily Telegraph that the force could have come out of Basra Palace in April “but politics prevented that”.

    The senior officer’s comments come during a trans-Atlantic spat in which American officials have accused Britain of accepting defeat in southern Iraq and watching Basra descend into “all-out gangland warfare”. Brig Bashall said Washington’s request for British forces to stay in Basra came after a security operation codenamed Operation Sinbad had brought relative calm to the city.

    ”In April we could have come out and done the transition completely and that would have been the right thing to do but politics prevented that,” he said. “The Americans asked us to stay for longer.”

    The decision to remain in Basra was a consequence of “political strategy being played out at highest level”.

    As a result of the continued British presence, the last remaining barracks at Basra Palace came under assault, with soldiers fighting close quarter battles in some of the most intense urban warfare experienced since the Second World War.

    British officers say that at the end of the six-month Operation Sinbad in April, the military conditions were right to pull out of the city.

    Some order had been restored to Basra as British and Iraqi troops “surged” through the city district by district, rooting out corrupt police and bringing vital water and electricity reconstruction projects.

    But Washington deemed the political conditions were not right for a withdrawal. Also, with no American headquarters or consulate physically established at Basra airport and with the CIA still keen to monitor Iranian activities, the Americans were extremely reluctant to leave the city under Iraqi control. Brig Bashall’s comments come as Gen David Petraeus, the head of coalition forces in Iraq, reports to Congress today on the results of the US troop “surge” in Baghdad.

    The general could only report Basra as a success story, said Brig Bashall, because “down here we are ahead of the rest of country in transition to local control”.

    The 44-year-old former Parachute Regiment officer, who has experienced three tours of Iraq and one in Afghanistan, gave a pointed response to American critics. “They are not down here, they don’t know,” he said.

    It was “nonsense” to suggest Britain had been defeated militarily. “We have fought for last three months a very violent campaign against insurgents and we left on our own terms. We were definitely not defeated.”

    The British strategy had been right because it was now time for Iraqi politicians and military leaders to be “self reliant”.

    US surge has failed – Iraqi poll

    0

    About 70% of Iraqis believe security has deteriorated in the area covered by the US military “surge” of the past six months, an opinion poll suggests. The survey by the BBC, ABC News and NHK of more than 2,000 people across Iraq also suggests that nearly 60% see attacks on US-led forces as justified.

    This rises to 93% among Sunni Muslims compared to 50% for Shia.

    The findings come as the top US commander in Iraq, Gen David Petraeus, prepares to address Congress.

    WHEN SHOULD THE US GO?

    BBC graphic

    He and US Ambassador to Iraq Ryan Crocker are due to testify about the effects of the surge and the current situation in Iraq.

    The poll suggests that the overall mood in Iraq is as negative as it has been since the US-led invasion in 2003, says BBC world affairs correspondent Nick Childs.

    The poll was conducted in more than 450 neighbourhoods across all 18 provinces of Iraq in August, and has a margin of error of + or – 2.5%.

    It was commissioned jointly by the BBC, ABC and Japan’s NHK.

    Divided nation

    It is the fourth such poll in which BBC News has been involved, with previous ones conducted in February 2004, November 2005 and February 2007.

    It was commissioned with the specific purpose of assessing the effects of the surge as well as tracking longer term trends in Iraq.

    Between 67% and 70% of the Iraqis polled believe the surge has hampered conditions for political dialogue, reconstruction and economic development, according to the August 2007 findings.

    US troops on outskirts of Baghdad

    More Iraqis want coalition forces to leave immediately

    Only 29% think things will get better in the next year, compared to 64% two years ago.

    The number of people wanting coalition forces to leave immediately rose since February’s poll but more than half – 53% – still said they should stay until security improved.

    The survey reveals two great divides, our correspondent notes.

    First, there is the one between relative optimism registered in November 2005 and the gloom of this year’s two polls.

    In between, there was the deadly bombing of the Shia mosque in Samarra, which unleashed a bitter and deadly sectarianism.

    The other great divide is the one now revealed between the Sunni and Shia communities.

    While 88% of Sunnis say things are going badly in their lives, 54% of Shia think they are going well.

    ‘Good for Baghdad’

    Dr Toby Dodge, who was involved in running the poll, pointed to the fact that so many Iraqis saw no improvement to their safety since the US deployed an extra 30,000 troops this year, bringing their number up to nearly 170,000.

    “I think that’s a damning critique and an indication of the pessimism and the violence on the ground,” he told the BBC’s Radio Five Live.

    Iraqi Prime Minister Nouri Maliki insisted on Monday that the surge had had a positive effect in the capital, Baghdad, at least.

    Violence had dropped 75%, he told the Iraqi parliament, without giving figures.

    At the same time, he warned that Iraqi forces were not ready to take over security from the US military which had, he said, “helped… in a great way in fighting terrorism”.

    BBC graphic 

    http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/world/middle_east/6983841.stm

    Police busted after tracking device found on car

    1

    By IAN STEWARD

    A police operation to covertly follow a Central Otago man came to an abrupt halt this week when the man found tracking devices planted in his car, ripped them out and listed them for sale on Trade Me.

    Ralph Williams, of Cromwell, said he found the devices last week in his daughter’s car, which he uses, and in his flatmate’s car after the cars were seized by police and taken away for investigation.

    Police have neither confirmed nor denied they placed the devices.

    Williams said a cellphone sim card in one of the devices appeared to transmit messages to the mobile phone of Detective Sergeant Derek Shaw, of the Central Otago CIB.

    Williams provided The Press with emails from Shaw saying: “If you have got something of ours it would be good to get it back. You can call me and I can come meet you.”

    Williams said he found the devices concealed behind panels in the passenger-side footwells of the cars. They were marked with the name Trimble, an international company that produces GPS location devices.

    Williams took apart one of the devices and found a sim card, which he put into a cellphone. He found the device was sending location text messages to Shaw’s mobile number.

    Williams placed one of the devices on Trade Me with a price of $250.

    The ad read: “Used government covert surveillance tracking. No police to bid on this.”

    A Trade Me spokesman said the listing was removed yesterday afternoon “at the request of the New Zealand Police”.

    Williams said the cars were seized for investigation after an unmarked police car was torched in Alexandra in July.

    The investigation produced nothing on Williams, but when the cars were returned he contacted police because the cars were not running well, and he asked if they had left something behind.

    Shaw emailed: “Can’t immediately think of anything we would have left … Like what …?????”

    Williams said he and Shaw then spoke on the phone, with Shaw telling him the devices were valuable and should be returned.

    Shaw then emailed repeatedly asking for “the stuff” back.

    When contacted by The Press, Shaw declined to comment other than to say: “Police use a variety of legitimate investigation techniques when investigating serious crime. However, it is not the policy of the police to comment on those techniques or other operational matters.”

    Shaw would not say whether a warrant had been obtained for the devices. The Summary Proceedings Act, which covers tracking devices, says a warrant should be obtained for a tracking device but an officer can install one without a warrant if there is not time and the officer believes a judge would issue a warrant.

    Williams said he did not know why police were interested in him. He spent two years in jail “20 years ago” for selling marijuana to an undercover policeman, but had no convictions since then.

    Williams said the devices were not hard to find and he described the operation as “a bumbling attempt” by “weirdos”.

    New Zealand Civil Liberties Council chairman Michael Bott said the affair had “shades of (George Orwell’s) Nineteen Eighty-four”, as well as “shades of the Keystone Kops”.

    Chip Implants Linked to Animal Tumors

    0

    When the U.S. Food and Drug Administration approved implanting microchips in humans, the manufacturer said it would save lives, letting doctors scan the tiny transponders to access patients’ medical records almost instantly. The FDA found “reasonable assurance” the device was safe, and a sub-agency even called it one of 2005’s top “innovative technologies.”

    But neither the company nor the regulators publicly mentioned this: A series of veterinary and toxicology studies, dating to the mid-1990s, stated that chip implants had “induced” malignant tumors in some lab mice and rats.

    “The transponders were the cause of the tumors,” said Keith Johnson, a retired toxicologic pathologist, explaining in a phone interview the findings of a 1996 study he led at the Dow Chemical Co. in Midland, Mich.

    Leading cancer specialists reviewed the research for The Associated Press and, while cautioning that animal test results do not necessarily apply to humans, said the findings troubled them. Some said they would not allow family members to receive implants, and all urged further research before the glass-encased transponders are widely implanted in people.

    To date, about 2,000 of the so-called radio frequency identification, or RFID, devices have been implanted in humans worldwide, according to VeriChip Corp. The company, which sees a target market of 45 million Americans for its medical monitoring chips, insists the devices are safe, as does its parent company, Applied Digital Solutions, of Delray Beach, Fla.

    “We stand by our implantable products which have been approved by the FDA and/or other U.S. regulatory authorities,” Scott Silverman, VeriChip Corp. chairman and chief executive officer, said in a written response to AP questions.

    The company was “not aware of any studies that have resulted in malignant tumors in laboratory rats, mice and certainly not dogs or cats,” but he added that millions of domestic pets have been implanted with microchips, without reports of significant problems.

    “In fact, for more than 15 years we have used our encapsulated glass transponders with FDA approved anti-migration caps and received no complaints regarding malignant tumors caused by our product.”

    The FDA also stands by its approval of the technology.

    Did the agency know of the tumor findings before approving the chip implants? The FDA declined repeated AP requests to specify what studies it reviewed.

    The FDA is overseen by the Department of Health and Human Services, which, at the time of VeriChip’s approval, was headed by Tommy Thompson. Two weeks after the device’s approval took effect on Jan. 10, 2005, Thompson left his Cabinet post, and within five months was a board member of VeriChip Corp. and Applied Digital Solutions. He was compensated in cash and stock options.

    Thompson, until recently a candidate for the 2008 Republican presidential nomination, says he had no personal relationship with the company as the VeriChip was being evaluated, nor did he play any role in FDA’s approval process of the RFID tag.

    “I didn’t even know VeriChip before I stepped down from the Department of Health and Human Services,” he said in a telephone interview.

    Also making no mention of the findings on animal tumors was a June report by the ethics committee of the American Medical Association, which touted the benefits of implantable RFID devices.

    Had committee members reviewed the literature on cancer in chipped animals?

    No, said Dr. Steven Stack, an AMA board member with knowledge of the committee’s review.

    Was the AMA aware of the studies?

    No, he said.

    Published in veterinary and toxicology journals between 1996 and 2006, the studies found that lab mice and rats injected with microchips sometimes developed subcutaneous “sarcomas” – malignant tumors, most of them encasing the implants.

    – A 1998 study in Ridgefield, Conn., of 177 mice reported cancer incidence to be slightly higher than 10 percent – a result the researchers described as “surprising.”

    – A 2006 study in France detected tumors in 4.1 percent of 1,260 microchipped mice. This was one of six studies in which the scientists did not set out to find microchip-induced cancer but noticed the growths incidentally. They were testing compounds on behalf of chemical and pharmaceutical companies; but they ruled out the compounds as the tumors’ cause. Because researchers only noted the most obvious tumors, the French study said, “These incidences may therefore slightly underestimate the true occurrence” of cancer.

    – In 1997, a study in Germany found cancers in 1 percent of 4,279 chipped mice. The tumors “are clearly due to the implanted microchips,” the authors wrote.

    Caveats accompanied the findings. “Blind leaps from the detection of tumors to the prediction of human health risk should be avoided,” one study cautioned. Also, because none of the studies had a control group of animals that did not get chips, the normal rate of tumors cannot be determined and compared to the rate with chips implanted.

    Still, after reviewing the research, specialists at some pre-eminent cancer institutions said the findings raised red flags.

    “There’s no way in the world, having read this information, that I would have one of those chips implanted in my skin, or in one of my family members,” said Dr. Robert Benezra, head of the Cancer Biology Genetics Program at the Memorial Sloan-Kettering Cancer Center in New York.

    Before microchips are implanted on a large scale in humans, he said, testing should be done on larger animals, such as dogs or monkeys. “I mean, these are bad diseases. They are life-threatening. And given the preliminary animal data, it looks to me that there’s definitely cause for concern.”

    Dr. George Demetri, director of the Center for Sarcoma and Bone Oncology at the Dana-Farber Cancer Institute in Boston, agreed. Even though the tumor incidences were “reasonably small,” in his view, the research underscored “certainly real risks” in RFID implants.

    In humans, sarcomas, which strike connective tissues, can range from the highly curable to “tumors that are incredibly aggressive and can kill people in three to six months,” he said.

    At the Jackson Laboratory in Maine, a leader in mouse genetics research and the initiation of cancer, Dr. Oded Foreman, a forensic pathologist, also reviewed the studies at the AP’s request.

    At first he was skeptical, suggesting that chemicals administered in some of the studies could have caused the cancers and skewed the results. But he took a different view after seeing that control mice, which received no chemicals, also developed the cancers. “That might be a little hint that something real is happening here,” he said. He, too, recommended further study, using mice, dogs or non-human primates.

    Dr. Cheryl London, a veterinarian oncologist at Ohio State University, noted: “It’s much easier to cause cancer in mice than it is in people. So it may be that what you’re seeing in mice represents an exaggerated phenomenon of what may occur in people.”

    Tens of thousands of dogs have been chipped, she said, and veterinary pathologists haven’t reported outbreaks of related sarcomas in the area of the neck, where canine implants are often done. (Published reports detailing malignant tumors in two chipped dogs turned up in AP’s four-month examination of research on chips and health. In one dog, the researchers said cancer appeared linked to the presence of the embedded chip; in the other, the cancer’s cause was uncertain.)

    Nonetheless, London saw a need for a 20-year study of chipped canines “to see if you have a biological effect.” Dr. Chand Khanna, a veterinary oncologist at the National Cancer Institute, also backed such a study, saying current evidence “does suggest some reason to be concerned about tumor formations.”

    Meanwhile, the animal study findings should be disclosed to anyone considering a chip implant, the cancer specialists agreed.

    To date, however, that hasn’t happened.

    The product that VeriChip Corp. won approval for use in humans is an electronic capsule the size of two grains of rice. Generally, it is implanted with a syringe into an anesthetized portion of the upper arm.

    When prompted by an electromagnetic scanner, the chip transmits a unique code. With the code, hospital staff can go on the Internet and access a patient’s medical profile that is maintained in a database by VeriChip Corp. for an annual fee.

    VeriChip Corp., whose parent company has been marketing radio tags for animals for more than a decade, sees an initial market of diabetics and people with heart conditions or Alzheimer’s disease, according to a Securities and Exchange Commission filing.

    The company is spending millions to assemble a national network of hospitals equipped to scan chipped patients.

    But in its SEC filings, product labels and press releases, VeriChip Corp. has not mentioned the existence of research linking embedded transponders to tumors in test animals.

    When the FDA approved the device, it noted some Verichip risks: The capsules could migrate around the body, making them difficult to extract; they might interfere with defibrillators, or be incompatible with MRI scans, causing burns. While also warning that the chips could cause “adverse tissue reaction,” FDA made no reference to malignant growths in animal studies.

    Did the agency review literature on microchip implants and animal cancer?

    Dr. Katherine Albrecht, a privacy advocate and RFID expert, asked shortly after VeriChip’s approval what evidence the agency had reviewed. When FDA declined to provide information, she filed a Freedom of Information Act request. More than a year later, she received a letter stating there were no documents matching her request.

    “The public relies on the FDA to evaluate all the data and make sure the devices it approves are safe,” she says, “but if they’re not doing that, who’s covering our backs?”

    Late last year, Albrecht unearthed at the Harvard medical library three studies noting cancerous tumors in some chipped mice and rats, plus a reference in another study to a chipped dog with a tumor. She forwarded them to the AP, which subsequently found three additional mice studies with similar findings, plus another report of a chipped dog with a tumor.

    Asked if it had taken these studies into account, the FDA said VeriChip documents were being kept confidential to protect trade secrets. After AP filed a FOIA request, the FDA made available for a phone interview Anthony Watson, who was in charge of the VeriChip approval process.

    “At the time we reviewed this, I don’t remember seeing anything like that,” he said of animal studies linking microchips to cancer. A literature search “didn’t turn up anything that would be of concern.”

    In general, Watson said, companies are expected to provide safety-and-effectiveness data during the approval process, “even if it’s adverse information.”

    Watson added: “The few articles from the literature that did discuss adverse tissue reactions similar to those in the articles you provided, describe the responses as foreign body reactions that are typical of other implantable devices. The balance of the data provided in the submission supported approval of the device.”

    Another implantable device could be a pacemaker, and indeed, tumors have in some cases attached to foreign bodies inside humans. But Dr. Neil Lipman, director of the Research Animal Resource Center at Memorial Sloan-Kettering, said it’s not the same. The microchip isn’t like a pacemaker that’s vital to keeping someone alive, he added, “so at this stage, the payoff doesn’t justify the risks.”

    Silverman, VeriChip Corp.’s chief executive, disagreed. “Each month pet microchips reunite over 8,000 dogs and cats with their owners,” he said. “We believe the VeriMed Patient Identification System will provide similar positive benefits for at-risk patients who are unable to communicate for themselves in an emergency.”

    And what of former HHS secretary Thompson?

    When asked what role, if any, he played in VeriChip’s approval, Thompson replied: “I had nothing to do with it. And if you look back at my record, you will find that there has never been any improprieties whatsoever.”

    FDA’s Watson said: “I have no recollection of him being involved in it at all.” VeriChip Corp. declined comment.

    Thompson vigorously campaigned for electronic medical records and healthcare technology both as governor of Wisconsin and at HHS. While in President Bush’s Cabinet, he formed a “medical innovation” task force that worked to partner FDA with companies developing medical information technologies.

    At a “Medical Innovation Summit” on Oct. 20, 2004, Lester Crawford, the FDA’s acting commissioner, thanked the secretary for getting the agency “deeply involved in the use of new information technology to help prevent medication error.” One notable example he cited: “the implantable chips and scanners of the VeriChip system our agency approved last week.”

    After leaving the Cabinet and joining the company board, Thompson received options on 166,667 shares of VeriChip Corp. stock, and options on an additional 100,000 shares of stock from its parent company, Applied Digital Solutions, according to SEC records. He also received $40,000 in cash in 2005 and again in 2006, the filings show.

    The Project on Government Oversight called Thompson’s actions “unacceptable” even though they did not violate what the independent watchdog group calls weak conflict-of-interest laws.

    “A decade ago, people would be embarrassed to cash in on their government connections. But now it’s like the Wild West,” said the group’s executive director, Danielle Brian.

    Thompson is a partner at Akin Gump Strauss Hauer & Feld LLP, a Washington law firm that was paid $1.2 million for legal services it provided the chip maker in 2005 and 2006, according to SEC filings.

    He stepped down as a VeriChip Corp. director in March to seek the GOP presidential nomination, and records show that the company gave his campaign $7,400 before he bowed out of the race in August.

    In a TV interview while still on the board, Thompson was explaining the benefits – and the ease – of being chipped when an interviewer interrupted:

    “I’m sorry, sir. Did you just say you would get one implanted in your arm?”

    “Absolutely,” Thompson replied. “Without a doubt.”

    “No concerns at all?”

    “No.”

    But to date, Thompson has yet to be chipped himself.

    On the Web:

    http://www.verichipcorp.com

    http://www.antichips.com

    http://www.fda.gov/cdrh/

    Data mining; FBI cast wide net for info

    0

    AP

    FBI demands to telecommunications companies went beyond requesting phone records of customers under suspicion to include analyses of their broader patterns of communication with others as well, newly obtained documents show. The Federal Bureau of Investigation used national security letters to request information on the wider “community of interest” linked to individuals under suspicion, according to the documents. The data-mining technique can lay bare phone and e-mail links that tie together otherwise indiscernible networks of individuals. Law enforcement officials value that sort of data as a means of identifying a suspect’s potential conspirators. Privacy advocates say it can ensnare people with no tie to illegal or suspicious activity. The “community of interest” requests were included in more than 2,500 pages of FBI documents the Electronic Frontier Foundation, a watchdog group, obtained through the Freedom of Information Act. The New York Times first reported on the requests in a story posted to its website Saturday.

    The FBI letters use boilerplate language to request companies provide calling records for redacted lists of telephone numbers, citing “exigent circumstances.” An Aug 9, 2005, letter and others from that year also include the following: “Additionally, please provide a community of interest for the telephone numbers in the attached list.” Earlier this year, the Justice Department’s inspector general uncovered 700 cases in which FBI agents obtained telephone records through such “exigent letters,” which asserted that grand jury subpoenas had been requested for the data when in fact such subpoenas never had been sought. The FBI eliminated use of the letters earlier this year. The FBI recently stopped asking for “community of interest” data, amid broader questions about the bureau’s aggressive use of national security letters, government officials told The Times. A federal judge struck down a key part of the USA Patriot Act anti-terrorism laws on Thursday, saying the FBI must justify to a court the need for secrecy if the orders to hand over phone and e-mail records will last longer than a reasonable and brief period of time.

    Surveillance state? No, it’ll be worse than that

    0

    To deal with gross factual inaccuracies first: the government’s plans for ID cards do not include any provision for medical records and will not replace the driving licence, and a national database for DNA will not in any way aid medical research. If kept as proposed, it overturns the fundamental legal principle of innocent until proven guilty – it would work on the basis of a presumption that all of us are guilty until eliminated from enquires by the DNA test.

    Beyond that, there are a number of issues about ID cards which need to be examined, but I would like simply to look at two.

    Will they work? The government’s track record here is well known – the NHS computer system in England is several billion pounds over budget and several years behind schedule, and as he leaves his post the man in charge of implementing the entire system admits that it is not fit for purpose and is unlikely to ever be fit for it. On a practical level, most doctors in England avoid using it wherever possible because it is slow, crashes and does not deliver.

    Perhaps it is this wonderful NHS computerised database that Dave Biggart was referring to when he suggested a data card which could save his life. Ah well, a dose of reality can sometimes be just what is needed to treat these cases.

    It is now admitted the new passports with bio-data will not last half the time they were supposed to – doesn’t that give you even more faith in large government computerisation projects?

    All computer experts who have been asked in TV interviews about the ID-card project – people who have no commercial interest in it – agreed that it was too large, too ambitious and not deliverable in its proposed form. But if the government says it’s going to be all right, then that’s that, isn’t it? (Anyone remember a place called Iraq and a “necessary” war?) The second point is a key one which has not been aired anything like enough, and that is the question of trust. Do you – any of us – trust our government to both collect and store this information accurately and effectively and not to mis-use it?

    An ID card, as currently proposed, where the individual will not have the right to access what is on that card, will not have the right to correct any wrong information that may be held, but will have the responsibility to pay for it (and the penalty of a large fine if they do not inform the authorities of any change of address, with the possibility of criminal charges for failing to do so) does not in my view seem to take our safety and liberty any further forward.

    Security, I hear you say, and quite rightly – so let us have the expert view from MI5. It tells us that ID cards will not in any way improve our security against terrorism.

    Those of us who have spent some time in countries with authoritarian regimes, or former regimes where the old apparatus has not been dismantled, know what the people there thought of this kind of oversight.

    The Information Commissioner says we are in danger of sleepwalking into a “surveillance state”. I think things are much worse than that: sadly, it seems the ostriches are leading us in a procession to an even more sinister destination.

    Patrick McNally FRCS, Kennoch House, St Quivox , Ayr.

    Dave Biggart needs to include me out of his “vast majority of honest Scots” who “would have no problem with the implementation”

    of either the national ID card or the universal DNA database which is being mooted.

    I have a big problem with both of these measures. They are symptomatic of the insidious move towards the sort of surveillance society that I for one want no part of. It smacks of a people-control attitude that is all too easily corrupted.

    And with the national DNA database idea, it clearly overthrows the presumption of innocence that has been the hallmark of free societies for yonks. Thank you, but no thank you.

    Mr Biggart may argue that these measures could be kept on a voluntary basis. If so, I have only one comment on the chances of that happening: fat.

    Stan Stanfield, Cluny Hill College, Forres.

    http://www.theherald.co.uk/features/letters/display.var.1675748.0.0.php

    Alex Jones Released After NY Arrest – ALSO: ‘Endgame’ Trailer

    2

    NEW YORK – Media activist Alex Jones was arrested by New York Police Department officers while filming a documentary about the sixth anniversary of September 11th and joining the protest against the official version of what happened on 9/11.

    According to Infowars sources Jones was singled out by police from the head of a crowd of about 400 9/11 Truth Activists and protesters. He was verbally accosted and forced by the police officers to present identification which he was not carrying at the time.

    NYPD officers arrested Jones for “unspecified charges” and removed from the protest crowd to be taken to the nearest police precinct where he currently remains.

    Rob Jacobson, camera operator on Jones’ documentary production crew indicated that a large portion of the protest crowd has moved to the precinct where Jones is being held to ensure his fair treatment and safe release.

    UPDATE: Alex Jones has been released, he was arrested for using a sound device without a permit.

    See video here: http://www.justin.tv/wearechange/34839/ALEX_JONES_RELEASED

     Also, here’s the trailer for ‘Endgame’.

    Prisonplanet.com

    Former Congressional Office of Technology Assessment Senior Staff Member Calls for New Investigation of 9/11

    By Alan Miller

    In an online editorial yesterday, Joel S. Hirschhorn, PhD, former Senior Staff Member of the Congressional Office of Technology Assessment (OTA), called for a new investigation of 9/11. “First, let the technical truth emerge. Then, if necessary, cope with the inevitable political, conspiracy and other questions. But let us not allow a possible painful truth block the primary task of determining once and for all what caused the collapse of the WTC towers and building no. 7.”

    Dr. Hirschhorn is a nationally recognized engineer who has testified before Congress more than 50 times on technology, science, and environmental issues. In addition to his work for the OTA, Dr. Hirschhorn also served as Director of Environment, Energy and Natural Resources for the National Governors Association.

    Dr. Hirschhorn admitted to his own personal “growing skepticism about the official WTC story”. He wrote “analyses by many experts reveal the collapse of the three WTC buildings was not caused by the two airplanes exploding into the twin towers.” He noted “the general view is that the buildings were brought down by controlled demolition.”

    Dr. Hirschhorn endorsed the efforts of a new group, Architects and Engineers for 9/11 Truth, to launch a new, honest and comprehensive investigation that considers all the evidence and which examines the possibility of controlled demolition.

    Dr. Hirschhorn issued a challenge to supporters of the official account of 9/11, “If those that believe the official 9/11 story – especially elected officials – trust their views, then let them support a serious effort to test the validity of the controlled demolition hypothesis. If they fear and reject doing so, then let us see that as suspicious and unacceptable.”

    He concluded, “Horrific possible answers can cause us to shun a question. But clearing our minds of the fear of painful truths is essential to clearing our nation of destructive lies. Otherwise, we stay stuck in a delusional democracy.”

    The full text of Dr. Hirschhorn’s statement can be found at http://blogcritics.org

    Prior to his 13 years of service at the Congressional Office of Technology Assessment, Dr. Hirschhorn was Professor of Metallurgical Engineering at the University of Wisconsin, Madison from 1965 – 1978. He has a Bachelors and Masters degree in Metallurgical Engineering and a PhD in Materials Engineering. He has been a consultant to industrial and chemical companies, DOE laboratories, state governments, and public interest organizations. He currently is a Member of the Board of Directors of the National Foundation for Environmental Education and a Member of the Board of Directors of Sustainability Now! He is the author of more than 150 papers, articles, guest editorials, and book chapters on environmental science and technology.

    Dr. Hirschhorn is one of 200 engineers and architects who have publicly criticized the official account of 9/11. Statements and short bios of many of the others can be found at PatriotsQuestion911.com .

    Government rejects 7 July inquiry

    0

    The government has officially confirmed it will not hold a public inquiry into the 7 July London bombings. Survivors and relatives of those killed have received a letter from government lawyers outlining their position.

    The group want an independent review of the way security agencies and others acted in the run-up to the attacks.

    They have applied for a judicial review of the government’s refusal to launch a full review into the 2005 attacks which killed 56 people and injured about 800.

    A Home Office spokesman said: “The home secretary has reiterated her sympathy for the families and survivors of the July 7 attacks.

    “The government remains of the opinion that a public inquiry is not necessary.

    “We are making no further comment as legal proceedings are ongoing.”

    ‘No comfort’

    The letter is in response to correspondence received from solicitors acting for the 7 July group, Oury Clark Solicitors.

    The group applied at the end of August for a judicial review of the government’s continued refusal to launch a full review.

    Solicitor James Oury said: “Our clients remain disappointed by this response.

    “The government… have refused our clients’ request for an independent public inquiry and suggested that our clients should withdraw these proceedings.

    “They have also not met our clients’ request to engage with them.

    “They have given no comfort as to costs and no indication as to when the inquests will take place.”

    The group says an inquiry is necessary to allow public scrutiny of events and to enable the families of those killed, survivors and other agencies to be involved.

    Members of the group argue the government’s refusal to hold an inquiry breaches the Human Rights Act because it is failing in its duty to protect life.

    The government is against holding such an inquiry saying it would be a drain on resources and tie up key officials and police officers.

    http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/england/london/6984268.stm

    Homeless numbers rocket in US‏

    0

    By Jim Pence

    Homeowners, struggling to deal with sharp increases in their adjustable mortgage payments, are being hit with a record number of foreclosure notices.
    Alan Greenspan former chairman of the US Federal Reserve, said: “What we are observing in the last seven weeks is identical in many respects to what we saw in 1998, what we saw in the stock market crash of 1987.”
    Countrywide Financial Corp plans to cut 12,000 jobs. I hope some of those that lose their jobs will be pissed off enough to expose the predatory lending practices of Countrywide Financial Corp., but I’m not holding my breath for that to occur.

    A letter issued by Angelo Mozillo Chairman of Countrywide Financial and Dave Sambol, President, explaining all the layoffs at Countrywide Financial today. Here’s the most relevant excerpt.
    As has always been the case in previous cycles when the market has shifted and our volumes and related revenues fell, we need to again adjust our organization by scaling back our operations and reducing our cost structure accordingly. Unfortunately, the only way to accomplish this is to make significant reductions in our workforce which we estimate to range between 10,000-12,000 employees (which includes reductions that we have already made). As of July 31, Countrywide employed more than 61,000 people. The areas primarily affected will be our production divisions, and the general and administrative support areas of the Company. Areas which we do not expect to be materially impacted by workforce reductions include our banking operations, our insurance businesses and our loan servicing operations, each of which are expected to continue growing in both the short-term and long-term. As noted above, the distributed retail unit of our Consumer Markets Division will continue to aggressively grow its sales force while adjusting its expense structure to the new reality of the marketplace.
    Click here to read the entire letter.

    Are You Ready For Inflation?

    August 10, 2007
    The Federal Reserve on Friday injected a total of $38 billion into the markets in three steps, which began with a $19 billion injection into the banking system, followed by a second addition of $16 billion and finally a third dose of $3 billion. The Fed on Thursday added $24 billion in temporary reserves. See full story.

    Deja vu all over again?

    In the early 1980s, under Reagan, regulatory changes took place that gave the S&L industry new powers and for the first time in history measures were taken to increase the profitability of S&Ls at the expense of promoting home ownership.
    A history of the S&L situation can be found here:
    http://www.fdic.gov/bank/historical/s&l/
    What is important to note about the S&L scandal is that it was the largest theft in the history of the world and US tax payers are who was robbed.
    The problems occurred in the Savings and Loan industry as they relate to theft because the industry was deregulated under the Reagan/Bush administration and restrictions were eased on the industry so much that abuse and misuse of funds became easy, rampant, and went unchecked.
    Additional facts on the Savings and Loan Scandal can be found here:
    http://www.inthe80s.com/sandl.shtml
    There are several ways in which the Bush family plays into the Savings and Loan scandal, which involves not only many members of the Bush family but also many other politicians that are still in office and still part of the Bush Jr. administration today. Jeb Bush, George Bush Sr., and his son Neil Bush have all been implicated in the Savings and Loan Scandal, which cost American tax payers over $1.4 TRILLION dollars.

    How can George W. Bush say he supports the Troops when he is allowing the homes of their families, and friends to be foreclosed?

    Bin Laden’s FBI Poster Omits Any 9/11 Connection

    Typically, when someone commits a crime and the government wants to prove the fact, an indictment is written up, evidence is presented and the alleged perpetrator is formally charged with a crime.

    The Bush gangsters have jailed and tortured thousands, invaded Afghanistan, and destroyed Iraqi society resulting in the deaths of over 600,000 civilians since 2003 – but six years later, they still have not gotten around to indicting or even formally seeking Osama bin Laden’s arrest in connection with the 9/11 attacks.

    Over 10,000 Protesters welcome Bush

    2

    By Arijit Ghosh and Gemma Daley

     Australian police clad in riot gear faced 10,000 demonstrators in downtown Sydney protesting against a visit by U.S. President George W. Bush.

    Protesters gathered at Sydney Town Hall today and marched toward the city’s Hyde Park, where helicopters hovered, police vans blocked streets and a water cannon was on standby. Bush, Chinese President Hu Jintao and leaders from 19 other economies have gathered in Australia’s biggest city for the annual Asia-Pacific Economic Cooperation meeting.

    “There are no leaders here, so I thought I would bring one,” said Jon Lewis, a protester carrying a portrait of Mahatma Gandhi. “Howard and Bush are just cowboys.”

    Demonstrators carrying banners that said “save Iraq, disarm America” and “drop Bush, not bombs,” were protesting against the U.S.-led invasion of Iraq, climate change and labor rights. About 100 protesters yesterday dropped their trousers in a “21-bum salute” to APEC leaders.

    Protesters were also seen carrying banners asking Bush to help end military rule in Thailand as well as against China’s human rights record. Another banner said: “I don’t believe in anything, I am here for the violence.”

    Police updated their estimate of the number of protesters, who banged drums as they marched through the city, to 10,000 from an earlier estimate of 3,000. Some marchers wore polar bear costumes, while others were dressed as sunflowers.

    `Blood on His Hands’

    “It’s our day in the sun to protest against the warmongers,” said Rachel Evans of the Socialist Alliance.

    Police vans were used as road blocks in the city to guard leaders, meeting six blocks away at Sydney’s Opera House. A section of downtown where leaders are meeting has been walled by a three- mile, nine-foot-high steel and concrete fence. Some 3,500 police and soldiers are guarding the city.

    “When a man of peace comes, the whole city opens up, when a man of war comes the whole city closes down because he is afraid,” said Keysar Trad, a member of the Islamic Friendship Association. “Bush has blood on his hands. They even bring their own cook, because they don’t trust our cooking.”

    Jake Lynch, director for the Center for Peace and Conflict Studies at Sydney University, said: “The world is dominated by two super-powers: the Pentagon and public opinion. This is a high- profile occasion and Bush has become a focal point for a number of concerns.”

    Injuries, Charges

    Two policemen were injured during the protest and taken to St Vincent’s Hospital today. A police spokeswoman said nine people were arrested. No charges have been filed against them yet.

    The Australian government has committed A$196.9 million ($167 million) on security for APEC meetings, including A$77.8 million for a leaders meeting scheduled in Sydney from Sept. 2-9.

    “The police presence is over the top,” said Peter Blank, a New Zealand protester living in Sydney. “This is to demonize normal citizens.”

    A majority of Australians in a survey conducted by the Medical Association for the Prevention of War say Bush is the worst U.S. president in history.

    Howard and Bush are leading a bid to convince APEC leaders to agree on “aspirational” goals on cutting energy intensity, and to try to revive World Trade Organization talks that collapsed last year.

    Howard, trailing in voter opinion polls, will face an election by January. Bush, whose approval rating is the weakest of any second-term president since Harry Truman, according to an Associated Press-Ipsos poll, has 16 months left in office.

    Australia has 1,575 soldiers in Iraq serving with U.S.-led coalition forces. Howard has refused to set a timetable for withdrawing troops.

    Australia’s opposition Labor Party leader Kevin Rudd has promised to negotiate a “staged withdrawal” of Australian troops with the U.S. if he wins office.

    To contact the reporters on this story: Arijit Ghosh in Sydney at aghosh@bloomberg.net ; Gemma Daley in Sydney at gdaley@bloomberg.net

    Is Bush High?

    0

    Even for someone as gaffe-prone as US President George W Bush, he was in rare form on Friday, confusing Apec with Opec and transforming Australian troops into Austrians. President Bush’s tongue started slipping almost as soon as he started talking at a business forum on the eve of an Asia-Pacific Economic Cooperation (Apec) summit in Sydney.

    “Mr Prime Minister, thank you for your introduction,” he told Prime Minister John Howard. “Thank you for being such a fine host for the Opec summit .”

    As the audience of several hundred people erupted in laughter , Mr Bush corrected himself and joked, “He invited me to the Opec summit next year.”Australia has never been a member of the Organisation of the Petroleum Exporting Countries. Later in his speech, Mr Bush recounted how Mr Howard had gone to visit “Austrian troops” last year in Iraq. There are, in fact, no Austrian troops there. But Australia has about 1,500 military personnel in and around the country.

    Upon finishing his speech, the US president took the wrong way off-stage and, looking perplexed, had to be re-directed by Mr Howard to a centre-stage exit. But not before a veteran White House correspondent seized the opportunity to ask Mr Bush whether there had been any new message in his speech. Apparently misunderstanding the question, he bristled and asked, “Haven’t you been listening to my past speeches?” before turning away.

    Mr Bush is no stranger to the occasional faux pas, and often jokes about his habit of mangling the English language. One of his gaffes came in May when, at a welcoming ceremony for Queen Elizabeth II, he nearly placed her in the 18th century.

    REUTERS

    We’re Winning the Battle for 9/11 Truth

    A new poll by reputable pollster Zogby International shows that 51% of Americans want Congress to probe Bush and Cheney regarding 9/11, and 67% fault the 9/11 Commission for failing to investigate the collapse of World Trade Center 7. The poll was sponsored by 911Truth.org

    Despite its efforts to intimidate and harass, and despite its huge investment in propaganda, the government is losing its effort to cover up the 9/11 false flag.

    Despite overwhelming propaganda by the corporate television and print media to crush all credible information proving that 9/11 was an inside job, despite the History Channel, Popular Mechanics, the talking heads, and gatekeepers trying their best to earn their pay, keep their corporate masters happy, and keep the lid on the official myth, we are winning the battle for 9/11 truth. More and more credible military leaders, scientists, politicians, legal scholars, historians, psychologists and people involved in the 9/11 Commission itself are speaking out for 9/11 truth every day. They know it, and now the majority of Americans know it.

    9/11 truth has gone viral, and it cannot be stopped.

    For the many folks who like to back a winner, 9/11 truth is going to win. Its now time to join the fight on the side of truth .

    http://georgewashington.blogspot.com

    Rudy took good photo op on 911, but that was all he did

    Dear activists, colleagues, and friends,
    “It’s just not possible.”
    That was the sentence we heard over and over from families who had firefighter sons, brothers, husbands and fathers killed on 9/11, from experts on emergency response, and from investigative journalists. It was just not possible that Rudy could so distort what happened on 9/11 and his role on that terrible day.
    These experts, these grieving and furious family members, were united only by the fact that this story had to be told. Republicans, Independents, and Democrats could agree on just one thing: the cold hard facts about Rudy’s terrible handling of 9/11 and the aftermath.
    And so we went to work. We researched, we read, we interviewed. Jason locked himself in a quiet room, working late into the night. Christopher flew across the country at a moment’s notice to interview. Lissette went over and over the footage. Leda kept juggling schedules so we could get the film done. Jimmy worked the phones to try and raise some funds.
    And here it is… The REAL Rudy: Command Center. The first of a devastating four-part series.

    Watch the video, and share your thoughts on why Rudy failed us on 9/11.
    We need your help. We don’t have ad budgets, so like all our videos, we are counting on you to spread these to your email list, to your local paper, to blogs, to websites. We are fortunate that today we have the new technology and ability to reach millions, but it only happens when you send the video with notes to as many people as possible.
    It’s time to expose the truth of Rudy’s failures on 9/11.
    Robert Greenwald
    and the Brave New Films team
    P.S. The AP just did a story on our campaign this morning, a good sign that our message is getting out there!

    Has anyone lost any Plutonium?‏

    0

    By Ace Hoffman Carlsbad

    Well, well, well. Bombs over America. Bombs in our backyard. Bombs away! While MS-NBC was reporting five nuclear warheads were accidentally flown across the country last week, CNN was reporting it was six. Nobody seems to know for sure.

    We’re being told these weapons cannot detonate due to “safeguards.”

    Are those the same safeguards that lost them in the first place?

    We’re being told that even if there was an accident, the plutonium in the bombs wouldn’t go far.

    Baloney.

    The HE (high explosives) could scatter the plutonium far and wide. How far? How wide?

    One bomb that fell off a jet years ago over Mars Bluff, South Carolina created a hole 50 feet across and 35 feet deep when the conventional explosives detonated. Obviously, there was no nuclear explosion, but there was significant contamination.

    Each nuclear bomb in last week’s incident — W-80 model cruise missiles of up to 150 kilotons each — contains about 10 pounds of highly radioactive material (Plutonium-239, possibly “supergrade” (very low in Plutonium-240)). Additionally, there is highly poisonous Hydrogen-3 (“tritium”) which is injected into the center of the bomb moments before the explosion, and beryllium is used both to initiate the explosion (as a “neutron generator”) and to reflect the neutrons released in the initial nanoseconds of the explosion back into the “pit.” There is also Lithium-6, and Depleted Uranium (Uranium-238) encases the “pit.” The Uranium-238 acts as a shield to protect the military personnel who handle the bomb. Then, at the moment of explosion, it too will fission.

    So even without a nuclear explosion, there could be an enormous environmental problem.

    And it’s not like this has never happened before. Below is only a PARTIAL LIST of “Broken Arrows,” “Bent Spears,” “Dull Swords,” and “Faded Giants” (endearing military terms for various levels of nuclear weapons accidents, all short of a “Nucflash.” You can guess what that is — it’s the one they say can’t happen (but then, why do they have a name for it?).

    March 10, 1956: A B-47 bomber with two nuclear weapons was lost over the Mediterranean Sea. Despite an extensive search, nothing was ever recovered.

    July 28th, 1957: Off Cape May, New Jersey: Three nuclear weapons without their fissile cores, and a “nuclear capsule” (the part that detonates) were lost at sea and never recovered. Other reports say only two of the nuclear weapons were jettisoned, and the other was brought back, along with the nuclear capsule. The damaged C-124 landed at an air base near Atlantic City.

    February 5th, 1958, off Tybee Island, Georgia, a 7,000 pound, 4-megaton hydrogen bomb was jettisoned after a mid-air collision between a B-47 bomber and an F-86 fighter jet, and never recovered. It’s still lost in the mud amongst old civil war ordinance. The Air Force insisted the bomb was not “nuclear-capable” (was missing the nuclear capsule) but this is probably untrue. At least two former Air Force personnel involved in the incident testified otherwise under oath.

    November 4th, 1958, a B-47 crashed carrying a nuclear weapon.

    In 1959 a B-52 crashed in Kentucky with two nuclear weapons on board. There were no explosions.

    January 24th, 1961: Near Goldsboro, North Carolina a B-52 broke apart in mid-air. This incident was probably closest to being a “Nucflash” because apparently FIVE OF SIX SAFETY SYSTEMS FAILED!

    On December 8th, 1964, a B-58 bomber skidded off the runway, and “portions” of five nuclear weapons burned.

    In 1965 an aircraft rolled off an aircraft carrier with a “live hydrogen bomb” and sank. Fortunately, it didn’t go off. This was near Okinawa. Years later it was still leaking radioactive material.

    On January 17th, 1966 a B-52 collided with a KC-135 refueling tanker and crashed in Spain. Seven crew members of the KC-135 were burned to death. The clean-up cost millions of dollars. More than a thousand tons of dirt were brought back to America and dumped at the Savannah River Site, but nevertheless, the cleanup was only partially successful and people in Spain are still being sickened by the radioactive materials that remain.

    January 22nd, 1968: Near Thule, Greenland, four hydrogen bombs were “scattered” over the ice (supposedly the contaminated ice was later shipped to America). This incident sparked massive protests since Greenland had banned such flights over their soil.

    These accidents — and many more — and this latest incident prove that there is no safe place for nuclear weapons. No country, no ocean, no lake can withstand the devastation.

    The last B-52 was manufactured in 1962, so the youngest the plane that was used in this latest incident could possibly be is 45 years old — quite possibly older than the pilot and co-pilot together. Is this safe?

    It’s time to stop this foolishness before something really terrible happens! We’re not getting ANY BETTER at handling nukes, and firing or demoting those involved, while proper, WON’T address the root cause one little bit, because the root cause is that humans make mistakes. ALL humans make mistakes, and they will continue to do so.

    ——————————————————————
    “Nuclear weapons are designed with great care to explode only when deliberately armed and fired. Nevertheless, there is always a possibility that, as a result of accidental circumstances, an explosion will take place inadvertently. Although all conceivable precautions are taken to prevent them, such accidents might occur in areas where weapons are assembled and stored, during the course of loading and transportation on the ground, or when actually in the delivery vehicle, e.g., an airplane or a missile.”

    -Atomic Energy Commission/Department of Defense, The Effects of Nuclear Weapons, 1962. (quote presented by Jaya Tiwari and Cleve J. Gray).
    ——————————————————————-

    Had these bombs exploded, who do you think would have been blamed? Al Qaeda? Iran? North Korea? China?

    FBI’s data gathering went far beyond target suspect

    0

    Records were analyzed of people in wide network, documents show

    By ERIC LICHTBLAU

    The FBI cast a much wider net in its terrorism investigations than it has previously acknowledged by relying on telecommunications companies to analyze phone-call and e-mail patterns of the associates of Americans who had come under suspicion, according to newly obtained bureau records.

    The documents indicate the Federal Bureau of Investigation used secret demands for records to obtain data not only on individuals it saw as targets but also details on their “community of interest” – the network of people that the target in turn was in contact with.

    The bureau recently stopped the practice in part because of broader questions raised about its aggressive use of the records demands, which are known as national security letters, officials said Friday.

    The community-of-interest data sought by the FBI is central to a data-mining technique intelligence officials call link analysis. Since the attacks of Sept. 11, 2001, American counterterrorism officials have turned more frequently to the technique, using communications patterns and other data to identify suspects who may not have any other known links to extremists.

    The concept has strong government proponents who see it as a vital tool in predicting and preventing attacks, and it also is thought to have helped the National Security Agency identify targets for its domestic eavesdropping program. But privacy advocates, civil rights leaders and even some counterterrorism officials warn that link analysis can be misused to establish tenuous links to people who have no real connection to terrorism but may be drawn into an investigation nonetheless.

    Typically, community-of-interest data might include an analysis of which people the targets called most frequently, how long they generally talked and at what times of day, sudden fluctuations in activity, geographic regions that were called, and other data, law enforcement and industry officials said.

    The FBI declined to say exactly what data had been turned over. It was limited to people, phone numbers and e-mail “once removed” from the actual target of the national security letters, said a government official who spoke on condition of anonymity because of a continuing review by the Justice Department.

    Mike Kortan, a spokesman for the FBI, said in a statement Saturday that “it is important to emphasize that it is no longer being used pending the development of an appropriate oversight and approval policy, was used infrequently, and was never used for e-mail communications.”

    The scope of the demands for information could be seen in an August 2005 letter seeking the call records for particular phone numbers that had come under suspicion. The letter closed by saying: “Additionally, please provide a community of interest for the telephone numbers in the attached list.”

    The requests for such data showed up a dozen times, using nearly identical language, in records from one six-month period in 2005 obtained by a nonprofit advocacy group, the Electronic Frontier Foundation, through a Freedom of Information Act lawsuit that it brought against the government.

    The FBI recently turned over 2,500 pages of documents to the group. The boilerplate language suggests that the requests may have been used in many of more than 700 emergency or “exigent” national security letters. Earlier this year, the bureau banned the use of the exigent letters because they had never been authorized by law.

    The bureau declined to discuss any aspect of the community-of-interest requests because it said the issue was part of an investigation by the Justice Department inspector general’s office into national security letters. An initial review in March by the inspector general found widespread violations and possible illegality in the FBI’s use of the letters, but did not mention the use of community-of-interest data.

    The government official who spoke on condition of anonymity said the FBI recently stopped asking the telecommunications companies for the community-of-interest data. The exact time of and reason for the suspension is unclear, but it appears to have been set off in part by the questions raised earlier this year by the inspector general’s initial review into abuses in the use of national security letters.

    The official said the FBI itself was examining the use of the community-of-interest requests to get a better understanding of how and when they were used, but he added that they appeared to have been used in a relatively small percentage of the tens of thousands of the records requests each year. “In an exigent circumstance, that’s information that may be relevant to an investigation,” the official said.

    A federal judge in New York last week struck down parts of the USA Patriot Act that had authorized the FBI’s use of the national security letters, saying that some provisions violated the First Amendment and the constitutional separation of powers guarantee.

    Some legal analysts and privacy advocates suggested the disclosure of the FBI’s collection of community-of-interest records offered another example of the bureau exceeding the substantial powers already granted it by Congress.

    Age of the cyber spy

    0

    By Adam Lusher and Tim Shipman

    At first the air force administrator just thought it was strange.

    ”Checking the computer systems, he found a file listing user names and passwords. He deleted it and forgot it.

    Until it happened again. A similar file re-appeared, within days, in the same system, at Wright-Patterson Air Force Base in Ohio.

    “With a lot of help,” says a US security source, “He discovered that someone had put a programme copying the first 120 characters of every transaction through that base. So it was sending everyone’s login details to… someone.”

    “We did some more digging,” the source adds, “We found over half a million compromised computer accounts across the US. These guys were going after Wright-Patterson, which was developing stealth technology, the Naval Research Centre, all the research facilities.

    “We chased them for over a year. We used the FBI, the secret service, computer crime squads.

    We never found them. Who do I think it was? Officially? Not a clue. Unofficially? It was state-sponsored.”

    The Wright-Patterson administrator, working when the Internet was still relatively young in the early 1990s, had stumbled upon a whole new dimension to warfare: cyberoperations.

    This breaks down into two categories: cyberespionage, in which the spies are not humans, but hacked computers; an the more openly aggressive field of cyberwarfare, in which “logic bombs” are used to hit military communications computers, rendering adversaries “deaf, dumb and blind”.

    A terrorist might target the underbelly of a superpower’s civilian infrastructure, hacking into power and even hospital networks to create a cocktail of chaos.

    Even a cursory check leaves the strong impression that the Ohio administrator’s experience was just the start.

    In March 2002, nearly a decade after that first attack on Wright-Patterson, the base was bombarded by 125,000 attempts to hack into its systems. On a single Friday.

    A little noticed Parliamentary answer last year revealed that a total of 225 British Ministry of Defence computers were feared to have been infected by 104 different malicious programmes in 2004 and 2005. A US defence official told The Sunday Telegraph bluntly: “They are waging a constant hidden campaign. It’s a battle every day.”

    Some analysts go even further, warning of a revolution in warfare comparable to the advent of atomic weapons.

    They have called — urgently — for a new Manhattan Project to ensure the Western world is defended.

    Last week, they claim, the British public received its wake-up call. Reports claimed that Chinese hackers, some believed to be from the People’s Liberation Army (PLA), had hit the Foreign Office computer network. Up to ten Whitehall departments were allegedly being targeted for state secrets.

    US officials were quoted as confirming that in June there had been a “detected penetration” in the Pentagon.

    According to one quoted source, there was “a very high level of confidence… tending towards certainty” of PLA responsibility. The US codename for the alleged Chinese attacks emerged: “Titan Rain”. Vehement official Chinese denials followed.

    British intelligence sources, however, told The Sunday Telegraph that the suspected Chinese infiltrations are sophisticated and serious. “The classified networks are reasonably secure,” said one former British intelligence officer, “But lots of smaller suppliers and subcontractors are naïve about what the Chinese, in particular, will do.

    “In some companies they can probably read what they like, perhaps giving them information to crack more classified systems.”

    “We haven’t got the people to monitor what they are doing,” he admitted, “Because we’re so focused on the war on terror.”

    If China is doing anything, however, she is hardly alone. Claims of 120 nations conducting cyberoperations were, sources hinted, an underestimate.

    Indeed, one British security source revealed a new country may be entering the field: Iran.

    As British military commanders spoke of fighting a proxy war with Iran in Basra, the source said: “People are concerned about Iranian activity on the Internet, although they don’t know how much of it is state sponsored.

    “There have been a number of efforts against defence websites and British commercial concerns connected to the national infrastructure.”

    An Iranian Foreign Ministry spokesman denied his country had been involved in anything like cyberespionage and suggested it may have be the victim of Western governments’ “black propaganda”: “usually such baseless stories show only aggressive approaches aimed at falsifying Western public opinion’s perception of the stance of the Islamic Republic of Iran.”

    It might, anyway, be naive to expect too vociferous a British response.

    In the 1990s, at about the same time that the Wright-Patterson administrator discovered the harsh realities of cyberespionage, our US security source spoke to an altogether friendlier group.

    “They were British military. An offensive programme is taking place in the UK. The existence of any such programme anywhere is classified, but the Brits have it, the French have it, the US has it.”

    He explained his British contacts were interested in disabling a putative enemy’s computers. This is cyberwarfare.

    Cyberespionage was more delicate.

    “There are white operations. A tremendous amount of publicly available information can be gathered from the Internet if you know how.

    “Then there are black operations, where you are covertly and illegally trying to access somebody’s computer. No-one admits to that.

    “I would just like to think that an organisation as respected as Britain’s is doing something that every other intelligence service in the world is doing.”

    The US has, uniquely, been relatively open about its interest in the cyberoperations, dropping hints that these are not solely defensive, and announcing the creation of a new “cyber command”, to become fully operational by October 2009.

    Dr Lani Kass, the director of the Air Force Cyberspace Task Force, explained: “Cyberspace is a domain, just like air, space, land and sea. It allows us to help find, fix and finish the targets we’re after.” Cyber Command’s apparent novelty may disguise the (potentially reassuring) possibility that rival nations have, in fact, learned the art of cyberwarfare from us.

    At the time of the first Gulf War, rumours abounded of American and British hacking, even the insertion of viruses into Iraqi command and control computers.

    The US source, with more than two decades of senior experience in US defence institutions, confirmed: “I won’t go into specifics, but it happened. “And when the Iraqi command and control system collapsed in 2003 — do you think that was achieved solely by bombing?”

    It has now emerged that by 1995 a Chinese major general was writing a paper noting the use of computer viruses in the first Gulf War.

    “Our sights,” he declared, “Must not be fixed on the firepower warfare of the industrial age. They must be trained on the information warfare of the information age.”

    What worries many analysts, however, is not the infiltrations that have been detected, but the sleepers: the malicious software sitting unnoticed, waiting to give a remote user access when the time comes.

    In testimony to a Congressional committee last April, Sami Saydjari, a former Department of Defense executive, warned: “Such weapons may well be deployed already and we wouldn’t know it.”

    He explained his vision of a massive strategic cyberoffensive, where an undetected adversary patiently compromises key computer after key computer, until ready to attack.

    “Imagine the lights in this room suddenly go out. We venture into the streets. The power is out as far as the eye can see. The streets are jammed because the traffic lights are out. Day turns to night, but the power hasn’t returned. TV stations aren’t broadcasting. People begin to panic. Our national grid, telecommunications, and financial systems won’t be back for months. We’ve gone from a superpower to a third-world nation practically overnight.”

    It sounds, perhaps, like science fiction.

    Some analysts, however, suggest examining events in Estonia this spring.

    First, ethnic Russians clashed with Estonian police, causing Vladimir Putin to express “serious concern”, after the authorities removed a Soviet war memorial.

    Then, on April 27, computer attacks started swamping Estonian telephone exchanges, banks and government departments. Nato observers were sent, Putin’s government denied any involvement, and it remains possible that it was the work of patriotic, civilian Russian hackers.

    It did, however, demonstrate the possibilities.

    “We are several orders of magnitude below the level of countermeasures we need,” insisted Mr Saydjari last week. In a globalised economy, for example, an attack on the British banking system would quickly affect the rest of the world.

    “In 1939 Einstein felt duty-bound to warn President Roosevelt of a strategic threat from nuclear weapons. Now, again, we need a high-priority government programme on the order of the Manhattan Project.” Whether this is merely alarmist, or realistic, time, unfortunately, may tell.

    Asked about the level of sleeper penetration of key computer networks, however, the US source simply admitted: “It terrifies me.”

    In Britain, meanwhile, officials remain confident, publicly at least.

    A GCHQ spokeswoman explained protection came from the National Infrastructure Security Co-ordination Centre, part of MI5. “We can’t comment on the details, but the UK is prepared,” she insisted.

    It was when we asked further — about Britain’s possible offensive cyberoperations — that we perhaps discovered how those in the field may have been working, and may continue working, for years. “I think,” she said, “We have reached the extent of helpfulness here.”

    9/11 blame game goes on

    0

    By Charles V Pena

    CIA Director Michael Hayden’s release of an internal report on the agency’s performance prior to the September 11 terrorist attacks has triggered a predictable result: more of the blame game.

    While not claiming the CIA could have prevented September 11 – the report says only that if intelligence officers “had been able to view and analyse the full range of information before 11 September 2001, they could have developed a more informed context in which to assess the threat reporting of the spring and summer of that year” – the report contends that then CIA director George Tenet “was either unwilling or unable to marshal the full range of IC (intelligence community) necessary to combat the growing terrorist threat to the US.”

    To be sure, the CIA and others made mistakes. For example, an FBI memo warning of the activities of Middle Eastern men at US flight schools never went beyond the desk of a midlevel unit chief in the bureau’s counterterrorism division, though it arrived at headquarters two months before Septemvber 11.

    If such mistakes had not happened, perhaps the attacks could have been prevented.
    But “could have” is not the same thing as “would have”. Those who believe the latter assume that intelligence is a perfect science, but it is as much art as science.

    It is easy with 20—20 hindsight to connect the dots, because you can trace backward from a known event. But that’s not the same thing as trying to connect dots to an event that’s still a work in progress, where, even if the dots were clearly visible beforehand (a big assumption), they could have been connected in different ways to paint very different pictures.
    Although the CIA inspector general’s report focuses solely on CIA accountability, it identifies a larger problem which extends far beyond the CIA: “Neither the US government nor the IC had a comprehensive strategy for combating Al Qaeda.”

    Before September 11, for example, President Bush didn’t mention Al Qaeda at all in discussing US national security. His focus was on rogue states, weapons of mass destruction, and ballistic missile defence.

    And to be fair, the Clinton administration didn’t have bin Laden and Al Qaeda squarely in its sights either.

    Trying to understand how September 11 might have been averted requires more than a postmortem on CIA procedures and a second look at the government’s nonexistent strategy for dealing with Al Qaeda. Ultimately, the September 11 terrorist attacks are inextricably linked to US foreign policy.

    The September 11 Commission concluded that the rising tide of anti-American Muslim hatred, which draws Muslims to the radical cause, is fuelled more by what we do – that is, by US policies – than by who we are. Our values, culture, and way of life are not the problem; our actions are the problem.

    Yet, while the September 11 Commission understood that point, it did not prescribe any real change in America’s post-Cold War foreign policy.

    If we are unable to admit that some of our policy choices are wrong, how can we hope to correct them? Certainly, Al Qaeda – not Americans or American society – is solely responsible for the death and destruction of those attacks.

    But the US government – under Republican and Democratic administrations alike – must be held accountable for ill-conceived policies that have helped motivate terrorism against the US.
    US foreign policy that results in unnecessary military intervention – the Balkans under President Clinton and Iraq under George W Bush – is one of the main causes of the virulent anti-American sentiment fuelling terrorism.

    To understand what the US government could have done better to prevent September 11, and, more importantly, to understand how we might prevent future terrorist attacks, we need to adopt a more humble foreign policy, as candidate Bush advocated in 2000.

    That responsibility rests squarely in the Oval office, not at CIA headquarters in Virginia. — MCT
    * Charles V Pena is a senior fellow at The Independent Institute (www.independent.org), 100 Swan Way, Oakland, California 94621, and author of Winning the Un-War: A New Strategy for Winning the War on Terrorism.

    Judge rules internet spying illegal

    0

    By Iain Thomson

    A US judge has ruled that the FBI cannot spy on people’s internet and telephone use without a warrant.

    Judge Victor Marrero, of the District of Columbia, determined that the rules under the Patriot Act that allowed the FBI to secretly request telephone, internet and email logs without applying for a warrant were barred by the constitution.

    The Patriot Act was passed 43 days after the terrorist attacks in the US on 11 September 2001.

    Judge Marrero found that the practice offended constitutional principles of checks and balances, and violated the guarantee of free speech.

    In a 24-page summation the judge concluded that the government would also have to hand over evidence requested on under the Freedom of Information act or explain why it would not.

    The case was brought by the American Civil Liberties Union, the National Security Archive and the Electronic Privacy Information Center.

    “Today’s ruling deals a blow to the administration’s sweeping and often unfounded secrecy claims,” said Nasrina Bargzie, an attorney with the National Security Project at the American Civil Liberties Union.

    “When documents are withheld under the Freedom of Information Act, the government must have a better excuse for keeping the documents secret than ‘because we said so’.”

    The judge found that the government’s reasons for not releasing documents were “too vague and general” and that the FBI’s justifications were “wholly inadequate”.

    The case will now go to the appeal courts and the government has until 12 October to respond.

    Author of secret Iraq report declares Iraqi government ‘in collapse’

    0

    By John Byrne

    State Department official says political solution ‘hopeless’

    The confidential version of Congress’ Congressional Research Report on Iraq declares that Iraq’s government is “in collapse,” according to the New York Daily News‘ James Meek, who first acquired the report.

    The report was completed Aug. 15 for the House and Senate, as President Bush geared up for a fresh battle with Congress over his intent to ‘stay the course.’

    RAW STORY acquired a copy of the report from the Daily News. It can be read here in the original (PDF).

    “My assessment is that because of the number and breadth of parties boycotting the cabinet, the Iraqi government is in essential collapse,” Kenneth Katzman, the author of the report, said, according to Meek. “That argues against any real prospects for political reconciliation.”

    Without a political infrastructure in Iraq, any military progress would be short-lived, he added.

    As a whole, the 62-page report is typical of those conducted by the Congressional Research Service, a nonpartisan arm of Congress tasked with investigating topics of interest to members. The report expounds on myriad aspects of Iraq’s political, economic and security challenges.

    Katzman questions the troop surge in the report.

    “I would even question the military progress,” he also declared.

    A top diplomat — who remained unnamed — told Meek any political solution to the war is now “hopeless.”

    “I would agree with that,” Katzman said.

    Iraqi Prime Minister Nouri al-Maliki is trying to stave off the collapse of his government while fending off rivals at a time when the country has already spun out of control.

    The report said al-Maliki’s government was “collapsing.”

    Read Meek’s full piece here or the full report to Congress here.

    Osama tape is fake – dead man walking

    By Tom Heneghan

    It can now be reported that the latest alleged bin Laden tape is a fake. As we have reported many times, Osama bin Laden has been dead for six years from kidney failure.

    Bin Laden’s death has been confirmed by both U.S. and French intelligence sources tied to a group headed by Colin Powell.

    So the question begs why and who wants to keep Osama bin Laden alive.

    Item: The 9/11 black op was originally staged for both political and economic objectives.

    First, the current occupation government, i.e. the Bush Administration, needed to legitimize a stolen presidency, which was a fraud from the start.

    Second, the 9/11 black op gave the Bush group executive emergency control over the U.S. Treasury and the power to devalue the U.S. dollar and take control over private, national security custodial accounts, which were under the power of attorney of Ambassador Leo Wanta.

    Should Osama bin Laden’s death be certified by the U.S. government and media elite, billions of dollars in the custodial account, by contractual agreement, will revert back to the private corporate entities originally set up for the purpose of removing the Soviets from Afghanistan.

    Given the massive economic meltdown the world financial markets now face, bin Laden is needed to be kept alive for the purpose of using the billion dollars of funds in the joint U.S. CIA bin Laden custodial accounts.

    It gets worse!

    The current tape released to the media is the last known tape of bin Laden in the archives at the Arab Al Jazeera radio station.

    The tape, which was made in the early 1990s, has been dubbed and spliced with the assistance of the Israeli Mossad.

    Copies of the latest fake tape were actually kept in the vault of Newsweek magazine for the last 30 days.

    It can also be reported that closet homosexual Editor of Newsweek magazine, Jon Meacham, was ordered by former White House political director Karl Rove to leak the existence of this tape at the time that a new federal grand jury is investigating U.S. Attorneygate crimes tied to the Bush-Clinton Crime Family.

    Reference: The San Diego Brent Wilkes-Kyle Dusty Foggo case and the framing of the former Democratic Governor of Alabama Don Siegelman.

    Newsweek magazine and closet homosexual Jon Meacham have been the cheerleaders for the unelectable closet lesbian Hillary Rodenhurst Clinton and the unelectable Barack Hussein Obama.

    Meacham and his Newsweek magazine have had financial ties to the closet homosexual lobbyist and now presidential candidate Fred Thompson.

    Meacham, a Republican and alleged religious type, wants an election fix in which homosexual in-the-closet Thompson gets to run against unelectable Hillary or unelectable Obama.

    The Bush-Clinton Crime Family and Newsweek magazine are clearly using this bin Laden tape to promote the criminal Iraq war policies of the unelected George W. Bushfraud.

    The Bush-Clinton-Newsweek-Washington Post gang want to go even further and freeze the Democratic Party presidential primary race.

    They are desperate to keep duly elected President Albert Gore Jr. from announcing his plan to finally run for re-election.

    P.S. It should come as no surprise that the Bush-Clinton-Newsweek magazine bin Laden trickery takes place as a U.S. Federal Curt basically rules Bush’s Patriot Act unconstitutional.

    Reference: The Patriot Act has not been used to catch terrorists but to fire U.S. Attorneys and spy on the American People.

    It was only duly elected President Albert Gore that had the guts to call the Patriot Act, i.e. espionage against the American People, to be eradicated.

    The Bush-Clinton-Newsweek-bin Laden trickery also comes on the heels of new fund raising problems for unelectable Hillary and her relationship with Red Chinese agent Norman Hsu.

    http://i.a.cnn.net/cnn/2007/images/08/30/t1home.clintonhsu.schwartz.jpg
    Norman Hsu and Hillary Clinton
    http://www.nbc.com/Law_&_Order/images/bios/fred_lrg.jpg
    Freddy Thompson (nbc)

    Note: In the 1990s closet homosexual Fred Thompson engaged in treason against the American People by covering up the role of Hsu as a Red Chinese agent to protect Bill and Hillary Clinton.

    Hsu had a financial relationship with noted Bush-Clinton fund raiser oil tycoon and previous INTERPOL fugitive Roger Tamraz.

    http://msnbcmedia1.msn.com/j/msnbc/Components/Photos/070831/070831_hsu_vmed_11a.widec.jpg
    Norman Hsu
    http://www.chron.com/content/news/photos/97/09/19/tamraz.jpg
    Roger Tamraz

    Side note: In 1997 Tamraz received letters from Republican Senators and closet homosexuals Mitch McConnell and Trent Lott to join the Senatorial Inner Circle. McConnell’s letter invited Tamraz to join the Senatorial Inner Circle in exchange for a contribution to the Republican Party.

    http://static.flickr.com/103/298144772_aba04522e3_o.jpg
    Mitch McConnell Trent Lott

    The Bush-Clinton-Newsweek bin Laden trickery also comes on the heels of the Nashville Tennessean newspaper now having access to closet homosexual Fred Thompson’s medical records revealing the fact that Thompson has the aids virus.

    How dare you, you conspiratorial tyrants and kings and notable queens.

    It is September 8, 2007.

    Notice to homosexuals in-the-closet Freddy Thompson and Jon Meacham: I still have the America Global China documents that you covered up to protect both Bush and Clinton;

    http://newsbusters.org/media/2007-01-23-PBS-Meacham.jpg http://wardsmythe.com/fred_in_or_out.gif

    and just a reminder that I still have the Red Mercury-Gary Best-FBI Division 5-Osama bin Laden-Al Qaeda financial contractual agreements.

    Could this be the reason the Bear Stearns Hedge Fund collapsed.

    And one last warning to the U.S. media filth: We are monitoring you 24 hours a day and watching your lies and spin as you present this bogus bin Laden tape as something real.

    I suggest Dana Priest of the Washington Post tell the American People the truth about the bogus tape or maybe the Washington Post will suddenly face subpoenas.

    Fool me once shame on you, fool we twice, shame on me.

    Stay tuned.

    *** A reminder: Homosexual gays and lesbians who are “IN-THE-CLOSET” are a MAJOR threat to National Security being vulnerable to blackmail and extortion by self-serving, hostile entities against the safety, security, sovereignty and best interests of the American People.

    And, of course, when all is said and done,
    and you turn your TV off,
    Albert Gore Jr. remains the duly elected,
    non-inaugurated, President of the United States.

    http://blog.myspace.com/tom_heneghan_intel

    – TOM HENEGHAN’S EXPLOSIVE INTELLIGENCE BRIEFINGS
    International Intelligence Expert, Tom Heneghan, has hundreds of highly credible sources inside American and European Intelligence Agencies and INTERPOL — reporting what is really going on behind the scenes of the controlled MSM cover up propaganda of on-going massive deceptions and illusions.

    Europe to rule on whether police can keep DNA of innocent people

    0

    By Robert Verkaik

    Police could lose the power to keep DNA samples taken from suspects who have been cleared of any wrongdoing, in a landmark case which is to be decided by the highest court in Europe.

    A ruling against the British Government could lead to the destruction of tens of thousands of DNA and fingerprint materials as well as deal a severe blow to any plans to create a universal genetic database.

    The challenge at the European Court of Human Rights is being brought by a teenager, known as S, who was arrested and charged with attempted robbery aged 11 in 2001, and Michael Marper, from Sheffield, who was arrested on harassment charges, aged 38, in the same year. Both were cleared and have no criminal records.

    But the Court of Appeal ruled in 2002 that they cannot ask for their DNA and fingerprint evidence to be destroyed. One of the judges hearing the appeal was Sir Stephen Sedley, who this week called for a national database to include DNA samples taken from every British citizen and any foreign visitors to this country. His comments provoked outrage from the human rights group Liberty, which called his proposal “chilling”.

    European judges in Strasbourg believe the issue is so important that they have decided to fast-track the case to go before the grand chamber, where all the Strasbourg justices will sit to determine the matter.

    The decision has been taken because the court decided that the case raises a serious question affecting the interpretation of the European Convention on Human Rights or because its resolution might have a result inconsistent with a previous judgment of the court.

    In both cases, the clients asked that their fingerprints and DNA samples be destroyed — but the requests were refused by South Yorkshire Police.

    Mr Marper and the juvenile argued that keeping fingerprints and especially DNA samples was an unjustified breach of their right to respect for private life protected by Article 8 of the European Convention on Human Rights. They are especially concerned about the future uses to which the DNA samples might be put, and the lack of independent oversight in the national DNA database.

    They are represented by Peter Mahy, a civil liberties specialist at Sheffield-based Howells, and one the country’s most respected human rights barristers, Richard Gordon QC. Mr Mahy said:”This decision by the European Court of Human Rights gives us significant hope that these cases will finally result in a massive change in the law — providing protection for those acquitted of crimes against their fingerprints and DNA samples being kept, putting them on a level footing with those not previously accused of any crimes.”

    He added: “We think this will be one of the most important human rights challenges the court has grappled with in recent years.”

    BBC cuts bonuses in desperate bid to regain public confidence

    0

    By Stewart Payne

    The BBC has cut the bonuses it pays to staff following the outcry over the £20 million it handed out a year ago.

     
    BBC Director-General Mark Thompson is under pressure after the recent phone-in scandal
    BBC Director-General Mark Thompson is under pressure after the recent phone-in scandal

    However, figures show that the troubled corporation, struggling to regain the confidence of viewers and listeners in the wake of its phone-in scandal, still made awards totalling almost £12 million this year.

    Figures obtained under the Freedom of Information Act reveal that the both the number of bonuses and the size of the amounts is down.

    The biggest bonus paid in 2006 was £100, 739. This year the largest award was £30,015. Eleven members of staff received amounts in excess of £20,000 and 2,560 were given payouts of between £1,000 and £10,000.

    The average payout was £1,400, down from last year’s £1,800. Although a total of 8,353 staff received bonuses, an increased number of employees had no performance awards at all.

    It is believed that many senior staff opted not to take bonuses following a series of scandals involving viewers unwittingly contributing to faked phone-in competitions.

    Flagship programmes such as Blue Peter, Comic Relief and Children in Need deceived viewers. In addition the corporation had to apologise to the Queen after a trailer was edited to give the false impression she had stormed out of a photo-shoot.

    The BBC is trying to win back confidence in its programme making and insiders believe that it has deliberately cut its bonuses package in order to avoid further controversy.

    The BBC declined to reveal which members of staff, below executive board level, were in receipt of bonuses, stating that do so would be in breach of the Data Protection Act.

    “Staff do not expect details of their remuneration and bonuses to be disclosed, and to do so would unfair,” a spokesman said. “The BBC operates a salary management policy which is designed to offer a competitive remuneration package and reward people on the basis of their personal performance,” the spokesman added.

    “All staff are entitled to be considered for a bonus of up to 10 per cent of their annual salary for outstanding and exceptional performance.”

    Suspected ’20th hijacker’ claims torture led to confession

    1

    By BEN FOX

     Saudi suspected of being the “20th hijacker” in the Sept. 11 attacks has recanted his confession, saying he made false statements after he was beaten, abused and humiliated at Guantanamo, according to documents obtained Friday by The Associated Press.

    Mohammed al-Qahtani – who U.S. officials have said previously was subjected to harsh treatment authorized by former Defense Secretary Donald H. Rumsfeld – denied knowledge of the Sept. 11 attacks in his first appearance before a military panel at Guantanamo Bay in October.

    “I am a businessman, a peaceful man,” al-Qahtani testified under oath, nearly five years after he was taken to the detention center in Cuba. “I have no connection to terrorism, violence or fighters.”

    The AP obtained a transcript of the hearing from the government under the Freedom of Information Act. This is the first extensive statement by al-Qahtani ever released.

    An unidentified military officer at the hearing said the detainee admitted traveling in 2001 in Afghanistan, where he received terrorist training, met with Osama bin Laden and agreed to participate in a “martyr mission” for al-Qaida.

    Al-Qahtani said the statements were not true and he only admitted to them while was being “tortured” at Guantanamo.

    The alleged torture, which he details in a separate statement, included being beaten, restrained for long periods in uncomfortable positions, threatened with dogs, exposed to loud music and freezing temperatures and stripped nude in front of female personnel, he said.

    “Once this torture stopped, I explained over and over that none of what I said was true,” he told the Administrative Review Board panel, convened to determine whether he could be released.

    “I have no intent to kill innocent people or anything like that,” he said.

    Al-Qahtani is one of the most notorious prisoners at Guantanamo, where the U.S. now holds about 340 men on suspicion of terrorism or links to al-Qaida or the Taliban.

    The U.S. has alleged that al-Qahtani, who military records show is about 28, barely missed becoming the 20th hijacker on Sept. 11, 2001. The Saudi was denied entry into the country by immigration agents at the airport in Orlando, Florida.

    At the time, he had more than $2,400 in cash, no return plane ticket and lead hijacker Mohamed Atta was waiting for him, said Navy Cmdr. Jeffrey Gordon, a Pentagon spokesman.

    “We think he is a dangerous terrorist,” he said.

    The U.S. treats detainees humanely and denounces the use of torture, Gordon said, but military investigators in 2005 concluded that al-Qahtani had been subjected to harsh treatment approved by Rumsfeld because he would not crack under interrogation.

    The investigation led by Air Force Lt. Gen. Randall M. Schmidt confirmed, among other things, that al-Qahtani was forced to wear women’s underwear, was threatened with dogs, and kept in solitary confinement for 160 days. At one point, he was interrogated for 18-20 hours per day on 48 of 54 days.

    Schmidt concluded, however, that while the treatment was abusive it was within policy and not torture because he was not denied food, water or medical care, and interrogators did not inflict physical pain on him.

    Al-Qahtani’s lawyer, Gitanjali Gutierrez of the Center for Constitutional Rights, said the detainee told her in meetings that he planned to recant his confession – but this was his first chance to make any kind of official statement to U.S. authorities.

    “It should be disturbing to anyone,” she said.

    Bush’s Iraq swagger a distant memory

    1

    In the heady days when US Marines toppled a huge statue of Saddam Hussein in central Baghdad, President George W. Bush was riding high on his mission to remake Iraq as a beacon of democracy.Now, the lights have dimmed on that adventure — and not just because of the power blackouts that still plague Iraq four and a half years after the deceptively easy US-led invasion.

    Back then, Bush rode roughshod over widespread global opinion that the war would be a disaster. Six weeks after the March 2003 invasion, he appeared on an aircraft carrier under the banner “Mission accomplished.”

    Now, the president is battling a Democratic-led Congress that is agitating for a quick exit of US troops, who have suffered more than 3,700 fatalities in Iraq. Estimates of Iraqi civilian deaths range from 70,000 to 655,000.

    The clamor has grown as General David Petraeus, the US commander in Iraq, and Baghdad ambassador Ryan Crocker get set to testify in Congress next week ahead of a White House report reviewing a seven-month-old military “surge.”

    But the future holds only bad and worse choices for the United States in Iraq, according to respected foreign-policy scholar Anthony Cordesman of Washington’s Center for Strategic and International Studies.

    Arguing the case for “strategic patience” given oil-rich Iraq’s importance in a simmering region, Cordesman told a recent seminar after a visit to the country: “Our legacy, if we abandon Iraq, will not be quick or easy.

    “It will be one of lasting suffering over five to 10 years.”

    Nearly two-thirds of Americans feel Bush was “too eager” to wage war in Iraq and is handling the conflict badly, a Harris Poll survey this week said. But another poll by UPI/Zogby said 54 percent believe the Iraq war is not lost.

    Over the past year, several best-selling books have laid bare what critics say was the rank incompetence that marked Bush’s foray into Iraq, which was sold as a life-or-death mission to prevent Saddam from threatening his enemies with nuclear or chemical annihilation.

    In “Fiasco,” Washington Post journalist Thomas Ricks argues that the invasion “was based on perhaps the worst war plan in American history,” one that “confused removing Iraq’s regime with the far more difficult task of changing the entire country.”

    Vice President Dick Cheney, former Pentagon chief Donald Rumsfeld and his deputy Paul Wolfowitz are accused of an ideologically driven crusade against Saddam that ignored all the dangers inherent in the war.

    Far too few troops were deployed, no thinking was given to a post-war Iraq, pro-US Iraqi exiles with shady pasts enjoyed undue influence, and the development expertise of other branches of the US government was shunned.

    Policy appeared to be made on the fly, such as US viceroy Paul Bremer’s fateful edict to disband the Iraqi army and so throw thousands of armed and angry men onto the streets, helping to foster Iraq’s bloody insurgency.

    In the newly published “Dead Certain: The Presidency of George Bush,” GQ magazine journalist Robert Draper quotes Bush as saying that Bremer surprised everyone with his order — a claim that the former occupation chief denies.

    Draper’s account adds to a slew of portrayals of Bush as a curiously disengaged commander in chief, allowing his top officials to fight endless turf wars while Iraq burned and the Taliban and Al-Qaeda regrouped in Afghanistan.

    Bush himself, who hinted at a possible reduction in US troops during a surprise visit to Iraq this week, is adamant that history will be his judge.

    In a late August speech to US veterans of 20th century conflicts in Asia, he warned that a hasty withdrawal from Iraq would trigger a bloodbath like that in Southeast Asia after the US defeat and retreat from Vietnam.

    “A free Iraq is not going to transform the Middle East overnight, but a free Iraq will be a massive defeat for Al-Qaeda,” he added.

    Senate Democratic leader Harry Reid retorted: “Our nation was misled by the Bush administration in an effort to gain support for the invasion of Iraq under false pretenses, leading to one of the worst foreign policy blunders in our history.”

    http://afp.google.com/article/ALeqM5hX8bJdpG4fH_lAGcXa6H6ZFcWXYA

    Bin Laden ‘to release new video’ on 9/11 anniversary

    1

    OSAMA bin Laden is to a release a new video on the sixth anniversary of the 11 September attacks on the United States, it was reported last night.

    The al-Qaeda figurehead will address his message to the American people, according to the SITE Intelligence Group, which monitors fundamentalism on the internet.

    A still posted on an Islamist website, shows bin Laden addressing the camera. His beard, which in previous messages had been streaked with grey, was entirely dark and appeared aged.

    A message on the webpage said it would soon carry the new bin Laden video to mark the sixth anniversary of the 9/11 attacks. The site did not say when the video, produced by al-Qaeda’s media arm, al-Sahab, would be issued. Bin Laden was last seen in a video statement aired to coincide with the November 2004 US presidential election. Since then, he has issued several audio messages, the last one in July 2006 in which he vowed al-Qaeda would fight the US anywhere in the world.

    Bin Laden and his deputy, Ayman al-Zawahri, are believed to be hiding in the border area between Afghanistan and Pakistan. US-led forces have been searching for bin Laden since toppling Afghanistan’s Taleban government after it refused to hand over the mastermind behind the 9/11 attacks.

    A Foreign Office spokeswoman last night declined to comment on the report.

    http://news.scotsman.com/international.cfm?id=1429902007

    Sir Ian Blair’s future in doubt as political critics renew attack

    0

    Sir Ian Blair‘We got it appallingly wrong’: Sir Ian Blair said senior Met Police management were late in telling him that Mr de Menezes (below) was innocent

    Sir Ian Blair faced growing questions about his future today as London politicians expressed new concerns about the way he runs the Met.

    Critics claimed the Met Commissioner’s position was “rocky” while there were more allegations he has lost the support of some senior colleagues.

    The new problems for Sir Ian surfaced a day after he suffered a fierce grilling from the Metropolitan Police Authority over the shooting of Brazilian Jean Charles de Menezes.

    During a combative meeting, Sir Ian was forced to say that he would not resign as Authority members accused him of trying to avoid the blame for the fatal blunder and of failing to be properly on top of what was happening inside his own force.

    Although Sir Ian has the overall backing of the MPA and the support of Home Secretary Jacqui Smith, critics piled on further pressure by mounting new attacks. MPA member Damian Hockney, who leads the One Party group on the London Assembly, said: “Sir Ian is in a difficult position. The criticism of him at yesterday’s full authority meeting was across the board. Even those who normally support him were critical.

    “The difficulty may come when other issues come to the fore, such as the Met’s trial over the de Menezes shooting on health and safety grounds.”

    Mr Hockney said that when Sir John Stevens, Sir Ian’s predecessor, faced a health and safety trial hewould have had no option but to resign had he lost.

    Jean Charles de Menezes

    Others close to the MPA warned that Sir Ian’s position was becoming rocky. One source said: “You cannot demand his resignation in an openmeeting because people like Jacqui Smith will rush to his defence and nothing gets done. But there is this sense now of how do you solve a problem like Ian Blair?”

    The MPA has also announced its own review of the de Menezes shooting, focusing on issues such as why Sir Ian was not told an innocent man had been killed until the next day.

    Insiders hope this report may be more incisive in its findings than the IPCC’s investigation, which cleared Sir Ian over claims he knowingly misled the public despite raising serious doubts about communication within the Met over the affair.

    In his questioning of Sir Ian, Tory MPA member Richard Barnes blamed this on the “absence of an inquiring mind” and added: “I have deep-seated concerns about the leadership of the Metropolitan Police.”

    Other London politicians defended Sir Ian. Jenny Jones, the Green Party representative on the MPA, said he was still the best man for the job and the Home Secretary is said to retain full confidence in him.

    Stockwell tubePoint-blank: a marksman after the shooting at Stockwell Tube in July, 2005 when Jean Charles de Menezes was murdered

    http://www.dailymail.co.uk/pages/live/articles/news/news.html?in_article_id=480270&in_page_id=1770

    Rift on Iraq as Bush meets man tipped as next Australian PM

    1

    AFP

    US President George W. Bush met Thursday with the man tipped to be Australia’s next prime minister, Kevin Rudd, who has pledged to pull the country’s troops out of Iraq.

    Rudd, leader of the centre-left Labor Party, indicated that Bush had been unable to persuade him to change his mind about Iraq, saying he had stuck to his well-known position on a staged withdrawal.

    “On the Iraq question … I made very plain to the president that we had a different point of view,” Rudd said. “I think I can safely say he noted that view.”

    Bush did not respond to reporters’ questions about the talks, but White House national security spokesman Gordon Johndroe said the US leader “had a good session” with Rudd.

    “They exchanged views on issues in Asia, the upcoming APEC (Asia-Pacific Economic Cooperation) meeting and the war on terror, including Iraq,” Johndroe said.

    Rudd and his party have a commanding lead over Prime Minister John Howard and the conservative government in opinion polls ahead of an election due by the end of the year.

    Howard is Bush’s staunchest remaining war ally, and the US leader made a point of expressing his friendship and high regard for the prime minister after they met Wednesday.

    “My own judgement is I wouldn’t count the man out,” he told a joint news conference. “As I recall, he’s kind of like me: we both have run from behind and won.”

    Bush had said ahead of his trip to Australia for the weekend APEC summit that he would try to convince Rudd it was important for coalition forces to remain in Iraq.

    “He doesn’t know me and I don’t know him, so I look forward to sharing my views and would ask, if he were to win, that he would consider conditions on the ground before making any decisions,” Bush said.

    Rudd said late Wednesday, however, that he would not change his position and would implement a staged withdrawal from Iraq if he won the elections.

    “That view is that we need to have a staged, negotiated withdrawal of our troops from Iraq, and I have no intention of changing that position.”

    Howard, in contrast, pledged at Wednesday’s joint news conference with Bush that Australia’s 1,500-strong force involved in Iraqi operations would not be reduced or withdrawn.

    That won him a firm endorsement from the US leader. “I admire your vision, I admire your courage,” Bush said.

    Howard is one of Bush’s last major allies in Iraq in a coalition that has previously included former prime ministers Tony Blair of Britain, Spain’s Jose Maria Aznar, Italy’s Silvio Berlusconi and Poland’s former president Aleksander Kwasniewski.

    Rudd told reporters Thursday after his own meeting with Bush that they had agreed to keep the content of the talks off the record.

    “The talks lasted for 45 minutes in Mr Bush’s Sydney hotel today,” he said. “We had a wide-ranging, good-natured, very open discussion.”

    Rudd, a former diplomat who served in Beijing and speaks Mandarin, said they talked about the rise of China and developments on the Korean peninsula and in Taiwan.

    “We talked at length about the history of the alliance between Australia and the United States and about Iraq, Afghanistan and climate change.”

    Bush has previously made it clear that despite his friendship with Howard, the US-Australia relationship is “bigger than any individual in office.”

    In turn, Rudd has stressed that he values Australia’s close ties with the United States and that despite disagreements over Iraq, he is ready to work with Bush.

    Asked if he thought he could develop a friendship with Bush similar to that enjoyed by Howard, Rudd replied: “I’m a friendly sort of guy.”

    Ballots ‘rejected automatically’

    0

    Ballot papers, May 2007 Tens of thousands of votes in the Holyrood election were rejected by the counting machines without any human adjudication, BBC Scotland has learned. An investigation has established that the machines were programmed to reject some of the new style ballot papers automatically.

    They never appeared on the screens to be challenged by the parties or adjudicated by returning officers.

    The Scotland Office said there was no evidence it added to voter confusion.

    It added that, in the instance of auto-adjudication for the 3 May election, the decision was taken between returning officers and the e-counting provider.

    However, First Minister Alex Salmond described the development as “astonishing” and deeply disturbing.

    “I was under the impression – until this revelation – that the ballots that were rejected were actually seen by the election agents as part of the process,” he said.

    More than 140,000 ballots were spoilt on 3 May when votes were held for the Scottish Parliament.

    Tens of thousands more ballots were rejected for the local authority elections, which were held on the same day, under a separate electoral system.

    One of the enduring images of election night was of candidates and agents scrutinising screens showing the rejected ballots.

    However, the BBC has learned that in some contests, more than half of all the “spoilt” ballots were rejected without any human adjudication.

    The machines were set to auto-adjudicate if they thought they had a Holyrood ballot paper with a cross in one column but apparently no mark in the other.

    Human adjudication

    In those circumstances the machine would count the good vote, reject the other one and automatically put the ballot paper in the pile alongside all the correctly-completed ballots.

    Shadow Scottish secretary David Mundell said he was “appalled” by the claims.

    “Unfortunately it has become part of a series of revelations. Right from the start the Scotland Office did not come clean about the mishandling of the elections,” he told BBC Scotland.

    The Tory MP claimed that information had to be “dragged out of” the Scotland Office.

    He said: “Rather than putting their hands up and saying ‘we made a complete hash of this and we apologise to the people of Scotland’, they’ve just continued to show arrogance and contempt, as if somehow it was nothing to do with them.”

    Mr Mundell’s Lib Dem opposite number, Alistair Carmichael, added that the auto-adjudicate decision was “inappropriate”.

    “Individual decisions should have been taken by returning officers in consultation with the machine operating company,” he said.

    A spokesman for the Scottish Green Party said that the review of the election must leave no stone unturned in order to get to the bottom of the problems.

    He added: “We are particularly concerned that the review of the election may only look at samples of rejected ballot papers rather than all of them. It is important that the review is absolutely thorough.”

    “Bums for Bush” protesters won’t turn the other cheek

    0

    A game group of Australian anti-war protesters are planning a cheeky protest against a visit by US President George W. Bush — baring their bottoms in what they hope will be a world-record moon.

    Police officers stand guard on an elevated road over the Sydney Conventation Centre, the venue of the APEC summit. A game group of Australian anti-war protesters are planning a cheeky protest against a visit by US President George W. Bush — baring their bottoms in what they hope will be a world-record moon.

    Organiser Will Saunders said the Friday protest was aimed at lightening the mood in Sydney, a city currently patrolled by 5,000 police and soldiers and divided by a massive steel and concrete fence ahead of the APEC summit.

    Police have said they expect violence during a series of protests against the Asia-Pacific Economic Cooperation summit which will gather together 21 leaders from around the world.

    “There’s this heaviness about the protests,” Saunders told AFP.

    “It’s hoped to make the point that protests don’t have to be these terribly heavy serious things.”

    The “Bums Not Bombs” group will particularly target Bush, whose unpopular war in Iraq has been strongly backed by Australian Prime Minister John Howard.

    The visits by the world leaders, including Bush’s five-day stay at a luxurious 3,500 US dollar per night harbourside hotel, have resulted in road blocks, changes to public transport, and other disruptions in Australia’s biggest city.

    The protest will take place on Friday in Sydney’s Hyde Park, close to where the leaders will be meeting.

    In a leaflet to possible supporters, the group calls for 4,000 cheeks — er, 2,000 people — to “tell Bush what we really think about his visit.”

    Saunders said numbers for the protest were not yet certain but he had a core group to perform a “21 Bum Salute” to represent each of the countries in the grouping.

    “I think there’s certain to be hundreds of people,” said Saunders, who previously attracted media attention when he and another man painted “No War” on the Sydney Opera House in huge, bright red letters on the eve of the US invasion of Iraq in 2003.

    The group said it needed 4,000 cheeks to break the previous world record moon. “This is one APEC protest we can all enjoy,” it said.

    Bush himself seemed unworried about any of the protests.

    “People feel like they want to protest — fine, they can,” he told a press conference in Sydney.

    http://afp.google.com/article/ALeqM5itXCuMNVA4ujiEZDehc4FpagmQVw

    Israel told to let Arab farmers onto their land

    0

    By Tim Butcher

    Israel told to let Arab farmers onto their land
    Palestinians celebrate Israel’s high court order that the West Bank security barrier should be moved

    Israel’s high court caused jubilation among Palestinian human rights campaigners when it ordered yesterday that a section of the West Bank security barrier should be moved so that Arab farmers could reach their land.

    While the ruling did not order the barrier shifted back to the line of the 1967 perimeter of the West Bank, as some critics have demanded, it nevertheless marked a step forward for the campaigners.

    Abdullah Abu Rahma, one of the leaders of a weekly protest at the mile-long section of barrier near the West Bank village of Bili’in, called the court decision “wonderful”.

    “This means that our struggle is fruitful,” Mr Abu Rahma said. “We will continue the struggle and we want the decision to be implemented immediately.”

    Two years of protests saw routine clashes with the Israeli security forces with, according to one estimate, a total of 50 people arrested and 800 injured since the rallies began.

    A panel of three judges in the court ordered the Israeli government and military to re-route a section of the barrier because it blocked residents’ access to farmland.

    The judges added that Israeli security could still be guaranteed if the barrier was routed differently.

    The barrier, which is mostly a fence but becomes a concrete wall near cities including Jerusalem, was begun in 2002.While many international lawyers believe it is in breach of international law – which forbids such construction on occupied land – Israel argues it is needed to stop suicide bombers travelling from the West Bank to launch attacks.

    The Israeli defence ministry said it would study yesterday’s ruling and respect it.

    – Haim Ramon, the Israeli deputy prime minister, yesterday proposed cutting off electricity, fuel and water to the Gaza Strip to force Hamas to stop the daily rocket fire.

    “We won’t continue to supply oxygen [to Gaza] in the form of electricity, fuel and water when they are trying to kill our children,” he told an Israeli radio station.

    The prime minister, Ehud Olmert, had earlier instructed the army “to destroy every Qassam rocket launcher and anyone involved in their launching” after a rocket exploded in the town of Sderot.

    Bush can’t recall why Iraqi army disbanded

    0

    In biography excerpts, he says he initially wanted to maintain the forces: ‘Yeah, I can’t remember.’

    By Molly Hennessy-Fiske

    One of the most heavily criticized actions in the aftermath of the U.S.-led invasion of Iraq in March 2003 was the decision, barely two months later, to disband the Iraqi army, alienating former soldiers and driving many straight into the ranks of anti-American militant groups.

    But excerpts of a new biography of President Bush show him saying that he initially wanted to maintain the Iraqi army and, more surprising, that he cannot recall why his administration decided to disband it.

    “The policy was to keep the army intact; didn’t happen,” Bush told biographer Robert Draper in excerpts published in Sunday’s New York Times.

    Draper pressed Bush to explain why, if he wanted to maintain the army, his chief administrator for Iraq, L. Paul Bremer III, issued an order in May 2003 disbanding the 400,000-strong army without pay.

    “Yeah, I can’t remember; I’m sure I said, ‘This is the policy, what happened?’ ” Bush said, adding: “Again, Hadley’s got notes on all this stuff” — a reference to national security advisor Stephen J. Hadley.

    Spokesmen for the White House and former Defense Secretary Donald H. Rumsfeld declined to comment about the excerpts Sunday. Bremer could not be reached for comment.

    Douglas J. Feith, then undersecretary of Defense for policy and an architect of the Iraq invasion, said the excerpts raised interesting questions about how the pivotal decision was made.

    Feith was deeply involved in the decision-making process at the time, working closely with Bush and Bremer.

    In February 2003, the month before the invasion, Feith briefed Bush about plans Rumsfeld had signed off on to maintain the Iraqi army. The assumption at the time, based on information provided by the CIA, was that the army would remain intact after the invasion, Feith said.

    Instead, Iraqi officers fled their posts, which were ransacked and looted. U.S. officials inherited a military that would have to be overhauled or abandoned, Feith said in an interview Sunday, and they opted for the latter.

    Feith said he could not comment about how involved the president was in the decision to change policy and dissolve the army.

    “I don’t know all the details of who talked to who about that,” he said.

    But he said the decision warrants scrutiny.

    “I know there are people out there who say one of the most significant decisions the United States made [in Iraq] was the dissolution of the Iraqi army,” Feith said. “So it’s an interesting question. But very often on these things, until everybody writes memoirs and all the researchers look at the documents, some of these things are hard to sort out. You could be in the thick of it and not necessarily know all the details.”

    Feith, a visiting professor at Georgetown University, is the author of a forthcoming memoir, “War and Decision,” about his work in Iraq and Afghanistan.

    Draper’s book “Dead Certain” is to be released Tuesday.

    Food additives ‘can cause hyperactivity’

    0

     A new study has indicated that some food additives can increase hyperactivity in children.Researchers commissioned by the UK’s Food Standards Agency looked at the effects of two combinations of E numbers on the behaviour of children who were prone to hyperactivity.

    The scientists took two mixes of artificial food colours and the popular preservative sodium benzoate, which can be found in foods in like soft drinks, confectionary and ice cream, which are popular with children.

    They found that the combinations did increase hyperactivity among children and recommended that those who are prone to hyperactivity or Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder should eliminate these additives from their diet.

    The study added that there are many factors associated with hyperactivity including genetic factors, being born prematurely or environment and upbringing.

    The Food Safety Authority of Ireland says it is aware of the study, which covered Sunset Yellow (E110), Tartrazine (E102), Carmoisine (E122), Ponceau 4R (E124), Quinoline Yellow (E104) and Allura Red (E129).

    It is also recommending parents to read food labels when buying products for their children.

    http://www.rte.ie/news/2007/0906/foodadditives.html

    A ‘chilling’ proposal for a universal DNA database

    0

    By Nigel Morris

    A civil liberties storm erupted yesterday after a senior judge called for the genetic details of every person in Britain, and all visitors to the country, to be added to the national DNA database. Critics warned that the “chilling” move would infringe privacy, be hugely impractical and have only a marginal impact on crime.

    Downing Street and the Home Office, which have been accused of moving Britain towards a surveillance society, distanced themselves from Lord Justice Sedley’s controversial suggestion without entirely ruling it out.

    About 4.1 million samples are already on the database, almost 7 per cent of the population and far more than in any other Western country. Police can take DNA from anyone arrested, regardless of whether they are eventually charged.

    But Sir Stephen Sedley, one of the most experienced Court of Appeal judges, protested that there were “indefensible” anomalies in the system, including disproportionate numbers of people from ethnic minorities on the database.

    He said: “We have a situation where if you happen to have been in the hands of the police, your DNA is permanently on record and if you haven’t, it isn’t.”

    The judge told the BBC that the remedy could be to place every person on the database, as well as the 32 million annual foreign visitors to the country, for the “absolutely rigorously restricted purpose of crime detection and prevention”.

    He acknowledged that the creation of a universal database had very serious implications, but argued that it ultimately led to a fairer system.

    Tony Blair said last year that he could see no reason why the DNA of everyone should not ultimately be kept on record.

    Gordon Brown’s official spokesman said the Government had no plans to introduce a compulsory database, and stressed the logistical and bureaucratic problems, and the civil liberties concerns, surrounding such a move.

    Tony McNulty, the Home Office minister, said he was broadly sympathetic to the “real logic” of the judge’s argument. But he stressed: “There is no government plan to go to a compulsory database now or in the foreseeable future.”

    Nick Clegg, the Liberal Democrat home affairs spokesman, accused the Government of a “cloak-and-dagger strategy of creating a universal database behind the backs of the British people”.

    David Davis, the shadow Home Secretary, called for a parliamentary debate on the issue. He said: “The erratic nature of this database means that some criminals have escaped having their DNA recorded whilst a third of those people on the database — over a million people — have never been convicted of a crime.”

    Shami Chakrabarti, director of the human rights organisation Liberty, said a database of DNA from convicted sexual and violent offenders was a “perfectly sensible crime-fighting measure”.

    But she added: “A database of every man, woman and child in the country is a chilling proposal, ripe for indignity, error and abuse.”

    The DNA database, created in 1995, is growing by 30,000 samples a month. It contains the profiles of 884,000 children, including more than 100 who are less than 10 years old.

    The Home Office is currently reviewing the Police and Criminal Evidence Act 1984, which sets out the powers to take and retain biometric data. It will consider whether records should only be held temporarily for minor offenders and people who are not charged.

    The Home Office said last night that the database provides police with an average of 3,500 matches each month.

    9/11 DVD Delayed to Protect the Clintons?

    1

    The writer of last year’s TV miniseries “The Path to 9/11” says the release of the show’s DVD is being delayed in order to protect Bill Clinton’s legacy and Hillary Clinton’s candidacy.

    The Los Angeles Times reports that Cyrus Nowrasteh says he was told by ABC that the DVD would be released this past January, then April, then this summer. Now there is no release date set.

    The mini-series cast a critical eye on the Clinton administration’s anti-terror efforts prior to the attacks. It was a ratings success and garnered seven Emmy nominations.

    Now even Hollywood liberals are upset with its apparent shelving. Oliver Stone calls it, “Censorship in the most blatant way… it’s an important work and needs to be seen.”

    Anchor Away

    “CBS Evening News” anchor Katie Couric says she has seen major improvements during her visit to Iraq.

    “We hear so much about things going bad, but real progress has been made there in terms of security and stability,” Couric said on Tuesday’s broadcast.

    She noted that moderate Sunnis are joining the Iraqi security forces, saying: “The spike in police has really been significant. The incidents in Iraq have gone down dramatically.” And she said that Fallujah is, “considered a real role model of something working right in Iraq.”

    The Hsu Fits

    Rhode Island Democratic Congressman Patrick Kennedy says he is not returning $6,600 in contributions from embattled fundraiser Norman Hsu – who has bankrolled many party leaders and is currently a fugitive. Kennedy’s chief of staff says the congressman is following all the rules and there is no indication Hsu’s contributions were illegal.

    But several top Democrats have said they will return Hsu’s money or donate it to charity – among them Hillary Clinton, Barack Obama, John Kerry – and the congressman’s father, Senator Edward Kennedy.

    Back Market

    You’ve been hearing for years about the Chinese ripping off things like music, books and American movies.

    Now it turns out one Chinese official even plagiarized the letter of apology that he read during his corruption trial. Zhang Shaocang wept as he read his four-page statement, which said he had initially been dedicated to his work but lost his way.

    It turns out the letter featured whole sentences copied word-for-word from a printed apology two weeks earlier by another disgraced Chinese official. an official state newspaper says Zhang was trying to get leniency from the court – but his stolen statement was dismissed as “showboating.”

    –FOX News Channel’s Martin Hill contributed to this report.

    http://www.foxnews.com/story/0,2933,295882,00.html

    Protests mark Bush arrival in Australia

    0

    AFP

    After a surprise visit to Iraq, US President George W. Bush arrived in Sydney late Tuesday for a regional summit with the city locked down in the biggest security operation in Australian history.

    North Korea emerged as a key focus of the meeting after the top US nuclear negotiator said the communist state had to do more to dismantle its atomic programme to be taken off a US list of state sponsors of terrorism.

    Trade and climate change also figure high on the agenda for the 21-member Asia Pacific Economic Cooperation (APEC) forum.

    If the US leader was hoping his visit to Sydney would give him a break from the pressures of the bloody insurgency in Iraq, however, he was destined to be disappointed.

    An established anti-war group called the Stop Bush Coalition called a small “unwelcoming ceremony” in Sydney to kick off a series of protests culminating in a march by up to 20,000 people on Saturday.

    Police have launched a court battle against the march, saying it poses a serious security threat if it is allowed to proceed past the US consulate in the city centre.

    “Our intelligence tells us there is an intent to act violently,” said state Police Commissioner Andrew Scipione.

    Some 3,500 police and 1,500 counter-terrorism and special forces soldiers have been deployed to maintain security, while parts of the city have been blocked off by a 5.5-kilometre (3.4-mile)-long steel and concrete fence.

    Prime Minister John Howard is a strong supporter of the US leader, but an opinion poll published here showed most Australians believe Bush is the worst US president in history.

    The APEC conference brings Bush together with 20 other world leaders, including Russian President Vladimir Putin and China’s Hu Jintao, and global hotspots will dominate talks on the sidelines of the summit.

    The chief US negotiator on North Korea, Christopher Hill, told reporters that while the US was considering whether to take North Korea off its terror list, the reclusive nation had to take more steps on denuclearisation.

    “We agreed in February we would begin the process of taking them off,” Hill said after briefing his Japanese counterpart here.

    “We’re working on that basis but to get off there will be additional steps that are needed to be taken. They know this.”

    Bush, Howard and Japan’s Prime Minister Shinzo Abe are to meet Saturday over breakfast for their first trilateral summit, set to focus on security issues including North Korea and China.

    Japan and Australia signed a security pact in March, Tokyo’s first such agreement with any country besides its main ally, the US.

    China, meanwhile, tried to block a meeting over its human rights record timed to coincide with Hu’s visit, but state officials said they had rejected the demand.

    Chinese embassy officials reportedly said the meeting being hosted in the New South Wales state parliament would harm bilateral relations between China and Australia.

    Meanwhile, climate change campaigners staged protests for a third straight day calling for APEC action to cut the emission of greenhouse gases blamed for global warming. APEC groups the world’s three worst polluters — the US, China and Russia.

    APEC members account for almost half of global trade and calls have gone out in the run-up to the summit for urgent action to break the deadlock over World Trade Organisation (WTO) negotiations.

    Australia’s Trade Minister Warren Truss met with US Trade Representative Susan Schwab and urged Washington to send a “powerful signal” on cutting farm subsidies to give the protracted global trade talks a much-needed push.

    Middle East Madness

    0

    By Stephen Lendman
    RINF Alternative News

    Administration rhetoric is heated and the dominant media keep trumpeting it. It signals war with Iran of the “shock and awe” kind – intensive, massive and maybe with nuclear weapons. Plans are one thing, action another, and how things play out, in fact, won’t be known until the fullness of time that may not be long in coming. For now, waiting and guessing games continue, and one surmise is as good as another. The more threatening they are, the less likely they’ll happen, or at least it can be hoped that’s so.

    It’s not media critic, activist and distinguished professor emeritus Edward Herman’s view. He writes “the situation now is even more menacing than we faced in 2002-2003 when the Bush gang was readying us for the invasion (and) occupation of Iraq. There is strong evidence that Bush-Cheney and company are about to attack Iran (and) the groundwork is being set with a flood of propaganda, helped by the media and Democrats.” It may be “his last (crazed) hope for immortality” and possible attempt to revive “Republican strength through this classic maneuver of cornered-rat politicians.”

    Most frightening is that the Bush administration doesn’t have enough of a bad thing and may want more of it. This time, however, the stakes are incalculable, the risks over the top, and the chance for success (from an American perspective) almost nil if post-WW II history is a good predictor. Distinguished historian Gabriel Kolko notes in all its conflicts since 1950, America never lost a battle and never won a war. It’s a world class bumbler, never learns from its mistakes, and only succeeds, in Kolko’s words, in making an “unstable world far more precarious” than if it left well enough alone.

    Enter Iran with George Bush having a way with words about the Islamic Republic. They’re hotting up and sending ominous signals. At the American Legion Reno convention August 28, Bush, with typical bluster, accused Iran of threatening the Middle East with a nuclear holocaust and said he authorized US military commanders in Iraq to “confront Tehran’s murderous activities.” He accused the Ahmadinejad government of supporting violent Iraqi forces he calls “radicals and extremists….Either the forces of extremism (or freedom) succeed. Either our enemies advance their interests in Iraq, or we advance” ours.

    Earlier in the month, Bush threatened Iran stating: “When we catch you playing a non-constructive role, there will be a price to pay.” He added recent US-Iranian meetings in Baghdad were “to send a message that there will be consequences for….people transporting, delivering EFPs (roadside bombs)….that kill Americans in Iraq.”

    This type language points to a widened Middle East war with Iran the target in mind and sanity of those planning it in question. Or maybe not? Questions remain in the run-up to the September 11 Iraq progress report General Petraeus and Ambassador Crocker will deliver to Congress. Packaging is everything, and the date chosen was planned to heighten public fear of the event on that day that may help explain what’s going on – not attacking the Islamic Republic but shoring up flagging support for a war gone sour and worry later about more of it with Iran.

    Or maybe not, according to a report called “Considering a war with Iran: A discussion paper on WMD in the Middle East.” On August 28, the Raw Story web site published a summary of what two respected figures wrote. They are: British scholar and arms expert Dan Plesch, Director of the Centre for International Studies and Diplomacy of the School of Oriental and African Studies (SOAS) at the University of London and Martin Butcher, former Director of the British American Security Information Council (BASIC) and former adviser to the Foreign Affairs Committee of the European Parliament.

    Their work compliments others saying war with Iran is coming, and things are too far along to stop it. Their analysis is detailed, elementary in their opinion, and very frightening. They conclude the Pentagon has plans for a “massive, multi-front, full-spectrum” shock and awe-type attack on Iran short of a ground invasion. In involves destroying enough of the country’s military capacity and armed forces, nuclear energy sites, economic infrastructure and more to destabilize and oust its regime or reduce its status to “a weak or failed state.” It continues saying:

    — 10,000 sites are targeted using bombers and long range missiles;

    — the US has enough ground, air and Marine forces in the region to devastate Iran on short notice;

    — covert US (and possibly UK) and armed popular resistance activities are already ongoing in the Iranian provinces of Azeri, Balujistan, Kurdistan and the country’s major oil producing region of Khuzestan in the southwest bordering Iraq and the Persian Gulf.

    — nuclear weapons are deployed but unlikely to be used short of clear evidence Iran already has them, may in short order, or if its believed only these weapons can destroy its hardened Natanz nuclear facility;

    — the Bush administration has avoided publicizing its war preparations leading Plesch and Butcher to believe confrontation is more likely;

    — no information is available on possible Iranian WMD weapons, but the authors state its military “has missiles and probably some chemical capacity;” those aren’t WMDs and many other nations also have them; at least eight of them (not Iran) have nuclear ones as well, several are prepared to use them, and the US states it as first-strike policy;

    — significant “risks and impediments” exist but eliminating Iran as a regional power and regime change are stated goals in the administration’s National Security Strategy (updated in 2006);

    — except for the UK and Israel, no other nations are known to support US plans;

    — according to anonymous UK military sources, the Bush administration switched its main focus to Iran after March, 2003 even when its forces became bogged down in Iraq;

    — region-based Marines outside Iraq are deployed to protect oil tankers, shipping lanes in the Gulf, the Straits of Hormuz and be able to confront and destroy Iranian forces;

    — US Special Forces will continue covert search and destroy missions in Iran and efforts to incite internal uprisings against the Iranian government;

    — there’s no assurance Iraqi Shias will support their Iranian allies; their leaders may act in their own best interests inside Iraq that may preclude backing Iran under US attack;

    — US 2008 presidential candidates are posturing to see who can be toughest on confronting a potential Iranian threat even though there is none; Europeans are puzzled that political expediency trumps reality especially concerning a wider Middle East war; the Bush administration may worry most about an “Iran of the regions” and may attack the Islamic Republic to avoid it;

    — if an attack on Iran succeeds (with long odds against it) and the US is better able assert “its global military dominance….then the risks to humanity….and to states of the Middle East are grave indeed.”

    Enter the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA)

    IAEA’s August 30 report on Iran was bad news for the Bush administration based on what its Director, Mohamed ElBaradei, told the press: “This is the first time Iran is ready to discuss all outstanding issues which triggered the crisis in confidence. It’s a significant step. There are clear guidelines, so it’s not, as some people are saying, an open-ended invitation to dallying with the agency or a ruse to prolong negotiations to avoid sanctions….I’m clear at this stage you need to give Iran a chance to prove its stated goodwill.”

    The Bush administration was dismissive to enraged in response with statements claiming the agreement is inadequate and Tehran must suspend all (its perfectly legal) nuclear enrichment, or else. State Department spokesman Tom Casey disdainfully said: “There is no partial credit here. Iran has refused to comply with its international obligations, and as a result of that the international community (meaning the US and other nations it can bully, bribe or threaten) is going to continue to ratchet up the pressure.”

    The message is clear and all known information confirms it. Washington wants regime change in Iran. The open question is by what means and when. It doesn’t matter that Iran is a signatory to the 1970 Nuclear Non-Proliferation Treaty (NPT), is in full compliance with it, and in 1974 entered into an agreement with the IAEA “for the application of safeguards in connection with the Treaty on the Non-Proliferation of Nuclear Weapons” to remain in force as long as Iran is so obligated under NPT provisions. The agreement stipulates all Iranian “source or special fissionable materials” and activities relating to them are subject to IAEA Safeguards “with a view to preventing diversion of nuclear energy from peaceful purposes.”

    IAEA reported Iran’s uranium enrichment program slowed, is operating well below capacity, and isn’t producing nuclear fuel in significant amounts. As of August 19, it had 1968 centrifuges operating and 656 others in various stages of assembly or testing. IAEA verified this level of enrichment is well below what’s needed to build a nuclear bomb. IAEA also said an outstanding issue related to plutonium experiments was satisfactorily resolved.

    Iran and IAEA also announced a timetable to resolve by year end “all outstanding questions” regarding the implementation of Iran’s Safeguards Agreement as well as other non or less relevant questions. They include: lab experiments involving minute amounts of plutonium and plutonium-210 and the source of the enriched uranium micro-contamination at a technical University in Tehran. Although not obligated to do so, Iran also agreed to resolve other minor issues as a show of good faith. As it’s now proceeding, Iran is on track to verify total compliance with its Safeguard Agreement obligations by yearend. That should make it less vulnerable to a US attack, but don’t bet on it. Bush administration officials are never short on reasons to justify its plans and facts on the ground won’t deter them.

    They’ve already denounced the IAEA report as an Iranian ploy to buy time and seems to imply IAEA partnered with Iran against Washington. ElBaradei’s response to this was: “My responsibility is to look at the big picture. If I see a situation deteriorating (and) it could lead to war, I have to raise the alarm or give my advice.” Earlier he said: “I have no brief other than to make sure we don’t go into another war or that we go crazy into killing each other. You do not want to give (an) additional argument to the new (Bush administration) crazies who say ‘let’s go and bomb Iran.’ ”

    Bush Administration Strategy: Usually Wrong but Never in Doubt

    In the run-up to its March, 2003 attack on Iraq, the Bush administration proved it didn’t lack tricks and schemes to justify war. Iran now faces the same threat with one provocative act from Washington after another. In an unprecedented and outrageous move against a sovereign state, the New York Times and Washington Post reported August 15 the administration plans to designate Iran’s Revolutionary Guard Corps (a major branch of its military) a “global terrorist” organization. It’s based on unsubstantiated claims IRGC’s elite Quds Force is arming, training and directing Shiite militias involved in attacking US Iraqi troops.

    It contradicts Iraqi prime minister Nouri al-Maliki, however, that Iran’s role in the region is constructive. That comment runs counter to Bush claiming Iran as “the world’s leading state sponsor of terrorism, (is) active(ly) pursui(ng)….technology that could lead to nuclear weapons (and) We will confront this danger before it is too late.”

    Washington further insists IRGC is helping Taliban fighters in Afghanistan, interfering in various other ways in Iraq, and is aiding US-designated “terrorist” groups like Hezbollah and Hamas. It has no evidence, reports are CIA confirms it, but no matter. All that counts is Washington claims it, case closed. That’s how schoolyard bullies run playgrounds and global godfathers do it everywhere.

    In the long-running US-Iran saga, it remains to be seen how events will play out. Expect more heated rhetoric, and don’t ignore Dick Cheney’s influence. Barnett Rubin’s recent comments about him from his Global Affairs blog are all over the internet. Cheney’s already unofficially on record urging war on Iran and presently proposes bombing suspected Quds Force sites in Iraq. Earlier reports were he and other administration hard-liners considered air attacks against Quds Force headquarters near Tehran. If they come, it risks all-out war so, for now, they were tabled.

    Barnett now says he has a message from a well-connected insider that “the Office of the Vice-President (plans) to roll out a campaign for war with Iran in the week after Labor Day” to be backed by hawkish think tanks and similar elements in the dominant media. It will involve a “heavy sustained assault on the airwaves” to win over public support that will be considered successful at “35 – 40 percent.”

    It’s already begun on-air and on the pages of the lead and most influential proponent for war on Iraq in the Judith Miller days, The New York Times. It may now be playing the same role promoting war with Iran with one example showing up in Michael Slackman and Nazila Fathi’s September 3 article: “On Two Fronts, One Nuclear, Iran Is Defiant.” Its headlined tone (differing from explanatory comments buried below) contradicts IAEA evidence and claims “to reaffirm the country’s refusal to back down to pressure from the United States over its nuclear program and its role in Iraq.”

    That came after an opening salvo that “Iran’s leaders issued dual, defiant statements on Sunday (September 2).” It continued saying President Ahmadinejad claimed the nation had 3,000 active centrifuges to enrich uranium (IAEA inspections confirm 1968), and “the top ayatollah (Ali Khamenei) appoint(ed) a new Islamic Revolutionary Guards commander who once advocated military force against students.” This is just a sampling of what’s ahead from the Times and other dominant media elements. They’re enlisted, like in 2002, to beat the drums of war and maybe get one for their efforts.

    Then there’s Congress on both sides of the aisle and presidential candidates hawkishly posturing for whatever they imagine it gains them. The public overwhelmingly opposes more war and wants the Iraq one ended. But those ideas are nowhere in sight on the campaign trail or Capitol Hill where the Iran Counter-Proliferation Act of 2007 will likely pass easily now that Congress is reconvened. It cleared the House Foreign Affairs Committee 37 to 1 June 28 and after passing both Houses will become effective January 1, 2008. It hardens the existing Iran Sanctions Act by closing loopholes in it with the intent to thwart all foreign investment in Iran and strangle the country economically.

    It also prohibits nuclear cooperation between the US and any nation aiding Iran’s commercial nuclear program and requests the White House designate Iran’s IRGC a “terrorist” group and block assets of any nation, organization or group supporting it. As summer wanes, fall approaches and the administration touts progress in Iraq it claims will continue (with Bush’s grandstanding six hour visit for a staged performance at Al Asad Air Base in Al Anbar province part of it), the prospect for more “progress” Iraqi-style awaits Iran. That’s unless public pressure builds and/or cooler heads in Washington and other capitals denounce what some distinguished analysts believe may ignite WW III if it comes. That’s incentive enough for us all to become engaged and stop this rush to madness in the Middle East not likely to be contained where it starts.

    Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago and can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

    Also visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com and listen to The Steve Lendman News and Information Hour on TheMicroEffect.com Saturdays at noon US central time.

    Friday, August 31, 2007

    Labor Day Hypocrisy

    Labor Day Hypocrisy – by Stephen Lendman

    Labor Day is commemorated on the first Monday in September each year since the first one was celebrated in New York in 1882. Around the world outside the US, socialist and labor movements are observed on May 1 to recognize organized labor’s social and economic achievements and the workers in them. This day gets scant attention in the US, but where it’s prominent it’s commonly to remember the Haymarket Riot of May 4, 1886 in Chicago. It followed the city’s May 1 general strike for an eight hour day that led to violence breaking out on the 4th.

    Labor Day became a national federal holiday when Congress passed legislation for it in June, 1894 at a time working people had few rights, management had the upper hand, only wanted to exploit them for profit, and got away with it. It took many painful years of organizing, taking to the streets, going on strike, holding boycotts, battling police and National Guard forces, and paying with their blood and lives before real gains were won. They got an eight hour day, a living wage, on-the-job benefits and the pinnacle of labor’s triumph in the 1930s with the passage of the landmark Wagner Act establishing the National Labor Relations Board (NLRB). It guaranteed labor the right to bargain collectively on equal terms with management for the first time ever.

    All of it was won from the grassroots. Management gave nothing until forced to and neither did government. It always sides with business never yields a thing unless threatened with disruptive work stoppages or possible insurrection. All this is in a democracy that claims to be a government of the people, by the people and for the people, most of whom are ordinary working class ones.

    Since a worried Congress passed the 1935 Wagner Act during The Great Depression, the state of organized labor declined, especially post-WW II. It accelerated precipitously during the Reagan years under an administration openly hostile to worker rights in its one-side support for management. It continued unabated, under Republican and Democrat administrations, and today stands at a multi-generational low.

    Under George Bush conditions got much worse. Since coming into office in 2001, he sided with management openly on policies to strip workers of their right to organize and be able to bargain for a living wage and essential benefits. He hired anti-union officials, denied millions overtime pay, cut pay raises for 1.8 million federal workers claiming a “national emergency,” and schemed to end Social Security as we know it by plotting (unsuccessfully so far) to let Wall Street sharks take it over.

    Since labor’s ascendency decades earlier, corporate America, in league with government, shamelessly denigrated unions and the rights of working people in them. In 1958, 34.7% of the work force was unionized, but now the figure is around 12% overall, and only 7.4% in the private sector – the lowest it’s been in seven decades.

    Even worse, most jobs are low-pay service sector ones because the nation’s manufacturing base and many higher-paying positions in finance and technology have been offshored to low-wage developing nations. Workers there can be hired for a fraction of the pay scales here or as virtual serfs at below poverty wages as low as $2 a day or less and no benefits. They fill legions of sweatshop factory jobs in countries prohibiting unions and fair worker practice standards for Wal-Mart’s “Always low prices” on the backs of ruthlessly exploited working people.

    Nonetheless, on the first Monday each September, this nation “remembers” working Americans with a federally-mandated holiday in their “honor.” Who’s celebrating when it’s disingenuously commemorated at a time worker rights are threatened, ignored, forgotten, and uncared about by heartless governments beholden to capital. They scorn working people who are no longer as deceived with meaningless bread and circus droppings at the expense of what they need most: good jobs at good pay, essential benefits, job security, and a government on their side doing what counts most – supporting their rights with worker-friendly legislation.

    Workers are reminded every day that backing like that is off the table by governments shamelessly mocking their day. It’s commemorated in name only by a nation beholden to capital, the corporate giants controlling it, and the best democracy their money can buy for them alone.

    Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago and can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

    Also visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com and listen to The Steve Lendman News and Information Hour on TheMicroEffect.com Saturdays at noon US central time.

    Wednesday, August 29, 2007

    The War on Working Americans – Part II

    The War on Working Americans – Part II – by Stephen Lendman

    This article was written to assess the state of working America in the run-up to Labor Day, 2007. Organized labor today is severely weakened following decades of government and business duplicity to crush it. Part I reviewed the labor movement’s rise in the 19th century and subsequent decline post-WW II and especially in the last three decades. Hope arose for some change in the Democrat-led 100th Congress. A weak effort emerged, but Senate Republicans killed it.

    Organized labor is struggling to remain relevant and claw its way back. The enormous obstacles it faces are reviewed below as well as the condition of working Americans today in a globalized world affecting their lives and welfare heading “south” in the “land of opportunity” offering pathetically little.

    The Loss of High-Paying Jobs from Outsourcing Under Globalized Market-Based Rules

    World trade isn’t new, and the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT) was its mid-20th century version after 23 founding nations signed it on October 30, 1947 in Geneva. Earlier in 1946, they drafted the International Trade Organization (ILO) that followed the creation of the IMF and International Bank for Reconstruction (now the World Bank) at Bretton Woods in 1944. Fifty-three nations then signed the GATT in Havana in March, 1948 as the founding international instrument governing world trade.

    Subsequent rounds of negotiations followed through number eight launched in Punta del Este, Uruguay (the Uruguay Round) in 1986. It was signed in Marrakesh, Morocco in April, 1994 by most of the 123 participating countries as the updated version of the original 1947 GATT. It was then succeeded by the WTO January 1, 1995, one year to the day after NAFTA took effect as another worker rights legislative weapon of mass job destruction. DR-CAFTA followed next for the Central American countries signing on to it after El Salvador did first in March, 2006.

    The WTO is well-seasoned with a corporate-friendly alphabet soup of Uruguay-negotiated agreements like the Agreement on Trade-Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Rights (TRIPS), General Agreement on Trade in Services (GATS), Agreement on Agriculture (AoA), Agreement on Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT), and others all designed for one purpose. It’s to override member states’ national sovereignty so they’re now governed under a uniform set of global market trading rules favoring capital.

    They’re designed for the Global North, giant corporations and the rich at the expense of Global South developing nations, ordinary people everywhere, concern for environmental standards as well as sanity and public safety. Along with the IMF, World Bank, and other international lending agencies, this entire structure is big capital’s neoliberal scheme to commoditize everything, including people and life itself in the human genome, to strip-mine the planet for profit.

    Globalized trade has a long history, but the notion of a globalized marketplace came into its own in the 1980s. It was hailed as a western, mainly US, prescription for economic growth and prosperity lifting all boats. In fact, only yachts benefitted by design so the privileged could gain at the expense of all others preyed on.

    The UN’s International Labour Organization’s (ILO) commission on the social dimensions of globalization is comprised of representatives from labor, government and business. In 2004, it issued a damning appraisal of world trade rules harm and the subsequent distress caused by unfair practices. It ranges from how TRIPS prevents affordable generic life-saving drugs being sold in developing countries to the shifting tax burden from business and the rich to workers, and much more.

    In the US and West, the damage comes from exporting jobs and offshoring manufacturing and service operations to low-wage countries. It began in the late 1950s when modest numbers of them went to Canada to take advantage of the cost savings there. The pace then quickened in the 1960s and 1970s with the exodus of production jobs in autos, shoes, clothing, cheap electronics, and toys as well as routine service work like credit card receipt processing, airline reservations and basic software code writing.

    What started as simple assembly and service work early on, then took off in the 1980s. It spread up and down the value chain and now embraces almost any type good or service not needing a home-based location such as retail clerks, plumbers, and carpenters; top-secret defense research, design and selected types of manufacturing; and certain types of specialized activities companies so far have kept at home. What’s moving abroad, however, is big business getting bigger with Gartner Research estimating outsourcing generated $298.5 billion in 2003 global revenues.

    The toll adds up to a global race to the bottom in a country where services now account for 84% of the economy. The once bedrock manufacturing portion is just 10% and falling as more good jobs in it are lost in an unending drain. Since the start of 2000 alone, about one in six factory jobs, over three million in total, have been affected. The sector is less than a third of its size 40 years ago and one-fourth the peak it hit during WW II.

    It’s been devastating for the nation’s 130 million working people. No longer are unions strong and workers well-paid with assured good benefits like full health insurance coverage and pensions. Today, all types of financial services comprise the largest economic sector. Much of it is in trillions of dollars of high stakes speculation annually producing wads of cash for elite insiders (when things go as planned) and nothing for the welfare of most others and the good of the country.

    Worst of all is the poor and declining quality of most service sector jobs measured by wages, benefits, job security and overall working conditions. It’s because fewer good ones exist, unions are weak, and workers are at the mercy of employers indifferent to their plight. People are forced to work longer and harder for less just to stay even. Jobs in this sector are mostly concentrated in unskilled or low-skill areas of retail, health care and temporary services of all kinds. They pay lots less than full-time jobs, and have few or no benefits and little prospect for future improvement. This all happened by design to crush worker rights and commoditize them like all other production inputs.

    The Department of Labor now projects job categories with the greatest future expected growth are cashiers; waiters and waitresses; other restaurant-related workers; janitors and cleaning personnel; retail clerks; and child care workers – all low-skill areas. Harvard degrees aren’t required. Neither are high school ones.

    Most in-demand higher-skilled jobs are projected to be for nurses, post-secondary teachers and sales representatives. There are still plenty of high-tech jobs in areas like network systems and data analysis and software engineering applications and systems. But watch out. They’re being lost as well to low-wage countries in an unending domestic job drain affecting all types of work able to be done anywhere. It shows why domestic job growth is stagnant (despite the hype it isn’t), eligible workers are dropping out of the work force, and the decline is sure to continue unless legislation stops it. None is in sight or imagined.

    The loss of good well-paying jobs means fewer high-end and a range of low-skilled ones are all that remain for vast numbers of young people whose future looks bleak. Two research studies among others highlight the problem. One by University of California staffers in 2004 estimated up to 14 million American jobs are at risk to outsourcing, and another by Gartner Research predicts as many as 30% of high-tech jobs may be lost to low-wage countries by 2015. In addition, writing in the March/April, 2006 issue of Foreign Affairs on what he calls a “third Industrial Revolution,” former Federal Reserve vice-chairman Alan Blinder estimated 28 – 42 million American service sector jobs are vulnerable and could be lost to foreign labor.

    In low-wage countries, they’re done at far less cost to US employers in their company-owned or subcontracted out operations. Blinder added starkly “We have so far barely seen the tip of the offshoring iceberg, the eventual dimensions of which may be staggering.” Veteran financial analyst and writer Bob Chapman calls this the “rape of our economy” with enormous, wrenching and destructive consequences to the lives of millions of working people pursuing an illusory American dream.

    It affects the skilled and unskilled alike for all types of jobs at risk. Chapman cites India as an example noting once only low-skill and routine programming jobs went there. Now, he says, it’s “software aeronautical engineers, banking, insurance, investment banking and drug research” along with many other high-end jobs where companies can hire skilled professionals at a fifth the cost of US and European ones. So why wouldn’t they, and more are in a growing trend.

    All types of financial jobs at all levels are also being eliminated with financial institutions moving sizeable chunks of investment banking, research, trading operations, and other professional jobs abroad for big cost savings. Deloitte Touche estimates the industry will outsource 20% of its cost base by 2010 with more to come in a continuing job drain for big cost savings abroad. The ones lost will be in financial services and most other sectors in a trend looking like it won’t end until the US is as low a wage nation as those now taking our jobs.

    An Unprecedented Fall in Workers’ Standard of Living

    Over the past 30 years, most people have seen an unprecedented fall in their standard of living. Adjusted for inflation, the average American worker now earns less than in the mid-1970s with the minimum wage unchanged at $5.15 an hour since 1997 until the 110th Congress raised it in pathetically small steps to a wholly inadequate top level. Beginning July 24, it rose to $5.85, will go to $6.55 July 24, 2008 and to $7.25 July 24, 2009. Until the increase, minimum worker pay was at the lowest point relative to average wages since 1949. It got many states, comprising over half the population, to raise their own, but it’s not enough.

    A recent study released by the Center for Economic Policy Research (CEPR) shows the dire state of things. It reported about one in three jobs in the country, about 47 million of them, pay low wages (defined as two-thirds the median wage or $11.11 per hour or less) with few or no benefits like health insurance, pensions or retirement accounts. It’s barely enough for a family of two adults and two children to exceed the official understated poverty level of $20,444 in 2006 (or $9.83 an hour), and by this definition one in four workers (35 million) only earned poverty-level wages. But millions of others fall below it because official statistics way understate the problem, and workers earning around $11.11 an hour in cities like New York, Chicago, Los Angeles and other large ones can’t get by if they have to support a family on it.

    These growing millions now comprise a permanent underclass in a nation unwilling to admit what census data and private research now show. America is a rigid class society by design with extreme wealth at the top, a declining (maybe dying) middle class, and a growing underclass of low-paid workers and poor, many desperately so.

    Following the inequalities of the 1920s, the nation experienced what economic historians Claudia Goldin and Robert Margo called “the Great Compression.” Income gaps narrowed from the positive effects of New Deal and Great Society programs, strong unions, and an equitable tax system for individuals and corporations. From then to now, call it “the Great Expansion” of inequality with the gap between rich and most others the greatest it’s been since the Gilded Age of the “robber barons” and getting worse.

    Business Week magazine highlighted the trend in December, 2003 and accompanying research. It showed a decline in social mobility over the past few decades. The article was called “Waking Up from the American Dream – Meritocracy and Equal Opportunity Are Fading Fast.” It noted the “Wal-Martization” of the country corporate America embraces to control labor costs by outsourcing jobs, de-unionizing, hiring temps and part-timers, and dismantling internal career ladders to boost profits at the expense of people. What’s left is a proliferation of dead-end, low-wage jobs with public policy skewed to keep it that way. It needs stressing again. This didn’t happen by chance. It was by design to destroy organized labor, and so far it’s working.

    In its most recent State of Working America – 2006/2007, the Economic Policy Institute (EPI) reports the official poverty level in 2004 stood at 12.7% or 37 million people, including 13 million children. It also showed for the first time ever, poverty in the country grew in the first three years of an economic recovery. In its study, EPI cited factors today they call “historically unique:”

    — increased globalized trade;

    — low union membership;

    — more low-skilled and high-skilled immigration; and

    — fewer favorable social norms guiding employer behavior to provide “adequate safety nets, pensions, and health care arrangements.”

    EPI noted the biggest challenge in today’s “new economy” isn’t (macro) growth but how benefits get distributed with such a high proportion skewed upward.

    Left out entirely are the 16 million 2005 census figures show are on the very bottom living in “extreme” poverty that’s defined as a family of four with an annual income of $9903 or less. Even more disturbing is how fast the poverty rate is increasing. The numbers of those worst off grew by 26% from 2000 – 2005 or 56% faster than for the total poverty population. Further, it happened mostly in years of economic expansion after the 2001 recession ended late that year. Notable also is the disturbing decline in higher-paying jobs leaving what’s left for unskilled or low-skill workers. They pay pitiful wages and few, if any, benefits with crumbling social safety net protection left to pick up the slack.

    The Oakland Institute policy think tank promotes social and economic justice. It recently reported its disturbing assessment of things saying 10% of the US population (around 30 million) “experiences hunger or is at risk of going hungry.” A December, 2006 Helsinki-based World Institute for Development Economics Research of the UN University study also reported disturbing findings. They showed the richest 1% of adults owned 40% of global assets in 2000, and the richest 10% held 85% of them.

    EPI reported the top 1% controls more than one-third of America’s wealth, the bottom 80% has 15.3%, and the top 20% holds 84.7% of it. In contrast, the poorest 20% are in debt and owe more than they own. Globalization, automation, outsourcing, the shift from manufacturing to services, weak unions, deregulation, and other harmful economic factors all add to the problem.

    Other data show an astonishing generational shift of well over $1 trillion of national wealth annually from 90 million US working class households to for-profit corporations and the richest 1% of the population. It created what economist Paul Krugman calls an unprecedented wealth disparity getting worse that shames the nation and is destroying the bedrock middle class without which democracy can’t survive.

    A similar conclusion also came from an analysis of income tax data by Professor Emmanuel Saez of the University of California-Berkeley and Professor Thomas Piketty of the Paris School of Economics. Both men are noted for their work on income inequality. Their research found the top 1% of Americans in 2005 (about 3 million people) got their largest share of national income since 1928 – 21.8%, up from 19.8% a year ago or a 10% gain. Further, the top 10% received 48.5% of all reported income in 2005, also the highest level since 1928, up 2% from 2004, and one-third since the late 1970s.

    The top one-tenth of 1% (about 300,000 people) did best of all, to no surprise. It got as much income in total as the bottom 150 million Americans combined. In addition, while total reported income rose almost 9% in 2005, average incomes for the bottom 90% of the population dropped .6% from the previous year.

    Further, the Bush administration tax cuts for the wealthy greatly widened the income gap between rich and poor that was the whole idea behind them with a healthy piece of the benefits going to big corporations. In the 1950s, they contributed an average of 28% to federal revenues. That dropped to 21% in the 1960s and about 10% and falling since the 1980s. It’s happening with the corporate tax rate at 35%, but few of the giants pay it. According to the Government Accountability Office (GAO), 94% of major corporations now pay less than 5% of their income in taxes, and corporate tax payments overall are at their lowest level in 60 years. In addition, many large companies pay no tax, and some end up with sizable rebates on top of huge corporate welfare subsidies under a system of socialism for big corporations and the rich and “free market” capitalism for the rest of us.

    Saez and Piketty also reported their findings may be understated because the wealthy are more likely to file late tax returns so those who did weren’t included in the study. Also, the IRS acknowledges it can account for only about 70% of business and investment income, most, of course, going to high-income earners. What’s missing is $300 – $400 billion a year that adds up to trillions of untaxed dollars for the rich with the rest of us having to make up for it.

    Recent US Commerce Department data is also disturbing. It shows the share of national income going to wages and salaries the lowest on record with their data going back to 1929. And the Center on Budget and Policy Priorities (CBPP) finds wage and salary growth in the current recovery growing at half the average rate for post-recessionary periods since the end of WW II while corporate profits in the current period grew over 50% more than the post-WW II average. It’s the first time on record, corporate profits got a larger share of income growth in a recovery than wages and salaries – 46% to 34%.

    The Growth and Shredding of Social Services in America

    The golden age of social service benefits and worker protections emerged during The Great Depression, but they didn’t begin then. An obligation was felt to help the needy as early as colonial times but without an organized effort to do it. Back then, local towns and villages did it through the poor relief system and almshouses. That began changing as the nation became less agrarian and more industrial when a number of states added services like cash allowances, mothers’ pensions and by the mid-1920s old age assistance for the blind. Also, then and earlier, the Federal government and States began recognizing the need for public welfare social insurance financed through contributions guaranteeing protection for all rather than public assistance for the needy alone.

    The first instance of it began in 1908 with a Federal workers’ compensation law covering some government workers. States then added their own, and by 1929 all of them had it except four holdouts. Other efforts followed including State and local retirement plans and Federal benefits and services for veterans. Even the private sector added their own with token amounts of health care, pensions, life insurance and sick pay.

    The Great Depression hard times of the 1930s changed everything creating a golden age for worker rights and benefits mentioned above. It followed the roaring 1920s era of anything goes corporate greed and loose regulation. It ushered in the Roosevelt administration’s New Deal to aid the needy and reform the economy when 25% of the working public had no job in 1933. Those in power feared the worst knowing they had to act to save capitalism at a time of mass hostility to it they feared might erupt in a Russian-style 1917 revolution.

    They did it then like never before or since starting by passing the National Industrial Recovery Act in 1933. It was based on a “bubble up” theory of recovery to raise wages and thereby stimulate consumer purchasing power hoping it would lead to increased production and new investment. Despite good intentions, things go as planned. The Depression dragged on until the 1939 early WW II build-up began ending it. It packed greater economic punch than in earlier public sector spending. Those efforts were less for reform and more for what John Maynard Keynes recommended – upgrading infrastructure to revive durable goods production that, in turn, would revive the economy.

    Still New Deal policies were remarkable in how mirror opposite they were to what’s been enacted since 1980 and especially in the gilded age of George Bush. There were stimulative loans and grants to the States and landmark measures like the FDIC insuring bank deposits, the SEC regulating financial markets, and the NLRB through the Wagner Act explained above. Most important was a broad array of social programs. They included Federal emergency relief, public works and others under an alphabet soup of initiatives. They were way inadequate, but, nonetheless, tried to jump-start a moribund economy by providing substantial work and relief for the unemployed and needy.

    The high water mark came in 1935 with the passage of the landmark Social Security Act. To this day, it’s still the single most important piece of social legislation in our history. More than any other government program, it’s the one most responsible for keeping vast numbers of elderly people out of poverty as well as providing other essential services and benefits for the needy and disabled. Other important social legislation came out as well including Unemployment Insurance with the Federal government partnered with States; the Railroad Retirement System; Public Housing; and Social Security Old-Age and Survivors Insurance.

    Post-WW II there was lots more:

    — the National School Lunch Program (established in 1946);

    — Aid to the Permanently and Totally Disabled (APTD – in 1950) that later became Supplemental Security Income (SSI) in 1972;

    — Social Security Disability Insurance (SSDI);

    — Medical Assistance for the Aged (preceding Medicare);

    — Aid to Families with Dependent Children (AFDC – 1960);

    –the Food Stamp Program (1964);

    — the School Breakfast Program (1966);

    — the WIC food assistance program (1972);

    — Earned Income Tax Credit (EITC – 1975);

    — Low Income Home Energy Assistance; and

    — Temporary Assistance for Needy Families (TANF – 1997 successor to AFDC that was a huge step backwards explained below), among others.

    Lyndon Johnson’s Great Society earlier saw other landmark social legislation with the establishment of Medicare and Medicaid in 1965. It guaranteed the elderly and indigent health care coverage at affordable, minimal or no cost when they needed it most.

    That was the good news, but it changed with the election of Ronald Reagan in 1980. Mark Weisbrot from the Center for Economic and Policy Research (CEPR) called his administration’s rollback of social services his “project of building a bridge to the 19th century in areas of social policy.” It was that and more, but despite it, the dominant media shamelessly exalted him in life (see Mark Hertsgaard 1989 book “On Bended Knee: The Press and the Reagan Presidency”) and practically deified him following his death on June 4, 2004. Left out of the eulogies was the true scorched earth legacy he left behind. His “war on international terrorism” was a devastating precursor to its updated version under the current administration. This article, however, only addresses his domestic damage on people least able to handle it.

    The Reagan administration instituted a generational decline of worker rights and vital social programs. It allowed them to erode through higher payroll taxes, raising the retirement age, increasing Medicare premiums, and cutting Medicaid benefits for the poor. His years were characterized by large increases in military spending, big tax cuts for the rich and big business while slashing social benefits, union worker rights and running up huge deficits.

    Discretionary domestic spending for most social programs, other than Social Security, Medicare and Medicaid, was cut by one-third from 1981 – 1988. Programs for low income earners were hard hit with a 54% cut. Subsidized housing lost over 80%, housing assistance for the elderly 47%, and training and employment services over 68%. Reagan also reduced health and safety protections and weakened federal statutes guaranteeing workers the right to organize and bargain collectively.

    Beneath his avuncular persona, Reagan was callous and indifferent to notions of equal justice, civil liberties and human need. He showed it in his support for the Christian Right’s hate campaign against gays and lesbians in its early days of ascendency by refusing to address the AIDS problem he allowed to become a global epidemic.

    HIV/AIDS first surfaced in the US among gay men in New York and California in 1981, Reagan’s first year in office. It was called a “gay disease”, and still is largely today by those who demean it. Most notably, extremist Christian Right leaders call it God’s revenge against gay people they say are diseased sinners. When the Centers for Disease Control first reported the outbreak they, too, stigmatized the gay community as disease-carriers calling it GRID – gay-related immune deficiency.

    Ronald Reagan went along with this notion refusing even to mention AIDS or do anything to address the problem in the first seven years in office. It caused enormous setbacks for HIV/AIDS research and appalling discrimination against the infected and gay community overall. In addition, there were no government-directed efforts at prevention or education. It thereby allowed a health problem that might have been contained to become an epidemic killing a half million people in the US alone and infecting an estimated one million others now living with the disease.

    Worldwide the numbers are catastrophic with an estimated 25 million deaths and another 34 – 47 million people currently infected. In addition, millions more are added to the numbers each year who might have been helped if the Reagan administration had led a worldwide effort to contain what’s now an out-of-control plague in parts of the world like sub-Saharan Africa. None of this was mentioned in Reagan’s eulogy that should have been a denunciation for this and his other crimes against humanity George Bush is now doing his best to match or exceed.

    The GHW Bush years followed the “Reagan Revolution.” They were pathetically “kinder and gentler” domestically and made worse by a “new world order” imperial agenda harming working people everywhere that’s standard practice now under all Presidents. It was the same under Bill Clinton who called himself a Democrat but never governed like one. His tenure included NAFTA and WTO responsible for mass and growing poverty, human misery and ecological destruction under one-way globalized trade rules providing cover for predatory capitalism.

    So-called “welfare reform” in the Personal Responsibility and Work Opportunity Reconciliation Act of 1996 (PRWORA) also was passed. Before it did, the needy got welfare payments through Aid to Families with Dependent Children or AFDC help. That changed in 1996 with time limits set so no one would be helped for more than five years under the new program called Temporary Assistance for Needy Families or TANF. Under it, the Federal government allots fixed block grants to the States they then administer at their discretion meaning the needy now get cheated by an uncaring state.

    TANF also requires most recipients to participate in some kind of work or training to qualify for help. It doesn’t matter that much of it goes to single mothers with young children needing them at home to provide care unavailable if the law prevents it. There’s also no relief during recessions when jobs are lost and unskilled workers are least able to find one.

    Clinton’s main social initiative was his ill-conceived health care “reform.” It was a complex mess based on the notion of “managed competition” and marketplace medicine instead of what’s really needed in the form of a “single-payer” national health insurance program modeled on the kind in Western Europe, Canada or that all members of Congress and the administration get. They cover everyone, irrespective of ability to pay, and for US legislators and the executive it’s gold-plated for life.

    The Clinton plan (dubbed “Hillarycare”) offered the public less choice for more affordability but wanted big insurers and HMOs to run it guaranteeing an illusion of full coverage the way it is now. Profits always trump need with insurers targeting young and healthy prospects while avoiding those posing the greatest risks.

    The pace of social spending cuts accelerated dramatically under George Bush who’d eliminate them all given the choice, and he’s working on it. He’s against all of them to fund more tax cuts for the rich and provide multi-billions for his permanent state of war plus every imaginable weapon system the Pentagon and defense contractors want to wage them.

    Bush’s assault on organized labor was covered above, but he has lots more targets as well. Education is one of them in his appalling No Child Left Behind Act. It focuses on testing, not children. It’s a boon to corporations supplying the materials but not to teachers who hate them. It forces them to teach “to the test” instead of educating students in course material that’s the only way to run a classroom. Otherwise, kids don’t learn, but that’s part of the scheme as what kind of future do all but the well-off have to look forward to.

    The Bush education agenda also promotes school vouchers disguising a broader goal to privatize public education and aid the white supremacist parochial part of it. Christian Right zealots support these schools because of their brand of hard right extremism dangerous to everyone outside the faithful. In most areas where vouchers are used, 80% of them are for these type schools. They renounce proved science like evolution and teach creationism instead, repackaged as “intelligent design.”

    They also preach an extremist Christian doctrine waging war on truth and democratic principles of a free and open society. They replace it with faith-based pseudoscience on everything from creation to HIV/AIDS to pregnancy prevention to global warming to militarism, and all the while denounce non-believers as heretics. These schools also threaten the survival of public education. They divert funding from them and violate the constitutional separation of church and state which is why the Bush administration supports them.

    His administration also opposes college aid at a time tuitions and fees are more unaffordable than ever and rising much faster than inflation. An undergraduate year at Harvard now costs over $50,000 with all expenses included, but even lower-tuition state schools aren’t affordable for many with the University of Illinois typical of most others. It’s much cheaper than Harvard but still costs about $26,000 a year “base rate” that’s unaffordable for low-income families without considerable financial aid. George Bush’s solution – cut or freeze maximum allowable Pell Grants so even holding them steady means amounts offered don’t keep up with rising costs and needy students lose out.

    Bush’s prescription for health care is no better at a time 47 million have no coverage, millions more are underinsured, and 80 million in the country have no coverage at some time during the year meaning they need to be judicious about when they’re sick. Administration solutions are pathetic at best showing no intent to tackle a problem this huge. Suggested tax breaks are so inadequate, families with annual incomes under $10,000 would only save $23 in 2007. Those with higher incomes fare little better with the Bush plan only covering 9 million uninsured leaving 38 million others (and rising) with no help.

    Then there’s Bush’s 2003 Kafkaesque Medicare Prescription Drug, Improvement, and Modernization Act (MMA) scamming seniors. It took strong-arming threats and bribes in an all-night congressional session to get it passed. Its controversial Part D costs tens of billions annually, does little for most Medicare recipients, but provides huge benefits for “Big Pharma.” It’s able to charge top dollar because the administration won’t negotiate lower prices the way the Veteran’s Administration (VA) does getting big savings on all drugs it buys so veterans today only pay $8 a prescription. Two decades ago, they paid nothing.

    More social wreckage gets into each new FY budget with billions of new cuts heaped on past ones. It’s to free up more funds for the military, the rich, and corporate allies with the White House now audaciously proposing a further cut in corporate tax rates. It’s part of a near-three decade agenda furthering the interests of the privileged at the expense of all others. In America today, social welfare and the greater good are nonstarters.

    Earlier damage included –

    — killing OSHA workplace ergonomic rules more than 10 years in the making;

    — revoking grants to study workplace safety and health;

    — cutting funding for job training; and

    — more cuts for enforcement positions at OSHA and the Mine Safety and Health Administration that was a key reason for the early 2006 Sago and Alma mine deaths in West Virginia, the latest tragedy in Utah (not earthquake caused), and the death of 60 miners and counting since January, 2006.

    — Bush also proposed paying welfare recipients below-minimum wages;

    — denying Homeland Security employees protection for being a whisleblower;

    — blocking release of funds to monitor Ground Zero;

    — ignoring New York rescue workers’ health;

    — cutting health care benefits for veterans and billions more cuts for Medicare and Medicaid;

    — raising interest rates on student college loans;

    — cutting the number of WIC-eligible participants;

    — reducing the number of adults eligible for food stamps and children qualifying for school meals;

    — cutting the Commodity Supplemental Food Program, child care, Head Start, affordable housing units for the elderly, home energy assistance (LIHEAP), Employment/Training Services, and education for the disadvantaged; and

    — stiffening work requirements for two million adults (mostly single mothers) on welfare.

    His administration is also at fault for the Walter Reed Hospital scandal because medical facilities for military personnel and veterans across the country are understaffed, underfunded and allowed to deteriorate under federal or private contractor management. The result is inadequate or sub-standard care for the severest of problems, and the worst is yet to come with tens of billions of new planned cuts through FY 2011. Only Bush’s plummeting approval rating may slow him down. But it doesn’t stop his war machine from getting all the funds it wants and lots more for the asking in supplemental add-ons.

    Looking Ahead – Tough Choices with No Easy Answers

    The state of working America today is bleak with few signs of improving in a globalized world of corporate omnipotence and an indifferent to hostile government. It backs the rights of the privileged while scorning the social welfare needs of all others. Somehow, some way this must change, but wishing only works if backed by effective action. A look back suggests how.

    Past labor successes were noted above. What worked before can again, and there’s nothing complicated about it. Above all, new leaders are needed because too many today are uninspiring at best. They must be committed and dedicated to the rights and needs of ordinary working people and be willing to go to the wall for them. Effective mass organizing is needed to build unity and strength of numbers, educate workers on what they lost, and lead the fight to win them back. It means taking to the streets, storming the halls of Congress, going on strikes, holding boycotts, doing battle when necessary that in the past meant paying for it in blood and lives.

    It worked when it won an eight hour day, a living wage keeping pace with inflation, essential benefits like health care coverage and pensions, and a more level playing field guaranteeing labor the right to bargain collectively on equal terms with management. Those gains weren’t handed over because change never comes from the top down. They were fought for and won with lots of blood and sweat expended to get them. Why not again?

    It’s called democracy, equity and justice and one thing about them is clear. Achieving and keeping them requires a strong middle class of ordinary working people that, in turn, needs a vibrant labor movement as a foundation and springboard for progressive grassroots social change. Organized labor is in tatters today at barely over 7% of private sector workers (a 100 year low). It’s on life support, needs a survival strategy, and is heading for the dustbin of history only major change can avoid. The way is through organized people out-muscling organized money. It happened before and can again.

    This is the great class struggle of our time against long odds for success. The stakes though are huge, and our future as a democratic society depends on the outcome as former US Supreme Court Justice Louis Brandeis explained in 1941 when he said “We can (either) have a democratic society or we can have great concentrated wealth in the hands of the few. We cannot have both.” The concentration is greater than ever at a time American workers are in their weakest position in decades.

    Bowed but not broken, they’re in a war for survival with the rest of us, and their sovereign worker rights and ours in a free society are at stake. It’s no time for timidity. It’s a time for unity and pressing ahead. It happened once. Why not again, and the time to go for it is now with the rest of us pitching in to help for our own preservation and survival.

    Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago and can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

    Also visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com and listen to The Steve Lendman News and Information Hour on The MicroEffect.com Saturdays at noon US central time.

    Schools adopt swipe cards for toilet breaks

    0

    By Sarah Price

    Here, Sir: Jasmine Carr demonstrates Ryde Secondary College's swipe-card system, which monitors students' movements.

    Here, Sir: Jasmine Carr demonstrates Ryde Secondary College’s swipe-card system, which monitors students’ movements.
    Photo: Janie Barrett

    PARENTS are pushing for a statewide roll-out of electronic tracking of students to combat truancy.

    Swipe cards, SMS alerts to parents and fingerprint logging are already in use in some schools and have led to a dramatic drop in absenteeism.

    NSW Federation of Parents and Citizens Association president Di Giblin said the success of the swipe-card and SMS systems should lead to them being installed across the state.

    Public Schools Principals Forum president Cheryl McBride said if the systems were working, the Government should look at implementing them more widely.

    Ms Giblin said: “[Technology] has been highly successful in being able to find when young people are absent from school.”

    But civil libertarians said the monitoring of students – even on toilet breaks – was going too far. NSW Council for Civil Liberties president Cameron Murphy said there were better ways for teachers to keep track of students “that don’t require this degree of invasion of privacy”.

    Vladimir Ostashkevich, from Academy Attendance, a manufacturer of electronic attendance systems, said demand from schools had tripled in the past three years. About 70 NSW schools – the majority of them being public – had implemented the system. One Catholic diocese reported about half its schools used an SMS alert system. “This is the future, this is what schools are doing,” Mr Ostashkevich said.

    Ryde Secondary College deputy principal Warren Reardon said a swipe-card monitoring system, in conjunction with an SMS system that alerted parents of unexplained absences, had cut truancy by up to 40 per cent in 18 months.

    “It’s had a huge impact on our middle school in terms of increasing academic outcomes, decreasing detention, increasing good behaviour,” he said.

    Ryde Secondary College students are required to run an identification card through a card reader if they are late, need to leave early, go to the sick bay, see the principal or visit the toilet during class time. A print-out is created – featuring a photo of the student and log in and out times.

    Mr Reardon said problems with students smoking when they moved around the grounds during class times, using a toilet break as an excuse, had reduced dramatically. But, he acknowledged: “We’ve got to be sure it’s not a draconian thing.”

    The school will trial a fingerprinting system next year.

    West Bank boys survive on Israeli settlers’ garbage

    0

    By Steven Erlanger

    As the truck unloaded, the children pounced on the garbage like flies. Some swung aloft on the hydraulic pistons that opened the back, then dropped onto the mound of trash to grab a piece of metal, a crushed can, a soda bottle or a stinking T-shirt.

    One boy slipped and disappeared for a moment beneath the garbage as the truck lumbered forward to dump more of its load. He scrambled up again, losing his footing on a pile of animal intestines, grabbing a thicket of shrubbery cut from someone’s garden.

    Another boy found a small nylon Israeli flag and tried to tear it with his teeth; yet another unearthed a small lilac umbrella, which he held over his head and showed off to his friends. Most dug diligently for metal, which they dumped into the ripped nylon sacks they carry.

    Nearby, on a hill of garbage 3 meters, or 10 feet, high, a young boy sat alone.

    He had found a plastic pack of crackers; he chewed them slowly, almost thoughtfully.

    The boys are part of a loosely knit colony of scavengers, nearly 250 people who scramble over fetid hills of other people’s trash to eke out a living for their families and themselves. Most are younger than 16; some sleep here during the week to make the most of the hours they can hunt for goods to sell. Many are related, from a few large clans, and they have a kind of organization, with a 23-year-old bulldozer driver who settles disputes, and a code of conduct, so that every digger’s finds are respected.

    For all the agonizing about nearby Hebron – how far Israel should go to resolve competing Jewish and Palestinian claims to the city – this desolate spot is a symbol of the impact of Jewish settlement in the occupied West Bank and of the dire economic state of the Palestinian territories, where about a third of adults are without work.

    Many of the adults working the site have been unable to get jobs in Israel since 2000 and the second intifada, when Israel instituted stronger security measures to try to prevent suicide bombings.

    This dump has become a lifeline and informal workplace for them and for the children helping to support poor families in the southern West Bank. The scene is reminiscent of the poverty of the Third World, of places like Manila’s notorious garbage mountain, but this desperate place is next door to Israel, the country with the highest per capita income in the Middle East.

    For the moment, the diggers were disappointed – this truck carried Palestinian garbage, from Hebron. The real treasures, they said, come from the Israeli settlements in this area of the occupied West Bank.

    It is settlers’ trash that keeps them alive – and, in an odd way, entertained.

    Mahmoud Ibrahim, 10, found a pair of angel’s wings, apparently from a costume party or a ballet performance. He wore them upside down but happily, flitting around the dump while the other boys applauded.

    His brother, Muhammad, 11, who fancies himself a model from the magazines he salvages, wore a discarded suit, several sizes too large, that appeared to have been from a bar mitzvah. With the grime wiped away from both the suit and the boy, he would have made a mother proud.

    Youssef Rabai, 18, found a bright orange ribbon, the symbol of settlers’ resistance to the Israeli pullout from Gaza, and wound it around his forehead; the ends flopped onto the grimy kaffiyeh around his neck. Asked if he knew what the orange meant, he shrugged. When told, he laughed. “I’m a settler here,” he said.

    The dump, formally run by the Hebron municipality, is in the rocky, dusty hills near the village of Ad Deirat; it is used both by Palestinian cities like Hebron and Yatta and by the Israeli settlements in the area, like Kiryat Arba, Karmel and Maon.

    On a good day, working here from 5 a.m. until dusk, the boys make about $4.75 apiece.

    Muhammad Rabai, 23, in salvaged camouflage pants and a dirty baseball cap with the gothic “D” of the Detroit Tigers, is the unacknowledged boss of the dump. He drives the bulldozer and gets a small city salary, but he and three relatives also salvage trash, trying to feed a family of 25. “It’s a very difficult life,” he said. “But don’t call me the boss. We try to be friends here; we try to be equals.”

    Rabah Rabai, from the same large clan, used to work in Israel as a builder, making more than $650 a month, but he can no longer get an entry permit. He is 48, with a grizzly gray beard, an asthma inhaler and thickly scarred arms. He sat in an old Ford tractor, once blue, pulling a small cart.

    “It’s our taxi,” he said. “It’s our Jaguar.” He comes every morning before dawn with three children from a village 13 kilometers, or 8 miles, away. Most of the other children walk, some of them 24 kilometers, then sleep in makeshift shacks or blanket tents, before walking home again for the Muslim Sabbath.

    He wore a stained cap bearing the symbol of Fatah. He said he had found it in the trash. Muhammad Rabai interrupted, saying: “We don’t care for any of them, for Fatah or Hamas. We’re from the party of bread.”

    Muhammad al-Ammour, 42, used to work in Israel as a painter, making $35 to $50 a day. Working here with two of his children, he brings home around $12. Most of the income is from scrap metal, sold for 2.2 cents a pound.

    “If we don’t work, we can’t live,” he said. “Sad to say, but our life is the garbage. Our future is the garbage.”

    Asked if the Palestinian Authority helps them, he laughed. “No one from the authority comes to check on us; no one really cares,” he said. “The Palestinian nation gets aid and help from abroad, but we never see any.”

    Like all the men and boys here, only a few of whom have gloves, Ammour is covered with scars, especially on his hands, arms and legs, from sharp metal and broken glass. Many wear salvaged hats against the sun and scarves to cover their mouths from the fumes and acrid smoke of the nearly nightly fires that burn the picked-over garbage. Many of the boys seem malnourished, with filmy eyes staring from filthy faces.

    Last week, Hijazi Rabai, 27, married with four children, died here when his old tractor fell over and crushed him. He was a sheik of his village, and everyone said he had a beautiful voice when he made the call for evening prayer.

    “Even people close to me, my relatives, mock and humiliate my family,” Ammour said. “Whoever works in the garbage is garbage himself – that’s what they think. But some of those people work as spies, collaborators and thieves, but they consider us – the honest workers – less than them.”

    Ammour has eight children. But he is known as Abu Fadi, the father of Fadi, 19, his eldest son, one of triplets.

    Fadi, who has the bright green eyes of his clan, is trying to go to college. He has worked here since he was little, he said, along with his father and two brothers. He started college, then quit for lack of money. Now, he is taking courses in the evening, through Al Quds Open University in Yatta, along with his brother Tamer. Everyone in this little world is proud of them.

    Halima, their triplet sister, is engaged to a cousin. Their mother, Sabah, 37, said: “She will not get married soon. They need to wait and establish themselves. It will be a long time until they manage to do that.”

    The Ammour home in Yatta has two rooms for the family of 10 and no windows, just holes in the walls covered with yellow fabric that does little to block the sun.

    The larger room is covered in mattresses. In the smaller room, set carefully on a green, sparkly cloth, is Fadi’s prized possession: a computer, which he patched together from parts salvaged from the dump.

    With a small boxy screen, and wires showing through cracks in the plastic, it functions.

    Fadi, scrubbed clean, set the computer to play some music; his little brother, 5, did a break dance. Then Fadi and Tamer joined in.

    “You see?” Fadi said, smiling large. “Good things come out of the garbage.”

    Hillary Clinton Is Willing to Nuke Iran

    0

    1959- The US gives Iran a 5-megawatt nuclear reactor which became operational in 1967
    Iran signed the Nuclear Non-Proliferation Treaty (NPT) in 1968 and ratified it in 1970.
    The Islamic Revolution in 1979 saw the overthrow of a CIA back Dictatorship-The Shah

    Israel, a nuclear state, has never signed the Nuclear Non-Proliferation Treaty. By NOT declaring nuclear capabilities, Israel doesn’t have to let inspectors in!

    The Iranians took their own country back, to escape Britain and US control of their oil. And to rid themselves of a brutal dictatorship!

    Iran isn’t a threat to the US, nor is Iran a threat to Israel!
    It’s the US and Israel that has been threatening Iran!
    Hillary Clinton is Pro-Nuclear-War!
    She must be STOPPED!!!

    http://www.informationclearinghouse.info/article18285.htm

    “The Amero” Is Real?

    3

    By Hal Turner

    Three weeks ago, I published a brief snippet on the front page of my web site reporting the governments of the US Canada and Mexico are conspiring in secret to merge the three nations into a new entity called the North American Union.

    There has been much talk of this on various internet blogs for over a year. Most of those blogs have been smeared as “conspiracy theorists” and have been largely ignored by the main stream.

    What prompted my interest in the issue was money: I was sent professional images of actual AMERO coins by someone in the US Treasury! The person included a note saying they like my radio show and are frightened by what’s been going on in secret within our government.

    This Treasury Department person was outraged that our country was beginning to coin money as part of a merger that would do away with our country, via a merger the American public knew nothing about!

    When I got the professional images of the AMERO coin, I was finally intrigued enough to make mention of it on my web site. My site has gotten over 20 Million visits in the last couple years and is becoming more popular because of the brutal honesty and timely delivery of news that folks don’t find elsewhere. This story about AMERO coins would fit my niche of breaking news, so I ran a snippet of a story.

    As part of my report, I included the professional images sent to me by the Treasury person. They appear below:

    I also mentioned that very pricey “Collector Proofs” of the coins were also being Minted in Silver and Gold, and I posted an image of one such Silver Proof, shown below:

    The story went on to say that the US Government has intentionally overspent itself for the purpose of irreversibly Bankrupting the country. The idea is that they will drive the country into economic failure, then when millions of Americans are panicking at the prospect, offer them a solution of merging the three countries as “the only possible way” to avoid losing everything.

    They will force Canada into the merger by telling them the US currency they hold and rely upon will be worthless and the only way Canada can even hope to salvage any of the funds is to join the NAU.

    They will sell it to the Mexican people by saying it will instantly improve their buying-power and quality of life.

    In reality, the value of the US and Canadian dollars will be significantly reduced to counter the worthless peso being absorbed. People in the US and Canada will suffer great financial loss while Mexicans will see significant gain. In the meantime, the financial elite and the politicians they own will make out like bandits!

    That’s the reason politicians are doing this: to get rich for themselves and their financial elite pals.

    The folks in power within government and their buddies in Banking and finance know that in any currency switch, some lose big while others gain big. Really big! In fact, folks with foreknowledge of such a switch can make hundreds-of-millions, perhaps even billions for themselves overnight. Those without foreknowledge (common folks like you and me) usually end up being wiped out.

    INSTANT, FULL BLAST “SPIN”

    I published the images and the small story and went to bed. I had no idea what my little story would do.

    Within a matter of hours, there was a full blown effort to discredit my story and the images as fake.

    I was accused of lying. I was accused of having “photoshopped” the images by creating them in Adobe Photoshop.

    Within a couple days, a basic web site for AMERO “FANTASY COINS” was erected on the internet and word of that site was spread quickly. The site contained the same images as I had run on my front page, so clearly whatever “SPIN” was happening was being driven by others who also had the professional images.

    There was intense effort to claim the whole idea of these coins was a fantasy and there was absolutely no truth to them whatsoever. That effort to “spin” the story out of existence worked. Folks quickly lost interest. I did not.

    Get me the real thing by any means necessary

    I reached out to the person in the Treasury who first alerted me to the coins. That person told me “The shit hit the fan around here when your story ran.” The person went on to say “They told everyone in all the Mints that anyone revealing information about the AMERO would be fired and perhaps even criminally prosecuted for endangering national security.”

    Ahhhh yes, the grand old catch-all of national security. When they wheel that one out, you just KNOW they’re pissed off about something!

    I told the Treasury person that the only way anyone might believe this is happening, is for me to actually get one of the coins. The Treasury guy balked. He said “there’s no way to get one without stealing it.”

    I though about that for a moment. . . . . then decided that if my government is concealing the actual Minting of coins for a new sovereign entity which may end up with power over me, but which I haven’t been told about, then that government deserves whatever gets done to it.

    I told the Treasury person to get me an Amero by any means necessary – even if that meant stealing it. The Treasury person said it would require them to think about for awhile and if it could be done, I would get one in the mail.

    I waited. And waited. Frankly, after about three weeks, I lost track of the story — until today. A real AMERO coin arrived at my home in the mail this afternoon!

    The real thing arrives!

    Today, I received a single 20 AMERO coin in the mail. A real coin. Real metal, really MINTED by the US Mint in Denver, CO. The proof that it is being Minted in Denver is that the coin is stamped with the Mint Identity letter “D” on the bottom right of the side with the eagle just like regular US coins already in circulation today!

    Click each image to enlarge it, CLICK TWICE TO SUPER ENLARGE IT!!

    Please note the letter “D” stamped below and to the right of the Planet earth at the bottom right of the coin in this photo. That “D” stands for the United States Mint at Denver, CO.

    VIDEO!

    So that you can see this is a real, metal coin, I have made a small video of me holding the coin, turning it, then dropping it on a wooden table top so you can hear what it sounds like when it hits.
    Download the Windows Media Video here

    I WAS RIGHT!

    I stand vindicated. All those who claimed I fabricated the images now owe me an apology. All those who claimed these were “fantasy” coins can now explain why anyone in their right mind would spend Millions of dollars to create the rare and expensive professional dies and plates necessary for minting coins that will not be issued?

    The simple truth is, the coins are real. The plan to merge the US, Canada and Mexico is real. Our government is lying about it and the fact they are minting money at the Denver Mint bearing the name of Union of North America is proof.

    So America, Canada and Mexico, our governments are betraying us and planning to merge our countries without our knowledge or consent, or by financial disaster they bring-on intentionally. What are we going to do about it?

    For my part, the Second Amendment comes to mind.

    — Hal Turner

    Why We Must Not Go to War with Iran

    0

    By Steve Beckow 

     

    Webster Tarpley, Paul Craig Roberts and others have warned that an attack on Iran by the American military is “imminent.” (1)  Ray McGovern asks if we have the courage to stop the Bush Administration from making war on Iran.  (2)

     

    If we don’t stop the Bush administration from going to war with Iran, we as a planet may very well face what radiation experts are calling “omnicide.” (3)

     

    What does it mean? Consider these facts.

     

    • Depleted-uranium (DU) weapons, when fired, create a DU aerosol of ceramic nanoparticles.
    • Ingestion of DU or contact with it delibilitates or kills.
    • Simple exposure to unfired DU weapons can contaminate.
    • There is no safe exposure limit to DU.
    • Protective gear does not protect.
    • DU infects spouses/mothers through semen transfer and families through contact with contaminating objects.
    • DU leads to horrible birth defects in babies.
    • Women and children are the most susceptible
    • DU has a half life of 4.5 billion years.
    • DU travels globally on the winds.
    • DU cannot be cleaned up.
    • There is no known treatment for DU contamination.

     * * * * *

    If we are to prevent a global DU catastrophe, which a war in Iran would bring, we need to consider these facts.

     

    • Depleted-uranium (DU) weapons, when fired, create a DU aerosol of ceramic nanoparticles.

     

    Depleted-uranium (DU) weapons are used because uranium is a very dense metal that can penetrate concrete, steel, sandbag bunkers, or virtually anything. (4)  The fragments that break off on impact emit Alpha, Beta, Gamma, and X-ray radiation at a rate of 4.15 million electron volts (the voltage in a normal cell is 10 electron volts). Anyone in the immediate area is usually killed outright.  (5)

     However, worse than the damage it does immediately, DU turns into an infinitesimally fine dust after it explodes. Its deadly radioactive particles are smaller than a virus or bacteria and can be carried as an aerosol in the wind. (6)  

    • Ingestion of DU or contact with it debilitates or kills.

    Internationally-recognized radiation scientist Dr. Rosalie Bertell warns that DU nanoparticles can be breathed in by anyone: a baby, a pregnant woman, the elderly, the sick.  The radioactive ceramic dust can stay deep in the lungs for years, irradiating the tissue with powerful alpha particles within about a 30 micron sphere, causing emphysema and/or fibrosis. The ceramic can also be swallowed and do damage to the gastro-intestinal tract. In time, it penetrates the lung tissue and enters into the blood stream. (7)

     According to former Laurence Livermore geoscientist Dr. Leuren Moret, the invisible particles can reach sensitive targets, including the lymph nodes, spleen, heart, and central nervous system. (8) They can be found in the semen, bone marrow, and lungs. (9) DU can give rise to a range of fata cancers as well as more than 100 serious illnesses from fibromyalgia to Lou Gehrig’s disease. (10)  In other words, in her view, “depleted uranium is a death sentence.” (11) 

    • Protective gear does not protect.

     There are several myths about DU. One is that the protective gear issued to soldiers actually does protect them from ingestion and contamination.  Dr. Moret advises that DU “will permeate a standard gas mask filter in quantities large enough to be extremely damaging.” (12) U.S. Army Health Physicist and Nuclear Medicine Sciences Officer Dr. Doug Rokke goes further. Rokke was the man in charge of the “clean-up” after Gulf War 1. He says the protective gear were ineffective in saving soldiers from DU ingestion. When I talked to senior Manhattan Project scientists that were expert particle physicists, they said — ‘Hey, we knew when uranium breaks up like this, it was going to be down in the .1-.2 micron range.’  “No doubt about it. The gas masks, the respiratory protection issued to the troops — there’s no way it can protect against inhalation. Well, that’s what happened to myself and my team. We wore the respiratory protection during Gulf War I, inhaled it, and got sick.” (13) 

    • Simple exposure to unfired DU weapons can contaminate.

     

    Another myth is that simple exposure to unfired anti-tank shells and bunker-buster bombs will not result in radioactive contamination.

     In the video, Beyond Treason, Lt. Col. John Karl Marks, 303rd Fighter Squadron, offers this view: there is “a very minor amount of radioactivity [in an unfired shell], but it’s not anything. … As long as it’s in its bullet form it can be stored and it’s not any type of hazardous material.”  (14)  

    But in fact, according to Dr. Moret, many veterans have been reporting illnesses through proximity to unfired shells and bombs. For instance, gunners in Bradley vehicles who sat on boxes of DU shells are now reporting rectal cancer. (15)

     

    • There is no safe-exposure limit to DU.

     

    A third myth is that there is a threshold, a safe-exposure limit, below which one can contact DU and not suffer. This too is in fact not true.

     According to Dr. Moret, “the amount necessary to cause death to a person inhaling the material is extremely small.” “It is estimated that one millionth of a gram accumulating in a person’s body would be fatal.” (16)  

    Dr. Moret points to National Academy of Sciences studies that indicate there is “no safe level of exposure” for DU. (17)

     

    • DU infects spouses/mothers through semen transfer and familiy members through contact with contaminating objects.

     According to Dr. Moret, because a soldier’s semen is contaminated from DU particles, when he returns home he can contaminate his wife or partner. (18) Whole families can be affected. Staff Sergeant Bob Jones, a former Army Ranger and veteran of Desert Storm, is now retired and disabled due to Gulf War Illness. Not only is he ill, but his entire immediate family all suffer from mycoplasma fermentans incognitos. (19) The manner in which they were treated by the Veterans Administration should also be noted.  “It wasn’t so much my illness, but my family was also ill and they required medical attention and medical treatment — real medical treatment. I retired in June of last year — June 2003. As soon as I retired my family was completely dropped from the military medical system. Although I begged and pleaded they would not let my family re-enroll back into the Womack Family Practice.  “So in essence, my wife was completely cut off from all the medications and all the treatment that she had received for the past seven years. … —Cause she was also a victim of these exposures that I brought home from the Gulf War — from my equipment and my personal exposure, as I eluded to earlier — from personal bodily contact… and uh that to me is the greatest travesty. I just can’t imagine how … you have innocent family members and loved ones that never put their hand up and swore allegiance to fight and defend the constitution of the United States and they get kicked to the curb and nobody cares.” (20) 

    • DU leads to horrible birth defects in babies.

     Even minute trace amounts of DU in semen can bond with DNA, “where they wreak havoc with cells — especially the cells of developing fetuses.” (21) In some cases there are no indications that the baby is not healthy and yet it dies. Said Staff Sergeant Jones: Some of us that conceived children after the war — and I know of at least two individuals where their children were born perfectly healthy according the hospital – and within six months after their return their hearts literally exploded in their chests.” (22) Birth defects have skyrocketed in every DU-contaminated region. They are quite elevated in Afghanistan since the invasion: children “born with no eyes, no limbs, tumors protruding from their mouths … deformed genitalia.” (23) 

    • Women and children are the most susceptible

     British researcher Dai Williams states that “women and children … are most vulnerable to internal radiation and chromosome damage owing to higher rates of cell division.” (24)  

    The first signs of children succumbing to DU poisoning are herpes on the mouth and skin rashes on the back and ankles. These cases develop into childhood cancers, leukemia, Hodkin’s disease, and lymphomas. (25)

     

    Pedriatic examination of Iraqi children confirm that:

     

    “Childhood leukemia has risen 600% in the areas [of Iraq] where DU was used. Stillbirths, births or abortion of fetuses with monstrous abnormalities, and other cancers in children born since [the Gulf War in] 1991 have also been found.” (26)

     

    • DU has a half life of 4.5 billion years.

     

    We must keep in mind that the conditions we are describing will not go away. DU has a half life of 4.5 billion years, the same as the age of the Earth itself. (27)  It is a problem which, far from lessening over time, will likely increase by orders of magnitude as the DU particles travel around the globe.  

     

    • DU travels globally on the winds.

    According to Dr. Moret, DU is everywhere.

     DU does not respect sides in a battle. For instance, Israel, an ally of the United States, lies downwind of Iraq and is suffering from large increases in breast cancer, leukemia and childhood diabetes.  (28) Britain recorded the highest levels of DU ever measured after the Tora Bora bombings and the “Shock and Awe’ assault of 2003. (29) 

    Moreover, it does not take long for DU to travel. Within 7-9 days of the “Shock and Awe” campaign, very fine particles of DU were captured by filters 2400 miles away in Britain. (30)

    Take action — click here to contact your local newspaper or congress people:
    Stop the Catastrophic DU War with Iran

    Click here to see the most recent messages sent to congressional reps and local newspapers

    www.freewebs.com/truthseeker22

    I’m a former Member of the Immigration and Refugee Board of Canada and a former Historian at the National Museum of Man in Canada. I am now retired. As a Member of the IRB, my job was to evaluate refugee claims. As a Historian, I specialized in racism and historical theory. I have also published in cross-cultural spirituality.

    Iranian leader accuses Bush of hate campaign

    0

    Iran’s Supreme Leader Ayatollah Ali Khamenei accused U.S. President George W. Bush of trying to whip up hate against Tehran when he said last week the country had put the region “under the shadow of a nuclear holocaust”.The West suspects Iran has a secret programme to build nuclear weapons. Iran says its atomic programme is only for power generation to help boost economic growth and has rejected U.N. demands to halt its most sensitive work.

    Iran’s IRNA state news agency quoted Khamenei as saying Bush had made comments that were “hateful, arrogant and violent”.

    Photo

    “The Iranian nation has resisted and it will resist … It will never bow to any coercion in the nuclear issue and in other matters,” said Khamenei, the Islamic Republic’s top authority.

    The U.N. Security Council has imposed two rounds of sanctions on Iran since December and the United States has said it will push for a third unless Tehran stops enriching uranium.

    Enrichment is the part of Iran’s programme that most worries the West because it can be used to make fuel for nuclear power plants or material for warheads.

    The United States has said it wants the standoff to be ended through diplomacy but has not ruled out military action if that fails. U.S. officials have said they might label Iran’s Revolutionary Guards a foreign terrorist group.

    “The enemies have turned up the level of threats but they should know that an organisation like the Revolutionary Guards that enjoys popular support cannot be destroyed,” said newly appointed Guards commander Mohammad Ali Jafari.

    Iran has dismissed U.S. threats, saying U.S. power in the Middle East is waning, and has called for Washington to pull its troops out of Iraq and the region. 

    “We recommend they … leave the region as soon as possible and keep their relations with Islam and regional states at a distance,” Jafari was quoted as saying by the ISNA news agency in his first public remarks since his appointment.

    Khamenei said he had appointed Jafari on Saturday to head the Guards, an ideologically motivated force that sees itself as the guardian of the Islamic Republic. The Guards have a separate command structure to the regular military.

    http://uk.reuters.com/article/worldNews/idUKBLA35720920070903?pageNumber=2

    The Truth About Marijuana Legalisation

    There are millions of regular pot smokers in America and millions more infrequent smokers. Smoking pot clearly has far fewer dangerous and hazardous effects on society than legal drugs such as alcohol. Here is High Times’s top 10 reasons to marijuana should be legal, part of its 420 Campaign legalization strategy.

    10. Prohibition has failed to control the use and domestic production of marijuana. The government has tried to use criminal penalties to prevent marijuana use for over 75 years and yet: marijuana is now used by over 25 million people annually, cannabis is currently the largest cash crop in the United States, and marijuana is grown all over the planet. Claims that marijuana prohibition is a successful policy are ludicrous and unsupported by the facts, and the idea that marijuana will soon be eliminated from America and the rest of the world is a ridiculous fantasy.

    9. Arrests for marijuana possession disproportionately affect blacks and Hispanics and reinforce the perception that law enforcement is biased and prejudiced against minorities. African-Americans account for approximately 13% of the population of the United States and about 13.5% of annual marijuana users, however, blacks also account for 26% of all marijuana arrests. Recent studies have demonstrated that blacks and Hispanics account for the majority of marijuana possession arrests in New York City, primarily for smoking marijuana in public view. Law enforcement has failed to demonstrate that marijuana laws can be enforced fairly without regard to race; far too often minorities are arrested for marijuana use while white/non-Hispanic Americans face a much lower risk of arrest.

    8. A regulated, legal market in marijuana would reduce marijuana sales and use among teenagers, as well as reduce their exposure to other drugs in the illegal market. The illegality of marijuana makes it more valuable than if it were legal, providing opportunities for teenagers to make easy money selling it to their friends. If the excessive profits for marijuana sales were ended through legalization there would be less incentive for teens to sell it to one another. Teenage use of alcohol and tobacco remain serious public health problems even though those drugs are legal for adults, however, the availability of alcohol and tobacco is not made even more widespread by providing kids with economic incentives to sell either one to their friends and peers.

    7. Legalized marijuana would reduce the flow of money from the American economy to international criminal gangs. Marijuana’s illegality makes foreign cultivation and smuggling to the United States extremely profitable, sending billions of dollars overseas in an underground economy while diverting funds from productive economic development.

    6. Marijuana’s legalization would simplify the development of hemp as a valuable and diverse agricultural crop in the United States, including its development as a new bio-fuel to reduce carbon emissions. Canada and European countries have managed to support legal hemp cultivation without legalizing marijuana, but in the United States opposition to legal marijuana remains the biggest obstacle to development of industrial hemp as a valuable agricultural commodity. As US energy policy continues to embrace and promote the development of bio-fuels as an alternative to oil dependency and a way to reduce carbon emissions, it is all the more important to develop industrial hemp as a bio-fuel source – especially since use of hemp stalks as a fuel source will not increase demand and prices for food, such as corn. Legalization of marijuana will greatly simplify the regulatory burden on prospective hemp cultivation in the United States.

    5. Prohibition is based on lies and disinformation. Justification of marijuana’s illegality increasingly requires distortions and selective uses of the scientific record, causing harm to the credibility of teachers, law enforcement officials, and scientists throughout the country. The dangers of marijuana use have been exaggerated for almost a century and the modern scientific record does not support the reefer madness predictions of the past and present. Many claims of marijuana’s danger are based on old 20th century prejudices that originated in a time when science was uncertain how marijuana produced its characteristic effects. Since the cannabinoid receptor system was discovered in the late 1980s these hysterical concerns about marijuana’s dangerousness have not been confirmed with modern research. Everyone agrees that marijuana, or any other drug use such as alcohol or tobacco use, is not for children. Nonetheless, adults have demonstrated over the last several decades that marijuana can be used moderately without harmful impacts to the individual or society.

    4. Marijuana is not a lethal drug and is safer than alcohol. It is established scientific fact that marijuana is not toxic to humans; marijuana overdoses are nearly impossible, and marijuana is not nearly as addictive as alcohol or tobacco. It is unfair and unjust to treat marijuana users more harshly under the law than the users of alcohol or tobacco.

    3. Marijuana is too expensive for our justice system and should instead be taxed to support beneficial government programs. Law enforcement has more important responsibilities than arresting 750,000 individuals a year for marijuana possession, especially given the additional justice costs of disposing of each of these cases. Marijuana arrests make justice more expensive and less efficient in the United States, wasting jail space, clogging up court systems, and diverting time of police, attorneys, judges, and corrections officials away from violent crime, the sexual abuse of children, and terrorism. Furthermore, taxation of marijuana can provide needed and generous funding of many important criminal justice and social programs.

    2. Marijuana use has positive attributes, such as its medical value and use as a recreational drug with relatively mild side effects. Many people use marijuana because they have made an informed decision that it is good for them, especially Americans suffering from a variety of serious ailments. Marijuana provides relief from pain, nausea, spasticity, and other symptoms for many individuals who have not been treated successfully with conventional medications. Many American adults prefer marijuana to the use of alcohol as a mild and moderate way to relax. Americans use marijuana because they choose to, and one of the reasons for that choice is their personal observation that the drug has a relatively low dependence liability and easy-to-manage side effects. Most marijuana users develop tolerance to many of marijuana’s side effects, and those who do not, choose to stop using the drug. Marijuana use is the result of informed consent in which individuals have decided that the benefits of use outweigh the risks, especially since, for most Americans, the greatest risk of using marijuana is the relatively low risk of arrest.

    1. Marijuana users are determined to stand up to the injustice of marijuana probation and accomplish legalization, no matter how long or what it takes to succeed. Despite the threat of arrests and a variety of other punishments and sanctions marijuana users have persisted in their support for legalization for over a generation. They refuse to give up their long quest for justice because they believe in the fundamental values of American society. Prohibition has failed to silence marijuana users despite its best attempts over the last generation. The issue of marijuana’s legalization is a persistent issue that, like marijuana, will simply not go away. Marijuana will be legalized because marijuana users will continue to fight for it until they succeed.

    http://www.hightimes.com/ht/news/content.php?bid=1375&aid=24

    Big Brother was watching George Orwell for ‘communist views’

    0

    By COLIN FERNANDEZ

    His chilling portrait of the Big Brother state in the novel 1984 is lauded as visionary.

    But it seems George Orwell was under extensive surveillance himself years before he chronicled the fictional ordeal of Winston Smith at the hands of the Ministry of Truth.

    Secret files released by the National Archive yesterday reveal that MI5 and Special Branch suspected the writer of harbouring ‘advanced communist views’ and kept him under close scrutiny.

    George Orwell

    Communist suspect: Orwell’s friends said they saw him at communist meetings

    From the newspapers he read to his style of dress, few aspects of his life escape the microscope.

    There is little recognition of the literary talents of the author, whose real name was Eric Arthur Blair.

    In a Special Branch report written by a Sergeant Ewing in 1941, eight years before the publication of 1984, he is dismissively described as having ‘written a few books under the name of Orwell’.

    At this stage of his career, these would have included Down And Out In Paris And London, The Road To Wigan Pier and Homage To Catalonia, all now classics.

    The report focuses on his time working at the BBC in London, producing news for India.

    It says that, prior to joining the corporation, Orwell ‘eked a precarious living as a freelance journalist’.

    “This man has advanced communist views, and several of his Indian friends say they have often seen him at communist meetings.

    “He dresses in a bohemian fashion, both in his office and in his leisure hours.”

    Even his first wife Eileen comes under suspicion, and was heavily vetted when she applied for a job at the Ministry of Food in 1942.

    A Whitehall official telephoned Special Branch to seek clarification on Orwell’s political beliefs, and wrote of his findings in 1942.

    “I spoke to Inspector Gill of Special Branch asking whether his sergeant could elaborate on the question of Blair’s ‘advanced communist views’,’ the civil servant reports.

    Mr Gill explained that his sergeant thought Orwell was ‘an unorthodox communist’ holding many of their views but not subscribing fully to the party’s policy.

    Orwell was also tracked in Wigan where he wrote The Road To Wigan Pier. A report by local police says: “It would appear from his mode of living that he is an author, or has some connection with literary work as he devotes most of his time in writing.

    “He has collected an amount of local data, eg number of churches, public houses, population, etc, and is in receipt of an unusual amount of correspondence.

    “He had also been asking about local mines and factories.”

    – A nudist magazine provided diverting reading for British intelligence officers hunting wartime spies, the files reveal. Hans Larsen, a Nazi agent captured in Sweden, was suspected of sending messages to his spymasters by writing with a toothpick dipped in heated wax on the pages of The Naturist.

    Agents were said to have made several enthusiastic attempts to find the messages on a copy of the magazine found in Larsen’s possession, but were unsuccessful.

    They did discover, however, that Larsen sent messages in invisible ink in letters to his wife. If a letter included a secret communique he would spell out the date in full, such as 20th April 1945. If it did not he would abbreviate it to 20.4.45.

    Fake Photos Helped Lead US to War in Iraq

    2

    By WALTER BRASCH

    Add faked photos to the list of lies told by the Bush­Cheney Administration before its invasion of Iraq.

    In a town hall meeting in Bloomsburg, Pa. this week, Rep. Paul Kanjorski, a 12-term congressman, said that shortly before Congress was scheduled to vote on authorizing military force against Iraq, top officials of the CIA showed select members of Congress three photographs it alleged were Iraqi Unmanned Aerial Vehicles (UAVs), better known as drones. Kanjorski said he was told that the drones were capable of carrying nuclear, biological, or chemical agents, and could strike 1,000 miles inland of east coast or west coast cities.

    Kanjorski said he and four or five other congressmen in the room were told UAVs could be on freighters headed to the U.S. Both secretary of state Condoleezza Rice and President Bush wandered into and out of the briefing room, Kanjorski said.

    Kanjorski said it was the second time he was called to the White House for a briefing. He had opposed giving the President the powers to go to war, and said that he hadn’t changed his mind after a first meeting. Until he saw the pictures, Kanjorski said, “I hadn’t thought that Iraq was a threat.” That second meeting changed everything. After he left that meeting, said Kanjorski, he was willing to give the President the authorization he wanted since the drones “represented an imminent danger.”

    Kanjorski said he went to see Rep. John Murtha (D-Pa.), a retired Marine colonel. Murtha, said Kanjorski, “turned white” when told about the drones; Murtha, a former intelligence officer, believed that such information was classified.

    Several years later, Kanjorski said he learned that the pictures were “a god-damned lie,” apparently taken by CIA photographers in the desert in the southwest of the U.S. The drone story itself had already been disproved, although not many major media carried that story.

    In October 2002, President Bush said in Cincinnati that “Iraq has a growing fleet of manned and unmanned aerial vehicles that could be used to disperse chemical or biological weapons across broad areas.” He said that he was concerned “that Iraq is exploring ways of using these UAVs for missions targeting the United States.” In that same speech, he claimed, “Iraq possesses ballistic missiles with a likely range of hundreds of miles-far enough to strike Saudi Arabia, Israel, Turkey, and other nations-in a region where more than 135,000 American civilians and service members live and work.” Bush further claimed, “Surveillance photos reveal that the regime is rebuilding facilities that it had used to produce chemical and biological weapons.” Those claims were later proven false.

    Sen. Bill Nelson (D-Fla.) said that at the time the President made his speech, intelligence analysts had already discounted that threat. Nelson had told Florida Today in December 2003 that no analysts had “found anything that resembles an UAV that has that capability.” Any drones that Iraq did have, John Pike, director of Global Security, a major military and intelligence “think tank,” told Florida Today, had limited range, and would not be able to target Tel Aviv, let alone the U.S.

    Nelson, on the floor of the Senate in January 2004, said that the information presented by the Administration was crucial in getting him and others to authorize a pre-emptive strike.

    In a four-day period after that meeting in northeast Pennsylvania, Rep. Kanjorski did not return phone calls to follow up on his statements. The Department of Defense and the CIA did not comment. Certain representatives who could confirm the meeting were unavailable.

    Assisting on this story were Bill Frost, and John and Sandie Walker.

    Walter Brasch, professor of journalism at Bloomsburg University, is an award-winning syndicated columnist and the author of 15 books, most of them about social issues, the First Amendment, and the media. His forthcoming book is America’s Unpatriotic Acts; The Federal Government’s Violation of Constitutional and Civil Liberties (Peter Lang Publishing.) You may contact Brasch at brasch@bloomu.edu or at www.walterbrasch.com

    Mobiles to become digital wallets

    0

    The UK’s big five mobile phone firms have switched on a payment system that turns handsets into digital wallets. Called PayForIt, the scheme is designed for those buying goods and services with a value of up to £10.

    The industry hopes it will be used to pay for ringtones, train tickets, parking fees and eventually as a payment system on web shops and sites.

    Any cash spent via the scheme will automatically be added on to a customer’s phone bill.

    Cash crunch

    The scheme standardises the way phones can be used to make payments so the process is the same no matter which operator a customer has signed up for or which handset they are using.

    Mike Short, chairman of the Mobile Data Association, said PayForIt had been developed as an alternative to other systems such as premium rate SMS.

    Many people, said Mr Short, were unhappy using that payment system because of past uncertainty about how much they would pay and who they turn to if things go wrong.

    “It’s for those customers who have not felt comfortable with mobile transactions or payments,” he said.

    Trust in mobile payments would be boosted, said Mr Short because shoppers will know who they are buying from and what they are spending.

    Anyone paying for goods with PayForIt will see an information screen that lays out what they have bought, who it has been bought from and how much it will cost.

    “It’s about opening up the micro payment choices,” said Mr Short, “but it’s not a total cash replacement.”

    PayForIt will appear as a payment option on sites that people can get to via their handset and soon will also appear as a way to pay on websites too, said Mr Short.

    Text message on mobile phone, PA

    Bad experiences have made some wary of paying via handset

    Companies such as I-play, Gameloft, EA, Multimap, SonyEricsson and Samsung have become the first to sign up and let people pay using the PayForIt system.

    PayForIt was first announced in March 2006 and the official start date for the scheme was 1 September.

    “Most big brands would not use premium rate SMS to run their services, it’s not a good experience, it’s not consumer friendly,” said Anuj Khanna, a spokesman for Tanla Mobile which is one of the firms administering payments made via PayForIt.

    “It’s entirely geared at the low value, high volume transaction market,” he said.

    Paul Hunt, an expert on mobile commerce at consultancy Atos Origin, said there had been many failed attempts to set up similar schemes in the past. He said PayForIt has a good chance of success.

    “There’s a much wider age range of mobile users and the capabilities of handsets have changed,” he said. “The click to buy reality is catching up with the hype.”

    But, he added, the backers of the scheme had to work hard to distinguish PayForIt from alternatives to ensure people realise how it differs from other schemes.

    BBC

    Intelligence database worrying

    0

    R.G. Ratcliffe

    After a commercial airline pilot testified before a government agency against the construction of a nuclear power plant, the Department of Public Safety intelligence division investigated him as a potential terrorist who might fly his passenger-loaded airplane into such a plant.

    The First Unitarian Church of Dallas hosted talks by a gay-rights group and was labeled by DPS intelligence as the “sponsor of radical-left groups.”

    The manager of a West Texas Chamber of Commerce announced that he would challenge the House Appropriations Committee chairman’s re-election. The man immediately lost his job, and the DPS created a dossier on him and his wife that was circulated at the Capitol.

    The DPS at the time was building a massive intelligence computer database on Texas residents that would be shared among law enforcement agencies. Then-Gov. Dolph Briscoe put a halt to it, saying it appeared to lack safeguards against an invasion of privacy.

    All of that occurred in 1974 and embarrassed the DPS nationally. The agency destroyed the intelligence files and apologized to the Dallas church. But now the scandal is all but forgotten, and some civil libertarians fear that it could be repeated.

    In the current world of terrorist threats, the Legislature this year expanded police surveillance powers and declined to put tighter controls on an intelligence computer database being built at the insistence of Gov. Rick Perry’s office.

    Political aspect

    Two-thirds of the House voted to remove management of the computer from Perry’s staff and give it entirely to DPS, but the measure was not part of the final border security law, Senate Bill 11, signed by the governor. Civil libertarians remain concerned that the database will be misused in the future, particularly if managed by a political office such as a governor’s.

    “I do not take lightly the issue of backpack nuclear bombs. So we need to do a better job,” said state Rep. Lon Burnam, D-Fort Worth, an opponent of the new database. “But the over-reach we’re seeing here is phenomenal.”

    Perry’s director of homeland security, Steve McCraw – the driving force behind the Texas Data Exchange (TDEx) computer – declined to be interviewed.

    Perry spokeswoman Katherine Cesinger said the computer is meant to be nothing more than a centralized system to allow law enforcement agencies across Texas to share data that already is being kept by individual police and sheriff’s departments.

    “It really is just a fundamental 9-11 Commission finding that law enforcement needs to share information at the state and local level and federal level. This allows that information sharing,” Cesinger said.

    The computer is located at DPS but is managed by personnel under McCraw in the governor’s division of emergency management. The database is kept by a private company, Apriss Inc., on a computer in Kentucky.

    “We continue to be deeply concerned about the governor’s office having a hand in TDEx and the database being outside the state of Texas,” said Rebecca Bernhardt of the American Civil Liberties Union of Texas.

    Looking at the past

    Rep. Burnam said he was a legislative aide at the Capitol in the 1970s when the DPS intelligence scandal broke. He said there is no reason to believe at the moment that intelligence data is being misused but that it is something that should concern people.

    Burnam said opponents to Perry’s Trans-Texas Corridor toll road system could find themselves under investigation like the airline pilot who was seen as a potential terrorist because of his political activity.

    Former state Sen. A.R. “Babe” Schwartz, D-Galveston, led the investigation into DPS intelligence gathering. In a recent interview, Schwartz said the pilot’s case was far from the only one.

    “They have a vast repertoire of records on citizens,” Schwartz said. “They collected pure hearsay. They collected accounts from people who wanted to defame other people.”

    One of the dossiers kept by DPS was on a former three-term Texas House member from Houston, Curtis Graves. The information was gathered from anonymous sources and included a list of people he sang with while drinking in a Houston tavern.

    At the time of the scandal, DPS was preparing to build an interagency computer file on Texas residents. Briscoe said he was afraid it would contain noncriminal material that should not be housed in a database without residents’ consent.

    “Where it’s necessary to get the consent of anyone involved, and I think that’s proper, I rather doubt it’s practical,” Briscoe said.

    Needed tool

    The Congressional Research Service earlier this summer prepared a report to Congress on anti-terrorism efforts at state law enforcement “fusion centers,” including the one run by DPS. A focus of the report was on computer systems such as TDEx used by the fusion centers to connect the dots in criminal activity.

    The report said such computers represent “state police intelligence units on steroids” and said they take a more “proactive approach to law enforcement.” It noted a variety of terrorist plots that had been foiled by interagency cooperation.

    But the report also said protecting civil liberties may be a major problem with such intelligence gathering. It quoted National Intelligence Director Mike McConnell as saying, “The intelligence community has an obligation to better identify and counter threats to Americans while still safeguarding their privacy. The task is inherently a difficult one.”

    Cesinger, Perry’s spokeswoman, said the governor is not concerned about potential misuse of the state databases because he believes law enforcement will use it properly.

    “Our law enforcement officials are reasonable and rational, and collecting information should be seen as a positive thing,” Cesinger said. “Sharing this information will maximize the knowledge of our law enforcement officers who are trying to protect public safety.”

    DIANA: VITAL NEW EVIDENCE BLOWS APART POLICE CASE

    1

    By Cyril Dixon

    Story Image 

    THE mystery over Princess Diana’s fatal car crash took another twist yesterday when startling new evidence emerged about the death of a key witness.

    The Daily Express has uncovered dramatic new information which undermines the French police claim that photographer James Andanson doused himself and his black BMW with petrol and set himself alight.

    Andanson was found dead in his burnt-out car three years after the smash which killed Diana, her lover Dodi Fayed and driver Henri Paul.

    Andanson, suspected of causing the crash by driving a white Fiat Uno into their Mercedes, was said officially to have committed suicide.

    But investigators have uncovered a receipt which shows that although Andanson, 54, did buy a substantial amount of fuel on the day he died, it was diesel, not petrol.

    Unlike petrol, diesel is not highly inflammable at normal temperatures and would not have ignited if he had struck a match.

    He used his credit card to buy more than 100 litres of diesel on a visit to a hypermarket near Nant, southern France.

    Sceptics would say it is far more likely that the experienced paparazzo bought it to fill up his car for the 400-mile journey back to his home in central France.

    They would also think it unlikely for him to prepare his car for a long trip if he planned to kill himself just a few miles away.

    The development could support the theory that Andanson was murdered by the security services.

    Dodi’s father Mohamed Al Fayed believes he was on the intelligence payroll and that he was killed to stop him exposing a plot to assassinate his son and the Princess.

    The Harrods owner’s belief is supported by the evidence of a new witness, a policeman, who said he saw what looked like a bullet hole in the dead photographer’s head.

    The officer backs up claims by Christophe Pelat, the fireman who discovered the body, that Andanson had been shot in the head.

    Two months ago, Pelat said: “I saw him at close range and I’m absolutely convinced that he had been shot in the head.”

    Yesterday’s revelation came just days after the police officer who ran the initial inquiry into how Diana died in Paris’s Alma tunnel blamed the Fiat driver.

    Jean Claude Mules said he had compelling evidence that the black Mercedes collided with the Fiat seconds before it ploughed into a pillar. He said his officers would have “had their killer” if they had succeeded in tracing the driver.

    Andanson was found dead on May 4 2000 in woodland alongside a country road near Nant, in the Aveyron region of France.

    He had apparently left his wife Elizabeth, 45, at their farmhouse in Lignieres, 170 miles south of Paris, and driven 400 miles south to Nant.

    A police spokesman said at the time: “He took his own life by dousing himself and the car with petrol and then setting light to it.”

    But Andanson’s credit card records show he went into a Géant hypermarket just a few miles away from where he was found dead.

    He bought more than 100 litres of diesel and spent almost 600 francs.

    Investigators are not certain what he did with the fuel. But his BMW 3 series’ saloon would hold only 60 litres and he may have filled up and transported the surplus in cans. Critically, experts say that it is inconceivable that Andanson would buy diesel to set himself alight.

    Ray Holloway, of the Petrol Retailers Association, said: “With petrol it is the vapour that is the risk. It’s very different with diesel.

    “Diesel is warmed and compressed to make it fire. You wouldn’t be able to set light to diesel with a match. It would just go out.

    “The flashpoint for diesel, that is the temperature it would need to get to, is something like 63C.

    “You would need to warm diesel up with something like a blow torch to have any hope of igniting it, and even then you would probably have to be in a confined space.

    “People often get burned when using petrol because they try setting light to the liquid. But what happens is the vapour ignites first.”

    The riddle of Andanson’s death will be looked at by Lord Justice Scott Baker, the judge appointed to oversee Diana’s inquest. He has produced a list of 20 questions about the accident which most people assumed had been answered but which must now be re-examined.

    Andanson, who worked for the Sipa agency, was famous for his celebrity portraits, including one of Greek shipping tycoon Aristotle Onassis on his death-bed.

    But he is also rumoured to have been working for the security services. Former MI6 officer Richard Tomlinson once alleged they use the paparazzi because they are good at tracking the whereabouts of high profile “targets”.

    In the summer before the accident, when Diana and Dodi cruised the Mediterranean on his father’s yacht Jonikal, they were plagued by paparazzi. Andanson was one of the biggest players on that scene and was never far away from the couple.

    Mr Al Fayed believes Diana, 36, and Dodi, 42, were murdered in a conspiracy driven by the Royal Family and carried out by the security services in August 1997.

    He claims they had fallen in love after spending the summer together and planned to marry.

    Mr Al Fayed claims the Royals objected to their romance because they did not want Prince William to have a stepfather who was non-white and a Muslim.

    Cheney, the survivor without challengers

    0

    By Edward Luce and Andrew Ward

    Dick Cheney once jokingly referred to himself as Darth Vader – such was his dark reputation with the mainstream US media. With the departure of Karl Rove, George W. Bush’s electoral mastermind, the US vice-president is seen as “the last man standing” in the administration.

    Yet far from being the increasingly isolated figure that he is often portrayed, Cheney wields influence that has arguably never been greater. Among the close circle of trusted advisers that Bush has relied on since coming to the White House, only Cheney remains.

    The others – the so-called “Texas mafia” that included Harriet Miers, the former counsel, Dan Barlett, director of communications, Karen Hughes, a senior adviser, Alberto Gonzales, the outgoing attorney general and Rove – have all left.

    It was this informal coterie that would retreat with Bush to his private quarters after formal White House meetings and take the hard decisions. “These were the people Bush trusted and where he could say anything,” said a former Cheney aide. “Cheney will now be unchallenged.”

    Of the inner circle, Rove was probably the only one with equal weight to the vice-president – although they did not always see eye to eye. Rove’s principal agenda has been to expand the Republican party’s electoral base to create a “permanent majority”. Cheney’s has been to expand the executive powers that he believes were illegitimately taken from the White House after Watergate in the 1970s.

    Often they were chasing two different rabbits. It is Cheney who looks far likelier to accomplish his agenda. “There is no one left who can now out-argue the vice-president,” says Juleanna Glover, another former Cheney aide.

    The fact that the White House has no candidate running in 2008 further increases Cheney’s room for manoeuvre, particularly given Rove’s departure. “Rove was first and foremost a political animal,” says Stephen Hayes, Cheney’s biographer. “He looked at how policies could benefit the Republicans. Cheney’s attitude is: ‘Politics be damned. This is the right thing to do. Now someone else go sell it to the American public and our allies’.”

    Nor, as some have suggested, does Gonzales’ departure necessarily weaken the vice-president’s hand.

    “In terms of the formulation of arguments, Gonzales was never much of a player,” said John Bolton, a former ally of Cheney in the Bush administration and a former UN ambassador, now at the American Enterprise Institute in Washington. “David Addington [a senior Cheney aide] was the main theoretician of executive privilege and he is still there.”

    Significant test

    The first significant test of Cheney’s influence in the post-Rove era will come within the next few weeks, when Bush picks a nominee to replace Gonzales as attorney-general.

    People close to the White House say Cheney wants a conservative nominee who will defend the expansion of presidential power he has championed over the past six years.

    But Bush is under pressure from others in the administration to choose an independent figure who would stand up to the White House. Bruce Fein, a former senior law officer in the Reagan administration, says the identity of Gonzales’ replacement will determine “whether the Cheney executive privilege agenda will continue to prevail”.

    Cheney has focused his vice-presidency on reversing the constraints placed on executive power following Watergate and the Vietnam war.

    It was this philosophy that led to the launch of a controversial domestic eavesdropping programme after the September 2001 terrorist attacks, the opening of the Guantanamo Bay detention centre and the blurring of US policy towards torture.

    Perhaps the clearest evidence of Cheney’s overriding influence is the deadlock over the future of Guantanamo. The vice-president is the only high-profile administration official still arguing for the detention centre to be kept open. Yet his views have so far trumped the growing consensus elsewhere in the administration about the need to work towards closing the facility.

    “Cheney’s most important goal is to establish beyond this presidency the White House’s pre-eminent and in some respects exclusive role to make war, determine what war is and who is a combatant,” says Fein. “That will be his legacy.”

    While Cheney has lost some ground to foreign policy moderates, those who know him well insist he will continue to push for tougher action to prevent Iran acquiring nuclear weapons. “He should not be underestimated on this point,” says a former senior administration official. “Cheney has argued for military action against Iran before and he will likely do so again. If the current round of UN resolutions fail to get Iran to change course, then Cheney’s argument will gather strength through 2008.”

    Bolton says on foreign policy the Bush administration will retain its strongest freedom of action.

    “People tend to forget that we do not have a parliamentary system – the powers of the executive do not depend on who controls the legislature or on the state of public opinion,” he says.

    “We have a separation of powers. This is especially true of foreign policy.”

    ‘China power growing as Bush ignores Asia’

    0

    US President George W Bush is so preoccupied with Iraq he is neglecting Asia and allowing China to take a greater leadership role, a former senior US official said in remarks published on Monday.

    “In every measure, China is making real hay right throughout Asia,” Richard Armitage, Bush’s former deputy secretary of state told The Australian newspaper in an interview.

    “Right now, we’re just so preoccupied with Iraq that we’re ignoring Asia totally.”

    Bush is cutting short his attendance at a major Asia-Pacific summit in Sydney this weekend to return to Washington in time for reports to Congress on progress in Iraq by top US general David Petraeus.

    Armitage also criticised Secretary of State Condoleeza Rice for skipping two out of three annual meetings which bring the US together with the Association of Southeast Asian Nations (ASEAN).

    The Bush administration had radically underestimated the importance of Asia, he said.

    “In almost every measure, military budgets, population growths, the need for raw materials, our interests will force us back to Asia.”

    Armitage said there was a danger of Chinese leadership in Asia surpassing that of the US.

    Australian Prime Minister John Howard, a strong supporter of Bush’s Iraq policy, was reportedly bitterly disappointed that the US president will miss the second day of the two-day summit.

    In an attempt to make amends, Bush has extended his state visit ahead of the APEC summit.

    http://timesofindia.indiatimes.com/China_power_growing_as_Bush_ignores_Asia_/articleshow/2333726.cms

    George Bush IS intelligent, says PM

    0

    GEORGE W. Bush was an intelligent and likeable man, Prime Minister John Howard said today ahead of the US President’s arrival in Australia.

    Large parts sections of central Sydney have been cordoned off with a 3m security fence amid predictions of violent protests to coincide with Mr Bush’s visit to the APEC leaders’ summit.

    Protesters are keen to target Mr Bush over the US-led involvement in the Iraq war and his perceived failure to address climate change.

    But Mr Howard today had only praise for Mr Bush, saying the US President had a “special position” as the democratically elected leader of Australia’s most important ally.

    “He has his critics,” Mr Howard said during an unusual appearance on Channel 9’s Mornings with Kerri-Anne.

    “I like him. I find him an intelligent, likeable man to deal with on a personal basis.”

    Mr Howard promised to stick by Mr Bush because he would “never” walk away from a friend.

    “I don’t care how much they’re criticised. You form a view of somebody and their character and I tend to stick with them,” Mr Howard said.

    “It may not always enjoy total support, but I do it in a way that doesn’t damage the interest of my country.”

    Mr Howard said a strong relationship between Canberra and Washington was crucial to Australia’s security.

    “It’s in Australia’s interest to have a close alliance with America – not always to agree with America, we disagree with America on a lot of things,” he said.

    “But overwhelmingly America remains a force for good, it is our security guarantor, and that alliance with the United States is fundamental to our future.”

    Mr Howard said he accepted that the Iraq war was not popular with Australians.

    But regardless of what people thought of the original decision to join the US-led invasion, it would be wrong to withdraw Australia’s few hundred personnel at this point, he said.

    “I accept that the Iraq war’s not popular and I accept that George Bush has his critics,” Mr Howard said.

    “I believe we were right to go into Iraq, I think we’d be very wrong to pull out now. What would happen if the Americans pulled out now, the place would just descend into total chaos, the terrorists would have a huge victory and that would be a major setback for our cause.

    “So that’s why I’m perservering with our policies.”

    There were signs that the recent surge in US troop numbers in Iraq was helping to turn things around, he said.

    America’s top commander in Iraq, General David Petraeus, will next week deliver a report to Congress on the security situation in Iraq, including the effect of the boost in US troop numbers.

    Opposition Leader Kevin Rudd has promised a Labor government will bring home Australia’s 550 combat forces from southern Iraq at the end of their current rotation – about the middle of next year.

    http://www.news.com.au/heraldsun/story/0,21985,22352661-5005961,00.html

    Now police are told they can use Taser guns on children

    0

    By JASON LEWIS

    Police have been given the go-ahead to use Taser stun guns against children.

    The relaxing of restrictions on the use of the weapons comes despite warnings that they could trigger a heart attack in youngsters.

    Until now, Tasers – which emit a 50,000-volt electric shock – have been used only by specialist officers as a “non lethal” alternative to firearms.

    Stun gun: Tasers give off a 50,000 volt blast

    However, they can now be used against all potentially violent offenders even if they are unarmed.

    It is the decision not to ban their use against minors that is likely to raise serious concerns.

    Home Office Police Minister Tony McNulty said medical assessments had confirmed the risk of death or serious injury from Tasers was “low”.

    But he failed to mention Government advisers had also warned of a potential risk to children.

    The Defence Scientific Advisory Council medical committee told the Home Office that not enough was known about the health risks of using the weapons against children.

    Tasers work by firing metal barbs into the skin which then discharge an electrical charge which is designed to disable someone long enough to allow police to detain them safely.

    The committee, which is made up of independent scientists and doctors, said that limited research suggested there was a risk children could suffer “a serious cardiac event”.

    It recommended that officers should be “particularly vigilant” for any Taser-induced adverse response and said guidance should be amended to “identify children and adults of small stature” as being at potentially greater risk from the cardiac effects of Tasers.

    The Government scientists were also asked to test whether the weapons could cause a miscarriage if used on a pregnant woman.

    While not saying whether police would be allowed to Taser an expectant mother, the Home Office said the DSAC committee had “specifically asked” for computer simulations to be carried out to analyse the effect on “a pregnant female”.

    Amnesty International claims Tasers have been responsible for 220 deaths in America since 2001. Many cities and police forces there have banned their use against minors.

    Two years ago in Chicago a 14-year-old boy went into cardiac arrest after being shot with one. Medics had to use a defibrillator four times to resuscitate him.

    Taser International, the American firm that makes the device, said tests on pigs suggested the weapons were safe.

    The Association of Chief Police Officers, which issues guidance to forces on the use of weapons, said Tasers would be made “readily available” for “conflict management” at incidents of “violence and threats of violence of such severity that they will need force”.

    Non-firearms officers in ten forces will be trained to use the weapons. Every incident they are involved in will be assessed over a 12-month trial period.

    Excerpts from the interview by Iran’s Chief Nuclear Negotiator

    1

    In the name of God, the Compassionate, the Merciful
    Dr. Ali Larijani, Secretary of Iran´s Supreme National Security Council (SNSC) and Iran´ top nuclear negotiator, in a French radio interview on Thursday February 17, 2006, declared the latest positions of the Islamic Republic of Iran on the issue of Iran´s peaceful nuclear program. Following are excerpts of the interview :

    • The lslamic Republic of Iran wants to use the peaceful nuclear technology within the framework of the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA) and Nuclear Non-Proliferation Treaty (NPT).
    • The Islamic Republic of Iran has been and continues to be committed to its international non-proliferation commitments.
      Unfortunately certain western countries, contrary to their public statements, have been insisting in the negotiations that Iran should not have any nuclear technology and know-how. This is a double-standard behavior in international system and can not be acceptable.
    • The Islamic Republic of Iran like other nations such as Brazil, Japan and many European Countries would like to exercise its inalienable rights to peaceful use of nuclear technology and play its role in this category of countries in international arena
      The best guarantee for peacefulness of the nuclear program of the Islamic Republic of Iran could include the following measures:

      • Accepting the current IAEA monitoring and verification systems.
      • Use of modern centrifuges, proposed by some American and British scientists, which permit only limited enrichment.
      • participation of interested countries in Iran´s peaceful nuclear activities in the form of a consortium.
    • Accordingly, there are various ways to ensure that Iran is not pursuing Military nuclear programs.
    • Should these guarantees be acceptable, the Islamic Republic of Iran would accept to send the Additional Protocol to the Parliament for ratification.
    • It has been the consistent policy of the Islamic Republic of Iran to employ peaceful nuclear technology for country´s economic development.
    • It would be much more appropriate that rather than simply repeating the positions of the United States, the EU would act independently and propose new ways on the basis of the inalienable rights enshrined in the NPT.
    • The Islamic Republic of Iran stands ready to cooperate with the EU in this regard and it is appropriate to avoid the language of threat and imposition in this process. Therefore, should the EU change its discourse and stand ready to clearly recognize the Iran´s rights in the framework of the NPT, there will be a complete readiness on Iran´s side to cooperate with Europe.
    • The Islamic Republic of Iran is ready to negotiate and cooperate with all other countries (except the Zionist regime) in this regard.
    • The main problem with the European´s proposal in August 2005 was its negligence of Iran´s inalienable right to peaceful nuclear technology, in contradiction to the provisions of the NPT.
    • We are of the view that the potentials and capacities of the European Union can be employed to resolve this issue and we stand ready to cooperate with the EU for the longer term as well. In the past, we had the same position, but we have not witnessed appropriate behaviors of the European side. The cancellation of the construction of the Bushehr power plant by the Siemens of Germany, the refusal of France’s EURODIEF to deliver Uranium and failure of the United State´s to honor its commitment to deliver the Uranium for Tehran´s research reactor, which had been paid for, are but a few examples of the behaviors that are not comprehensible. These are some of the reasons which have caused our mistrust towards the west and have encouraged us to go for the completion of our own peaceful nuclear program.
    • Should a credible international system for providing nuclear fuel be in place, the Islamic Republic of Iran would be ready to procure its nuclear fuel from that system. However, such a system dose not exist at present.

    The Embassy of the Islamic Republic of Iran in London

    Webster Tarpley at the Vancouver 9/11 Truth Conference

    1

    Webster Tarpley at the Vancouver 9/11 Truth Conference — “Understanding the Sinister Dyanamics of 9/11”

    It’s no secret – the election was a fraud

    2

    George Bush has shredded the Constitution; bankrupted the country; blackened our reputation as a people; and lied us into an illegal, immoral, self-destructive military operation in Iraq.

    And he was never elected president.

    Not in 2000. Not in 2004.

    And the news media, Congress, and the Democratic Party have never even attempted to do anything about it.

    If you’re living in America, that’s the kind of country you’re living in now.

    It’s not a question of when or if we’ll lose our democracy, it’s been gone a long time. The only question is what we’re going to do to get it back.

    http://www.brasschecktv.com/page/145.html

    Snow’s on way out; Rove’s gone

    0

    By Mark Silva

    White House press secretary Tony Snow will leave this month to devote time to writing, speaking and playing a more active public role in combating cancer, a disease he has confronted for three roller-coaster years.

    Dana Perino, the principal deputy press secretary, will take Snow’s place Sept. 14, the first time President Bush has chosen a woman as voice of the White House.

    Snow, battling a recurrence of colon cancer he had hoped was in remission when he became the president’s chief spokesman in April 2006, said it is not the disease but the financial burden his work has placed on his family that is forcing him to leave.

    While paid $168,000 a year as press secretary, that salary is far less than Snow, a father of three who has fought cancer since 2005, made as a host for the Fox News Channel and Fox News Radio.

    “Cancer has nothing to do with this,” Snow said Friday of his decision.

    “I ran out of money,” he said. “I made more money when I was in my previous career. … We took out a loan when I came to the White House, and that loan is now gone.”

    While planning some well-paying public-speaking engagements and occasional TV and radio work, Snow, 52, said he hopes to devote his time to a book on “how you deal with sickness.”

    Bush, congratulating Snow for taking on “a big job with courage,” said that now, “One, he’ll battle cancer and win. And secondly, he’ll be a solid contributor to society.” Bush finished with an unusually personal nod to his departing aide: “I love you.”

    Perino, 35, who has substituted often for Snow since his cancer returned in March, is “a smart, capable person,” said Bush, looking at reporters in the pressroom. “She can handle you all.”

    Snow is the latest in a long line of senior Bush advisers to leave before the end of the president’s second term. Friday was White House deputy chief of staff Karl Rove’s last day. Attorney General Alberto Gonzales announced his resignation this week. Former White House counselor Dan Bartlett, White House attorney Harriet Miers, budget director Rob Portman, political director Sara Taylor, deputy national-security adviser J.D. Crouch and Meghan O’Sullivan, a national-security adviser who worked on Iraq, also have stepped down.

    Snow, who said in March that doctors had discovered his colon cancer had recurred and spread to his liver, recently finished months of chemotherapy and will face another treatment and then periodic CAT scans. The most recent scan, he said, was encouraging.

    Asked about his long-range plans, Snow, facing seasoned correspondent Helen Thomas, seated in the front row and center of the press room, said: “When I’m your age, I want to be sitting in the front row making life a living hell for a presidential press secretary.”

    Material from McClatchy Newspapers is included in this report.

    Vital Lockerbie evidence ‘was tampered with’

    The Observer

    Fragments of bomb timer that helped to convict a Libyan ex-agent were ‘practically carbonised’ before the trial, says bankrupt Swiss businessman

    The key piece of material evidence used by prosecutors to implicate Libya in the Lockerbie bombing has emerged as a probable fake.
    Nearly two decades after Pan Am flight 103 exploded over Scotland on 21 December, 1988, allegations of international political intrigue and shoddy investigative work are being levelled at the British government, the FBI and the Scottish police as one of the crucial witnesses, Swiss engineer Ulrich Lumpert, has apparently confessed that he lied about the origins of a crucial ‘timer’ – evidence that helped tie the man convicted of the bombing to the crime.

    The disaster killed 270 people when the London to New York Boeing 747 exploded in mid-air. Britain and the US blamed Libya, saying that its leader, Colonel Muammar Gadaffi, wanted revenge for the US bombing of Tripoli in 1986. At a trial in the Netherlands in 2001, former Libyan agent Abdulbaset al-Megrahi was jailed for life.

    He is currently serving his sentence in Greenock prison, but later this month the Scottish Court of Appeal is expected to hear Megrahi’s case, after the Scottish Criminal Cases Review Commission ruled in June that there was enough evidence to suggest a miscarriage of justice. Lumpert’s confession, which was given to police in his home city of Zurich last week, will strengthen Megrahi’s appeal.

    The Zurich-based Swiss businessman Edwin Bollier, who has spent nearly two decades trying to clear his company’s name, is as eager for the appeal as is Megrahi. Bollier’s now bankrupt company, Mebo, manufactured the timer switch that prosecutors used to implicate Libya after they said that fragments of it had been found on a Scottish hillside.

    Bollier, now 70, admits having done business with Libya. ‘Two years before Lockerbie, we sold 20 MST-13 timers to the Libyan military. FBI agents and the Scottish investigators said one of those timers had been used to detonate the bomb. We were shown a fuzzy photograph and I confirmed the fragments looked as though they came from one of our timers.’

    However, Bollier was uneasy with the photograph he had been shown and asked to see the fragments. He was finally given permission in 1998 and travelled to Dumfries to see the evidence.

    ‘I was shown fragments of a brown circuit board which matched our prototype. But when the MST-13 went into production, the timers contained green boards. I knew that the timers sold to Libya had green boards. I told the investigators this.’

    Back in Switzerland, Bollier’s company was in effect bankrupt, having faced a lawsuit from Pan Am and having lost major clients, such as the German federal police to which Mebo supplied communications equipment.

    In 2001, Bollier spent five days in the witness box at the Lockerbie trial at Camp Zeist in the Netherlands. ‘I was a defence witness, but the trial was so skewed to prove Libyan involvement that the details of what I had to say was ignored. A photograph of the fragments was produced in court and I asked to see the pieces again. When they were brought to me, they were practically carbonised. They had been tampered with since I had seen them in Dumfries.’

    Few people apart from conspiracy theorists and investigative journalists working on the case were prepared to believe Bollier until the end of last month, when Lumpert, one of his former employees, walked into a Zurich police station and asked to swear an affidavit before a notary.

    Holes in the wall to see PINs in our eyes

    2

    Daily Mail

    Bank customers could soon enter their PIN codes at cash machines just by looking at the numbers in the right order.

    The system is designed to beat fraudsters looking over your shoulder to see which keys you press.

    The technology, called EyePassword, is being developed in America – and High Street banks in Britain are already interested in using it.

    It works by shining an infrared light on your eye. This stays in the same spot on your eye no matter where you look.

    As you gaze at the cash dispenser key pad, your pupil moves. When your eye comes to rest on a number, a camera compares the position of your pupil with the fixed light in your eye.

    The system is then able to work out which direction your pupil has moved in and how far and, therefore, which number you are looking at.

    EyePassword has a three per cent error rate and it can take six times longer to enter your pin.

    But Lloyds, Barclays and Royal Bank of Scotland have expressed an interest in the technology.

    However, its inventor, Manu Kumar, of California’s Stanford University, warned: “There are lots of issues to be resolved, probably the biggest one being cost.”

    Computer security specialist Dr Jeff Yan, of Newcastle University, said cash dispensers using EyePassword could cost £5,000, £3,000 more than a conventional ATM.

    Lie detectors target benefit claim cheats

    The Observer

    Benefit claimants and job seekers could be forced to take lie detector tests as early as next year after an early review of a pilot scheme exposed 126 benefit cheats in just three months, saving one local authority £110,000.
    Last May, the Department for Work and Pensions asked Harrow council in London to undertake a year-long, £63,000 pilot of the ground-breaking Voice Risk Analysis (VRA) technology.

    ‘We will wait until the end of the formal evaluation period to make a final decision about rolling the technology out across the country but this early review by the council is very positive,’ said a spokesman for the DWP.

    Article continues

    ‘If our own review comes to similar conclusions to Harrow’s, we would like to see this technology rolled out across Britain as soon as possible.’
    VRA technology works by measuring slight, inaudible fluctuations in the human voice known as ‘micro-tremors’ that indicate when a speaker delivers words under stress, and when those moments of stress are generated by an attempt to deceive. Voice patterns are analysed and displayed on a computer.

    Normal speech ranges in frequency from 8 to 12 hertz. When they are being honest, the average sound is below 10 hertz. When they lie, the stress causes the frequency to rise to above 10 hertz.

    ‘This technology is successfully used in the insurance industry and analyses changes in a caller’s voice, giving an indication of the level of risk that they are lying,’ said Richard Sheridan from Capita Group which owns the technology and is helping implementation for Harrow council. ‘These changes are measured against the caller’s “normal” voice which is recorded at the beginning of the phone call, ensuring that nervousness or shyness is not a trigger. If the technology flags up a caller as being suspicious, they will be asked to provide extra evidence to support their claim.’

    The technology is being tested on people claiming housing or council tax benefit but will be extended at Harrow Jobcentre for other benefits this year. The government claims the technology also improves services.

    ‘Operators trained in intelligent questioning and behavioural analysis will use the system to identify suspect cases at the start of the claim process, enabling low-risk claimants to be fast-tracked,’ said a DWP spokesman.

    Over the past two years the procedure for claiming benefits has been reformed. The claim often begins with a telephone interview, after which people may need to provide evidence and sign forms.

    Brendan Barber, general secretary of the TUC, said the system ‘adds to the demonisation of claimants’.

    ‘Whatever their views on welfare policy, anyone who cares about science and reason should also be alarmed: lie detectors do not work, they are as likely to finger the innocent but nervous as the genuinely guilty,’ he said. ‘Innocent people will account for a majority of those whose claims are delayed while they provide extra evidence.’

    Experts in America, where the most comprehensive scrutiny of the technology has taken place, warn that the technology is far from failsafe.

    David Ashe, chief deputy of the Virginia Board for Professional and Occupational Regulation, said, ‘The experience of being tested, or of claiming a benefit and being told that your voice is being checked for lies, is inherently stressful.

    ‘Lie detector tests have a tendency to pass people for whom deception is a way of life and fail those who are scrupulously honest.’

    Pentagon ‘three-day blitz’ plan for Iran

    0

    The Times

    The Pentagon has drawn up plans for massive airstrikes against 1,200 targets in Iran, designed to annihilate the Iranians’ military capability in three days, according to a national security expert.

    Alexis Debat, director of terrorism and national security at the Nixon Center, said last week that US military planners were not preparing for “pinprick strikes” against Iran’s nuclear facilities. “They’re about taking out the entire Iranian military,” he said.

    Debat was speaking at a meeting organised by The National Interest, a conservative foreign policy journal. He told The Sunday Times that the US military had concluded: “Whether you go for pinprick strikes or all-out military action, the reaction from the Iranians will be the same.” It was, he added, a “very legitimate strategic calculus”.

    President George Bush intensified the rhetoric against Iran last week, accusing Tehran of putting the Middle East “under the shadow of a nuclear holocaust”. He warned that the US and its allies would confront Iran “before it is too late”.

    One Washington source said the “temperature was rising” inside the administration. Bush was “sending a message to a number of audiences”, he said to the Iranians and to members of the United Nations security council who are trying to weaken a tough third resolution on sanctions against Iran for flouting a UN ban on uranium enrichment.

    The International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA) last week reported “significant” cooperation with Iran over its nuclear programme and said that uranium enrichment had slowed. Tehran has promised to answer most questions from the agency by November, but Washington fears it is stalling to prevent further sanctions. Iran continues to maintain it is merely developing civilian nuclear power.

    Bush is committed for now to the diplomatic route but thinks Iran is moving towards acquiring a nuclear weapon. According to one well placed source, Washington believes it would be prudent to use rapid, overwhelming force, should military action become necessary.

    Israel, which has warned it will not allow Iran to acquire nuclear weapons, has made its own preparations for airstrikes and is said to be ready to attack if the Americans back down.

    Alireza Jafarzadeh, a spokesman for the National Council of Resistance of Iran, which uncovered the existence of Iran’s uranium enrichment plant at Natanz, said the IAEA was being strung along. “A number of nuclear sites have not even been visited by the IAEA,” he said. “They’re giving a clean bill of health to a regime that is known to have practised deception.”

    Mahmoud Ahmadinejad, the Iranian president, irritated the Bush administration last week by vowing to fill a “power vacuum” in Iraq. But Washington believes Iran is already fighting a proxy war with the Americans in Iraq.

    The Institute for the Study of War last week released a report by Kimberly Kagan that explicitly uses the term “proxy war” and claims that with the Sunni insurgency and Al-Qaeda in Iraq “increasingly under control”, Iranian intervention is the “next major problem the coalition must tackle”.

    Bush noted that the number of attacks on US bases and troops by Iranian-supplied munitions had increased in recent months “despite pledges by Iran to help stabilise the security situation in Iraq”.

    It explains, in part, his lack of faith in diplomacy with the Iranians. But Debat believes the Pentagon’s plans for military action involve the use of so much force that they are unlikely to be used and would seriously stretch resources in Afghanistan and Iraq.

    Al Fayed inquest plea to Diana bodyguard

    1

    By Marc Baker

    HARRODS boss Mohamed Al Fayed has urged Princess Diana’s former bodyguard Trevor Rees-Jones to give evidence at her inquest.

    Mr Rees-Jones, 49, marked the 10th anniversary of the Princess’ death by refusing to say whether he would speak at her inquest in October.

    After Princes William and Harry led a memorial to their late mother’s memory, Mr Al Fayed said it was time for people with vital evidence to come forward. A spokesman for Mr Al Fayed was commenting on the decision of Mr Rees-Jones to refuse to reveal whether he would attend the Princess’s inquest or not.

    Asked if he would give evidence, a spokeswoman for the former paratrooper said: “We are not commenting further.

    “Trevor Rees-Jones wishes to state that he will not be conducting any media interviews or making any further statements relating to or arising out of the events of August 31, 1997.

    “He asks for his privacy, and particularly that of his family at this time, and in the future, to be respected.”

    But Mr Al Fayed’s spokesman Michael Cole insisted people with evidence should come forward.

    He said: “It is a matter for the coroner but anybody who has relevant information should be willing and ready to come forward to help the process of the inquest.

    “Anyone with relevant information should be willing to give evidence.”

    As the only survivor of the crash, Mr Rees-Jones’ evidence is vital in unravelling the mystery which surrounds the deaths of Diana, 36, and Dodi, 42, on August 31, 1997.

    When they left Mr Al Fayed’s Paris Ritz Hotel, the guard sat in the front seat of the Mercedes.

    Mr Rees-Jones, who at the time was living in Oswestry, broke every bone in his face and suffered terrible chest and head injuries in the incident. He was unable to give a coherent account of what he remembered for months afterwards.

    Initially, Mr Rees-Jones swore driver Henri Paul had not been drinking before transporting Diana and Dodi Fayed from the Paris Ritz Hotel.

    But just two years later in his book, The Bodyguard’s Story, he blamed the accident, which left the couple and Henri Paul dead, on a lethal combination of alcohol and speeding. Mr Al Fayed’s plea for Mr Rees-Jones to give evidence is based on his desire to understand why the bodyguard changed his testimony over the tragedy. It also follows accusations, never proven, that Mr Rees-Jones may have been “got at” after initially giving a version of events which may have backed up claims that the crash was orchestrated in an Establishment plot.

    Mohamed Al Fayed maintains the couple were murdered as part of a conspiracy orchestrated by the Royal Family and their aides. The accusation has always been denied.

    Recently, Mr Rees-Jones has been working as a private security advisor in Iraq.

    Ministers pledge to fight growing calls for EU treaty referendum

    0

    By Marie Woolf

    Ministers, including David Miliband, the Foreign Secretary, are set to come out fighting this week against growing demands for a EU treaty referendum.

    Government sources say that a string of ministers will “make it clear” that the Government has a mandate for the new reform treaty, given at the European Council in June. The Government came under growing pressure last week to refuse to rule out a referendum. But the Prime Minister is expected to firmly rule out a referendum later this week.

    The move follows intense pressure on Gordon Brown from members of his own party. A campaign led by the Labour MP Ian Davidson, who said that up to a third of Labour MPs could back calls for an EU treaty, was joined by the former Europe minister, Keith Vaz, on Friday. He said: “We should not be afraid of actually putting this argument before the British people. We don’t need a referendum on the reformed treaty because we didn’t have one on the Nice Treaty or on Maastricht. But I think there’s a difference between need and desirability.

    “I think once and for all we need to put this behind us by putting it to the British people. I am absolutely convinced that we will win any test of public opinion as to whether or not the British people want us in Europe.”

    Second UK general attacks US Iraq policy

    0

    A second general has spoken out against the US’ attitude towards post-war Iraq, heightening differences between the American and British views on the war.

    Major General Mike Cross added to comments yesterday by the head of the British Army during the invasion of Iraq, General Sir Mike Jackson, who accused US war architect Donald Rumsfeld as having an “intellectually bankrupt” approach to the war.

    In comments to the Sunday Mirror newspaper, Maj Gen Cross said it was clear before the 2003 invasion that American leaders were certain that the Middle Eastern country would make a swift transition to stability.

    “The US had already convinced themselves that Iraq would emerge reasonably quickly as a stable democracy,” the senior British planner for post-war Iraq was quoted as saying.

    “Anybody who tried to tell them anything that challenged that idea – they simply shut it out.”

    Maj Gen Jackson said Mr Rumsfeld “ignored” and “dismissed” his expressions of concern, adding that “with hindsight” he believed the US post-Saddam plan for Iraq was “fatally flawed”.

    His comments echo those of Gen Jackson, who yesterday told the Telegraph newspaper that the American expectation of a warm welcome for the coalition forces was “an ideological article of faith” among planners.

    He claimed that it had been assumed that the displacement of the dictator meant that “a model democratic society would inevitably emerge”.

    Gen Jackson also criticised US foreign policy’s reliance on military force, revealed his doubts about the claims on Saddam Hussein’s weapons of mass destruction and said the work of the US state department had been wasted because of a lack of interest from Mr Bush.

    http://www.inthenews.co.uk/news/autocodes/autocodes/iraq/second-uk-general-attacks-us-iraq-policy-$1129428.htm

    Active-duty US troops become outspoken critics of Iraq war

    0

    By Brad Knickerbocker

    A recent op-ed about the war in Iraq charged that upbeat official reports amount to “misleading rhetoric.” It said the “most important front in the counterinsurgency [had] failed most miserably.” And it warned against pursuing “incompatible policies to absurd ends.”

    Five years into a controversial war, that harsh judgment in a New York Times opinion piece might not seem surprising, except for this: The authors were seven US soldiers, writing from Iraq at the end of a tough 15-month combat tour.

    In books and professional journals, blogs, and newspapers, active-duty military personnel are speaking publicly and critically as never before about an ongoing war.

    Respectfully, but with a directness and gritty authenticity that comes from combat experience — sometimes written from the battlefield — they offer a view of current strategy, military leadership, and the situation on the ground that is more stark than Pentagon and White House pronouncements.

    Part of this reflects weariness with the war. But it also represents a shift in military culture where speaking up publicly is more usual and acceptable than in previous conflicts, experts say, thanks to changes in technology and society.

    “This is the first post-Internet, post-digital-camera war” in which “the line between private lives and public lives has been blurred,” says Eugene Fidell, a former military lawyer who teaches military justice at Yale.

    Under the Uniform Code of Military Justice (UCMJ), as long as uniformed critics do not speak or write using “contemptuous words” regarding the president or other senior officials, they are free to voice their opinions, notes Mr. Fidell, president of the National Institute of Military Justice. “We’re a nation built on free expression, and it can get pretty noisy.”

    Part of this criticism reflects weariness with the war, especially among those serving multiple extended combat tours.

    “You could almost construct an equation to predict the rate at which dissension in the ranks will reach the public as support for a war sours,” says military analyst Loren Thompson of the Lexington Institute, a public policy think tank in Arlington, Va.

    “I have to tell you as somebody who deals frequently with the military, there’s been a lot of disagreement for a long time about this war,” he adds. “It just tends to get expressed obliquely and in private.”

    A May survey of Army soldiers in Iraq showed 45 percent with “low” morale compared with 19 percent who said their morale was “high.” The percentage of West Point graduates who quit the Army after their five-year obligation has more than doubled since the Iraq war began in 2003.

    More and more, a vocal minority is also speaking out publicly — a far cry from the World War II era when, in order to keep his political conscience clear, Gen. George C. Marshall never even voted.

    Earlier this year, Army Lt. Col. Paul Yingling challenged his superiors head-on in an article in Armed Forces Journal.

    The Vietnam and Iraq “debacles are not attributable to individual failures, but rather to a crisis in an entire institution: America’s general officer corps,” wrote the former West Point instructor and Iraq veteran who recently took command of a battalion. “In both conflicts, the general officer corps designed to advise policymakers, prepare forces and conduct operations failed to perform its intended functions…. As matters stand now, a private who loses a rifle suffers far greater consequences than a general who loses a war.”

    Acceptable target: the system

    Colonel Yingling’s target was institutional, not personal.

    “He is going after the system — training, experience, the promotion system that produces mediocre generals because all the innovators get fed up and leave,” says retired Army Col. Dan Smith, a military analyst with the Friends Committee on National Legislation who fought in Vietnam and later taught philosophy at West Point.

    Military sources in Iraq and Washington also voiced their criticisms on the record in “Fiasco: The American Military Adventure in Iraq ,” Washington Post reporter Tom Ricks’s best-selling 2006 book, The blogosphere is filled with soldiers grumbling, not only about lengthy repeated tours but also about the wisdom of invading Iraq in the first place.

    Is all of this a good thing?

    “In these times when so few have any personal experience of the military, it is good to have their voice in the public discussion,” says retired Naval Reserve Capt. John Allen Williams, a political scientist at Loyola University Chicago who teaches civil-military relations.

    But some observers worry that active-duty personnel speaking out in this way begins to trespass on the constitutionally mandated civilian control of the military.

    “The notion that the military defends democracy but does not practice it still seems sensible to me,” says John Pike, director of GlobalSecurity.org, a defense-information website in Washington. “We have sufficient serious problems with civil-military relations without adding a politicized military as just another interest group.”

    There are obvious reasons for not speaking critically of one’s superiors or the mission: harm to one’s chances for promotion as well as potential legal difficulties from going too far under the UCMJ.

    But here, enlisted men and women may have more freedom to speak out since the “contemptuous words” provision applies exclusively to officers. The seven soldiers who signed the column in The New York Times are infantrymen and noncommissioned officers with the Army’s 82nd Airborne Division.

    “To believe that Americans, with an occupying force that long ago outlived its reluctant welcome, can win over a recalcitrant local population and win this counterinsurgency is far-fetched,” they wrote. “Yes, we are militarily superior, but our successes are offset by failures elsewhere. What soldiers call the ‘battle space’ remains the same, with changes only at the margins.”

    Enlisted men freer to speak

    However harsh the language, the soldiers’ status may protect them from military discipline.

    “Enlisted men, so long as they ensure that they explicitly state that they are expressing their own opinion, can say anything they want, which is exactly what these men did,” writes active-duty Army Lt. Col. Bob Bateman in a blog at the online information-exchange and discussion site Small Wars Journal.

    But he takes them to task for asserting that they have knowledge about conduct of the war which is “way above and beyond their positions.”

    “The fact that they, like me, wear uniforms should not convey some sort of magic pixie-dust validity to their opinions on events way beyond their personal experience, just as it does not for mine,” writes Colonel Bateman, recently back from Iraq himself.

    The History Channel – The conjuring of the neo-truth!

    0

    The History Channel has produced a documentary titled 9/11 Conspiracies — Fact or Fiction. It aired on Monday, August 20, 2007. According to the abstract, the documentary examines the various conspiracy theories espoused on the Internet, in articles and in public forums that attempt to explain the 9/11 attacks. It includes theories that the World Trade Center was brought down by a controlled demolition; that a missile, not a commercial airliner, hit the Pentagon; and that members of the U.S. government orchestrated the attacks in hopes of creating a war in the Middle East. Each conspiracy argument is countered by a variety of experts in the fields of engineering, intelligence and the military. The program also delves into the anatomy of such conspiracies and how they grow on the Internet.  

    Even the abstract is a lie.

     

    The only honest conclusion that can be reached after watching this dishonest piece is that Hearst Publishing, Popular Mechanics, NBC, show producer Brad Davis, and the History Channel have conspired to produce what amounts to a shallow hit piece aimed at reassuring the dull and self-absorbed that there is indeed a terrorist under every bed and only the government and corporate media can be trusted to keep the people safe and informed. Not only did the History Channel distort the facts, it purposely went out of its way to depict the thinking people that question elements of the government / media cabal’s account of 9/11 in a less than favorable light — literally.

     

    According to Alex Jones and Paul Joseph Watson of Prison Planet, The debunkers’ interviews were pristinely shot and framed, with beautiful backdrops and highly sympathetic camera angles and filters, whereas the truthers were shot from bizarre positions, their images were deliberately distorted and even the color filter of the shot had been manipulated to make their appearance look tainted, blurred and contorted. This was an intentional ploy and a crude act of manipulation to detract credibility from the truthers and violates all known ethical standards of journalism.

     

    Debunkers is a term used to describe the Tories such as the James Meigs of Popular Mechanic and Truther is a term used to describe 50 percent of the U.S. population that have awakened from the 9/11 spell, wiped the propaganda from their eyes, and began to see again.

     

    So what can we that see do about a thing like the History Channel engaging in journalistic misconduct and spreading propaganda that aids and abets the cover-up of the crime of the century?

     

    The History Channel has its tentacles spread throughout our federal, state, and municipal governments, to include our local school boards, and the minds of our young via its educational arm www.historyeducation.com.

     

    It derives a good portion of its income through taxpayers’ money and our educational system. In its 2007 “Educator’s Catalog” topics such as American History, World History, Biography, Engineering & Technology, Science & Nature, Arts & Literature, Social Issues, and finally, Current Events are covered.

     

    If “The 9/11 Conspiracies: Fact or Fiction” gets listed in the next catalog it will be available to public schools — purchased with your tax dollars! It is currently for sale online for $24.95.

     

    A great way to hit back is to hit the History Channel in the pocketbook. Educators and advocates within the truth movement should appoint themselves child advocates and challenge the History Channel in court for inaccuracies in the classroom. A grassroots effort to prevent this 9/11 hit piece from being purchased by public schools should be launched. Furthermore, based on the proven record of misinformation, any future History Channel material should be required to be reviewed and approved by a similar court appointed panel before our public schools can access the information and present it to our impressionable schoolchildren.

    http://www.muckrakerreport.com/id495.html

    Labor Day Hypocrisy

    0

    By Stephen Lendman
    RINF Alternative News

    Labor Day is commemorated on the first Monday in September each year since the first one was celebrated in New York in 1882. Around the world outside the US, socialist and labor movements are observed on May 1 to recognize organized labor’s social and economic achievements and the workers in them. This day gets scant attention in the US, but where it’s prominent it’s commonly to remember the Haymarket Riot of May 4, 1886 in Chicago. It followed the city’s May 1 general strike for an eight hour day that led to violence breaking out on the 4th.

    Labor Day became a national federal holiday when Congress passed legislation for it in June, 1894 at a time working people had few rights, management had the upper hand, only wanted to exploit them for profit, and got away with it. It took many painful years of organizing, taking to the streets, going on strike, holding boycotts, battling police and National Guard forces, and paying with their blood and lives before real gains were won. They got an eight hour day, a living wage, on-the-job benefits and the pinnacle of labor’s triumph in the 1930s with the passage of the landmark Wagner Act establishing the National Labor Relations Board (NLRB). It guaranteed labor the right to bargain collectively on equal terms with management for the first time ever.

    All of it was won from the grassroots. Management gave nothing until forced to and neither did government. It always sides with business never yields a thing unless threatened with disruptive work stoppages or possible insurrection. All this is in a democracy that claims to be a government of the people, by the people and for the people, most of whom are ordinary working class ones.

    Since a worried Congress passed the 1935 Wagner Act during The Great Depression, the state of organized labor declined, especially post-WW II. It accelerated precipitously during the Reagan years under an administration openly hostile to worker rights in its one-side support for management. It continued unabated, under Republican and Democrat administrations, and today stands at a multi-generational low.

    Under George Bush conditions got much worse. Since coming into office in 2001, he sided with management openly on policies to strip workers of their right to organize and be able to bargain for a living wage and essential benefits. He hired anti-union officials, denied millions overtime pay, cut pay raises for 1.8 million federal workers claiming a “national emergency,” and schemed to end Social Security as we know it by plotting (unsuccessfully so far) to let Wall Street sharks take it over.

    Since labor’s ascendency decades earlier, corporate America, in league with government, shamelessly denigrated unions and the rights of working people in them. In 1958, 34.7% of the work force was unionized, but now the figure is around 12% overall, and only 7.4% in the private sector – the lowest it’s been in seven decades.

    Even worse, most jobs are low-pay service sector ones because the nation’s manufacturing base and many higher-paying positions in finance and technology have been offshored to low-wage developing nations. Workers there can be hired for a fraction of the pay scales here or as virtual serfs at below poverty wages as low as $2 a day or less and no benefits. They fill legions of sweatshop factory jobs in countries prohibiting unions and fair worker practice standards for Wal-Mart’s “Always low prices” on the backs of ruthlessly exploited working people.

    Nonetheless, on the first Monday each September, this nation “remembers” working Americans with a federally-mandated holiday in their “honor.” Who’s celebrating when it’s disingenuously commemorated at a time worker rights are threatened, ignored, forgotten, and uncared about by heartless governments beholden to capital. They scorn working people who are no longer as deceived with meaningless bread and circus droppings at the expense of what they need most: good jobs at good pay, essential benefits, job security, and a government on their side doing what counts most – supporting their rights with worker-friendly legislation.

    Workers are reminded every day that backing like that is off the table by governments shamelessly mocking their day. It’s commemorated in name only by a nation beholden to capital, the corporate giants controlling it, and the best democracy their money can buy for them alone.

    Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago and can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

    Also visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com and listen to The Steve Lendman News and Information Hour on TheMicroEffect.com Saturdays at noon US central time.

    The War on Working Americans – Part II

    0

    By Stephen Lendman
    RINF Alternative News

    This article was written to assess the state of working America in the run-up to Labor Day, 2007. Organized labor today is severely weakened following decades of government and business duplicity to crush it. Part I reviewed the labor movement’s rise in the 19th century and subsequent decline post-WW II and especially in the last three decades. Hope arose for some change in the Democrat-led 100th Congress. A weak effort emerged, but Senate Republicans killed it.

    Organized labor is struggling to remain relevant and claw its way back. The enormous obstacles it faces are reviewed below as well as the condition of working Americans today in a globalized world affecting their lives and welfare heading “south” in the “land of opportunity” offering pathetically little.

    The Loss of High-Paying Jobs from Outsourcing Under Globalized Market-Based Rules

    World trade isn’t new, and the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT) was its mid-20th century version after 23 founding nations signed it on October 30, 1947 in Geneva. Earlier in 1946, they drafted the International Trade Organization (ILO) that followed the creation of the IMF and International Bank for Reconstruction (now the World Bank) at Bretton Woods in 1944. Fifty-three nations then signed the GATT in Havana in March, 1948 as the founding international instrument governing world trade.

    Subsequent rounds of negotiations followed through number eight launched in Punta del Este, Uruguay (the Uruguay Round) in 1986. It was signed in Marrakesh, Morocco in April, 1994 by most of the 123 participating countries as the updated version of the original 1947 GATT. It was then succeeded by the WTO January 1, 1995, one year to the day after NAFTA took effect as another worker rights legislative weapon of mass job destruction. DR-CAFTA followed next for the Central American countries signing on to it after El Salvador did first in March, 2006.

    The WTO is well-seasoned with a corporate-friendly alphabet soup of Uruguay-negotiated agreements like the Agreement on Trade-Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Rights (TRIPS), General Agreement on Trade in Services (GATS), Agreement on Agriculture (AoA), Agreement on Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT), and others all designed for one purpose. It’s to override member states’ national sovereignty so they’re now governed under a uniform set of global market trading rules favoring capital.

    They’re designed for the Global North, giant corporations and the rich at the expense of Global South developing nations, ordinary people everywhere, concern for environmental standards as well as sanity and public safety. Along with the IMF, World Bank, and other international lending agencies, this entire structure is big capital’s neoliberal scheme to commoditize everything, including people and life itself in the human genome, to strip-mine the planet for profit.

    Globalized trade has a long history, but the notion of a globalized marketplace came into its own in the 1980s. It was hailed as a western, mainly US, prescription for economic growth and prosperity lifting all boats. In fact, only yachts benefitted by design so the privileged could gain at the expense of all others preyed on.

    The UN’s International Labour Organization’s (ILO) commission on the social dimensions of globalization is comprised of representatives from labor, government and business. In 2004, it issued a damning appraisal of world trade rules harm and the subsequent distress caused by unfair practices. It ranges from how TRIPS prevents affordable generic life-saving drugs being sold in developing countries to the shifting tax burden from business and the rich to workers, and much more.

    In the US and West, the damage comes from exporting jobs and offshoring manufacturing and service operations to low-wage countries. It began in the late 1950s when modest numbers of them went to Canada to take advantage of the cost savings there. The pace then quickened in the 1960s and 1970s with the exodus of production jobs in autos, shoes, clothing, cheap electronics, and toys as well as routine service work like credit card receipt processing, airline reservations and basic software code writing.

    What started as simple assembly and service work early on, then took off in the 1980s. It spread up and down the value chain and now embraces almost any type good or service not needing a home-based location such as retail clerks, plumbers, and carpenters; top-secret defense research, design and selected types of manufacturing; and certain types of specialized activities companies so far have kept at home. What’s moving abroad, however, is big business getting bigger with Gartner Research estimating outsourcing generated $298.5 billion in 2003 global revenues.

    The toll adds up to a global race to the bottom in a country where services now account for 84% of the economy. The once bedrock manufacturing portion is just 10% and falling as more good jobs in it are lost in an unending drain. Since the start of 2000 alone, about one in six factory jobs, over three million in total, have been affected. The sector is less than a third of its size 40 years ago and one-fourth the peak it hit during WW II.

    It’s been devastating for the nation’s 130 million working people. No longer are unions strong and workers well-paid with assured good benefits like full health insurance coverage and pensions. Today, all types of financial services comprise the largest economic sector. Much of it is in trillions of dollars of high stakes speculation annually producing wads of cash for elite insiders (when things go as planned) and nothing for the welfare of most others and the good of the country.

    Worst of all is the poor and declining quality of most service sector jobs measured by wages, benefits, job security and overall working conditions. It’s because fewer good ones exist, unions are weak, and workers are at the mercy of employers indifferent to their plight. People are forced to work longer and harder for less just to stay even. Jobs in this sector are mostly concentrated in unskilled or low-skill areas of retail, health care and temporary services of all kinds. They pay lots less than full-time jobs, and have few or no benefits and little prospect for future improvement. This all happened by design to crush worker rights and commoditize them like all other production inputs.

    The Department of Labor now projects job categories with the greatest future expected growth are cashiers; waiters and waitresses; other restaurant-related workers; janitors and cleaning personnel; retail clerks; and child care workers – all low-skill areas. Harvard degrees aren’t required. Neither are high school ones.

    Most in-demand higher-skilled jobs are projected to be for nurses, post-secondary teachers and sales representatives. There are still plenty of high-tech jobs in areas like network systems and data analysis and software engineering applications and systems. But watch out. They’re being lost as well to low-wage countries in an unending domestic job drain affecting all types of work able to be done anywhere. It shows why domestic job growth is stagnant (despite the hype it isn’t), eligible workers are dropping out of the work force, and the decline is sure to continue unless legislation stops it. None is in sight or imagined.

    The loss of good well-paying jobs means fewer high-end and a range of low-skilled ones are all that remain for vast numbers of young people whose future looks bleak. Two research studies among others highlight the problem. One by University of California staffers in 2004 estimated up to 14 million American jobs are at risk to outsourcing, and another by Gartner Research predicts as many as 30% of high-tech jobs may be lost to low-wage countries by 2015. In addition, writing in the March/April, 2006 issue of Foreign Affairs on what he calls a “third Industrial Revolution,” former Federal Reserve vice-chairman Alan Blinder estimated 28 – 42 million American service sector jobs are vulnerable and could be lost to foreign labor.

    In low-wage countries, they’re done at far less cost to US employers in their company-owned or subcontracted out operations. Blinder added starkly “We have so far barely seen the tip of the offshoring iceberg, the eventual dimensions of which may be staggering.” Veteran financial analyst and writer Bob Chapman calls this the “rape of our economy” with enormous, wrenching and destructive consequences to the lives of millions of working people pursuing an illusory American dream.

    It affects the skilled and unskilled alike for all types of jobs at risk. Chapman cites India as an example noting once only low-skill and routine programming jobs went there. Now, he says, it’s “software aeronautical engineers, banking, insurance, investment banking and drug research” along with many other high-end jobs where companies can hire skilled professionals at a fifth the cost of US and European ones. So why wouldn’t they, and more are in a growing trend.

    All types of financial jobs at all levels are also being eliminated with financial institutions moving sizeable chunks of investment banking, research, trading operations, and other professional jobs abroad for big cost savings. Deloitte Touche estimates the industry will outsource 20% of its cost base by 2010 with more to come in a continuing job drain for big cost savings abroad. The ones lost will be in financial services and most other sectors in a trend looking like it won’t end until the US is as low a wage nation as those now taking our jobs.

    An Unprecedented Fall in Workers’ Standard of Living

    Over the past 30 years, most people have seen an unprecedented fall in their standard of living. Adjusted for inflation, the average American worker now earns less than in the mid-1970s with the minimum wage unchanged at $5.15 an hour since 1997 until the 110th Congress raised it in pathetically small steps to a wholly inadequate top level. Beginning July 24, it rose to $5.85, will go to $6.55 July 24, 2008 and to $7.25 July 24, 2009. Until the increase, minimum worker pay was at the lowest point relative to average wages since 1949. It got many states, comprising over half the population, to raise their own, but it’s not enough.

    A recent study released by the Center for Economic Policy Research (CEPR) shows the dire state of things. It reported about one in three jobs in the country, about 47 million of them, pay low wages (defined as two-thirds the median wage or $11.11 per hour or less) with few or no benefits like health insurance, pensions or retirement accounts. It’s barely enough for a family of two adults and two children to exceed the official understated poverty level of $20,444 in 2006 (or $9.83 an hour), and by this definition one in four workers (35 million) only earned poverty-level wages. But millions of others fall below it because official statistics way understate the problem, and workers earning around $11.11 an hour in cities like New York, Chicago, Los Angeles and other large ones can’t get by if they have to support a family on it.

    These growing millions now comprise a permanent underclass in a nation unwilling to admit what census data and private research now show. America is a rigid class society by design with extreme wealth at the top, a declining (maybe dying) middle class, and a growing underclass of low-paid workers and poor, many desperately so.

    Following the inequalities of the 1920s, the nation experienced what economic historians Claudia Goldin and Robert Margo called “the Great Compression.” Income gaps narrowed from the positive effects of New Deal and Great Society programs, strong unions, and an equitable tax system for individuals and corporations. From then to now, call it “the Great Expansion” of inequality with the gap between rich and most others the greatest it’s been since the Gilded Age of the “robber barons” and getting worse.

    Business Week magazine highlighted the trend in December, 2003 and accompanying research. It showed a decline in social mobility over the past few decades. The article was called “Waking Up from the American Dream – Meritocracy and Equal Opportunity Are Fading Fast.” It noted the “Wal-Martization” of the country corporate America embraces to control labor costs by outsourcing jobs, de-unionizing, hiring temps and part-timers, and dismantling internal career ladders to boost profits at the expense of people. What’s left is a proliferation of dead-end, low-wage jobs with public policy skewed to keep it that way. It needs stressing again. This didn’t happen by chance. It was by design to destroy organized labor, and so far it’s working.

    In its most recent State of Working America – 2006/2007, the Economic Policy Institute (EPI) reports the official poverty level in 2004 stood at 12.7% or 37 million people, including 13 million children. It also showed for the first time ever, poverty in the country grew in the first three years of an economic recovery. In its study, EPI cited factors today they call “historically unique:”

    — increased globalized trade;

    — low union membership;

    — more low-skilled and high-skilled immigration; and

    — fewer favorable social norms guiding employer behavior to provide “adequate safety nets, pensions, and health care arrangements.”

    EPI noted the biggest challenge in today’s “new economy” isn’t (macro) growth but how benefits get distributed with such a high proportion skewed upward.

    Left out entirely are the 16 million 2005 census figures show are on the very bottom living in “extreme” poverty that’s defined as a family of four with an annual income of $9903 or less. Even more disturbing is how fast the poverty rate is increasing. The numbers of those worst off grew by 26% from 2000 – 2005 or 56% faster than for the total poverty population. Further, it happened mostly in years of economic expansion after the 2001 recession ended late that year. Notable also is the disturbing decline in higher-paying jobs leaving what’s left for unskilled or low-skill workers. They pay pitiful wages and few, if any, benefits with crumbling social safety net protection left to pick up the slack.

    The Oakland Institute policy think tank promotes social and economic justice. It recently reported its disturbing assessment of things saying 10% of the US population (around 30 million) “experiences hunger or is at risk of going hungry.” A December, 2006 Helsinki-based World Institute for Development Economics Research of the UN University study also reported disturbing findings. They showed the richest 1% of adults owned 40% of global assets in 2000, and the richest 10% held 85% of them.

    EPI reported the top 1% controls more than one-third of America’s wealth, the bottom 80% has 15.3%, and the top 20% holds 84.7% of it. In contrast, the poorest 20% are in debt and owe more than they own. Globalization, automation, outsourcing, the shift from manufacturing to services, weak unions, deregulation, and other harmful economic factors all add to the problem.

    Other data show an astonishing generational shift of well over $1 trillion of national wealth annually from 90 million US working class households to for-profit corporations and the richest 1% of the population. It created what economist Paul Krugman calls an unprecedented wealth disparity getting worse that shames the nation and is destroying the bedrock middle class without which democracy can’t survive.

    A similar conclusion also came from an analysis of income tax data by Professor Emmanuel Saez of the University of California-Berkeley and Professor Thomas Piketty of the Paris School of Economics. Both men are noted for their work on income inequality. Their research found the top 1% of Americans in 2005 (about 3 million people) got their largest share of national income since 1928 – 21.8%, up from 19.8% a year ago or a 10% gain. Further, the top 10% received 48.5% of all reported income in 2005, also the highest level since 1928, up 2% from 2004, and one-third since the late 1970s.

    The top one-tenth of 1% (about 300,000 people) did best of all, to no surprise. It got as much income in total as the bottom 150 million Americans combined. In addition, while total reported income rose almost 9% in 2005, average incomes for the bottom 90% of the population dropped .6% from the previous year.

    Further, the Bush administration tax cuts for the wealthy greatly widened the income gap between rich and poor that was the whole idea behind them with a healthy piece of the benefits going to big corporations. In the 1950s, they contributed an average of 28% to federal revenues. That dropped to 21% in the 1960s and about 10% and falling since the 1980s. It’s happening with the corporate tax rate at 35%, but few of the giants pay it. According to the Government Accountability Office (GAO), 94% of major corporations now pay less than 5% of their income in taxes, and corporate tax payments overall are at their lowest level in 60 years. In addition, many large companies pay no tax, and some end up with sizable rebates on top of huge corporate welfare subsidies under a system of socialism for big corporations and the rich and “free market” capitalism for the rest of us.

    Saez and Piketty also reported their findings may be understated because the wealthy are more likely to file late tax returns so those who did weren’t included in the study. Also, the IRS acknowledges it can account for only about 70% of business and investment income, most, of course, going to high-income earners. What’s missing is $300 – $400 billion a year that adds up to trillions of untaxed dollars for the rich with the rest of us having to make up for it.

    Recent US Commerce Department data is also disturbing. It shows the share of national income going to wages and salaries the lowest on record with their data going back to 1929. And the Center on Budget and Policy Priorities (CBPP) finds wage and salary growth in the current recovery growing at half the average rate for post-recessionary periods since the end of WW II while corporate profits in the current period grew over 50% more than the post-WW II average. It’s the first time on record, corporate profits got a larger share of income growth in a recovery than wages and salaries – 46% to 34%.

    The Growth and Shredding of Social Services in America

    The golden age of social service benefits and worker protections emerged during The Great Depression, but they didn’t begin then. An obligation was felt to help the needy as early as colonial times but without an organized effort to do it. Back then, local towns and villages did it through the poor relief system and almshouses. That began changing as the nation became less agrarian and more industrial when a number of states added services like cash allowances, mothers’ pensions and by the mid-1920s old age assistance for the blind. Also, then and earlier, the Federal government and States began recognizing the need for public welfare social insurance financed through contributions guaranteeing protection for all rather than public assistance for the needy alone.

    The first instance of it began in 1908 with a Federal workers’ compensation law covering some government workers. States then added their own, and by 1929 all of them had it except four holdouts. Other efforts followed including State and local retirement plans and Federal benefits and services for veterans. Even the private sector added their own with token amounts of health care, pensions, life insurance and sick pay.

    The Great Depression hard times of the 1930s changed everything creating a golden age for worker rights and benefits mentioned above. It followed the roaring 1920s era of anything goes corporate greed and loose regulation. It ushered in the Roosevelt administration’s New Deal to aid the needy and reform the economy when 25% of the working public had no job in 1933. Those in power feared the worst knowing they had to act to save capitalism at a time of mass hostility to it they feared might erupt in a Russian-style 1917 revolution.

    They did it then like never before or since starting by passing the National Industrial Recovery Act in 1933. It was based on a “bubble up” theory of recovery to raise wages and thereby stimulate consumer purchasing power hoping it would lead to increased production and new investment. Despite good intentions, things go as planned. The Depression dragged on until the 1939 early WW II build-up began ending it. It packed greater economic punch than in earlier public sector spending. Those efforts were less for reform and more for what John Maynard Keynes recommended – upgrading infrastructure to revive durable goods production that, in turn, would revive the economy.

    Still New Deal policies were remarkable in how mirror opposite they were to what’s been enacted since 1980 and especially in the gilded age of George Bush. There were stimulative loans and grants to the States and landmark measures like the FDIC insuring bank deposits, the SEC regulating financial markets, and the NLRB through the Wagner Act explained above. Most important was a broad array of social programs. They included Federal emergency relief, public works and others under an alphabet soup of initiatives. They were way inadequate, but, nonetheless, tried to jump-start a moribund economy by providing substantial work and relief for the unemployed and needy.

    The high water mark came in 1935 with the passage of the landmark Social Security Act. To this day, it’s still the single most important piece of social legislation in our history. More than any other government program, it’s the one most responsible for keeping vast numbers of elderly people out of poverty as well as providing other essential services and benefits for the needy and disabled. Other important social legislation came out as well including Unemployment Insurance with the Federal government partnered with States; the Railroad Retirement System; Public Housing; and Social Security Old-Age and Survivors Insurance.

    Post-WW II there was lots more:

    — the National School Lunch Program (established in 1946);

    — Aid to the Permanently and Totally Disabled (APTD – in 1950) that later became Supplemental Security Income (SSI) in 1972;

    — Social Security Disability Insurance (SSDI);

    — Medical Assistance for the Aged (preceding Medicare);

    — Aid to Families with Dependent Children (AFDC – 1960);

    –the Food Stamp Program (1964);

    — the School Breakfast Program (1966);

    — the WIC food assistance program (1972);

    — Earned Income Tax Credit (EITC – 1975);

    — Low Income Home Energy Assistance; and

    — Temporary Assistance for Needy Families (TANF – 1997 successor to AFDC that was a huge step backwards explained below), among others.

    Lyndon Johnson’s Great Society earlier saw other landmark social legislation with the establishment of Medicare and Medicaid in 1965. It guaranteed the elderly and indigent health care coverage at affordable, minimal or no cost when they needed it most.

    That was the good news, but it changed with the election of Ronald Reagan in 1980. Mark Weisbrot from the Center for Economic and Policy Research (CEPR) called his administration’s rollback of social services his “project of building a bridge to the 19th century in areas of social policy.” It was that and more, but despite it, the dominant media shamelessly exalted him in life (see Mark Hertsgaard 1989 book “On Bended Knee: The Press and the Reagan Presidency”) and practically deified him following his death on June 4, 2004. Left out of the eulogies was the true scorched earth legacy he left behind. His “war on international terrorism” was a devastating precursor to its updated version under the current administration. This article, however, only addresses his domestic damage on people least able to handle it.

    The Reagan administration instituted a generational decline of worker rights and vital social programs. It allowed them to erode through higher payroll taxes, raising the retirement age, increasing Medicare premiums, and cutting Medicaid benefits for the poor. His years were characterized by large increases in military spending, big tax cuts for the rich and big business while slashing social benefits, union worker rights and running up huge deficits.

    Discretionary domestic spending for most social programs, other than Social Security, Medicare and Medicaid, was cut by one-third from 1981 – 1988. Programs for low income earners were hard hit with a 54% cut. Subsidized housing lost over 80%, housing assistance for the elderly 47%, and training and employment services over 68%. Reagan also reduced health and safety protections and weakened federal statutes guaranteeing workers the right to organize and bargain collectively.

    Beneath his avuncular persona, Reagan was callous and indifferent to notions of equal justice, civil liberties and human need. He showed it in his support for the Christian Right’s hate campaign against gays and lesbians in its early days of ascendency by refusing to address the AIDS problem he allowed to become a global epidemic.

    HIV/AIDS first surfaced in the US among gay men in New York and California in 1981, Reagan’s first year in office. It was called a “gay disease”, and still is largely today by those who demean it. Most notably, extremist Christian Right leaders call it God’s revenge against gay people they say are diseased sinners. When the Centers for Disease Control first reported the outbreak they, too, stigmatized the gay community as disease-carriers calling it GRID – gay-related immune deficiency.

    Ronald Reagan went along with this notion refusing even to mention AIDS or do anything to address the problem in the first seven years in office. It caused enormous setbacks for HIV/AIDS research and appalling discrimination against the infected and gay community overall. In addition, there were no government-directed efforts at prevention or education. It thereby allowed a health problem that might have been contained to become an epidemic killing a half million people in the US alone and infecting an estimated one million others now living with the disease.

    Worldwide the numbers are catastrophic with an estimated 25 million deaths and another 34 – 47 million people currently infected. In addition, millions more are added to the numbers each year who might have been helped if the Reagan administration had led a worldwide effort to contain what’s now an out-of-control plague in parts of the world like sub-Saharan Africa. None of this was mentioned in Reagan’s eulogy that should have been a denunciation for this and his other crimes against humanity George Bush is now doing his best to match or exceed.

    The GHW Bush years followed the “Reagan Revolution.” They were pathetically “kinder and gentler” domestically and made worse by a “new world order” imperial agenda harming working people everywhere that’s standard practice now under all Presidents. It was the same under Bill Clinton who called himself a Democrat but never governed like one. His tenure included NAFTA and WTO responsible for mass and growing poverty, human misery and ecological destruction under one-way globalized trade rules providing cover for predatory capitalism.

    So-called “welfare reform” in the Personal Responsibility and Work Opportunity Reconciliation Act of 1996 (PRWORA) also was passed. Before it did, the needy got welfare payments through Aid to Families with Dependent Children or AFDC help. That changed in 1996 with time limits set so no one would be helped for more than five years under the new program called Temporary Assistance for Needy Families or TANF. Under it, the Federal government allots fixed block grants to the States they then administer at their discretion meaning the needy now get cheated by an uncaring state.

    TANF also requires most recipients to participate in some kind of work or training to qualify for help. It doesn’t matter that much of it goes to single mothers with young children needing them at home to provide care unavailable if the law prevents it. There’s also no relief during recessions when jobs are lost and unskilled workers are least able to find one.

    Clinton’s main social initiative was his ill-conceived health care “reform.” It was a complex mess based on the notion of “managed competition” and marketplace medicine instead of what’s really needed in the form of a “single-payer” national health insurance program modeled on the kind in Western Europe, Canada or that all members of Congress and the administration get. They cover everyone, irrespective of ability to pay, and for US legislators and the executive it’s gold-plated for life.

    The Clinton plan (dubbed “Hillarycare”) offered the public less choice for more affordability but wanted big insurers and HMOs to run it guaranteeing an illusion of full coverage the way it is now. Profits always trump need with insurers targeting young and healthy prospects while avoiding those posing the greatest risks.

    The pace of social spending cuts accelerated dramatically under George Bush who’d eliminate them all given the choice, and he’s working on it. He’s against all of them to fund more tax cuts for the rich and provide multi-billions for his permanent state of war plus every imaginable weapon system the Pentagon and defense contractors want to wage them.

    Bush’s assault on organized labor was covered above, but he has lots more targets as well. Education is one of them in his appalling No Child Left Behind Act. It focuses on testing, not children. It’s a boon to corporations supplying the materials but not to teachers who hate them. It forces them to teach “to the test” instead of educating students in course material that’s the only way to run a classroom. Otherwise, kids don’t learn, but that’s part of the scheme as what kind of future do all but the well-off have to look forward to.

    The Bush education agenda also promotes school vouchers disguising a broader goal to privatize public education and aid the white supremacist parochial part of it. Christian Right zealots support these schools because of their brand of hard right extremism dangerous to everyone outside the faithful. In most areas where vouchers are used, 80% of them are for these type schools. They renounce proved science like evolution and teach creationism instead, repackaged as “intelligent design.”

    They also preach an extremist Christian doctrine waging war on truth and democratic principles of a free and open society. They replace it with faith-based pseudoscience on everything from creation to HIV/AIDS to pregnancy prevention to global warming to militarism, and all the while denounce non-believers as heretics. These schools also threaten the survival of public education. They divert funding from them and violate the constitutional separation of church and state which is why the Bush administration supports them.

    His administration also opposes college aid at a time tuitions and fees are more unaffordable than ever and rising much faster than inflation. An undergraduate year at Harvard now costs over $50,000 with all expenses included, but even lower-tuition state schools aren’t affordable for many with the University of Illinois typical of most others. It’s much cheaper than Harvard but still costs about $26,000 a year “base rate” that’s unaffordable for low-income families without considerable financial aid. George Bush’s solution – cut or freeze maximum allowable Pell Grants so even holding them steady means amounts offered don’t keep up with rising costs and needy students lose out.

    Bush’s prescription for health care is no better at a time 47 million have no coverage, millions more are underinsured, and 80 million in the country have no coverage at some time during the year meaning they need to be judicious about when they’re sick. Administration solutions are pathetic at best showing no intent to tackle a problem this huge. Suggested tax breaks are so inadequate, families with annual incomes under $10,000 would only save $23 in 2007. Those with higher incomes fare little better with the Bush plan only covering 9 million uninsured leaving 38 million others (and rising) with no help.

    Then there’s Bush’s 2003 Kafkaesque Medicare Prescription Drug, Improvement, and Modernization Act (MMA) scamming seniors. It took strong-arming threats and bribes in an all-night congressional session to get it passed. Its controversial Part D costs tens of billions annually, does little for most Medicare recipients, but provides huge benefits for “Big Pharma.” It’s able to charge top dollar because the administration won’t negotiate lower prices the way the Veteran’s Administration (VA) does getting big savings on all drugs it buys so veterans today only pay $8 a prescription. Two decades ago, they paid nothing.

    More social wreckage gets into each new FY budget with billions of new cuts heaped on past ones. It’s to free up more funds for the military, the rich, and corporate allies with the White House now audaciously proposing a further cut in corporate tax rates. It’s part of a near-three decade agenda furthering the interests of the privileged at the expense of all others. In America today, social welfare and the greater good are nonstarters.

    Earlier damage included –

    — killing OSHA workplace ergonomic rules more than 10 years in the making;

    — revoking grants to study workplace safety and health;

    — cutting funding for job training; and

    — more cuts for enforcement positions at OSHA and the Mine Safety and Health Administration that was a key reason for the early 2006 Sago and Alma mine deaths in West Virginia, the latest tragedy in Utah (not earthquake caused), and the death of 60 miners and counting since January, 2006.

    — Bush also proposed paying welfare recipients below-minimum wages;

    — denying Homeland Security employees protection for being a whisleblower;

    — blocking release of funds to monitor Ground Zero;

    — ignoring New York rescue workers’ health;

    — cutting health care benefits for veterans and billions more cuts for Medicare and Medicaid;

    — raising interest rates on student college loans;

    — cutting the number of WIC-eligible participants;

    — reducing the number of adults eligible for food stamps and children qualifying for school meals;

    — cutting the Commodity Supplemental Food Program, child care, Head Start, affordable housing units for the elderly, home energy assistance (LIHEAP), Employment/Training Services, and education for the disadvantaged; and

    — stiffening work requirements for two million adults (mostly single mothers) on welfare.

    His administration is also at fault for the Walter Reed Hospital scandal because medical facilities for military personnel and veterans across the country are understaffed, underfunded and allowed to deteriorate under federal or private contractor management. The result is inadequate or sub-standard care for the severest of problems, and the worst is yet to come with tens of billions of new planned cuts through FY 2011. Only Bush’s plummeting approval rating may slow him down. But it doesn’t stop his war machine from getting all the funds it wants and lots more for the asking in supplemental add-ons.

    Looking Ahead – Tough Choices with No Easy Answers

    The state of working America today is bleak with few signs of improving in a globalized world of corporate omnipotence and an indifferent to hostile government. It backs the rights of the privileged while scorning the social welfare needs of all others. Somehow, some way this must change, but wishing only works if backed by effective action. A look back suggests how.

    Past labor successes were noted above. What worked before can again, and there’s nothing complicated about it. Above all, new leaders are needed because too many today are uninspiring at best. They must be committed and dedicated to the rights and needs of ordinary working people and be willing to go to the wall for them. Effective mass organizing is needed to build unity and strength of numbers, educate workers on what they lost, and lead the fight to win them back. It means taking to the streets, storming the halls of Congress, going on strikes, holding boycotts, doing battle when necessary that in the past meant paying for it in blood and lives.

    It worked when it won an eight hour day, a living wage keeping pace with inflation, essential benefits like health care coverage and pensions, and a more level playing field guaranteeing labor the right to bargain collectively on equal terms with management. Those gains weren’t handed over because change never comes from the top down. They were fought for and won with lots of blood and sweat expended to get them. Why not again?

    It’s called democracy, equity and justice and one thing about them is clear. Achieving and keeping them requires a strong middle class of ordinary working people that, in turn, needs a vibrant labor movement as a foundation and springboard for progressive grassroots social change. Organized labor is in tatters today at barely over 7% of private sector workers (a 100 year low). It’s on life support, needs a survival strategy, and is heading for the dustbin of history only major change can avoid. The way is through organized people out-muscling organized money. It happened before and can again.

    This is the great class struggle of our time against long odds for success. The stakes though are huge, and our future as a democratic society depends on the outcome as former US Supreme Court Justice Louis Brandeis explained in 1941 when he said “We can (either) have a democratic society or we can have great concentrated wealth in the hands of the few. We cannot have both.” The concentration is greater than ever at a time American workers are in their weakest position in decades.

    Bowed but not broken, they’re in a war for survival with the rest of us, and their sovereign worker rights and ours in a free society are at stake. It’s no time for timidity. It’s a time for unity and pressing ahead. It happened once. Why not again, and the time to go for it is now with the rest of us pitching in to help for our own preservation and survival.

    Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago and can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

    Also visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com and listen to The Steve Lendman News and Information Hour on The MicroEffect.com Saturdays at noon US central time.

    High Tech Helpers or Big Brother Surveillance Tools?

    4

    CityWatcher.com, a provider of surveillance equipment, attracted little notice itself – until a year ago, when two of its employees had glass-encapsulated microchips with miniature antennas embedded in their forearms.

    The “chipping” of two workers with RFIDs – radio frequency identification tags as long as two grains of rice, as thick as a toothpick – was merely a way of restricting access to vaults that held sensitive data and images for police departments, a layer of security beyond key cards and clearance codes, the company said.

    “ To protect high-end secure data, you use more sophisticated techniques,” Sean Darks, chief executive of the Cincinnati-based company, said. He compared chip implants to retina scans or fingerprinting. “There’s a reader outside the door; you walk up to the reader, put your arm under it, and it opens the door.”

    Innocuous? Maybe.

    But the news that Americans had, for the first time, been injected with electronic identifiers to perform their jobs fired up a debate over the proliferation of ever-more-precise tracking technologies and their ability to erode privacy in the digital age.

    To some, the microchip was a wondrous invention – a high-tech helper that could increase security at nuclear plants and military bases, help authorities identify wandering Alzheimer’s patients, allow consumers to buy their groceries, literally, with the wave of a chipped hand.

    To others, the notion of tagging people was Orwellian, a departure from centuries of history and tradition in which people had the right to go and do as they pleased without being tracked, unless they were harming someone else.

    Chipping, these critics said, might start with Alzheimer’s patients or Army Rangers, but would eventually be suggested for convicts, then parolees, then sex offenders, then illegal aliens – until one day, a majority of Americans, falling into one category or another, would find themselves electronically tagged.

    Thirty years ago, the first electronic tags were fixed to the ears of cattle, to permit ranchers to track a herd’s reproductive and eating habits. In the 1990s, millions of chips were implanted in livestock, fish, pets, even racehorses.

    Microchips are now fixed to car windshields as toll-paying devices, on “contactless” payment cards (Chase’s “Blink,” or MasterCard’s “PayPass”). They’re embedded in Michelin tires, library books, passports and, unbeknownst to many consumers, on a host of individual items at Wal-Mart and Best Buy.

    But CityWatcher.com employees weren’t appliances or pets: They were people, made scannable.

    “ It was scary that a government contractor that specialized in putting surveillance cameras on city streets was the first to incorporate this technology in the workplace,” says Liz McIntyre, co-author of “Spychips: How Major Corporations and Government Plan to Track Your Every Move with RFID.”

    Darks, the CityWatcher.com executive, said his employees volunteered to be chipped. “You would think that we were going around putting chips in people by force,” he told a reporter, “and that’s not the case at all.”
    Yet, within days of the company’s announcement, civil libertarians and Christian conservatives joined to excoriate the microchip’s implantation in people.

    “ Ultimately,” says Katherine Albrecht, a privacy advocate who specializes in consumer education and RFID technology, “the fear is that the government or your employer might someday say, ‘Take a chip or starve.’”

    Some critics saw the implants as the fulfillment of a biblical prophecy that describes an age of evil in which humans are forced to take the “Mark of the Beast” on their bodies, to buy or sell anything. Others saw it as a big step toward the creation of a Big-Brother society.

    “ We’re really on the verge of creating a surveillance society in America, where every movement, every action – some would even claim, our very thoughts – will be tracked, monitored, recorded and correlated,” says Barry Steinhardt, director of the Technology and Liberty Program at the American Civil Liberties Union in Washington, D.C.

    In design, the tag is simple: A medical-grade glass capsule holds a silicon computer chip, a copper antenna and a “capacitor” that transmits data stored on the chip when prompted by an electromagnetic reader.

    Implantations are quick, relatively simple procedures. After a local anesthetic is administered, a large-gauge, hypodermic needle injects the chip under the skin on the back of the arm, midway between the elbow and the shoulder.

    John Halamka, an emergency physician at Beth Israel Deaconess Medical Center in Boston got chipped two years ago, “so that if I was ever in an accident, and arrived unconscious or incoherent at an emergency ward, doctors would identify me and access my medical history quickly.” (A chipped person’s medical profile can be continuously updated, since the information is stored on a database accessed via the Internet.)

    But it’s also clear to Halamka that there are consequences to having an implanted identifier. “My friends have commented to me that I’m ‘marked’ for life, that I’ve lost my anonymity. And to be honest, I think they’re right.”

    Indeed, as microchip proponents and detractors readily agree, Americans’ mistrust of microchips and technologies like RFID runs deep. Many wonder:

    Do the current chips have global positioning transceivers that would allow the government to pinpoint a person’s exact location, 24-7? (No; the technology doesn’t yet exist).

    But could a tech-savvy stalker rig scanners to video cameras and film somebody each time they entered or left the house? (Quite easily, though not cheaply. Currently, readers cost $300 and up.)

    What’s the average lifespan of a microchip? (About 10-15 years.) What if you get tired of it before then – can it be easily, painlessly removed? (Short answer: No.)

    How about thieves? Could they make their own readers, aim them at unsuspecting individuals, and surreptitiously pluck people’s IDs out of their arms? (Yes. There’s even a name for it – “spoofing.”)

    The company that makes implantable microchips for humans, VeriChip Corp., of Delray Beach, FL, concedes that’s a problem – even as it markets its radio tag and its portal scanner as imperatives for high-security buildings, such as nuclear power plants.

    “ To grab information from radio frequency products with a scanning device is not hard to do,” Scott Silverman, the company’s chief executive, says. However, “the chip itself only contains a unique, 16-digit identification number. The relevant information is stored on a database.”

    VeriChip Corp., whose parent company has been selling radio tags for animals for more than a decade, has sold 7,000 microchips worldwide, of which about 2,000 have been implanted in humans.

    The company’s present push: tagging of “high-risk” patients – diabetics and people with heart conditions or Alzheimer’s disease.

    In an emergency, hospital staff could wave a reader over a patient’s arm, get an ID number, and then, via the Internet, enter a company database and pull up the person’s identity and medical history.

    To doctors, a “starter kit” – complete with 10 hypodermic syringes, 10 VeriChips and a reader – costs $1,400. To patients, a microchip implant means a $200, out-of-pocket expense to their physician. Presently, chip implants aren’t covered by insurance companies, Medicare or Medicaid.

    For almost two years, the company has been offering hospitals free scanners, but acceptance has been limited. According to the company, 515 hospitals have pledged to take part in the VeriMed network, yet only 100 have actually been equipped and trained to use the system.

    Some wonder why they should abandon noninvasive tags such as MedicAlert, a low-tech bracelet that warns paramedics if patients have serious allergies or a chronic medical condition.

    “ Having these things under your skin instead of in your back pocket – it’s just not clear to me why it’s worth the inconvenience,” says Westhues.

    Silverman responds that an implanted chip is “guaranteed to be with you. It’s not a medical arm bracelet that you can take off if you don’t like the way it looks…”

    In fact, microchips can be removed from the body – but it’s not like removing a splinter.

    The capsules can migrate around the body or bury themselves deep in the arm. When that happens, a sensor X-ray and monitors are needed to locate the chip, and a plastic surgeon must cut away scar tissue that forms around the chip.

    The relative permanence is a big reason why Marc Rotenberg, of the Electronic Privacy Information Center, is suspicious about the motives of the company, which charges $20 a year for customers to keep on its database a record of blood type, allergies, medications, driver’s license data and living-will directives. For $80 a year, it will keep an individual’s full medical history.

    http://www.chiefengineer.org/content/content_display.cfm/seqnumber_content/3104.htm

    British army chief attacks US as ‘intellectually bankrupt’ over Iraq

    0

    Peter Richards
    Saturday September 1, 2007
    The Guardian

    The former head of the British Army has attacked US postwar policy, calling it “intellectually bankrupt”.General Sir Mike Jackson, who headed the army during the war in Iraq, described as “nonsensical” the claim by the former US Defence Secretary Donald Rumsfeld that US forces “don’t do nation-building”. He has also hit back at suggestions that British forces had failed in Basra.

    Mr Rumsfeld was “one of the most responsible for the current situation in Iraq,” Gen Jackson says in his autobiography, Soldier. He describes Washington’s approach to fighting global terrorism as “inadequate” for relying on military power over diplomacy and nation-building.

    Last week General Jack Keane, a US commander just returned from Iraq, said the security situation in southern Iraq was “deteriorating” and there was “general disengagement” by the British military in Basra. But Gen Jackson told the Daily Telegraph, which is serialising his book: “I don’t think that’s a fair assessment.

    “What has happened in the south, as in the rest of Iraq, was that primary responsibility for security would be handed to the Iraqis once the Iraqi authorities and the coalition were satisfied their training and development was appropriate.

    “In the south we had responsibility for four provinces. Three of these have been handed over in accordance with that strategy.”

    He is also critical of the decision to hand control of planning the administration of Iraq to the Pentagon, and said disbanding the Iraqi army and security forces had been “very short-sighted”.

    The Pentagon said divergent views were a “hallmark of open, democratic societies”.

    War and the ‘New World Order’

    1

    By Mahdi Darius Nazemroaya

    “We are now at the year 1908, which was the year that the Carnegie Foundation began operations. And, in that year, the trustees meeting, for the first time, raised a specific question, which they discussed throughout the balance of the year, in a very learned fashion. And the question is this: Is there any means known more effective than war, assuming you wish to alter the life of an entire people? And they conclude that, no more effective means to that end is known to humanity, than war. So then, in 1909, they raise the second question, and discuss it, namely, how do we involve the United States in a war?”

    -Norman Dobbs, U.S. Congressional Special Committee for the Investigate of Tax-Exempt Foundations (1982)

    War is the ultimate means of attempting to change societies and reshape nations. It is through war that national economies and political structures can be forcibly restructured. War is, potentially, the ultimate economic shock therapy. The wars in the Middle East are stepping stones towards establishing a vision of global order that has been in the hearts and minds of the Anglo-American establishment for years. That vision is global ascendancy.

    Towards the “New International Order” through the “Global War on Terror”

    “There is a chance for the President of the United States [George W. Bush Jr.] to use this disaster [meaning the attacks of September 11, 2001] to carry out what his father…a phrase his father [George H. Bush Sr.] used I think only once, and it hasn’t been used since … and that is a new world order. Think about this. We already have the support of NATO in a remarkable historic departure.”

    -Gary Hart, National Security in the 21st Century: Findings of the Hart-Rudman Commission (September 14, 2007)

    On January 18, 2005 Henry Kissinger appeared on Charlie Rose, a television program on PBS, and talked about a “New International Order” being created by George W. Bush Jr. and his administration. [1] Henry Kissinger stated that within the next few years that humanity will see the emergence of the beginning of a “New International Order.” Kissinger also stated that the Bush Jr. Administration could bring about this state; “and it could well be this president, [meaning President Bush Jr.] that is so reviled by intellectuals, will emerge as one of the seminal presidents of…of this…of this period…of American modern history.” [2]

    When asked what George W. Bush Jr. has to do to bring about this “New International Order” by his interviewer Kissinger paused and gave a vague answer that avoided mentioning the criminality of war. “He has to do some certain things and he has to have some luck,” Kissinger answered followed by “Luck is the residue of design.” [3] It should be noted that if luck is a residue of design then it is no longer chance, but a calculation of intent.

    Briefly the role of the American public was talked about by Charlie Rose with Kissinger who paused to pick his words carefully. Kissinger told his interviewer, Rose, that the United States is a nation whose public has no clue about American foreign policy. [4] In regards to the American public, the war agenda cannot move forward if the U.S. maintains its multi-cultural characteristics. It was this multi-cultural characteristic that initially presented the U.S. a problem in declaring war on Germany in both World Wars until the sinking of the RMS Lusitania and the Japanese attack on Pearl Harbour. [5]

    Thus, an end to a liberal North American immigration regime that ensures a multi-cultural environment in North America is a prerequisite to expanded American war(s). Zbigniew Brzezinski has written that “as America becomes an increasingly multi-cultural society, it may find it more difficult to fashion a consensus on foreign policy issues [amongst the American people], except in the circumstance of a truly massive and widely perceived direct external threat.” [6] The E.U. is also beginning to follow suit. This premise by Brzezinski, an individual from within the ruling establishment of America, can be used to explain the demonization of Muslims and several national and ethno-cultural groups such as Arabs, Turks, and Iranians.

    It is also worth noting that Gary Hart, a former U.S. senator from Colorado, implied on September 14 of 2001 that the “Global War on Terror” sponsored by the Bush Jr. Administration was a pretext for establishing the so-called “New World Order.” [7] Gary Hart also implicated NATO’s role in shaping this “New World Order.” [8] The project is to be implemented by military might.

    A Unipolar World: Pax Americana?

    “However, what is a unipolar world? However one might embellish this term, at the end of the day it refers to one type of situation, namely one centre of authority, one centre of force, one centre of decision-making.”

    -Vladimir Putin at the Munich Conference on Security Policy in Germany (February 11, 2007)

    During his interview, with Charlie Rose, Henry Kissinger had referred to what George H. Bush Sr. identified as the “New World Order.” This was a term frequently used by the former American president that became famous during the Gulf War. With the end of the Cold War and the defeat of Iraq in the Gulf War, Georgia H. Bush Sr. said that humanity in 1991 was witness to the emergence of a “New World Order” that would be led by America. [9] The Gulf War was merely the beginning of this “New World Order.” The seeds had been planted in the Middle East for future wars and Eurasian expansion.

    The Trilateral Commission, an organization founded in 1973 and consisting of the wealthiest and most powerful elites from the U.S., the E.U., and Japan, originally created the term that George H. Bush Sr. drew on. Their word was “New International Economic Order.” The Trilateral Commission’s terminology lays bare the economic fabric of this program. Military might is merely the enforcer of foreign policy, and foreign policy is based on economic interests.

    An agenda of perpetual warfare and violence has been fueling the march towards global domination through economic means. In essence this war agenda has been an unbroken process watched over by the different presidential administrations of the United States.

    Stepping forth from behind the Curtains: NATO’s Role in the Eurasian Roadmap

    “The policies of the U.S., since the end of the Cold War are complicated and vast. They involve an intent to dominate and the use of international organizations to advance U.S. economic and geopolitical interests. They also include the conversion of NATO into a surrogate military police force for globalization and U.S. world economic domination.”

    -Ramsey Clark, 66th United States Attorney-General (October 6, 2000)

    NATO has started replicating long-term American war tactics and strategy. NATO is creating a rapid response force, which involves a significant German role. The force is modeled on the U.S. Rapid Response Force, the forerunner of CENTCOM, and has a global reach. The transformation of the U.S. Rapid Deployment Force into CENTCOM was part of long-term Anglo-American war plans. The NATO force is projected to be able to deploy to any region in the world within five days and planned to be capable of self-sufficient, detached operations for approximately one month. The force will also have land, sea, and air components, including an aircraft carrier. [10]

    It is apparent that control over Iraq was planned during the culmination of the Cold War by Anglo-American policy makers. The series of wars that have occurred since the Iraq-Iran War are debatably the products of a historical Anglo-American project in the Middle East– a project that was once a solely British project that predated the Cold War. The project to reshape and control the Middle East is part of the greater project to control Eurasia. Just as how this grand project was embraced by the U.S., as the inheritor of British strategy, the project has been embraced by the Franco-German entente and NATO. Zbigniew Brzezinski argued in 1997 that “Europe is America’s essential geopolitical bridgehead in Eurasia,” or an entry point towards dominating Eurasia. [11]

    From the statements and goals of U.S. officials going back to the 1990s NATO was projected to expand across the Eurasian landmass and set to embrace Japan, South Korea, and Australia in what Zbigniew Brzezinski identifies as the “trans-Eurasian security system.” [12] The characteristics of prospective conflicts seem to be slated to become dominated by NATO as France and Germany expand their roles in the “long war.” NATO’s role in the Eastern Mediterranean, the Red Sea, the Indian Ocean, Lebanon, and Afghanistan, along with NATO’s thrust into the post-Soviet niche and inner Eurasia, are all precarious indications of this.

    Making Europe the Partner of America in the “Long War:” Enter the Franco-German Entente

    “The victory over Iraq [in the Gulf War] was not waged as ‘a war to end all wars.’ Even the ‘New World Order’ cannot guarantee an era of perpetual peace.”

    -George H. Bush Sr., 41st President of the United States (March 6, 1991)

    Brzezinski explained that although Japan was important to American geo-strategy, Europe as a geopolitical entity (via the E.U. and NATO) constitutes America’s bridgehead into Eurasia. [13] “Unlike America’s links with Japan, NATO entrenches American political influence and military power on the Eurasian mainland,” and that “the allied European nations [were] still highly dependent on U.S. protection, any expansion of Europe’s political scope is automatically an expansion of U.S. influence,” Brzezinski explained in regards to Europe and Japan. [14] Brzezinski was paying more than just lip service to America’s allies in continental Europe; he was stressing that they were crucial, albeit as subordinates, to American global interests.

    The strength of NATO would rest on the vitality of the European Union, an Anglo-American and Franco-German device. To emphasis this Brzezinski wrote that “the United States’ ability to project influence and power in Eurasia relies on close transatlantic ties.” [15] Brzezinski also added that France and Germany, the Franco-German entente, would be America’s vital partners in NATO expansion and securing Eurasia, but a united Europe was an essential prerequisite. In regards to the Franco-German entente, Brzezinski wrote in 1998 that “In the western periphery of Eurasia, the key players will continue to be France and Germany, and America’s central goal should be to continue to expand the democratic European bridgehead.” [16] This was essentially the forecast of the “E.U. expansion” that has gone hand-in-hand with earlier NATO expansion since the end of the Cold War. According to Brzezinski it would be up to the Franco-German entente to led Europe: “America cannot create a more united Europe on its own – that is a task for the Europeans, especially the French and the Germans.” [17]

    None of the Pentagon’s geo-strategic plans can go forward without the E.U. and NATO. For this to happen it is essential that a strategic consensus between the Anglo-American alliance and the Franco-German entente be forged. The Anglo-American alliance has pursued this track and deeper integration with the Franco-German side, while also taking an adversarial stance against the Franco-German entente. Iraq is a symbolic testimony to this rivalry while Lebanon and NATO expansion in the Eastern Mediterranean is a parallel testimony to the strategic cooperation between the Anglo-American alliance and the Franco-German entente. A contradictory and confusing message is sent from these tracks, but there is always more to the picture. However, it is clear that Franco-German and Anglo-American interests must be synchronized for America to expand its global control.

    The Endgame: A “Single Market” under One World Administration?

    “I spent thirty-three years and four months in active military service as a member of this country’s most agile military force, the Marine Corps. I served in all commissioned ranks from Second Lieutenant to Major-General. And during that period, I spent most of my time being a high class muscle-man for Big Business, for Wall Street and for the Bankers. In short, I was a racketeer…”

    -Major-General Smedley D. Butler, U.S. Marine Corp Commander (War Is a Racket, 1935)

    After the Second World War, it was believed that from the nucleolus of Britain and American that a “New World Order” would be formed. Britain and America even had a combined military staff and combined chiefs of military staff. Visions for a singular global polity have vividly been tied to the Anglo-American establishment. In 1966, Professor Carroll Quigley, a noted American economist, wrote in his book Hope and Tragedy: A History of the World in Our Time that economics and finance vis-à-vis banking conglomerates were the engine in this drive and the real forces controlling national policies. Carroll Quigley wrote in regards to the Anglo-American alliance that “I have objected, both in the past and recently, to a few of its policies (notably to its belief that England was an Atlantic rather than a European Power and must be allied, or even federated, with the United States and must remain isolated from Europe), but in general my chief difference of opinion is that it wishes to remain unknown, and I believe its role in history is significant enough to be known.” [18]

    “For America, the chief geopolitical prize is Eurasia,” insists Zbigniew Brzezinski. He also contends, “Now a non-Eurasian power [i.e., the U.S.] is preeminent in Eurasia– and America’s global primacy is directly dependent on how long and how effectively its preponderance on the Eurasian continent is sustained.” [19] The former U.S. national security advisor has also stated, in 1997, that in order to co-opt the Franco-German entente a “Transatlantic Free Trade Agreement, already advocated by a number of prominent Atlantic leaders, could also mitigate the risk of growing economic rivalry between a more united E.U. and the United States.” [20]

    There is opposition in North America to what is believed to be the emergence of a projected “North American Union.” This North American entity would further amalgamate Canada, the United States, and Mexico, but the mechanisms for a grander global confederacy have already been drawn. The North American Free Trade Agreement (NAFTA) and the creation of the E.U. were stepping stones towards this aspiration. Economics is the key that fuses these polities.

    A summit between the E.U. and U.S. has shed light on plans for economic amalgamation. [21] The term used at the summit was “single market” by “renewing the Trans-Atlantic partnership.” [22] This is the same term used to describe the “common market” as it intensified Western European integration, which eventually gave birth to the European Union. At the summit President Bush Jr. met with Jose Manuel Barroso, the President of the European Commission, and Federal Chancellor Merkel. Frau Merkel, while officially there on behalf of the E.U., represented the interests of the Franco-German entente while President Bush Jr. represented Anglo-American interests. Jose Manuel Barroso as the President of the European Commission represented both Anglo-American and Franco-German interests because the E.U. is a joint Anglo-American and Franco-German body. America is a de facto E.U. power due to its alliance with Britain, one of the three major E.U. powers along with France and Germany.

    An agreement was reached between the E.U. and U.S. to integrate the markets and regulations of America and Europe even further. This agreement was another layer to add to the strategic consensus that was reached at NATO’s Riga Summit. Both sides also stated that economics is the driving spirit in their relationship and that politics mattered very little. The liberal and conservative leaders of America and Europe are merely two sides of the same coin.

    Decades after the end of the Cold War the globe is wrapped within a state of almost perpetual war dominated by the military might of America. The last lines in The Grand Chessboard: American Primacy and the Geostrategic Imperatives reveal the ultimate objective of Anglo-American policy: “These efforts will have the added historical advantage of benefiting from the new web of global linkages that is growing exponentially outside the more traditional nation-state system. That web– woven by multinational corporations, NGOs (…) already creates an informal global system that is inherently congenial to more institutionalized and inclusive global cooperation [a reference to global government].” [23]

    Brzezinski goes on to predict that “In the course of the next several decades, a functioning structure of global cooperation, based on geopolitical realities, could thus emerge and gradually assume the mantle of the world’s current ‘regent’ [a reference to the U.S.],” and “Geostrategic success in that cause would represent a fitting legacy of America’s role as the first, only, and last truly global superpower.” [24] All around the globe nation-states are being absorbed into larger and larger political and socio-economic entities. This is part of the story of globalization, but it has its dark side. This is the globalization of the few and not of the many.

    The Fight for Civilization and the Gathering Storm

    “When all is said and done the conflict in Afghanistan will be to the war on terrorism what the North African campaign was to World War II: an essential beginning on the path to victory. But compared to what looms over the horizon– a wide-ranging war in locales from Central Asia to the Middle East and, unfortunately, back again to the United States– Afghanistan will prove but an opening battle.”

    -Robert Kagan and William Kristol, The Gathering Storm (The Weekly Standard, October 29, 2001)

    One cannot help but remember what was elucidated in 2001 during the start of the “Global War on Terror” by two members of the Project for the New American Century (PNAC), stating that Afghanistan was only part of a “wide-ranging war.” [25] Both Robert Kagan and William Kristol are deeply linked to U.S. foreign and military policy extending from writing presidential speeches to having a former spouse as the U.S. ambassador to NATO. It is not coincidental that a portion of their editorial from October of 2001 in The Weekly Standard has actually materialized. These men should be taken for their words when they say that Afghanistan is merely the “opening battle” compared to what is waiting in the horizon.

    Referring back to Robert Kagan and William Kristol: “this war will not end in Afghanistan. It is going to spread and engulf a number of countries in conflicts of varying intensity. It could well require the use of American military power in multiple places simultaneously. It is going to resemble the clash of civilizations that everyone has hoped to avoid. And it is going to put enormous and perhaps unbearable strain on parts of an international coalition that basks in contented consensus.” [26] The “international coalition” being referred to is NATO and the international military network based around the U.S. and the “unbearable strain” is war, but of an unknown scale. On August 10, 2007 Lieutenant-General Douglas Lute, the “War Czar” overseeing the wars in Iraq and Afghanistan and any expanded theatre, publicly talked about restoring a mandatory military draft. [27] The march to war is not waning, but driving the world towards the abyss.

    Afghanistan was the first volley in an advance phase of the global conflict that was in its preparatory stages decades ago during the Iraq-Iran War, the Gulf War, and the Kosovo War. Where this global conflict, this “long war” will lead us is unknown, but all humanity is in this together. The American people will sooner or later feel the pain of war as their freedom is effected. Autocracy is a prerequisite to grand empires. Brzezinski has pointed out that “America is too democratic at home to be autocratic abroad,” and “never before has a populist democracy attained international supremacy.” [28] Deviancy is being normalized all over the globe because of this global project. Those that are behind such projects must be reduced to social leprids, as outcasts, denounced by all societies.

    Resistance in the Middle East: The Power of the People

    “The Iraqi Resistance is by definition democratic as it is the spontaneous expression of a people who took its destiny into its hands, and is by definition progressive as it defends the interests of the people.”

    -Hana Al-Bayaty (March 18, 2007)

    Anglo-American planners have underestimated the capacity of the power of ordinary people and the human spirit. In the Middle East it has been the resistance of ordinary people that has brought militant globalization to a standstill. Popular resistance movements have bogged down the military might of the remaining global superpower.

    A nation is only as legitimate as the people(s) who live in it define it. America is not at war with individual nations, but with the people(s) of these nations. Nor are the American people at war with these nations, it is the American ruling establishment and elites that are at war with these people(s).

    The forces of resistance are the forces of the will of the people, without the support of the people none of them could last or stand up to some of the most powerful war machines in human history.

    The wars in the Middle East are as much about choice as they are about the right to live. What is at stake is self-determination and liberty. These wars represent the drive to impose an overall monopoly of controls over other nations by a few who have hijacked the foreign policies of America and Britain to serve their own goals.

    The Iraqi Resistance and the other resistance movements of the Middle East are movements of the peoples and by nature egalitarian. Would anyone in the so-called West dare label the French, Czechoslovakian, Greek, Libyan, Chinese, Malaysian, and Soviet resistance movements against Germany, Italy, and Japan during the Second World War as terrorist movements? However, the occupying Axis governments labeled these movements as terrorists. Did not France and the other areas occupied by Germany and the Axis Powers not have governments that said the Axis Powers were welcomed forces bringing stability as do the governments of Iraq and Afghanistan? For example in France there was the Vichy Government. When Germany was defeated the leaders of the Vichy Government in France were executed as traitors.

    The U.S. government misleadingly claims that it is bringing democracy to these lands, but since when was democracy forced from the top down to the bottom? Is this not the opposite of democracy; things being forced down from the top to the bottom? Democracy is an expression of the masses that manifests itself upwards and not from the opposite direction.

    No force on earth can defeat the popular will of the people; this is why domestic populations are manipulated into supporting wars. It is only division that allows small groups to take temporary reign over the people(s). However, for every scheme and plan to create division and anarchy amongst the people(s) of the world there is a plan to unite them and strengthen them. This is one of the greatest fears of many in positions of power. This is the fear of any awakening of large societal groups and populations.

    There is no greater ally to the movements of resistance in the Middle East and beyond than unadulterated public opinion in the rest of the world. The people(s) of Britain, Israel, and the U.S. are also victims of their own governments who manipulate their fears and create animosity between them and other nations. This in itself is a great crime. What differences exist between nations are only a means to test the best of them.

    Fear and hate are the weapons of the real terrorists, the masters of deception, and those who belittle others for profit and personal gain. These are the terrorists who give orders in positions of political leadership in the White House and elsewhere at the expense of their own people and the rest of humanity. The world is now embarking into the abyss of perpetual war and a period in which the contemplation of the use of nuclear weapons is being made. A stand must be made by individuals of good conscience and will. It seems possible that it will be a matter of time before the citizens of Europe, North America, and other lands will be compelled or necessitated to join the peoples of occupied lands in resistance.

    War must be averted on two fronts; in the shorter-term (as differentiated from “short-term”) or near future, war must be averted from emerging in the Middle East, and in the longer-term in Eurasia. Only the resistance of the people and public opinion can stop war from enveloping the globe. Public opinion must translate into public action if humanity it to be spared from a massive war–a war that could prove to become a nuclear armageddon.

    Countdown to 1984?

    “In brief, the U.S policy goal must be unapologetically twofold: to perpetuate America’s own dominant position for at least a generation and preferably longer still; and to create a geopolitical framework that can absorb the inevitable shocks and strains of social-political change…”

    -Zbigniew Brzezinski (The Grand Chessboard: American Primacy and Its Geostrategic Imperatives, 1997)

    In a twist of Orwellian fate, the earth seems closer to appearing like a rendition of the world in George Orwell’s novel Nineteen Eighty-Four. [29] However, the road ahead is not scripted. The future is only anticipated and planned, but never certain in a universe of infinite probabilities. Time will tell where the road ahead will guide us. Those that see themselves as masters of destiny have had their ideas proven wrong in Iraq, Afghanistan, Palestine, Somalia, and Lebanon. It may look as if opposition to a war agenda is like tiny raindrops beating against an unrelenting mountain, but mountains can be eventually eroded by those tiny raindrops. There exists a “sensitive dependence on initial conditions,” commonly called the “butterfly effect,” whereas the flaps of a butterfly’s wings in Brazil may set off a tornado in Texas. Individual actions can offset the march to war that is unfolding on this planet.

    NOTES

    [1] Henry Kissinger, A conversation with Henry Kissinger, interview with Charles P. Rose Jr., Charlie Rose (show), January 18, 2005.

    [2] Ibid.

    [3] Ibid.

    [4] Ibid.

    [5] The U.S. government was secretly arming Britain during the First World War and profiting off the war. In regards to the sinking of the RMS Lusitania, a British passenger ship, unknown to the public at the time the ship was also carrying military supplies from the U.S. to Britain.

    In the case of Pearl Harbour, the U.S. government was aware of a Japanese plan to attack the U.S. Pacific Fleet in Hawaii. American officials allowed the attack to take place to arouse public support for the entry of the U.S. in the Second World War. It should be noted that prior to the Japanese attack on Pearl Harbour the U.S. government had led a complete embargo of oil and materials to Japan and frozen all Japanese assets by July 25, 1941. Oil is needed to run economies and war and all strategists and military planners know this very well. Japan was baited into an inevitable war with the U.S. and decided to take the first shot. This benefited the U.S. government in mobilizing the American public to support the war effort in the Second World War just as the tragic events of September 11th, 2001 allowed the Bush Jr. Administration to launch the “Global War on Terror.” U.S. involvement in the Second World War was for economic purposes and had nothing to do with morality.

    In the case of the RMS Lusitania the German embassy in Washington D.C. was trying to make clear to the Americans before it started sinking merchant ships helping Britain that it would engage in such activities. It should be noted that Britain was doing the same in both World Wars. U.S. officials are actually believed to have obstructed these attempts by the Germans in an attempt to involve the U.S. in the First World War.

    [6] Zbigniew Brzezinski, The Grand Chessboard: American Primacy and the Geostrategic Imperatives (NYC, New York: HarperCollins Publishers, 1997), p.211.

    [7] Gary Hart, Transcript. National Security in the 21st Century: Findings of the Hart-Rudman Commission, Council on Foreign Relations (CFR), September 14, 2001. http://www.cfr.org/publication/4049/national_security_in_the_21st_century.html

    [8] Ibid.

    [9] George Herbert Walker Bush Sr., Gulf War Victory Speech, (Address, Capitol Hill, Washington, District of Columbia, January 6, 1991) March 6, 1991.

    [10] Bettina Berg, High readiness and global deployability, Federal Ministry of Defence Germany), November 30, 2006.

    [11] Zbigniew Brzezinski, A geostrategy for Eurasia, Foreign Affairs, vol. 76, no. 5 (September- October, 1997): p.50-64.

    Note: The writings from Brzezinski’s paper for Foreign Affairs and the Council for Foreign Relations (CFR) were also used for his book The Grand Chessboard: American Primacy and the Geostrategic Imperatives that had its first edition published in 1997. Brzezinski’s 1997 Foreign Affairs journal entry is a condensed synopsis of his 1997 book. Points and quotes cited from it are identical or almost identical to the writing from his 1997 book.

    [12] Ibid.

    [13] Carroll Quigley, Tragedy and Hope: A History of the World in Our Time (NYC, New York: The Macmillan Company, 1966), p.950.

    [14] Brzezinski, A geostrategy for Eurasia, Op. cit.

    [15] Ibid.

    [16] Ibid.

    [17] Ibid.

    [18] Ibid.

    [19] Brzezinski, The Grand Chessboard, Op. cit., p.30.

    [20] Brzezinski, The Grand Chessboard, Op. cit., p.200.

    [21] Desmond Butler, E.U., U.S. Agree on Iran, Russia Disputes, Associated Press, April 30, 2007. http://www.guardian.co.uk/worldlatest/story/0,,-6597779,00.html

    [22] US and EU agree ‘single market,’ British Broadcasting Corporation (BBC), April 30, 2007. http://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/europe/6607757.stm

    [23] Brzezinski, The Grand Chessboard, Op. cit., p.215.

    [24] Ibid.

    [25] Robert Kagan and William Kristol, The Gathering Storm, The Weekly Standard, October 29, 2002, p.13. http://www.newamericancentury.org/Editorial-102901.pdf

    [26] Ibid.

    [27] Toby Harnden, ‘Return to conscription should be considered,’ The Telegraph U.K.), August 11, 2007. http://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/main.jhtml?xml=/news/2007/08/11/wdraft111.xml

    [28] Brzezinski, The Grand Chessboard, Op. cit., p.35-36.

    [29] Refer to the polity and geographic boundaries of Winston Smith’s fictional world, in Orwell’s novel. In the fictional state of Oceania (which includes America, the British Isles, and Australia) there is absolute control exercised over all aspects of the lives of all citizens by one single entity, the Party, which has three political mottos: WAR IS PEACE. FREEDOM IS SLAVERY. IGNORANCE IS STRENGTH.

    Marines Ordered To Execute Civilians In Nazi-Like Slaughter

    0

    Steve Watson
    Infowars.net Editorial

    With evidence having emerged that marines were ordered by superiors to massacre women and children in Haditha in Iraq two years ago, combined with scores of other testimonies and reports of such barbaric demands being forced upon American troops daily, it is clear that organised execution and ritual slaughter is the set policy of the architects of aggression in the middle east.

    A military court heard Thursday that a US Marine was ordered to execute a room full of Iraqi women and children during the massacre in Haditha which left 24 people dead.

    Following a response to roadside bomb attack in November, 2005 Marines stormed houses in the village. At the first of the houses, Marine Lance Corporal, Humberto Mendoza, has given evidence that he was ordered to execute some of the occupants under the command of Sergeant Frank Wuterich. Mendoza stated he refused to do so, when confronted with a room full of women and children. Later he found the women and children dead. Mendoza had previously admitted shooting one male occupant of the house dead, under orders.

    AFP reports:

    At one house Wuterich gave an order to shoot on sight as Marines waited for a response after knocking on the door, said Mendoza.

    “He said ‘Just wait till they open the door, then shoot,'” Mendoza said.

    Mendoza then said he shot and killed an adult male who appeared in a doorway.

    During a subsequent search of the house, Mendoza said he received an order from another Marine, Lance Corporal Stephen Tatum, to shoot seven women and children he had found in a rear bedroom.

    “When I opened the door there was just women and kids, two adults were lying down on the bed and there were three children on the bed … two more were behind the bed,” Mendoza said.

    “I looked at them for a few seconds. Just enough to know they were not presenting a threat … they looked scared. I told him there were women and kids inside there. He said ‘Well, shoot them,'” Mendoza told prosecutor Lieutenant Colonel Sean Sullivan.

    “And what did you say to him?” Sullivan asked.

    “I said ‘But they’re just women and children.’ He didn’t say nothing.”

    Mendoza said he returned to a position at the front of the house and heard a door open behind him followed by a loud noise. Returning later that afternoon to conduct body retrieval, Mendoza said he found a room full of corpses.

    In previous testimony it has also been suggested that the troops stopped random passing cars, ordered passengers out and lined them up and shot them one by one at near-point blank range with M16 machine guns.

    Wuterich’s defense is expected to argue that he followed established combat zone rules of engagement. Given that Haditha is not an isolated incident this seems an accurate description.

    A 2006 article adapted from the book “Ten Excellent Reasons Not to Join the Military,” edited by Elizabeth Weill-Greenberg, documents many other testimonies of troops on the ground who have confirmed that they are routinely ordered to kill innocent civilians.

    There is constant pressure to kill Iraqi civilians, 22-year-old GI Darrell Anderson said. “At traffic stops we kill innocent people all the time. If you are fired on from the street, you are supposed to fire on everybody that is there. If I am in a market, I shoot people who are buying groceries.”

    War crimes in Iraq are not mere aberrations. They emanate from official policies regarding the aims and conduct of the occupation, the article concludes:
    It is official policy, for example, to use cluster bombs in populated areas. Soldiers and Marines merely carry out the policy. It was official policy, under Operation Iron Hammer, to put barbed wire around villages, to bulldoze crops, to bomb homes, and to hold families in jail until they released insurgent information. It was official policy to level Fallujah, a city of 300,000 people, as an act of collective punishment.

    The list goes on. It was official policy to torture detainees at Abu Ghraib, it was official policy to “kill all military age males” in Iraq, it is official policy to use radioactive Depleted Uranium weapons and deadly white phosphorus in civilian areas in Iraq. The wanton destruction from the air of cities, towns, and villages witnessed on the first night of the war and almost everyday since is official policy in Iraq.

    When will the official policies be recognized for what they are, official war crimes?

    The systematic killing of civilians in Iraq and throughout the middle east by aggressive forces under the control of the elite usurpers of our governments is clear. Our controlled media is also complicit in its ignorance, its pandering spin and the outright lies we continue to have to endure and break down with every passing day.

    Prominent critics and commentators have blasted the mainstream media for failing to portray the brutal reality of the systematic policy of slaughter.

    Acclaimed director Brian De Palma, whose new film “Redacted” has stunned audiences with its graphic telling of the horrific true story of another Iraq war crime, has stated:

    “In Vietnam, when we saw the images and the sorrow of the people we were traumatizing and killing, we saw the soldiers wounded and brought back in body bags. We see none of that in this war. It’s all out there on the Internet, you can find it if you look for it, but it’s not in the major media. The media is now really part of the corporate establishment.”

    De Palma has asserted that it is only the brutal reality seen in the pictures and videos that are routinely ignored by the establishment media that will incense the public enough to force the conflict to be stopped.

    Paul Craig Roberts, former Secretary to the Treasury under Reagan, has also blasted the mainstream media in a powerful piece today stating:

    “The US media focuses on whether Republican Senator Larry Craig is a homosexual or has offended gays by denying being one of them. The run-up for the public’s attention is why a South Carolina beauty queen cannot answer a simple question about why her generation is unable to find the United States on a map.”

    Roberts describes Bush as “high on the list of mass murderers of all time”. With conservatively over one million Iraqis having lost their lives in this war “The vast majority of “kills” by the US military in Iraq and Afghanistan are civilians, the war criminal is in the living room, and no official notice is taken of the fact” he writes.

    He warns that the same will happen in Iran very soon if this administration and the power brokers behind it are not halted right away:

    “Encouraged by the indifference of both the American media and Christian churches to the massive casualties inflicted on Iraqi civilians, the Bush administration will not be deterred by the prospect of its air attacks inflicting massive casualties on Iranian civilians. Last summer the Bush administration demonstrated to the entire world its total disdain for Muslim life when Bush supported Israel’s month-long air attack on Lebanese civilian infrastructure and civilian residences. President Bush blocked the attempt by the rest of the world to halt the gratuitous murder of Lebanese civilians and infrastructure destruction. Clearly, turning the Muslim Middle East into a wasteland is the Bush policy. For Bush, civilian casualties are a non-issue. Hegemony uber alles.”

    Every instance described here provides evidence of direct violation of the Geneva Conventions, which state (Part IV, Article 48):combatants “shall at all times distinguish between the civilian population and combatants, between civilian objects and military objectives and, accordingly, shall direct their operations only against military objectives.”

    The conventions were established in the aftermath of the Nazi’s indiscriminate slaughter of millions of civilians throughout Europe. It is clear that our own modern day aggressors do not believe they are bound by the conventions, nor any international laws of war that have come before, and will do whatever it takes to ensure their empire building proceeds unimpeded.

    Unless we address the reality of the war crimes we have seen unfold in the last 6 years alone, and continue in our attempts to do the job that the corporate media whores are paid not to, we betray our ethical and moral principles, we betray our countries, and we betray the freedom that has been protected for so long by those before us.

    Bush goes back on his word

    0

    Sacramento Bee

    TWO and a half months into his job in 2001, President Bush addressed the American Society of Newspaper Editors and faced a question about open government. It’s worth recalling the exchange:

    Questioner: “Would you take this moment to articulate your own view of First Amendment freedoms and give us a sense of the fundamental message that you will send to your administration as it makes decisions on whether to open or close access to government information?”

    Bush: “There needs to be balance when it comes to freedom of information laws. There are some things that when I discuss in the privacy of the Oval Office or national security matters that just should not be in the national arena.

    “On the other hand, my administration will cooperate fully with a Freedom of Information request if it doesn’t jeopardize national security, for example. The interesting problem I have, or for me, as the president, is what’s personal and what’s not personal. And, you know, frankly, I haven’t been on the job long enough to have had to make those choices. … I used to be an avid e-mailer, and I e-mailed to my daughters or e-mailed to my father, for example, and I don’t want those e-mails to be in the public domain. …

    But we’ll cooperate with the press, unless we think it’s a matter of national security or something that’s entirely private.”

    Today, you’re no longer a rookie, Mr. President. You should be clear by now about what is a public e-mail and what is a family e-mail.

    It is a matter of public concern that at least 5 million White House e-mails are missing. A watchdog group has sued for the White House Office of Administration to turn over information about the e-mails, some related to the firing of U.S. attorneys.

    Last week, the Justice Department argued that the office is not subject to the open-records law. The office’s Web site, however, tells anyone how to use the law to request documents.

    Bush has failed in his commitment to open government by losing sight of what is the public’s business. It is not – and has never been – a fatherly e-mail to his daughters.

    FOIA Documents Detail FBI Surveillance Network

    0

    By Ryan Singel

    The FBI has quietly built a sophisticated, point-and-click surveillance system that performs instant wiretaps on almost any communications device, according to nearly a thousand pages of restricted documents newly released under the Freedom of Information Act.

    The surveillance system, called DCSNet, for Digital Collection System Network, connects FBI wiretapping rooms to switches controlled by traditional land-line operators, internet-telephony providers and cellular companies. It is far more intricately woven into the nation’s telecom infrastructure than observers suspected.

    It’s a “comprehensive wiretap system that intercepts wire-line phones, cellular phones, SMS and push-to-talk systems,” says Steven Bellovin, a Columbia University computer science professor and longtime surveillance expert.

    DCSNet is a suite of software that collects, sifts and stores phone numbers, phone calls and text messages. The system directly connects FBI wiretapping outposts around the country to a far-reaching private communications network.

    Many of the details of the system and its full capabilities were redacted from the documents acquired by the Electronic Frontier Foundation, but they show that DCSNet includes at least three collection components, each running on Windows-based computers.

    The $10 million DCS-3000 client, also known as Red Hook, handles pen-registers and trap-and-traces, a type of surveillance that collects signaling information — primarily the numbers dialed from a telephone — but no communications content. (Pen registers record outgoing calls; trap-and-traces record incoming calls.)

    DCS-6000, known as Digital Storm, captures and collects the content of phone calls and text messages for full wiretap orders.

    A third, classified system, called DCS-5000, is used for wiretaps targeting spies or terrorists.

    What DCSNet Can Do

    Together, the surveillance systems let FBI agents play back recordings even as they are being captured (like TiVo), create master wiretap files, send digital recordings to translators, track the rough location of targets in real time using cell-tower information, and even stream intercepts outward to mobile surveillance vans.

    FBI wiretapping rooms in field offices and undercover locations around the country are connected through a private, encrypted backbone that is separated from the internet. Sprint runs it on the government’s behalf.

    The network allows an FBI agent in New York, for example, to remotely set up a wiretap on a cell phone based in Sacramento, California, and immediately learn the phone’s location, then begin receiving conversations, text messages and voicemail pass codes in New York. With a few keystrokes, the agent can route the recordings to language specialists for translation.

    The numbers dialed are automatically sent to FBI analysts trained to interpret phone-call patterns, and are transferred nightly, by external storage devices, to the bureau’s Telephone Application Database, where they’re subjected to a type of data mining called link analysis.

    FBI endpoints on DCSNet have swelled over the years, from 20 “central monitoring plants” at the program’s inception, to 57 in 2005, according to undated pages in the released documents. By 2002, those endpoints connected to more than 350 switches.

    Today, most carriers maintain their own central hub, called a “mediation switch,” that’s networked to all the individual switches owned by that carrier, according to the FBI. The FBI’s DCS software links to those mediation switches over the internet, likely using an encrypted VPN. Some carriers run the mediation switch themselves, while others pay companies like VeriSign to handle the whole wiretapping process for them.

    The numerical scope of DCSNet surveillance is still guarded. But we do know that as telecoms have become more wiretap-friendly, the number of criminal wiretaps alone has climbed from 1,150 in 1996 to 1,839 in 2006. That’s a 60 percent jump. And in 2005, 92 percent of those criminal wiretaps targeted cell phones, according to a report published last year.

    These figures include both state and federal wiretaps, and do not include antiterrorism wiretaps, which dramatically expanded after 9/11. They also don’t count the DCS-3000’s collection of incoming and outgoing phone numbers dialed. Far more common than full-blown wiretaps, this level of surveillance requires only that investigators certify that the phone numbers are relevant to an investigation.

    The Justice Department reports the number of pen registers to Congress annually, but those numbers aren’t public. According to the last figures leaked to the Electronic Privacy Information Center, judges signed 4,886 pen register orders in 1998, along with 4,621 time extensions.

    CALEA Switches Rules on Switches

    The law that makes the FBI’s surveillance network possible had its genesis in the Clinton administration. In the 1990s, the Justice Department began complaining to Congress that digital technology, cellular phones and features like call forwarding would make it difficult for investigators to continue to conduct wiretaps. Congress responded by passing the Communications Assistance for Law Enforcement Act, or CALEA, in 1994, mandating backdoors in U.S. telephone switches.

    CALEA requires telecommunications companies to install only telephone-switching equipment that meets detailed wiretapping standards. Prior to CALEA, the FBI would get a court order for a wiretap and present it to a phone company, which would then create a physical tap of the phone system.

    With new CALEA-compliant digital switches, the FBI now logs directly into the telecom’s network. Once a court order has been sent to a carrier and the carrier turns on the wiretap, the communications data on a surveillance target streams into the FBI’s computers in real time.

    The Electronic Frontier Foundation requested documents on the system under the Freedom of Information Act, and successfully sued the Justice Department in October 2006.

    In May, a federal judge ordered the FBI to provide relevant documents to the EFF every month until it has satisfied the FOIA request.

    “So little has been known up until now about how DCS works,” says EFF attorney Marcia Hofmann. “This is why it’s so important for FOIA requesters to file lawsuits for information they really want.”

    Special Agent Anthony DiClemente, chief of the Data Acquisition and Intercept Section of the FBI’s Operational Technology Division, said the DCS was originally intended in 1997 to be a temporary solution, but has grown into a full-featured CALEA-collection software suite.

    “CALEA revolutionizes how law enforcement gets intercept information,” DiClemente told Wired News. “Before CALEA, it was a rudimentary system that mimicked Ma Bell.”

    Privacy groups and security experts have protested CALEA design mandates from the start, but that didn’t stop federal regulators from recently expanding the law’s reach to force broadband internet service providers and some voice-over-internet companies, such as Vonage, to similarly retrofit their networks for government surveillance.

    New Technologies

    Meanwhile, the FBI’s efforts to keep up with the current communications explosion is never-ending, according to DiClemente.

    The released documents suggest that the FBI’s wiretapping engineers are struggling with peer-to-peer telephony provider Skype, which offers no central location to wiretap, and with innovations like caller-ID spoofing and phone-number portability.

    But DCSNet seems to have kept pace with at least some new technologies, such as cell-phone push-to-talk features and most VOIP internet telephony.

    “It is fair to say we can do push-to-talk,” DiClemente says. “All of the carriers are living up to their responsibilities under CALEA.”

    Matt Blaze, a security researcher at the University of Pennsylvania who helped assess the FBI’s now-retired Carnivore internet-wiretapping application in 2000, was surprised to see that DCSNet seems equipped to handle such modern communications tools. The FBI has been complaining for years that it couldn’t tap these services.

    The redacted documentation left Blaze with many questions, however. In particular, he said it’s unclear what role the carriers have in opening up a tap, and how that process is secured.

    “The real question is the switch architecture on cell networks,” said Blaze. “What’s the carrier side look like?”

    Randy Cadenhead, the privacy counsel for Cox Communications, which offers VOIP phone service and internet access, says the FBI has no independent access to his company’s switches.

    “Nothing ever gets connected or disconnected until I say so, based upon a court order in our hands,” Cadenhead says. “We run the interception process off of my desk, and we track them coming in. We give instructions to relevant field people who allow for interconnection and to make verbal connections with technical representatives at the FBI.”

    The nation’s largest cell-phone providers — whose customers are targeted in the majority of wiretaps — were less forthcoming. AT&T politely declined to comment, while Sprint, T-Mobile and Verizon simply ignored requests for comment.

    Agent DiClemente, however, seconded Cadenhead’s description.

    “The carriers have complete control. That’s consistent with CALEA,” DiClemente said. “The carriers have legal teams to read the order, and they have procedures in place to review the court orders, and they also verify the information and that the target is one of their subscribers.”

    Cost

    Despite its ease of use, the new technology is proving more expensive than a traditional wiretap. Telecoms charge the government an average of $2,200 for a 30-day CALEA wiretap, while a traditional intercept costs only $250, according to the Justice Department inspector general. A federal wiretap order in 2006 cost taxpayers $67,000 on average, according to the most recent U.S. Court wiretap report.

    What’s more, under CALEA, the government had to pay to make pre-1995 phone switches wiretap-friendly. The FBI has spent almost $500 million on that effort, but many traditional wire-line switches still aren’t compliant.

    Processing all the phone calls sucked in by DCSNet is also costly. At the backend of the data collection, the conversations and phone numbers are transferred to the FBI’s Electronic Surveillance Data Management System, an Oracle SQL database that’s seen a 62 percent growth in wiretap volume over the last three years — and more than 3,000 percent growth in digital files like e-mail. Through 2007, the FBI has spent $39 million on the system, which indexes and analyzes data for agents, translators and intelligence analysts.

    Security Flaws

    To security experts, though, the biggest concern over DCSNet isn’t the cost: It’s the possibility that push-button wiretapping opens new security holes in the telecommunications network.

    More than 100 government officials in Greece learned in 2005 that their cell phones had been bugged, after an unknown hacker exploited CALEA-like functionality in wireless-carrier Vodafone’s network. The infiltrator used the switches’ wiretap-management software to send copies of officials’ phone calls and text messages to other phones, while simultaneously hiding the taps from auditing software.

    The FBI’s DiClemente says DCSNet has never suffered a similar breach, so far as he knows.

    “I know of no issue of compromise, internal or external,” DiClemente says. He says the system’s security is more than adequate, in part because the wiretaps still “require the assistance of a provider.” The FBI also uses physical-security measures to control access to DCSNet end points, and has erected firewalls and other measures to render them “sufficiently isolated,” according to DiClemente.

    But the documents show that an internal 2003 audit uncovered numerous security vulnerabilities in DCSNet — many of which mirror problems unearthed in the bureau’s Carnivore application years earlier.

    In particular, the DCS-3000 machines lacked adequate logging, had insufficient password management, were missing antivirus software, allowed unlimited numbers of incorrect passwords without locking the machine, and used shared logins rather than individual accounts.

    The system also required that DCS-3000’s user accounts have administrative privileges in Windows, which would allow a hacker who got into the machine to gain complete control.

    Columbia’s Bellovin says the flaws are appalling and show that the FBI fails to appreciate the risk from insiders.

    “The underlying problem isn’t so much the weaknesses here, as the FBI attitude towards security,” he says. The FBI assumes “the threat is from the outside, not the inside,” he adds, and it believes that “to the extent that inside threats exist, they can be controlled by process rather than technology.”

    Bellovin says any wiretap system faces a slew of risks, such as surveillance targets discovering a tap, or an outsider or corrupt insider setting up unauthorized taps. Moreover, the architectural changes to accommodate easy surveillance on phone switches and the internet can introduce new security and privacy holes.

    “Any time something is tappable there is a risk,” Bellovin says. “I’m not saying, ‘Don’t do wiretaps,’ but when you start designing a system to be wiretappable, you start to create a new vulnerability. A wiretap is, by definition, a vulnerability from the point of the third party. The question is, can you control it?”

    U.S. opposes release of court rulings on wiretaps

    0

    The Bush administration opposed in U.S. court on Friday an effort to peel back a secrecy lid over its domestic counterterrorism wiretapping program, which critics say infringes on privacy and rights.In a filing with the Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Court, which is itself secret and oversees the program, the U.S. Justice Department said the court should reject a request by the American Civil Liberties Union to disclose its legal rulings at the center of debate over the program.

    It said the court had no authority to order such material declassified, the ACLU had no basis for filing its request with the court, and that granting it would jeopardize the surveillance program.

    “The public disclosure of the documents the ACLU requests would seriously compromise sensitive sources and methods relating to the collection of intelligence necessary for the Government to conduct counterterrorism activities,” the department said in its filing.

    The ACLU said keeping the rulings secret would hamper political debate over the government’s surveillance authority.

    “This debate should not take place in a vacuum. The public has a right to know, at least in general terms, what kinds of surveillance the court authorized and what kinds of surveillance it disallowed,” Jameel Jaffer, director of the ACLU’s National Security Project, said in a statement.

    Following an order by the court in January, the administration placed under its supervision the program begun earlier by U.S. President George W. Bush of wiretapping conversations between foreign terrorism suspects and Americans.  

    The Democrat-led Congress in August passed legislation that authorized the program for six months, but Democrats who say the law went too far have vowed to revise it at the earliest opportunity.

    The ACLU filed its request to declassify court findings on the program as part of multiple efforts to contest it. The organization wants released the court’s January order as well as the administration’s original request to the court.

    The Senate Judiciary Committee has issued a subpoena to the White House and other agencies for records on the program’s justification, but it has been rebuffed. The committee’s Democratic chairman, Vermont Sen. Patrick Leahy, has said he considers the administration in contempt, but Congress has taken no action.

    The ACLU is due to file its response to the government briefing on September 14.

    http://today.reuters.com/news/articlenews.aspx?type=domesticNews&storyID=2007-09-01T023817Z_01_N31267917_RTRUKOC_0_US-USA-WIRETAPPING.xml&pageNumber=0&imageid=&cap=&sz=13&WTModLoc=NewsArt-C1-ArticlePage2

    Bush seeks immunity for telecom firms

    1

    The Bush administration wants the power to grant legal immunity to telecommunications companies that are slapped with privacy suits for cooperating with the White House’s controversial warrantless eavesdropping programme.The authority would effectively shut down dozens of lawsuits filed against telecommunications companies accused of helping set up the programme.

    The vaguely worded proposal would shield any person who allegedly provided information, infrastructure or “any other form of assistance” to the intelligence agencies after the September 11, 2001, terror attacks.

    It covers any classified communications activity intended to protect the country from terrorism.

    Republicans say immunity is necessary to protect the companies that responded to legal presidential orders to thwart terrorists in the years after 9/11. Yet some Democrats fear the administration’s proposal would do much more than advertised, potentially protecting anyone who gave broad categories of aid to the government as part of a spy programme that monitors communications.

    Because the administration does not want to identify which companies participated in the operations, it is asking Congress to let the attorney-general intervene on behalf of any person or company accused of participating in the surveillance work, whether or not they actually did, two senior justice department officials said.

    More than a dozen government officials interviewed for this story spoke on condition they not be identified because sensitive negotiations with Congress are ongoing.

    One of the officials said the defendants in suits brought by the American Civil Liberties Union – Verizon and AT&T – would be the key beneficiaries of the proposed legislation.

    Both companies are a central part of the US communications grid, running networks that transmit both telephone calls and emails. (AP)

    Long List of 9/11 Criminal Coconspirators

    1
    Skeptics claim you couldn’t hide a conspiracy as large as a 9/11 without it being uncovered. It has been uncovered and here are the names…

    Long List of 9/11 Criminal Coconspirators George W. Bush < eldest son of Bush crime family; guilty of election fraud in 2000, 2004; guilty of war crimes, war profiteering, treason, crimes against humanity; likely signed-off on 9-11 plot Dick Cheney < former PNAC member; guilty of war profiteering, treason; was in bunker on 9-11 directing several “war games”; lied to 9-11 Omission Commission about timing of 9-11 activities Donald Rumsfeld < former Secretary of War and PNAC member; close friend of Cheney; was at Pentagon on 9-11; once slipped and said “when that missile hit the Pentagon” Paul Wolfowitz < Deputy Secretary of War on 9-11; “dual citizen” of US and Israel; Zionist; investigated for spying for Israel; former PNAC member; chief architect of Iraq war; forced to resign in World Bank scandal Richard Perle < former assistant Secretary of War, chairman War Policy Board, and PNAC member; “dual citizen” of US and Israel; Zionist; allegedly gave $100,000 to head of Pakistan’s ISI, Mahmoud Ahmad; nicknamed “Prince of Darkness” Douglas Feith < effectively in command, with Wolfowitz, of War Department on 9-11; Undersecretary of War for Policy; “dual citizen” of US and Israel; Zionist; investigated for spying for Israel; former PNAC member Dov Zakheim < Pentagon comptroller when trillion dollars reported missing on 9-10-01; “dual citizen” of US and Israel; Zionist; Shul Rabbi; former CFR member; former CEO of fly-by-remote manufacturer; reputed 9-11 mastermind George Tenet < director of the CIA on 9-11; was awarded the “Medal of Freedom” by Bush for his fine work on 9-11; reported to be “dual citizen” of US and Israel Robert Mueller < FBI director on 9-11; under his “leadership” FBI field agents? warnings of an imminent attack were stifled Thomas Pickard < took over the job of FBI director from Louis Freeh in August 2001; held this position only for a few weeks before Richard Mueller became director; former Terror Task Force chief; John O?Neill complained about sabotage by Pickard Dale Watson < former Deputy Chief of the CIA at the Counter-Terrorist Center; appointed Inspector Deputy Assistant Director of the National Security Division (NSD), FBI Headquarters, Washington, DC in July 1998; appointed FBI Headquarters Assistant on December 6, 1999 by the Attorney General; ignored at least four different FBI agents? warnings including an “urgent cable” from the CIA on August 23rd about Almihdhar and Alhazmi Dave Frasca < FBI Radical Fundamentalists Unit Chief; personally scuttled the work of Kenneth Williams in July 2001 and Coleen Rowley in August 2001, the Arizona and Minnesota FBI agents who were actively investigating “terrorist” patsies in CIA-operated flight schools Marion “Spike” Bowman < FBI agent who thwarted FBI investigations into both Zacarias Moussaoui and the anthrax attacks on Congress John Ashcroft < Attorney General on 9-11; protected “terrorist” patsy Abdussattar Shaikh from subpoena after 9-11; stopped flying commercial aircraft in 2001 Michael Chertoff < Assistant Attorney General on 9-11; freed over 100 Israeli spies in the US after 9-11; promoted to head Homeland Security; “dual citizen” of US and Israel; Zionist; likely Mossad agent Colin Powell < Secretary of State on 9-11; met with General Mahmoud Ahmad two days after 9-11; former chairman, Joint Chiefs of Staff; helped cover up Vietnam My Lai massacre Condi Rice < National Security Adviser on 9-11; promoted to Secretary of State; lied to 9-11 Omission Commission while under oath Tommy Thompson < Health and Human Services (HHS) Secretary; hired Jerome Hauer, former Office of Emergency Center, on 9-10-01 Jerome Hauer < managing director of Kroll and senior adviser to US Secretary of Health and Human Services (HHS) for National Security and Emergency Management on 9-11; put John O’Neill at the WTC on 9-11; lied to Dan Rather on CBS News on 9-11 about the controlled demolition of WTC buildings; director of Giuliani’s Office of Emergency Management from 1996 to 2000 Porter Goss < former House Intelligence Chair; was meeting with General Mahmoud Ahmad, head of Pakistan’s ISI and 9-11 financier, on 9-11; promoted to Director of CIA, resigned after “hookergate” Bob Graham < former Florida Senator; was meeting with General Mahmoud Ahmad, head of Pakistan’s ISI and 9-11 financier, on 9-11; ran for President in 2004 Marc Grossman < Under Secretary for Political Affairs on 9-11; met with General Mahmoud Ahmad, head of Pakistan’s ISI and 9-11 financier, on or shortly after 9-11; “dual citizen” of US and Israel Richard Armitage < former member of PNAC, Deputy Secretary of State; met with General Mahmoud Ahmad, head of Pakistan’s ISI and 9-11 financier, shortly after 9-11 Philip Zelikow < led the 9-11 Cover-Up Commission; personally wrote the 9-11 Omission Commission Report, a best-selling work of fiction; appointed Counselor of US Department of State; “dual citizen” of US and Israel Ari Fleischer < White House spokesman for Bush on 9-11; “dual citizen” of US and Israel; connected to the extremist group called the Chabad Lubavitch Hasidics Richard Meyers < in charge of USA air defenses on 9-11; lied to 9-11 Omission Commission about reasons for air defense failure on 9-11; promoted to Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff Ralph Eberhardt < NORAD Commander on 9-11; fanatical supporter of missile defense scheme, militarization of space; enthusiastic supporter of merging law enforcement and the military Larry Arnold < NORAD Commander Major General on 9-11; has used 9-11 to push militarization of USA Eric Findley < Canadian Air Force Major General; acting commander of NORAD on 9-11 Montague Winfield < Major General in charge of Pentagon war room on 9-10-01, the evening of September 10th he requested a rookie to stand in for him on 9-11 Richard Mies < former Admiral; ran Global Guardian “war game” on 9-11 out of US Strategic Command (Stratcom) at Offutt Air Force Base; now CEO of Hicks & Associates, a “strategic consultant” to the USG dealing in “military transformation” Henry Shelton < Chairman of Joint Chiefs of Staff on 9-11; supported formation of Able Danger Peter Schoomaker < US Army Chief of Staff; former SOCOM (Special Operations Command) chief; ran Able Danger Geoffrey Lambert < Major General; SOCOM (Special Operations Command) Intel Chief; made Able Danger, the program that tracked patsy “terrorists” , off limits to FBI Tony Gentry < Army Intelligence and Security Command General Counsel; ordered 2.5 terrabytes of Able Danger data destroyed Philip Odeen < as director of Program Analysis for the National Security Council, provided staff support to Henry Kissinger from 1971 to 1973; served as Deputy Assistant Secretary of War in Systems Analysis; named to chair the National War Panel in 1997; former president of Reynolds and Reynolds; former CEO and president of BDM International; executive vice president of Washington operations of TRW Elliot Abrams < former member of PNAC, National Security Council; pleaded guilty in 1991 to lying to Congress about Iran-Contra affair; “dual citizen” of US and Israel; Zionist Lewis “Scooter” Libby < former PNAC member; studied political science at Yale under Paul Wolfowitz; aid to Cheney; convicted for lying about outing of Valerie Plame; “dual citizen” of US and Israel; Zionist Jack Abramoff < entertained USG “terrorist” patsy Mohammed Atta on his yacht just before 9-11; convicted criminal lobbyist; ardent Zionist Jeb Bush < Florida governor on 9-11; declared martial law in Florida four days before 9-11; brother of George Bush; PNAC member; guilty of election fraud in 2000 Rudolph Giuliani < mayor of New York on 9-11; hailed as “hero” for his “gutsy” leadership on 9-11; allegedly involved with FEMA and former NYC Police Chief Kerik in Operation Code Angel Bernard Kerik < NYC Police Chief on 9-11; “sidekick” of Giuliani; allegedly involved with FEMA in WTC demolition “war games” called Operation Code Angel Eliot Spitzer < New York Attorney General on 9-11; barred his top aide, Deputy Attorney General Dietrich Snell, from testifying to Congress on Able Danger; threw out Karl Schwarz?s 9-11 synopsis Richard Holbrooke < former US ambassador to UN; CFR member; co-chaired “Independent Task Force on America?s Response to Terrorism” in which the Official Conspiracy Theory (OCT) was promoted John Deutch < former Undersecretary of War, director of CIA; co-authored paper, “Catastrophic Terrorism: A National Policy” with Zelikow, Ashton Carter; senior partner at Global Technology Partners, an affiliate of Rothschild North America; MIT professor; grandson of Yonah Fischer, Antwerp diamond merchant who ran Zionist Federation of Belgium Ashton Carter < co-authored paper, “Catastrophic Terrorism: A National Policy” with Zelikow and Deutch; senior partner at Global Technology Partners, an affiliate of Rothschild North America Abdussattar Shaikh < FBI informant to the San Diego office; helped bring “terrorist” patsies to USA; protected by Attorney General Ashcroft Abdullah Noman < worked for the US Consulate in Jeddah, Saudi Arabia; filed 10-15 visas for the patsy 9-11 “hijackers” in the Visa Express Program Daniel Lewin < officer in elite, secret unit of Israeli military called “Sayeret Matkal”; orchestrated activities of Mossad agents in USA before 9-11; was allegedly stabbed or “shot” by highjacker Satam al-Suqami before AA flight 11 crashed into the WTC Dominic Suter < Mossad agent; his front company, Urban Moving Systems, employed the five Mossad agents caught celebrating in New York on 9-11 Sivan Kurzberg < driver of van belonging to the celebrating Israelis; when stopped by police on 9-11, he said “We are Israelis. We are not your problem. Your problems are our problems. The Palestinians are your problem” John Gross < one of the lead engineers for the flawed NIST report on why the WTC buildings collapsed; denies existence of molten steel at the WTC Theresa McAllister < edited the flawed NIST report on why the WTC buildings collapsed Ronald Hamburger < structural engineer and Senior Principal at Simpson Gumpertz and Heger consulting engineers in San Francisco; was a principal author of FEMA?s initial report on the collapse of the twin towers; later a key participant in the flawed NIST report on why the WTC buildings collapsed William Baker < member of FEMA Probe Team; partner with Skidmore, Owings, Merrill; contributed to the flawed NIST report on why the WTC buildings collapsed Harold Nelson < contributed to the flawed NIST report on why the WTC buildings collapsed Ramon Gilsanz < contributed to the flawed NIST report on why the WTC buildings collapsed Shankar Nair < contributed to the flawed NIST report on why the WTC buildings collapsed; quoted in Chicago Tribune, September 19, 2001 that “Already there is near-consensus as to the sequence of events that led to the collapse of the World Trade Center” Gene Corley < led FEMA/ASCE WTC collapse “investigation” ; was the principle investigator for ASCE and FEMA of the 1995 bombing of the Murrah Federal Office Building in Oklahoma City Paul Mlakar < part of ASCE team that investigated both WTC and Murrah Federal building attacks Mete Sozen < part of ASCE team that investigated both WTC and Murrah Federal building attacks Charles Thornton < partner of Richard Tomasetti; told Karl Koch, whose company erected the WTC steel, “Karl, we all know what caused the collapse”; part of ASCE team that investigated both WTC and Murrah Federal building attacks Richard Tomasetti < partner of Charles Thornton; reportedly behind the unprecedented and widely criticized decision to destroy most of the WTC steel evidence unnamed < FAA manager at the New York Air Route Traffic Control Center who destroyed controllers? tapes of 9-11 Benjamin Chertoff < 25-year-old cousin of Michael Chertoff; senior “researcher” for Popular Mechanics? hit piece on 9-11 Truth Movement Marvin Bush < brother of George Bush; on board of Securacom, US-Kuwaiti company paid $9.2 to manage WTC security October 1996 to 1998; on board of HCC Insurance, big WTC insurer Wirt Walker < cousin of George Bush; principal at Securacom, US-Kuwaiti joint-venture that managed security for WTC, United Airlines, and Dulles Airport, all of which figured into 9-11 Larry Silverstein < he and partner Frank Lowy obtained 99-year lease on WTC shortly before 9-11; made several billion dollars on 9-11 insurance fraud; admitted to “pulling” WTC 7 David Rockefeller < vice director of the Council on Foreign Relations (1949-1985), vice president (1950-1970), and chairman (1970-1985); as chairman of the Downtown-Lower Manhattan Association (1958 to 1975) was primary builder of WTC complex; founder and honorary chairman of the Trilateral Commission; president or CEO of Chase Manhattan Bank, 1961 to 1981; 9-11 was the anniversary of 1973 CIA-sponsored coup plotted by David Rockefeller?s cabal and overseen by Nelson?s prot?g? Henry Kissinger that toppled Chile?s President Salvadore Allende Nicholas Rockefeller < told film-maker Aaron Russo of coming catastrophic event eleven months before 9-11 Warren Buffett < was hosting golf charity event at the US Strategic Command headquarters at Offutt Air Force Base in Omaha on 9-11 (Bush flew to Offutt afternoon of 9-11); world?s second richest person Maurice Greenberg < CEO of American International Group (AIG) on 9-11 which became co-owner of the “private spy agency”, Kroll Associates, in 1993 and was a major share-holder in Marsh & McClennan whose CEO on 9-11 was Maurice?s son Jeffrey; director of the New York Federal Reserve bank (1988-1995); deputy chairman of the Council on Foreign Relations (CFR)in 1996; major investor in the Blackstone Group Jules Kroll < founder of Kroll Corporation, a “security services” company which was in charge of “security” at WTC on 9-11; has close links to CIA and is active private military contractor in Iraq; Zionist Paul Bremer < Marsh & McClennan executive on 9-11; Chairman of the Congressional National Commission on Terrorism, 1999 to 2000; US Ambassador-at- Large for Counterterrorism, 1986 to 1989; Presidential Envoy to Irag and Adminstrator of the Coaltion Provisional Authority, May 2003 to December 2004 Peter Peterson < CEO of the Blackstone Group, parent corporation of one of three lease-holders for WTC 7 on 9-11; also chairman of the CFR and the Federal Reserve Bank of New York on 9-11; CEO of the Institute for International Economics in October 2000 A.B. “Buzzy” Krongard < now number three executive director at the CIA; until 1998, managed firm used to place “put options” on United Airlines which has left $2.5 million in “profits” unclaimed Mark Loizeaux < as CEO of CDI was instrumental in “recycling” steel from WTC crime scene; CDI also buried the rubble from the crime scene of the Murrah Federal Building Loring Knoblauch < CEO of Underwriters Labs; said that jet fuel fires were not “reasonably foreseeable” ; resigned suddenly in August 2004 after UL performed tests of WTC floor models where floors did not collapse and were barely affected Michael Cherkasky < CEO of Kroll on 9-11; former investigator in the Manhattan DA?s Office from 1978 to 1994; now CEO of insurance-firm Marsh & McClennan Frank Carlucci < former Secretary of War; affiliated with PNAC; served as chairman of the Carlyle Group (1992-2003); on BoD of BDM International William Kristol < PNAC co-founder; adherent of Leo Strauss; editor of The Weekly Standard; strong advocate of the Iraq war; “dual citizen” of US and Israel; Zionist William Perry < former Secretary of War; associated with the Rothschild’s banking empire through Global Technology, a Rothschild affiliate James Woolsey < former CIA director; PNAC member; claims “incompetence” was reason for 9-11 Newt Gingrich < former Speaker of the House; PNAC member; reputed to be a member of the CFR; served on the Pentagon?s War Policy Board Henry Kissinger < long criminal history; wanted for war crimes in several countries; sat on War Policy Board under Perle; chosen to lead 9-11 Cover-Up Omission Commission; “dual citizen” of US and Israel George H.W. Bush < Bush crime family Don; Skull and Bones; CIA operative involved in JFK assassination; former head of CIA; son of friend shot Reagan when he was VP; war profiteer Tony Blair < British Prime Minister on 9-11; ally and partner in crime of George Bush; London 7-7 bombings were also “false flag” operation Pauline Neville-Jones < International Governor of BBC on 9-11; Chairman of UK Joint Intelligence Committee (1991-1994); Chairman of QinetiQ Group, a war technology company with government customers in UK and USA; Chairman of Information Assurance Advisory Council (IAAC) Mahmoud Ahmad < head of Pakistan’s ISI; had Ahmed Omar Saeed Sheikh wire $100,000 to lead 9-11 “terrorist” patsy Mohammad Atta Benjamin Netanyahu < former Israeli Prime Minister; said 9-11 was “good” for US-Israeli relationship

    http://portland.indymedia.org/en/2007/08/364448.shtml

    Lockerbie case: new accusations of manipulation of key forensic evidence

    0

    I.P.O. Information Service
    flamesong

    On 4 August 2007 Dr. Hans Koechler received from Mr. Edwin Bollier, head of the Swiss-based company MEBO AG, a copy of the German original of an Affidavit, dated 18 July 2007 and signed by Mr. Ulrich Lumpert, former employee (electronics engineer) of MEBO AG, Zurich, related to the Lockerbie case.

    In a statement released today, Dr. Hans Koechler, who has followed the Lockerbie proceedings since the beginning of the trial in the Netherlands in May 2000, highlighted basic aspects and questions of this new revelation that appear to be of relevance not only in connection with the upcoming second appeal of the convicted Libyan national, but also for new prosecutorial action ex officio by the Scottish authorities.

    In his affidavit Mr. Lumpert implicitly admits having committed perjury as witness No. 550 before the Scottish Court in the Netherlands. He states (Par. 2) that he has stolen a handmade (by him) sample of an “MST-13 Timer PC-board” from MEBO company in Zurich and handed it over, on 22 June 1989 (!), to an “official person investigating the Lockerbie case.” He further states (in Par. 5) that the fragment of the MST-13 timer, cut into two pieces for “supposedly forensic reasons,” which was presented in Court as vital part of evidence, stemmed from the piece which he had stolen and handed over to an investigator in 1989. He further states that when he became aware that this piece was used for an “intentional politically motivated criminal undertaking” (vorsätzliche politisch kriminelle “Machenschaft”) he decided, out of fear for his life, to keep silent on the matter.

    The rather late admission of Mr. Lumpert is consistent with an earlier revelation in the British and Scottish media according to which a former Scottish police officer (whose identity has not yet been disclosed to the public) stated “that the CIA planted the tiny fragment of circuit board crucial in convicting a Libyan” for the bombing of the Pan Am jet (Scotland on Sunday, 28 August 2005).

    Upon receipt of the document, Dr. Koechler informed the owner of MEBO AG on 7 August 2007 that Mr. Lumpert will have to submit his affidavit under oath before the competent judicial authorities of Scotland. In the meantime (22 August 2007), the owner of MEBO AG has requested the Scottish judicial authorities — by way of the Swiss Prosecutor’s office and on the basis of the agreement on mutual judicial assistance between the UK and Switzerland — to investigate the alleged criminal manipulations referred to in Mr. Lumpert’s statement.

    In his capacity as UN-appointed observer of the Lockerbie trial, Dr. Hans Koechler has repeatedly raised the issue of the timer fragment and expressed his amazement at the Defense team’s refusal to look into the matter during Mr. Megrahi’s appeal when questions as to the reliability of forensic evidence had already been raised. (See Dr. Koechler’s appeal report, Par. 10 [c] of 26 March 2002; his statement of 23 August 2003, Par. 10; and his statement of 14 October 2005, Par. 2.)

    It is to be recalled that, as witness before the Lockerbie court, Mr. Edwin Bollier had raised the issue of the manipulation of the timer fragments, but was brusquely interrupted in his testimony by the presiding Judge and prevented from giving further information in this matter.

    In the meantime (information received on 26 August 2007), Mr. Lumpert has revised part of his Affidavit (Par. 5); he now states that the letter “M” on the timer fragment (supposedly for the German word Muster: sample), unlike previously stated, has been engraved by himself. In view of this and earlier statements, Mr. Lumpert’s credibility will have to be assessed very carefully by the competent judicial authorities and he will have to be made aware of the consequences, in terms of criminal law, of lying to the Court.

    At the same time, the credibility of the Scottish Criminal Cases Review Commission (SCCRC) is also at stake. In its News Release of 28 June 2007, in which it had announced the referral of Mr. Al-Megrahi’s case to the Scottish High Court for a second appeal, the SCCRC found it necessary to “absolve” the investigating authorities of any suspicion of wrongdoing. Should Mr. Lumpert’s confession be proven to be true, the SCCRC’s statement — “The Commission undertook extensive enquiries in this area but found nothing to support that allegation or to undermine the trial court’s conclusions in respect of the fragment” — will appear highly questionable, even dubious. The public will have to ask why a supposedly independent judicial review body would try to exonerate “preventively” officials in a case which is being returned to the High Court for a second appeal because of suspicions of a miscarriage of justice.

    If it is indeed the rule of law that governs the Scottish polity, the Scottish judicial authorities will have to deal with this new revelation ex officio — independently of how the appeal court in Mr. Megrahi’s case will evaluate this witness’s confession of perjury.

    Those responsible for the midair explosion of PanAm flight 103 will have to be identified and brought to justice. If there was any wrongdoing, criminal and/or due to incompetence, of the judicial authorities in the investigation and prosecution of the Lockerbie case, this will also have to be dealt with through proper procedures of criminal law. A continuation of the rather obvious cover-up which we have witnessed up until now is neither acceptable for the citizens of Scotland nor for the international public, Dr. Koechler stated.

    The Princess Diana Cover Up — RINF Documentary

    0

    By Mick Meaney
    RINF Alternative News

     ladydi.jpg

    This first edit from the forthcoming RINF documentary explores the conspiracy theories surrounding the death of Diana, Princess of Wales. It shows how officials and the mainstream media began a disinformation campaign within hours of her death.

    Here we present the first edit which lasts 30 minutes, and focuses on driver, Henri Paul, who was reported as high on a ‘cocktail of drink and drugs’ during the crash. ‘The Princess Diana Cover Up’ provides information which contradicts this claim.

    The feature length documentary is currently in production as this first edit was released early for the 10th anniversary of the murder of Princess Diana.

    The final cut will look at numerous other factors in the death of the Princess, such as the amount of time taken to reach the short distance to the hospital, why many other hospitals closer to the crash were ignored and many other puzzling questions. We have received many unsatisfactory answers from the officials.

    We will also look at motives for her murder and how she feared for her life.

    Using footage from a range of sources, including new reports and interviews with those close to the Princess and the investigation, ‘The Princess Diana Cover Up’ is a must see for all who want truth.

    DIANA KILLED BY FIAT DRIVER SAYS POLICE CHIEF

    0

    By Mark Reynolds

    THE driver of a mystery white Fiat Uno was responsible for Princess Diana’s death, claims the detective who led the inquiry into the crash that killed her.

    Jean Claude Mules, who ran the initial French investigation, said his officers found compelling evidence that the car carrying Diana and Dodi Fayed collided with the Fiat seconds before it crashed.

    If officers had been able to trace the driver they would have “had their killer”, he added. As Britain today marks the 10th anniversary of Diana’s death, Mr Mules’s comments will re-ignite anger that the Fiat Uno driver has never been traced.

    They will also intensify claims that both the French and British investigations into the crash were failures. And they will fuel the fears of those who believe that Diana, Dodi and driver Henri Paul were killed in an Establishment plot. MI5 and MI6 agents were known to be on the ground that night.

    The Fiat was spotted entering the tunnel at the same time as Diana’s car. The failure to find the driver — or the Uno itself — has given rise to numerous theories, including the possibility that the Princess’s car was targeted by a secret service assassin who forced her vehicle to crash.

    Two men were named as possibly being the drivers — paparazzi photographer James Andanson, who has since died in mysterious circumstances, and French-Vietnamese security guard Le Van Thanh, who continues to deny any involvement.

    Mr Mules said yesterday: “It’s a good thing that we didn’t actually find the owner of the white Fiat Uno, otherwise he would have become the Princess’s killer.”

    Mr Mules was senior commander of the elite Paris Criminal Brigade, which originally gathered evidence into the crash in the French capital. In the early hours of August 31, 1997 — soon after Diana’s Mercedes ploughed into a pillar in the Alma tunnel — Mr Mules found compelling evidence that the luxury saloon had collided with a white Fiat Uno seconds before impact.

    Yet, 10 years on and despite extensive searches all over France, the Uno and its driver are still unaccounted for. “We found that there were approximately 7,000 to 8,000 Fiat Unos and we examined 5,500 of them,” said Mr Mules, who was speaking in Paris where he is now retired.

    “We checked all their cars and their owners, who had to tell us exactly where they were on the night of the crash, but we never found it.”

    The inability of the French police to find the Uno driver was highlighted in the British report into Diana’s death, published last December.

    It was also a subject to which Lord Justice Scott Baker, who is due to preside over the reconvened inquest into Diana’s death as coroner later this year, said he wanted to return.

    At a preliminary hearing at London’s High Court last month, the coroner said the whereabouts of the Uno driver was one of the key questions which he said would help him to make a decision on whether the Princess was murdered.

    Speakers, activists take to White House on 9/11 anniversary

    0

    Speakers, Activists to Rally at White House on 9/11 AnniversaryA mass rally to commemorate the anniversary of 9/11 will be held on Tuesday, September 11, 2007, from noon to 3:00 p.m. at Lafayette Park, in front of the White House. The rally is sponsored by dc911truth.org and will feature speeches by a number of leading authors and activists. It is part of similar commemorations being held on the 11th and on preceding days in New York and other major cities worldwide.

    This event is the result of the collaboration of the 911truth movement with members of the antiwar and impeachment movements. The message of the event is three-fold: Impeach the Bush administration, end the war, and re-investigate the crimes of September 11, 2001.

    The rally will also celebrate the end of a long journey for walkers from around the country who have come to Washington to highlight their cause. For March of the People founder Mario Penalver, who has led the 800-mile trek from Chicago, the message is “Impeach the Bush administration and bring our troops home. ” For Brother Raymond and Brother Elliot of Beit Shalom Ministries who have walked 1500 miles from Denver, the message is “Real Christians don’t choose war.” And for Vietnam veteran and pastor Bill McDannell who walked across the continent from San Diego, the message is “End the wars.”

    The rally will include live music and will feature the following distinguished speakers:

    Webster Tarpley, author of, “9/11 Synthetic Terror: Made in USA” David Lindorff, co-author of “The Case for Impeachment ” William Pepper, lawyer and barrister, author of “An Act of State” Ralph Schoenman and Mya Shone, hosts of the radio program, Taking Aim Carlo Hawk Walker, Native American, Vietnam veteran and peacemaker Rev. Grayland Hagler, Pastor, Plymouth Congregational Church, Washington

    A live webcast is being planned to link with events at Ground Zero and elsewhere in New York City. Radio station WPFW-FM, the local Pacifica affiliate, will be broadcasting part of the event, along with other special programs commemorating the 9/11 anniversary.

    dc911truth.org is a grassroots organization of citizens, activists, and researchers seeking to raise public awareness of the historical context of U.S. false flag terrorism, culminating in the events of September 11, and to affiliate with others sharing these goals towards peaceful reformation of the American political process.

    Teenager arrested, jailed for refusing TB treatment at hospital

    2

    By Mike Adams

    Health officials in Lawrenceville, Georgia have arrested and jailed Francisco Santos, a teenager who tried to walk out of a hospital and go home after being diagnosed with TB (tuberculosis). Instead of allowing him to leave the hospital, health authorities arrested and jailed the teen, throwing him in into a 15 x 20 foot isolation chamber and not allowing him to leave until he submitted to chemical treatments pushed by doctors at the hospital. Francisco is being described as “…a threat to public safety” due to his tuberculosis.

    Francisco’s plight is the latest episode in a growing number of “gunpoint medicine” episodes where individuals are being arrested at gunpoint and thrown into jails or detainment centers until they submit to treatment with pharmaceuticals, chemotherapy, radiation or surgery. NewsTarget has covered other cases of gunpoint medicine, including:

    Katie Wernecke, a teenage cancer patient who was kidnapped by Texas authorities and forced to submit to chemotherapy. Her parents were arrested and subjected to actions by Child Protective Services, who took Katie away. This all happened because Katie’s parents refused to subject their daughter to chemotherapy and wanted to pursue safer, more natural holistic medical therapies.

    Abraham Cherrix, a 16-year old cancer patient who also refused a second round of chemotherapy after the first round nearly killed him. His doctor was outraged that Abraham would refuse chemotherapy and called Child Protective Services who had Abraham’s parents arrested at gunpoint. CPS then took over joint custody of the child and attempted to force the teen to submit to barbaric cancer treatments like radiation and chemotherapy.

    In this latest example of Gunpoint Medicine, 17-year old Francisco Santos is now being held against his will and will apparently be incarcerated for as long as doctors believe he is a threat to the safety of others. He’s also being told he cannot leave until he takes medication.

    Patients, or Prisoners?

    As these cases of Gunpoint Medicine clearly demonstrate, you now surrender your rights when you walk into a hospital. You are not a patient; you are a prisoner. And if the medical authorities, in their own opinion, perceive you as resisting their authority, they can have you arrested on the spot, without a court order, without a trial, and even when you pose no threat to others (such as having cancer). These medical arrests are taking place in clear violation of both the Fourth Amendment (protection from unreasonable search and seizure) and Fifth Amendment (due process) of the U.S. Bill of Rights.

    Just as worrisome, law enforcement authorities are supporting these tyrannical actions of doctors, effectively providing firepower to what can only be called the “tyranny branch” of modern medicine. Any system of medicine that requires firearms to motivate patients is, in my opinion, more a system of control than a system of healing. Whatever happened to, “First, do no harm?”

    Remember this the next time you enter a hospital or clinic: By subjecting yourself to the false authority of a doctor, you are in effect surrendering your freedoms and shall only be allowed to leave the hospital or clinic by the grace of the physician! If they decide that, for whatever reason, you should not be allowed to leave the hospital, you may be arrested at gunpoint and thrown into jail for an indefinite period of time until you agree to undergo their toxic — even deadly — treatments.

    But isn’t Santos contagious?

    Skeptics of this assessment will point out that Santos has a contagious form of TB and is a genuine threat to society. Therefore, the thinking goes, medical authorities are justified in locking him up against his will, without a trial or court order.

    That’s a fascinating bit of delusional thinking. If you believe that, then you must also believe that health authorities should round up all AIDS patients and throw them into detention camps “for the safety of the public.” After all, if you believe that TB is a disease that’s dangerous enough to lock people away for having, then why not AIDS? Why not HPV, Hepatitis, or any upper respiratory illness that might pose a health hazard to some senior citizen? Once you cross the line of arresting people against their will for showing symptoms of one particular contagious disease, then you have to follow through and arrest everyone with similarly dangerous diseases.

    Of course, if that happened, half the country would be behind bars, because the truth is that there are people everywhere who carry infectious germs. Simply walking through any airport exposes you to countless strains of bacteria, fungi and viruses that might pose a risk to your health.

    And how about all the dangerous elderly drivers doped up on medication? I’ve seen some crazy Alzheimer’s patients operating vehicles who should never be allowed to drive and are a clear threat to the safety of other drivers. Why aren’t these people being locked up for the safety of the public? (I’m not saying they should be, but if you’re going to be consistent here, locking up TB patients means locking up all kinds of other people…)

    The gunpoint approach that has been invoked to imprison Santos is a demonstration of modern medical madness. The mainstream media has stirred the people into a frenzy over freewheeling lawyer Andrew Speaker and his TB infection, and now health authorities are so paranoid about being blamed for allowing a TB patient to walk free that they would rather trample on Santos’ rights than expose themselves to professional risk. Apparently, the only requirement for locking someone up who shows symptoms of an infectious disease is that the particular disease has received a lot of mention in the press and the public is now scared silly over it.

    Can you imagine the outcry if medical authorities started locking up AIDS patients? Don’t dismiss this idea: It could be next. Any tyrannical health system that can stick a gun in the face of a teenage boy with TB and throw him in prison is perfectly capable of sticking a gun in the face of an AIDS patient and locking them away, too. Today it’s TB, tomorrow it could be HIV. (Just wait for the “AIDS camps” to become official U.S. policy…)

    Enjoy your freedom? Don’t visit doctors

    All this explains why I continue to encourage people to avoid doctors altogether. It’s much better to take care of your health through exercise, strong nutritional habits, superfoods consumption and outright avoidance of toxic chemicals. Stay healthy and you won’t need to see a doctor… ever! (I’ve known many people who have never seen a doctor in their entire lives, and yet are extremely healthy and long-lived.) I don’t visit doctors, and I foresee no need to ever visit one unless I suffer some sort of accident or acute injury.

    If you value your freedom, stay as far away from conventional doctors as possible. As you’ve seen here, they can have you locked up at their discretion, even without a shred of evidence that you’re really dangerous to others.

    Tuberculosis myths

    This “highly infectious form of TB,” for example, is largely a medical myth. Allow me to explain: The virus certainly does exist, and it can be passed through the air, but the most important point that still escapes the understanding of conventional medical authorities is that vitamin D prevents TB infections. The only people susceptible to TB infectious are those who are chronically deficient in vitamin D! That includes people who don’t get enough sunlight (or who have been brainwashed into using sunscreen all the time) and who eat atrocious diets lacking in vitamin D sources like fish oils. The problem with TB is not simply the person walking around with the virus, it’s the people who are in such poor nutritional health that they’re practically begging to be infected by something.

    This is why TB is now an epidemic in the UK, by the way: There’s very little sunlight at that latitude, and more than 80 percent of UK citizens are vitamin D deficient. (It also explains the ongoing problems with dental health and bone fractures in the UK, but that’s a different story…)

    An incredible double standard

    What’s all this about doctors pretending to “protect the public” anyway? They claim to be locking up Santos in order to protect the health of the public, and yet they’ll send patients home by the thousands with prescriptions for toxic pharmaceuticals that harm everyone! FDA-approved prescription drugs are now the 4th leading cause of death in the United States (tuberculosis isn’t even close). I suppose if we were to really take steps to protect the general public, we should actually be locking up the drug-pushing doctors! They are right now killing far more patients than any infectious disease.

    Think about it: Oncologists openly push dangerous chemotherapy drugs that cause permanent damage to the brain, heart, liver and kidneys, even while insisting that patients take no vitamins, superfoods or nutritional supplements to protect their healthy cells during the chemo treatments. General Practitioners send patients home with prescriptions for dangerous COX-2 inhibitor drugs, diabetes drugs, statin drugs and psychotropic drugs that kill, at minimum, tens of thousands of Americans every year through heart attacks, strokes, liver failure and suicides. Where is the call to protect the public from these dangerous chemicals that are causing casualty numbers resembling a world war?

    Where is the effort to protect the public from all the dangerous cancer-causing food additives like sodium nitrite? Hydrogenated oils? Chemical preservatives and sweeteners? With the American population more diseased than ever before in the history of human civilization, and drug companies inundating the people with deadly chemicals, I find it astounding that health authorities would see one teenager with TB as such a huge threat that they have to arrest him at gunpoint. Doesn’t this seem a bit strange to you?

    If guns are to be drawn at all, they should be drawn during the arrest of corrupt FDA officials, evil Big Pharma operatives and unethical food company CEOs who are knowingly killing hundreds of thousands of Americans each year with their highly-profitable chemicals, additives and medicines. Francisco Santos is not a threat to your health, but modern medicine certainly is! And the FDA is without question a threat to your health and safety. In previous stories on this site, I’ve documented how the FDA is far more dangerous to Americans than any terrorist threat.

    Take your meds or go to jail!

    Our nation’s health authorities have gone mad. They’re all focused on the wrong things, and they’ve managed to get the public frenzied up about all the wrong things, too. They’ve got people scared silly about antioxidants, believing that vitamins will kill them (but that pharmaceuticals will save them!).

    They’ve also managed to get people to believe that infectious diseases are caused SOLELY by the presence of the virus — an idea that’s utter nonsense. A virus is only a threat when the body is suppressed enough to be susceptible to infection. The real cause of an infection is just as much a weakened immune system as it is the presence of the virus, yet conventional medicine focuses solely on the presence of the virus and dismisses the role of the immune system in preventing infection.

    I say we should Free Santos! He is no more of a threat to public health than your typical doctor, and no patient should be imprisoned by hospital authorities simply for having an infection of a disease that doesn’t even pose a threat to healthy individuals.

    The alternative is to turn the U.S. into a medical police state, where anybody with a cough is arrested at gunpoint, and AIDS patients are thrown into detainment camps, and anybody who refuses “treatment” with synthetic chemicals gets thrown into jail. Imagine being arrested for not taking your statin drugs, antidepressants or blood thinners. Big Pharma is trying to create a society where “treatment” with drugs is mandatory, and anyone who refuses to take their chemicals will be considered a criminal. Parents are already being arrested for not subjecting their children to chemotherapy or giving in to ADHD drugs. If this trend continues, it won’t be long before anyone who rejects vaccinations, drugs and psychiatric medications will be considered a criminal (or terrorist). Parents, be warned: The State is out to medicate your child, and if you resist, you may have your children taken away!

    In a nation where so many people claim we’re sending soldiers off to war in order to “fight for our freedoms,” I find it astounding that patients in hospitals are being treated like Guantanamo Bay prisoners. Personally, I think Santos should sue the hospital and local law enforcement authorities for violating his civil liberties. What, exactly, is his crime anyway? If being sick is a crime, then practically this entire nation should be locked up, because we’re the most diseased population in the modern world.

    Update:

    The mainstream media is reporting today that Santos has finally agreed to start taking synthetic chemical medications while sitting in jail. Gee, what a choice, huh? “Here, take these medications or rot in your jail cell.” That’s the choice Santos has been given. What an incredible system of medicine we live under today, huh? It treats healers like criminals and patients like terrorists…

    Prison officers defy court order

    0

    Thousands of prison officers are defying a High Court injunction and refusing to end their national strike over a pay dispute. The surprise walkout by members of the Prison Officers’ Association (POA) in England and Wales began at 0700 BST.

    The action came after it pulled out of a no-strike agreement with government.

    Officers in Bristol, Canterbury and Long Lartin returned to work in the afternoon, but other POA members said they would stay out for 24 hours.

    Prison Governors Association chairman Charles Bushell told BBC News all 129 prisons in England and Wales had suffered disruption.

    During the day, prisoners were kept locked in their cells and senior managers took charge of duties such as distributing meals. Visitors were also turned away and court appearances cancelled.

    The POA’s national executive committee, who are due to meet in London in the evening, are yet to issue formal instructions to its members on how to respond to the injunction.

    BBC correspondent Daniel Sandford said the union appeared to be using “delaying tactics” to stretch the dispute out, potentially risking the government seeking a further order from the courts for breaching the injunction.

    ‘Widespread’ action

    Earlier this year the independent pay review body for prisons recommended to ministers salaries ranging from £12,000 for auxiliary staff to almost £32,000 for principal officers, representing a 2.5% rise in two stages.

    Most prison officers start on around £17,700.

    The POA, which has 28,000 members, said up to 90% of those who had been due on duty had joined the strike.

    It said the walkout had been “widespread and unprecedented” and there was “lockdown” – where prisoners are confined to their cells – at most prisons.

    Affected prisons include:

    • Liverpool prison where about 25-30 striking officers temporarily suspend their action to deal with three prisoners who had climbed on to a roof
    • Birmingham prison where a mass outdoor meeting has taken place; all 1,450 prisoners are locked down, and fire engines attended to deal with two minor fires, one inside a cell and a rubbish fire outside
    • Bristol prison where more than 120 officers joined a picket line after serving breakfast to inmates. Staff returned to work at 1550 BST
    • Wormwood Scrubs in west London, where the 1,300 prisoners are being looked after by eight governors
      Bristol prison

      Officers at Bristol prison began to return to duties in the afternoon

    • Manchester prison – formerly known as Strangeways – where plans are in place to serve packed lunches and dinners to inmates in their cells
    • Cardiff prison where inmates locked in their cells have taunted a picket line in the car park with shouts of “You’re breaking the law”
    • Dartmoor, Exeter and Channings Wood prisons in south-west England
    • Wakefield prison, where POA officials claimed the 745 inmates – including Soham killer Ian Huntley – were being guarded by no more than 20 senior managers
    • Frankland high-security prison, County Durham, where a handful of striking officers volunteered to go back to work because of the danger posed by inmates
    • Wellingborough Prison in Northamptonshire where the site is being run by the governor and other civilian staff

    The Association of Chief Police Officers said police cells were being used for any inmates who could not return to their normal prison after court and for newly sentenced prisoners.

    ‘Overwhelming case’

    The prison population in England and Wales is close to capacity levels, with about 80,000 people held.

    At the High Court, the judge, Mr Justice Ramsey, said there was an “overwhelming case” that a legally binding agreement had been broken.

    Lawyers for the Ministry of Justice told the High Court the strike had meant there was a backlog of 900 people waiting to be transferred to prisons.

    The hearing was also told a prisoner had been found dead in a cell.

    A government lawyer said he was not making a link between the strike and the death but it was a concern.

    Staff at the category-C Acklington prison in Northumberland later said they did not believe the death of William Stuart Laidlaw, who was found hanged at 0930 BST, was connected to the strike.

    Mr Justice Ramsey said the effect of any strike would have “particularly difficult consequences” to prisons already filled to capacity.

    “Given the current position in the prisons, it is clear in my view that this is an appropriate case where the administration of the prison service as part of the administration of justice in the country requires the grant of the injunction,” he said.

    In Bristol, local POA representative Paul Moltby said he had seen the wording of the injunction and believed officers had no choice but to return to work.

    “The judge makes it quite clear that anybody who does not go back to work… does not follow the court order… will be in contempt of court and that is not a position we feel that we can put prison officers in,” he said.

    Shadow minister for justice Edward Garnier said the government had “mis-managed, both strategically and on a day-to-day basis the prison estate” and “wound-up” the POA.

    Officials say Justice Secretary Jack Straw is planning to hold talks with the POA next week but deny the government had failed to address concerns about pay and falling morale.

    BBC

    A Legacy of Legitimizing Torture

    0

    By Robert Scheer

    The resignation of the torturer in chief was noted by his patron, the president, as an unfortunate day for American democracy. “It’s sad that we live in a time when a talented and honorable person like Alberto Gonzales is impeded from doing important work because his good name was dragged through the mud for political reasons,” President Bush lamented on Monday.

    What good name? After all, Bush picked Gonzales to be the nation’s highest law enforcement official only after Gonzales had proved his mettle for the job as White House counsel. His legal advice to the president was that torture is a legitimate option, because Bush’s self-defined “war on terror” wiped out all prior legal restraint and in particular “renders obsolete Geneva’s strict limitations on questioning of enemy prisoners.”

    Gonzales’ infamous memo to the president from Jan. 25, 2002, also rendered obsolete, among other constitutional safeguards, the division of powers that provides a congressional check on the executive branch. According to Gonzales’ professional judgment, the president was no longer bound to observe the 1996 War Crimes Act, which allows criminal prosecution of Americans for violating the Geneva Conventions and for “outrages upon personal dignity.” According to that law, both the president and his attorney general potentially would be subject to severe penalties, including death, for the systematic torture they authorized.

    No wonder Bush needed to appoint Gonzales as attorney general, lest some enterprising Justice Department lawyer dare expose the criminality emanating from the White House. Not a fanciful concern, given that we have since learned that the previous attorney general, John Ashcroft, had serious reservations about breaking the laws protecting fundamental human rights. Indeed, the most clarifying moment of Gonzales’ government service was his nighttime visit to Ashcroft’s hospital bed, where the then-White House counsel failed to deceive an ailing Ashcroft into authorizing an extension of government surveillance. Ashcroft refused and was protected from further harassment only by the intervention of FBI Director Robert S. Mueller III. The problem presented by Ashcroft’s display of legal integrity was eliminated when Bush gave his job to Gonzales.

    While the media are once again buying the White House backroom spin that the president’s error in the Gonzales scandal is one of misplaced loyalty to a friend who didn’t perform up to expectations, the truth is that Bush promoted Gonzales because of his assaults on the Constitution and not in ignorance of that sorry record. As the president put it in “reluctantly” accepting the resignation of “a man of integrity, decency and principle”: “As Attorney General and before that, as White House Counsel, Al Gonzales has played a role in shaping our policies in the war on terror. … The PATRIOT Act, the Military Commissions Act and other important laws bear his imprint.”

    Frighteningly accurate testimony: that the Gonzales legacy will live on long after his government tenure. One aspect of that dreadful legacy, not often remarked upon, is that Gonzales shaped Bush’s selections of lifetime appointees to the judiciary that will preside for decades to come. As Bush observed: “As Attorney General, he played an important role in helping to confirm two fine jurists in Chief Justice Roberts and Justice Samuel Alito. He did an outstanding job as White House Counsel, identifying and recommending the best nominees to fill critically important federal court vacancies.”

    One of those critical vacancies was filled on Gonzales’ recommendation by the appointment of then-Assistant Attorney General Jay S. Bybee as a judge on the U.S. Ninth Circuit Court of Appeals. Bybee distinguished himself in the eyes of Gonzales and the president by being the author of the 50-page “Bybee memo” of Aug. 1, 2002, which held that torturing al-Qaida captives “may be justified” and that international laws against torture “may be unconstitutional if applied to interrogations” conducted under President Bush. But Bybee went further than merely sweeping aside the restraints of international law, concluding, “Finally, even if an interrogation method might violate Sect. 2340A [of the U.S. Torture Convention passed in 1994] necessity or self-defense could provide justification that would eliminate any criminal liability.”

    The Bybee memo protected Gonzales and Bush from being branded with the “torturer” label by arguing that torture “covers only extreme acts … where the pain is physical, it must be of an intensity akin to that which accompanies serious physical injury such as death or organ failure.” Oh? Maybe my opening sentence for this column was too harsh. Surely Gonzales, and the president who still adores him, intended all along to draw the line at organ failure. 

    Pot Growers Are New Target in “War on Terror”

    1

    Under Bush, terror has become a justification for any and every abuse of power.

    By Scott Thill

    Last time we checked in on the bizarro nexus between cannabis and terrorism, it was none other than actor/director Tommy Chong who was feeling the Bush administration’s post-9/11 wrath. In fact, the stoner icon, whose fabled act was concurrently resuscitated for Fox’s drugged and confused comedy hit That 70s Show, was being slapped by John Ashcroft with a nine-month prison bid, a $20,000 fine and over $100,000 in seized assets for selling bongs. The terrorism connection? He was sentenced on Sept. 11, 2003. And if you think that’s a specious connection, it’s only gotten worse since. In fact, over the last few years, “terrorist” has become an epithet for all seasons.

    In 2003, Iraq occupation architect Richard Perle slapped investigative journalist Seymour Hersh with the term, saying, “Look, Sy Hersh is the closest thing American journalism has to a terrorist, frankly.” As if filing a story about the doomed occupation of a sovereign state in the pages of the New Yorker was the same thing as flying a 747 into the World Trade Center.

    In 2004, Secretary of Education Rod Paige called the National Education Association, the country’s largest teachers union, “a terrorist organization” because of what Paige defined as the “obstructionist scare tactics” used by its lobbyists. Because we all know it’s every educator’s dream to buck the systemby blowing themselves up in front of their students.

    And just this month, the Bush administration decided to employ the term to legally target the entire Iranian Revolutionary Guard, a sovereign nation’s standing army numbering in the hundreds of thousands. When you want a war that badly, you’ll pretty much do or say anything to get it.

    So how does the Bush administration get away with crying terrorist at every opportunity? Say hello to the Military Commissions Act. Thanks to this 2006 piece of legislation, terrorism has become the basis of American foreign and domestic policy. Yes, the term has become equivalent to everything from ideologically driven violence to petty theft, and can be used to incarcerate, exterminate or character assassinate anything in sight.

    It’s no wonder then that federal officials are now revisiting their previously failed effort to link terrorism to cannabis, the only real cash cow in the government’s so-called War on Drugs. Only difference is, this time, they don’t have Tommy Chong as a scapegoat.

    Unable or unwilling to solve the nation’s crippling meth addiction or its hypocritical dependency on prescribed narcotics like oxycontin, the Office of National Drug Control Policy (ONDCP) recently rang the terrorism alarm to nail pot growers in Redding’s Shasta-Trinity National Forest in California. Along the way, ONDCP “czar” John Walters showed off not only the Bush administration’s love of twisted terminology but also its subcultural savvy by coining a memorable phrase of his own.

    “We have kind of a reefer blindness,” Walters explained during a Redding press conference on the ONDCP’s Operation Alesia, a cannabis-eradication program coordinated by the California National Guard’s Counterdrug Taskforce and the Shasta County Sheriff’s Office. Walters followed that clever turn of phrase with the reliable terrorist designation to describe the armed growers cultivating cannabis in Shasta County. “These people are armed; they’re dangerous. [They’re] violent criminal terrorists.” He even went so far to argue that the “terrorists” growing weed in Shasta County, as the Redding Record Searchlight reported, “wouldn’t hesitate to help other terrorists get into the country with the aim of causing mass casualties.”

    Except there seem to be a couple major problems with Walters’ characterizations. For one, Walters declined to explain during the press conference what Operation Alesia’s specific goals were. More importantly, he didn’t offer up any concrete names of the terrorists or their ideological objectives. What legalization advocates and law enforcement authorities alike were left with was yet another hazy strategy based on loose terminology whose only purpose it seems is to confiscate as much pot as possible from Shasta County’s public lands.

    A noble pursuit to be sure, but counterterrorism? Hardly.

    Especially when rural Shasta County’s biggest problem is meth, not marijuana, addiction. Further, Walters’ coded terminology, when unmasked, is not employed to raise awareness of al Qaeda’s grand cannabis cultivation strategy to destabilize the American government, but rather to inflame regional biases against, you guessed it, Mexicans. Especially the undocumented variety, who are “the other terrorists” Walters mentioned looking to get into the country and, what again? I asked Mike Odle, public affairs and communications officer for Shasta-Trinity National Forest’s Northern California Coordination Center to elaborate on what was behind the increase in cultivated cannabis on Shasta’s public lands.

    “Most of the increase can be attributed to the proliferation of foreign Drug Trafficking Organizations (DTOs), mostly Mexican in origin, which operate in the Shasta-Trinity National Forest and throughout California and much of the United States,” Odle explained to me by email. “Frequently using illegal aliens residing outside the United States, or recently smuggled across the [sic] boarder, these Mexican criminal groups establish, maintain and protect an increasing number of clandestine operations.”

    Yet, predictably, Odle couldn’t explain what made them terrorists.

    “Some DTOs have been linked by law enforcement and investigations to terrorist organizations and pose a substantial and increasing threat to national security,” he added in a subsequent email. “Our primary concern here on the Shasta-Trinity National Forest is the safety of our forest visitors and agency employees and the negative impacts marijuana has on the environment and natural resources, no matter what name is given to the DTOs that are illegally growing marijuana on America’s public lands.”

    No matter what name is given? Easy enough if you’re the one doing the naming. If you’re the one being flippantly tagged a terrorist? Not so much.

    Plus, there are enough holes in the argument to plant your own cannabis seeds. To start with, cannabis may be many things, but it is far from an environmental negative. It has been used for medicinal purposes for thousands of years, can grow in almost any climate, and is a naturally occurring dioecious perennial. (In other words, it’s not fossil fuel.) Further, Odle’s claim that safety is Shasta’s first concern is understandable, but he offered no examples of violent activity by any of the area growers to legitimize the ONDCP’s inflammatory language. Sure, the fact that “some” DTOs have been linked to terrorist organizations is educational, but as with everything the ONDCP touches, specifics are elusive and generalizations are everywhere.

    I pressed Odle for further clarification on the terrorism question. But instead of al Qaeda, all I got was more obfuscation. And more Mexicans.

    “Do [sic] to ongoing investigations, I am limited in what I can share,” Odle explained in another email. “When we do the investigations we try to get up as far as we can into the food chain. We work closely with the DEA, FBI, ICE and other law enforcement agencies that have the capabilities to identify who these folks are and what links they may or may not have.”

    Fair enough. It’s out of his hands. Any concrete local examples?

    “I can [sic] site an example in a case we are now finished investigating. The Forest Service was heavily involved with the eradication of marijuana gardens associated with the Magana drug cartel. The Magana drug cartel operation and investigation occurred throughout National Forests in California, Utah and Arkansas, with direct ties to Mexico. Investigators in the Magana case said cartel leaders brought in illegal workers from the Mexican states of Michoacan and Jalisco.”

    In short, terrorism isn’t the real problem here, it’s illegal immigration. Not convinced? When you get a chance, search Google for “Magana drug cartel” and let me know if you can find anything. Even better, try the ONDCP, and let me know if anything unrelated to cocaine shows up. Even if you give Walters, Odle and other so-called counterterrorism experts their due on the Magana drug cartel or other so-called terrorist organizations who the ONDCP cannot actually name (making sure to look up the definition of “cartel” in the process, if you want to be exhaustive about it), what you end up with are cannabis traffickers and cultivators operating illegally on public lands using undocumented immigrants.

    Illegal activity? Fine. Terrorism? Are you high?

    The Bush administration’s hypocritical bait-and-switch between terrorism and immigration is clumsy for certain, but it is especially glaring in light of a recent Washington Times article criticizing none other than President Bush himself. According to the piece, a “2006 audit showed federal, state and local governments are among the biggest employers of the half-million persons in the U.S. illegally using ‘non-work’ Social Security numbers — numbers issued legally, but with specific instructions that the holders are not authorized to work in the U.S.” And that charge was leveled by Iowa Republican and ranking member of the House Judiciary Committee’s immigration subcommittee Rep. Steve King, in a politically conservative publication founded by Rev. Sun Myung Moon, cult leader of the Unification Church.

    Even the Moonies think that Bush needs to start throwing what the president’s own drug czar would call terrorists out of his own White House, before he starts worrying about anyone else. After all, according to the audit, his own government is a much worse offender than the ragged Magana cartel growing cannabis in the forests of Redding.

    By the time the ONDCP’s talking points touched on other byproducts of commercially cultivated cannabis terrorism — “fire violations, unsanitary conditions, littering, smoking, building unauthorized structures, unauthorized camping and cutting trees without a permit to name a few,” in Odle’s words — I began to more fully understand the power of language. By capitalizing on a nationally manufactured fear and simply merging words into each other, the Bush administration has created from its hyperreal imagination a living policy that can have real-world ramifications for those trampled beneath its fluid terminology.

    The good news is that the Democrats in Congress are at least trying to make up for their heinous complicity in the Military Commissions Act, whose passage helped enable this linguistic nightmare in the first place. As recently as July 2007, Committee on Oversight and Government Reform chairman Rep. Henry Waxman wrote Walters asking why American taxpayers have been footing the bill for ONDCP officials to travel around the country with Republican candidates stumping for election at the behest of Karl Rove. Striking hard at Bush administration politicization of the ONDCP is a good start, but stopping their ability to label anyone anything they want would go much farther to restoring sensible policy, on drugs and everything else, for the rest of our new millennium.

    We’re going to need help soon, if the recent white papers on drug abuse from the ONDCP are any indication. Because they’ve enlisted God for help in beating back the devil weed, as their fact sheet “Marijuana and Kids: Faith” explains: “Religion and religiosity repeatedly correlate with lower teen and adult marijuana and substance use rates and buffer the impact of life stress which can lead to marijuana and substance use. … Other studies show that teens who don’t view faith as important are up to four times more likely to use marijuana.”

    In other words, smoke up, heretical terrorist! You’re not only fueling al Qaeda’s mass murder by purchasing weed cultivated by illegal Mexicans in the rural public lands of the world, but you’re also turning your back on God in the process. As well as replacing the Bush administration’s real world with your selfish virtual reality in which cannabis is a relatively harmless, naturally occurring plant that can chill you out as much as it can fill you out. A massive, multiplayer simulation where pot is a viable medicinal alternative to synthesized painkillers like oxycontin, which ease your agony by killing you off altogether.

    According to the Bush administration and its politicized ONDCP, you need to unplug from that moonbat matrix and start praying. Fast. Or else.

    NASA: Astronauts sober for space

    0

    By Seth Borenstein

    There is no evidence astronauts were drunk or had been drinking heavily before launching into space, an internal NASA investigation found Wednesday.

    An independent astronaut health panel’s report of two unsubstantiated instances of heavy alcohol use before flights grabbed headlines in July. But when NASA’s safety chief tried to confirm the allegations, he came up empty.

    “I was unable to verify any case in which an astronaut spaceflight crewmember was impaired on launch day,” or any case where a manager disregarded a recommendation that an astronaut not fly, said a 45-page report prepared by NASA safety chief Bryan O’Connor. He is a former astronaut and shuttle accident investigator.

    O’Connor’s review went back 20 years and involved interviews with 90 astronauts, flight surgeons and other NASA officials.

    However, O’Connor said flight surgeons should play a stronger “oversight” role in launch day activities.

    Twenty flight surgeons signed an e-mail to O’Connor saying they have never seen any drunken astronauts before a launch or training jet flight.

    O’Connor looked through 40,134 government and contractor reports of mishaps and problems dating back through 1984 — many of them anonymous — and none of them involved alcohol or drug abuse by astronauts.

    Wednesday’s report confirms what top NASA officials had been saying in the last few weeks: There was no proof of drunken astronauts before launch.

    In July, an independent panel said there were at least two unverified and unidentified instances of astronauts drinking heavily before a flight. The panel was formed to look at astronaut health issues because of the bizarre case of astronaut Lisa Nowak, who was arrested and charged with attempted kidnapping of a romantic rival.

    The panel’s 12-page report last month said: “Interviews with both flight surgeons and astronauts identified some episodes of heavy use of alcohol by astronauts in the immediate preflight period, which has led to safety concerns.”

    One instance involved a shuttle astronaut that a colleague claimed had had to much too drink; the colleague alerted others only after the launch was delayed because of mechanical instances.

    O’Connor, using the clues in the July report, figured that that claim was probably one of three missions between 1990 and 1995. So he talked to at least two astronauts on each of those missions and the astronaut chiefs at the time and no one verified the claims.

    The other involved an astronaut drinking alcohol before flying on a Russian Soyuz capsule to the international space station. Drinking, especially toasts, are common in the Russian space program.

    O’Connor’s report said the claim was that a flight surgeon was worried the night before launch that the astronaut was so drunk that “he might suffer an airway obstruction.” O’Connor said he was limited by privacy issues, but he couldn’t confirm this either.

    In both cases — in which no names were given — the report said that flight surgeons and/or fellow astronauts raised safety worries with nearby officials in charge, yet “the individuals were still permitted to fly.”

    NASA administrator Michael Griffin this month pronounced pre-launch preparations for astronauts to be so visible that it is nearly impossible to sneak a drink.

    “They would have to really want to drink and hide it really well,” Griffin said before the launch of the shuttle Endeavour. He called the charges “uncredible.”

    Documents Shed Light on FBI Electronic Surveillance Technology

    0

    The Electronic Frontier Foundation (EFF) has obtained documents through the Freedom of Information Act that reveal the inner workings of the FBI’s Digital Collection System Network (DCSNet), a software suite that allows the Bureau to conduct surveillance on a wide variety of digital devices.

    As Ryan Singel writes in his extensive report for Wired News:

    Many of the details of the system and its full capabilities were redacted from the documents acquired by the Electronic Frontier Foundation, but they show that DCSNet includes at least three collection components, each running on Windows-based computers.

    The $10 million DCS-3000 client, also known as Red Hook, handles pen-registers and trap-and-traces, a type of surveillance that collects signaling information — primarily the numbers dialed from a telephone — but no communications content. (Pen registers record outgoing calls; trap-and-traces record incoming calls.)

    DCS-6000, known as Digital Storm, captures and collects the content of phone calls and text messages for full wiretap orders.

    A third, classified system, called DCS-5000, is used for wiretaps targeting spies or terrorists.

    You can read more commentary from Ryan on Threat Level. Professors Matt Blaze and Steve Bellovin have also weighed in on the security implications of the system.

    EFF obtained these documents through a FOIA lawsuit filed against the FBI last year. A federal judge has ordered [PDF] the Bureau to turn over new documents every month, so check back often the learn more about DCSNet.

    As with all our FOIA documents, EFF encourages you to go through these files yourself and let the world know what you find. We ask only that you please mention EFF if you use these documents in any way. We’re a nonprofit organization, and our funding for the FOIA Litigation for Accountable Government (FLAG) Project depends on showing that our work is important and relevant.

    For more information about these documents or EFF’s FLAG Project, please contact EFF Staff Attorney Marcia Hofmann at marcia(at)eff.org.

    £5.2 billion extra to be put into police state

    0

    QAS

    Public spending on identity management (IdM) is set to grow by around £5.2 billion over the next four years as government departments look to improve their data authentication systems, a recent report has revealed.

    According to the Kable report, the National Identity Card Scheme, the National Police Database and the National Offenders Management Systems will be the biggest spenders over the coming years, with the sector likely to move away from beginning new projects and instead integrating the existing systems.

    At a local level, the main developments in data authentication will come as authorities look to introduce smart cards to be used to access services and to pay for public transport.

    “The huge potential for growth of identity management solutions will rely on the government’s ability to provide its citizens with a sense of empowerment and standardise the use of identity practices,” said Philippe Martin, a senior analyst at Kable.

    “It will take many years to get there, as many large, complex legacy systems will have to change.”

    The report also cited the potential public worries concerning security, highlighting the importance of data security and for companies and financial institutions to adopt authentication software to protect their clients.

    Bush’s brand-new poodle

    1

    By Pepe Escobar

    He was impregnably armored by his good intentions and his ignorance. – Graham Greene, The Quiet American

    PARIS – With former British prime minister Tony Blair out of the picture, there’s now a newer, leaner, meaner, adrenaline-packed “Made in France” version. Thanks to his unrelenting support for President George W Bush’s war on Iraq, Blair used to be derided in all corners of the globe as Bush’s poodle. Now the new self-appointed lap dog is French President Nicolas Sarkozy.

    The hyperactive “Sarkozy the First” – as he is widely referred to in France – has just pronounced his first major foreign-policy speech, to an annual conference of 200-odd French ambassadors from posts around the world. He took no time to engage himself in the current White House and neo-conservative-promoted Iran-demonization campaign.

    Neo-cons and their ilk in France, plus mostly sycophant media, obviously loved it, with instant geopoliticians raving about the “prudent” and “firm” stand behind Sarkozy’s rhetoric.

    He said an Iranian nuclear bomb would be “unacceptable” – as if the United Nations’ International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA) was on the verge of discovering one or two hidden under a pile of exquisite Hamadan carpets.

    Sarkozy is in favor of even more sanctions against Iran, but is willing to talk in the event the Islamic Republic suspends its nuclear-enrichment program, which Iran has a right under the nuclear Non-Proliferation Treaty to pursue. So Iran must renounce an inalienable right for the West to be willing to discuss substance. Sarkozy has already coined the sound bite framing the “catastrophic” alternative: “The Iranian bomb, or the bombing of Iran.”

    Sarkozy now officially joins the US thunder and lightning unleashed by the White House, the Pentagon, Republicans, Democrats and corporate media, which all take for granted the “all options are on the table” scenario as far as Iran is concerned.

    With the IAEA making steady progress on ironing out misunderstandings on Iran’s nuclear program, and signing an understanding to that effect, the new casus belli du jour for attacking Iran is that it is helping Shi’ite guerrillas kill American soldiers in Iraq. Thus the White House’s proposed designation of the Iranian Revolutionary Guards Corps as a terrorist outfit – tantamount to declaring war on the elite group.

    Sarkozy for his part re-attacks on the nuclear front. Now that’s some real trans-Atlantic entente. Sarkozy said everything must be done to “prevent a confrontation between Islam and the West”. His idea of preventing confrontation is to antagonize Iran and – why not? – Turkey.

    Sarko stressed that the “only” option for Turkey’s accession talks with the European Union is a fuzzy partnership framed by a Mediterranean Union (which, he also stressed, should start by 2009). He remains absolutely against EU membership for Turkey. His vague proposal is to set up a “committee of wise men” to study where Europe is heading. The Istanbul daily Zaman tried to put on a brave face, stressing that even though Sarkozy prefers an association, he “will not be opposed” to new negotiations between the EU and Turkey.

    Sarkozy vaguely suggested that a possible solution to breach the West/Islam abyss would be for France to “help Muslim countries to have access to nuclear energy” (would Iran be included?). He did not say a word about the North Atlantic Treaty Organization fighting in Afghanistan; just that European meddling in Afghan affairs would be in vain if Pakistan “remained the refuge of Taliban and al-Qaeda”.

    Not only pontificating over the troubles of the Muslim world, Sarkozy also criticized a “certain brutality” by Russia and China in their thirst for energy in Africa – much to the delight of Washington. But Iraq, for Sarkozy, remains a “tragedy”. He had to take pains to stress that France “is and continues to be hostile to his war” – something that may distress Washington, but not as much as former president Jacques Chirac’s stubborn opposition to the war.

    The only solution in Iraq will be “political”, implying “a clear timetable for the retreat of foreign troops”. Here we have Sarkozy involuntarily joining Shi’ite leader Muqtada al-Sadr – and the Iranians.

    The Middle East is awash in so much grief that few in the region will bother to listen to what the new French mission civilisatrice amounts to – apart from the hard sell of Louis Vuitton bags to local elites.

    Meanwhile in Paris, relatively few voices are concerned over the Bush-Sarkozy lovefest – a measure of how Sarkozy, as former prime minister Silvio Berlusconi once did in Italy, exercises almost universal power over the French media (one of his former top advisers now is at the top at TF1, the private channel that subscribes to the Rupert Murdoch/Berlusconi school of mass television).

    The flashy Sarkozy has already been portrayed as the epitome of the new bling-bling right, which has replaced the defunct caviar left; his role models are Rupert “Fox” Murdoch and Bernard Arnault, the first fortune of France and owner, among others, of deluxe conglomerate LVMH.

    First a beaming Sarkozy met with Bush in Maine on August 11 during his tabloid-style holidays – complete with pirate Sarkozy invading a paparazzi boat. Then on August 19 he sent dashing Foreign Minister Bernard Kouchner on a Baghdad tour. Kouchner – who was in favor of the war on Iraq in 2003 – has lost all the credibility he had as “the French doctor” who founded Medecins Sans Frontieres (Doctors Without Borders). He’s now no more than a Sarkozy messenger boy.

    Not happy to be constantly yapping on the phone with his new pal, US Secretary of State Condoleezza Rice, Kouchner made notoriously skillful French diplomats blush in disgust when he told Newsweek that Iraqi Prime Minister Nuri al-Maliki had to go. Maliki demanded an apology; at least Kouchner was gentleman enough to acquiesce.

    Next month, Sarkozy goes back to the US, to attend the United Nations General Assembly. Not only is he eager to do anything to help Bush and “Condoleezza” in Iraq, he now goes all-out neo-con on Iran. After more than 100 days in power, he’s still immensely popular in France, frantically monopolizing the political spectrum on an around-the-clock basis. But he would be wise to spare a thought for what happens to hyperactive poodles that go against their voters’ wishes.

    Pepe Escobar is the author of Globalistan: How the Globalized World is Dissolving into Liquid War (Nimble Books, 2007). He may be reached at pepeasia@yahoo.com.

    Announcement Of War Crimes Tribunal

    1

    International Lawyer Alfred Lambremont Webre, JD, MEd, who is a Judge on the Kuala Lumpur International War Crimes Tribunal, will make a public call for an International Citizen’s 9/11 War Crimes Tribunal. He will speak at Ready for Mainstream, a 9/11 Anniversary Conference (Sept.8-9, 2007) at Cooper Union, 7th St and 4th Avenue, New York.

    Information: http://www.ready4mainstream.ny911truth.org/index.html

    According to Independent Scientist Leuren Moret and Alfred Webre, 9/11 was a False Flag Operation to provide a pretext to engage in Genocidal & Ecocidal Depleted Uranium (DU) bombing of Central Asia (Afghanistan and Iraq) in order to secure vast oil and uranium reserves; to roll out a Terror-based National Security state-system world-wide; to implement the final stages of a world Depopulation policy; and to trigger a World War III conflagration. 

    Since 1945, under the Nuremberg Principles, causing aggressive war constitutes the most serious of War Crimes. The International Citizen’s 9/11 War Crimes Tribunal would be convened under the jurisdiction of the Kuala Lumpur International War Crimes Tribunal, established in February 2007 as a permanent citizen’s Tribunal by The Perdana Global Peace Organization, chaired by Tun Dr. Mahathir bin Mohamad, former Prime Minister of Malaysia, who is the first prominent world leader to take up the depleted uranium (DU) radiation issue as an instrumentality of the Depopulation policy.

    As a matter of law, there is a sufficient quantum of evidence for the appointment of an independent prosecutor under Article III(3) of the U.S. Constitution to prosecute treason against President GW Bush; Vice President Richard B. Cheney; and the Secretary of Defense Donald H. Rumsfeld for the armed attack upon the United States on September 11, 2001, in the guise of a False Flag Operation.

    U.S. Congress fails to Act

    The establishment of an International Citizen’s 9/11 War Crimes Tribunal is justified, given that official institutions in the U.S. have failed to assign legal accountability for the False Flag Operation of 9/11. Representative John Conyers, Jr., Chairman of the U.S. House of Representatives Judiciary Committee and his senior staff personally reviewed the 9/11 Independent Prosecutor Act and Congressional Memorandum following the 2006 U.S. Mid-term Election and Senior Staff met twice with representatives of the 9/11 Independent Prosecutor Act. The Chairman refused to introduce the Act, despite support for the Act by his Senior Staff. The 9/11 Commission failed to take testimony under oath from Bush and Cheney, and reached fraudulent conclusions.

    9/11 As A War Crime

    The False Flag Operation of 9/11 was the pretext for, and an integral part of the planning and execution of the illegal War of Aggression in 2001 against Afghanistan and of War Crimes committed by the United States in Afghanistan, as found by the Final Judgment, International Criminal Tribunal for Afghanistan at Tokyo. The Court found the use of Depleted Uranium (DU) weapons in Afghanistan to constitute War Crimes, Genocide, Crimes Against Humanity, and Omnicide. The False Flag Operation of 9/11 is a legal component of these War Crimes, and the perpetrators of 9/11 are guilty Aggressive War, Genocide, Crimes Against Humanity, and War Crimes.

    Information:

    9/11 War Crimes Tribunal:
    http://peaceinspace.blogs.com/911/

    URL of this article:

    http://peaceinspace.blogs.com/911/2007/08/announcement-of.html

    Film Screening: 9/11 Ripple Effect – Morecambe

    0

    Following the recent 6th anniversary of 911, and in commemoration of all the victims of this tragedy, the ‘Red Pill’ group are hosting a free film showing of “911 Ripple Effect”, in the Rainbow Centre, Clarence Street, Morecambe, on Thurs 20th Sept at 7.30pm.

    This is the latest documentary from Dave vonKleist, covering the events that led to the destruction of the WTC towers and the attack on the Pentagon.

    This is a must see for all those interested in the influence these events have had in this country and on its citizens. All are welcome; please come along to see this powerful and thought provoking film.

    Webster Tarpley – Lancaster

    0

    Webster Tarpley

    9 November

    7:00pm

    Hugh Pollard Lecture Theatre, St Martin’ s College, Lancaster

    Free Admission

    US will never let ‘friendly-fire’ witnesses go to a British court

    0

    By

    The families of soldiers killed by American “friendly fire” will never get to see those who may have been responsible for the deaths questioned at inquests, The Times has learnt.

    In an official document seen by this newspaper, the Ministry of Defence makes clear that all requests for US service personnel to give evidence at British inquests will be turned down. The new rules will cover the deaths of the three soldiers killed last week in Afghanistan.

    “The US have confirmed categorically that they will not provide witnesses to attend UK inquests,” the document sent to every coroner in England and Wales states. “While coroners may continue to ask for US witnesses to attend . . . they should be aware that there will in all cases be a refusal.”

    The Ministry of Defence’s “revised arrangements” for its support of inquests into the death of Armed Forces personnel also states that the Americans will in future hand over confidential information for use only in British military boards of inquiry.

    The MoD will not be allowed to retain any of the US-owned material after its investigations are completed, or hand it over to an inquest without specific permission from the American authorities, the document says.

    The document, recently sent to all 115 coroners in England and Wales by the Ministry of Justice, says that the new “mutually agreed” processes are designed to clarify procedures.

    But it has infuriated coroners who are required by law to conduct inquests into the deaths of Armed Forces personnel abroad and who say they will be denied material previously released to them.

    They have demanded a response from ministers and given warning that they may have to lodge a challenge in the courts over the legality of the new arrangements, saying that these could prevent families receiving justice and a “full and fair” inquiry.

    The document has been drawn up after previous friendly-fire incidents, such as that of Lance Corporal of Horse Matty Hull, of the Household Cavalry, who was killed when an American A10 aircraft attacked a British armoured convoy in Iraq in 2003.

    A spokesman for the MoD insisted that the document did not represent new policy or a change of position. Nor was the intention to hamper the coroners’ investigations, the official said. The aim was to try to find ways to help coroners to obtain the information they needed.

    However, the document — sent out by the MoD policy director, Desmond Bowen — says that the US “has reviewed its approach to how such material will be released to the UK Government in future” and confirmed its intent to only provide its classified reports to military investigations. After that, the information “should be returned . . . with no copies retained”.

    The document outlines ways that coroners can still request relevant nonclassified information. It says that the MoD will still forward coroners’ requests for US material but cautions that unless these are lodged early, and in writing, the US authorities are unlikely to be able to respond. The MoD also says that it will provide the reports from its own military inquiries and if US witnesses cannot be provided, it will work to find a British expert to help the coroner on a specific point.

    Coroners who have handled the inquests have already been highly critical over the apparent lack of cooperation from the Americans over inquests into the deaths of service personnel.

    Andrew Walker, the Oxfordshire assistant deputy coroner, berated the Pentagon in April for failing to send witnesses for the inquest of Lance Corporal Hull.

    Last night the families of the three soldiers killed by a US bomb dropped by an F15 aircraft last week in Afghanistan called on the Americans to release all available evidence on the latest friendly-fire incident for the inquest.

    Private Robert “Fozzy” Foster, 19, was killed alongside Aaron McClure, 19, and John Thrumble, 21, all from 1st Battalion The Royal Anglian Regiment, when a 500lb bomb was dropped from a US F15 aircraft.

    Steve Foster, Private Foster’s uncle, told The Times last night: “As a family we want to find out what happened to Robert — why he was killed by an allied bomb. We can not see why the American pilot and those who provided the intelligence or gave commands from the ground cannot give evidence at the inquest. We need to know what happened so it can be prevented from happening again.

    “We need to know if the pilot was feeling hyped up, if he was calm, what he had been told before the operation, what happened on the day. Why is it that our closest ally is refusing to provide the evidence that might explain what happened to Robert? I am sure that if an American was killed in a British attack then those involved would give evidence.

    Fatal errors

    2007 Three soldiers from the 1st Battalion The Royal Anglian Regiment killed when a US F15 bombed their position while they were fighting in Helmand province, southern Afghanistan.

    2003 Lance Corporal of Horse Matty Hull of the Household Cavalry was killed when a US A10 attacked his convoy in Iraq. The pilot mistook British identification panels for Iraqi rockets

    2003 Flight Lieutenants Kevin Main and David Williams were killed while returning from a mission in Iraq when a US Patriot missile unit opened fire, believing the Tornado to be an Iraqi missile

    Miliband: We will decide when UK troops leave Iraq

    2

    By Andrew Grice

    The Bush administration will not have a veto over the Government’s plans to pull Britain’s troops out of Iraq, ministers have made clear.

    David Miliband, the Foreign Secretary, said decisions about troop withdrawals would be taken independently in the “British national interest” and stressed the situation facing British forces in Basra was “very different” to the one facing their American counterparts in Baghdad.

    Downing Street backed his stance as Gordon Brown came under fire from critics of the war for refusing to set a timetable for Britain’s exit from Iraq. The Prime Minister will make a detailed statement in October on the future of the 5,500 troops deployed in Iraq.

    The issue is highly sensitive for US-UK relations. The Bush administration, which may press on with its “surge” in Baghdad after a review next month, does not want Britain to send a conflicting signal and there are fears in Washington the US may have to send more troops to southern Iraq to fill the gap left by a British pull-out.

    Asked on BBC Radio 4 whether what was decided in relation to Baghdad by President George Bush would not affect British decisions, Mr Miliband said: “Absolutely. Our decisions about Basra are about the situation on the ground in Basra, not the situation on the ground in Baghdad.” He said British forces had “very clear objectives that Iraq should be run by the Iraqis”.

    Attacks on British forces have intensified in recent months, with insurgents seeking to portray an expected withdrawal to an airbase outside Basra as a humiliating retreat. The Foreign Secretary accepted that British troops faced a “very difficult, very tough” situation but rejected suggestions that they were already withdrawing.

    The Prime Minister’s spokesman said UK operations would be conducted in “close consultation with our allies” but said Britain had to take decisions based on the situation on the ground in Iraq, and those facing Basra and Baghdad were different.

    Mr Brown’s holding statement on Monday, which have may have been designed to reassure Washington, came in response to Sir Menzies Campbell, the Liberal Democrat leader, who demanded an exit timetable. Yesterday, Sir Menzies said Mr Brown’s letter to him could have been written by Mr Blair. “We have a moral obligation to the Iraqi Government, but we have a moral obligation towards the young men and women that we send to do difficult and dangerous tasks,” he said. “The level of casualties which were taken, not just the tragic deaths which occur, but the injuries which are being caused, that level in my view is now unacceptable for any perceived benefit.”

    The Liberal Democrat leader added: “What are we achieving politically for Iraq and what are we achieving militarily for ourselves? There are no legitimate or coherent answers to those questions.”

    He said the money spent on British operations in Iraq should be spent on equipping the armed forces “to a far greater and better extent which would give us a better opportunity to win in Afghanistan”. He added: “The risk is that we are sacrificing Afghanistan on the altar of Iraq.”

    Sir Menzies yesterday declared the operation in Iraq a “failure”, becoming the most senior political figure in Britain to do so. Ministers dismissed his claim.

    But the independent Iraq Commission, which called recently for a new approach in the country, urged Mr Brown to take firm control of the destiny of British troops in Iraq rather than rely on statements about “the situation on the ground.”

    US intensifies war of words with Iran

    1

    · US president accuses Tehran of arming militants
    · Speech aimed at shoring up support for ‘surge’

    Ed Pilkington in New York
    Wednesday August 29, 2007
    The Guardian

    George Bush speaks at the 89th annual American Legion convention in Reno, Nevada.
    George Bush speaks at the 89th annual American Legion convention in Reno, Nevada. Photograph: Mandel Ngan/AFP/Getty Images
     

    George Bush yesterday ramped up the war of words between the US and Iran, accusing Tehran of threatening to place the Middle East under the shadow of a nuclear holocaust and revealing that he had authorised US military commanders in Iraq to “confront Tehran’s murderous activities”.In a speech designed to shore up US public opinion behind his unpopular strategy in Iraq, the president reserved his strongest words for the regime of Mahmoud Ahmadinejad, which he accused of openly supporting violent forces within Iraq. Iran, he said, was responsible for training extremist Shia factions in Iraq, supplying them with weapons, including sophisticated roadside bombs. Iran has denied all these accusations.

    Mr Bush referred specifically to 240mm rockets which he said were made in Iran this year and smuggled into Iraq.

    “Iran has long been a source of trouble in the region,” he said.” Iran’s active pursuit of technology that could lead to nuclear weapons threatens to put a region already known for instability and violence under the shadow of a nuclear holocaust.”

    The blunt terms in which Mr Bush portrayed the Iranian threat, and his threat of military confrontation with Tehran involving US troops based in Iraq, elevated the tense standoff between Washington and Tehran to a new level.

    The speech also contained the implicit desire on Mr Bush’s part for regime change, calling for “an Iran whose government is accountable to its people, instead of to leaders who promote terror and pursue the technology that could be used to develop nuclear weapons”.

    Equally menacing words emanated from Tehran yesterday, where Mr Ahmadinejad said US influence in the region was collapsing so fast that a power vacuum would soon be created. “Of course, we are prepared to fill the gap,” he said.

    Though the Iranian president said he backed the leadership of the Iraqi prime minister, Nuri al-Maliki, and welcomed the involvement of Saudi Arabia, his offer to occupy the space the Americans might leave behind is unlikely to cool emotions in Washington.

    He went on to deride the possibility of the US pursuing military action in Iran, saying it was in no position to do so and claimed that Iran had already acquired enriched nuclear fuels, though they would only be used for peaceful purposes.

    In a further cause of tension, Mr Bush accused the Quds force within Iran’s revolutionary guards of leading the supply chain to Iraqi extremist groups. As the Guardian revealed earlier this month, the Bush administration is preparing to declare the 125,000-strong Revolutionary Guard Corps a “global terrorist organisation” – a move that would be seen as provocative within Tehran.

    According to reports from Baghdad last night, a group of Iranians were detained last night in a raid by US troops on a hotel in the city. Of 10 people arrested, seven were said to be Iranian, including an employee of the Iranian embassy and six members of Iran’s electricity ministry in Iraq to discuss contracts for electric power stations. It was not immediately clear why the men had been arrested, or where they had been taken. The US military would only say the action was part of an on-going operation.

    Mr Bush’s bullish talk of his determination to “take the fight to the enemy” in the carefully choreographed setting of a veterans’ convention in Reno, Nevada, was the second of a two-part appeal by him to shore up public support for his flagging strategy on Iraq. In the first speech, made last week, he invoked Vietnam to argue that quitting Iraq now could put the lives of millions of innocent civilians at risk.

    Mr Bush yesterday vowed to persevere with his controversial military policy in Iraq, insisting that political and security progress was being made, despite a rising tide of dissent even from high up within his Republican party.

    “Our strategy is this: every day we work to protect the American people. We will fight them over there so that we don’t have to fight them in the United States of America,” he said.

    The twin speeches were intended as preparation for a crucial series of debates on Iraq that will dominate Washington for the next few weeks.

    In a fortnight the senior general in Iraq, General David Petraeus, and American ambassador in Iraq, Ryan Crocker, will give two days of testimony in which they are likely to argue that the troop “surge” is having some beneficial impact on security levels, though political progress lags behind.

    Under the current policy, US troop numbers in Iraq have risen by 30,000 to about 165,000.

    As the climax of these intense hearings, Mr Bush himself will present his latest assessment.

    Yesterday’s speech was the latest clear indication that he will resist any attempt to change course in the prosecution of the war.

    Mr Bush’s latest attempt to reassure the American people that the war is moving in the right direction came on another tumultuous day in Iraq.

    Hundreds of thousands of pilgrims attending a Shia festival in Kerbala, 68 miles south-west of Baghdad, were ordered to leave the city after intense fighting broke out, reportedly between warring Shia factions. At least 52 people have been killed since Monday, mostly police officers engaging in the battle.

    Israel Assassinates 11 Yr Old Sitting In A Fig Tree

    0

    By Mahmoud Al Qarnawi

    The Israeli occupying forces shot intensively at a child on Friday, while he was sitting in a fig tree in Seida village, near the northern West Bank town of Tulkarem.

    11-year-old Mahmoud Al Qarnawi was left bleeding on the ground by the Israeli troops. When his mother asked the soldiers if her son was alive, they said “maybe”.
    The child had Israeli citizenship, but was visiting his relatives in the Palestinian West Bank village.
    Ma’an’s correspondent in Tulkarem met with Mahmoud’s family. They said that Israeli Special Forces had shot and killed the child.
    Mahmoud’s sister, 16-year-old Ruqaiya, said she had watched as Mahmoud was murdered.
    “Terrifying”
    Ruqaiya said, “I heard the sounds of intensive shooting behind the house, I opened our gate to see what was happening and one of the soldiers shot at me. But I wasn’t hurt. I sat in a room and minutes later my mother came.
    “I went outside with my mother to witness the most terrifying thing I have seen in my life.”
    Ruqaiya continued, “Mahmoud was on the ground under the fig tree. He was moving but without sound or speech. There was a lot of blood around him.
    “My mother asked one of the soldiers “is my son alive?” and he answered her in an ironic way in Arabic “maybe he is still.” They stayed until he died and then left,” she said.
    Ruqaiya added that the soldiers refused to allow her to drag her brother’s body away. “They threatened me, they said they will kill me, but I insisted on removing him from under the tree.
    “His head was open because of the bullet wounds. The scene was terrible.
    “The soldiers then asked me to remove my other brother, Siddiq, aged 22, who was also injured and bleeding. The soldiers then dragged him for seven metres before treating him.”
    A local lady said that the soldiers interrogated one of the other boys from the Al Qarnawi family, Safwat. “They questioned him and beat him. After that they got a football and began playing in the garden.”
    The Israeli forces alleged that Siddiq is ‘wanted’ for resisting the occupation.

    The state Theft of Children – So called British Justice – Even a murderer is treated better

    1

    The Dark Heart Of England

    English authorities take newborn babies for adoption – this compares how their legal system treats a pregnant woman and a man arrested for murder.

    The bulk of English adoptions result from forcible takings:

    Children fall into three groups according to the reason for their adoption: relinquished infants (14%), those whose parents had requested adoption in complex circumstances (24%), and those children required to be adopted by social services and the courts (62%).

    So now let’s compare our murderer and the woman whose baby is taken (English authorities often take several kids at once, but to keep it simple we’ll look at single takings).

    Investigating Authority

    The murderer gets investigated by the cops who are required by law to identify themselves by name, and sometimes number.

    The pregnant woman gets investigated by social services officials whose identities are kept secret throughout legal proceeding and all all times subsequently.

    Lawyer Presence

    The alleged murderer is entitled to have his lawyer present at all interviews with cops.

    The pregnant woman has no rights to have her lawyer present during her meetings with social services, and (as the YouTube debacle showed), they prevent the woman recording.

    Miranda Rights

    Cops must read the alleged murderer the Brit equivalent of Miranda rights before taking any statement from him, and must release him if they are not able to charge him within a tightly-limited period. They must tape the entire interview and hold it for subsequent audit, and the suspect must sign any confession.

    Social services officials do not read Miranda rights; they can interview the woman as many times as they like for as long as they like. They can call on (or require the attendance of) the woman at any time. They do not tape meetings in auditable form. They are not required to have the woman sign any statements they note.

    Charges

    The murder is charged with a specific act, which the court must verify.

    The woman can be charged with the potential for inflicting harm, for example:

    In March Mr Justice McFarlane publicly castigated social workers who had removed a nine-year-old girl from her parents for 14 months on the absolutely false pretext that her mother might be suffering from Munchausen’s syndrome by proxy (attention-seeking).

    The judge found that every one of the 13 assertions made by the social services team leader was “misleading or incomplete or wrong”.

    Munchausen’s syndrome by proxy was invented by the fraudster Meadow and is now discredited – many women have lost their babies to this monster.

    Representation

    Social services targets the babies of the young, ill, and poor, who must rely on court-provided lawyers. Some (at least) of these are believed by their customers to be in cahoots with social services and/or the dregs of their profession.

    The murderer has the same problem, however he has daylight on his side – if his lawyer messes up, it’s visible to the world.

    Secret Courts

    Unlike the murderer, the woman has to fight for her child under a complete blanket of secrecy:

    The courts…rule on bids by councils to put removed children up for adoption, which is irreversible. Yet, while criminal cases must be proved beyond reasonable doubt, family courts take decisions on the balance of probabilities and unlike criminal courts, cases are heard in strict secrecy.

    Under the current law, reporters and members of the public cannot attend family court hearings, see documents, review evidence or obtain copies of judgments.

    Since in forced adoption cases the baby is being taken into a new family, its “old” identity is irrelevant. The real motive is to protect the individuals doing the taking – here’s a family lawyer:

    “Social services are the only department other than MI5 who undertake their work in complete secrecy. It’s not the welfare of the child that is being protected, it is the welfare of social workers. This cannot be justified.

    It gets worse – adoption agencies aren’t covered by this secrecy – here’s a rare campaigner (scroll quarter way down):

    I can generally only write when judges go public.

    Yet I have discovered that even as I was writing about this case last year, painstakingly omitting much of the detail to ensure that no one could identify the child, her picture, real name and age were being published in a national newspaper. Not by a journalist, who would have been in contempt of court. But by an adoption agency, advertising for adopters.

    Agencies have to find good homes for needy children. Many do a great job. But for parents who are routinely told that they will be in contempt if they dare to reveal the legal proceedings to anyone outside the court, or even to talk about the child by name, because his or her privacy is paramount, it is staggering to see their children being advertised like pets.

    Contempt

    Women fighting to keep their kids may not treat these awful courts and social services employees with the respect they feel they deserve. In consequence, each week in England, these courts jail 4 people for contempt. That gives them a criminal record and guarantees they won’t get their kids back.

    This 200 a year is oddly hard to track down. It’s a quote by government minister in a debate on June 13, 2006, and a search confirms it. But the full quote is not accessible on Parliament’s website – I do hope that’s a glitch.

    Appeal

    The murderer has the full record of his trail published, and has a right to appeal.

    The mother has no such record, so cannot appeal:

    Family courts are refusing to tell mothers why their babies are being taken away and put up for forced adoption.

    Two mothers have told The Sunday Telegraph that their pain at losing their children was made worse by not knowing the grounds on which judges took the decisions.

    Both women had their requests for copies of the judgments turned down repeatedly. As a result, they were prevented from launching legal battles to win their babies back, because appeals cannot be lodged without -written judgments.

    Without written judgments, parents can’t even ask the European Court of Justice to intervene.

    And even if the woman does appeal successfully, once the baby has been adopted, the English authorities won’t return it (see comment 3:18):

    After taking their daughter to hospital, they were accused of abusing her. Their second child, born a few weeks later, was taken away almost from the moment she was born. They have subsequently been cleared of any charges, yet their children have not been returned to them.

    They are being told by SS that, despite seeing their mother up until January this year (when the older daughter was told to say goodbye to her mother because she’d never see her again), they are settled with their prospective adoptive family and they will not be moved and that it is SS’s decision to overturn an adoption decision.

    So English women are unprotected from a state that inflicts the terrible and life-long damage of losing their kids, while murderers have a raft of protections against a short prison sentence:

    The mandatory life sentence does not underpin public abhorrence of murder because everyone knows that life does not mean life but on average something less than 10 years.

    That’s England – land of stolen kids, abused women, and happy murderers.

    Fortunately, the rest of the world is different – here’s Baroness Hale:

    The United Kingdom is unusual amongst members of the Council of Europe in permitting the total severance of family ties without parental consent. (Professor Triseliotis thought that only Portugal and perhaps one other European country allowed this.) It is, of course, the most draconian interference with family life possible.

    In future posts we’ll look at the perpetrators of these outrages, at the people fighting them, and the implications for English society.

    Cancer in Iraq vets raises possibility of toxic exposure

    1

    By Carla McClain

    After serving in Vietnam nearly 40 years ago – and receiving the Bronze Star for it – the Tucson soldier was called back to active duty in Iraq.

    While there, he awoke one morning with a sore throat. Eighteen months later, Army Sgt. James Lauderdale was dead, of a bizarrely aggressive cancer rarely seen by the doctors who tried to treat it.

    As a result, his stunned and heartbroken family has joined growing ranks of sickened and dying Iraq war vets and their families who believe exposures to toxic poisons in the war zone are behind their illnesses – mostly cancers, striking the young, taking them down with alarming speed.

    The number of these cancers remains undisclosed, with military officials citing patient privacy issues, as well as lack of evidence the cases are linked to conditions in the war zone. The U.S. Congress has ordered a probe of suspect toxins and may soon begin widespread testing of our armed forces.

    “He got so sick, so fast”

    Jim Lauderdale was 58 when his National Guard unit was deployed to the Iraq-Kuwait border, where he helped transport arriving soldiers and Marines into combat areas.

    He was a strong man, say relatives, who can’t remember him ever missing a day of work for illness. And he developed a cancer of the mouth, which overwhelmingly strikes smokers, drinkers and tobacco chewers. He was none of those.

    “Jim’s doctors didn’t know why he would get this kind of cancer – they had no answers for us,” said his wife, Dixie.

    “He got so sick, so fast. We really think it had to be something he was exposed to over there. So many of the soldiers we met with cancer at Walter Reed (Army Medical Center) complained about the polluted air they lived in, the brown water they had to use, the dust they breathed from exploded munitions. It was very toxic.”

    As a mining engineer, Lauderdale knew exactly what it meant when he saw the thick black smoke pouring nonstop out of the smokestacks that line the Iraq/Kuwait border area where he was stationed for three months in 2005.

    “He wrote to me that everyone was complaining about their stinging eyes and sore throats and headaches,” Dixie said. “For Jim to say something like that, to complain, was very unusual.

    “One of the mothers on the cancer ward had pictures of her son bathing in the brown water,” she said. “He died of kidney cancer.”

    Stationed in roughly the same area as Lauderdale, yet another soldier – now fighting terminal colon cancer – described the scene there, of oil refineries, a cement factory, a chlorine factory and a sulfuric acid factory, all spewing unfiltered and uncontrolled substances into the air.

    “One day, we were walking toward the port and they had sulfuric acid exploding out of the stacks. We were covered with it, everything was burning on us, and we had to turn around and get to the medics,” said Army Staff Sgt. Frank Valentin, 35.

    Not long after, he developed intense rectal pain, which doctors told him for months was hemorrhoids. Finally diagnosed with aggressive colorectal cancer – requiring extensive surgery, resulting in a colostomy bag – he was given fewer than two years to live by his Walter Reed physicians.

    He is now a couple of months past that death sentence, but his chemo drugs are starting to fail, and the cancer is eating into his liver and lungs. He spends his days with his wife and three children at their Florida home.

    “I don’t know how much time I have,” he said.

    Suspect: depleted uranium

    None of these soldiers know for sure what’s killing them. But they suspect it’s a cascade of multiple toxic exposures, coupled with the intense stress of daily life in a war zone weakening their immune systems.

    “There’s so much pollution from so many sources, your body can’t fight what’s coming at it,” Valentin said. “And you don’t eat well or sleep well, ever. That weakens you, too. There’s no chance to gather your strength. These are kids 19, 20 and 21 getting all kinds of cancers. The Walter Reed cancer ward is packed full with them.”

    The prime suspect in all this, in the minds of many victims – and some scientists – is what’s known as depleted uranium – the radioactive chemical prized by the military for its ability to penetrate armored vehicles. When munitions explode, the substance hits the air as fine dust, easily inhaled.

    Last month, the Iraqi environment minister blamed the tons of the chemical dropped during the war’s “shock and awe” campaign for a surge of cancer cases across the country.

    However, the Pentagon and U.S. State Department strongly deny this, citing four studies, including one by the World Health Organization, that found levels in war zones not harmful to civilians or soldiers. A U.N. Environmental Program study concurs, but only if spent munitions are cleared away.

    Returning solders have said that isn’t happening.

    “When tanks exploded, I would handle those tanks, and there was DU everywhere,” said Valentin. “This is a big issue.”

    The fierce Iraq winds carry desert sand and dust for miles, said Dixie Lauderdale, who suspects her husband was exposed to at least some depleted uranium. Many vets from the Gulf War blame the chemical used in that conflict for their Gulf War syndrome illnesses.

    Congress orders study

    As the controversy rages, Congress has ordered a comprehensive independent study, due in October, of the health effects of depleted uranium exposure on U.S. soldiers and their children. And a “DU bill” – ordering all members of the U.S. military exposed to it be identified and tested – is working its way through Congress.

    “Basically, we want to get ahead of this curve, and not go through the years of painful denial we went through with Agent Orange that was the legacy of Vietnam,” said Rep. Raúl Grijalva, D-Ariz., a co-sponsor of the bill.

    “We want an independent agency to do independent testing of our soldiers, and find out what’s really going on. These incidents of cancer and illness that all of us are hearing about back in our districts are not just anecdotal – there is a pattern here. And yes, I do suspect DU may be at the bottom of it.”

    What’s happening today – growing numbers of sickened soldiers who say they were exposed to it amid firm denials of harm from military brass – almost mirrors the early stages of the Agent Orange aftermath. It took the U.S. military almost two decades to admit the powerful chemical defoliant killed and disabled U.S. troops in the jungles of Vietnam, and to begin compensating them for it.

    Doctors flabbergasted

    Whatever it was that struck Jim Lauderdale did a terrifying job of it.

    Sent to Walter Reed with oral cancer in April 2005, he underwent his first extensive and disfiguring surgery, removing half his tongue to get to tumors in the mouth and throat. A second surgery followed a month later to clear out more of those areas.

    Five months later, another surgery removed a new neck tumor. Then came heavy chemotherapy and radiation.

    Shortly after, he had a massive heart attack, undergoing another surgery to place stents in his arteries. Two weeks later, the cancer was back and growing rapidly, forcing a fourth surgery in January 2006.

    By this time, much of his neck and shoulder tissue was gone, and doctors tried to reconstruct a tongue, using tissue from his wrist. He couldn’t swallow, so was fed through a tube into his stomach.

    Just weeks later, four external tumors appeared on his neck – “literally overnight,” his wife said.

    Suffering severe complications from the chemo drugs, Lauderdale endured 39 radiation treatments, waking up one night bleeding profusely through his burned skin. The day after his radiation ended, new external tumors erupted at the edge of the radiation field, flabbergasting his doctors.

    “As this aggressive disease grew though chemoradiation, it was determined at this point there was no chance for cure,” his oncologist wrote then.

    By then, the cancer had spread to his lungs and spine and, most frightening of all, “hundreds and thousands” of tumors were erupting all over his upper body, his wife said.

    “The doctors said they’d never seen anything like it – that this happens in only 1 percent of cases,” she said.

    Efforts to contact his doctors at Walter Reed were unsuccessful, but a leading head-and-neck cancer specialist at the Arizona Cancer Center reviewed the course of Lauderdale’s disease.

    “This a a very wrenching case,” said Dr. Harinder Garewal. “This is unusually aggressive behavior for an oral cancer. I would agree it happens in only 1 percent of cases.”

    When oral cancer occurs in nonsmokers and non-drinkers, it tends to be more aggressive, he said.

    “My feeling is the immune system for some reason can’t handle the cancer,” he said.

    Jim Lauderdale died on July 14, 2006, and was buried in Arlington National Cemetery.

    Dixie and their two grown children still feel the raw grief of loss, but not anger, she said.

    “But I am convinced something very wrong is happening over there. Is anyone paying attention to this? Is the cancer ward still full?” she asked. “I would hate to see another whole generation affected like this, but I’m very afraid it will be.”

    ● Contact reporter Carla McClain at 806-7754 or at cmcclain@azstarnet.com.

    Clash with Cheney over Iran prompted Rove departure

    1

    By Ray McGovern
    It is as though I’m back as an analyst at the CIA, trying to estimate the chances of an attack on Iran. The putative attacker, though, happens to be our own president.

    It is precisely the work we analysts used to do. And, while it is still a bit jarring to be turning our analytical tools on the U.S. leadership, it is by no means entirely new. For, of necessity, we Veteran Intelligence Professionals for Sanity (VIPS) have been doing that for almost six years now – ever since 9/11, when “everything changed.”

    Of necessity? Yes, because, with very few exceptions, American journalists lose their jobs if they expose things like fraudulent wars.

    The craft of CIA analysis was designed to be an all-source operation, meaning that we analysts were responsible – and held accountable – for assimilating information from all sources and coming to judgments on what it all meant. We used information of all kinds, from the most sophisticated technical collection platforms to spies to open media.

    Here I have to reveal a trade secret, which punctures the mystique of intelligence analysis. Generally speaking, 80 percent of the information one needs to form judgments on key intelligence targets or issues is available in open media.

    It helps to have training from past masters of media analysis, which began in a structured way in targeting Japanese and German media in the 1940s. But, truth be told, everyone with a high school education can do it. It is not rocket science.

    This is not to denigrate the contribution of CIA operations officers, case officers running sensitive agents, for though small in percentage of the whole nine yards available to be analyzed, information from such sources can often make a crucial contribution.

    Consider, for example, the daring recruitment in mid-2002 of Saddam Hussein’s foreign minister, Naji Sabri, who was “turned” into working for the CIA and quickly established his credibility. Sabri told us there were no weapons of mass destruction in Iraq.

    My former colleagues, perhaps a bit naively, were quite sure this would come as a vast relief to President George W. Bush and his advisers. Instead, they were told that the White House had no further interest in reporting from Sabri; rather, that the issue was not really WMD, it was “regime change.”

    So our former colleague, operations officer par excellence, Robert Baer, reports (in this week’s “Time”) that, according to his sources, the Bush/Cheney administration is winding up for a strike on Iran, that Bush’s plan to put Iran’s Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps on the terrorism list points in the direction of such a strike, and that delusional “neo-conservative” thinking that still guides White House policy concludes that such an attack would lead to the fall of the clerics and rise of a more friendly Iran.

    Hold on, it gets even worse: Baer’s sources tell him that administration officials are thinking that “as long as we have bombers and missiles in the air, we will hit Iran’s nuclear facilities.”

    VIPS member Phil Geraldi, writing in “The American Conservative,” earlier noted that Karl Rove has served as a counterweight to Vice President Dick Cheney, determined as Cheney seems to be expanding the Middle East quagmire to Iran.

    And former Pentagon analyst, retired Lt. Col. Karen Kwiatkowski, who worked shoulder-to-shoulder with the most rabid Pentagon neo-cons just before the attack on Iraq, has put into words (on LewRockwell.com) speculation several of us have been indulging in with respect to Rove’s departure.

    In short, it seems a good bet that Rove, who is no one’s dummy and would not want to have to “spin” an unnecessary war on Iran, lost the battle with Cheney over the merits of a military strike on Iran, and only then decided to spend more time with his family.

    Whatever else Rove has been, he has served as a counterweight to Dick Cheney’s clear desire to expand the Middle East quagmire into Iran.

    With the propaganda buildup we have seen so far, what seems most likely, at least initially, is an attack on Revolutionary Guard training facilities inside Iran, and that can be done with cruise missiles.

    With some 20 targets already identified by anti-Iranian groups, there are enough assets already in place to do that job. But the while-we’re-at-it neo-con logic referred to above may well be applied after, or even during, that kind of attack from the air.

    Yes, it is happening again.

    The lead editorial in today’s “Washington Post” regurgitates the unproven allegations that Iran’s Revolutionary Guard Corps is “supplying the weapons that are killing a growing number of American soldiers in Iraq”; that it is “waging war against the United States and trying to kill as many American soldiers as possible.”

    Designating Iran a “specially designated global terrorist” organization, says the Post, “seems to be the least the United States should be doing, given the soaring number of Iranian-sponsored bomb attacks in Iraq.”

    It’s as though Dick Cheney is again writing the Post editorials. And not only that, arch neo-con James Woolsey has just told Lou Dobbs that the U.S. may have no choice but to bomb Iran in order to halt its nuclear weapons program.

    As Woolsey puts it, “I’m afraid within, well, at worst, a few months; at best, a few years; they could have the bomb.”

    Woolsey, self-described “anchor of the Presbyterian wing of the Jewish Institute for National Security Affairs,” has long been way out in front plumbing for wars, like Iraq, that he and other neo-cons myopically see as being in Israel’s, as well as America’s, interest.

    Within days of 9/11, Woolsey was arguing for war with Iraq even while conceding, at the time, that there was no evidence tying Iraq to 9/11.

    The latest is also rubbish. And Woolsey knows it. And so do the reporters for the “Washington Post,” who are aware of, but have been forbidden to tell, a highly interesting story.

    The National Intelligence Estimate on if and when Iran is likely to have the bomb has been ready since February. It has been sent back four times – no doubt because its conclusions do not support what folks like Cheney and Woolsey are telling the president.

    The conclusions of the most recent NIE on the issue (early 2005) was that Iran could probably not have a nuclear weapon until “early to mid-next decade,” a formula memorized and restated by Director of National Intelligence Michael McConnell at his confirmation hearing in February.

    One can safely assume that McConnell had been fully briefed on the first “final draft” of the new estimate, which has now been in limbo for half a year.It is a safe bet that the conclusions of the new draft resemble those of the 2005 estimate all too closely to suit Cheney.

    It is a scandal that the congressional oversight committees have not been able to get hold of the new estimate, even in draft.For it is a safe bet it would give the lie to the claims of Cheney, Woolsey and other cheerleaders for war with Iran and provide powerful ammunition to those arguing for a more sensible approach to Iran.

    Despite the administration’s war-like record, many Americans may still cling to the belief that attacking Iran won’t happen because it would be crazy; that Bush is a lame-duck president who wouldn’t dare undertake a new reckless adventure when the last one went so badly.

    But, with this administration, rationality has not exactly been a strong suit. Bush has placed himself in a neoconservative bubble that operates with its own false sense of reality. As psychiatrist Justin Frank noted in a July 27 memorandum updating his book, “Bush on the Couch”:

    “We are left with a president who cannot actually govern, because he is incapable of reasoned thought in coping with events outside his control, like those in the Middle East.

    “This makes it a monumental challenge – as urgent as it is difficult – not only to get him to stop the carnage in the Middle East, but also to prevent him from undertaking a new, perhaps even more disastrous adventure – like going to war with Iran, in order to embellish the image he so proudly created for himself after 9/11 as the commander in chief of “the first war of the 21st century.'”

    Ray McGovern is a 27-year veteran analyst of the CIA and co-founder of Veteran Intelligence Professionals for Sanity (VIPS).

    The CIA’s open secrets

    1

    By Joseph Weisberg

    When a federal judge dismissed Valerie Plame’s lawsuit against the Central Intelligence Agency earlier this month, she ruled that the agency was entitled to stop Plame from publishing the dates of her agency service, even though these dates had been supplied to Congress in an unclassified letter from the CIA and had been published in The Congressional Record. Plame is just one in a long line of ex-CIA employees to lose similar suits, in which the agency successfully defended the position that information in the public domain was classified.

    How can information that’s a five-minute Google search away be classified? It’s simple. Classified information is not the same thing as secret information.

    When I worked in the CIA’s directorate of operations (now called the national clandestine service) in the early ’90s, we were told that information was classified when it involved sources or methods. It seemed logical that sources were classified. These were actual agents who would be put in jeopardy if their identities were revealed.

    But practically everything the CIA does could be considered a “method,” so the CIA can decide that almost anything relating to its work is classified. You’d probably want this latitude if you were running an intelligence agency. But one of its unfortunate byproducts is that no one, inside or outside the intelligence community, really knows what classified information is.

    Because so many things at the CIA are classified, only a small percentage of them are actually secrets. Take agency cover arrangements. I cannot write about them in this article in any detail.

    If I point out that agency officers are often under cover as XXXXXXXXXX, the CIA will make me take it out before publishing this article. (Before I submitted this article to the CIA’s publications review board, I blacked it out myself to save the reviewers the trouble.)

    But are cover arrangements secret? Most of the time, no. Anyone with even a passing interest in espionage knows about the CIA’s use of the specific cover that I redacted above. If you think you know what’s under that black bar, you’re probably right. Certainly every foreign intelligence agency in the world knows about it. It can’t possibly be considered secret. But it is definitely classified.

    What about the CIA’s covert action in Afghanistan in the 1980s? Everyone knew about this at the time – in no way, shape or form was it a secret – but it was a covert action, and it was classified.

    I’m assuming it has since been declassified because I’ve read all about it in books by ex-agency officers that were vetted by the agency. If I’m wrong, there will be some more redactions in this paragraph.

    There are actually legitimate reasons to classify so much information that isn’t secret. Even if every foreign government in the world knows about our cover arrangements, countless diplomatic and legal problems would be created if we officially admitted that we use them.

    Official acknowledgment of covert actions would be even riskier. It was problematic enough to be arming rebels in Afghanistan who were killing Soviet soldiers.

    How would the Soviets have responded if we had openly admitted it? How would we respond today if Iran openly admitted training and arming insurgents in Iraq? We may know their denials are false, but they help Iran avoid international sanction, and they help us avoid being forced to respond militarily.

    If the government openly admitted various CIA activities, even those that are already well-known, it could also precipitate a great deal of negative news coverage in the foreign press. (It would create yet another public perception problem to admit we classify information because of public perception, which is one of the reasons the fiction is maintained that information is classified because it is secret.)

    In the end, then, the classification system serves a perfectly valid purpose. It draws a distinction between the information that the government does, and does not, want to discuss publicly.

    What ends up classified may seem a bit perverse at times, such as when information in the public domain is ruled off limits for publication. But that’s troubling only if you make the mistake of thinking that classified information is supposed to be secret.

    For former CIA employees turned writers, like Plame, the vagaries of the system have tremendous advantages.

    Plame just wrote a book that the CIA could reasonably maintain was entirely classified. After all, you’re not supposed to quit an intelligence agency and then tell everybody about what you did when you were there (certainly a lot of methods would be involved).

    But since nobody is really sure what is and isn’t classified, the agency permits publication of a lot of material that could go either way. It seems petulant to sue over a few dates the CIA wanted to take out of a book that it was otherwise allowing to go forward. Plame was right that the dates weren’t secret. But the agency didn’t want to officially admit them, so they were, in fact, classified.

    Joseph Weisberg is the author of the forthcoming novel “An Ordinary Spy.”

    US intelligence report points to Iraqi government’s removal

    1

    By Peter Symonds

    The National Intelligence Estimate (NIE) on Iraq released last week reflects a growing consensus not just among the US spy agencies, but in the White House and American ruling elite, that the main obstacle to the US agenda in Iraq is the government of Prime Minister Nouri al-Maliki.

    Not surprisingly, the four-page unclassified portion of the NIE drawn up by 16 US intelligence agencies backs the Bush administration’s “surge” strategy. The report highlighted “measurable but uneven improvements in Iraq’s security situation since the last estimate in January 2007” and predicted further “modest” gains as long as US troops remained and aggressive military operations continued.

    Nevertheless, despite its muted, conservative language, the NIE painted a grim picture of the US occupation. “[T]he level of overall violence, including attacks on and casualties among civilians, remains high; Iraq’s sectarian groups remain unreconciled; AQI [Al Qaeda in Iraq] retains the ability to conduct high-profile attacks; and, to date, Iraqi political leaders remain unable to govern effectively,” it stated.

    The final comment about the Maliki government reflects the frustration in US ruling circles over the failure of the 2003 invasion to transform the country into a stable client state and to open up its vast oil reserves for exploitation by American corporations. Just weeks before Washington’s top general and its senior diplomat in Baghdad are due to report to the US Congress, none of the Bush administration’s so-called benchmarks, including the passage of oil laws, has been met.

    Without openly calling for Maliki’s removal, the logic of the NIE’s “judgments” certainly leads to that conclusion. The report notes the US military’s gains in enlisting the support of Sunni tribes and some insurgents in fighting so-called Al Qaeda groups, but highlights the failure of the Shiite-dominated government in Baghdad to reach any accommodation with these new Sunni allies. “[W]e judge these initiatives will only translate into widespread political accommodation and enduring stability if the Iraqi government accepts and supports them,” it warned.

    The NIE also “assessed” that the position of Maliki would become “more precarious” over the next six to 12 months because of criticism by Shiite parties, as well as Sunni and Kurdish parties. The Iraqi government would “continue to struggle to achieve national-level political reconciliation and improved governance” over the same period. The NIE highlighted the need for “a fundamental shift in the factors driving Iraqi political and security developments” for long-term progress to be made–the most obvious “shift” being Maliki’s removal.

    The NIE document followed a barrage of comments in Washington last week expressing dissatisfaction with the Maliki government. After a two-day visit to Iraq, Carl Levin, the Democratic Party chairman of the Senate Armed Services Committee, openly called for the Iraqi parliament to replace Maliki with “a less sectarian and a more unifying prime minister”. Leading presidential contender, Hillary Clinton, publicly endorsed Levin’s remarks a day later.

    President Bush stopped short of openly calling for Maliki to go. Yet, while nominally continuing to support the Iraqi prime minister, he declared last Tuesday: “The fundamental question is: Will the government respond to the demands of the people? If the government doesn’t respond to the demands of the people, they will replace the government.” The US ambassador to Iraq, Ryan Crocker, added his own damning assessment of the Baghdad government last week as “extremely disappointing”.

    The appeal to the “demands of the Iraqi people” is simply absurd–the vast majority of Iraqis are opposed to continued US occupation of their country. The moves against Maliki are determined by the shifting requirements of US strategy not only in Iraq but more broadly throughout the Middle East. The Bush administration backed the Shiite and Kurdish parties that form the Maliki government as a means for ousting Saddam Hussein’s Baathist regime, which rested on Iraq’s Sunni Arab elite. However, having provoked an anti-US insurgency and a sectarian civil war between Sunni and Shiite militias, the White House is now demanding that Baghdad accommodates sections of the ousted Baathist regime in order to divide the Sunni insurgency.

    More fundamentally, as the Bush administration escalates its confrontation with neighbouring Iran, the Maliki government, with its ties to Tehran, has become untenable as far as Washington is concerned. In recent weeks, the White House and the Pentagon have stepped up the propaganda blitz against Iran over its alleged nuclear weapons programs and unsubstantiated claims that it is assisting attacks by Shiite militia on US troops. Maliki is also an obstacle to US attempts to forge an anti-Iranian alliance of so-called Sunni states in the Middle East such as Saudi Arabia and Egypt that are bitterly opposed to the Shiite regime in Baghdad.

    Maintaining the thrust of US propaganda, the NIE repeated the allegation of Iranian “interference” in Iraq. “Assistance to armed groups, especially from Iran, exacerbates the violence inside Iraq, and the reluctance of the Sunni states that are generally supportive of US regional goals to offer support to the Iraqi government probably bolsters Iraqi Sunni Arabs’ rejection of the government’s legitimacy,” it stated.

    Maliki reacted sharply to the public calls for his removal, describing the comments of Clinton and Levin as “discourteous”. In an obvious reference to the Bush administration’s “benchmarks”, he declared: “No one has the right to place timetables on the Iraq government.” Speaking during a visit to Syria, Maliki said he would “find friends elsewhere” if he were abandoned by the US. Far from warding off a move against his government, this last remark, hinting at a turn to Tehran and Damascus, will only strengthen Washington’s resolve to refashion the Baghdad regime.

    The Bush administration’s dissatisfaction with the Iraqi government has been evident for months, encouraging Maliki’s rivals to move against him. Since the beginning of the year, there have been walkouts from the cabinet by the Basra-based Shiite Islamic Virtue Party (Fadhila), the Shiite bloc loyal to cleric Moqtada al-Sadr and the major Sunni Arab factions. On Saturday, the Iraqi National List of former interim prime minister Iyad Allawi formally announced its withdrawal after previously boycotting cabinet meetings.

    In preparation for parliament’s resumption early next month, all the Iraqi factions are engaged in intense backroom manoeuvring. Maliki is attempting to shore up the current ruling Shiite-Kurdish bloc, while his rivals are preparing for a vote of no confidence. None of this has anything to do with the “will of the Iraqi people”. All the Iraqi parties are well aware that the final decision on the fate of Maliki’s government will be taken in Washington, not Baghdad.

    Significantly, one of the main contenders for the prime minister’s post, Iyad Allawi, has hired high-profile lobbying firm Barbour Griffith & Rogers for six months at the cost of $300,000 to “provide strategic counsel and representation” before “the US government, Congress, media and others”. Central to Allawi’s campaign in Washington is President Bush’s former envoy to Iraq, Ambassador Robert Blackwill, who is the firm’s president, as well as other top Bush administration aides, including Philip Zelikow, a former adviser to Secretary of State Condoleezza Rice.

    Blackwill, who also served as Bush’s ambassador to India, is a senior figure in the US foreign affairs establishment. He was Rice’s mentor before she took office. As Bush’s adviser on Iraq in 2004, Blackwill played a crucial role in installing Allawi as head of the interim government. While the Bush administration now insists that Blackwill is operating as a private citizen, there is little doubt that the White House has given the green light for his campaign against Maliki.

    Allawi, who received virtually no support in the 2005 Iraqi elections, was a loyal political thug for Saddam Hussein’s regime before breaking away and becoming a longtime CIA asset. He has close relations with sections of the Baathist party, particularly in the military and intelligence. In a policy statement published in the Washington Post on August 18, Allawi laid out a six-point “Plan for Iraq”, in which he declared he would impose a state of emergency on Baghdad and all conflict areas and carry out a far-reaching restructuring of the Iraqi security forces.

    Allawi is not the only possibility being contemplated in Washington. But he certainly fits the bill as a political strongman who would not hesitate to carry out US orders and use every available means to crush opposition to his rule. That he is even under consideration is an indication of the type of regime that the Bush administration is seeking–with or without the approval of the Iraqi parliament. In its cautious criticisms of the present regime, the NIE document is another sign that, one way or another, Maliki’s days are numbered.

    US attorney general Gonzales resigns

    0

    Mark Tran
    Monday August 27, 2007
    Guardian Unlimited

    US attorney general Alberto Gonzales at the J Edgar Hoover FBI building in Washington.
    Alberto Gonzales had worked with George Bush since the 1990s. Photograph: Ron Edmonds/AP
     

    The embattled US attorney general, Alberto Gonzales, today announced his resignation, joining an exodus of top-level officials from the White House.”It has been one of my greatest privileges to lead the department of justice,” Mr Gonzales said in a perfunctory statement, without taking questions from reporters. He will step down on September17.

    “I have lived the American dream,” the son of migrant workers said. “Even my worst days as attorney general have been better than my father’s best days.”

    The 51-year-old Bush loyalist served more than two years as America’s first Hispanic attorney general. In recent months he came under intense pressure to quit in a political row over the sacking of eight federal prosecutors that congressional Democrats have said was politically motivated. Mr Gonzales did not help his case with unconvincing appearances on Capitol Hill.

    Mr Gonzales worked for Mr Bush when he was governor of Texas in the 1990s and served as a White House lawyer in Mr Bush’s first term before becoming the attorney general in February 2005.

    Mr Bush said he had reluctantly accepted the resignation of a trusted adviser and good friend and rebuked detractors of Mr Gonzales, saying: “His good name has been dragged through the mud for political reasons”.

    Mr Gonzales outraged civil liberties groups by stating in January 2002 that parts of the half-century-old Geneva Convention on the treatment of prisoners of war were “obsolete” and some provisions were “quaint.”

    He also came under fire for Mr Bush’s decision to forego the use of warrants in America’s domestic spying programme adopted after the September 11 2001 attacks. In January, Mr Gonzales backtracked and said the programme would be subject to court approval.

    Mr Gonzales is the latest in a string of top officials who have left the administration, from the former defence secretary Donald Rumsfeld to Karl Rove, the president’s closest confidant and the man credited with Mr Bush’s two presidential victories.

    Labour given £300,000 by unregistered ‘friends’

    0

    By Ben Russell

    A group which has donated more than £300,000 to Labour was not properly registered, the party has admitted.

    Labour Party officials asked Muslim Friends of Labour to register as a members’ association with party funding watchdogs after they were informed of the problem by the Electoral Commission.

    The commission asked the party to clarify the status of the organisation last week after releasing figures showing that it has donated £312,000 to Labour so far this year. Muslim Friends of Labour was listed as an “unincorporated association” which does not have to declare the source of its funds.

    By contrast, “members’ associations”, made up of party members, must give details of the individuals who fund any political donations.

    The organisation is chaired by Mohammed Sarwar, a controversial Labour MP who was briefly suspended in the late 1990s before being cleared ina vote rigging scandal. Most of Westminster’s Muslim MPs and peers are believed to be members.

    Labour has previously attacked the Conservatives for receiving donations from the Midlands Industrial Council, a group of businessmen.

    A Labour Party spokesperson said: “Muslims for Labour is an association made up of Labour members and supporters which does important work for the Labour Party both in fund-raising and in communicating our message to the Muslim community.”

    Alarm as police offenders keep jobs in force

    1

    More than 30 police officers serving in forces throughout Yorkshire were convicted of criminal offences last year, it has emerged.

    Revelations that so many law enforcers, most of whom are still in post, have turned law-breakers were dubbed “deeply worrying” by a road safety campaigner.

    The disclosures — made under the Freedom of Information Act — showed that of the four forces in Yorkshire, West Yorkshire had the highest number of serving officers convicted between January 2006 and April 2007.

    Fourteen of the convictions were for motoring offences.

    The force would not disclose what the other convictions were for, but last year an exclusive Yorkshire Post report prompted outrage when it was revealed 10 of its serving officers had been convicted of assault.

    In South Yorkshire seven police officers were convicted of criminal offences — four for traffic offences, one for affray, one for common assault and another for obstructing the police.

    Only one resigned prior to disciplinary proceedings. The others have all been allowed to stay in the force despite breaking the law.

    Neither force would disclose how many of their officers had received run-of-the-mill speeding fines or penalty points.

    In Humberside three officers were convicted of speeding offences and are still in post; another, who was convicted of perverting the course of justice, has since been dismissed.

    Across the force area there were a staggering 1,912 occasions where police vehicles activated a speed camera while engaged on duty. Of those, 1,900 were not pro-cessed as it was established that the vehicles were res-ponding to emergency calls. The remaining 12 were cancelled after further inquiries.

    The year before there were only eight occasions when Humberside Police officers were caught by speed cameras while on duty. The force said the figure had spiralled so dramatically because of the “increased use of roadside cameras to detect speeding and other offences”.

    Across the region only North Yorkshire Police officers emerged with a clean slate, although the force did concede that five had been caught speeding and fined.

    Last night a spokeswoman for Huddersfield-based road safety charity Brake called the figures “deeply worrying”.

    “These numbers are terribly high and it is of grave concern that serving police officers who are supposed to be enforcing the law are so blatantly breaking it.

    “I think these figures could lead to a lot of mistrust from members of the public. If they can’t trust the officers not to be breaking the law then that is a deeply worrying state of affairs.”

    Last year the Yorkshire Post revealed that more than 40 officers serving in Yorkshire had criminal records or had been cautioned for offences ranging from drink-driving to assault, shoplifting and dangerous driving.

    This prompted calls for a more accountable and open system for disciplining those who break the law, but the figures released this year were even less clear in some cases.

    West Yorkshire Police did not give any details of the offences committed by its 20 law-breaking officers, apart from the fact that 14 of them were motoring offences.

    A spokesman said: “We expect the highest standards of our officers.

    “All cases where officers receive criminal convictions or cautions are subject to close scrutiny on an individual basis to establish whether the convictions or cautions will affect their job and whether there are any disciplinary issues arising that need to be addressed.”

    A new intelligence report paints a bleak picture of Iraq

    0

    By Warren P. Strobel and Leila Fadel

    A new assessment of Iraq by U.S. intelligence agencies provides little evidence that the American troop “surge” has accomplished its goals and predicts that the U.S.-backed government of Prime Minister Nouri al-Maliki will become “more precarious” in the months ahead.

    A declassified summary of the report released Thursday said that violence remains high, warns that U.S. alliances with former Sunni Muslim insurgents could undercut the central government and says that political compromises are “unlikely to emerge” in the next 12 months.

    Perhaps most strikingly, U.S. intelligence analysts concluded that factions and political players in and outside Iraq already are maneuvering in expectation of a drawdown of U.S. troops – moves that could later heighten sectarian bloodshed.

    “The national intelligence assessment confirms what we feared the most: The U.S. has become deeply embroiled in Iraq’s civil war,” said Sen. Jay Rockefeller, D-W.Va., the chairman of the Senate intelligence committee.

    A White House spokesman, Gordon Johndroe, said the report, known as a National Intelligence Estimate, showed that President Bush’s decision to send an additional 28,000 troops to Iraq is beginning to have an effect.

    While it said that the surge has brought “measurable, but uneven improvements in security,” the report didn’t repeat recent military assertions that civilian deaths have decreased by 50 percent. Instead, it said, “the level of overall violence, including attacks on and casualties among civilians, remains high.”

    It also suggested that while violence is no longer increasing, any progress might be temporary. “The steep escalation of violence has been checked for now,” the report said, noting, “Overall attack levels across Iraq have fallen during seven of the last nine weeks.” It provided no specific statistics.

    The report also said that al-Qaida in Iraq “retains the ability to conduct high-profile attacks,” and it warned that the current U.S. tactic of recruiting former Sunni Muslim insurgents to defeat al-Qaida in Iraq – one of the pillars of efforts by Army Gen. David Petraeus, the U.S. commander in Iraq – could backfire.

    Nor has the surge brought about Sunni reconciliation with al-Maliki’s government, the report said. Worse, it said, such “bottom-up” security initiatives could pose risks to the al-Maliki government by undermining central authority and reinvigorating armed opposition to the government in Baghdad.

    U.S. military spokesmen in Baghdad weren’t available for comment.

    The report’s main conclusions, known as “key judgments,” were declassified 2 { weeks before Petraeus and Ambassador Ryan Crocker are to testify to Congress on Iraq’s performance on 18 political, economic and security benchmarks.

    The report didn’t address each of those points directly, but it concluded that the “broadly accepted political compromises required for sustained security, long-term political progress and economic development are unlikely to emerge unless there is a fundamental shift in the factors driving Iraqi political and security developments.”

    “To date, Iraqi political leaders remain unable to govern effectively,” it said.

    In recent days, several U.S. lawmakers have suggested that al-Maliki should step down, and Bush on Tuesday gave the Iraqi leader a less-than-ringing endorsement.

    The intelligence estimate says that al-Maliki, while increasingly hemmed in by his opponents, is likely to remain in power – if only because other Shiite Muslim leaders realize that trying to replace him could paralyze the government.

    “It’s difficult to see an obvious replacement that would garner the majority support you would need,” said a senior U.S. intelligence official, one of three who briefed reporters on condition of anonymity in order to discuss the estimate frankly.

    An Iraqi official close to al-Maliki said the embattled Shiite prime minister has become more isolated from his Shiite and Kurdish allies. Al-Maliki, who’s from the Dawa party, the smallest and least powerful in the Shiite alliance, depended on those allies to win his position.

    Bruce Riedel, a former CIA analyst now with the Brookings Institution, a center-left Washington policy organization, said that with summer ending and little real progress in Iraq, Bush has to blame someone.

    “The president promised that people will see political progress by the end of the summer, it’s here, and the only progress is the Sunnis turning on al-Qaida. Maliki’s government is not likely to embrace these Sunnis because the Sunnis are not interested in embracing a Shiite government,” Riedel said.

    Briefing reporters on the report, a second senior U.S. intelligence official said that when U.S. troops leave Iraq, some Sunni groups “could turn on one another to encourage a greater degree of intra-sectarian conflict.”

    A similar dynamic is now being seen among Shiite militias in southern Iraq as British troops reduce their presence there.

    On other topics, the declassified judgments found that:

    _Iraqi Security Forces, while more competent than before, haven’t improved enough to conduct major operations independent of U.S. and allied troops.

    _Iran “will continue to provide funding, weaponry and training to Iraqi Shia militants” despite U.S. protests.

    _Syria has cracked down on Sunni extremist groups trying to infiltrate fighters into Iraq because they threaten Syria’s stability, but is providing support to other groups inside Iraq to try to increase its influence there.

    Iraq corruption whistleblowers face penalties

    0

    Cases show fraud exposers have been vilified, fired, or detained for weeks

    AP

    One after another, the men and women who have stepped forward to report corruption in the massive effort to rebuild Iraq have been vilified, fired and demoted.

    Or worse.

    For daring to report illegal arms sales, Navy veteran Donald Vance says he was imprisoned by the American military in a security compound outside Baghdad and subjected to harsh interrogation methods.

    There were times, huddled on the floor in solitary confinement with that head-banging music blaring dawn to dusk and interrogators yelling the same questions over and over, that Vance began to wish he had just kept his mouth shut.

    He had thought he was doing a good and noble thing when he started telling the FBI about the guns and the land mines and the rocket-launchers – all of them being sold for cash, no receipts necessary, he said. He told a federal agent the buyers were Iraqi insurgents, American soldiers, State Department workers, and Iraqi embassy and ministry employees.

    The seller, he claimed, was the Iraqi-owned company he worked for, Shield Group Security Co.

    “It was a Wal-Mart for guns,” he says. “It was all illegal and everyone knew it.”

    So Vance says he blew the whistle, supplying photos and documents and other intelligence to an FBI agent in his hometown of Chicago because he didn’t know whom to trust in Iraq.

    For his trouble, he says, he got 97 days in Camp Cropper, an American military prison outside Baghdad that once held Saddam Hussein, and he was classified a security detainee.

    Also held was colleague Nathan Ertel, who helped Vance gather evidence documenting the sales, according to a federal lawsuit both have filed in Chicago, alleging they were illegally imprisoned and subjected to physical and mental interrogation tactics “reserved for terrorists and so-called enemy combatants.”

    No noble outcomes
    Corruption has long plagued Iraq reconstruction. Hundreds of projects may never be finished, including repairs to the country’s oil pipelines and electricity system. Congress gave more than $30 billion to rebuild Iraq, and at least $8.8 billion of it has disappeared, according to a government reconstruction audit.

    Despite this staggering mess, there are no noble outcomes for those who have blown the whistle, according to a review of such cases by The Associated Press.

    “If you do it, you will be destroyed,” said William Weaver, professor of political science at the University of Texas-El Paso and senior advisor to the National Security Whistleblowers Coalition.

    “Reconstruction is so rife with corruption. Sometimes people ask me, ‘Should I do this?’ And my answer is no. If they’re married, they’ll lose their family. They will lose their jobs. They will lose everything,” Weaver said.

    They have been fired or demoted, shunned by colleagues, and denied government support in whistleblower lawsuits filed against contracting firms.

    The only way we can find out what is going on is for someone to come forward and let us know,” said Beth Daley of the Project on Government Oversight, an independent, nonprofit group that investigates corruption. “But when they do, the weight of the government comes down on them. The message is, ’Don’t blow the whistle or we’ll make your life hell.’

    “It’s heartbreaking,” Daley said. “There is an even greater need for whistleblowers now. But they are made into public martyrs. It’s a disgrace. Their lives get ruined.”

    Cont… http://www.msnbc.msn.com/id/20430153/page/2/ 

    The War On Working Americans – Part I

    1

    By Stephen Lendman
    RINF Alternative News

    As Labor Day approaches, what better time to assess the state of working America. It’s under assault and weakened by decades of eroding rights in the richest country in the world once regarded as a model democratic state. It’s pure nonsense in a nation always dedicated to wealth and power, but don’t try finding that discussed in the mainstream. Today, it’s truer than ever making the struggle for equity and justice all the harder. That’s what ordinary working people now face making beating those odds formidable at the least.

    In a globalized world, the law of supply and demand is in play with lots more workers around everywhere than enough jobs for them. It keeps corporate costs low and profits high and growing with Business Week (BW) magazine reporting in its April 9 issue “the share of (US) national income going to corporate profits (compared to labor) is hovering around a 50 year high.” BW then quoted Harvard economist Richard Freeman’s research paper saying only “a global pandemic that kills millions of people” could cause a labor shortage and elevate worker bargaining power.

    There’s little in sight, and the result is a huge reserve army of unemployed or underemployed working people creating an inevitable race to the bottom in a corporatized marketplace. It harms workers everywhere, including in developed nations. They’re outsourcing good jobs abroad to lower wage countries and pressuring workers to do more for less because they’ve got little bargaining power to fight back. More on this below.

    Organized Labor in the US – Its Rise and Decline

    Organized labor’s rise began modestly and was fragile in the earliest days of the republic. It gained strength in good economic times, then lost it in downturns like the depression in 1873. By the 1880s, things were better as the nation underwent rapid industrialization. With it came rising prosperity and workers wanting a share of the benefits. They turned to unions for help with skilled artisans leading the way helping the unskilled as well in their efforts to organize.

    New labor organizations arose, older ones expanded, and as they did, they grew more active and militant. It led to the “great uprising of labor” in 1886, including the landmark Chicago May 4 Haymarket Riot protesting police violence against strikers the previous day. Its impact was hugely negative at first. It forced organized labor to regroup and settle in for a long period of recovery.

    This was at a time the incipient labor movement was over two million and rising beginning with its organizing efforts launching it in the 1870s. By the 1880s, it had enough strength to stage huge strikes for better pay and working conditions like the struggle for an eight hour day that had 80,000 strikers parading peacefully down Chicago’s main Michigan Avenue on May 1, 1886 in what’s now regarded as the first ever May Day Parade.

    Workers were helped from community-based emerging independent political parties sensitive to their rights. That’s unheard of today in an age where no effective political party stands for working people despite Democrats and Republicans saying they do. Workers are now on their own. They’re left to struggle in a global marketplace with pathetically little help weak unions can provide.

    Earlier in the 19th century, the first national union arose as workers began asserting their rights. It was called the National Labor Union (NLU), emerged after the Civil War, but was short-lived. Next came the Knights of Labor in 1869 with a mandate to protect all workers including women and blacks after 1883. They were represented by industry groups rather than trade and skill level that was common until then. Its goals were high but achievements few at a time of widespread worker repression in the 1880s. It led to its decline as a more resilient union emerged the result of disaffection with the Knights.

    It was called the American Federation of Labor (AFL) and was founded by Samuel Gompers in 1886 to replace its predecessor, the Federation of Organized Trades and Labor Unions. The ill-fated American Railway Union (ARU) followed in 1893, the largest industrial union of its day for a time, and the Industrial Workers of the World (IWW) that at its peak in the 1920s had 100,000 members.

    The Wobblies are still around 102 years after Big Bill Haywood, Eugene Debs and others founded the union in 1905 as a commitment to working people in their struggle with corporate employers. It’s motto was “an injury to one is an injury to all,” its goal was revolutionary, and it’s still true to its root ideology today as stated in the current IWW Constitution:

    “The working class and the employing class have nothing in common. There can be no peace so long as hunger and want are found among millions of the working people…..Between (workers and employers) a struggle must go on until the workers of the world organize as a class, take possession of the means of production, abolish the (unfair) wage system, and live in harmony with the Earth….It is the historic mission of the working class to do away with capitalism….By organizing industrially we are forming the structure of the new society within the shell of the old.”

    That philosophy under dedicated men like Haywood, Debs and others set the Wobblies on a collision course with government and big business that tried to crush it. During WW I in 1917, it was vicious under Woodrow Wilson’s Justice Department (DOJ). It used the repressive Espionage and Sedition Acts to raid and disrupt union meeting halls across the country. It’s the same tactic used today against Latino immigrants and Muslims in the concocted “war on terrorism” and the one against undocumented workers.

    In 1917 and later, Wilson’s DOJ acted much the same way arresting 165 Wobbly leaders on the grounds they hindered the war effort by using their First Amendment right to speak out against it. They were tried near war’s end in 1918, all convicted, and given long prison terms under a Democrat President thought of reverentially today. Bill Haywood was luckier. After conviction, he was released on bail and fled to the Soviet Union where he remained until his death, but the IWW was never again the same.

    They were hammered again from 1918 – 21 during the infamous Palmer Raids under Wilson Attorney General Mitchell Palmer. He targeted radical left wing groups like the Wobblies at the time of the first “Red Scare” after the 1917 Russian Revolution. It launched J. Edgar Hoover’s career in the DOJ Bureau of Investigation’s new General Intelligence Division that later became the FBI in 1935. The IWW is still around, still dedicated to its founding principles, but it’s worldwide membership is only around 2000, mostly in the US.

    The AFL fared much better. It became the largest union in the first half of the 20th century even after the founding of the Congress of Industrial Organizations (CIO) in 1935 with which it merged in 1955. Today, it’s still the country’s largest federation of unions. Its web site claims a membership of around 10 million workers, even after the Service Employees International Union (SEIU), Teamsters, UNITE-HERE and United Food and Commercial Workers (UFCW) broke away from the federation in 2005. The United Brotherhood of Carpenters and Joiners of America (UBC) did as well in 2001, and the Laborers International Union of North America (LIUNA) left in 2006. They formed a new Change to Win federation in September, 2005 representing about 5.5 million workers. It likely left AFL-CIO with fewer members than it claims with its true size closer to 8 million or less.

    AFL-CIO’s state is a metaphor for the times. Organized labor today is weak in the face of declining membership and corporate dominance with workers losing out in a globalized world. It’s fall has been long-term and painful with worker rights hammered since the 1980s. It’s a long way today from when the landmark Wagner Act passed in 1935 under Franklin Roosevelt. It established the National Labor Relations Board (NLRB) guaranteeing labor the right to bargain collectively on equal terms with management for the first time ever, but it wasn’t an act of kindness.

    It came at the height of The Great Depression when those in power feared the worst. FDR and Congress acted to save capitalism at a time they feared mass worker hostility might boil over like it did in 1917 Soviet Russia. Like all other worker victories, this one came through struggle. It was from organizing, pressing their demands, taking to the streets, going on strike, holding boycotts, battling police and National Guard forces supporting management against working people, paying with their blood and lives and finally achieving results. They got an eight-hour day, a living wage, and on-the-job benefits because strong unions went head-to-head with management and won. It’s worlds different now with corporate giants in bed with friendly governments, and Democrats and Republicans vying to see which party can be more accommodative.

    From the 19th century forward, it was never easy for labor from the height of the movement’s strength to the present. Unions were always disadvantaged even at a time of reasonable labor-management harmony. The passage of the harsh 1947 Taft-Hartley Labor-Management Relations Act showed how tenuous their position always was. Harry Truman vetoed the bill but was overridden. He called it a “slave labor bill” and then hypocritically used it 10 times, the most ever by any President to this day. The law throttles organized labor by giving the President power to stop strikes by court-ordered injunction for 80 days. He can claim the national interest, some other one, or none at all that’s always the same one – to help corporate management deny workers their rights.

    Taft-Hartley is still the law and was last invoked by GW Bush in the summer of 2002 against 10,500 west coast dock workers “locked out” (not striking) by the Pacific Maritime Association representing shipping companies and terminal operators.

    Earlier in 2001 and new in office, Bush showed his anti-labor stripes straightaway. He invoked the Railway Labor Act blocking a threatened strike by 10,000 mechanics, cleaners and custodians at Northwest Airlines set for March 12. He acted again against United Airlines’ 15,000 mechanics in December. He also took management’s side in August, 2006 against Northwest’s 8700 flight attendants’ planned job action against the bankrupt airline’s unfair demands for huge wage cuts and increases in hours worked. Bill Clinton was just as unfriendly invoking the Railway Labor Act against American Airline’s pilots and to prevent railroad strikes 13 times.

    Laws like these, and Presidents’ willingness to use them, crushed the spirit and letter of the Wagner Act. They greatly weakened or revoked hard won provisions, and as a consequence, diminished union clout. Taft-Hartley allows stiff penalties for union violations but minimal ones for companies. It enacted a list of “unfair (union) labor practices” prohibiting jurisdictional strikes (relating to worker job assignments), secondary boycotts (against firms doing business with others being struck), wildcat strikes, sit-downs, slow-downs, mass-picketing against scabs brought it, closed shops (in which employees must join unions), union contributions to federal political campaigns, and more while legalizing employer interventions aimed at preventing unionizing drives.

    It began a process of gradual erosion of union power to bargain collectively. That’s their weapon now weakened because of devious employer tactics. They can illegally fire union sympathizers (thousands each year) and get away with only minor wrist slap fines after years of expensive litigation to prove wrongdoing. Further, employers can fire workers for any lawful reason like incompetence or no stated reason at all. Even the right to strike is neutralized with employers able to hire replacements or threaten to ship jobs offshore. With government on their side, they’re empowered to fire union workers and legally replace them with lower-paid scabs or Latino immigrants.

    The Reagan administration marked the beginning of the current trend in its first year. He was contemptuous of organized labor while hypocritically saying “I support unions and the rights of workers to organize and bargain collectively.” He showed it in August, 1981 by firing 11,000 striking PATCO air traffic controllers, jailing its leaders, fining the union millions of dollars, and effectively busting it in service to the monied interests backing him. It was a shot across organized labor’s bow and a clear message to business and industry of what to expect from a friendly Republican President. Nothing changed since under Democrat or Republican administrations with workers unable to match the power and influence of capital. The toll ever since has been devastating.

    Union membership has been in steady decline from its post-war high of 34.7% in the 1950s. It held fairly constant through most of the 1970s at around 24% where it stood in 1979. At the end of the Reagan era, it was down to 16.8% and is currently around 12% overall with about 36% of government workers unionized but only 7.4% of them in the private sector. It’s the lowest it’s been since the beginning of the mass unionization struggles of the 1930s and in the private sector in over 100 years. It’s because of Democrat and Republican antipathy to organized labor and corporate threats to close plants and outsource jobs. It’s forced workers to take pay cuts and fewer benefits that are dropping to where they’ll be none, and they’ll be on their own to live or die by market-based rules rigged against them.

    George Bush supports corporate interests aiming to crush unions so they have free reign to treat workers any way they wish or go find other work. In the wake of 9/11, he took on public sector unions straightaway. He denied 170,000 new Department of Homeland Security (DHS) employees their civil service protection and right to bargain collectively. Those affected included Transportation Security Administration (TSA) newly federalized airport screeners. They lost their right to unionize in the name of national security that could as easily been for any reason or none at all. But this was just for starters. Bush also wants federal positions contracted out to private companies. That jeopardizes 850,000 federal employees likely to get lower pay, fewer benefits, loss of other unionized rights, and many of them ending up out of work.

    Overall, organized workers always get higher wages and greater benefits, which explains why strong unions are vital. The evidence comes from David Sirota in his his 2006 book, “Hostile Takeover.” He showed:

    — 89% of union members have employer-paid health care coverage compared to 67% for nonunion members; as fewer companies now provide it, those numbers are lower; in addition, companies continue making employees pay a greater share of the cost of coverage;

    — employers pay a larger share of union member health care premiums than nonunion members get (but the percentage is falling);

    — over two-thirds of union members have short-term disability insurance compared to about one-third for nonunion workers;

    — union members get about 26% more vacation time and 14% more total paid leave than nonunion workers; and

    — Economic Policy Institute (EPI) data show union influence gets high school graduating members about 8.8% more pay than nonunion workers.

    Greater worker clout under unions is why management wants to destroy them. It’s to deny working people their right to organize, earn more and get greater benefits corporations don’t want to provide. It’s happening in the gilded age of George Bush, and a recent example came in a ruling late last year when his administration’s NLRB ruled 3-2 against registered nurses’ right to union membership if they perform certain minimal supervisory duties.

    It was in a case where United Auto Workers (UAW) were trying to organize nurses at a Taylor, Michigan-based hospital. US labor law doesn’t guarantee supervisors the right to organize making the NLRB ruling hugely important for up to eight million workers in other trades. It may potentially deny their right henceforth to qualify for union representation if employers want to use this ruling to add enough supervisory responsibilities to employees’ job descriptions to throw them into a union-exempt category.

    Bush further ended the Clinton administration’s regulation requiring federal agencies vet companies’ compliance with the law when awarding federal contracts. He also issued harsh anti-union, anti-worker executive orders (EOs) as well as a tsunami of other repressive ones. He barred automatic union-recognition agreements on federally funded construction projects, abolished labor-management cooperation partnerships aimed at improving productivity and working conditions, and mandated contractors henceforth must inform employees they no longer had to join a union without having to tell them it’s their legal right.

    Just the way Ronald Reagan busted PATCO, George Bush tipped his hand straightaway in office. He’s a company man and union-hater, so henceforth it’s been open season on workers and their rights under his administration. His policies range from:

    — a one-sided support for management;

    — stripping workers of their right to unionize;

    — cutting pay raises for 1.8 million federal workers on the pretext of a “national emergency;”

    — denying millions overtime pay;

    — appointing anti-union officials;

    — scheming to weaken (and then end) retirement security by replacing Social Security with risky private accounts managed by Wall Street sharks that so far has gotten nowhere because of public opposition to it;

    — weakening environmental regulations and protections; and more in an endless war on workers in service to corporate interests that elected and own him.

    The failed “immigration reform” legislation was, in fact, a Trojan Horse. It’s down but not dead and remains a thinly veiled scheme targeting all workers. It’s a dagger aimed straight at organized labor in a plan to create a workplace of unempowered serfs, a “bracero America,” including US citizens having few or no benefits and no security. If this legislation ever becomes law, workers will be at the mercy of business to hire and fire them at will.

    Another anti-labor tool is the repressive Department of Homeland Security (DHS) and its Immigration and Customs Enforcement (ICE) arm. It conducts paramilitary border and workplace assaults on undocumented Latino workers as part of a larger agenda to disenfranchise all working Americans and deny them the right to bargain collectively with management through unions. By targeting undocumented workers first, the eventual aim is to create a large exploitable disposable reserve army worker pool; strip all workers of their rights; empower employers to offer low wage, low or no benefit jobs; and pretty much be able to operate as they please.

    The Employee Free Choice Act (EFCA) – Some Hope for Worker Rights Now Denied

    EFCA was introduced to “amend the (landmark pro-labor) National Labor Relations Act (passed in 1935)” that’s been systematically dismembered piece by piece ever since. Its aim was to “establish an efficient system to enable employees to form, join, or assist labor organizations, to provide for mandatory injunctions for unfair labor practices during organizing efforts, and for other purposes.” On June 26, Senate Republicans blocked labor’s top legislative priority by preventing the bill’s supporters from getting the 60 votes needed to end debate and bring it to a vote.

    For now the bill is dead, but if it ever passes, it will change federal law on worker rights. They’ll henceforth be able to organize by signing cards authorizing union representation, penalize employers violating worker rights to do it, and establish new mediation and arbitration processes for first-contract disputes. It might also end or slow down the firing, demoting, laying off, or suspending without pay of over 20,000 US workers annually because of their union activities.

    The bill was introduced in the 108th and 109th Republican-controlled Congresses but failed to pass. It was introduced again in the 110th Congress on February 5, 2007, got 233 co-sponsors by month’s end, and passed in the House March 1, 2007 for the first time. On March 2, it was placed on the Senate calendar where leading Democrats expected it to pass despite Republican opposition. They were wrong.

    That’s bad news for a bill that would have won back some worker rights after decades of losing them. It’s backed by over five dozen organizations including the NAACP, United for a Fair Economy, Jobs with Justice and numerous other civil, human and labor rights groups. The US Chamber of Commerce and other organizations joined with big business against the bill. They oppose all worker rights, and their lobbying paid off. They claimed the bill allowed them the right to organize before employers can explain why doing it is not in their best interest. Ignored is that union workers always have more rights that include higher pay, greater benefits and added job security. That’s bad for business and why corporate giants fought to kill the bill.

    They have a powerful ally in the White House making their job a lot easier. In a mid-February speech before a business lobby group, Dick Cheney announced George Bush would veto EFCA legislation if it passed on his watch. He assured those attending this administration will keep its anti-labor record unblemished on something polls show 77% of working Americans want but won’t get as long as George Bush is in office.

    Global Unionization – Another Potential Ray of Hope

    In April editions of The American Prospect, the Washington Post and ZNet, Harold Meyerson wrote about “a radical new direction for the globalized economy” in his article titled “Unions Gone Global.” He noted the United Steel Workers (USW) here are negotiating a merger with two of Britain’s largest unions to create “the first genuinely multinational trade union” that with about three million members will be the world’s largest. Meyerson reported the goal, as USW’s Gerald Fernandez put it, is “to fight financial globalization (by) fight(ing) it globally….by building a global union (in this case a) federation of metal, mining, and general workers.”

    The partners in this one stated a commitment to “fund human rights and union rights in parts of Africa and Colombia” where more unionists are killed annually than anywhere else, and the country gets billions in US aid each year to help out. They also plan a global effort “to protect employees’ retirement benefits” from corporate predators wanting to end them. For now, there’s no way to know if the idea behind the merger will spread, whether workers here and abroad will benefit from it, or even if the USW and their British partners will follow through effectively on their committed aims to help win back what unionized workers have been losing for years.

    Evidence Suggests CIA Purposefully Spiked Investigations

    0

    CIA Inspector General’s Report
    911Blogger

    A grave miscarriage of justice is afoot. After years being withheld the Administration finally is forced to release the CIA’s IG Report on 9/11. While earlier news accounts said the report would be released in early September it was released in the middle of a Congressional recess, in the middle of a Summer break, thus insuring it will not receive the attention it deserves. Worse still is the conclusion in most press reports since its release that bolsters the official narrative ie. that all the myriad failures were simply due to ‘systemic failure’ and/or incompetence.

    The circumstantial evidence running contrary to this conclusion is compelling and convincing.

    It appears that Al-Hazmi and Al-Mihdhar were being protected by higher ups in the CIA. Respected author Joe Trento has reported that they were working for Saudi Intelligence. Others reported the two were removed from the watchlist two days before 9/11. I don’t know if either was the case. It is clear however that there was a concerted effort to protect them similar in some respects to the way authorities in FBI HQ refused to allow Rowley and company in Minnesota to go into Mousaoui’s laptop computer or how higher ups prevented Robert Wright in Chicago from going after the money trail of Yassin Al-Kadi (Qadi) who financed the software company Ptech and the terrorist group Hamas and who was later named a /Specially Designated Global Terrorist/ by President Bush in October of 2001.

    There is a pattern here that cannot be adequately explained by charges of ‘systemic failure’ or incompetence. As Kristen Breitweiser http://www.huffingtonpost.com/kristen-breitweiser/enabling-danger- par t-one_b_5951.html has suggested, something else is going on, and the repeated missed opportunities (She has documented 7) and blocked communications suggests something “purposeful” on the part of authorities. The IG Report says 60 agents reviewed the Intel about the two.

    Please review the statement below made by 9/11 widow Kristen Breitweiser and by Investigative Journalist Michael Isikoff of Newsweek. These are merely jumping off points to following a trail few have had the courage to examine closely and relentlessly until answers to the questions raised by Kristen and others are answered. In the wake of 9/11, billions of dollars, the lives of soldiers and the Constitution are being sacrificed. Let not truth be sacrificed as well, not when it comes to what happened on September 11th, 2001.

    Thank you.

    Kyle F. Hence Co-Producer, 9/11: Press for Truth http://www.911pressfortruth.com

    *Statement of Kristen Breitweiser, Co-Chairperson, September 11 Advocates Concerning the Joint 9/11 Inquiry Senate Select Committee on Intelligence House Permanent Select Committee on Intelligence September 18, 2002 * [snip] Perhaps even more disturbing is the information regarding Khalid al-Midhar and Nawaf Alhazmi, two of the hijackers. in late August, the CIA asked the INS to put these two men on a watchlist because of their ties to the bombing of the U.S.S. Cole. On August 23, 2001, the INS informed the CIA that both men had already slipped into the country. Immediately thereafter, the CIA asked the FBI to find al-Midhar and Alhazmi. Not a seemingly hard task in light of the fact that one of them was listed in the San Diego phone book, the other took out a bank account in his own name, and finally, an FBI informant happened to be their roommate. [snip]*

    Later after three more years of connecting dots, Kristen Breitweiser wrote in Huffington Post, August 20, 2005 http://www.huffingtonpost.com/kristen-breitweiser/enabling-danger- part -one_b_5951.html *

    [snip] Additionally, when one carefully reads the 9/11 chronology and information provided in the public record, it becomes increasingly clear that the CIA´s repeated failure to share information with the FBI about two of the 9/11 hijackers-al Mihdhar and al Hazmi– was purposeful. There exists at least seven instances between January 2000 and September 11th, 2001, that the CIA withheld vital information from the FBI about these two hijackers who were inside this country training for the attacks. Once, twice, maybe even three times could be considered merely careless oversights. But at least seven documented times? To me, that suggests something else. (To read about these instances, I suggest you read 9/11 materials relating to the “watchlisting issue” involving al Mihdhar and al Hazmi which is a story so detailed, that it deserves its own lengthy blog.) [snip]

    *From an interview with Newsweek Investigative Reporter Michael Isikoff for the documentary, 9/11: Press for Truth http://www.911pressfortruth.com :*

    MICHAEL ISIKOFF: The CIA learned about this meeting. It arranged for it to be under surveillance by the Malaysian special branch… The CIA subsequently learned within days that… Almihdhar and Alhazmi were headed for the United States. …An FBI detailee who knew about this at the Counter Terrorism Center of the CIA drafted a cable to alert the FBI, and that cable was quashed by superiors at the CIA.

    The police are becoming an anti-terror law unto themselves

    0

    GORDON ARCHER

    THE Metropolitan Police took a lot of flak last week for using anti-terrorism powers to manage the Heathrow climate change protest. In my opinion they deserved it, guilty as they were of a breach of trust and of undermining their case for greater powers to combat terrorism.

    I don’t say that as someone who opposes anti-terror legislation. I don’t have a problem with the state protecting its citizens from those who wish to kill or maim them. That’s not to say I’ve not protested against specific anti-terror laws in the past or, more accurately, against their abuse, but I have never been in doubt of the need for them.

    Since 9/11 there has been a rapid increase in anti-terrorism powers and a consequent diminution in our own civil liberties. Indefinite detention without charge for foreign nationals, subsequently replaced (following legal challenge) by the control order regime; pre-charge detention increased from 14 days to 28 days; new infringements on freedom of speech; banning orders on non-violent groups which promote terrorism; restrictions on the right to protest … the list goes on.

    All of these things go against the grain of how I think society should be organised, but in the context of the times we live in now they don’t seem entirely unreasonable. People want to use themselves as human bombs; government and the security services have to try and stop them. Those who plan and execute these outrages, organise themselves into highly secretive units; the police need increased powers to question those whom they suspect. If the supporters of the bombers preach hate and death then they should forgo their rights to free speech and freedom of organisation.

    Civil liberties, like any other rights that we have, are not absolute: they must balance the needs of the individual and the collective needs of society. We all accept that what we do and how we act impinges on others and is, therefore, regulated, whether by the norms of social conduct or by law. When it comes to our own security and safety, we expect the protection offered by the state.

    On the whole we accept the balance between our rights and the rights of the society we live in. Very few of us demand absolute rights, either to freedom of speech or of organisation. It’s no small irony that those who do demand absolute freedoms would themselves create societies which would deny those very rights.

    But leaving the mad and the bad to one side, most of us take the police and the government at face value when they say they need more powers. Why shouldn’t we? Who are we, after all, to say what is required? Who among us would want to block a decision if it saved lives or stopped an outrage such as the Glasgow Airport attack?

    The bargain the government and police strike with us is that they will act responsibly and that rights given up will be respected by the proper use of new powers. That, in return for our sacrifice, new laws will be subjected to rigorous public scrutiny and used with absolute conscientiousness from government and security services alike.

    Instead, when opposition parties or backbench supporters of the government question new legislation they are dismissed as “soft on terror”. When the judiciary overturns legislation as unlawful, they are not listened to or their advice heeded.

    And before the climate change protest at Heathrow had even begun, Metropolitan Police documents leaked to the media announced the intention of the police to deal with protesters “robustly using terrorism powers”.

    The leaks were backed up by police action, which routinely used powers under section 44 of the Terrorism Act 2000 to stop and search protesters going to and from the protest. These powers allow the police to stop, search and detain anyone without evidence that they are linked to terrorism. Perfectly legitimate, in my view, if you genuinely suspect someone of terrorism; absolutely illegitimate against climate change protesters and, on more than one occasion, journalists covering the protest.

    The police already have ample powers to deal with protest and public order and they cannot put those to one side because the terrorism powers are more effective, or more convenient. These are powers given to the police to stop very bad men doing very bad things, not to prevent a rag tag bunch of eco- warriors inconveniencing the travelling public.

    It is too easy to turn a blind eye to what went on at Heathrow. The facts are that the police (encouraged, according to media reports, by the government) used powers given to them to deal with specific threats of terrorism to manage what was a routine protest. Of course there was nothing actually illegal in the actions they took – operational responsibility for the use and interpretation of these laws lies with the police themselves.

    They did, however, act against the spirit of the law. More importantly, they breached the trust of those who are willing to give them the benefit of the doubt when they say they need new laws or powers to deal with the terrorist threat.

    I know that in some people’s minds it is naive to expect government or the police to act differently, and there is some truth in that. But at the end of the day are we not entitled to ask them to act differently? Are we not entitled to ask those who govern us and those who protect us to stick to their side of the bargain? And if they do not are we not entitled to greet with scepticism the next request for new powers or laws?

    Gordon Archer was a senior adviser to former SNP leader John Swinney from 2001 to 2006

    Chinese officials predicted 9/11 attacks

    0

    Imagine someone predicting the 9/11 attack on the World Trade Center in the US two years before the terror strike!Such a forecast was part of an analysis of the weaknesses of the American military system by two Chinese military planners, who also identified Osama bin Laden as one of the likely perpetrators of a possible attack.
       
    The officials, Qiao Liang and Wang Xiangsui, who were in service at that time, made the forecast in the book “Unrestricted Warfare” written in 1999, which has now beenpublished in India, several years after being translated into English for the CIA, the Defense Intelligence Agency and other US national security departments.
       
    The officials, who were then senior colonels, said, “Actually, with the next century having still not yet arrived, the American military has already encountered trouble from insufficient frequency bandwidth brought on by the above-mentioned types of enemies.

    Whether it be the intrusion of hackers, a major explosion at the World Trade Center, or a bombing attack by Osama bin Laden, all of these greatly exceed the frequency bandwidths understood by the American military.
       
    The American military is naturally inadequately prepared to deal with this type of enemy psychologically, in terms of measures and especially as regards military thinking and the methods of operation derived from this,” they said.
       
    The US was an area of major focus in the book, which proposed tactics for developing countries like China and measures to compensate for their military inferiority vis-a-vis America in a possible hi-tech war.

    http://www.dnaindia.com/report.asp?NewsID=1117821

    Fascist Police State Looms Closer With “Intelligent CCTV”

    1

    By Mick Meaney
    RINF Alternative News 

    A new CCTV system is being trialed at one of the UK’s busiest train stations. Known as “Intelligent CCTV”, the software will monitor and predict human behaviour and can be linked to a national police database.

    Sheffield is the first train station in the UK to trial the system but a national roll out of the technology is expected, creating 20% of all UK CCTV systems using these methods. So far intelligent CCTV has not proven reliable as recent tests in Germany found face recognition CCTV software failed on three separate occasions to successfully recognize 8 out of 10 people, even when standing still and in good light conditions.

    “Intelligent CCTV technology is so sophisticated it can detect whether a passenger is standing too close to the platform edge, if someone has had a fall, if any luggage has been abandoned or even if a wall has been defaced by graffiti or fly-posting,” said Garry Raven, Managing Director of Midland Mainline.

    “We are confident that this new approach will ensure our passengers feel safer, especially at night, and that it will lead to a reduction in crime at stations. When an incident does occur, our staff will be able to respond much more quickly, giving us a far better chance at catching the perpetrators and obtaining a successful conviction,” said Garry Raven.

    Alan Lipton of ObjectVideo, one of the companies creating this software said: “We want to teach the software to identify patterns and to recognize certain human activities.

    “This idea involves teaching the computer to recognize complex human actions, such as a fight; a person reaching for a gun; a person falling over; or a room in which everyone has started to run,” Lipton said.

    But who decides what normal behaviour is? We are creating a surveillance society that will one day have its citizens living in fear while machines constantly monitor our behaviour, judge and decide who is a threat and who isn’t, and being treated as a suspect on a daily basis is simply the price we pay for living in Great Britain.

    Intelligent CCTV is just one of the many shocking methods police and government are introducing to “protect us”, which individually are often tolerated, but when combined they create a terrifying vision of our future.

    This is not a democracy; it is the birth of a fascist police state.

    Aaron Russo dies of cancer

    flamesong
    RINF Alternative News

    Unconfirmed reports on the internet suggest that filmmaker and political activist Aaron Russo died on 24th August 2007 after a struggle with cancer. He will be perhaps most remembered for his outspoken work, America: From Freedom to Fascism.

    Although a filmmaker, famous for producing films as Trading Places and The Rose as well as managing Bette Midler, Aaron Russo became politically active when he produced the film Mad As Hell – which took its name from the phrase ranted by Peter Finch in the film Network – in which he was critical of NAFTA (the North American Free Trade Agreement), the introduction of identity cards, the so-called war on drugs and proposed regulations on alternative medicine.

    He made numerous attempts to seek elected office including his 2004 campaign for nomination as the Libertarian Party candidate for US president in which he was only defeated in the final ballot by a modest majority.

    He had been acquainted with some of the most powerful people in the world with some of whom he fell foul – including Nicholas Rockefeller about whom he said:

    ‘Here’s what I do know first hand – I know that about eleven months to a year before 9/11 ever happened I was talking to my Rockefeller friend (Nicholas Rockefeller) and he said to me ‘Aaron there’s gonna be an event’ and he never told me what the event was going to be – I’m not sure he knew what the event was going to be I don’t know that he knew that,’‘He just said there’s gonna be an event and out of that event we’re gonna invade Afghanistan so we can run pipelines through the Caspian sea, we can go into Iraq to take the oil and establish bases in the middle east and to make the middle east part of the new world order and we’re going to go after Venezuela – that’s what’s going to come out of this event.’‘Eleven months to a year later that’s what happened….he certainly knew that something was going to happen.’‘In my relationships with some of these people I can tell you that it’s as evil as it really gets – this is it – this is the game.’

    ‘People know that 9/11 was an inside job, look what they did here in America, look at 9/11, look what they did – they killed thousands of Americans – people jumping out of windows from a hundred floors up – they don’t care.’

    In the end he couldn’t afford the treatment he required to help him fight his cancer and a fund was established to help him pay for it. Sadly, it has been too late.

     

    Robert Fisk: Even I question the ‘truth’ about 9/11

    0

    Each time I lecture abroad on the Middle East, there is always someone in the audience — just one — whom I call the “raver”. Apologies here to all the men and women who come to my talks with bright and pertinent questions — often quite humbling ones for me as a journalist — and which show that they understand the Middle East tragedy a lot better than the journalists who report it. But the “raver” is real. He has turned up in corporeal form in Stockholm and in Oxford, in Sao Paulo and in Yerevan, in Cairo, in Los Angeles and, in female form, in Barcelona. No matter the country, there will always be a “raver”.

    His — or her — question goes like this. Why, if you believe you’re a free journalist, don’t you report what you really know about 9/11? Why don’t you tell the truth — that the Bush administration (or the CIA or Mossad, you name it) blew up the twin towers? Why don’t you reveal the secrets behind 9/11? The assumption in each case is that Fisk knows — that Fisk has an absolute concrete, copper-bottomed fact-filled desk containing final proof of what “all the world knows” (that usually is the phrase) — who destroyed the twin towers. Sometimes the “raver” is clearly distressed. One man in Cork screamed his question at me, and then — the moment I suggested that his version of the plot was a bit odd — left the hall, shouting abuse and kicking over chairs.

    Usually, I have tried to tell the “truth”; that while there are unanswered questions about 9/11, I am the Middle East correspondent of The Independent, not the conspiracy correspondent; that I have quite enough real plots on my hands in Lebanon, Iraq, Syria, Iran, the Gulf, etc, to worry about imaginary ones in Manhattan. My final argument — a clincher, in my view — is that the Bush administration has screwed up everything — militarily, politically diplomatically — it has tried to do in the Middle East; so how on earth could it successfully bring off the international crimes against humanity in the United States on 11 September 2001?

    Well, I still hold to that view. Any military which can claim — as the Americans did two days ago — that al-Qa’ida is on the run is not capable of carrying out anything on the scale of 9/11. “We disrupted al-Qa’ida, causing them to run,” Colonel David Sutherland said of the preposterously code-named “Operation Lightning Hammer” in Iraq’s Diyala province. “Their fear of facing our forces proves the terrorists know there is no safe haven for them.” And more of the same, all of it untrue.

    Within hours, al-Qa’ida attacked Baquba in battalion strength and slaughtered all the local sheikhs who had thrown in their hand with the Americans. It reminds me of Vietnam, the war which George Bush watched from the skies over Texas — which may account for why he this week mixed up the end of the Vietnam war with the genocide in a different country called Cambodia, whose population was eventually rescued by the same Vietnamese whom Mr Bush’s more courageous colleagues had been fighting all along.

    But — here we go. I am increasingly troubled at the inconsistencies in the official narrative of 9/11. It’s not just the obvious non sequiturs: where are the aircraft parts (engines, etc) from the attack on the Pentagon? Why have the officials involved in the United 93 flight (which crashed in Pennsylvania) been muzzled? Why did flight 93’s debris spread over miles when it was supposed to have crashed in one piece in a field? Again, I’m not talking about the crazed “research” of David Icke’s Alice in Wonderland and the World Trade Center Disaster — which should send any sane man back to reading the telephone directory.

    I am talking about scientific issues. If it is true, for example, that kerosene burns at 820C under optimum conditions, how come the steel beams of the twin towers — whose melting point is supposed to be about 1,480C — would snap through at the same time? (They collapsed in 8.1 and 10 seconds.) What about the third tower — the so-called World Trade Centre Building 7 (or the Salmon Brothers Building) — which collapsed in 6.6 seconds in its own footprint at 5.20pm on 11 September? Why did it so neatly fall to the ground when no aircraft had hit it? The American National Institute of Standards and Technology was instructed to analyse the cause of the destruction of all three buildings. They have not yet reported on WTC 7. Two prominent American professors of mechanical engineering — very definitely not in the “raver” bracket — are now legally challenging the terms of reference of this final report on the grounds that it could be “fraudulent or deceptive”.

    Journalistically, there were many odd things about 9/11. Initial reports of reporters that they heard “explosions” in the towers — which could well have been the beams cracking — are easy to dismiss. Less so the report that the body of a female air crew member was found in a Manhattan street with her hands bound. OK, so let’s claim that was just hearsay reporting at the time, just as the CIA’s list of Arab suicide-hijackers, which included three men who were — and still are — very much alive and living in the Middle East, was an initial intelligence error.

    But what about the weird letter allegedly written by Mohamed Atta, the Egyptian hijacker-murderer with the spooky face, whose “Islamic” advice to his gruesome comrades — released by the CIA — mystified every Muslim friend I know in the Middle East? Atta mentioned his family — which no Muslim, however ill-taught, would be likely to include in such a prayer. He reminds his comrades-in-murder to say the first Muslim prayer of the day and then goes on to quote from it. But no Muslim would need such a reminder — let alone expect the text of the “Fajr” prayer to be included in Atta’s letter.

    Let me repeat. I am not a conspiracy theorist. Spare me the ravers. Spare me the plots. But like everyone else, I would like to know the full story of 9/11, not least because it was the trigger for the whole lunatic, meretricious “war on terror” which has led us to disaster in Iraq and Afghanistan and in much of the Middle East. Bush’s happily departed adviser Karl Rove once said that “we’re an empire now — we create our own reality”. True? At least tell us. It would stop people kicking over chairs.

    http://news.independent.co.uk/fisk/article2893860.ece

    Report: U.S. military chief to urge Bush to cut troops in Iraq

    0

    Xinhua

    The U.S. military chief is expected to call on President George W. Bush to reduce American troops in Iraq next year, a newspaper reported Friday.

        General Peter Pace, chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, is expected to tell Bush privately that maintaining more than 100,000troops of the currently 162,000 in Iraq through 2008 year would severely strain the military, the Los Angeles Times reported, citing military and administration officials.

        The Joint Chiefs have voiced concerns that the Iraq war has compromised the military’s ability to respond to other threats, and wanted to reduce U.S. troops in Iraq by up to half of the 20 combat brigades in the country, the newspaper said.

        The Times said Pace’s recommendation would differ from that being prepared by General David Petraeus, the top U.S. commander in Iraq. Petraeus would suggest to Bush in a report on Iraq due in September that Washington maintain high troop levels there for 2008 and beyond.

        Pace’s term as the Joint Chiefs’ chairman will expire at the end of September this year.

    Last stand for Bush’s ‘stay the course’ crowd?

    2

    By Bill Berkowitz

    Freedom’s Watch, a new group of former ambassadors and Bush pitchmen are targeting dozens of congressional representatives with $15 million worth of pro-war radio and television advertisements

    It’s been a long time since the halcyon days of the 1980s when religious and secular right wing organizations would round up the troops, create a letterhead group, drop a boatload of direct mail fundraising letters, and successfully promote the domestic and foreign policy agenda of President Ronald Reagan. Before, and during the early months after the U.S. invasion of Iraq, conservatives initiated a similar spate of activities aimed at organizing support for the invasion. Predicting immediate success, these groups not only promulgated their vision of a Middle East dominated by the U.S., they also demonized any and all opponents of the invasion.

    Now, with the stench of a lame duck president permeating the White House, Freedom’s Watch, a new group of Bush administration former ambassadors and high-powered donors, has launched a multi-million dollar campaign to win back the public’s support for the war on Iraq. Is this the ‘stay the course’ crowd’s last stand?

    According to its website, Freedom’s Watch, a 501 (c) (4) nonprofit corporation, is “dedicated to fighting to protect the ideals and issues that keep America strong and prosperous.” It is “rallying together” to:

    • “Bring the focus back to the real threats to our nation.”
    • “Fight back against the policies that are corrupting America’s ability to protect our citizens, our economy, and our way of life.”
    • “Reprioritize our legislative agenda to protect America’s core values.”

    Despite Andrew Card’s famous dictum about not introducing a marketing campaign in the dog days of August, Freedom Watch is up against the wall. In a press release issued by the group on August 22, it announced the “launch[ing] a nationwide grassroots campaign aimed at ensuring Congress continues to fully fund the troops with the ultimate goal of victory in the War on Terror.” It claimed that it will spend some $15 million on radio and television advertisements from now through mid-September, the time Gen. David Petraeus delivers his progress report on the situation in Iraq.

    “The mission of Freedom’s Watch is to ensure a strong national defense and a powerful effort to confront and defeat global terror, especially in Iraq,” said Bradley A. Blakeman, the group’s president. “Those who want to quit while victory is possible have dominated the public debate about terror and Iraq since the 2004 election. Freedom’s Watch is going to change all that.”

    The Politico‘s Mike Allen reported that “The opening ad, by Jamestown Associates of New Jersey, shows a military veteran saying:

    Congress was right to vote to fight terrorism in Iraq and Afghanistan. I re-enlisted after Sept. 11 because I don’t want my sons to see what I saw. I want them to be free and safe. I know what I lost. I also know that if we pull out now everything I’ve given and the sacrifices will mean nothing. They attacked us and they will again. They won’t stop in Iraq. We are winning on the ground and making real progress. It’s no time to quit. It’s no time for politics.

    Upon his viewing of a Freedom’s Watch’s ad the New Republic‘s Jason Zengerle pointed out that “On an emotional level, the ad’s bluntly honest — in that there’s no real way to question the sincerity of the double-amputee vet when he says ‘[I]f we pull out now, everything I’ve given and sacrificed will mean nothing.’ On an intellectual level, the ad’s bluntly dishonest — from its reference to the Congressional ‘vote to fight terrorism in Iraq’ to its implication that the people we’re now fighting in Iraq are the people who attacked us on 9/11. But, because it’s a wounded vet making the case, I’d imagine the ad’s emotional punch will carry the day.”

    Freedom’s Watch’s advertisements, which will be broadcast in more than 20 states and dozens of congressional districts, and feature a toll-free phone number for the public to call their representatives, is unambiguous: “urge” your representative not to “surrender to terror.”

    Blakeman added that Freedom’s Watch “will spare no effort” to “protect our country.” “Our goal is to make clear that when America goes to war, victory is the only outcome. That’s what the troops are saying in these advertisements and what Freedom’s Watch believes. We do not agree with those groups pressuring our lawmakers to abandon victory.”

    A former member of President George W. Bush’s Senior Staff as the Deputy Assistant to the President for Appointments and Scheduling before joining Park Strategies LLC as a lobbyist in 2006, Blakeman is also the Senior Advisor for Gordon C. James Public Relations, and is a former vice president of Barbour, Griffith and Rogers.

    Congresspedia, a project of the Sunlight Foundation and the Center for Media & Democracy, pointed out that Freedom’s Watch was “Using a propaganda tactic similar to that currently being employed by the pro-war in Iraq Republican front group Vets for Freedom … [by] us[ing] ads featuring ‘Iraq war veterans and parents of veterans who lost family members in the war’ to urge both Republican and Democratic members of Congress ‘who have supported the war not to switch their vote.’ The ‘central message’ will be that ‘the war in Iraq can be won and Congress must not surrender.'”

    On August 22, Tom Matzzie, Washington Director of MoveOn.org Political Action/Americans Against Escalation in Iraq, pointed out on AMERICAblog that nearly $6 million was going to be spent between August 22 and September 23, targeting mostly Republican members of Congress:

    • Heather Wilson (R) and Pete Domenici (R), New Mexico, ad buy $254,190
    • Susan Collins (R) and Olympia Snowe (R), Maine, ad buys $105,995 and $158,780
    • Chuck Grassley (R) and Tom Latham (R), Iowa, ad buys $118,165, $200,520, and $56,925
    • Vernon Ehlers (R), Michigan, ad buy $177,435
    • Arlen Specter (R), Todd Platts (R), Jim Gerlach (R), Tim Murphy (R), Charlie Dent (R), Mike Castle (R), Chris Smith (R), and Mike Ferguson (R), Pennsylvania, ad buys $226,265, $922,325, and $251,290
    • Norm Coleman (R), Jim Ramstad (R), and Michele Bachmann (R), Minnesota, ad buy $220,750
    • Jon Porter (R) and Dean Heller (R), Nevada, ad buys $63,900 and $138,210
    • George Voinovich (R) and Steven LaTourette (R), Ohio, ad buy $32,935
    • Jim Walsh (R) and Randy Kuhl (R), New York, ad buys $144,955 and $187,235
    • John Warner (R) and Tom Davis (R), Virginia, ad buy $473,570
    • Gordon Smith (R), Oregon, ad buys $66,285 and $83,710
    • Mark Pryor (D), Arkansas, ad buy $248,190
    • Wayne Gilchrest (R), Maryland, ad buy $145,925
    • Elizabeth Dole (R) and Bob Inglis (R), North Carolina, ad buy $108,470
    • Mitch McConnell (R), Kentucky, ad buys $126,635 and $134,140
    • Chuck Hagel (R), Nebraska, ad buy $80,395
    • Richard Lugar (R) and Brad Ellsworth (D), Indiana, ad buys $351,420 and $137,870
    • Saxby Chambliss (R) and John Barrow (D), Georgia, ad buys $82,100 and $56,000
    • Ric Keller (R), Florida, ad buy $296,255
    • Lamar Alexander (R), Tennessee, ad buy $188,575
    • John Thune (R) and Stephanie Herseth (D), South Dakota, ad buy $16,545

    Freedom’s Watch has brought Ari Fleischer, former White House press secretary to President George W. Bush from 2001 to 2003, on board as its spokesman. He is also a founding board member. Fleischer, who has been out of the news lately, recently received some media attention when he was hired by the Don’t Take My Bat Away Coalition (website), an organization opposed to a ban on the use of aluminum baseball bats.

    In addition to Bateman and Fleischer, key players include Mel Sembler, the controversial Florida multi-millionaire, former U.S. Ambassador and longtime Republican donor, William P. Weidner, president and chief operating officer of the Las Vegas Sands Corp, and Matt Brooks, executive director of the Republican Jewish Coalition.

    In a post dated August 22, The Politico‘s Mike Allen identified the following Freedom’s Watch donors: Sembler; Anthony Gioia, a longtime Republican Party donor who served as U.S. Ambassador to Malta until 2004; Kevin Moley, who served as the U.S. Permanent Representative to the United Nations and Other International Organizations in Geneva from September 2001 to April 2006; Howard Leach, a big-time GOP donor who served as Ambassador to France until 2005; Dr. John Templeton, Jr., the son of mutual-funds pioneer Sir John Templeton and chairman and president of the John Templeton Foundation; Edward Snider, chairman of Comcast-Spectacor, the huge Philadelphia sports and entertainment firm; Sheldon Adelson, chairman of the Las Vegas Sands Corp. and ranked by Forbes magazine as the third wealthiest American; Gary Erlbaum, Vice Chairman of the Jewish Federation of Greater Philadelphia and Chairman of the Federation’s Israel Emergency Campaign and the Executive Vice President of the Jewish Publishing Group which publishes the Jewish Exponent and Inside magazine; Richard Fox, chairman of the Jewish Policy Center and Pennsylvania State Chairman of the Reagan/Bush campaign in 1980.

    SourceWatch noted that “in November 2005 it was reported that Sembler and Leach both donated to the legal defense fund of I. Lewis Scooter Libby, the now-convicted former Assistant to the President and Chief of Staff to Vice President Dick Cheney.”

    Freedom’s Watch’s “strategy is nearly identical to the one that the swift boat group implemented in 2004 against John Kerry. Get experienced DC-based political operatives, and parade soldiers in front of the camera to tout whatever message across. It’s quite effective, in that it will probably cause at least a few Republicans to buckle,” The Blue State Blog commented August 22.

    “And because soldiers are the ones saying it, the lines that these PR people are feeding them can go farther than the most right-wing lawmakers. They tell us that we will get hit again if we pull out. Kind of like what Cheney said in 2004 about what would happen if Kerry got elected,” Blue State noted.

    Bush: is the president imploding?

    2

    By Andrew Stephen

    His aides are jumping ship, his inner circle is torn apart by feuds and his orders are being ignored. Bush has 17 months left in the White House, but he is now a rudderless leader.

    You certainly wouldn’t think there was a crisis. There’s no sense that the Bush administration has plunged into a shambles of epic and probably unprecedented proportions, either: Dick Cheney has gone fishing, Congress is out for the summer, and much of Georgetown has fled the August mugginess of Washington for the beaches of Nantucket, Martha’s Vineyard or the Hamptons. President George W Bush himself, 61 last month, is about to break a record previously held by Ronald Reagan: before the end of this month, according to my calculations, he will have surpassed the old Gipper’s record of having taken 436 days’ holiday while in office.

    Indeed, this past week, Air Force One touched down at Waco airport in Texas – I swear this is true – for the 66th time since Bush took office, so he could relax at his 1,583-acre “ranch” (there’s not so much as a hint of any livestock to be seen or heard there) nearby. Nor should we forget – how could we? – that, barring anything extraordinary happening, the 43rd US president still has almost 17 months left in the White House.

    But the symbolic meltdown of his administration came on the South Lawn of the White House on 13 August when a semi-tearful Karl Rove, 56, announced he will be leaving the administration on 31 August. Though nominally only deputy chief of staff, Rove had become increasingly indispensable to Bush since they first met 34 years ago. He was the amoral political über-strategist who somehow propelled Bush – an alcoholic who had already failed in both politics and business – to four election victories between 1994 and 2004, handing him two terms as Texas governor and then as US president. Bush bristles at the implications of Rove being described as “Bush’s brain”, but happily calls Rove the “boy genius” and “the architect” behind his supreme electoral triumph.

    And yet, that hot August morning, the dreams of both men lay in tatters. The wheels of amorality had come full circle. Though Bush was Rove’s best-known political trophy, he had also virtually single-handedly turned Texas from the stolidly Democratic state of LBJ into a strongly Republican one. I have catalogued in these pages before some of the smear tactics Rove used while doing that, such as starting a whispering campaign in 1994 that Ann Richards – Bush’s Democratic rival that year and the then popular incumbent Texas governor, since deceased – was a closet lesbian.

    But Rove’s ultimate dream, which he came perilously close to realising in the 21st century, was to pull off what he had done to Texas with the entire country: to create a durable Republican base, centred on the so-called “Christian right” he set about mobilising, despite being an avowed agnostic himself, which would become the springboard of local and federal Republican rule throughout the US for decades to come.

    Instead, in 2007 Rove has found himself the target of both criminal and congressional investigations, and Bush is now frequently described by friends and enemies alike as the worst and most unpopular US president in history. Yet each squandered unique political capital of which they could only have dreamed when Bush took office in 2001: shortly after the 11 September atrocities, Republicans were favoured 57-28 per cent over Democrats across the nation.

    Today, says Gallup, just 41 per cent of Americans identify themselves as Republicans, compared with 51 per cent who see themselves as Democrats; 40 per cent of Republicans believe the Democrats will win the 2008 presidential election. According to an NBC/WSJ poll a few days ago, Americans believe by margins ranging from 22 to 39 per cent that the Democrats would do better than Bush on issues ranging from education to global warming. Because the Democrats regained control of both the House and Senate last November – a further blow to Rove’s reputation as electoral wonderboy – Bush, Rove et al are the targets of countless congressional probes and subpoenas that threaten to uncover ever more scandal and incompetence.

    All of which explains why there was such a sombre, almost funereal, mood on the South Lawn that sunny morning on 13 August. Rove the non-believer vowed to Bush, with a straight face, that he would pray “for God’s continued gifts of strength and wisdom for you and your work . . . and for the Almighty’s continued blessing of our great country”. Bush described Rove as “a dear friend” who is now “moving on down the road”, adding grimly, and rather strangely: “I’ll be on the road behind you here in a little bit.”

    The two men hugged each other for a long time and then Laura Bush, too, emotionally embraced Rove before they all headed for Marine One, the waiting presidential helicopter. Rove’s wife and teenage son joined them at Andrews Air Force Base and all boarded Air Force One – en route, naturally, to a holiday at the beloved “ranch”. Rove insists, unconvincingly, that he and his second wife, Darby, will now settle in the tiny town of Ingram in mid-Texas so they can be near their son, Andrew, a student at Trinity University in San Antonio, 63 miles away.

    If you believe that, you’ll believe that Rove is at this moment on his knees, praying fervently to the Almighty in whom he does not believe for Bush’s deliverance. The August quiet of Georgetown and Pennsylvania Avenue is therefore misleading – rather like the summer doldrums before the coming megastorm – because Rove’s departure signals that the game really is up for the Bush administration. It’s routine for White House staff to start to look elsewhere at this stage of an administration, but Bush has now been deserted by almost his entire cast – with the notable exceptions, so far, of Cheney and Condi. Alberto Gonzales, his almost comically inept attorney general, stays only because Bush has too much hubris to swallow the universal view that he should be sacked.

    The exodus started with Rummy’s resignation on 8 November last year (actually, we learned a few days ago, he handed it in on 6 November – but it was election day on 7 November so the news was suppressed by the administration for 48 hours, though it didn’t do them any good). The following month John Bolton, Bush’s less-than-lovable ambassador to the UN, called it a day knowing his appointment would never be ratified by a Democratic Senate. In January, Harriet Miers – Bush’s former family lawyer in Texas whom he wildly over-promoted to be White House counsel and then nominated, in a doomed move that was egregious even by Bush’s standards, to the Supreme Court – finally went in the midst of more disclosures about the administration’s firing of eight federal prosecutors for political reasons (in which Rove, too, was prominently involved: watch this space).

    I can count 16 more front-line people who have gone, including Dan Bartlett (a key White House counsellor who vetted speeches, planned events and shaped communications strategy) and Rob Portman (who had been director of the Office of Management and Budget for barely a year when he resigned in June, citing the unconvincing Rovian cliché that he wanted to spend more time with his family). Tony Snow, Bush’s likeable chief spokesman and a former Fox News anchor, who is now stricken with advanced cancer of the colon, says he will also go before Labor Day on 3 September.

    Feuding and vicious warfare have flared in the inner circle, too. Matthew Dowd, Rove’s former protégé-in-chief, is no longer on speaking terms with him and says publicly what everybody else says privately: that he has lost faith in Bush. Matthew Scully, special assistant and senior speechwriter in the White House until 2004, has just published an article excoriating the honesty of Michael Gerson – Bush’s chief speechwriter until last year and a self-proclaimed Christian often dubbed “the conscience of the White House”, who came up with many of Bush’s pithiest scripted lines. David Frum, yet another former White House speechwriter, whose “axis of hatred” Gerson changed to Bush’s infamous “axis of evil” for his first post-9/11 State of the Union address, now says that “polarisation is Karl Rove’s speciality”.

    Catastrophic consequences

    The conundrum, of course, is that it was precisely that dark art which got Bush into the White House in the first place. The poisonous divisiveness that gradually festered around him as a result now allows the state department, to take just one example reported in the Washington Post, to think nothing of simply ignoring an order from the president. Yet I suspect that the extent to which the Bush administration has become so shambolic will not come home to many Americans until the country returns to work on 4 September. Bush is now a truly rudderless president, with no realistic agenda left for the next 513 or so days, other than to tread water and hope for the best.

    He has already decreed that the much-awaited “Petraeus report” – the supposedly crucial testimony on Capitol Hill from General David Petraeus and Ryan Crocker, US ambassador in Baghdad, on what the military situation in Iraq is really like following “the surge” – will not now go ahead as planned. The most Congress can expect by the promised 15 September deadline is a private briefing and a report written by administration staff, rather than by Petraeus or Crocker themselves.

    Bush will undoubtedly trumpet the resulting flammed-up “report” as proof that significant progress is being made in Iraq – none other than Rove himself was on duty peddling the line on the talk shows that 50 per cent of Baghdad is now under the control of the US army, compared with only 8 per cent in February, and that things are going wonderfully in Anbar Province, too. But cynicism with the Bush administration is such that, according to a CNN/Opinion Research poll released on 16 August, 53 per cent of Americans believe that the “report” will try to make the situation in Iraq sound better than it actually is, and 47 per cent of those opposed to the Iraq War say they simply will not trust it.

    The Bush-Rove tragedy is that the two complemented each other and combined to create a uniquely combustible mix that has had such catastrophic consequences for America and the world. To Rove, a college dropout, Bush was a morally malleable blank slate with everything he lacked: an exceedingly well-known, respected family name and a wealthy political background that had enabled him to start life in the privileged Wasp enclaves of Connecticut and end up in Texas via Yale and Harvard. Perfect for the White House in, say, 2001?

    For Bush, Rove represented proven cunning viciousness and, yes, a brain – one that was crammed with political and demographic facts and figures. Besides his enthusiasm for peculiarly nasty dirty tricks, Rove’s genius was to invent wedge issues which did not actually concern the overwhelming majority of Americans, but which he managed to push to the forefront of political debate. Rove may have been an agnostic himself, but he could certainly work up the electoral bloc that he invented and called “the Christian right” into lathers of rage over, say, gay marriage.

    We now know that Rove was chairing meetings of the shadowy and secret White House Iraq Group plotting the invasion of Iraq as early as 2002, and that he was already pushing the line that, because of 9/11, the Bush administration was engaged in a messianic struggle between good and evil. He seized the opportunity to convince Bush that he was a president placed on this planet by God to liberate mankind and bring “democracy” to the un-American and thus politically pagan world. For Bush, it was an intoxicating vision to fill the blank slate.

    By 2003, Rove had an office in the West Wing and Bush let him loose on cherished domestic dreams such as “reforming” social security and immigration. But his high-handed approach soon enraged congressional Republican leaders such as Tom DeLay and Dick Armey, and the beginning of the collapse of the Bush edifice had started. The wars on Iraq and terror were sacrosanct, but when it came to their bread-and-butter issues, the likes of DeLay and Armey weren’t going to be pushed around by a power-mad, devious Washington outsider like Rove.

    Hence the terrible mess Washington will soon be in. Bush has always been obsessed with how history will view him, and all that now keeps him safely wrapped inside his bubble of self-delusion is an almost Hegelian certainty that he is a providential and necessary creation of our times whom history will not only vindicate, but glorify – even if it is long after our deaths. Rove’s job after 31 August, once he is released into the big-bucks world of the lecture, talk-show and publishing circuits, will be to spin the Bush-Rove legacy. He seems less optimistic than Bush, telling TV viewers: “The president will say to me, ‘Don’t worry about it. History will get it right and we’ll both be dead.'”

    In the meantime, the cicadas in Georgetown are chirping away, the weathermen tell us we will all be under a “heat advisory”, and children are flocking to swimming pools before the dreaded return to school. And 1,500 miles away, in Texas, America’s president is furiously biking away while Iraq and Afghanistan burn. Yet history will come to see him as the brave hero who did what he knew was right – even if it takes centuries to come round to that conclusion.

    North American Integration and the Militarization of the Arctic

    2

    The Battle for the Arctic is part of a global military agenda of conquest and territorial control. It has been described as a New Cold War between Russia and America. 

    Washington’s objective is to secure territorial control, on behalf of the Anglo-American oil giants, over extensive Arctic oil and natural gas reserves. The Arctic region could hold up to 25% of the World’s oil and gas reserves, according to some estimates. (Moscow Times, 3 August 2007). These estimates are corroborated by the U.S. Geological Survey (USGS): “he real possibility exists that you could have another world class petroleum province like the North Sea.” (quoted by CNNMoney.com, 25 October 2006)

    From Washington’s perspective, the battle for the Arctic is part of broader global military agenda. 

    It is intimately related to the process of North American integration under the Security and Prosperity Partnership Agreement (SPP) and the proposed North American Union (NAU). The SPP envisages, under the auspices of a proposed “multiservice [North American] Defense Command”, the militarization of a vast territory extending from the Caribbean basin to the Canadian Arctic. 

    It also bears a relationship to America’s hegemonic objectives in different parts of the World including the Middle East. The underlying economic objective of US military operations is the conquest, privatization and appropriation of the World’s reserves of fossil fuel. The Arctic is no exception. The Arctic is an integral part of the “Battle for Oil”. It is one of the remaining frontiers of untapped energy reserves. 

    The Arctic nations (with territories North of the Arctic circle) are Russia, Canada, Denmark, the US, Norway, Sweden, Finland and Iceland. The first three countries (Russia, Canada and Denmark) possess significant territories extending northwards of the Arctic circle. (see Map). 


    Copyright BBC

    Directed against Russia, which is in the process of claiming part of the Arctic shelf, Washington’s Arctic strategy is tied into a broader process of militarization and territorial integration. 

    UN Convention on the Law of the Sea

    The United States has adopted a unilateral approach to Arctic development. It has refused to approve the 1982 UN Convention on the Law of the Sea (UNCLOS), which was ratified by both Russia and Canada. A United Nations Committee currently administers the Law of the Sea Convention. 

    The US transpolar territory is much smaller than that of Russia, Canada and Denmark. US territories bordering the Arctic are limited to the North Alaskan coastline, extending from the Bering straits to the Northeastern Alaskan US-Canadian border. The US has a number of US military bases and installations in Alaska. There are several human settlements on the Northern Slope ( Northern Alaska coastline bordering the Arctic Ocean), including Prudhoe Bay, Barrow and Cape Lisborne. This Northern Slope is rich in oil. It was among the first areas of development of Arctic oil. The Alaskan pipeline links Prudoe Bay on the North Slope to the port of Valdez in Prince William Sound on the Gulf of Alaska.

    Russia

    Russia, in contrast, has by far the largest border with the Arctic, from the Northwestern city of Murmansk on the Russian-Finnish border, extending over the entire Northern Siberian region, to the Bering Straits, which separate Alaska from the Russian Federation. Murmansk is the largest city north of the Arctic Circle, with a population of more than 400,000 inhabitants. In other words, a large part of the Russian continental shelf borders the Arctic. 

    Russia, going back to the Soviet era, had established scientific-military stations on the island of Northern Zemlya as well as in the Francois Joseph archipelago (Franz Josef Land), which is also under Russian jurisdiction. (See map.) Northern Zemlya was used during the Soviet era for underground nuclear testing. 

    Russia is now claiming sovereignty (under the International Convention on the Law of the Sea, UNCLOS) of a vast 1,191,000 sq km territory which is part of the Arctic shelf. 

    This territory claimed by Russia submitted to the UN Committee that administers UNCLOS is said to contain substantial hydrocarbon reserves, on the Arctic seabed:  

    The 1982 International Convention on the Law of the Sea (UNCLOS) establishes a 12 mile zone for territorial waters and a larger 200 mile economic zone in which a country has exclusive drilling rights for hydrocarbon and other resources.
     
    Russia claims that the entire swath of Arctic seabed in the triangle that ends at the North Pole belongs to Russia, but the United Nations Committee that administers the Law of the Sea Convention has so far refused to recognize Russia’s claim to the entire Arctic seabed.
     
    In order to legally claim that Russia’s economic zone in the Arctic extends far beyond the 200 mile zone, it is necessary to present viable scientific evidence showing that the Arctic Ocean’s sea shelf to the north of Russian shores is a continuation of the Siberian continental platform. In 2001, Russia submitted documents to the UN commission on the limits of the continental shelf seeking to push Russia’s maritime borders beyond the 200 mile zone. It was rejected.
     
    Now Russian scientists assert there is new evidence that Russia’s northern Arctic region is directly linked to the North Pole via an underwater shelf. Last week a group of Russian geologists returned from a six-week voyage to the Lomonosov Ridge, an underwater shelf in Russia’s remote eastern Arctic Ocean. They claimed the ridge was linked to Russian Federation territory, boosting Russia’s claim over the oil- and gas-rich triangle.
     
    The latest findings are likely to prompt Russia to lodge another bid at the UN to secure its rights over the Arctic sea shelf. If no other power challenges Russia’s claim, it will likely go through unchallenged. (See Vladimir Frolov, Global Research, July 2007)

    Russia is basing its claim on the grounds that this portion of the Arctic sea shelf is connected to Russia’s continental shelf, through the 2000 km long underwater Lomonosov ridge. “According to Russian media, the physical connection to the Russian intercontinental shelf means that the ridge is technically a part of Russia, and therefore open to exploitation.”

    ( http://www.oilmarketer.co.uk/2007/07/04/russia-seeks-un-approval-on-artic-oil-grab/

    The Strategic Role of Canada and Denmark’s Arctic Territories 

    After Russia, Canada and Denmark have the largest transpolar territories.  

    To effectively challenge and encroach upon Russian territorial claims in the Arctic, Washington requires not only the collaboration of Canada and Denmark, but also jurisdiction over their respective Northern territories, which are considered by Washington as strategic from both a military and economic standpoint. 

    The US has a military presence in both Canada and Denmark (Greenland). Both countries play an important role in Washington’s Arctic strategy. 

    Canada’s territory, extends northwards to the Queen Elizabeth archipelago which includes Ellesmere Island bordering onto the Sea of Lincoln, which is part of the Arctic Ocean. Ellesmere Island is part of the Canadian territory of Nunavut. 

    Alert on Ellesmere Island (located at 82°28’N, 62°30’W) is considered the northernmost human settlement in the world. In practice it operates as a military intelligence station (Canadian Forces Station Alert) is under the jurisdiction of the Canadian military. CFS Alert is 840 km from the North Pole.  

    The militarization of the Arctic is part of the process of North American integration under the Security and Prosperity Partnership Agreement (SPP). The proposed North American Union (NAU) constitutes a means for the US to extend its sovereignty over Canada’s Arctic territories. 

    When the creation of US Northern Command was announced in April 2002, Canada accepted the right of the US to deploy US troops on Canadian soil, extending into its Arctic territories: 

    “U.S. troops could be deployed to Canada and Canadian troops could cross the border into the United States if the continent was attacked by terrorists who do not respect borders, according to an agreement announced by U.S. and Canadian officials.” (Edmunton Sun, 11 September 2002)

    In April 2006, Canada formally ratified a renewed North American Aerospace Defense Agreement (NORAD), (“renewed NORAD”), which allows the US Navy and Coast Guard to deploy American war ships in Canadian territorial waters including its Arctic seabed territories. (For further details, see Michel Chossudovsky, Canada’s Sovereignty in Jeopardy: The Militarization of North America, Global Research, August 2007)

    Greenland

    Greenland, which is under Danish jurisdiction, constitutes a sizeable landmass bordering the Arctic Ocean.

    The Thule Air Force base in Northern Greenland is under the jurisdiction of the US Air Force 821st Air Base Group. It constitutes the US’s northernmost military facility (76°32′N, 68°50′W). The military base lies approximately 1118 km north of the Arctic Circle and 1524 km south of the Terrestrial North Pole. The Thule base is 885 km east of the North Magnetic Pole.

    The Thule US Air Force base also “hosts the 12th Space Warning Squadron, a Ballistic Missile Early Warning Site designed to detect and track Intercontinental Ballistic Missiles (ICBMs) launched against North America.” 

    The Thule base links up to NORAD and US Northern Command headquarters at the Peterson Air Force base in Colorado. The Thule base is also “host to Detachment 3 of the 22d Space Operations Squadron, which is part of the 50th Space Wing‘s global satellite control network.” 

    Denmark is member of NATO, firmly allied with the US. Both Danish and Canadian territory will be used by the US to militarize the Arctic. Denmark has also been a firm supporter of the Bush administration’s military agenda in the Middle East.

    Canada’s Arctic Military Facilities 

    Ottawa’s July 2007 decision to establish a military facility in Resolute Bay in the Northwest Passage was not intended to reassert “Canadian sovereignty. In fact quite the opposite. It was established in consultation with Washington. A deep-water port at Nanisivik, on the northern tip of Baffin Island is also envsaged.

    The US administration is firmly behind the Canadian government’s decision. The latter does not “reassert Canadian sovereignty”. Quite the opposite. It is a means to eventually establish US territorial control over Canada’s entire Arctic region including its waterways.

    Under the renegotiated North American Aerospace Defense Agreement (NORAD), the US military has access to Canada’s domestic territorial waters including Canada’s sea shelf with the Arctic, which coincidentally also provides Washington under the guise of “North American sovereignty” with a justification to challenge Russia in the Arctic.    

    Market Efficiency Hokum

    1

    By Stephen Lendman
    RINF Alternative News

    You know the story triumphantly heard in the West. Markets work best when governments let them operate freely – unconstrained by rules, regulations and taxes about which noted economist Milton Friedman once said in an interview he was “in favor of cutting….under any circumstances and for any excuse, for any reason, whenever it’s possible (because) the big problem is not taxes (but government) spending.

    Friedman is no longer with us, but by his reasoning, the solution to curbing it is “to hold down the amount of income (government) has (and presto) the way to do it is to cut taxes.” He seemed to forget about borrowing and the Federal Reserve’s ability to print limitless amounts of ready cash the way it’s been doing for years and during the current credit squeeze. Friedman further added in the same interchange “If the White House were under (GW) Bush, and House and Senate….under the Democrats, I do not believe there would be much spending.”

    Clearly, either the Nobel laureate wasn’t paying attention or age was taking its toll late in his life. Since 2001, Democrats embraced tax cutting and overspending policies as enthusiastically as Republicans with both parties directing the benefits hugely to the right pockets. They’re on Wall Street and in corporate boardrooms where recipients know “free markets” work great with a little creative resource directing from Washington.

    Financial Market Efficiency

    In investment finance, Eugene Fama is generally regarded as the father of efficient market theory, also known as the “efficient market hypothesis (EMH).” He wrote his 1964 doctoral dissertation on it titled “The Behavior of Stock Market Prices” in which he concluded stock (and by implication other financial market) price movements are unpredictable and follow a “random walk” reflecting all available information known at the time. Thus, no one, in theory, has an advantage over another as everyone has equal access to everything publicly known (aside from “insiders” with a huge advantage). That includes rumored and actual financial, economic, political, social and all other information, all of which is reflected in asset prices at any given time.

    Those buying this theory believe Milton Friedman knew best. He became the modern-day godfather of “free market” capitalism and leading exponent that markets work efficiently and best when unfettered by government intervention that generally gets things wrong. In 1958, Friedman explained it in his famous “I, Pencil” essay. In it, he illustrated the notion of Adam Smith’s invisible hand and conservative economist Friedrich Hayek’s teachings on the importance of “dispersed knowledge” and how the price system communicates information to “make (people) do desirable things without anyone having to tell them what to do.”

    Friedman’s “pencil” story explained “a complex combination of miracles: a tree, zinc, copper, graphite, and so on.” Added to these ingredients from nature is “an even more extraordinary miracle: the configuration of creative human energies – millions of tiny know-hows configuring naturally and spontaneously (responding to) human necessity and desire and in the absence of any human master-minding.” None of them working independently was trying to make a pencil. No one directed them from a central office. They didn’t know each other, lived in many countries, spoke different languages, practiced different religions, and may have even hated each other. Yet, their unrelated contributions produced a pencil.

    By Friedman’s reasoning, this could never happen through central planning. It sounds good in theory, but how does it jibe with reality. The Soviets split the atom, were first in space ahead of the US with Sputnik 1, and developed many advanced technologies even though they were outclassed and outspent by the West overall with greater resources to do it.

    In practical reality, governments, like individuals operating freely in the marketplace, can succeed or fail. It comes down to people skills and how well they do their jobs. Top down or bottom up has little final effect on the end result, but does direct what’s undertaken and what isn’t. Top down in Canada, Western Europe and Venezuela delivers excellent state-funded health care to everyone. Bottom up in America offers it to anyone who can pay, but if not, you’re out of luck if your employer won’t provide it. Forty-seven million and counting had their luck run out, and Friedman’s pencil making miracle won’t treat them when they’ll ill.

    Put another way, if “free market” capitalism works best and America is its lead exponent, why then:

    — is poverty high and rising in the world’s richest country;

    — incomes stagnating;

    — higher education becoming unaffordable for the majority;

    — public education crumbling;

    — jobs at all levels disappearing to low-wage countries;

    — the nation’s vital infrastructure in a deplorable state;

    — 3.5 million or more homeless and heading higher in the wake of subprime defaults;

    — the standard of living of most in the country declining; and,

    — the nation, in fact, bankrupt according to a 2006 study for the St. Louis Fed.

    Clearly, something is wrong with the “pencil miracle” working for some but not for most. Friedman no longer can respond and his acolytes won’t.

    The Myth that Markets Get It Right and Operate Efficiently

    Economist Hyman Minsky was mostly ignored while he lived, but his star may be rising 11 years after his death in 1996. Some described him as a radical Keynesian based on the theories of economist John Maynard Keynes who taught economies operate best when mixed. He believed state and private sectors both play important roles with government stepping in to stimulate or constrain economic activity whenever private sector forces aren’t able to do it best alone.

    It’s the opposite of “supply-side” Reaganomics and its illusory “trickle down” notion that economic growth works best through stimulative tax cuts its proponents claim promote investment that benefits everyone. It was Reagan-baloney then and now, and so is the notion markets are efficient and work best when left alone.

    Minsky explained it, and people are now taking note in the wake of current market turbulence. His work showed financial market exuberance often becomes excessive, especially if no regulatory constraints are in place to curb it. He developed his theories in two books – “John Maynard Keynes” and “Stabilizing an Unstable Economy” as well as in numerous articles and essays.

    In them, he constructed a “financial instability hypothesis” building on the work of Keynes’ “General Theory of Employment, Interest and Money.” He provided a framework for distinguishing between stabilizing and destabilizing free market debt structures he summarized as follows:

    “Three distinct income-debt relations for economic units….labeled as hedge, speculative and Ponzi finance, can be identified.”

    — “Hedge financing units are those which can fulfill all of their contractual payment obligations by their cash flows: the greater the weight of equity financing in the liability structure, the greater the likelihood that the unit is a hedge financing unit.”

    — “Speculative finance units are units that can meet their payment commitments on ‘income account’ on their liabilities, even as they cannot repay the principle out of income cash flows. Such units need to ‘roll over’ their liabilities – issue new debt to meet commitments on maturing debt.”

    — “For Ponzi units, the cash flows from operations are (insufficient)….either (to repay)….principle or interest on outstanding debts by their cash flows from operations. Such units can sell assets or borrow. Borrowing to pay interest….lowers the equity of a unit, even as it increases liabilities and the prior commitment of future incomes.”

    “….if hedge financing dominates….the economy may….be (in) equilibrium. In contrast, the greater the weight of speculative (and/or) Ponzi finance, the greater the likelihood that the economy is a deviation-amplifying system….(based on) the financial instability hypothesis (and) over periods of prolonged prosperity, the economy transits from financial relations (creating stability) to financial relations (creating) an unstable system.”

    “….over a protracted period of good times, capitalist economies (trend toward) a large weight (of) units engaged in speculative and Ponzi finance. (If this happens when) an economy is (experiencing inflation and the Federal Reserve tries) to exorcise (it) by monetary constraint….speculative units will become Ponzi (ones) and the net worth of previous Ponzi units will quickly evaporate. Consequently, units with cash flow shortfalls will be forced to (sell out). This is likely to lead to a collapse of asset values.”

    Minsky developed a seven stage framework showing how this works:

    Stage One – Displacement

    Disturbances of various kinds change investor perceptions and disrupt markets. It may be a tightened economic policy from higher interest rates or investors and lenders retrenching in reaction to:

    — a housing bubble, credit squeeze, and growing subprime mortgage delinquencies and defaults with spreading contagion affecting:

    — other mortgages, and the toxic waste derivative alchemy of:

    — collateralized debt obligation (CDO) instruments (packages of mostly risky junk and other debt),

    –commercial and residential mortgage-backed securities (CMBS and RBMS – asset backed by mortgage principle and interest payments), and even

    — commercial and AAA paper; plus

    — home equity loans harder to service after mortgage reset increases.

    Stage Two – Prices start to rise

    Following displacement, markets bottom and prices begin rising as fundamentals improve. Investors start noticing as it becomes evident and gains momentum.

    Stage Three – Easy credit

    Recovery needs help and plentiful easy credit provides it. As conditions improve, it fuels speculation enticing more investors to jump in for financial opportunities or to borrow for a new home or other consumer spending. The easier and more plentiful credit gets, the more willing lenders are to give it including to borrowers with questionable credit ratings. Yale Economist Robert Shiller shares the view that “booms….generate laxity in standards for loans because there a general sense of optimism (like) what we saw in the late 80s” preceding the 1987 crash that doesn’t necessarily signal an imminent one now.

    New type financial instruments and arrangements also arise as lenders find creative and risky ways to make more money. In recent years, sharply rising housing prices enticed more buyers, and lenders got sloppy and greedy by providing interest-only mortgages to marginal buyers unable to make a down payment.

    Stage Four – Overtrading

    The cheaper and easier credit is, the greater the incentive to overtrade to cash in. Trading volume rises and shortages emerge. Prices begin accelerating and easy profits are made creating more greed and foolish behavior.

    Stage Five – Euphoria

    This is the most dangerous phase. Cooler heads are worried but fraudsters prevail claiming this time is different, and markets have a long way to go before topping out. Greed trumps good sense and investors foolishly think they’re safe and can get out in time. Stories of easy riches abound, so why miss out. Into the fire they go, often after the easy money was made, and the outcome is predictable. The fraudsters sell at the top to small investors mistakenly buying at the wrong time and getting burned.

    Stage Six – Insider profit taking

    The pros have seen it before, understand things have gone too far, and quietly sell to the greater fools buying all they can. It’s the beginning of the end.

    Stage Seven – Revulsion

    When cheap credit ends, enough insiders sell, or an unexpected piece of bad news roils markets, it becomes infectious. It can happen quickly turning euphoria into revulsion panicking investors to sell. They begin outnumbering buyers and prices tumble. Downward momentum is far greater and faster than when heading up.

    Sound familiar? It’s a “Minsky Moment,” and the irony is most investors know easy credit, overtrading and euphoria create bubbles that always burst. The internet and tech one did in March, 2000, and since mid-July, reality caught up with excess speculation in equity prices, the housing bubble, growing mortgage delinquencies and subprime defaults. Goldilocks awoke and sought shelter as lenders remembered how to say “no.” This time, central banks rode to the rescue (they hope) with huge cash infusions, the Fed cut its discount rate a half point August 17, and it signaled lower “fed funds” rates ahead if markets remain tight.

    Intervention may reignite “animal spirits” and work short-term but won’t easily band-aid over what noted investor Jeremy Grantham calls “the broadest overpricing of financial assets – equities, real estate, and fixed income – ever recorded” with the financial system dangerously “overstretched (and) overleveraged.” His view is that current conditions have “almost never been this dire,” and we’re “watching a (too late to stop) very slow motion train wreck.” Minsky would have noticed, too.

    Grantham’s exhaustive research shows all markets revert to their mean values, and all bubbles burst as the greatest Fed-engineered equity one ever in US history did in 2000 but didn’t complete its corrective work. In Grantham’s view, lots more pain is coming and before it’s over, it will be mean, nasty and long, affecting everyone. Minsky saw it earlier, studied it, and wrote about it exhaustively when no one noticed. If he were living today, he’d say “I told you so.”

    Federal Reserve Engineered Housing Bubble and Resultant Financial Market Turmoil

    Astute observers continue to speculate and comment that the housing bubble and resultant current financial market turmoil came from deliberate widespread malfeasance aided by considerable cash infusion help from the Federal Reserve in the lead on the scheme.

    Economist Paul Krugman is one of the latest with his views expressed in an August 16 New York Times op ed piece titled “Workouts, Not Bailouts.” He began by debunking Wall Streeter Treasury Secretary Henry Paulson’s ludicrous April claim that the housing market was “at or near the bottom” followed by his equally absurd August view that subprime mortgages were “largely contained.” Krugman’s response: “the time for denial is past….housing starts and applications for building permits have fallen to their lowest levels in a decade, showing that home construction is still in free fall….home prices are still way too high (at 70% above their long-term trend values according to the Center for Economic and Policy Research, and) the housing slump (will be around) for years, not months” with all those empty unbought homes needing hard to find buyers to fill them.

    In addition, mortgage problems are “anything but contained” and aren’t confined to the subprime category. Krugman believes current real estate troubles and mortgage fallout bear similarity to the late 1990s stock bubble. Like today, they were accompanied by market manipulation and scandalous fraud at companies like Enron and WorldCom. In his view, “it is becoming increasingly clear that the real-estate bubble of recent years (like the 1990s stock bubble)….caused and was fed by widespread malfeasance.” He left out the Fed but named co-conspiratorial players like Moody’s Investors Service and other rating agencies getting paid lots of money to claim “dubious mortgage-backed securities to be highest-quality, AAA assets.” In this role, they’re no different than were “complaisant accountants” like Arthur Andersen that lost its license to practice from its role in the Enron fallout.

    In the end, this scandal may be more far-reaching than earlier ones because so many underwriters and other firms are part of the fraud or are seeking to profit from it. At this point, it’s hard separating villains from victims as, in some cases, they may be one in the same. They’re all involved in dispersing up to trillions of dollars of risks through the derivative alchemy of highly complex, hard to value, packages of mostly subprime CDO and various other type debt instruments that may even end up in so-called safe money market funds unbeknownst to their unsuspecting owners.

    Before this scandal ends, they’ll be plenty of pain to go around, but as always, small investors and low income subprime and other mortgage homeowners will be hurt most. Krugman says this is “a clear case for government intervention,” but it won’t be the kind he wants. He cites a “serious market failure (needing fixing to) help (as many as) hundreds of thousands” of Americans who otherwise may lose their homes and/or financial nest eggs. Faced with this problem, “The federal government shouldn’t be providing bailouts, (it should) arrange workouts….we’ve done (it) before (and it worked) – for third-world countries, not for US citizens.” It helped both debtors escape default and creditors get back most of their money.

    By providing huge cash infusions to ease credit and reignite “animal spirits,” the Fed and other central banks showed they aren’t listening. It proves what Ralph Nader said in his August 19 Countercurrents article called “Corporate Capitalists: Government Comes To The Rescue” that’s also on CounterPunch titled “Greed and Folly on Wall Street.” With “corporate capitalists’ knees” a bit shaky, Nader recalled what his father once explained years ago when he asked and then told his children: “Why will capitalism always survive? Because socialism will always be used to save it.” Put another way, the American business ethic has always been socialism for the rich, and, sink or swim, free market capitalism for the rest of us.

    As the housing slump deepens and many tens of thousands of subprime and other mortgage holders default, vulture investors will profit hugely buying troubled assets at a fraction of their value as they always do in troubled economic times. Writer Danny Schechter calls the current subprime credit squeeze debacle a “sub-crime ponzi scheme (in a) highly rigged casino-like market system” targeting unsuspecting victims. Schechter wants a “jailout” for “criminal….financial institutions (posing) as respectable players.” Krugman, on the other hand, wants a “workout” for the victims. Neither will get what he wants. In the end, as ordinary people lose out, big government will again rescue “corporate capitalism” (at least in the short-term) the way it always does when it gets in trouble. It’s the “American way.” It’ll be no different this time.

    Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago and can be reached in Chicago at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

    Also visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com and listen to The Steve Lendman News and Information Hour on TheMicroEffect.com Saturdays at noon US central time.

    Wednesday, August 22, 2007

    America and Venezuela – Constitutional Worlds Apart

    America and Venezuela: Constitutional Worlds Apart – by Stephen Lendman

    Although imperfect, no country anywhere is closer to a model democracy than Venezuela under President Hugo Rafael Chavez Frias. In contrast, none is a more shameless failure than America, but it was true long before the age of George W. Bush. The difference under his regime is that the mask is off revealing a repressive state masquerading as a democratic republic. This article compares the constitutional laws of each country and how they’re implemented. The result shows world’s apart differences between these two nominally democratic states – one that’s real, impressive and improving and the other that’s mostly pretense and under George Bush lawless, corrupted, in tatters, and morally depraved.

    US Constitutional Law from the Beginning

    Before they’re old enough to understand its meaning, young US children are taught to “pledge allegiance to the flag of the United States of America and to the Republic for which it stands,” and, by inference, its bedrock supreme constitutional law of the land. At that early age, they likely haven’t yet heard of it, but soon will with plenty of misinformation about a document far less glorious than it’s made out to be.

    This article draws on Ferdinand Lundberg’s powerfully important 1980 book, “Cracks in the Constitution,” that’s every bit as relevant today as then. In it, he deconstructs the nation’s foundational legal document, separating myth from reality about what he called “the great totempole of American society.” He analyzed it, piece by piece, revealing its intentionally crafted flaws. It’s not at all the “Rock of Ages” it’s cracked up to be, but students at all levels don’t learn that in classrooms from teachers going along with the deception or who simply don’t know the truth about their subject matter.

    The Constitution falls far short of a “masterpiece of political architecture,” but it’s even worse than that. It was the product of very ordinary scheming politicians (not the Mt. Rushmore types they’re portrayed as in history books) and their friends crafting the law of the land to serve themselves while leaving out the greater public that was nowhere in sight in 1787 Philadelphia. Unlike the Venezuelan Constitution, discussed below, “The People” were never consulted or even considered, and nothing in the end was put to a vote beyond the state legislative bodies that had to ratify it. In contrast to popular myth, the framers crafted a Constitution that didn’t constrain or fetter the federal government nor did they create a government of limited powers.

    They devised a government of men, not laws, that was composed of self-serving devious officials who lied, connived, used or abused the law at their whim, and pretty much operated ad libitum to discharge their duties as they wished. In that respect, things weren’t much different then from now except the times were simpler, the nation smaller, and the ambitions of those in charge much less far-reaching than today.

    The Constitution can easily be read in 30 minutes or less and just as easily be misunderstood. The opening Preamble contains its sole myth referring to “We the people of the United States of America.” The only people who mattered were white male property owners. All others nowhere entered the picture, then or mostly since, proving democracy operatively is little more than a fantasy. But try explaining that to people today thinking otherwise because that’s all they were taught from the beginning to believe.

    They were never told the American revolution was nothing more than a minority of the colonists seceding from the British empire planning essentially the same type government repackaged under new management. Using high-minded language in Article I, Section 8 of the supreme law of the land, the founders and their successors ignored the minimum objective all governments are, or should be, entrusted to do – “provide for….(the) general welfare” of their people under a system of constitutional law serving everyone. But that’s not its only flaw build in by design.

    Our revered document is called “The Living Constitution,” and Article VI, Section 2 defines it as the supreme law of the land. In fact, it’s loosely structured for governments to do as they wish or not wish with the notion of a “government of the people, by the people, for the people” a nonstarter. “The People” don’t govern either directly or through representatives, in spite of commonly held myths. “The People” are governed, like it or not, the way sitting governments choose to do it. As a consequence, “The Living Constitution” was a “huge flop” and still is.

    Setting the Record Straight on the Framers

    Popular myth aside, the 55 delegates who met in Philadelphia from May to September, 1787 were very ordinary self-serving, privileged, property-owning white men. They weren’t extraordinarily learned, profound in their thinking or in any way special. Only 25 attended college (that was pretty rudimentary at the time), and Washington never got beyond the fifth grade.

    Lundberg described them as a devious bunch of wheeler-dealers likely meeting in smoke-filled rooms (literally or figuratively) cutting deals the way things work today. He called them no “all-star political team” (except for George Washington) compared to more distinguished figures who weren’t there like Jefferson, Adams (the most noted constitutional theorist of his day), John Jay (the first Supreme Court Chief Justice), Thomas Paine, Patrick Henry and others. Madison and Alexander Hamilton, who did attend, were virtual unknowns at the time, yet ever since Madison has been mischaracterized as the Constitution’s father. In fact, he only played a modest role.

    The delegates came to Philadelphia in May, 1887, assembled, did their work, sent it to the states, and left in a despondent mood. They disliked the final product, some could barely tolerate it, yet 39 of the 55 attendees knowingly signed a document they believed flawed while we today extoll it like it came down from Mt. Sinai. The whole process we call a first-class historical event was, in fact, an entirely routine uninspiring political caucus producing no “prodigies of statecraft, no wonders of political (judgment), no vaulting philosophies, no Promethean vistas.” Contradicting everything we’ve been “indoctrinated from ears to toes” to believe, the notion that the Constitution is “a document of salvation….a magic talisman,” or a gift to the common man is pure fantasy.

    The central achievement of the convention, and a big one (until the Civil War changed things), was the cobbling together of disparate and squabbling states into a union. It held together, tenuously at best, for over seven decades but not actually until Appomattox “at bayonet point.” The convention succeeded in gaining formal approval for what the leading power figures wanted and then got it rammed through the state ratification process to become the law of the land.

    After much wheeling and dealing, they achieved mightily but not without considerable effort. Enough states balked to thwart the whole process and had to be won over with concessions like legitimizing slavery for southern interests and more. Then consider the Bill of Rights, why they were added, for whom, and why adopting them made the difference. It came down to no Bill of Rights, no Constitution, but they weren’t for “The People” who were out of sight and mind.

    These “glorified” first 10 Amendments were first rejected twice, then only added to assure enough state delegates voted to ratify the final document with them included. Many in smaller states were displeased enough to want a second convention that might have derailed the whole process had it happened. To prevent it, concessions were made including adding the Bill of Rights because they addressed key state delegate concerns like the following:

    — prohibitions against quartering troops in their property,

    — unreasonable searches and seizures there as well,

    — the right to have state militias,

    — the right of people to bear arms, but not as the 2nd Amendment today is interpreted,

    — the rights of free speech, the press, religion, assembly and petition, all to serve monied and propertied interests alone – not “The People,”

    — due process of law with speedy public trials for the privileged, and

    — various other provisions worked out through compromise to become our acclaimed Bill of Rights. Two additional amendments were proposed but rejected by the majority. They would have banned monopolies and standing armies, matters of great future import that might have made a huge difference thereafter. We’ll never know for sure.

    In the end and in spite of its defects, the framers felt it was the best they could do at the time and kept their fingers crossed it would work to their advantage. None of them suggested or wanted “a sheltered haven….for the innumerable heavily laden, bedraggled, scrofulous and oppressed of the earth.” On the contrary, they intended to keep them that way meaning things weren’t much different then than now, and the founders weren’t the noble characters they’re made out to be.

    There were no populists or civil libertarians among them with men like Washington and Jefferson (who was abroad and didn’t attend) being slave-owners. In fact, they were little more than crass opportunists who willfully acted against the will of “The People” they ignored and disdained. In spite of it, they’re practically deified and ranked with the Apostles, and one of them (Washington) sits in the most prominent spot atop Mt. Rushmore.

    The constitutional convention ended September 17, 1787 “in an atmosphere verging on glumness.” Of the 55 attending delegates, 39 signed as a pro forma exercise before sending it to the states with power to accept or reject it. Again, “The People” were nowhere in sight in Philadelphia or at the state level where the real tussle began before the founders could declare victory.

    What Was Achieved and What Wasn’t

    Contrary to popular myth, the new government wasn’t constrained by constitutional checks and balances of the three branches created within it. In fact, then and since, sitting governments have acted expediently, with or without popular approval, and within or outside the law. In this respect, our system functions no differently than most others operating as we do. It’s accomplished through “the narrowest possible interpretations of the Constitution,” but it’s free to go “further afield under broader or fanciful official interpretations.” History records many examples under noted Presidents like Lincoln, T. and F. Roosevelt and Wilson along with less distinguished ones like Reagan, Clinton, Nixon, GHW Bush and his bad seed son, the worst ever of a bad lot.

    Key to understanding the American system is that “government is completely autonomous, detached, (and) in a realm of its own” with its “main interest (being) economic (for the privileged) at all times.” Constitutional shackles and constraining barriers are pure fantasy. Regardless of law, custom or anything else, sitting US governments have always been freelancing and able to operate as they please. They’ve also consistently been unresponsive to the public interest, uncaring and disinterested in the will and needs of the majority, and generally able to get around or remake the law to suit their purpose. George W. Bush is only the latest and most extreme example of a tradition begun under Washington, who when elected unanimously (by virtual coronation) was one of the two richest men in the country.

    The Legislative Branch

    The Constitution then and since confers unlimited powers on the government constituted under its three branches of the Congress, Executive and Judiciary. Article I (with seven in all plus 27 Amendments) deals with the legislative branch. Section 8, Sub-section 18 states Congress has power “to make all laws which shall be necessary and proper for carrying into execution the foregoing powers, and all other powers vested by this Constitution….or in any department or officer thereof.” It’s for government then to decide what’s “necessary” and “proper” meaning the sky’s the limit under the concept of sovereignty.

    The Executive and Judiciary branches are dealt with below with the three branches comprising a labyrinthine system the framers devised under the Roman notion of “divide and rule” as follows:

    — a powerful (and at times omnipotent) chief executive at the top,

    — a bicameral legislature with a single member in the upper chamber able to subvert all others in it through the power of the filibuster (meaning pirate in Spanish),

    — a committee system controlled mostly by seniority or a political powerbroker,

    — delay and circumlocution deliberately built into the system,

    — a separate judiciary able to overrule the Congress and Executive, but too often is a partner, not an adversary,

    — staggered elections to assure continuity by preventing too many officials being voted out together,

    — a two-party system with multiple constituencies, especially vulnerable to corruption and the influence of big (corporate) money that runs everything today making the whole system farcical, dishonest and a democracy only in the minds of the deceived and delusional.

    The Judiciary

    Article III of the Constitution establishes the Supreme Court saying only: “The judicial power shall be vested in one Supreme Court, and in such inferior courts as the Congress may from time to time ordain and establish.” Congress is explicitly empowered to regulate the Court, but, in fact, the opposite often happens or, at times, it cuts both ways. The function of Congress is to make laws with the Court in place to interpret them and decide their constitutionality if challenged and it decides to adjudicate.

    As for the common notion of “judicial review,” it’s nowhere mentioned in the Constitution nor did the framers authorize it. Nonetheless, courts use it to judge the constitutionality of laws in place and public sector body actions. They derive their power to do it by deduction from two separate parts of the Constitution: Article VI, Section 2 saying the Constitution, laws and treaties are the supreme law of the land and judges are bound by them; then in Article III, Section 1 saying judicial power applies to all cases, implying judicial review is allowed. Under this interpretation of the law, appointed judges, in theory, “have a power unprecedented in history – to annul acts of the Congress and President.”

    With or without this power, Lundberg makes a powerful case overall that the constitutional story comes down to a question of money and money arrangement – who gets it, how, why, when, where, what for, and under what conditions. Also addressed is who the law leaves out. The story has nothing whatever to do with guaranteeing life, liberty, and the pursuit of happiness (Jefferson’s Orwellian language meaning property); establishing justice; upholding the rule of law equitably for everyone; promoting the general welfare; or securing the blessings of freedom for “The People” unconsidered, unimportant and ignored by the three branches of government serving monied and property interests only, of which they are a part.

    The Executive Branch

    Lundberg’s theme is clear and unequivocal. Under US constitutional law, the President is the most powerful political official on earth, bar none under any other system of government. “The office he holds is inherently imperial,” regardless of the occupant or how he governs, and the Constitution confers this on him. Unlike the British model, with the executive as a collectivity, the US system “is absolutely unique, and dangerously vulnerable” with one man in charge fully able to exploit his position. “The American President (stands) midway between a collective executive and an absolute dictator (and in times of war like now) becomes, in fact, quite constitutionally, a full-fledged dictator.” Disturbingly, the public hasn’t a clue about what’s going on.

    A single sentence, easily passed over or misunderstood, constitutes the essence of presidential power. It effectively grants the Executive a near-limitless source, only constrained to the degree he chooses. It’s from Article II, Section 1 reading: “The executive power shall be vested in a President of the United States of America. Article II, Section 3 then almost nonchalantly adds: “The President shall take care that the laws be faithfully executed” without saying Presidents are virtually empowered to make laws as well as execute them even though nothing in the Constitution specifically permits this practice. More on that below.

    To understand how the US government works, it’s essential to know what executive power is, in fact, knowing it’s concentrated in the hands of one man for good or ill. Also crucial is how Presidents are elected – “literally (by) electoral (unelected by the public) dummies” in an Electoral College. The scheme is a long-acknowledged constitutional anomaly as these state bodies are able to subvert the popular vote, never meet or consult like the College of Cardinals electing a Pope, and, in effect, reduce and corrupt the process into a shameless farce.

    Once elected, it only gets worse because the power of the presidency is awesome and frightening. The nation’s chief executive:

    — is commander-in-chief of the military functioning as a virtual dictator in times of war; although Article I, Section 8 grants only Congress that right, the President, in fact, can do it any time he wishes “without consulting anyone” and, of course, has done it many times;

    — can grant commutations or pardons except in cases of impeachment;

    — can make treaties that become the law of the land, with the advice and consent of two-thirds of the Senate (not ratification as commonly believed); can also terminate treaties with a mere announcement as George Bush did renouncing the important ABM Treaty with the former Soviet Union; in addition, and with no constitutional sanction, he can rule by decree through executive agreements with foreign governments that in some cases are momentous ones like those made at Yalta and Potsdam near the end of WW II. While short of treaties, they then become the law of the land.

    — can appoint administration officials, diplomats, federal judges with Senate approval, that’s usually routine, or can fill any vacancy through (Senate) recess appointments; can also discharge any appointed executive official other than judges and statutory administrative officials;

    — can veto congressional legislation, and history shows through the book’s publication they’re sustained 96% of the time;

    — while Congress alone has appropriating authority, only the President has the power to release funds for spending by the executive branch or not release them;

    — Presidents also have a huge bureaucracy at their disposal, including powerful officials like the Secretaries of Defense, State, Treasury, and Homeland Security and the Attorney General in charge of the Justice Department;

    — Presidents also command center stage any time they wish. They can request and get national prime time television for any purpose with guaranteed extensive post-appearance coverage promoting his message with nary a disagreement with it on any issue;

    — throughout history, going back to George Washington, Presidents have issued Executive Orders (EOs) although the Constitution “nowhere implicitly or explicitly gives a President (the) power (to make) new law” by issuing “one-man, often far-reaching” EOs. However, Presidents have so much power they can do as they wish, only constrained by their own discretion.

    — George Bush also usurped “Unitary Executive” power to brazenly and openly declare what this section highlights – that the law is what he says it is. He proved it in six and a half years of subverting congressional legislation through a record-breaking number of unconstitutional “signing statements.” – They rewrote over 1132 law provisions through 147 separate “statements,” more than all previous Presidents combined. Through this practice, George Bush expanded presidential power well beyond the usual practices recounted above.

    — Presidents are, in fact, empowered to do almost anything not expressively forbidden in the Constitution, and very little is; more importantly, with a little ingenuity and lots of creative chutzpah, the President “can make almost any (constitutional) text mean whatever (he) wants it to mean” so, in fact, his authority is practically absolute or plenary. And the Supreme Court supports this notion as an “inherent power of sovereignty.” If the US has sovereignty, it has all powers therein, and the President, as the sole executive, can exercise them freely without constitutional authorization or restraint.

    In effect, “the President….is virtually a sovereign in his own person.” Compared to the power of the President, Congress is mostly “a paper tiger, easily soothed or repulsed.” The courts, as well, can be gotten around with a little creative exercise of presidential power, and in the case of George Bush, at times just ignoring their decisions when they disagree with his. As Lundberg put it: “One should never under-estimate the power of the President….nor over-estimate that of the Supreme Court. The supposed system of equitable checks and balances does not exist, in fact, (because Congress and the courts don’t effectively use their constitutional authority)….the separation in the Constitution between legislative and the executive is wholly artificial.”

    Further, it’s pure myth that the government is constrained by limited powers. Quite the opposite is true “which at the point of execution (resides in) one man,” the President. In addition, “Until the American electorate creates effective political parties (which it never has done), Congress….will always be pretty much under (Presidents’) thumb(s).” Under the “American constitutional system (the President) is very much a de facto king,” and under George Bush a corrupted, devious, criminal and dangerous one.

    As for impeaching and convicting a President for malfeasance, Article II, Section 4 states it can only be for “treason, bribery, or other high crimes and misdemeanors.” Based on the historical record, it’s near-impossible to do with no President ever having been removed from office this way, and only two were impeached, both unjustly. John Adams, the most distinguished constitutional theorist of his day, said it would take a national convulsion to remove a President by impeachment, which is not to say it won’t ever happen and very likely one day will with no time better than the present to prove it.

    In sum from the above, the US system of constitutional law is full of flaws and faults. “The People” were deliberately and willfully left out of the process proving the Constitution doesn’t recognize democracy in America in spite of the commonly held view it does. In addition, the President, at his own discretion, can usurp dictatorial powers and end republican government by a stroke of his pen. That should awaken everyone to the clear and present danger that any time, for any reason, the President of the United States can declare a state of emergency, suspend the law of the land and rule by decree.

    Constitutional Government in Venezuela

    How does America’s system of government contrast with rule under the 1999 Constitution of the Bolivarian Republic of Venezuela? Hugo Chavez was first elected president in December, 1998 and took office in February, 1999. He then held a national referendum so his people could decide whether to convene a National Constituent Assembly to draft a new constitution to embody his visionary agenda. It passed overwhelmingly followed three months later by elections to the National Assembly to which members of Chavez’s MVR party and those allied with it won 95% of the seats. They then drafted the revolutionary Constitucion de la Republica Bolivariana de Venezuela. It was put to a nationwide vote in December, 1999 and overwhelmingly approved changing everything for the Venezuelan people.

    It established a model humanistic participatory social democracy, unimaginable in the US, providing real (not imagined) checks and balances in the nation’s five branches of government. They comprise the executive, legislative and judicial ones plus two others. One is the independent national electoral council that regulates and handles state and civil society organization electoral procedures to assure they conform to the law requiring free, fair and open elections. The other is a citizen or public power branch functioning as a unique institution. It lets ordinary people serve as ombudsmen to assure the other government branches comply with constitutionally-mandated requirements. This branch includes the attorney general, the defender of the people, and the comptroller general.

    The Legislative Branch

    Venezuela is governed under a unicameral legislative system called the National Assembly. It’s composed of 167 members (compared to 535 in the two US Houses) elected to serve for five years and allowed to run two more times. It differs from the bicameral system in the US but is broadly similar to governments like in the UK. Although it’s bicameral, it’s governed solely by publicly elected members of the House of Commons that includes the Prime Minister and his cabinet as members of Parliament. The upper House of Lords is merely token and advisory, there by tradition like the Queen, with no power to overrule the lower House that runs everything.

    The Office of the President

    The President is elected with a plurality of universally guaranteed suffrage. Article 56 of the Bolivarian Constitution states: “All persons have the right to be registered free of charge with the Civil Registry Office after birth, and to obtain public documents constituting evidence of the biological identity, in accordance with law.” In addition, all Venezuelans are enfranchised to vote under one national standard and are encouraged to do it under a model democratic system with the vast majority in it actively participating.

    In contrast, the US system is quite different. Precise voting rights qualifications are for the states to decide with no constitutionally mandated suffrage standard applying across the board for everyone. The result is many US citizens are denied their franchise right. They’re unable to participate in the electoral process for a variety of reasons no democratic state should tolerate, but America built it into the system by design.

    The Judicial System

    Under Article 2 in The Bolivarian Constitution, the judicial system shares equal importance to the law of the land. But it wasn’t always that way earlier when the Venezuelan judiciary had an odious reputation before Chavez was elected. It had a long history of corruption, a disturbing record of being beholden to political benefactors, and a tradition of failing to provide an adequate system of justice for most Venezuelans. Chavez vowed to change things and undertook a major restructuring effort after taking office. He put this government branch under the Supreme Tribunal of Justice and made it independent of the others. The law now requires those serving be elected by a two-thirds legislative majority (not the previous simple one), and tighter requirements are in place regarding eligible candidates along with public hearings to vet them.

    In addition, to root out long-standing corrupt practices, Chavez created a Judicial Restructuring Commission to review existing judgeships and replace those not fit to serve. Henceforth, all sitting judges with eight or more corruption charges pending are disqualified. It effectively eliminated 80% of those on the bench in short order and showed the extent of malfeasance in the national judicial culture. It also suggested the huge amount throughout the government from generations of institutionalized privilege. Those in power were licensed to steal the country blind and enrich themselves and foreign investors at the expense of the vast majority.

    Reform in all areas of government is still a work in progress, including in the judiciary needing much of it. The process hasn’t been perfect because of the enormity of the task. By the end of 2000, about 70% of sitting judges in the so-called capital region of Caracas, Miranda and Vargas states were replaced by provisional ones with charges of old judges removed for equally beholden new ones. It may be true and points to how hard the going is to change the long-standing culture of privilege and institute real democratic reforms throughout the government.

    Nonetheless, the Constitution established Chavez’s vision for a foundation and legal framework for revolutionary structural change. He’s been working since to transform the nation incrementally into a model participatory social democracy serving all Venezuelans instead of for the privileged few alone the way it traditionally was in the past and how US framers designed American constitutional law. The differences between the two nations couldn’t be more stark.

    The spirit of the Venezuelan Bolivarian Constitution is stated straightaway in its Preamble:….”to establish a democratic, participatory and self-reliant, multiethnic and multicultural society in a just, federal and decentralized State that embodies the values of freedom, independence, peace, solidarity, the common good, the nation’s territorial integrity, comity and the rule of law for this and future generations;”

    It further “guarantees the right to life, work, learning, education, social justice and equality, without discrimination or subordination of any kind; promotes peaceful cooperation among nations and further strengthens Latin American integration in accordance with the principle of nonintervention and national self-determination of the people, the universal and indivisible guarantee of human rights, the democratization of imitational society, nuclear disarmament, ecological balance and environmental resources as the common and inalienable heritage of humanity;……”

    This language would be unimaginable in the US Constitution, and, unlike our federal law, they’re more than words. This is Hugo Chavez’s commitment to all Venezuelans ordained under nine Title headings, 350 Articles, and 18 Temporary Provisions. It’s a first class democratic document, little known in the West, that greatly outclasses and shames what US framers’ enacted for themselves and privileged friends alone. Democracy was nowhere in sight then nor has it shown up since. In Venezuela under Hugo Chavez, it’s resplendent, glorious, still imperfect and a work in progress, but heading in the right direction with newly proposed changes discussed below.

    The contrast with America today couldn’t be greater. The nation under George Bush is ruled by Patriot and Military Commissions Act justice under an institutionalized imperial system of militarized savage capitalism empowering the rich to exploit all others. A state of permanent war exists; civil liberties are disappearing and human rights are a nonstarter; dissent is a crime; social decay is growing; a culture of secrecy and growing fear prevail; torture is practically sanctified; injustice is tolerated; the dominant media function as virtual national thought-control police gatekeepers; and the law is what a boy-emperor president says it is. Aside from the privileged it serves, democracy in America is only in the minds of the bewildered and last of the true-believers who sooner or later will discover the truth.

    Consider Venezuela’s Bolivarian spirit in contrast. The people freely and openly choose their leaders in honest, independently monitored elections. They’re unemcumbered by a farcical electoral college voting scheme (for Presidents) and a system of rigged electronic voting machine and other electoral engineered fraud corrupting the entire process sub rosa. They also have unimaginable benefits like free quality health and dental care (mandated in Articles 83 – 85) as a “fundamental social right and….responsibility of the state….to guarantee….to improve the quality of life and common welfare.” It’s administered through a national public health system proscribed from being privatized. That’s how health delivery in America gets corrupted for profit. The result is 47 million and counting are uninsured, many millions more have too little coverage, and the cost of care is unaffordable for all but the well-off or those on Medicare, Medicaid (if qualify) or under disappearing company-paid plans.

    The Constitution also enacted the principle of participatory democracy from the grassroots for everyone. It’s mandated in Articles 166 and 192 establishing citizen assemblies as a constitutional right for ordinary people to be empowered to participate in governing along with their elected officials. Constitutionally guaranteed rights also ban discrimination; promote gender equity; and insure free speech; a free press; free, fair, and open elections; equal rights for indigenous people (assured a minimum three National Assembly legislative seats); and mandates government make quality free education available for all to the highest levels, as well as housing and an improved social security pension system for seniors, and much more.

    Hugo Chavez brought permanent change, and most Venezuelans won’t tolerate returning to the ugly past. Why should they? They never got these essential social services before. Under a leader who cares, they do now, and their lives improved enormously.

    Other Venezuelan Constitutionally Guaranteed Rights

    The Bolivarian Constitution is a glorious document, fundamentally different in spirit and letter from its US counterpart it shames by comparison. Before Chavez took office in February, 1999, Venezuela only paid lip service to civil liberties, human rights and needs. They’re now mandated by law. It encompasses an impressive array of basic rights and essential services like government-paid health care, education, housing, employment and human dignity enforced and funded by a caring government as the law requires.

    Article 58 in the Constitution also guarantees the right to “timely, true, and impartial” information “without censorship, in accordance with the principles of this constitution.” The opposite is true in America where major media are state propaganda instruments for the privileged.

    Articles 71 – 74 establish four types of popular national referenda never imagined or held in America outside the local or state level where they’re often non-binding. The US is one of only five major democracies never to have permitted this type citizen participation. In Venezuela under Hugo Chavez, the practice is mandated by law and institutionalized to give people at the grass roots a say in running their government. Four types of referenda are allowed:

    –consultative – for a popular, non-binding vote on “national transcendent” issues like trade agreements;

    — recall – applied to all elected officials up to the President;

    — approving – a binding vote to approve laws, constitutional amendments, and treaties relating to national sovereignty; and

    — rescinding – to rescind or change existing laws.

    Referenda can be initiated by the National Assembly, the President, or by petition from 10 – 20% of registered voters, with different procedural requirements applying for each.

    Social, family, cultural, educational and economic rights are guaranteed under Chapters V – VII with the government backing them financially.

    Indigenous Native Peoples’ rights are covered in Chapter VIII. Even environmental rights are addressed with Article 127 stating “It is the right and duty of each generation to protect and maintain the environment for its own benefit and that of the world of the future….The State shall protect the environment, biological and genetic diversity, ecological processes….and other areas of ecological importance.” Try imagining any US federal law with teeth containing this type language let alone the Constitution that includes nothing in its Articles or Amendments.

    Citizen Power gets considerable attention under Articles 273 – 291. It’s exercised by “the Republican Ethics Council, consisting of the People Defender, the General Prosecutor and the General Comptroller of the Republic….Citizen Power is independent and its organs enjoy operating, financial and administrative autonomy.” Citizen Power organs are legally charged with “preventing, investigating and punishing actions that undermine public ethics and administrative morals, to assure lawful sound management of public property….(to help) create citizenship, together with solidarity, freedom, democracy, social responsibility, work” and more.

    Venezuela’s Constitution covers much more as well under each of its nine Titles from:

    — stating its fundamental Bolivarian principles in Title I, to

    — National Security in Title VII,

    — Protection of the Constitution in Title VIII to assure its continuity in the event of “acts of force” or unlawful repeal with each citizen having a duty to reinstate it if that need arises; and finally

    — Constitutional Reforms in Title IX in the form of amendments, other reforms to revise or replace any of its provisions, and the National Constituent Assembly with power “resting with the people of Venezuela.” They’re empowered to call an Assembly to transform the State, create a new “juridical order” and draft a new Constitution to be submitted to a national referendum for the people to accept or reject. That’s how democracy is supposed to work. In Venezuela it does. In the US, it doesn’t, never did, and was never conceived or intended to from the nation’s founding to the present.

    This happens because Americans know painfully little about their law of the land hidden from them in plain view. They’re taught misinformation about it and the framers who drafted it. Few ever read it beyond a quoted line or two and even fewer ever think about it. In contrast, in Venezuela, the Bolivarian Constitution is sold in pocket-sized form almost everywhere. People buy, read and study it. Why? Because it’s a vital unifying part of their lives codifying core democratic values and principles Venezuelan people cherish and wish to keep.

    Prospective Venezuelan Constitutional Reforms

    In July, President Chavez announced he’d be sending the National Assembly a proposal of suggested constitutional reforms to debate and consider. He stressed Venezuelans would then get to vote on them in a national referendum so that “the majority will decide if they approve….constitutional reform.”

    Chavez submitted his proposal in an August 15 address to the National Assembly that will debate and rule on them in three extraordinary sessions over the next 60 to 90 days. Included are amendments to 33 of the Constitution’s 350 articles to “complete the death of the old, hegemonic oligarchy and the old, exploitative capitalist system, and complete the birth of the new state.” Chavez stressed the need to update the 1999 Constitution because it’s “ambiguous (and) a product of that moment. The world (today) is very different from (then). (Reforms now are) essential for continuing the process of revolutionary transition.” They include:

    — extending presidential terms from six to seven years;

    — unlimited reelections (that countries like England, France, Germany and others now allow); Chavez wants the reelection option to be “the sovereign decision of the constituent people of Venezuela;”

    — guaranteeing the right to work and establishing policies to develop and generate productive employment;

    — creation of a Social Stability Fund for “non-dependent” or self-employed workers so they have the same rights as other workers including pensions, paid vacations and prenatal and postnatal leave entitlements;

    — reducing the workday to six hours so businesses would have to employ more workers and hold unemployment down;

    — ending the autonomy of Venezuela’s Central Bank;

    — recognition of different kinds of property defined as social, collective, mixed and private;

    — redefining the role of the military so henceforth “The Bolivarian Armed Forces (will) constitute an essential patriotic, popular and anti-imperialist body organized by the state to guarantee the independence and sovereignty of the nation…;” and

    — guaranteeing state control over the nation’s oil industry to prevent any future privatization of this vital resource;

    Chavez also wants other changes to strengthen the nation’s participatory democracy at the grassroots. He stresses “one of the central ideas is my proposal to open, at the constitutional level, the roads to accelerate the transfer of power to the people” in an “Explosion of Communal (or popular) Power.” It’s already there in more than 26,000 democratically functioning grassroots communal councils. They’re government-sanctioned, funded, operating throughout the country, and may double in number and be strengthened further under proposed constitutional changes.

    Chavez wants “Popular (people) Power” to be a “State Power” along with the Legislature, Executive, Judicial, Citizen and Electoral ones and considers this constitutional change the most important one of all. If it happens, various sovereign powers and duties now handled at the federal, state and municipal levels will be transfered to local communal, worker, campesino, student and other councils. This will strengthen Venezuela’s bedrock participatory democracy making it even more unique and impressive than it already is.

    In America, it’s unimaginable a President or other government officials would recommend “People Power” become our fourth government branch, co-equal with the others, with citizens empowered to vote in national referenda on crucial proposed changes in law.

    Chavez also proposed a “new geometry of power” by amending article 16 that now states “the territory of the nation is divided into those of the States, the Capital District, federal dependencies and federal territories. The territory is organized into Municipalities.” Chavez wants this amended so popular referenda can create “federal districts” in specific areas to serve as states. He called this idea “profoundly revolutionary (and needed) to remove the old oligarchic, exploiter hegemony, the old society, and (quoting Gramsci weaken the former) historic block. If we don’t change the (old) superstructure (it) will defeat us.”

    Chavez also stressed this new structure is needed to be in place when “Venezuela (grows to) 40 – 50 million people.” His plan includes “restructur(ing) Caracas” into a Federal District with more local autonomy, as it was at an earlier time.

    These proposals and other initiatives are part of his overall socialism for the 21st century plan that’s also very business-friendly. Chavez opposes savage capitalism, not private enterprise, and under his stewardship domestic and foreign businesses have thrived. They’re a dominant force powering the economy to accelerated growth since 2003 with latest Central Bank 2nd quarter, 2007 figures coming in at 8.9%. With oil prices high and world economies prospering, this trend is likely to continue. That’s good news for business and households sharing in the benefits through greater purchasing power.

    Chavez wants his new United Socialist Party (PSUV) to drive the revolutionary process and continue his agenda of reform for all Venezuelans. He wants everyone to enjoy the benefits, not just a privileged few like in the past and in the US today. Under his leadership, their future is bright while in America poverty is growing, the middle class is dying, and the darkness of tyranny threatens everyone under George Bush with his agenda likely continuing under a new president in 2009.

    Governance differences exist between these two nations because their constitutional laws are mirror opposite, and America has no one like Hugo Chavez. He’s a rare leader who cares and backs his rhetoric with progressive people-friendly policies. In the US, there’s George Bush, and that pretty much explains the problem. Knowing that, which leader would you choose and under which system of government would you prefer to live?

    Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago and can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

    Also visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com and listen to The Steve Lendman News and Information Hour on TheMicroEffect.com Saturdays at noon US central time.You know the story triumphantly heard in the West. Markets work best when governments let them operate freely – unconstrained by rules, regulations and taxes about which noted economist Milton Friedman once said in an interview he was “in favor of cutting….under any circumstances and for any excuse, for any reason, whenever it’s possible (because) the big problem is not taxes (but government) spending.

    Friedman is no longer with us, but by his reasoning, the solution to curbing it is “to hold down the amount of income (government) has (and presto) the way to do it is to cut taxes.” He seemed to forget about borrowing and the Federal Reserve’s ability to print limitless amounts of ready cash the way it’s been doing for years and during the current credit squeeze. Friedman further added in the same interchange “If the White House were under (GW) Bush, and House and Senate….under the Democrats, I do not believe there would be much spending.”

    Clearly, either the Nobel laureate wasn’t paying attention or age was taking its toll late in his life. Since 2001, Democrats embraced tax cutting and overspending policies as enthusiastically as Republicans with both parties directing the benefits hugely to the right pockets. They’re on Wall Street and in corporate boardrooms where recipients know “free markets” work great with a little creative resource directing from Washington.

    Financial Market Efficiency

    In investment finance, Eugene Fama is generally regarded as the father of efficient market theory, also known as the “efficient market hypothesis (EMH).” He wrote his 1964 doctoral dissertation on it titled “The Behavior of Stock Market Prices” in which he concluded stock (and by implication other financial market) price movements are unpredictable and follow a “random walk” reflecting all available information known at the time. Thus, no one, in theory, has an advantage over another as everyone has equal access to everything publicly known (aside from “insiders” with a huge advantage). That includes rumored and actual financial, economic, political, social and all other information, all of which is reflected in asset prices at any given time.

    Those buying this theory believe Milton Friedman knew best. He became the modern-day godfather of “free market” capitalism and leading exponent that markets work efficiently and best when unfettered by government intervention that generally gets things wrong. In 1958, Friedman explained it in his famous “I, Pencil” essay. In it, he illustrated the notion of Adam Smith’s invisible hand and conservative economist Friedrich Hayek’s teachings on the importance of “dispersed knowledge” and how the price system communicates information to “make (people) do desirable things without anyone having to tell them what to do.”

    Friedman’s “pencil” story explained “a complex combination of miracles: a tree, zinc, copper, graphite, and so on.” Added to these ingredients from nature is “an even more extraordinary miracle: the configuration of creative human energies – millions of tiny know-hows configuring naturally and spontaneously (responding to) human necessity and desire and in the absence of any human master-minding.” None of them working independently was trying to make a pencil. No one directed them from a central office. They didn’t know each other, lived in many countries, spoke different languages, practiced different religions, and may have even hated each other. Yet, their unrelated contributions produced a pencil.

    By Friedman’s reasoning, this could never happen through central planning. It sounds good in theory, but how does it jibe with reality. The Soviets split the atom, were first in space ahead of the US with Sputnik 1, and developed many advanced technologies even though they were outclassed and outspent by the West overall with greater resources to do it.

    In practical reality, governments, like individuals operating freely in the marketplace, can succeed or fail. It comes down to people skills and how well they do their jobs. Top down or bottom up has little final effect on the end result, but does direct what’s undertaken and what isn’t. Top down in Canada, Western Europe and Venezuela delivers excellent state-funded health care to everyone. Bottom up in America offers it to anyone who can pay, but if not, you’re out of luck if your employer won’t provide it. Forty-seven million and counting had their luck run out, and Friedman’s pencil making miracle won’t treat them when they’ll ill.

    Put another way, if “free market” capitalism works best and America is its lead exponent, why then:

    — is poverty high and rising in the world’s richest country;

    — incomes stagnating;

    — higher education becoming unaffordable for the majority;

    — public education crumbling;

    — jobs at all levels disappearing to low-wage countries;

    — the nation’s vital infrastructure in a deplorable state;

    — 3.5 million or more homeless and heading higher in the wake of subprime defaults;

    — the standard of living of most in the country declining; and,

    — the nation, in fact, bankrupt according to a 2006 study for the St. Louis Fed.

    Clearly, something is wrong with the “pencil miracle” working for some but not for most. Friedman no longer can respond and his acolytes won’t.

    The Myth that Markets Get It Right and Operate Efficiently

    Economist Hyman Minsky was mostly ignored while he lived, but his star may be rising 11 years after his death in 1996. Some described him as a radical Keynesian based on the theories of economist John Maynard Keynes who taught economies operate best when mixed. He believed state and private sectors both play important roles with government stepping in to stimulate or constrain economic activity whenever private sector forces aren’t able to do it best alone.

    It’s the opposite of “supply-side” Reaganomics and its illusory “trickle down” notion that economic growth works best through stimulative tax cuts its proponents claim promote investment that benefits everyone. It was Reagan-baloney then and now, and so is the notion markets are efficient and work best when left alone.

    Minsky explained it, and people are now taking note in the wake of current market turbulence. His work showed financial market exuberance often becomes excessive, especially if no regulatory constraints are in place to curb it. He developed his theories in two books – “John Maynard Keynes” and “Stabilizing an Unstable Economy” as well as in numerous articles and essays.

    In them, he constructed a “financial instability hypothesis” building on the work of Keynes’ “General Theory of Employment, Interest and Money.” He provided a framework for distinguishing between stabilizing and destabilizing free market debt structures he summarized as follows:

    “Three distinct income-debt relations for economic units….labeled as hedge, speculative and Ponzi finance, can be identified.”

    — “Hedge financing units are those which can fulfill all of their contractual payment obligations by their cash flows: the greater the weight of equity financing in the liability structure, the greater the likelihood that the unit is a hedge financing unit.”

    — “Speculative finance units are units that can meet their payment commitments on ‘income account’ on their liabilities, even as they cannot repay the principle out of income cash flows. Such units need to ‘roll over’ their liabilities – issue new debt to meet commitments on maturing debt.”

    — “For Ponzi units, the cash flows from operations are (insufficient)….either (to repay)….principle or interest on outstanding debts by their cash flows from operations. Such units can sell assets or borrow. Borrowing to pay interest….lowers the equity of a unit, even as it increases liabilities and the prior commitment of future incomes.”

    “….if hedge financing dominates….the economy may….be (in) equilibrium. In contrast, the greater the weight of speculative (and/or) Ponzi finance, the greater the likelihood that the economy is a deviation-amplifying system….(based on) the financial instability hypothesis (and) over periods of prolonged prosperity, the economy transits from financial relations (creating stability) to financial relations (creating) an unstable system.”

    “….over a protracted period of good times, capitalist economies (trend toward) a large weight (of) units engaged in speculative and Ponzi finance. (If this happens when) an economy is (experiencing inflation and the Federal Reserve tries) to exorcise (it) by monetary constraint….speculative units will become Ponzi (ones) and the net worth of previous Ponzi units will quickly evaporate. Consequently, units with cash flow shortfalls will be forced to (sell out). This is likely to lead to a collapse of asset values.”

    Minsky developed a seven stage framework showing how this works:

    Stage One – Displacement

    Disturbances of various kinds change investor perceptions and disrupt markets. It may be a tightened economic policy from higher interest rates or investors and lenders retrenching in reaction to:

    — a housing bubble, credit squeeze, and growing subprime mortgage delinquencies and defaults with spreading contagion affecting:

    — other mortgages, and the toxic waste derivative alchemy of:

    — collateralized debt obligation (CDO) instruments (packages of mostly risky junk and other debt),

    –commercial and residential mortgage-backed securities (CMBS and RBMS – asset backed by mortgage principle and interest payments), and even

    — commercial and AAA paper; plus

    — home equity loans harder to service after mortgage reset increases.

    Stage Two – Prices start to rise

    Following displacement, markets bottom and prices begin rising as fundamentals improve. Investors start noticing as it becomes evident and gains momentum.

    Stage Three – Easy credit

    Recovery needs help and plentiful easy credit provides it. As conditions improve, it fuels speculation enticing more investors to jump in for financial opportunities or to borrow for a new home or other consumer spending. The easier and more plentiful credit gets, the more willing lenders are to give it including to borrowers with questionable credit ratings. Yale Economist Robert Shiller shares the view that “booms….generate laxity in standards for loans because there a general sense of optimism (like) what we saw in the late 80s” preceding the 1987 crash that doesn’t necessarily signal an imminent one now.

    New type financial instruments and arrangements also arise as lenders find creative and risky ways to make more money. In recent years, sharply rising housing prices enticed more buyers, and lenders got sloppy and greedy by providing interest-only mortgages to marginal buyers unable to make a down payment.

    Stage Four – Overtrading

    The cheaper and easier credit is, the greater the incentive to overtrade to cash in. Trading volume rises and shortages emerge. Prices begin accelerating and easy profits are made creating more greed and foolish behavior.

    Stage Five – Euphoria

    This is the most dangerous phase. Cooler heads are worried but fraudsters prevail claiming this time is different, and markets have a long way to go before topping out. Greed trumps good sense and investors foolishly think they’re safe and can get out in time. Stories of easy riches abound, so why miss out. Into the fire they go, often after the easy money was made, and the outcome is predictable. The fraudsters sell at the top to small investors mistakenly buying at the wrong time and getting burned.

    Stage Six – Insider profit taking

    The pros have seen it before, understand things have gone too far, and quietly sell to the greater fools buying all they can. It’s the beginning of the end.

    Stage Seven – Revulsion

    When cheap credit ends, enough insiders sell, or an unexpected piece of bad news roils markets, it becomes infectious. It can happen quickly turning euphoria into revulsion panicking investors to sell. They begin outnumbering buyers and prices tumble. Downward momentum is far greater and faster than when heading up.

    Sound familiar? It’s a “Minsky Moment,” and the irony is most investors know easy credit, overtrading and euphoria create bubbles that always burst. The internet and tech one did in March, 2000, and since mid-July, reality caught up with excess speculation in equity prices, the housing bubble, growing mortgage delinquencies and subprime defaults. Goldilocks awoke and sought shelter as lenders remembered how to say “no.” This time, central banks rode to the rescue (they hope) with huge cash infusions, the Fed cut its discount rate a half point August 17, and it signaled lower “fed funds” rates ahead if markets remain tight.

    Intervention may reignite “animal spirits” and work short-term but won’t easily band-aid over what noted investor Jeremy Grantham calls “the broadest overpricing of financial assets – equities, real estate, and fixed income – ever recorded” with the financial system dangerously “overstretched (and) overleveraged.” His view is that current conditions have “almost never been this dire,” and we’re “watching a (too late to stop) very slow motion train wreck.” Minsky would have noticed, too.

    Grantham’s exhaustive research shows all markets revert to their mean values, and all bubbles burst as the greatest Fed-engineered equity one ever in US history did in 2000 but didn’t complete its corrective work. In Grantham’s view, lots more pain is coming and before it’s over, it will be mean, nasty and long, affecting everyone. Minsky saw it earlier, studied it, and wrote about it exhaustively when no one noticed. If he were living today, he’d say “I told you so.”

    Federal Reserve Engineered Housing Bubble and Resultant Financial Market Turmoil

    Astute observers continue to speculate and comment that the housing bubble and resultant current financial market turmoil came from deliberate widespread malfeasance aided by considerable cash infusion help from the Federal Reserve in the lead on the scheme.

    Economist Paul Krugman is one of the latest with his views expressed in an August 16 New York Times op ed piece titled “Workouts, Not Bailouts.” He began by debunking Wall Streeter Treasury Secretary Henry Paulson’s ludicrous April claim that the housing market was “at or near the bottom” followed by his equally absurd August view that subprime mortgages were “largely contained.” Krugman’s response: “the time for denial is past….housing starts and applications for building permits have fallen to their lowest levels in a decade, showing that home construction is still in free fall….home prices are still way too high (at 70% above their long-term trend values according to the Center for Economic and Policy Research, and) the housing slump (will be around) for years, not months” with all those empty unbought homes needing hard to find buyers to fill them.

    In addition, mortgage problems are “anything but contained” and aren’t confined to the subprime category. Krugman believes current real estate troubles and mortgage fallout bear similarity to the late 1990s stock bubble. Like today, they were accompanied by market manipulation and scandalous fraud at companies like Enron and WorldCom. In his view, “it is becoming increasingly clear that the real-estate bubble of recent years (like the 1990s stock bubble)….caused and was fed by widespread malfeasance.” He left out the Fed but named co-conspiratorial players like Moody’s Investors Service and other rating agencies getting paid lots of money to claim “dubious mortgage-backed securities to be highest-quality, AAA assets.” In this role, they’re no different than were “complaisant accountants” like Arthur Andersen that lost its license to practice from its role in the Enron fallout.

    In the end, this scandal may be more far-reaching than earlier ones because so many underwriters and other firms are part of the fraud or are seeking to profit from it. At this point, it’s hard separating villains from victims as, in some cases, they may be one in the same. They’re all involved in dispersing up to trillions of dollars of risks through the derivative alchemy of highly complex, hard to value, packages of mostly subprime CDO and various other type debt instruments that may even end up in so-called safe money market funds unbeknownst to their unsuspecting owners.

    Before this scandal ends, they’ll be plenty of pain to go around, but as always, small investors and low income subprime and other mortgage homeowners will be hurt most. Krugman says this is “a clear case for government intervention,” but it won’t be the kind he wants. He cites a “serious market failure (needing fixing to) help (as many as) hundreds of thousands” of Americans who otherwise may lose their homes and/or financial nest eggs. Faced with this problem, “The federal government shouldn’t be providing bailouts, (it should) arrange workouts….we’ve done (it) before (and it worked) – for third-world countries, not for US citizens.” It helped both debtors escape default and creditors get back most of their money.

    By providing huge cash infusions to ease credit and reignite “animal spirits,” the Fed and other central banks showed they aren’t listening. It proves what Ralph Nader said in his August 19 Countercurrents article called “Corporate Capitalists: Government Comes To The Rescue” that’s also on CounterPunch titled “Greed and Folly on Wall Street.” With “corporate capitalists’ knees” a bit shaky, Nader recalled what his father once explained years ago when he asked and then told his children: “Why will capitalism always survive? Because socialism will always be used to save it.” Put another way, the American business ethic has always been socialism for the rich, and, sink or swim, free market capitalism for the rest of us.

    As the housing slump deepens and many tens of thousands of subprime and other mortgage holders default, vulture investors will profit hugely buying troubled assets at a fraction of their value as they always do in troubled economic times. Writer Danny Schechter calls the current subprime credit squeeze debacle a “sub-crime ponzi scheme (in a) highly rigged casino-like market system” targeting unsuspecting victims. Schechter wants a “jailout” for “criminal….financial institutions (posing) as respectable players.” Krugman, on the other hand, wants a “workout” for the victims. Neither will get what he wants. In the end, as ordinary people lose out, big government will again rescue “corporate capitalism” (at least in the short-term) the way it always does when it gets in trouble. It’s the “American way.” It’ll be no different this time.

    Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago and can be reached in Chicago at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

    Also visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com and listen to The Steve Lendman News and Information Hour on TheMicroEffect.com Saturdays at noon US central time.

    Wednesday, August 22, 2007

    America and Venezuela – Constitutional Worlds Apart

    America and Venezuela: Constitutional Worlds Apart – by Stephen Lendman

    Although imperfect, no country anywhere is closer to a model democracy than Venezuela under President Hugo Rafael Chavez Frias. In contrast, none is a more shameless failure than America, but it was true long before the age of George W. Bush. The difference under his regime is that the mask is off revealing a repressive state masquerading as a democratic republic. This article compares the constitutional laws of each country and how they’re implemented. The result shows world’s apart differences between these two nominally democratic states – one that’s real, impressive and improving and the other that’s mostly pretense and under George Bush lawless, corrupted, in tatters, and morally depraved.

    US Constitutional Law from the Beginning

    Before they’re old enough to understand its meaning, young US children are taught to “pledge allegiance to the flag of the United States of America and to the Republic for which it stands,” and, by inference, its bedrock supreme constitutional law of the land. At that early age, they likely haven’t yet heard of it, but soon will with plenty of misinformation about a document far less glorious than it’s made out to be.

    This article draws on Ferdinand Lundberg’s powerfully important 1980 book, “Cracks in the Constitution,” that’s every bit as relevant today as then. In it, he deconstructs the nation’s foundational legal document, separating myth from reality about what he called “the great totempole of American society.” He analyzed it, piece by piece, revealing its intentionally crafted flaws. It’s not at all the “Rock of Ages” it’s cracked up to be, but students at all levels don’t learn that in classrooms from teachers going along with the deception or who simply don’t know the truth about their subject matter.

    The Constitution falls far short of a “masterpiece of political architecture,” but it’s even worse than that. It was the product of very ordinary scheming politicians (not the Mt. Rushmore types they’re portrayed as in history books) and their friends crafting the law of the land to serve themselves while leaving out the greater public that was nowhere in sight in 1787 Philadelphia. Unlike the Venezuelan Constitution, discussed below, “The People” were never consulted or even considered, and nothing in the end was put to a vote beyond the state legislative bodies that had to ratify it. In contrast to popular myth, the framers crafted a Constitution that didn’t constrain or fetter the federal government nor did they create a government of limited powers.

    They devised a government of men, not laws, that was composed of self-serving devious officials who lied, connived, used or abused the law at their whim, and pretty much operated ad libitum to discharge their duties as they wished. In that respect, things weren’t much different then from now except the times were simpler, the nation smaller, and the ambitions of those in charge much less far-reaching than today.

    The Constitution can easily be read in 30 minutes or less and just as easily be misunderstood. The opening Preamble contains its sole myth referring to “We the people of the United States of America.” The only people who mattered were white male property owners. All others nowhere entered the picture, then or mostly since, proving democracy operatively is little more than a fantasy. But try explaining that to people today thinking otherwise because that’s all they were taught from the beginning to believe.

    They were never told the American revolution was nothing more than a minority of the colonists seceding from the British empire planning essentially the same type government repackaged under new management. Using high-minded language in Article I, Section 8 of the supreme law of the land, the founders and their successors ignored the minimum objective all governments are, or should be, entrusted to do – “provide for….(the) general welfare” of their people under a system of constitutional law serving everyone. But that’s not its only flaw build in by design.

    Our revered document is called “The Living Constitution,” and Article VI, Section 2 defines it as the supreme law of the land. In fact, it’s loosely structured for governments to do as they wish or not wish with the notion of a “government of the people, by the people, for the people” a nonstarter. “The People” don’t govern either directly or through representatives, in spite of commonly held myths. “The People” are governed, like it or not, the way sitting governments choose to do it. As a consequence, “The Living Constitution” was a “huge flop” and still is.

    Setting the Record Straight on the Framers

    Popular myth aside, the 55 delegates who met in Philadelphia from May to September, 1787 were very ordinary self-serving, privileged, property-owning white men. They weren’t extraordinarily learned, profound in their thinking or in any way special. Only 25 attended college (that was pretty rudimentary at the time), and Washington never got beyond the fifth grade.

    Lundberg described them as a devious bunch of wheeler-dealers likely meeting in smoke-filled rooms (literally or figuratively) cutting deals the way things work today. He called them no “all-star political team” (except for George Washington) compared to more distinguished figures who weren’t there like Jefferson, Adams (the most noted constitutional theorist of his day), John Jay (the first Supreme Court Chief Justice), Thomas Paine, Patrick Henry and others. Madison and Alexander Hamilton, who did attend, were virtual unknowns at the time, yet ever since Madison has been mischaracterized as the Constitution’s father. In fact, he only played a modest role.

    The delegates came to Philadelphia in May, 1887, assembled, did their work, sent it to the states, and left in a despondent mood. They disliked the final product, some could barely tolerate it, yet 39 of the 55 attendees knowingly signed a document they believed flawed while we today extoll it like it came down from Mt. Sinai. The whole process we call a first-class historical event was, in fact, an entirely routine uninspiring political caucus producing no “prodigies of statecraft, no wonders of political (judgment), no vaulting philosophies, no Promethean vistas.” Contradicting everything we’ve been “indoctrinated from ears to toes” to believe, the notion that the Constitution is “a document of salvation….a magic talisman,” or a gift to the common man is pure fantasy.

    The central achievement of the convention, and a big one (until the Civil War changed things), was the cobbling together of disparate and squabbling states into a union. It held together, tenuously at best, for over seven decades but not actually until Appomattox “at bayonet point.” The convention succeeded in gaining formal approval for what the leading power figures wanted and then got it rammed through the state ratification process to become the law of the land.

    After much wheeling and dealing, they achieved mightily but not without considerable effort. Enough states balked to thwart the whole process and had to be won over with concessions like legitimizing slavery for southern interests and more. Then consider the Bill of Rights, why they were added, for whom, and why adopting them made the difference. It came down to no Bill of Rights, no Constitution, but they weren’t for “The People” who were out of sight and mind.

    These “glorified” first 10 Amendments were first rejected twice, then only added to assure enough state delegates voted to ratify the final document with them included. Many in smaller states were displeased enough to want a second convention that might have derailed the whole process had it happened. To prevent it, concessions were made including adding the Bill of Rights because they addressed key state delegate concerns like the following:

    — prohibitions against quartering troops in their property,

    — unreasonable searches and seizures there as well,

    — the right to have state militias,

    — the right of people to bear arms, but not as the 2nd Amendment today is interpreted,

    — the rights of free speech, the press, religion, assembly and petition, all to serve monied and propertied interests alone – not “The People,”

    — due process of law with speedy public trials for the privileged, and

    — various other provisions worked out through compromise to become our acclaimed Bill of Rights. Two additional amendments were proposed but rejected by the majority. They would have banned monopolies and standing armies, matters of great future import that might have made a huge difference thereafter. We’ll never know for sure.

    In the end and in spite of its defects, the framers felt it was the best they could do at the time and kept their fingers crossed it would work to their advantage. None of them suggested or wanted “a sheltered haven….for the innumerable heavily laden, bedraggled, scrofulous and oppressed of the earth.” On the contrary, they intended to keep them that way meaning things weren’t much different then than now, and the founders weren’t the noble characters they’re made out to be.

    There were no populists or civil libertarians among them with men like Washington and Jefferson (who was abroad and didn’t attend) being slave-owners. In fact, they were little more than crass opportunists who willfully acted against the will of “The People” they ignored and disdained. In spite of it, they’re practically deified and ranked with the Apostles, and one of them (Washington) sits in the most prominent spot atop Mt. Rushmore.

    The constitutional convention ended September 17, 1787 “in an atmosphere verging on glumness.” Of the 55 attending delegates, 39 signed as a pro forma exercise before sending it to the states with power to accept or reject it. Again, “The People” were nowhere in sight in Philadelphia or at the state level where the real tussle began before the founders could declare victory.

    What Was Achieved and What Wasn’t

    Contrary to popular myth, the new government wasn’t constrained by constitutional checks and balances of the three branches created within it. In fact, then and since, sitting governments have acted expediently, with or without popular approval, and within or outside the law. In this respect, our system functions no differently than most others operating as we do. It’s accomplished through “the narrowest possible interpretations of the Constitution,” but it’s free to go “further afield under broader or fanciful official interpretations.” History records many examples under noted Presidents like Lincoln, T. and F. Roosevelt and Wilson along with less distinguished ones like Reagan, Clinton, Nixon, GHW Bush and his bad seed son, the worst ever of a bad lot.

    Key to understanding the American system is that “government is completely autonomous, detached, (and) in a realm of its own” with its “main interest (being) economic (for the privileged) at all times.” Constitutional shackles and constraining barriers are pure fantasy. Regardless of law, custom or anything else, sitting US governments have always been freelancing and able to operate as they please. They’ve also consistently been unresponsive to the public interest, uncaring and disinterested in the will and needs of the majority, and generally able to get around or remake the law to suit their purpose. George W. Bush is only the latest and most extreme example of a tradition begun under Washington, who when elected unanimously (by virtual coronation) was one of the two richest men in the country.

    The Legislative Branch

    The Constitution then and since confers unlimited powers on the government constituted under its three branches of the Congress, Executive and Judiciary. Article I (with seven in all plus 27 Amendments) deals with the legislative branch. Section 8, Sub-section 18 states Congress has power “to make all laws which shall be necessary and proper for carrying into execution the foregoing powers, and all other powers vested by this Constitution….or in any department or officer thereof.” It’s for government then to decide what’s “necessary” and “proper” meaning the sky’s the limit under the concept of sovereignty.

    The Executive and Judiciary branches are dealt with below with the three branches comprising a labyrinthine system the framers devised under the Roman notion of “divide and rule” as follows:

    — a powerful (and at times omnipotent) chief executive at the top,

    — a bicameral legislature with a single member in the upper chamber able to subvert all others in it through the power of the filibuster (meaning pirate in Spanish),

    — a committee system controlled mostly by seniority or a political powerbroker,

    — delay and circumlocution deliberately built into the system,

    — a separate judiciary able to overrule the Congress and Executive, but too often is a partner, not an adversary,

    — staggered elections to assure continuity by preventing too many officials being voted out together,

    — a two-party system with multiple constituencies, especially vulnerable to corruption and the influence of big (corporate) money that runs everything today making the whole system farcical, dishonest and a democracy only in the minds of the deceived and delusional.

    The Judiciary

    Article III of the Constitution establishes the Supreme Court saying only: “The judicial power shall be vested in one Supreme Court, and in such inferior courts as the Congress may from time to time ordain and establish.” Congress is explicitly empowered to regulate the Court, but, in fact, the opposite often happens or, at times, it cuts both ways. The function of Congress is to make laws with the Court in place to interpret them and decide their constitutionality if challenged and it decides to adjudicate.

    As for the common notion of “judicial review,” it’s nowhere mentioned in the Constitution nor did the framers authorize it. Nonetheless, courts use it to judge the constitutionality of laws in place and public sector body actions. They derive their power to do it by deduction from two separate parts of the Constitution: Article VI, Section 2 saying the Constitution, laws and treaties are the supreme law of the land and judges are bound by them; then in Article III, Section 1 saying judicial power applies to all cases, implying judicial review is allowed. Under this interpretation of the law, appointed judges, in theory, “have a power unprecedented in history – to annul acts of the Congress and President.”

    With or without this power, Lundberg makes a powerful case overall that the constitutional story comes down to a question of money and money arrangement – who gets it, how, why, when, where, what for, and under what conditions. Also addressed is who the law leaves out. The story has nothing whatever to do with guaranteeing life, liberty, and the pursuit of happiness (Jefferson’s Orwellian language meaning property); establishing justice; upholding the rule of law equitably for everyone; promoting the general welfare; or securing the blessings of freedom for “The People” unconsidered, unimportant and ignored by the three branches of government serving monied and property interests only, of which they are a part.

    The Executive Branch

    Lundberg’s theme is clear and unequivocal. Under US constitutional law, the President is the most powerful political official on earth, bar none under any other system of government. “The office he holds is inherently imperial,” regardless of the occupant or how he governs, and the Constitution confers this on him. Unlike the British model, with the executive as a collectivity, the US system “is absolutely unique, and dangerously vulnerable” with one man in charge fully able to exploit his position. “The American President (stands) midway between a collective executive and an absolute dictator (and in times of war like now) becomes, in fact, quite constitutionally, a full-fledged dictator.” Disturbingly, the public hasn’t a clue about what’s going on.

    A single sentence, easily passed over or misunderstood, constitutes the essence of presidential power. It effectively grants the Executive a near-limitless source, only constrained to the degree he chooses. It’s from Article II, Section 1 reading: “The executive power shall be vested in a President of the United States of America. Article II, Section 3 then almost nonchalantly adds: “The President shall take care that the laws be faithfully executed” without saying Presidents are virtually empowered to make laws as well as execute them even though nothing in the Constitution specifically permits this practice. More on that below.

    To understand how the US government works, it’s essential to know what executive power is, in fact, knowing it’s concentrated in the hands of one man for good or ill. Also crucial is how Presidents are elected – “literally (by) electoral (unelected by the public) dummies” in an Electoral College. The scheme is a long-acknowledged constitutional anomaly as these state bodies are able to subvert the popular vote, never meet or consult like the College of Cardinals electing a Pope, and, in effect, reduce and corrupt the process into a shameless farce.

    Once elected, it only gets worse because the power of the presidency is awesome and frightening. The nation’s chief executive:

    — is commander-in-chief of the military functioning as a virtual dictator in times of war; although Article I, Section 8 grants only Congress that right, the President, in fact, can do it any time he wishes “without consulting anyone” and, of course, has done it many times;

    — can grant commutations or pardons except in cases of impeachment;

    — can make treaties that become the law of the land, with the advice and consent of two-thirds of the Senate (not ratification as commonly believed); can also terminate treaties with a mere announcement as George Bush did renouncing the important ABM Treaty with the former Soviet Union; in addition, and with no constitutional sanction, he can rule by decree through executive agreements with foreign governments that in some cases are momentous ones like those made at Yalta and Potsdam near the end of WW II. While short of treaties, they then become the law of the land.

    — can appoint administration officials, diplomats, federal judges with Senate approval, that’s usually routine, or can fill any vacancy through (Senate) recess appointments; can also discharge any appointed executive official other than judges and statutory administrative officials;

    — can veto congressional legislation, and history shows through the book’s publication they’re sustained 96% of the time;

    — while Congress alone has appropriating authority, only the President has the power to release funds for spending by the executive branch or not release them;

    — Presidents also have a huge bureaucracy at their disposal, including powerful officials like the Secretaries of Defense, State, Treasury, and Homeland Security and the Attorney General in charge of the Justice Department;

    — Presidents also command center stage any time they wish. They can request and get national prime time television for any purpose with guaranteed extensive post-appearance coverage promoting his message with nary a disagreement with it on any issue;

    — throughout history, going back to George Washington, Presidents have issued Executive Orders (EOs) although the Constitution “nowhere implicitly or explicitly gives a President (the) power (to make) new law” by issuing “one-man, often far-reaching” EOs. However, Presidents have so much power they can do as they wish, only constrained by their own discretion.

    — George Bush also usurped “Unitary Executive” power to brazenly and openly declare what this section highlights – that the law is what he says it is. He proved it in six and a half years of subverting congressional legislation through a record-breaking number of unconstitutional “signing statements.” – They rewrote over 1132 law provisions through 147 separate “statements,” more than all previous Presidents combined. Through this practice, George Bush expanded presidential power well beyond the usual practices recounted above.

    — Presidents are, in fact, empowered to do almost anything not expressively forbidden in the Constitution, and very little is; more importantly, with a little ingenuity and lots of creative chutzpah, the President “can make almost any (constitutional) text mean whatever (he) wants it to mean” so, in fact, his authority is practically absolute or plenary. And the Supreme Court supports this notion as an “inherent power of sovereignty.” If the US has sovereignty, it has all powers therein, and the President, as the sole executive, can exercise them freely without constitutional authorization or restraint.

    In effect, “the President….is virtually a sovereign in his own person.” Compared to the power of the President, Congress is mostly “a paper tiger, easily soothed or repulsed.” The courts, as well, can be gotten around with a little creative exercise of presidential power, and in the case of George Bush, at times just ignoring their decisions when they disagree with his. As Lundberg put it: “One should never under-estimate the power of the President….nor over-estimate that of the Supreme Court. The supposed system of equitable checks and balances does not exist, in fact, (because Congress and the courts don’t effectively use their constitutional authority)….the separation in the Constitution between legislative and the executive is wholly artificial.”

    Further, it’s pure myth that the government is constrained by limited powers. Quite the opposite is true “which at the point of execution (resides in) one man,” the President. In addition, “Until the American electorate creates effective political parties (which it never has done), Congress….will always be pretty much under (Presidents’) thumb(s).” Under the “American constitutional system (the President) is very much a de facto king,” and under George Bush a corrupted, devious, criminal and dangerous one.

    As for impeaching and convicting a President for malfeasance, Article II, Section 4 states it can only be for “treason, bribery, or other high crimes and misdemeanors.” Based on the historical record, it’s near-impossible to do with no President ever having been removed from office this way, and only two were impeached, both unjustly. John Adams, the most distinguished constitutional theorist of his day, said it would take a national convulsion to remove a President by impeachment, which is not to say it won’t ever happen and very likely one day will with no time better than the present to prove it.

    In sum from the above, the US system of constitutional law is full of flaws and faults. “The People” were deliberately and willfully left out of the process proving the Constitution doesn’t recognize democracy in America in spite of the commonly held view it does. In addition, the President, at his own discretion, can usurp dictatorial powers and end republican government by a stroke of his pen. That should awaken everyone to the clear and present danger that any time, for any reason, the President of the United States can declare a state of emergency, suspend the law of the land and rule by decree.

    Constitutional Government in Venezuela

    How does America’s system of government contrast with rule under the 1999 Constitution of the Bolivarian Republic of Venezuela? Hugo Chavez was first elected president in December, 1998 and took office in February, 1999. He then held a national referendum so his people could decide whether to convene a National Constituent Assembly to draft a new constitution to embody his visionary agenda. It passed overwhelmingly followed three months later by elections to the National Assembly to which members of Chavez’s MVR party and those allied with it won 95% of the seats. They then drafted the revolutionary Constitucion de la Republica Bolivariana de Venezuela. It was put to a nationwide vote in December, 1999 and overwhelmingly approved changing everything for the Venezuelan people.

    It established a model humanistic participatory social democracy, unimaginable in the US, providing real (not imagined) checks and balances in the nation’s five branches of government. They comprise the executive, legislative and judicial ones plus two others. One is the independent national electoral council that regulates and handles state and civil society organization electoral procedures to assure they conform to the law requiring free, fair and open elections. The other is a citizen or public power branch functioning as a unique institution. It lets ordinary people serve as ombudsmen to assure the other government branches comply with constitutionally-mandated requirements. This branch includes the attorney general, the defender of the people, and the comptroller general.

    The Legislative Branch

    Venezuela is governed under a unicameral legislative system called the National Assembly. It’s composed of 167 members (compared to 535 in the two US Houses) elected to serve for five years and allowed to run two more times. It differs from the bicameral system in the US but is broadly similar to governments like in the UK. Although it’s bicameral, it’s governed solely by publicly elected members of the House of Commons that includes the Prime Minister and his cabinet as members of Parliament. The upper House of Lords is merely token and advisory, there by tradition like the Queen, with no power to overrule the lower House that runs everything.

    The Office of the President

    The President is elected with a plurality of universally guaranteed suffrage. Article 56 of the Bolivarian Constitution states: “All persons have the right to be registered free of charge with the Civil Registry Office after birth, and to obtain public documents constituting evidence of the biological identity, in accordance with law.” In addition, all Venezuelans are enfranchised to vote under one national standard and are encouraged to do it under a model democratic system with the vast majority in it actively participating.

    In contrast, the US system is quite different. Precise voting rights qualifications are for the states to decide with no constitutionally mandated suffrage standard applying across the board for everyone. The result is many US citizens are denied their franchise right. They’re unable to participate in the electoral process for a variety of reasons no democratic state should tolerate, but America built it into the system by design.

    The Judicial System

    Under Article 2 in The Bolivarian Constitution, the judicial system shares equal importance to the law of the land. But it wasn’t always that way earlier when the Venezuelan judiciary had an odious reputation before Chavez was elected. It had a long history of corruption, a disturbing record of being beholden to political benefactors, and a tradition of failing to provide an adequate system of justice for most Venezuelans. Chavez vowed to change things and undertook a major restructuring effort after taking office. He put this government branch under the Supreme Tribunal of Justice and made it independent of the others. The law now requires those serving be elected by a two-thirds legislative majority (not the previous simple one), and tighter requirements are in place regarding eligible candidates along with public hearings to vet them.

    In addition, to root out long-standing corrupt practices, Chavez created a Judicial Restructuring Commission to review existing judgeships and replace those not fit to serve. Henceforth, all sitting judges with eight or more corruption charges pending are disqualified. It effectively eliminated 80% of those on the bench in short order and showed the extent of malfeasance in the national judicial culture. It also suggested the huge amount throughout the government from generations of institutionalized privilege. Those in power were licensed to steal the country blind and enrich themselves and foreign investors at the expense of the vast majority.

    Reform in all areas of government is still a work in progress, including in the judiciary needing much of it. The process hasn’t been perfect because of the enormity of the task. By the end of 2000, about 70% of sitting judges in the so-called capital region of Caracas, Miranda and Vargas states were replaced by provisional ones with charges of old judges removed for equally beholden new ones. It may be true and points to how hard the going is to change the long-standing culture of privilege and institute real democratic reforms throughout the government.

    Nonetheless, the Constitution established Chavez’s vision for a foundation and legal framework for revolutionary structural change. He’s been working since to transform the nation incrementally into a model participatory social democracy serving all Venezuelans instead of for the privileged few alone the way it traditionally was in the past and how US framers designed American constitutional law. The differences between the two nations couldn’t be more stark.

    The spirit of the Venezuelan Bolivarian Constitution is stated straightaway in its Preamble:….”to establish a democratic, participatory and self-reliant, multiethnic and multicultural society in a just, federal and decentralized State that embodies the values of freedom, independence, peace, solidarity, the common good, the nation’s territorial integrity, comity and the rule of law for this and future generations;”

    It further “guarantees the right to life, work, learning, education, social justice and equality, without discrimination or subordination of any kind; promotes peaceful cooperation among nations and further strengthens Latin American integration in accordance with the principle of nonintervention and national self-determination of the people, the universal and indivisible guarantee of human rights, the democratization of imitational society, nuclear disarmament, ecological balance and environmental resources as the common and inalienable heritage of humanity;……”

    This language would be unimaginable in the US Constitution, and, unlike our federal law, they’re more than words. This is Hugo Chavez’s commitment to all Venezuelans ordained under nine Title headings, 350 Articles, and 18 Temporary Provisions. It’s a first class democratic document, little known in the West, that greatly outclasses and shames what US framers’ enacted for themselves and privileged friends alone. Democracy was nowhere in sight then nor has it shown up since. In Venezuela under Hugo Chavez, it’s resplendent, glorious, still imperfect and a work in progress, but heading in the right direction with newly proposed changes discussed below.

    The contrast with America today couldn’t be greater. The nation under George Bush is ruled by Patriot and Military Commissions Act justice under an institutionalized imperial system of militarized savage capitalism empowering the rich to exploit all others. A state of permanent war exists; civil liberties are disappearing and human rights are a nonstarter; dissent is a crime; social decay is growing; a culture of secrecy and growing fear prevail; torture is practically sanctified; injustice is tolerated; the dominant media function as virtual national thought-control police gatekeepers; and the law is what a boy-emperor president says it is. Aside from the privileged it serves, democracy in America is only in the minds of the bewildered and last of the true-believers who sooner or later will discover the truth.

    Consider Venezuela’s Bolivarian spirit in contrast. The people freely and openly choose their leaders in honest, independently monitored elections. They’re unemcumbered by a farcical electoral college voting scheme (for Presidents) and a system of rigged electronic voting machine and other electoral engineered fraud corrupting the entire process sub rosa. They also have unimaginable benefits like free quality health and dental care (mandated in Articles 83 – 85) as a “fundamental social right and….responsibility of the state….to guarantee….to improve the quality of life and common welfare.” It’s administered through a national public health system proscribed from being privatized. That’s how health delivery in America gets corrupted for profit. The result is 47 million and counting are uninsured, many millions more have too little coverage, and the cost of care is unaffordable for all but the well-off or those on Medicare, Medicaid (if qualify) or under disappearing company-paid plans.

    The Constitution also enacted the principle of participatory democracy from the grassroots for everyone. It’s mandated in Articles 166 and 192 establishing citizen assemblies as a constitutional right for ordinary people to be empowered to participate in governing along with their elected officials. Constitutionally guaranteed rights also ban discrimination; promote gender equity; and insure free speech; a free press; free, fair, and open elections; equal rights for indigenous people (assured a minimum three National Assembly legislative seats); and mandates government make quality free education available for all to the highest levels, as well as housing and an improved social security pension system for seniors, and much more.

    Hugo Chavez brought permanent change, and most Venezuelans won’t tolerate returning to the ugly past. Why should they? They never got these essential social services before. Under a leader who cares, they do now, and their lives improved enormously.

    Other Venezuelan Constitutionally Guaranteed Rights

    The Bolivarian Constitution is a glorious document, fundamentally different in spirit and letter from its US counterpart it shames by comparison. Before Chavez took office in February, 1999, Venezuela only paid lip service to civil liberties, human rights and needs. They’re now mandated by law. It encompasses an impressive array of basic rights and essential services like government-paid health care, education, housing, employment and human dignity enforced and funded by a caring government as the law requires.

    Article 58 in the Constitution also guarantees the right to “timely, true, and impartial” information “without censorship, in accordance with the principles of this constitution.” The opposite is true in America where major media are state propaganda instruments for the privileged.

    Articles 71 – 74 establish four types of popular national referenda never imagined or held in America outside the local or state level where they’re often non-binding. The US is one of only five major democracies never to have permitted this type citizen participation. In Venezuela under Hugo Chavez, the practice is mandated by law and institutionalized to give people at the grass roots a say in running their government. Four types of referenda are allowed:

    –consultative – for a popular, non-binding vote on “national transcendent” issues like trade agreements;

    — recall – applied to all elected officials up to the President;

    — approving – a binding vote to approve laws, constitutional amendments, and treaties relating to national sovereignty; and

    — rescinding – to rescind or change existing laws.

    Referenda can be initiated by the National Assembly, the President, or by petition from 10 – 20% of registered voters, with different procedural requirements applying for each.

    Social, family, cultural, educational and economic rights are guaranteed under Chapters V – VII with the government backing them financially.

    Indigenous Native Peoples’ rights are covered in Chapter VIII. Even environmental rights are addressed with Article 127 stating “It is the right and duty of each generation to protect and maintain the environment for its own benefit and that of the world of the future….The State shall protect the environment, biological and genetic diversity, ecological processes….and other areas of ecological importance.” Try imagining any US federal law with teeth containing this type language let alone the Constitution that includes nothing in its Articles or Amendments.

    Citizen Power gets considerable attention under Articles 273 – 291. It’s exercised by “the Republican Ethics Council, consisting of the People Defender, the General Prosecutor and the General Comptroller of the Republic….Citizen Power is independent and its organs enjoy operating, financial and administrative autonomy.” Citizen Power organs are legally charged with “preventing, investigating and punishing actions that undermine public ethics and administrative morals, to assure lawful sound management of public property….(to help) create citizenship, together with solidarity, freedom, democracy, social responsibility, work” and more.

    Venezuela’s Constitution covers much more as well under each of its nine Titles from:

    — stating its fundamental Bolivarian principles in Title I, to

    — National Security in Title VII,

    — Protection of the Constitution in Title VIII to assure its continuity in the event of “acts of force” or unlawful repeal with each citizen having a duty to reinstate it if that need arises; and finally

    — Constitutional Reforms in Title IX in the form of amendments, other reforms to revise or replace any of its provisions, and the National Constituent Assembly with power “resting with the people of Venezuela.” They’re empowered to call an Assembly to transform the State, create a new “juridical order” and draft a new Constitution to be submitted to a national referendum for the people to accept or reject. That’s how democracy is supposed to work. In Venezuela it does. In the US, it doesn’t, never did, and was never conceived or intended to from the nation’s founding to the present.

    This happens because Americans know painfully little about their law of the land hidden from them in plain view. They’re taught misinformation about it and the framers who drafted it. Few ever read it beyond a quoted line or two and even fewer ever think about it. In contrast, in Venezuela, the Bolivarian Constitution is sold in pocket-sized form almost everywhere. People buy, read and study it. Why? Because it’s a vital unifying part of their lives codifying core democratic values and principles Venezuelan people cherish and wish to keep.

    Prospective Venezuelan Constitutional Reforms

    In July, President Chavez announced he’d be sending the National Assembly a proposal of suggested constitutional reforms to debate and consider. He stressed Venezuelans would then get to vote on them in a national referendum so that “the majority will decide if they approve….constitutional reform.”

    Chavez submitted his proposal in an August 15 address to the National Assembly that will debate and rule on them in three extraordinary sessions over the next 60 to 90 days. Included are amendments to 33 of the Constitution’s 350 articles to “complete the death of the old, hegemonic oligarchy and the old, exploitative capitalist system, and complete the birth of the new state.” Chavez stressed the need to update the 1999 Constitution because it’s “ambiguous (and) a product of that moment. The world (today) is very different from (then). (Reforms now are) essential for continuing the process of revolutionary transition.” They include:

    — extending presidential terms from six to seven years;

    — unlimited reelections (that countries like England, France, Germany and others now allow); Chavez wants the reelection option to be “the sovereign decision of the constituent people of Venezuela;”

    — guaranteeing the right to work and establishing policies to develop and generate productive employment;

    — creation of a Social Stability Fund for “non-dependent” or self-employed workers so they have the same rights as other workers including pensions, paid vacations and prenatal and postnatal leave entitlements;

    — reducing the workday to six hours so businesses would have to employ more workers and hold unemployment down;

    — ending the autonomy of Venezuela’s Central Bank;

    — recognition of different kinds of property defined as social, collective, mixed and private;

    — redefining the role of the military so henceforth “The Bolivarian Armed Forces (will) constitute an essential patriotic, popular and anti-imperialist body organized by the state to guarantee the independence and sovereignty of the nation…;” and

    — guaranteeing state control over the nation’s oil industry to prevent any future privatization of this vital resource;

    Chavez also wants other changes to strengthen the nation’s participatory democracy at the grassroots. He stresses “one of the central ideas is my proposal to open, at the constitutional level, the roads to accelerate the transfer of power to the people” in an “Explosion of Communal (or popular) Power.” It’s already there in more than 26,000 democratically functioning grassroots communal councils. They’re government-sanctioned, funded, operating throughout the country, and may double in number and be strengthened further under proposed constitutional changes.

    Chavez wants “Popular (people) Power” to be a “State Power” along with the Legislature, Executive, Judicial, Citizen and Electoral ones and considers this constitutional change the most important one of all. If it happens, various sovereign powers and duties now handled at the federal, state and municipal levels will be transfered to local communal, worker, campesino, student and other councils. This will strengthen Venezuela’s bedrock participatory democracy making it even more unique and impressive than it already is.

    In America, it’s unimaginable a President or other government officials would recommend “People Power” become our fourth government branch, co-equal with the others, with citizens empowered to vote in national referenda on crucial proposed changes in law.

    Chavez also proposed a “new geometry of power” by amending article 16 that now states “the territory of the nation is divided into those of the States, the Capital District, federal dependencies and federal territories. The territory is organized into Municipalities.” Chavez wants this amended so popular referenda can create “federal districts” in specific areas to serve as states. He called this idea “profoundly revolutionary (and needed) to remove the old oligarchic, exploiter hegemony, the old society, and (quoting Gramsci weaken the former) historic block. If we don’t change the (old) superstructure (it) will defeat us.”

    Chavez also stressed this new structure is needed to be in place when “Venezuela (grows to) 40 – 50 million people.” His plan includes “restructur(ing) Caracas” into a Federal District with more local autonomy, as it was at an earlier time.

    These proposals and other initiatives are part of his overall socialism for the 21st century plan that’s also very business-friendly. Chavez opposes savage capitalism, not private enterprise, and under his stewardship domestic and foreign businesses have thrived. They’re a dominant force powering the economy to accelerated growth since 2003 with latest Central Bank 2nd quarter, 2007 figures coming in at 8.9%. With oil prices high and world economies prospering, this trend is likely to continue. That’s good news for business and households sharing in the benefits through greater purchasing power.

    Chavez wants his new United Socialist Party (PSUV) to drive the revolutionary process and continue his agenda of reform for all Venezuelans. He wants everyone to enjoy the benefits, not just a privileged few like in the past and in the US today. Under his leadership, their future is bright while in America poverty is growing, the middle class is dying, and the darkness of tyranny threatens everyone under George Bush with his agenda likely continuing under a new president in 2009.

    Governance differences exist between these two nations because their constitutional laws are mirror opposite, and America has no one like Hugo Chavez. He’s a rare leader who cares and backs his rhetoric with progressive people-friendly policies. In the US, there’s George Bush, and that pretty much explains the problem. Knowing that, which leader would you choose and under which system of government would you prefer to live?

    Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago and can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

    Also visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com and listen to The Steve Lendman News and Information Hour on TheMicroEffect.com Saturdays at noon US central time.

    Bush Administration Ignores Mossad-Al Qaeda Terrorist Link

    0

    By Tom Heneghan

    It can now be reported that the United States Federal Bureau of Investigation (FBI) has identified an Israeli Mossad cell operating in duality with alleged Al Qaeda types in Washington State and New Jersey.

    The code word “Middle East” has been issued by the FBI to warn U.S. law enforcement authorities of the Israeli-Al Qaeda threat.

    This FBI intelligence seems almost identical to the intelligence gathered by FBI whistleblower Sibel Edmonds, i.e. the pre-9/11 financial connections to New York , New Jersey , Kissinger and Associates, American Insurance Group (AIG) and the American-Turkish Council.

    Note: The U.S. stock market had also experienced meltdown conditions pre-9/11 as it is experiencing now.

    And of course it gets worse. The current head of Israeli INTERPOL is now under FBI inquiry for conspiring with the U.S. Consulate in Jerusalem in allowing Israelis with criminal records to enter the United States .

    Some of these Israelis have been connected to Al Qaeda cells in Bosnia with financial connections to Dubai , United Arab Emirates .

    And now it gets even worse.

    The investigation of the Israeli INTERPOL officer has turned over evidence linking the INTERPOL officer to former New Jersey Chief of Homeland Security Israeli Mossad agent Golan Cipel.

    Cipel is now linked to the noted 9/11 Urban Moving Systems “Dancing Israelis”.

    Cipel is the former homosexual lover of former New Jersey Governor James McGreevey.

    McGreevey, also controlled by the Israeli Mossad, remained silent and complicit in the 9/11 New York / New Jersey cover up.

    Former New Jersey U.S. Attorney Michael Chertoff, now head of the Department of Homeland Security, has been identified in the new FBI investigation for lobbying for the release of the 9/11 implicated Israelis.

    Chertoff, the only U.S. Attorney not fired by Bill Clinton in 1992, has also conspired with Bush and Karl Rove to mask and disguise the identity of Israeli Mossad terrorist-types on American soil.

    P.S. As we bring you this emergency report, Mossad agent and Bush-Clinton Crime Family stooge Chertoff is ignoring the latest FBI warning “Code Middle East” on the Mossad-Al Qaeda Washington State-New Jersey link.

    The brazen Chertoff has also invoked the Patriot Act to keep the press in Washington State from publishing the photographs of the Israeli Mossad types.

    P.P.S. Both unelectable Hillary Lesbian Rodenhurst Clinton and former New York Major Rudy-in-drag Giuliani have also participated in the 9/11 Cipel-McGreevey- New York – New Jersey cover up.

    Reference: McGreevey now lobbies for British Re-Insurance, a 9/11 compromised company linked to an asbestos cover up with financial tie-ins to lobbyist and homosexual-in-the-closet Fred Thompson and Harold Ickes’ noted lobbyist group Ickes & Enright.

    Note: Ickes currently works as director and campaign manager for unelectable Clinton Rodenhurst.

    P.P.P.S. Could it be that the Bush-Clinton-British-Yiddish elite want another terrorist attack on American soil for two purposes.

    One, to freeze the current presidential race, specifically the Democratic Party primary race; and

    Two, allow the criminally compromised U.S. Federal Reserve to continue to bail out U.S. companies and equity markets with a continuing policy of fiat currency and U.S. dollar devaluation.

    Direct warning to the Federal Reserve: You have now engaged in money laundering and insider trading on the behalf of this criminal elite. We know where your white monkeys are in the Philippines and we are not going to allow you to attack the American People again. So, accordingly, prepare for your annihilation.

    And, of course, when all is said and done,
    and you turn your TV off,
    Albert Gore Jr. remains the
    duly elected, non-inaugurated,
    President of the United States .

    http://blog.myspace.com/tom_heneghan_intel

    http://www.democrats.org/page/community/blog/tom_heneghan_intel_briefings

    EXPLOSIVE INTELLIGENCE BRIEFINGS from International Intelligence Expert, Tom Heneghan, who has hundreds of highly credible sources inside American and European Intelligence Agencies and INTERPOL — reporting what is really going on behind the scenes of the controlled MSM cover up propaganda of on-going massive deceptions and illusions.

    British Army deploys new weapon based on mass-killing technology

    0

    By John Byrne

    Parliament not told, minister says

    A new ‘super-weapon‘ being supplied to British soldiers in Afghanistan employs technology based on the “thermobaric” principle which uses heat and pressure to kill people targeted across a wide air by sucking the air out of lungs and rupturing internal organs.

    The so-called “enhanced blast” weapon uses similar technology used in the US “bunker busting” bombs and the devastating bombs dropped by the Russians to destroy the Chechen capital, Grozny.

    Such weapons are brutally effective because they first disperse a gas or chemical agent which is lit at a second stage, allowing the blast to fill the spaces of a building or the crevices of a cave. When the US military deployed a version of these weapons in 2005, DefenseTech wrote an article titled, “Marines Quiet About Brutal New Weapon.”

    According to the US Defense Intelligence Agency, which released a study on thermobaric weapons in 1993, “The [blast] kill mechanism against living targets is unique–and unpleasant…. What kills is the pressure wave, and more importantly, the subsequent rarefaction [vacuum], which ruptures the lungs.… If the fuel deflagrates but does not detonate, victims will be severely burned and will probably also inhale the burning fuel. Since the most common FAE fuels, ethylene oxide and propylene oxide, are highly toxic, undetonated FAE should prove as lethal to personnel caught within the cloud as most chemical agents.”

    A second DIA study said, “shock and pressure waves cause minimal damage to brain tissue… it is possible that victims of FAEs are not rendered unconscious by the blast, but instead suffer for several seconds or minutes while they suffocate.”

    “The effect of an FAE explosion within confined spaces is immense,” said a CIA study of the weapons. “Those near the ignition point are obliterated. Those at the fringe are likely to suffer many internal, and thus invisible injuries, including burst eardrums and crushed inner ear organs, severe concussions, ruptured lungs and internal organs, and possibly blindness.”

    British defense officials told the UK Guardian that British bombs were “different.”

    “They are optimized to create blast [rather than heat]”, one said, speaking on the standard condition of anonymity in Britain. The official added that it would be misleading to call them “thermobaric.”

    Officials told the Guardian the new weapon was classified as a soldier launched “light anti-structure munition” and that the bombs would be more effective because “even when they hit the damage is limited to a confined area.”

    “The continuing issue of civilian casualties in Afghanistan has enormous importance in the battle for hearts and minds,” said Liberal Democrat leader Sir Menzies Campbell in the article. “If these weapons contribute to the deaths of civilians then a primary purpose of the British deployment is going to be made yet more difficult.”

    According to Campbell, the deployment of the weapons was not announced to Parliament.

    More WMD lies exposed

    0

    By Chris Ames

    Observations on WMD

    Alastair Campbell placed the September 2002 WMD dossier in the hands of the propaganda unit that later produced the plagiarised “dodgy dossier”, the New Statesman can reveal.

    New evidence shows how the government misled both the Hutton Inquiry and the Butler Review about the genesis of the dossier. There was an even earlier version of the document than Foreign Office press secretary John Williams’s “missing” draft, whose existence was revealed in the NS last November/

    The revelations have prompted fresh calls for the government to come clean about the document that took Britain to war in Iraq.

    The new evidence is the full text of a letter that the government sent the Hutton Inquiry when it was forced to hand over the John Williams draft, having initially sought to conceal it. Conservative MP John Baron has obtained a copy of the letter under the Freedom of Information Act. Foreign Office minister Kim Howells had previously sent Baron a redacted copy of the letter with four and a half lines of text blacked out on the grounds that it was “sensitive”.

    The newly disclosed text reveals that Williams wrote his draft on 7 and 8 September 2002 , based on an electronic copy of an even earlier document sent to him by the Coalition Information Committee (CIC). That document “held text on Iraqi WMD drafted by the [Joint Intelligence Committee] assessments staff” as well as historical material from the Foreign Office. This shows that the CIC was initally responsible for incorporating the two strands of material into a single document, following Campbell’s first meeting to plan the dossier on 5 September.

    The CIC was a propaganda unit set up by Campbell to promote UK involvement in US-led wars. This is the first time that the CIC has appeared in the evidence trail for the September dossier.

    According to the new letter, the Williams draft of the WMD dossier was “rapidly overtaken. Instead it was decided to make a fresh start under John Scarlett’s direction” on 9 September. But government witnesses later told the Butler Review that it had been “agreed from the outset” that the JIC would be responsible: “From then on, the dossier was in the ownership of the JIC generally and of its Chairman in particular….”

    The revelation that the dossier was from the outset in the ownership of Campbell’s propaganda unit is the final nail in the coffin of the government’s claims that it was produced by the JIC. There is no evidence that the committee itself was ever asked to produce or approve the dossier. It was Scarlett who did both.

    The government refuses to publish the Williams draft, in spite of a ruling from the Information Commissioner. It has stated that it does not contain the notorious 45 minutes claim. But this is because Williams’ source material — the early JIC drafts of the WMD text — did not include the claim.

    It is also clear that Williams remained heavily involved even after the task of writing the dossier was given to Scarlett. The 45-minute claim was inserted in Scarlett’s draft after Williams and other spin doctors at that meeting saw a formal JIC paper that cited it. According to Scarlett, Williams provided “considerable help” towards his draft.

    Williams has told me that he does not dispute attending the meeting but that he was not involved in inserting the 45 minutes claim. In June, I made a Freedom of Information request to confirm his attendance and find out what his contribution was. As we go to press, the Cabinet Office has failed to answer this request.

    The new letter also confirms that the government initially withheld the Williams draft from the Hutton Inquiry and tried to conceal its existence. The Inquiry solicitor had to ask the Cabinet Office twice to hand it over.

    Williams was one of the first witnesses at the Inquiry, on 14 August 2003. He failed to mention that he had produced an early version of the dossier. By the time Alastair Campbell gave evidence five days later, an email had emerged that referred to “John’s draft of 9th September”. We now know that this was Williams’ draft. Campbell was repeatedly asked what this referred to but repeatedly denied any knowledge. Asked whether there was a dossier on 9 September, Campbell stated unambiguously: “No, there was not.”

    In fact, Campbell’s diaries for September 2002, which were before the Inquiry but not published at that time, reveal that he was fully aware of Williams’ draft. He wrote on 9 September that Scarlett agreed with him that the Foreign Office was trying to take over the dossier. It appears that this is a reference to Williams, rather than the CIC, which, although it was based in the Foreign Office, was answerable to Campbell. Campbell’s diaries also reveal that while the September dossier was being produced he commissioned the CIC to produce the later “dodgy” dossier. Clearly the CIC was Campbell’s preferred creator of dossiers.

    When Scarlett gave his Hutton evidence on 26 August he was also asked about “John’s draft”. He said he was “virtually certain this is a reference to work put forward by John Williams…on his own initiative.” Although Scarlett tried to paint Williams’ efforts as a sidetrack, stating that he circulated the draft to “No. 10 inter alia probably”, Howells has recently disclosed that “Williams provided his document to Scarlett.”

    For the whole of the first stage of the Inquiry, the government did not provide a copy of the draft to Hutton. But its existence had now been noticed by the BBC’s legal team, who asked for a copy. The draft was eventually sent to the Inquiry on 12 September 2003, after the solicitor to the Inquiry had asked for it on two occasions.

    What happened next remains a mystery. It is unclear whether the solicitor sent the Williams draft on to the BBC but there is no copy of it in the Corporation’s Hutton archive. It was certainly not sent to BBC Journalist Andrew Gilligan, who was separately represented at the Inquiry. Gilligan has told me that

    The Williams draft would have long been in the public domain had the government not initially withheld it from Hutton. Only documents submitted during the first stage of the Inquiry were routinely posted on its website. After that, papers were only published if they were raised in evidence. Because the government concealed the Williams draft for so long, it was not automatically published. If it was not sent to the parties to the Inquiry they could not raise it in evidence. In fact, the document had already been discussed. Its very existence, which Campbell had expressly denied, was evidence that the government was engaged in a cover-up.

    It is clear that the government went to significant lengths to cover up the truth about the dossier’s genesis. But it has been aided by Hutton’s failure to disclose relevant information. The Williams draft proves that the 45 minutes was the “not in the original draft”, as Gilligan alleged, and Hutton should have passed it to all parties to his inquiry.

    It appears that Hutton also failed to look into the CIC’s role and kept evidence of it to himself. But this evidence raises the possibility that the dossier was produced under the auspices not of the JIC but of a propaganda unit answerable to Campbell.

    Baron told the New Statesman: “Britain went to war on a false premise, and this latest revelation underlines the fact that spin doctors were involved from the outset in the production of the dossier and the presentation of the case for war in Iraq — a war which, in its aftermath, is still costing British and Iraqi lives. I shall be asking further questions when parliament returns as to why the involvement of the CIC in the production of the dossier has been concealed.”

    Man Dies After Incident On Parkway West

    0

    A man died Thursday after an incident on the Parkway West. Police said they responded to a man they first believed was lying in front of the inbound side of the Fort Pitt tunnels. When they arrived, police said 27-year-old Chad Cekas was being combative, and police used a Taser gun on him.Cekas became unresponsive and emergency medical crews were called to the scene, police said.

    Cekas was pronounced dead at Mercy Hospital just after 9 p.m., officials said

    Police found Cekas’ car abandoned on the on-ramp to Route 51 from the Parkway West. The car contained suspected drug paraphernalia and is being held for further investigation, police said.

    http://www.thepittsburghchannel.com/news/13963946/detail.html

    Fingerprint scanning at nursery

    0

    A fingerprint scanning system is being introduced at a nursery in Bath to allow only parents and staff access. The biometric controls are being introduced at the First Steps nursery to “enhance existing security arrangements”.

    The company behind the system, UK Biometrics, said no fingerprints were actually stored and no human rights were infringed.

    Manager Lysha Goode said: “Security is a prime concern for parents and staff.”

    “With our new biometric system we know only registered people can gain access to the nursery so parents have peace of mind,” she said.

    Sally Glover, of UK Biometrics, added: “The nursery has specified the only key which cannot be lost, stolen, forged or hacked – the human fingerprint.

    “The system is ideal for high traffic sites where security is paramount.”

    BBC

    Iraq Government doomed to weaken: US intelligence

    0

    In a bleak outlook of the political situation in Iraq, US intelligence officials warned that Prime Minister Nouri Al-Maliki’s Government will become “more precarious” in the coming months.

    “The IC [intelligence community] assesses that the Iraqi Government will become more precarious over the next six to 12 months because of criticism by other members of the major Shia coalition” as well as Sunni and Kurdish parties, a new US intelligence estimate warned.

    The key judgements of the assessment were released after being declassified by the Director for National Intelligence and come amid mounting frustration inside the US administration at the lack of political progress in Iraq.

    Mr Maliki’s attempts to bridge Iraq’s ethnic and sectarian divides have so far failed, with 17 of 40 ministers having resigned or decided to boycott the cabinet and unending daily bloodshed taking its toll on ordinary Iraqis.

    Unless there is “a fundamental shift in factors driving Iraqi political and security developments,” the political compromises needed for “sustained security, long-term political progress, and economic development are unlikely to emerge,” the assessment said.

    In February the intelligence community’s assessment of the Iraq situation warned that even if the violence subsided, Iraqi leaders would be “hard pressed” to achieve political reconciliation over the next 12-18 months.

    Since then, the US has sent 30,000 additional troops to Iraq, boosting its force levels to 162,000 in a bid to stem a slide toward civil war.

    But Mr Maliki has so far failed to deliver any major pieces of legislation aimed at promoting reconciliation between Sunnis and Shiites.

    And President George W Bush, under mounting pressure at home to find a way out of the dragging war, this week expressed his frustration with the lack of progress, only to reaffirm his support for Mr Maliki the following day.

    “Prime Minister Maliki’s a good guy, good man, with a difficult job, and I support him,” Bush said in a speech as he set out his case for staying the course in Iraq.

    The intelligence assessment did conclude that there have been “measurable but uneven” improvements in Iraq’s security in the past months.

    But it warned that insurgent violence will remain high and the government will struggle to achieve national political reconciliation.

    The Sunni resistance to the Al Qaeda in Iraq group had expanded but had not yet translated into broad support for the Government or willingness to work with Shiites, it said.

    And Shiite leaders fear the Sunnis will ultimately choose to side with the armed opponents of the Shiite-led Government, the assessment said.

    “Bottom up” security initiatives among Sunnis focused on combating Al Qaeda offer the best prospect for improved security over the next year, but only if the Iraqi Government accepts and supports them, it concluded.

    The update, which represents the consensus of 16 US intelligence agencies, is called “Prospects for Iraq’s Stability: Some Progress but Political Reconciliation Elusive.”

    It comes just weeks before General David Petraeus, the US commander in Iraq, and US Ambassador Ryan Crocker offer their own assessment of whether US strategy has worked and what to do next.

    They are scheduled to testify before Congress September 11 and 12, and issue a report on the situation on September 15.

    But senior US lawmakers including leading Democratic presidential candidate Hillary Clinton have called for Mr Maliki to go.

    AFP

    ‘Put CCTV in addicts’ homes to protect children’

    0

    LUCY ADAMS

    A controversial plan for CCTV to be used to protect children in the homes of chaotic drug-abusing parents has been proposed by one of Scotland’s most eminent drugs experts.

    Professor Neil McKeganey, head of the centre for Drug Misuse Research at Glasgow University, believes radical measures are required to protect the estimated 160,000 children in Scotland living with an alcoholic or drug-addicted parent.

    He believes the sheer scale of the problem, which was previously estimated as being far lower, makes it impossible for social workers to guarantee children’s safety.

    Recent figures suggest more than 50,000 children are estimated to have a parent with a drug problem and around 80,000 to 100,000 have a parent with an alcohol problem.

    Social workers and children’s charities last night agreed with the need for debate and further action to protect these children but disagreed with the proposal.

    Mr McKeganey is known for his extensive research and controversial views. In 2004, he suggested female drug addicts should be paid to take long-term contraception to stop them having children.

    “What price should we put on our privacy?” said Mr McKeganey. “The question is whether we are prepared to say the principle of the privacy of family life is more important than that of child protection. If we accept that privacy is the most important principle then there will be many more tragic cases.

    “I am aware that this will be controversial but believe the debate needs to be had. We have become used to the proliferation of CCTV cameras within public spaces. We have also become used to the idea that those cameras are an effective tool in crime prevention. What we have not considered though is their possible use in private spaces.”

    Recent child abuse cases have highlighted the urgent need to tackle the problem.

    Last year, in the wake of an 11-year-old girl collapsing in a Glasgow primary school suffering heroin withdrawal, Jack McConnell, the then first minister, announced the children of drug addicts would be more likely to be put into care.

    In another case in December 2005, two-year-old Derek Doran died in East Lothian after drinking methadone in his parents’ home.

    Mr McKeganey added: “The response to this suggestion will be to say that it is the unacceptable extension of big brother’ and a violation of individuals human rights. But the Human Rights Act was never intended to be a get out’ clause for those committing crimes or harming vulnerable children.”

    Michelle Miller, the Association of Directors of Social Work spokeswoman on children and families, said: “This is an enormous problem and social workers by themselves are not going to fix it. It is a much wider issue than that and we need to have a detailed debate. This proposal, however, would be completely impractical.”

    Anne Houston, chief executive of Children 1st, disagreed with Mr McKeganey’s suggestion. “The money would be better spent in increasing the resources needed to identify and support children affected by drugs and alcohol misuse.”

    Meanwhile, an investigation has revealed that young drug addicts in Aberdeen city without dependants are low on the priority list and may have to wait up to two years for help.

    CIA publishes pre-9/11 intelligence errors

    0

    We’ve long known that the left hand of the Bush Administration (if there is one) has seldom known what the right hand is doing, and that both hands can’t grasp reality but it is shocking to learn how pervasive this is in the key area of Intelligence gathering.

    A 19-page CIA report on known intelligence, pre-9/11, written in 2005 and just now made public, claims that “to 60 C.I.A. officers knew of intelligence reports in 2000 that two of the Sept. 11 hijackers, Nawaf al-Hamzi and Khalid al-Mihdhar, may have been in the United States. But none of those officers thought to notify the Federal Bureau of Investigation about the potential domestic threat, the report says, evidence of what it calls a systemic failure,” according to the New York Times.

    The inspector general (author of the report) recommended that several top agency officials, including former director George J. Tenet, be held accountable for their failure to put in place a strategy to dismantle Al Qaeda in the years before Sept. 11, 2001. Gen. Michael V. Hayden, the current C.I.A. director, and his predecessor, Porter J. Goss, have declined to seek disciplinary action against Mr. Tenet and others named in the report.

    Instead, of course, Bush awarded Tenant the Medal of Freedom, the highest civil medal of merit in the land.

    The outlines of the report have been known since shortly after it was completed in 2005, but it had never been made public, and its release reignited a debate about whether the C.I.A. should have done more before the attacks and whether Mr. Tenet and other officials should be held accountable.

    Many of the report’s findings about bureaucratic breakdowns that allowed the 19 hijackers to elude the authorities and carry out the attacks have been documented elsewhere, principally by the Sept. 11 commission, but this report by John L. Helgerson, the C.I.A. inspector, was the first to recommend that top agency officials face a disciplinary review.

    The full report by the inspector general, totaling several hundred pages, remains classified

    Miami Five’s defense exposes errors and jury intimidation during trial

    Granma International
    flamesong
    21st August 2007

    On August 20, the 11th Circuit Appeals Court in Atlanta heard convincing allegations by the legal team defending the five Cuban anti-terrorist fighters imprisoned in the United States.

    The defense lawyers submitted that the prosecution committed serious procedural errors and used intimidation to pressure the jury of the initial trial, which took place in Miami in a climate of apparent hostility toward the five heroes.

    For the first time eminent foreign legal professionals were present at the hearing of the case of Gerardo Hernández, Fernando González, Ramón Labaniño, Antonio Guerrero and René González, known as the Five in the international campaign for their release.

    Alicia Jrapko, a member of the International Free the Five Committee, told the Cuban radio and TV Roundtable program over the phone that the presence of prestigious international lawyers was much larger than before and signified strong backing for the Cuban anti-terrorist fighters.

    Juan Guzmán, the Chilean attorney who brought charges against the ex-dictator Augusto Pinochet, was present and informed the Roundtable program (again by phone) that the U.S. government was unable to refute the defense truths, as reflected in the international media.

    Guzmán appreciated the questions put by the sitting judges and stated that there is really no evidence to justify the charges of espionage against the prisoners, nor that of “conspiring to commit murder,” brazenly brought against two of them.

    It was also abundantly clear that Miami was not an appropriate venue for the original trial, where the Five were handed down sentences ranging from 15 years’ imprisonment to two life terms, because the jury was intimidated, a point firmly established by the defense appeal, Guzmán added.

    The Chilean legal professional thought that the defense achieved its main objective: to communicate the poor conduct of the U.S. government and the shortcomings of the jury selected for the Miami trial.

    “In line with my legal experience, my impression was that those who have knowledge of this case would have to rule in favor of the five Cubans,” Guzmán affirmed.

    The multinational TV networks Telesur and CNN covered aspects of the hearing and antecedents in the case of the Five.

    This September the Cuban patriots will have completed nine years of arbitrary detention in the United States after they were sentenced for crimes that they did not commit in a rigged trial in Miami, lacking in procedural guarantees, as confirmed by UN experts and three judges at the Court of Appeals in the first hearing.

    Castro: Cuba not cashing U.S. Guantanamo rent checks

    Yahoo [via Granma International]
    flamesong
    20th August 2007

    The United States pays Cuba $4,085 a month in rent for the controversial Guantanamo naval base, but Cuba has only once cashed a check in almost half a century and then only by mistake, Fidel Castro wrote in an essay published on Friday.

    The ailing Cuban leader, who has not appeared in public for more than a year, said he had refused to cash the checks to protest the “illegal” U.S. occupation of the land which he said was now used for “dirty work.”

    “The base is needed to humiliate and to do the dirty work that occurs there,” he said of the detention camp where some 355 terrorism suspects are still being held with no legal rights despite international criticism.

    Castro, who turned 81 on Monday out of public sight, said the U.S. checks are made out to the “Treasurer General of the Republic,” a position that ceased to exist after Cuba’s 1959 revolution.

    He said only one U.S. check was ever cashed — in 1959 due to “confusion” in the heady early days of the leftist revolution.

    Castro’s refusal to cash the checks to protest the “illegal” occupation has been long known. In a television interview years ago, he showed the checks stuffed into a desk drawer in his office.

    The final installment of Castro’s long historical essay on Cuba’s hostile relations with the United States — written for future generations — was published by the ruling Communist Party newspaper Granma.

    The essay entitled “The Empire and the Independent Island” recounted Castro’s view of U.S. efforts to control Cuba since U.S. troops landed on the island in the Spanish-American War that secured Cuban independence from Spain in 1898.

    The United States retained 46.8 square miles (121 square kilometers) at the entrance to Guantanamo Bay in eastern Cuba for a naval base, which has been used as a prison camp for Taliban and al Qaeda terrorism suspects since the Afghanistan war following the September 11 attacks in 2001.

    The base was initially a coaling station for the U.S. Navy to protect the approaches to the Panama Canal.

    Castro said the enclave was “illegally usurped” by the United States, adding that the base no longer had any strategic military purpose in the age of nuclear-powered aircraft carriers packed with fast fighter-bombers.

    “If we have to wait for the collapse of the (capitalist) system, we will wait,” Castro wrote. He said Cuba was always on alert to the threat of a U.S. invasion.

    Castro handed over power to his brother Raul on July 26 last year after undergoing emergency intestinal surgery. His health is a state secret, but few Cubans expect him to return to office.

    The Cuban leader, the last of the major Cold War figures still alive, is seen as a Stalinist tyrant by his enemies but is widely admired in the Third World for standing up to the United States, a David-versus-Goliath role he has relished.

    America and Venezuela – Constitutional Worlds Apart

    1

    By Stephen Lendman
    RINF Alternative News

    Although imperfect, no country anywhere is closer to a model democracy than Venezuela under President Hugo Rafael Chavez Frias. In contrast, none is a more shameless failure than America, but it was true long before the age of George W. Bush. The difference under his regime is that the mask is off revealing a repressive state masquerading as a democratic republic. This article compares the constitutional laws of each country and how they’re implemented. The result shows world’s apart differences between these two nominally democratic states – one that’s real, impressive and improving and the other that’s mostly pretense and under George Bush lawless, corrupted, in tatters, and morally depraved.

    US Constitutional Law from the Beginning

    Before they’re old enough to understand its meaning, young US children are taught to “pledge allegiance to the flag of the United States of America and to the Republic for which it stands,” and, by inference, its bedrock supreme constitutional law of the land. At that early age, they likely haven’t yet heard of it, but soon will with plenty of misinformation about a document far less glorious than it’s made out to be.

    This article draws on Ferdinand Lundberg’s powerfully important 1980 book, “Cracks in the Constitution,” that’s every bit as relevant today as then. In it, he deconstructs the nation’s foundational legal document, separating myth from reality about what he called “the great totempole of American society.” He analyzed it, piece by piece, revealing its intentionally crafted flaws. It’s not at all the “Rock of Ages” it’s cracked up to be, but students at all levels don’t learn that in classrooms from teachers going along with the deception or who simply don’t know the truth about their subject matter.

    The Constitution falls far short of a “masterpiece of political architecture,” but it’s even worse than that. It was the product of very ordinary scheming politicians (not the Mt. Rushmore types they’re portrayed as in history books) and their friends crafting the law of the land to serve themselves while leaving out the greater public that was nowhere in sight in 1787 Philadelphia. Unlike the Venezuelan Constitution, discussed below, “The People” were never consulted or even considered, and nothing in the end was put to a vote beyond the state legislative bodies that had to ratify it. In contrast to popular myth, the framers crafted a Constitution that didn’t constrain or fetter the federal government nor did they create a government of limited powers.

    They devised a government of men, not laws, that was composed of self-serving devious officials who lied, connived, used or abused the law at their whim, and pretty much operated ad libitum to discharge their duties as they wished. In that respect, things weren’t much different then from now except the times were simpler, the nation smaller, and the ambitions of those in charge much less far-reaching than today.

    The Constitution can easily be read in 30 minutes or less and just as easily be misunderstood. The opening Preamble contains its sole myth referring to “We the people of the United States of America.” The only people who mattered were white male property owners. All others nowhere entered the picture, then or mostly since, proving democracy operatively is little more than a fantasy. But try explaining that to people today thinking otherwise because that’s all they were taught from the beginning to believe.

    They were never told the American revolution was nothing more than a minority of the colonists seceding from the British empire planning essentially the same type government repackaged under new management. Using high-minded language in Article I, Section 8 of the supreme law of the land, the founders and their successors ignored the minimum objective all governments are, or should be, entrusted to do – “provide for….(the) general welfare” of their people under a system of constitutional law serving everyone. But that’s not its only flaw build in by design.

    Our revered document is called “The Living Constitution,” and Article VI, Section 2 defines it as the supreme law of the land. In fact, it’s loosely structured for governments to do as they wish or not wish with the notion of a “government of the people, by the people, for the people” a nonstarter. “The People” don’t govern either directly or through representatives, in spite of commonly held myths. “The People” are governed, like it or not, the way sitting governments choose to do it. As a consequence, “The Living Constitution” was a “huge flop” and still is.

    Setting the Record Straight on the Framers

    Popular myth aside, the 55 delegates who met in Philadelphia from May to September, 1787 were very ordinary self-serving, privileged, property-owning white men. They weren’t extraordinarily learned, profound in their thinking or in any way special. Only 25 attended college (that was pretty rudimentary at the time), and Washington never got beyond the fifth grade.

    Lundberg described them as a devious bunch of wheeler-dealers likely meeting in smoke-filled rooms (literally or figuratively) cutting deals the way things work today. He called them no “all-star political team” (except for George Washington) compared to more distinguished figures who weren’t there like Jefferson, Adams (the most noted constitutional theorist of his day), John Jay (the first Supreme Court Chief Justice), Thomas Paine, Patrick Henry and others. Madison and Alexander Hamilton, who did attend, were virtual unknowns at the time, yet ever since Madison has been mischaracterized as the Constitution’s father. In fact, he only played a modest role.

    The delegates came to Philadelphia in May, 1887, assembled, did their work, sent it to the states, and left in a despondent mood. They disliked the final product, some could barely tolerate it, yet 39 of the 55 attendees knowingly signed a document they believed flawed while we today extoll it like it came down from Mt. Sinai. The whole process we call a first-class historical event was, in fact, an entirely routine uninspiring political caucus producing no “prodigies of statecraft, no wonders of political (judgment), no vaulting philosophies, no Promethean vistas.” Contradicting everything we’ve been “indoctrinated from ears to toes” to believe, the notion that the Constitution is “a document of salvation….a magic talisman,” or a gift to the common man is pure fantasy.

    The central achievement of the convention, and a big one (until the Civil War changed things), was the cobbling together of disparate and squabbling states into a union. It held together, tenuously at best, for over seven decades but not actually until Appomattox “at bayonet point.” The convention succeeded in gaining formal approval for what the leading power figures wanted and then got it rammed through the state ratification process to become the law of the land.

    After much wheeling and dealing, they achieved mightily but not without considerable effort. Enough states balked to thwart the whole process and had to be won over with concessions like legitimizing slavery for southern interests and more. Then consider the Bill of Rights, why they were added, for whom, and why adopting them made the difference. It came down to no Bill of Rights, no Constitution, but they weren’t for “The People” who were out of sight and mind.

    These “glorified” first 10 Amendments were first rejected twice, then only added to assure enough state delegates voted to ratify the final document with them included. Many in smaller states were displeased enough to want a second convention that might have derailed the whole process had it happened. To prevent it, concessions were made including adding the Bill of Rights because they addressed key state delegate concerns like the following:

    — prohibitions against quartering troops in their property,

    — unreasonable searches and seizures there as well,

    — the right to have state militias,

    — the right of people to bear arms, but not as the 2nd Amendment today is interpreted,

    — the rights of free speech, the press, religion, assembly and petition, all to serve monied and propertied interests alone – not “The People,”

    — due process of law with speedy public trials for the privileged, and

    — various other provisions worked out through compromise to become our acclaimed Bill of Rights. Two additional amendments were proposed but rejected by the majority. They would have banned monopolies and standing armies, matters of great future import that might have made a huge difference thereafter. We’ll never know for sure.

    In the end and in spite of its defects, the framers felt it was the best they could do at the time and kept their fingers crossed it would work to their advantage. None of them suggested or wanted “a sheltered haven….for the innumerable heavily laden, bedraggled, scrofulous and oppressed of the earth.” On the contrary, they intended to keep them that way meaning things weren’t much different then than now, and the founders weren’t the noble characters they’re made out to be.

    There were no populists or civil libertarians among them with men like Washington and Jefferson (who was abroad and didn’t attend) being slave-owners. In fact, they were little more than crass opportunists who willfully acted against the will of “The People” they ignored and disdained. In spite of it, they’re practically deified and ranked with the Apostles, and one of them (Washington) sits in the most prominent spot atop Mt. Rushmore.

    The constitutional convention ended September 17, 1787 “in an atmosphere verging on glumness.” Of the 55 attending delegates, 39 signed as a pro forma exercise before sending it to the states with power to accept or reject it. Again, “The People” were nowhere in sight in Philadelphia or at the state level where the real tussle began before the founders could declare victory.

    What Was Achieved and What Wasn’t

    Contrary to popular myth, the new government wasn’t constrained by constitutional checks and balances of the three branches created within it. In fact, then and since, sitting governments have acted expediently, with or without popular approval, and within or outside the law. In this respect, our system functions no differently than most others operating as we do. It’s accomplished through “the narrowest possible interpretations of the Constitution,” but it’s free to go “further afield under broader or fanciful official interpretations.” History records many examples under noted Presidents like Lincoln, T. and F. Roosevelt and Wilson along with less distinguished ones like Reagan, Clinton, Nixon, GHW Bush and his bad seed son, the worst ever of a bad lot.

    Key to understanding the American system is that “government is completely autonomous, detached, (and) in a realm of its own” with its “main interest (being) economic (for the privileged) at all times.” Constitutional shackles and constraining barriers are pure fantasy. Regardless of law, custom or anything else, sitting US governments have always been freelancing and able to operate as they please. They’ve also consistently been unresponsive to the public interest, uncaring and disinterested in the will and needs of the majority, and generally able to get around or remake the law to suit their purpose. George W. Bush is only the latest and most extreme example of a tradition begun under Washington, who when elected unanimously (by virtual coronation) was one of the two richest men in the country.

    The Legislative Branch

    The Constitution then and since confers unlimited powers on the government constituted under its three branches of the Congress, Executive and Judiciary. Article I (with seven in all plus 27 Amendments) deals with the legislative branch. Section 8, Sub-section 18 states Congress has power “to make all laws which shall be necessary and proper for carrying into execution the foregoing powers, and all other powers vested by this Constitution….or in any department or officer thereof.” It’s for government then to decide what’s “necessary” and “proper” meaning the sky’s the limit under the concept of sovereignty.

    The Executive and Judiciary branches are dealt with below with the three branches comprising a labyrinthine system the framers devised under the Roman notion of “divide and rule” as follows:

    — a powerful (and at times omnipotent) chief executive at the top,

    — a bicameral legislature with a single member in the upper chamber able to subvert all others in it through the power of the filibuster (meaning pirate in Spanish),

    — a committee system controlled mostly by seniority or a political powerbroker,

    — delay and circumlocution deliberately built into the system,

    — a separate judiciary able to overrule the Congress and Executive, but too often is a partner, not an adversary,

    — staggered elections to assure continuity by preventing too many officials being voted out together,

    — a two-party system with multiple constituencies, especially vulnerable to corruption and the influence of big (corporate) money that runs everything today making the whole system farcical, dishonest and a democracy only in the minds of the deceived and delusional.

    The Judiciary

    Article III of the Constitution establishes the Supreme Court saying only: “The judicial power shall be vested in one Supreme Court, and in such inferior courts as the Congress may from time to time ordain and establish.” Congress is explicitly empowered to regulate the Court, but, in fact, the opposite often happens or, at times, it cuts both ways. The function of Congress is to make laws with the Court in place to interpret them and decide their constitutionality if challenged and it decides to adjudicate.

    As for the common notion of “judicial review,” it’s nowhere mentioned in the Constitution nor did the framers authorize it. Nonetheless, courts use it to judge the constitutionality of laws in place and public sector body actions. They derive their power to do it by deduction from two separate parts of the Constitution: Article VI, Section 2 saying the Constitution, laws and treaties are the supreme law of the land and judges are bound by them; then in Article III, Section 1 saying judicial power applies to all cases, implying judicial review is allowed. Under this interpretation of the law, appointed judges, in theory, “have a power unprecedented in history – to annul acts of the Congress and President.”

    With or without this power, Lundberg makes a powerful case overall that the constitutional story comes down to a question of money and money arrangement – who gets it, how, why, when, where, what for, and under what conditions. Also addressed is who the law leaves out. The story has nothing whatever to do with guaranteeing life, liberty, and the pursuit of happiness (Jefferson’s Orwellian language meaning property); establishing justice; upholding the rule of law equitably for everyone; promoting the general welfare; or securing the blessings of freedom for “The People” unconsidered, unimportant and ignored by the three branches of government serving monied and property interests only, of which they are a part.

    The Executive Branch

    Lundberg’s theme is clear and unequivocal. Under US constitutional law, the President is the most powerful political official on earth, bar none under any other system of government. “The office he holds is inherently imperial,” regardless of the occupant or how he governs, and the Constitution confers this on him. Unlike the British model, with the executive as a collectivity, the US system “is absolutely unique, and dangerously vulnerable” with one man in charge fully able to exploit his position. “The American President (stands) midway between a collective executive and an absolute dictator (and in times of war like now) becomes, in fact, quite constitutionally, a full-fledged dictator.” Disturbingly, the public hasn’t a clue about what’s going on.

    A single sentence, easily passed over or misunderstood, constitutes the essence of presidential power. It effectively grants the Executive a near-limitless source, only constrained to the degree he chooses. It’s from Article II, Section 1 reading: “The executive power shall be vested in a President of the United States of America. Article II, Section 3 then almost nonchalantly adds: “The President shall take care that the laws be faithfully executed” without saying Presidents are virtually empowered to make laws as well as execute them even though nothing in the Constitution specifically permits this practice. More on that below.

    To understand how the US government works, it’s essential to know what executive power is, in fact, knowing it’s concentrated in the hands of one man for good or ill. Also crucial is how Presidents are elected – “literally (by) electoral (unelected by the public) dummies” in an Electoral College. The scheme is a long-acknowledged constitutional anomaly as these state bodies are able to subvert the popular vote, never meet or consult like the College of Cardinals electing a Pope, and, in effect, reduce and corrupt the process into a shameless farce.

    Once elected, it only gets worse because the power of the presidency is awesome and frightening. The nation’s chief executive:

    — is commander-in-chief of the military functioning as a virtual dictator in times of war; although Article I, Section 8 grants only Congress that right, the President, in fact, can do it any time he wishes “without consulting anyone” and, of course, has done it many times;

    — can grant commutations or pardons except in cases of impeachment;

    — can make treaties that become the law of the land, with the advice and consent of two-thirds of the Senate (not ratification as commonly believed); can also terminate treaties with a mere announcement as George Bush did renouncing the important ABM Treaty with the former Soviet Union; in addition, and with no constitutional sanction, he can rule by decree through executive agreements with foreign governments that in some cases are momentous ones like those made at Yalta and Potsdam near the end of WW II. While short of treaties, they then become the law of the land.

    — can appoint administration officials, diplomats, federal judges with Senate approval, that’s usually routine, or can fill any vacancy through (Senate) recess appointments; can also discharge any appointed executive official other than judges and statutory administrative officials;

    — can veto congressional legislation, and history shows through the book’s publication they’re sustained 96% of the time;

    — while Congress alone has appropriating authority, only the President has the power to release funds for spending by the executive branch or not release them;

    — Presidents also have a huge bureaucracy at their disposal, including powerful officials like the Secretaries of Defense, State, Treasury, and Homeland Security and the Attorney General in charge of the Justice Department;

    — Presidents also command center stage any time they wish. They can request and get national prime time television for any purpose with guaranteed extensive post-appearance coverage promoting his message with nary a disagreement with it on any issue;

    — throughout history, going back to George Washington, Presidents have issued Executive Orders (EOs) although the Constitution “nowhere implicitly or explicitly gives a President (the) power (to make) new law” by issuing “one-man, often far-reaching” EOs. However, Presidents have so much power they can do as they wish, only constrained by their own discretion.

    — George Bush also usurped “Unitary Executive” power to brazenly and openly declare what this section highlights – that the law is what he says it is. He proved it in six and a half years of subverting congressional legislation through a record-breaking number of unconstitutional “signing statements.” – They rewrote over 1132 law provisions through 147 separate “statements,” more than all previous Presidents combined. Through this practice, George Bush expanded presidential power well beyond the usual practices recounted above.

    — Presidents are, in fact, empowered to do almost anything not expressively forbidden in the Constitution, and very little is; more importantly, with a little ingenuity and lots of creative chutzpah, the President “can make almost any (constitutional) text mean whatever (he) wants it to mean” so, in fact, his authority is practically absolute or plenary. And the Supreme Court supports this notion as an “inherent power of sovereignty.” If the US has sovereignty, it has all powers therein, and the President, as the sole executive, can exercise them freely without constitutional authorization or restraint.

    In effect, “the President….is virtually a sovereign in his own person.” Compared to the power of the President, Congress is mostly “a paper tiger, easily soothed or repulsed.” The courts, as well, can be gotten around with a little creative exercise of presidential power, and in the case of George Bush, at times just ignoring their decisions when they disagree with his. As Lundberg put it: “One should never under-estimate the power of the President….nor over-estimate that of the Supreme Court. The supposed system of equitable checks and balances does not exist, in fact, (because Congress and the courts don’t effectively use their constitutional authority)….the separation in the Constitution between legislative and the executive is wholly artificial.”

    Further, it’s pure myth that the government is constrained by limited powers. Quite the opposite is true “which at the point of execution (resides in) one man,” the President. In addition, “Until the American electorate creates effective political parties (which it never has done), Congress….will always be pretty much under (Presidents’) thumb(s).” Under the “American constitutional system (the President) is very much a de facto king,” and under George Bush a corrupted, devious, criminal and dangerous one.

    As for impeaching and convicting a President for malfeasance, Article II, Section 4 states it can only be for “treason, bribery, or other high crimes and misdemeanors.” Based on the historical record, it’s near-impossible to do with no President ever having been removed from office this way, and only two were impeached, both unjustly. John Adams, the most distinguished constitutional theorist of his day, said it would take a national convulsion to remove a President by impeachment, which is not to say it won’t ever happen and very likely one day will with no time better than the present to prove it.

    In sum from the above, the US system of constitutional law is full of flaws and faults. “The People” were deliberately and willfully left out of the process proving the Constitution doesn’t recognize democracy in America in spite of the commonly held view it does. In addition, the President, at his own discretion, can usurp dictatorial powers and end republican government by a stroke of his pen. That should awaken everyone to the clear and present danger that any time, for any reason, the President of the United States can declare a state of emergency, suspend the law of the land and rule by decree.

    Constitutional Government in Venezuela

    How does America’s system of government contrast with rule under the 1999 Constitution of the Bolivarian Republic of Venezuela? Hugo Chavez was first elected president in December, 1998 and took office in February, 1999. He then held a national referendum so his people could decide whether to convene a National Constituent Assembly to draft a new constitution to embody his visionary agenda. It passed overwhelmingly followed three months later by elections to the National Assembly to which members of Chavez’s MVR party and those allied with it won 95% of the seats. They then drafted the revolutionary Constitucion de la Republica Bolivariana de Venezuela. It was put to a nationwide vote in December, 1999 and overwhelmingly approved changing everything for the Venezuelan people.

    It established a model humanistic participatory social democracy, unimaginable in the US, providing real (not imagined) checks and balances in the nation’s five branches of government. They comprise the executive, legislative and judicial ones plus two others. One is the independent national electoral council that regulates and handles state and civil society organization electoral procedures to assure they conform to the law requiring free, fair and open elections. The other is a citizen or public power branch functioning as a unique institution. It lets ordinary people serve as ombudsmen to assure the other government branches comply with constitutionally-mandated requirements. This branch includes the attorney general, the defender of the people, and the comptroller general.

    The Legislative Branch

    Venezuela is governed under a unicameral legislative system called the National Assembly. It’s composed of 167 members (compared to 535 in the two US Houses) elected to serve for five years and allowed to run two more times. It differs from the bicameral system in the US but is broadly similar to governments like in the UK. Although it’s bicameral, it’s governed solely by publicly elected members of the House of Commons that includes the Prime Minister and his cabinet as members of Parliament. The upper House of Lords is merely token and advisory, there by tradition like the Queen, with no power to overrule the lower House that runs everything.

    The Office of the President

    The President is elected with a plurality of universally guaranteed suffrage. Article 56 of the Bolivarian Constitution states: “All persons have the right to be registered free of charge with the Civil Registry Office after birth, and to obtain public documents constituting evidence of the biological identity, in accordance with law.” In addition, all Venezuelans are enfranchised to vote under one national standard and are encouraged to do it under a model democratic system with the vast majority in it actively participating.

    In contrast, the US system is quite different. Precise voting rights qualifications are for the states to decide with no constitutionally mandated suffrage standard applying across the board for everyone. The result is many US citizens are denied their franchise right. They’re unable to participate in the electoral process for a variety of reasons no democratic state should tolerate, but America built it into the system by design.

    The Judicial System

    Under Article 2 in The Bolivarian Constitution, the judicial system shares equal importance to the law of the land. But it wasn’t always that way earlier when the Venezuelan judiciary had an odious reputation before Chavez was elected. It had a long history of corruption, a disturbing record of being beholden to political benefactors, and a tradition of failing to provide an adequate system of justice for most Venezuelans. Chavez vowed to change things and undertook a major restructuring effort after taking office. He put this government branch under the Supreme Tribunal of Justice and made it independent of the others. The law now requires those serving be elected by a two-thirds legislative majority (not the previous simple one), and tighter requirements are in place regarding eligible candidates along with public hearings to vet them.

    In addition, to root out long-standing corrupt practices, Chavez created a Judicial Restructuring Commission to review existing judgeships and replace those not fit to serve. Henceforth, all sitting judges with eight or more corruption charges pending are disqualified. It effectively eliminated 80% of those on the bench in short order and showed the extent of malfeasance in the national judicial culture. It also suggested the huge amount throughout the government from generations of institutionalized privilege. Those in power were licensed to steal the country blind and enrich themselves and foreign investors at the expense of the vast majority.

    Reform in all areas of government is still a work in progress, including in the judiciary needing much of it. The process hasn’t been perfect because of the enormity of the task. By the end of 2000, about 70% of sitting judges in the so-called capital region of Caracas, Miranda and Vargas states were replaced by provisional ones with charges of old judges removed for equally beholden new ones. It may be true and points to how hard the going is to change the long-standing culture of privilege and institute real democratic reforms throughout the government.

    Nonetheless, the Constitution established Chavez’s vision for a foundation and legal framework for revolutionary structural change. He’s been working since to transform the nation incrementally into a model participatory social democracy serving all Venezuelans instead of for the privileged few alone the way it traditionally was in the past and how US framers designed American constitutional law. The differences between the two nations couldn’t be more stark.

    The spirit of the Venezuelan Bolivarian Constitution is stated straightaway in its Preamble:….”to establish a democratic, participatory and self-reliant, multiethnic and multicultural society in a just, federal and decentralized State that embodies the values of freedom, independence, peace, solidarity, the common good, the nation’s territorial integrity, comity and the rule of law for this and future generations;”

    It further “guarantees the right to life, work, learning, education, social justice and equality, without discrimination or subordination of any kind; promotes peaceful cooperation among nations and further strengthens Latin American integration in accordance with the principle of nonintervention and national self-determination of the people, the universal and indivisible guarantee of human rights, the democratization of imitational society, nuclear disarmament, ecological balance and environmental resources as the common and inalienable heritage of humanity;……”

    This language would be unimaginable in the US Constitution, and, unlike our federal law, they’re more than words. This is Hugo Chavez’s commitment to all Venezuelans ordained under nine Title headings, 350 Articles, and 18 Temporary Provisions. It’s a first class democratic document, little known in the West, that greatly outclasses and shames what US framers’ enacted for themselves and privileged friends alone. Democracy was nowhere in sight then nor has it shown up since. In Venezuela under Hugo Chavez, it’s resplendent, glorious, still imperfect and a work in progress, but heading in the right direction with newly proposed changes discussed below.

    The contrast with America today couldn’t be greater. The nation under George Bush is ruled by Patriot and Military Commissions Act justice under an institutionalized imperial system of militarized savage capitalism empowering the rich to exploit all others. A state of permanent war exists; civil liberties are disappearing and human rights are a nonstarter; dissent is a crime; social decay is growing; a culture of secrecy and growing fear prevail; torture is practically sanctified; injustice is tolerated; the dominant media function as virtual national thought-control police gatekeepers; and the law is what a boy-emperor president says it is. Aside from the privileged it serves, democracy in America is only in the minds of the bewildered and last of the true-believers who sooner or later will discover the truth.

    Consider Venezuela’s Bolivarian spirit in contrast. The people freely and openly choose their leaders in honest, independently monitored elections. They’re unemcumbered by a farcical electoral college voting scheme (for Presidents) and a system of rigged electronic voting machine and other electoral engineered fraud corrupting the entire process sub rosa. They also have unimaginable benefits like free quality health and dental care (mandated in Articles 83 – 85) as a “fundamental social right and….responsibility of the state….to guarantee….to improve the quality of life and common welfare.” It’s administered through a national public health system proscribed from being privatized. That’s how health delivery in America gets corrupted for profit. The result is 47 million and counting are uninsured, many millions more have too little coverage, and the cost of care is unaffordable for all but the well-off or those on Medicare, Medicaid (if qualify) or under disappearing company-paid plans.

    The Constitution also enacted the principle of participatory democracy from the grassroots for everyone. It’s mandated in Articles 166 and 192 establishing citizen assemblies as a constitutional right for ordinary people to be empowered to participate in governing along with their elected officials. Constitutionally guaranteed rights also ban discrimination; promote gender equity; and insure free speech; a free press; free, fair, and open elections; equal rights for indigenous people (assured a minimum three National Assembly legislative seats); and mandates government make quality free education available for all to the highest levels, as well as housing and an improved social security pension system for seniors, and much more.

    Hugo Chavez brought permanent change, and most Venezuelans won’t tolerate returning to the ugly past. Why should they? They never got these essential social services before. Under a leader who cares, they do now, and their lives improved enormously.

    Other Venezuelan Constitutionally Guaranteed Rights

    The Bolivarian Constitution is a glorious document, fundamentally different in spirit and letter from its US counterpart it shames by comparison. Before Chavez took office in February, 1999, Venezuela only paid lip service to civil liberties, human rights and needs. They’re now mandated by law. It encompasses an impressive array of basic rights and essential services like government-paid health care, education, housing, employment and human dignity enforced and funded by a caring government as the law requires.

    Article 58 in the Constitution also guarantees the right to “timely, true, and impartial” information “without censorship, in accordance with the principles of this constitution.” The opposite is true in America where major media are state propaganda instruments for the privileged.

    Articles 71 – 74 establish four types of popular national referenda never imagined or held in America outside the local or state level where they’re often non-binding. The US is one of only five major democracies never to have permitted this type citizen participation. In Venezuela under Hugo Chavez, the practice is mandated by law and institutionalized to give people at the grass roots a say in running their government. Four types of referenda are allowed:

    –consultative – for a popular, non-binding vote on “national transcendent” issues like trade agreements;

    — recall – applied to all elected officials up to the President;

    — approving – a binding vote to approve laws, constitutional amendments, and treaties relating to national sovereignty; and

    — rescinding – to rescind or change existing laws.

    Referenda can be initiated by the National Assembly, the President, or by petition from 10 – 20% of registered voters, with different procedural requirements applying for each.

    Social, family, cultural, educational and economic rights are guaranteed under Chapters V – VII with the government backing them financially.

    Indigenous Native Peoples’ rights are covered in Chapter VIII. Even environmental rights are addressed with Article 127 stating “It is the right and duty of each generation to protect and maintain the environment for its own benefit and that of the world of the future….The State shall protect the environment, biological and genetic diversity, ecological processes….and other areas of ecological importance.” Try imagining any US federal law with teeth containing this type language let alone the Constitution that includes nothing in its Articles or Amendments.

    Citizen Power gets considerable attention under Articles 273 – 291. It’s exercised by “the Republican Ethics Council, consisting of the People Defender, the General Prosecutor and the General Comptroller of the Republic….Citizen Power is independent and its organs enjoy operating, financial and administrative autonomy.” Citizen Power organs are legally charged with “preventing, investigating and punishing actions that undermine public ethics and administrative morals, to assure lawful sound management of public property….(to help) create citizenship, together with solidarity, freedom, democracy, social responsibility, work” and more.

    Venezuela’s Constitution covers much more as well under each of its nine Titles from:

    — stating its fundamental Bolivarian principles in Title I, to

    — National Security in Title VII,

    — Protection of the Constitution in Title VIII to assure its continuity in the event of “acts of force” or unlawful repeal with each citizen having a duty to reinstate it if that need arises; and finally

    — Constitutional Reforms in Title IX in the form of amendments, other reforms to revise or replace any of its provisions, and the National Constituent Assembly with power “resting with the people of Venezuela.” They’re empowered to call an Assembly to transform the State, create a new “juridical order” and draft a new Constitution to be submitted to a national referendum for the people to accept or reject. That’s how democracy is supposed to work. In Venezuela it does. In the US, it doesn’t, never did, and was never conceived or intended to from the nation’s founding to the present.

    This happens because Americans know painfully little about their law of the land hidden from them in plain view. They’re taught misinformation about it and the framers who drafted it. Few ever read it beyond a quoted line or two and even fewer ever think about it. In contrast, in Venezuela, the Bolivarian Constitution is sold in pocket-sized form almost everywhere. People buy, read and study it. Why? Because it’s a vital unifying part of their lives codifying core democratic values and principles Venezuelan people cherish and wish to keep.

    Prospective Venezuelan Constitutional Reforms

    In July, President Chavez announced he’d be sending the National Assembly a proposal of suggested constitutional reforms to debate and consider. He stressed Venezuelans would then get to vote on them in a national referendum so that “the majority will decide if they approve….constitutional reform.”

    Chavez submitted his proposal in an August 15 address to the National Assembly that will debate and rule on them in three extraordinary sessions over the next 60 to 90 days. Included are amendments to 33 of the Constitution’s 350 articles to “complete the death of the old, hegemonic oligarchy and the old, exploitative capitalist system, and complete the birth of the new state.” Chavez stressed the need to update the 1999 Constitution because it’s “ambiguous (and) a product of that moment. The world (today) is very different from (then). (Reforms now are) essential for continuing the process of revolutionary transition.” They include:

    — extending presidential terms from six to seven years;

    — unlimited reelections (that countries like England, France, Germany and others now allow); Chavez wants the reelection option to be “the sovereign decision of the constituent people of Venezuela;”

    — guaranteeing the right to work and establishing policies to develop and generate productive employment;

    — creation of a Social Stability Fund for “non-dependent” or self-employed workers so they have the same rights as other workers including pensions, paid vacations and prenatal and postnatal leave entitlements;

    — reducing the workday to six hours so businesses would have to employ more workers and hold unemployment down;

    — ending the autonomy of Venezuela’s Central Bank;

    — recognition of different kinds of property defined as social, collective, mixed and private;

    — redefining the role of the military so henceforth “The Bolivarian Armed Forces (will) constitute an essential patriotic, popular and anti-imperialist body organized by the state to guarantee the independence and sovereignty of the nation…;” and

    — guaranteeing state control over the nation’s oil industry to prevent any future privatization of this vital resource;

    Chavez also wants other changes to strengthen the nation’s participatory democracy at the grassroots. He stresses “one of the central ideas is my proposal to open, at the constitutional level, the roads to accelerate the transfer of power to the people” in an “Explosion of Communal (or popular) Power.” It’s already there in more than 26,000 democratically functioning grassroots communal councils. They’re government-sanctioned, funded, operating throughout the country, and may double in number and be strengthened further under proposed constitutional changes.

    Chavez wants “Popular (people) Power” to be a “State Power” along with the Legislature, Executive, Judicial, Citizen and Electoral ones and considers this constitutional change the most important one of all. If it happens, various sovereign powers and duties now handled at the federal, state and municipal levels will be transfered to local communal, worker, campesino, student and other councils. This will strengthen Venezuela’s bedrock participatory democracy making it even more unique and impressive than it already is.

    In America, it’s unimaginable a President or other government officials would recommend “People Power” become our fourth government branch, co-equal with the others, with citizens empowered to vote in national referenda on crucial proposed changes in law.

    Chavez also proposed a “new geometry of power” by amending article 16 that now states “the territory of the nation is divided into those of the States, the Capital District, federal dependencies and federal territories. The territory is organized into Municipalities.” Chavez wants this amended so popular referenda can create “federal districts” in specific areas to serve as states. He called this idea “profoundly revolutionary (and needed) to remove the old oligarchic, exploiter hegemony, the old society, and (quoting Gramsci weaken the former) historic block. If we don’t change the (old) superstructure (it) will defeat us.”

    Chavez also stressed this new structure is needed to be in place when “Venezuela (grows to) 40 – 50 million people.” His plan includes “restructur(ing) Caracas” into a Federal District with more local autonomy, as it was at an earlier time.

    These proposals and other initiatives are part of his overall socialism for the 21st century plan that’s also very business-friendly. Chavez opposes savage capitalism, not private enterprise, and under his stewardship domestic and foreign businesses have thrived. They’re a dominant force powering the economy to accelerated growth since 2003 with latest Central Bank 2nd quarter, 2007 figures coming in at 8.9%. With oil prices high and world economies prospering, this trend is likely to continue. That’s good news for business and households sharing in the benefits through greater purchasing power.

    Chavez wants his new United Socialist Party (PSUV) to drive the revolutionary process and continue his agenda of reform for all Venezuelans. He wants everyone to enjoy the benefits, not just a privileged few like in the past and in the US today. Under his leadership, their future is bright while in America poverty is growing, the middle class is dying, and the darkness of tyranny threatens everyone under George Bush with his agenda likely continuing under a new president in 2009.

    Governance differences exist between these two nations because their constitutional laws are mirror opposite, and America has no one like Hugo Chavez. He’s a rare leader who cares and backs his rhetoric with progressive people-friendly policies. In the US, there’s George Bush, and that pretty much explains the problem. Knowing that, which leader would you choose and under which system of government would you prefer to live?

    Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago and can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

    Also visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com and listen to The Steve Lendman News and Information Hour on TheMicroEffect.com Saturdays at noon US central time.

    Why Rove and Cheney Really Are That Bad

    0

    By Don Williams

    Remember Scott Ritter, the US arms inspector and military man accused of being a traitor and much worse for reporting there were no WMDs in Iraq before we bombed, invaded and occupied? He knows a thing or six about “facts” and the media and exploitation and personal attacks. I don’t believe Ritter’s to the left most media, but he reads its performance the past 5 years the same as I do, and in some ways the same as Lee Iaccoca and many other patriotic Americans who can recognize when they’ve being horn-swaggled.

    Here’s Ritter’s take on Rove and Cheney. We all should consider this POV, especially those who want with all their hearts to believe the war in Iraq is missionary work (and that global warming is simply cyclical, another story). We need to face reality for the good of the country and the world we love.

    Bro Don

    “Why Cheney Really Is That Bad”
    By Scott Ritter

    Karl Rove, interchangeably known as “Boy Genius” or “Turd Blossom,” has left the White House. The press conference announcing his decision to resign has been given front-page treatment by most major media outlets, but the fact of the matter is the buzz surrounding Rove’s departure is much ado about nothing, especially in terms of coming to grips with the remaining 16 months of the worst presidency in the history of the United States.

    Rove is a domestic political marauder, the personification of a conservative movement which lacks a moral compass and has a complete disregard for facts…

    “Bush’s Brain” may claim that it was his careful manipulation of fiction over fact that carried the 2004 election, in which the term became synonymous with political character assassination, but it was the events of Sept. 11, 2001, and the war in Iraq which sank the Democratic Party and its candidate for president, John Kerry. It is very difficult to unseat a president in a time of war, especially when so many Democrats voted in favor of the concept, first by buying into every post-9/11 policy put forward by the Bush administration (find me one Democrat who actually read the Patriot Act in its entirety before it was voted into law) and second by rubber-stamping the lies that led to Bush’s decision to invade Iraq in March 2003.

    The absolute worst of the rot that has infected America because of the policies and actions of the Bush administration has originated from the office of the vice president. The nonsensical response to the terror attacks of 9/11, seeking a “global war” versus defending the rule of law at home and abroad, taking the lead in spreading the lies that got us involved in Iraq, legitimizing torture as a tool of American jurisprudence, advocating for warrantless wiretappings of U.S.-based communications (regardless of what the Fourth Amendment says against illegal search and seizure), and pushing for an expansion of America’s global conflict into Iran–all can be traced back to the person of Cheney as the point of origin.

    America today is very much engaged in a life-or-death struggle against the forces of evil.

    The enemy resides not abroad, however, but at home, vested in the highest offices of the land…

    Read entire article here

    Nazi Death Documents Given to Museums

    0

    By Ed Johnson

    An international body documenting Nazi atrocities against Jews during World War II sent millions of files to Holocaust museums in the U.S. and Israel, as it prepares to open its archive to the public.

    The documents, from more than 50 concentration camps, include transportation lists, medical reports and “death books” detailing those who perished, the International Tracing Service said in a statement yesterday.

    “These documents reflect the most despicable operations of the Nazi era and constitute an essential part of our archive,” said ITS director Reto Meister, after digital copies of 12 million files were sent to the U.S. Holocaust Memorial Museum in Washington and the Yad Vashem memorial in Jerusalem.

    The ITS, managed by the International Committee of the Red Cross, is based in Bad Arolsen, Germany, and documents the Nazi genocide that killed 6 million Jews. The transfer is part of an international agreement to open up the files to the public.

    The body is governed under a treaty signed in 1955 by the U.K., Belgium, France, Germany, Greece, Israel, Italy, the U.S., Luxembourg, the Netherlands and Poland. The countries decided in 2006 to make the archive, which includes 30 million documents, available for research.

    The first batch of files was sent to the U.S. and Israel under embargo and won’t be open to the public until Italy, France and Greece join the other countries in ratifying last year’s agreement, according to the statement.

    ‘US pushing Israel to attack Syria’

    0

    JPOST

    Washington is preventing Israel from making peace with Syria and instead is pushing it to wage war, the Arab country’s government-owned daily Tishrin read on Monday.

    The paper said that recent moves made by the US including supplying Israel with weapons and agreeing to a $30 billion aid-package are methods the country was implementing to push the Jewish state to wage war on Damascus.

    It also accused Israel of threatening the region by holding large-scale army exercises. Israel’s recent military maneuvers not only pointed to the fact that the country refused to make peace with Syria, but also proved that the Jewish state was preparing for war, claimed Tishrin.

    Israel, claimed the paper, is working “around the clock and stages exercises as preparation for the next round of war. It is no secret that declarations of war being tossed freely by Israeli officials against Syria are not just empty statements, but are significant promises regarding Israeli intentions against Syria.”

    Further, the paper stated that “even if Israel is not the direct cause of the tragedies, murders and crimes in our area, [Israel] is indirectly [responsible for them].”

    CIA ‘launches Facebook for spies’

    2

    BBC

    Page from Facebook

    New ways are needed to share information, US officials say

    The CIA is to open a communications tool for its staff, modelled on social networking sites such as Facebook and MySpace, the Financial Times reports. The project, known as A-Space, aims to improve the way that intelligence agents communicate, it said.

    Officials believe that the online workplace will allow staff to better analyse information together.

    However to ease fears of undercover workers having their cover blown, participation will be voluntary.

    Reticent users

    A-Space, due to launch in December, will feature web-based email and software recommending issues of interest to the user said Mike Wertheimer, a senior official at the Department for National Intelligence (DNI).

    He told the FT that the new infrastructures would help break down some of the physical communications problems in the intelligence community.

    “I am unable to send email, and even make secure phone calls, to a good portion of the community from my desktop because of firewalls,” he said.

    He added that while it was understandable that some operatives were reticent about sharing information which could pose a risk, the 9/11 attacks had showed that not pooling data could also cost lives.

    “We are willing to experiment in ways that we have never experimented before,” he said.

    Mr Wertheimer added that while it had looked for collaboration from overseas, foreign intelligence agencies had been “the folks most virulently against” sharing information through an “intelligence library”.

    The DNI already operates a collaborative online encyclopaedia – or wiki – for members of the US intelligence community.

    And earlier this year the CIA used Facebook to advertise job opportunities within the organisation.

    Liberal Democrats launch attack on Brown’s ‘surveillance society’

    0

    By Colin Brown

    Liberal Democrat leaders are to mount an attack on Britain’s “surveillance society” that threatens to wreck Gordon Brown’s hopes of a cross-party consensus on measures to tackle the threat of terrorism.

    In a strategic break with the Prime Minister, Sir Menzies Campbell, the Liberal Democrat leader, and his home affairs spokesman Nick Clegg will launch their offensive at their party conference next month.

    They have decided that Mr Brown’s clear support for an extension of detention without charge beyond 28 days for terrorist suspects has destroyed any hope of a cross-party deal.

    But they claim they are also responding to public anxiety highlighted by the Government’s Information Commissioner, Richard Thomas, who has warned that Britain is in danger of “sleep-walking into a surveillance society”.

    Liberal Democrat leaders say Britain is one of the most spied-on nations in the world and will use the conference to launch a campaign to roll back legislation they claim has gone too far. It includes the Identity Cards Act 2006, the creation of a national identity register and proposals for wide ranging data-sharing powers across Whitehall departments.

    Greater safeguards will be demanded on:

    * The CCTV cameras that have sprouted up in every town and some villages, at a ratio of one for every 16 people, making Britain the most “watched” country on the planet.

    * The DNA database, “the largest in the world”, which has data on 140,000 innocent people, with a disproportionate number from ethnic minorities.

    * The Information Commissioner, who has no power to restrict “data mining” and data processing requests by government agencies and reports to ministers rather than Parliament.

    * Requests for communications traffic data by the police and other investigative authorities which topped 439,000 between January 2005 and April 2006.

    * Intercept warrants, which exceeded 2,240 in the 16 months to April 2006 under laws making the UK alone among democratic nations to have warrants granted by ministers.

    Doctors’ leaders at the BMA have also called on the Government to halt a scheme for GPs to pass on sensitive information about their patients to an NHS database until they have more assurances that they will not breach data protection safeguards.

    Mr Clegg said that the prospect of a cross-party consensus on tougher anti-terror measures was shattered when the Prime Minister decided on an extension of detention without charge for terrorist suspects before consultation had begun.

    “Gordon Brown has gained considerable political advantage by striking a new tone on civil liberties, parliamentary accountability and cross-party cooperation. But our analysis has concluded that on substance, rather than tone, Brown remains wedded to an unchanged Blairite agenda,” said Mr Clegg.

    “Brown has short-circuited any objective consideration of the facts by declaring his determination to extend the period of detention without charge still further.

    “And there has been no meaningful cross-party mechanism established on counter-terrorism despite all the rhetoric to the contrary from Brown himself.”

    He told The Independent: “In these circumstances we have decided to make the protection of traditional British liberties and personal privacy a major line of attack in the autumn and winter. Britain needs a champion of liberty now more than ever.”

    The campaign will also attack the Tory leadership of David Cameron, saying that his claims to liberalism are unravelling.

    Where we are watched

    * CCTV

    Britain is the world’s most watched nation. There are 4.2 million CCTV cameras, one for every 16 people. Campaigners say they are “inadequately regulated”.

    * DNA data

    The UK holds 3.6 million samples, the world’s biggest database, including 140,000 innocent people.

    * Data Protection

    Surveillance on credit cards, mobile phones and loyalty cards, and US security agencies monitoring telecommunications, require the Data Protection Act to be updated.

    * Schools

    Many are collecting pupils’ biometric data, often without parental consent.

    * ID Cards

    The Identity Cards Act 2006 paved the way for the creation of a National Identity Register and proposals for sharing data within government.

    * Bugging

    From 1 January 2005 to 31 March 2006, there were 439,000 requests for communications traffic data and 2,243 warrants issued. UK is alone among democracies in having warrants issued by ministers.

    Judge Orders Bush Administration to Issue Global Warming Report

    1

    By Karen Gullo

    The Bush administration violated U.S. law by failing to produce a study on the impact of global warming and must issue a summary by March, a federal judge ruled.

    District Judge Saundra Armstrong in Oakland, California, said the U.S. government “unlawfully withheld action” required under the Global Change Research Act of 1990 to update a research plan and scientific assessment of climate change.

    The law mandates the research plan should be revised every three years and the assessment every four years. The last research plan was in 2003 and the last assessment was published in 2000. Greenpeace International and two other environmental groups who say the U.S. government suppresses science on climate change sued in November seeking a court order to produce the reports.

    “As the research plan is now more than a year overdue, the court orders that a summary of the revised proposed research plan be published in the Federal Register no later than March 1,” Armstrong said in the order today. The scientific assessment must be produced by May 31, she said.

    The administration will review the ruling before commenting, said White House spokeswoman Dana Perino. Calls to the U.S. Climate Change Science Program and Martin LaLonde, a Justice Department attorney involved in the case, weren’t immediately returned.

    President George W. Bush, citing economic reasons, in March 2001 rejected the Kyoto Protocol, a treaty among industrialized nations that would have required cuts in carbon dioxide emissions and other gases linked to global warming.

    Government `Wrong’

    The Bush administration said in court filings that it determined “only recently that the initiation of a process to revise the research plan has become necessary and advisable” and that the government has discretion about how to handle the revised reports, which Armstrong said was “wrong.”

    The reports may be completed by the end of the year, government lawyers said in court filings.

    “This is the first court order specifically rebuking the Bush administration for suppressing climate change science,” said Matthew Vespa, an attorney at the Center for Biological Diversity, one of the groups that sued. “The report will provide updated information that all federal agencies will have to look at when assessing the impact of climate change.”

    The case is Center for Biological Diversity v. Brennan, 06-7062, U.S. District Court, for the Northern District of California (San Francisco).

    Psychologists in denial about torture

    0

    By Amy Goodman

    This weekend, the American Psychological Association rejected a moratorium that would have prevented its member psychologists from participating in interrogations at U.S. detention centers at places like Guantanamo Bay, Cuba, and secret CIA “black sites” around the world.

    Instead, the 148,000-member organization passed a resolution at its annual meeting in San Francisco banning psychologists from participating in interrogations that employ certain harsh techniques. Many psychologists within the APA feel the resolution did not go far enough.

    The issue of torture and interrogations has become a sore spot for the APA, the world’s largest group of psychologists. The American Medical Association and the American Psychiatric Association both outright prohibit their members from participating in interrogations at locations where basic human rights are not guaranteed, like Guantanamo. These groups have been joined by others, like the American Translators Association and the Society for Ethnomusicology (since translation is essential in interrogations, and sustained, blaring music has been used as a form of torture).

    Central to the debate is the question, Are psychologists participating in torture? While the Bush administration repeatedly denies that it uses torture, a leaked report of the International Committee of the Red Cross says certain U.S. methods used are “tantamount to torture.”

    At a fiery APA town-hall meeting after the vote, Dr. Steven Reisner, one of the leading proponents of a moratorium, asked, “I want to know if passing this resolution prohibits psychologists from being involved in the enhanced interrogation techniques that the president of the United States authorized can take place at CIA black sites.”

    Defenders of the APA’s position are clear: Psychologists need to be present at these interrogations to protect the prisoners, to ensure that the interrogators do not go over the line. Critics argue that psychologists are there to help interrogators push the line further and further, to consult with the interrogators on how best to break the prisoners.

    Dr. Jeffrey Kaye, a psychologist with Survivors International, a torture survivors group, says there is a loophole: Psychologists cannot participate in harsh interrogations, but they can participate in harsh detention conditions. He said: “You see, they don’t use sleep deprivation while they’re interrogating you, they use it before they interrogate you, as part of the conditions of detention, to soften you up for the interrogation. So the winner today, and I’m sure their lawyers are very happy, is the CIA.”

    As the convention began, Anthony Romero of the American Civil Liberties Union issued a letter to the APA, urging a moratorium, warning that psychologists faced legal liability or even prosecution. “We have found troubling evidence of the collusion of medical psychologists in the development and implementation of procedures intended to inflict psychological harm on prisoners at Guantanamo Bay and other facilities.”

    In a surreal moment at the opening APA session on Ethics and Interrogations, a Pentagon interrogator, “Dr. Katherine Sherwood” (she appeared to be using a pseudonym), wanted the audience to know that the interrogations were conducted professionally.

    She said she was denied access to prisoner medical records: “I like to bake at home for the detainees and bring home-baked goods to our sessions. I needed to know whether or not a detainee had a peanut allergy, and that could be very serious. There was a process in place where … the liaison could ask the medical personnel, and they could choose whether or not to give a response.”

    Her baking gives new meaning to the term BSCT psychologists (pronounced biscuit), which stands for Behavioral Science Consultation Team. They were the psychologists who helped develop the harsh interrogation techniques, and who the International Committee of the Red Cross report said conveyed information about detainee “mental health and vulnerabilities,” to help break them down psychologically.

    Romero’s ACLU letter ended by saying: “The history of torture is inexorably linked to the misuse of scientific and medical knowledge. As we move fully into the 21st century, it is no longer enough to denounce or to speak out against torture; rather, we must sever the connection between healers and tormentors once and for all. As guardians of the mind, psychologists are duty bound to promote the humane treatment of all people.”

    Former Chief of NIST’s Fire Science Division Calls for Independent Review of World Trade Center Investigation

    0

    By Alan Miller


    James Quintiere, Ph.D.

    James Quintiere, Ph.D., former Chief of the Fire Science Division of the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), has called for an independent review of NIST’s investigation into the collapses of the World Trade Center Towers on 9/11.

    Dr. Quintiere made his plea during his presentation, “Questions on the WTC Investigations” at the 2007 World Fire Safety Conference. “I wish that there would be a peer review of this,” he said, referring to the NIST investigation. “I think all the records that NIST has assembled should be archived. I would really like to see someone else take a look at what they’ve done; both structurally and from a fire point of view.”

    “I think the official conclusion that NIST arrived at is questionable,” explained Dr. Quintiere. “Let’s look at real alternatives that might have been the cause of the collapse of the World Trade Towers and how that relates to the official cause and what’s the significance of one cause versus another.”

    Dr. Quintiere, one of the world’s leading fire science researchers and safety engineers, also encouraged his audience of fellow researchers and engineers to scientifically re-examine the WTC collapses. “I hope to convince you to perhaps become ‘Conspiracy Theorists’, but in a proper way,” he said.

    In his hour-long presentation, Dr. Quintiere discussed many elements of NIST’s investigation that he found problematic. He emphasized, “In every investigation I’ve taken part in, the key has been to establish a timeline. And the timeline is established by witness accounts, by information from alarm systems, by any video that you might have of the event, and then by calculations. And you try to put all of this together. And if your calculations are consistent with some of these hard facts, then perhaps you can have some comfort in the results of your calculations. I have not seen a timeline placed in the NIST report.”

    Dr. Quintiere also expressed his frustration at NIST’s failure to provide a report on the third skyscraper that collapsed on 9/11, World Trade Center Building 7. “And that building was not hit by anything,” noted Dr. Quintiere. “It’s more important to take a look at that. Maybe there was damage by the debris falling down that played a significant role. But other than that you had fires burning a long time without fire department intervention. And firefighters were in that building. I have yet to see any kind of story about what they saw. What was burning? Were photographs taken? Nothing!”

    World Trade Center Building 7 was 610 feet tall, 47 stories, and would have been the tallest building in 33 states. Although it was not hit by an airplane on 9/11, it completely collapsed into a pile of rubble in less than 8 seconds at 5:20 p.m. on 9/11. In the 6 years since 9/11, NIST has failed to provide any explanation for the collapse. In addition to NIST’s failure to provide an explanation, absolutely no mention of Building 7’s collapse appears in the 9/11 Commission’s “full and complete account of the circumstances surrounding the September 11, 2001 terrorist attacks.” [To watch a video of the collapse, click here http://www.whatreallyhappened.com/IMAGES/WTC7_Collapse.wmv ]

    Dr. Quintiere said he originally “had high hopes” that NIST would do a good job with the investigation. “They’re the central government lab for fire. There are good people there and they can do a good job. But what I also thought they would do is to enlist the service of the ATF [Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco, Firearms and Explosives], which has an investigation force and a laboratory of their own for fire. And I thought they would put people out on the street and get gumshoe-type information. What prevented all of this? I think it’s the legal structure that cloaks the Commerce Department and therefore NIST. And so, instead of lawyers as if they were acting on a civil case trying to get depositions and information subpoenaed, those lawyers did the opposite and blocked everything.”

    In his presentation, Dr. Quintiere also criticized NIST’s repeated failures to formally respond to serious questions raised about its conclusions regarding the WTC building collapses and the process it employed to arrive at those conclusions. “I sat through all of the NIST hearings. I went to all of their advisory board meetings, as an observer. I made comments at all.”

    Responding to a comment from a NIST representative in the audience, Dr. Quintiere said, “I found that throughout your whole investigation it was very difficult to get a clear answer. And when anyone went to your advisory panel meetings or hearings, where they were given five minutes to make a statement; they could never ask any questions. And with all the commentary that I put in, and I spent many hours writing things, and it would bore people if I regurgitated all of that here, I never received one formal reply.”

    Although Dr. Quintiere was strongly critical of NIST’s conclusions and its investigatory process, he made it clear he was not a supporter of theories that the Twin Towers were brought down by pre-planted explosives. “If you go to World Trade Center One, nine minutes before its collapse, there was a line of smoke that puffed out. This is one of the basis of the ‘conspiracy theories’ that says the smoke puffing out all around the building is due to somebody setting off an explosive charge. Well, I think, more likely, it’s one of the floors falling down.”

    Dr. Quintiere summarized the NIST conclusion about the cause of the collapses of the Twin Towers. “It says that the core columns, uninsulated due to the fact that the aircraft stripped off that insulation; they softened in the heat of the fire and shortened and that led to the collapse. They pulled in the external columns and it caused it to buckle. They went on further to say that there would be no collapse if the insulation remained in place.”

    Dr. Quintiere then presented his and his students’ research that contradicts the NIST report and points to a different cause for the collapses; the application of insufficient fire-proofing insulation on the truss rods in the Twin Towers. “I suggest that there’s an equally justifiable theory and that’s the trusses fail as they are heated by the fire with the insulation intact. These are two different conclusions and the accountability for each is dramatically different,” he said.

    Dr. Quintiere’s presentation at the World Fire Safety Conference echoed his earlier statement to the U.S. House of Representatives, Committee on Science, on October 26, 2005, during a hearing on “The Investigation of the World Trade Center Collapse: Findings, Recommendations, and Next Steps”, at which he stated:

    “In my opinion, the WTC investigation by NIST falls short of expectations by not definitively finding cause, by not sufficiently linking recommendations of specificity to cause, by not fully invoking all of their authority to seek facts in the investigation, and by the guidance of government lawyers to deter rather than develop fact finding.

    “I have over 35 years of fire research in my experience. I worked in the fire program at NIST for 19 years, leaving as a division chief. I have been at the University of Maryland since. I am a founding member and past-Chair of the International Association for Fire Safety Science–the principal world forum for fire research. …

    “All of these have been submitted to NIST, but never acknowledged or answered. I will list some of these.

    1. Why is not the design process of assigning fire protection to the WTC towers fully called out for fault? …

    2. Why were not alternative collapse hypotheses investigated and discussed as NIST had stated repeatedly that they would do? …

    3. Spoliation of a fire scene is a basis for destroying a legal case in an investigation. Most of the steel was discarded, although the key elements of the core steel were demographically labeled. A careful reading of the NIST report shows that they have no evidence that the temperatures they predict as necessary for failure are corroborated by findings of the little steel debris they have. Why hasn’t NIST declared that this spoliation of the steel was a gross error?

    4. NIST used computer models that they said have never been used in such an application before and are the state of the art. For this they should be commended for their skill. But the validation of these modeling results is in question. Others have computed aspects with different conclusions on the cause mechanism of the collapse. Moreover, it is common in fire investigation to compute a time-line and compare it to known events. NIST has not done that.

    5. Testing by NIST has been inconclusive. Although they have done fire tests of the scale of several work stations, a replicate test of at least & [sic] of a WTC floor would have been of considerable value. Why was this not done? …

    6. The critical collapse of WTC 7 is relegated to a secondary role, as its findings will not be complete for yet another year. It was clear at the last NIST Advisory Panel meeting in September [2005] that this date may not be realistic, as NIST has not demonstrated progress here. Why has NIST dragged on this important investigation?”

    [The full text of Dr. Quintiere’s statement to the Science Committee can be found at http://commdocs.house.gov/committees/science/hsy24133.000/hsy24133_0f.htm ]

    Dr. Quintiere is one of the world’s leading fire science researchers and safety engineers. He served in the Fire Science and Engineering Division of NIST for 19 years and rose to the position of Chief of the Division. He left NIST in 1990 to join the faculty of the Department of Fire Protection Engineering at the University of Maryland, where he still serves.

    Quintiere is a founding member and Past Chair of the International Association for Fire Safety Science (IAFSS). He is also a Fellow of the Society of Fire Protection Engineering and a Fellow of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. He has received numerous awards for his contributions to fire science research and engineering, including:

    · The Department of Commerce Bronze Medal (1976) and Silver Medal (1982)

    · The Howard W. Emmons Lecture Award from the IAFSS in 1986

    · The Sjölin Award in 2002 for outstanding contribution to the science of fire safety by the International Forum of Fire Research Directors, NIST

    · The 2006 Guise Medal by the National Fire Protection Association

    His presentation “Questions on the WTC Investigations” was given twice at the 2007 World Fire Safety Conference; Education Session M21 on June 4 (69 minutes) and Spotlight Session T54 on June 5 (102 minutes). Recordings of the presentations can be purchased from the National Fire Protection Association at http://www.fleetwoodonsite.com/index.php?cPath=21_22&sort=2a&page=7&osCsid=04863b41ce2195a3ebc57ec492fa21e3

    For a list of over 180 other engineers and architects who question the official investigation into the events of 9/11, please visit http://PatriotsQuestion911.com

    CIA blew chances to spot 9/11 threat, says report

    1

    · Information on hijackers kept from key personnel
    · Former director George Tenet criticised for failings

    Ed Pilkington in New York
    Wednesday August 22, 2007
    The Guardian

    George Tenet
    George Tenet. Photograph: Mark Wilson/Getty
     

    As many as 60 people within the CIA read a cable referring to two of the 19 hijackers involved in the attacks on America on September 11 2001 before the event, yet the information was not shared with the parts of the organisation able to do anything about it, according to the agency’s own internal investigation.The revelation is one of several damning findings from the CIA’s own watchdog, the inspector general, drawn up in June 2005. He accuses the CIA’s top officials in the run-up to 9/11, including the then director, George Tenet, of failure to devise a strategic plan to counter Osama bin Laden in advance of the attacks.

    A 19-page summary of the inspector’s report was published yesterday under a new congressional law passed earlier this month, having been kept secret since it was written. It underlines the depth of infighting between the CIA and the National Security Agency which prevented clear lines of responsibility in the fight against al-Qaida.

    Though the report found no evidence of misconduct or illegality, it bluntly stated that CIA officers “did not discharge their responsibilities in a satisfactory manner”. The inspector, John Helgerson, went as far as to recommend further panels of inquiry into the conduct of key individuals within the agency to see whether disciplinary action should be taken against them.

    Mr Helgerson said that the actions of Mr Tenet, his number two, Jim Pavitt, and the head of the counterterrorism operation, Cofer Black, should all be put under scrutiny. However, the summary reveals that the CIA director at the time of the inspector’s report, Porter Goss, ruled out any further action. In a statement accompanying the declassified summary, the current director, Michael Hayden, said he agreed with his predecessor that no reprimands were called for.

    The 2005 internal inquiry concludes that there was no single point of failure or “silver bullet” that would have allowed the CIA to predict or prevent the attacks of 9/11. But if systems had been in place to share and analyse critical information that could have led to a more informed assessment of the threat in the lead up to the assault.

    The most direct accusation was that information on the hijackers was widely reviewed before 9/11 but was not followed up. “That so many individuals failed to act in this case reflects a systematic breakdown. There was no coherent, functioning watch-listing programme,” the summary says.

    Though the failings of the CIA in the run-up to the attacks on New York and Washington have been publicly examined by several congressional inquiries and the September 11 commission, the latest report gives a more stinging assessment than any previous account of the inadequate responses of individuals. Mr Tenet is singled out for particular criticism.




    Full text
    13.04.2006: United 93, full transcript
    22.07.04: 9/11 Commission report (pdf)
    24.07.03: Report by House and Senate intelligence committees (pdf)

    Local ID Cards would be another move towards a ‘database state’

    0

    New Labour think tank, the New Local Government Network, today calls for ID cards to be introduced and policed by town halls. Conservatives have attacked the proposals as another move towards a ‘database state’ and warned they could be used to increase taxes by stealth — through municipal fines for non-compliance and non-registration.

    Eric Pickles, Shadow Secretary of State for Local Government, said:

    “There is growing concern about Labour’s use of invasive ‘Big Brother’ computer technology — such as the council tax revaluation database and secret microchips in wheelie bins. Local residents will be even more alarmed that Labour think tanks are now lobbying for local bureaucrats to introduce and police expensive ID cards.

    “Councils should get on with their job of emptying the rubbish and cleaning the streets, rather than helping the Government with its plans for a database state.

    “The costs of such expensive IT scheme would inevitably force up council tax, and local residents could face a further stealth tax of penalty fines for not notifying officials of a change of name or address.”

    http://www.conservatives.com/tile.do?def=news.press.release.page&obj_id=138061

    Ian Brown – Illegal Attacks

    0

    (Feat. Sinead O’connor)

    So what the fuck is this UK
    Gunnin’ with this US of A
    In Iraq and Iran and in Afghanistan

    Does not a day go by
    Without the Israeli Air Force
    Fail to drop it’s bombs from the sky?

    How many mothers to cry?
    How many sons have to die?
    How many missions left to fly over Palestine?
    ‘Cause as a matter of facts
    It’s a pact, it’s an act
    These are illegal attacks
    So bring the soldiers back
    These are illegal attacks
    It’s contracts for contacts
    I’m singing concrete facts
    So bring the soldiers back

    What mean ya that you beat my people
    What mean ya that you beat my people
    And grind the faces of the poor

    So tell me just how come were the Taliban
    Sat burning incense in Texas
    Roaming round in a Lexus
    Sittin’ on six billion oil drums
    Down with the Dow Jones, up on the Nasdaq
    Pushed into the war zones

    It’s a commercial crusade
    ‘Cause all the oil men get paid
    And only so many soldiers come home
    It’s a commando crusade
    A military charade
    And only so many soldiers come home

    Soldiers, soldiers come home
    Soldiers come home

    Through all the blood and sweat
    Nobody can forget
    It ain’t the size of the dog in the fight
    It’s the size of the fight in the dog on the day or the night
    There’s no time to reflect
    On the threat, the situation, the bark nor the bite
    These are commercial crusades
    ‘Cos all the oil men get paid
    These are commando crusades
    Commando tactical rape
    And from the streets of New York and Baghdad to Tehran and Tel Aviv
    Bring forth the prophets of the Lord
    From dirty bastards fillin’ pockets
    With the profits of greed

    These are commercial crusades
    Commando tactical raids
    Playin’ military charades to get paid

    And who got the devils?
    And who got the Lords?
    Build yourself a mountain — Drink up in the fountain
    Soldiers come home
    Soldiers come home
    Soldiers come home
    Soldiers come home

    What mean ya that you beat my people
    What mean ya that you beat my people
    And grind the faces of the poor

    Top US lawmaker threatens contempt proceedings against Bush administration officials

    1

    AP

    A top Senate Democrat on Monday threatened to hold members of the Bush administration in contempt for not producing subpoenaed information about the legal justification for President George W, Bush’s secretive wiretapping program.

    “When the Senate comes back in the session, I’ll bring it up before the committee,” said Sen. Patrick Leahy, chairman of the Senate Judiciary Committee. “I prefer cooperation to contempt. Right now, there’s no question that they are in contempt of the valid order of the Congress.”

    Leahy’s committee on June 27 subpoenaed the Justice Department, National Security Council and the offices of the president and vice president for documents relating to the National Security Agency’s legal justification for the wiretapping program.

    Since taking over the House and the Senate in January from Bush’s Republicans, Democrats have pressed a series of investigations into administration operations arguing that when the Republicans were in charge they rarely probed activities at the White House. In the United States, Congress, the legislative branch, is supposed to serve as a check on the executive branch.

    White House lawyer Fred Fielding, in a Monday letter to Leahy, said that the administration needed more time.

    “A core set of highly sensitive national security and related documents we have so far identified are potentially subject to claims of executive privilege and that a more complete collection and review of all materials responsive to the subpoenas will require additional time,” Fielding said.

    The White House said it was not looking for a conflict with Congress over FISA.

    “Extending and modernizing FISA is critical to our national security, and our intelligence professionals consider it imperative that we do not weaken the tools they feel are necessary to protect America’s national security interests,” White House spokesman Tony Fratto said.

    Leahy said they had waited long enough.

    “It has been almost two months since service of the subpoenas, three weeks since the time they asked for additional time. And still, we have nothing at all,” Leahy said.

    Leahy also questioned whether the Senate would again reauthorize laws that expand the government’s authority to spy on foreigners without the subpoenaed information.

    Congress, before it left for its August recess, approved an update to the 1978 Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Act, allowing the government to eavesdrop on terror suspects overseas without first getting a court warrant.

    The overhaul was the result of a recent Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Court ruling that banned eavesdropping on foreigners when their messages were routed though communications carriers based in the United States.

    The provisions expire after six months, but the White House wants them made permanent.

    “For Congress to legislate effectively in this area, it has to have full information about the executive branch’s interpretations of FISA,” Leahy said. “We cannot, and certainly, we should not legislate in the dark, where the administration hides behind a fictitious veil of secrecy.”

    Leahy also indicated that the committee would continue to seek recently resigned White House adviser Karl Rove’s appearance on the U.S. attorney firings.

    Fielding has said Bush would invoke executive privilege to keep Rove from answering questions or submitting documents to Senate Judiciary Committee. The committee has been investigating whether the White House ordered the prosecutor firings in ways that might help Republicans in elections.

    “I don’t think he had a valid claim of executive privilege, because all the testimony has been it wasn’t discussed with the president. If it wasn’t discussed with the president, there’s no executive privilege,” Leahy said. “And they’ve just lost the other claim they could make that he’s too important to the operation of the White House to be able to take time to testify. That’s not going to be the case anymore.”

    Shock toll of British injured in Afghan war

    0

    · Half of frontline troops ‘patched-up’
    · Senior officers fear exodus

    Mark Townsend, defence correspondent
    Sunday August 19, 2007
    The Observer

    A British soldier patrols in poppy fields in Sangin, a district Helmand province, Afghanistan
    A British soldier patrols in poppy fields in Sangin, a district Helmand province, Afghanistan. Photograph: Rafiq Maqbool/AP
     

    The human cost of the war in Afghanistan to British soldiers can be revealed today as figures show that almost half of frontline troops have required significant medical treatment during this summer’s fighting.In a graphic illustration of the intensity of the conflict in Helmand province, more than 700 battlefield soldiers have needed treatment since April – nearly half of the 1,500 on the front line. The figures, obtained from senior military sources, have never been released by the government, which has faced criticism that it has covered up the true extent of injuries sustained during the conflict.

    The Ministry of Defence releases the number of soldiers taken to hospital, a fraction of those who require treatment on the battlefield. The new figures relate to the number of soldiers patched up and sent back to the front line and who do not appear in official casualty reports.

    By contrast, US official figures take into account soldiers treated on the front line. In their figures, wounded troops include those away from the front line for 72 hours or more.

    One British army official said the 700 cases include a ‘handful’ of officers who suffered injuries and chose to carry on fighting. The injuries include shrapnel wounds, cuts, burns, acute heat stroke and diseases such as ‘DnV’ – diarrhoea and vomiting that can incapacitate a man for days. Of the 700 cases, 400 combat troops were described as being so ill they were forced to ‘lay down their bayonets’.

    The number of soldiers requiring front-line treatment was discussed at military briefings in Helmand during intensive fighting this month and relate to the current deployment, which began in April. An army spokesman said official casualty figures between April and the start of August stood at 204, with about half stemming from the battlefield.

    Military sources said the willingness of soldiers to carry on fighting while suffering was indicative of the bravery being routinely displayed.

    ‘The courage of the soldiers has been remarkable. Many are getting patched up and just want to get on with it. Most do not want to leave their comrades,’ said the source in Helmand. Last week, details were released about how 26-year-old Captain David Hicks, of the 1st Battalion Royal Anglian Regiment, refused morphine after being mortally wounded by shrapnel so he could keep a clear head to lead his men. He later died of his injuries.

    The MoD said the figures should not be confused with its published ‘casualty’ figures, claiming that cases treated by frontline medics often related to minor ailments and complaints that were not considered life-threatening or serious. The spokeswoman went on to say that, in serious cases, troops were not given the option to carry on fighting.

    However, the number of serious injuries is rising. A spokesman for the British Limbless Ex-Service Men’s Association said that 27 British soldiers had lost limbs serving in Afghanistan and Iraq during the past 12 months.

    The frenetic nature of the conflict in southern Afghanistan is underlined by the fact that many young infantrymen intend to leave the army because the firefights they have survived in Helmand could never be surpassed. In terms of soldiering, the conflict has offered some of the most intense fighting for 50 years, with two million rounds of ammunition so far fired by British forces.

    ‘You could be in the army for decades and you will never get anything like that again. Will it be bettered? I can’t see it,’ said one soldier. Commanders are understood to be concerned that the Helmand conflict could precipitate an exodus of combat troops who feel military life will never offer the same challenge again.

    Campaigners have frequently argued that British troops are paying a higher price on the battlefield than has been made public. Casualty figures are expected to rise in the coming months as the current tour, from April to October, finishes, when regiments that have experienced the brunt of fighting push on to gain ground before they leave.

    Lily Allen slams George Bush at gig

    1

    ANI

    Pop star Lily Allen has slammed US President George W. Bush during her gig at England’s V Festival.

    Hitting out at Bush and immigration officials, the 21-year-old, whose US Visa was revoked at the country’ airport, said that they are people who are ‘awkward on the train’.

    The ‘Smile singer’ also slammed fashion magazines for making ladies feel awful and insisted that all women are beautiful, adding that it’s the heroin addict models who have to worry.

    “This next one is about people who are awkward on the train, U.S. immigration officials and George Bush in general.” Contactmusic quoted Allen, as saying.,

    “Who else can f**k off? People who edit fashion magazines… that makes us ladies feel awful. We’re all beautiful – it’s the heroin addict models who’ve got the problem,” she added.

    Bush is delivering Depleted Uranium to us all

    0

    By John Blacker

    Want to know why there are so many terrorists and who is arming them with Depleted Uranium WMDs to drop in our water, our air & poison our cities and kill our children – then check out this short article below, it tells you who & why without actually needing to give any specific details.    

    http://omega.twoday.net/stories/4177253/

    Its like this folks – what goes around – comes around.

    Well, how do you make a DU WMD?

    1 – go out to the desert near your home and collect the sand in and around any burned out tank.

    2 – put said sand in a plastic bag and tie it up.

    3 – put the sand in the environment of your enemy infidel.

    4 – Pray the infidel breathes just one whiff of your unholy sand and ingests the nanoparticles there within.

    5 – Do the same over and over and over and over until the enemy infidel has taken back all the unholy particles they deposited on you and your wife and children.

    Yes that is right folks – BUSH is killing your future by killing their future with Illegal Depleted Uranium tipped WMDs. Using DP is a well documented war crime – the radiation count is massive and the half life is 4.5 BILLION years (BILLION) – check it out.

    And do you know what the best bit is, the prevailing winds will dump the radioactive highly toxic sand all over us in the UK and Eastern USA even if the terrorists do nothing but prey to god for an average windy day.

    Now that is what I call holly Justice – lets hope it falls on Bush’s Ranch first.

    Kind regards

    J A Blacker MSc IMI (Physical Systems) (Lancaster England) [the home of Electrogravity Propulsion]

    PS: If you want to know how you can best protect yourself & your family from Cancer via small additions to your diet then email me and I will let you know what and how it works – other wise, goodbye.

    People of Canada Protests Bush Visit‎

    0

    By Andrew Thomson

    A loud, but peaceful, crowd gathered Sunday on Parliament Hill to oppose talks on continental integration while anarchists claimed responsibility for weekend vandalism against Ottawa businesses connected to the Security and Prosperity Partnership.

    Between 1,000 to 2,000 demonstrators – guarded by a sizable police presence – got a head start on the North American leaders’ summit, which begins Monday in Montebello, Que. with meetings between Stephen Harper, George W. Bush, and Felipe Calderon.

    The nascent partnership plan, which seeks to harmonize certain security and regulatory protocols between the three countries, is expected to figure prominently on the agenda.

    “Rallies at Parliament Hill are notoriously difficult to draw large crowds and I was impressed … because there were events happening in so many other centres,” Green Party Leader Elizabeth May said.

    She cited no-fly lists as one example of an “Orwellian” chill forming over North America.

    “This is a very anti-democratic process,” May said. “Mr. Harper, as a minority prime minister, has no business giving away the sovereignty of Canada in these negotiations.”

    Ottawa police and RCMP officers, buoyed by memories of protests during the G20 finance minister’s summit in November 2001 and the G8 in the summer of 2002, fanned out across downtown well beforehand. They were reinforced by Toronto, York, and Peel police units.

    The Centennial Flame was covered by steel fencing and green tarp as a safety precaution. Public access to Parliament Hill was limited to the front lawn and steps, with officers and their video cameras and binoculars perched atop the Centre and East Blocks.

    “This is a family-friendly, peaceful demonstration and I would ask that everyone respect these parameters,” demonstration organizer Celeste Cete told the crowd before marching on the Mexican and U.S. embassies.

    Three men were arrested: a 21-year-old male charged with carrying a concealed knife, a 17-year-old young offender seized on an unrelated outstanding arrest warrant, and a 16-year-old charged with mischief for allegedly painting graffiti on the pavement during the march.

    The protest line snaked along downtown streets before swinging around the U.S. Embassy to Parliament Hill.

    Police escorts led the way on foot, bicycle, and motorcycle. Dozens of RCMP, Ottawa, and Toronto officers stood behind reinforced barricades outside the embassy as the demonstrators marched past curious tourists and Sunday market shoppers.

    One group, mostly dressed in black with bandannas and balaclavas, left the main march and were carefully watched by authorities the entire time.

    Postings to an anarchist website had detailed a series of attacks Saturday morning against Ottawa businesses associated with the North American Competitiveness Council, a corporate advisory group attached to the SPP.

    Windows were smashed at the Bell Canada building, according to the anonymous authors. At two Scotiabank branches, the door locks were glued and the entrance walls were spray painted and paint bombed.

    Ottawa police said no such incidents had been brought to their attention yet.

    Sunday’s protest was serene by comparison; dogs and baby strollers were far more common than broken windows or tear gas pellets, the fear of police and downtown business owners.

    The diverse crowd ranged from organized labour and the Council of Canadians to environmentalists, communists, and the Raging Grannies. Demonstrators were from as far afield as southern Ontario, Quebec, Vancouver, and Mexico.

    A supportive message was read from 93-year-old William Commanda, senior elder of the Algonquin Nation of the Kitigan Zibi Anishinabeg. The in-person speakers included Council of Canadians chairwoman Maude Barlow and Chris Jones of the Canadian Peace Alliance, who called the SPP talks “horrible, incestuous negotiations.”

    Kyle McQueston, 22, rode his bike three-and-a-half days from Toronto to demonstrate.

    “The secrecy, the lies, the undemocratic approach,” the student and environmental activist said when asked about problems with the SPP.

    A separate group of demonstrators started their “Bike to Bush” mission, a 71-kilometre ride from Gatineau, Que. to Montebello.

    Two designated protest areas, each able to hold about 2,000 people, have been cleared near the Chateau Montebello. A video feed will beam the demonstrations inside for summit participants.

    Protest flotillas are also planned on the Ottawa River with Gaetan Menard, secretary-treasurer of the Communications, Energy and Paperworkers Union of Canada, among those slated to pass the hotel compound on his own five-metre boat.

    The City of Ottawa has cautioned residents to expect delays over the next two days, especially downtown. There were going to be some street closures during the summit and outdoor mailboxes downtown have been removed until Wednesday morning.

    Airspace restrictions are also scheduled at the Ottawa airport both days as Bush arrives and departs. In Montebello, truck traffic on Hwy. 148 is being re-routed into Ontario.

    Ottawa Citizen

    BUSH TERROR weapons – Murders untold civilians, many children – states Doctor

    0



    The idea that the U.S. could be considering classifying the Iranian Revolutionary Guard as a “terrorist” organization, based upon some dubious evidence that the organization is supplying some weapons — in particular those shaped charges that have been so effective in roadside bombs against U.S. military vehicles — is pretty preposterous when you consider the source.

    Whatever the truth about the activities of the Iranians, certainly when it comes to terror, the U.S. is unrivaled in the world today.

    By the latest estimate, over 1 million people have died in Iraq because of the American invasion of that country, and despite a virtual media blackout over that entire country and the self-censorship practiced by the U.S. media regarding Iraq, more and more evidence keeps trickling out that the vast majority of those deaths have been caused, directly or indirectly, by the American forces. While we read in lurid detail about every bomb blast detonated by Shia and Sunni fighters that hit Iraqis or that kill or wound Americans, we hear barely a word about the killing of Iraqi civilians by U.S. forces, and it’s clear that adding up all of those publicized Iraqi-on-Iraqi attacks, you don’t come close to a million dead. Guess who’s killing the rest?

    Nor are we getting any figures on the numbers of dead innocents in Afghanistan, where the blackout on reporting is even more effective than in Iraq.

    What is clear is that American tactics are causing an unending slaughter in both places — clearly not just part of but central to the policy, and that is so serious that it has led to protests from Britain and other NATO countries that have soldiers in Afghanistan.

    And let’s be honest: this is no matter of “collateral damage.” It is a deliberate policy of terror. As I’ve written before, when your army is killing vastly more civilians than enemy fighters, the deaths of innocents cannot be termed “collateral damage.” The deaths of enemy fighters are the “collateral damage.” The innocents are the targets.

    Just consider one of the weapons being used by American forces, the so-called GBU-31. Marc Herold, a professor at the University of New Hampshire, who has been documenting the violence in Afghanistan, has investigated the use of this weapon and in a new article available at the Traprock Peace Center offers this description of how it works:

    “Dropped from a plane and hurtling toward its target at 300 mph, the 14-foot steel bomb uses small gears in its fins to pinpoint its path based on satellite data received by a small antenna and fed into a computer. Just before impact, a fusing device triggers a chemical reaction causing the 14-inch-wide weapon to swell to twice its size. The steel casing shatters, shooting forth 1,000 pounds of white-hot fragments traveling at speeds of 6,000 feet per second. The explosion creates a shock wave exerting thousands of pounds of pressure per square inch (psi). By comparison, a shock wave of 12 psi will knock a person down; and the injury threshold is 15 pounds psi. The pressure from the explosion of a device such as the Mark-84 JDAM can rupture lungs, burst sinus cavities, and tear off limbs hundreds of feet from the blast site, according to trauma physicians. When it hits, the JDAM generates an 8,500-degree fireball, gouges a 20-foot crater as it displaces 10,000 pounds of dirt and rock and generates enough wind to knock down walls blocks away and hurl metal fragments a mile or more.”

    Herold notes that several of these terror weapons were dropped by a B-1B bomber earlier this month on a group of Afghans during an open air market outside the town of Baghran, killing an untold number of civilians, including children. The U.S. military described this bombing as a “successful” raid on a gathering of Taliban leaders, and claimed no civilians were present, but the severely injured men, women, and children delivered to various hospitals following the attack gave the lie to this cover-up. Furthermore, given the extensive 2,600-foot radius of this weapon’s kill-range, it clearly is no “precision” weapon for targeting fighters, if any were even present.

    Nor is this weapon the only example of American terror. Far from it.

    Stan Goff, in his excellent report on the killing of Cpl. Pat Tillman in Counterpunch magazine, notes that one reason Tillman was killed by his own unit is that the members of his own separated team that fired on him had launched their attack upon a village despite the fact that not a shot had been fired from that village — a clear violation of the Geneva Accords, but an instructive example of how U.S. forces are actually operating in the field. (Tillman himself was also shot while standing up with his arms raised in a sign of surrender — another violation of international law.)

    Reports are mounting that make it clear that the U.S. is using a deliberate strategy of terror in both Iraq and Afghanistan. The documented (and illegal) use of white phosphorus bombs, which spray wide areas with a substance that burns through flesh down to the bone, first disclosed in the devastating assault and leveling of the city of Fallujah in 2004, the widespread use of helicopter and fixed-wing “gunships” that inundate football-field-sized areas with bullets and fragmentation weapons, the use of delayed action cluster bombs and shells, the use of concussion weapons and napalm, all speak to a policy of indiscriminate killing.

    Americans need to wake up to what the rest of the world already knows: The United States is indisputably the number one terrorist nation in the world today.

    Indeed, the very Administration that is talking about calling Iranian Republican Guard troops “terrorists” is at this moment developing plans for an unprovoked aerial assault on Iran that would feature the dropping of 30,000-lb. bombs, all manner of anti-personnel weapons, and possibly even tactical nuclear weapons, on Iranian targets, many of them in populated areas.

    There is a word for this kind of behavior: terrorism.

    DAVE LINDORFF, a Philadelphia-based investigative journalist and columnist, is author, most recently, of “The Case for Impeachment: The Legal Argument for Removing President George W. Bush from Office” (St. Martin’s Press, 2006 and now in paperback), co-authored by Barbara Olshansky. A veteran investigative journalist and columnist, his work is also available at thiscantbehappening.net.

    Seven-year-old Muslim boy stopped in US three times on suspicion of being a terrorist

    0

    By JAYA NARAIN

    For seven-year-old Javaid Iqbal, the holiday to Florida was a dream trip to reward him for doing well at school.

    But he was left in tears after he was stopped repeatedly at airports on suspicion of being a terrorist.

    The security alerts were triggered because Javaid shares his name with a Pakistani man deported from the US, prompting staff at three airports to question his family about his identity.

    The family even missed their flight home from the U.S. after officials cancelled their tickets in the confusion. And Javaid’s passport now contains a sticker saying he has undergone highlevel security checks.

    Scroll down for more

    Javid IqbalSeven-year-old Javid Iqbal’s passport now contains a sticker saying he has undergone high-level security checks

    The ordeal began in Manchester when Naushaba Nadeem, a doctor, and her children Sana and Fareeha, both nine, Javaid and five-year-old Iftikhar, tried to board a flight to Orlando.

    Dr Nadeem, 35, said: “When we arrived at the front counter to check in at Manchester Airport, staff said there was a security block on Javaid’s name.

    “I understand and agree security checks are important but he is only seven and a half years old.

    “We had to stand at the desk for three hours while they checked everything out. Eventually, everything was fine and we were given our boarding passes.”

    The family enjoyed their eightday holiday earlier this month, taking in Disney World and other attractions before returning to the UK on a route that began with an internal flight from Orlando to Philadelphia.

    Dr Nadeem said: “It happened again at Orlando Airport and then Javaid’s name was blocked again at Philadelphia Airport.

    Scroll down for more

    Javid IqbalJavid’s ordeal began when he and his mother Naushaba Nadeem, tried to board a flight to Orlando, Florida via Philadelphia

    “This time they had cancelled our tickets by the time they gave Javaid security clearance. I was all on my own, I don’t know anyone in Philadelphia.”

    Javaid said: “All this was about my name. They said that it had a block on it. We felt scared and didn’t know what was going on.”

    His father Nadeem Iqbal, 48, a consultant anaesthetist, said: “My son is psychologically traumatised by this experience and said he doesn’t want to fly to America again.

    “The problem seems to be isolated to the US because this did not happen when we visited Tenerife. We don’t want to have to experience anything like this again.”

    Javaid’s parents, who moved to Blackburn from Saudi Arabia in 2002, are now considering changing their son’s name.

    Dr Nadeem said: “The system should cross reference the name, then a date of birth or some other information.”

    The name Javaid Iqbal was blocked and flagged up as a security alert on each airport’s computer system set up by Homeland Security, a US organisation.

    A 39-year-old Pakistani man of that name was arrested in New York two months after the terror attack on the World Trade Centre in 2001.

    He was never charged with any terrorism offences, although he was convicted of fraud for having false papers and deported.

    He is seeking compensation from the U.S. government, claiming to have been beaten up by guards during more than a year in detention.

    Security sources say that as Iqbal was deported, any attempt to enter the US by someone with a similar name would trigger an alert.

    Professor Eric Grove, director of the centre for international security and war studies at Salford University, said: “There are names on file which are checked and there are certain names in combination or singly which put people under scrutiny.

    ‘Intelligence-based analysis has been used to compile the list but it is unlikely a sevenyear- old child is a suicide bomber. I think there must be a right balance to counter terrorism without alienating people.”

    Salim Mulla, secretary of the Lancashire Council of Mosques, said: “It is ridiculous, I’m shocked.

    “They really should have known he was only a seven-yearold child. I do understand the reasons but this was over the top. I can understand the safety aspect but it doesn’t help relationships with different faiths.”

    International airports will not discuss security policies and anti-terrorism measures and all those involved refused to comment on this case.

    How Far Will the Crash Go and What Do we Do Now?

    The immediate triggers are being described quite well: the collapse of the U.S. subprime mortgage market; the vulnerability of the rest of the economy to the subprime undertow, due to the “efficiency” of the markets in spreading risk; the worldwide overextension of cheap credit; the failure of large institutional investors and Wall Street brokerages to behave responsibly; and the long-term effects of the U.S. trade and fiscal deficits which are now coming home to roost.

    Amazingly, some commentators have been asking “if the monetary crisis will affect the producing economy,” and whether a recession lies ahead. In reality, the U.S. producing economy has been in a recession for the last year. This is shown most clearly by the decline in M1, the portion of the money supply immediately available to people for making purchases.

    The causes of the M1 decline are two-fold. One is the weak purchasing power of American consumers, at least half of whose decently-paying manufacturing jobs have been eliminated by the outsourcing, mergers, and productivity improvements during the past two decades. The other is that while many of the U.S. corporations not connected to housing have been doing all right, their success has been tied to overseas investments and sales, such as GE and GM who are heavily invested in China.

    This type of business activity props up the stock prices of these global corporations but does little for the working American. The presumption that overflow earnings from stockholders will benefit the rest of our domestic economy is the essence of “trickle-down,” supply-side economics and is part of the justification for the system that makes the rich richer and the poor poorer.

    But as Barron’s reported earlier this year, much of the profits from the global corporations are being held as retained earnings for future growth, rather than being passed on to stockholders as dividends. Because of the heavy debt load corporations carry today, they are all in a grow-or-die mode. Again, the result is deficient purchasing power which works to negate the already dubious trickle-down effect.

    The recession has been masked by four factors: 1) the government’s phony GDP numbers, where the “churning” of financial transactions masquerade as production; 2) the froth on the stock market that took the Dow Jones Average (DJA) from a little over 11,000 to a record-breaking 14,000 during a one-year period that ended with the decline that began in mid-July; 2) the propensity of the American consumer, which is now ending, to continue to buy goods and services on credit, including necessities of life like health care; and 3) modest growth in low-paying service economy jobs, which also may be coming to an end.

    These lesser bubbles have mirrored the big ones that are bursting as lenders lose confidence in the ability of borrowers to repay. These are the housing bubble, affecting consumers; the acquisition bubble, affecting equity funds; and the speculation bubble, affecting hedge funds.

    As the house of cards comes tumbling down, the leading question on financial websites and blogs is how deep will the decline go. Will it stop at the level of the recessions of previous decades, including 2000-2002, with a decline that is reflected in the DJA of somewhere around thirty-five percent from its peak? Or will it be the “Armageddon” scenario which would take us to depression-level conditions? Of course there are multiple possibilities based on a decline somewhere between a recession and a depression that would share some of the characteristics of each.

    Muddying the waters is the fact that the DJA is much less reliable as a measure of economic health today than in the past. This is because today the vast majority of financial transactions now take place within the furtive secrecy of the equity, hedge, and derivative markets. No one really knows what is going on, except that on any given day an announcement is made that another fund or company has been wiped out.

    Neither the Federal Reserve nor the U.S. government believes they have an obligation to gather or publish data that will help the public gauge the effects of these crises on their homes or jobs. Some might call this negligence a crime against democracy. In fact the Federal Reserve made tracking even more difficult by ceasing to report the M3 macro-currency numbers, but researchers have shown that growth in M3 is soaring while M1 goes down. 

    What appears to be happening right now is that the Federal Reserve, which oversees the U.S. economy on behalf of the financial, corporate, and government elites, is deliberately trying to squeeze as much debt out of the economy as it can. It is doing this with interest rates that are high relative to actual conditions, while trying to avoid the Armageddon scenario.

    The Fed is carrying out its “soft-landing” policy by holding credit tight while introducing “liquidity” into the markets on a day-by-day basis through use of overnight “repos” and by cutting the discount rate for bank borrowing. Conservative columnists like George Will and Bob Novak watch and shake their pom-poms from the sidelines.

    But “liquidity” is just a fancy name for more loans. The one thing we can be certain of is that every loan bears interest charges which someday, somehow, will have to be paid by a person who works for a living. 

    And if you wondered where the Fed got the $34 billion in liquidity it pumped into the markets on Friday, August 10, you weren’t the only one. The answer is that the Fed has a secret room upstairs where it keeps a large “printing press.” It’s legalized counterfeiting, but as with any counterfeit money, if people accept it in trade it acts just like the real stuff–for a while.

    The danger, which many commentators are pointing to, is that the Fed will ignite a hyperinflation, which may be what is happening and may actually be intentional because it devalues debt. It’s what happens when debt is used to pay off debt and is in fact an invisible tax. Such inflation is difficult to discern, again because of the government’s rigged statistics. The most important indicator to watch is the price of oil, which doesn’t show up in “core inflation.” 

    But there are signs that the “soft landing” is working, such as a modest increase in U.S. exports. Reflecting the weak dollar, China is now charging more for its own exports, which will stimulate our industry here at home. And the Fed’s discount rate cut last Friday sparked a modest stock market rally.

    Meanwhile, there is a debate over whether quasi-public agencies like Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac should be used to spread the housing market losses across the entire taxpaying population. While society as a whole is made poorer, many individuals who might have lost their homes or jobs are spared some pain. So it’s hard to argue against it. But this type of bail-out would benefit individual homeowners more than the big banks, so the conservative politicians and commentators oppose it.

    But there’s a bigger picture. The strategy of the Fed is likely to allow the recession to proceed but it does want to get the economy moving again before the downturn goes too far. In fact they probably plan to do it in time for the 2008 presidential election.

    The Fed wants to see a recovery in place by then so the American public will go back to sleep and elect another politician who will steadfastly protect the privileges and powers of the magnates who, through the Fed, rule the world. Even if a new president has some progressive ideas, he or she won’t be able to alter much if a recovery has started.

    The “soft landing” is a political power play.

    It’s what they did in 1984, when Ronald Reagan was reelected on a campaign theme of “It’s morning in America,” after the Fed let up following the twenty percent-plus rates it used to trash the producing economy from 1979-83. The Fed did the same with the housing bubble to get George W. Bush reelected in 2004.

    The financiers’ worst fear is that if things get too bad the American people might elect a reformer in 2008. So far the corporate press has kept two such reformers–Ron Paul and Dennis Kucinich–in the shadows. Now that Hillary Clinton is starting to sound more progressive, they’ll attack her overtly since she is too big a player to be ignored. The Washington Post has already begun.

    So we’ll see if the Fed’s plan succeeds as well over the next couple of years as it has in the past. In the meantime, what remains firmly in place is the monetarist regime through which the financiers and the Fed have ruled America for the past thirty-six years, since President Richard Nixon closed the gold window for international exchange in 1971.

    During this period, we have seen several interlocking phenomena:

    1) interest rates that on the whole have been much higher than the previous period of the New Deal and its aftermath, lasting into the 1960s;

    2) inflation that has eroded eighty percent of the value of the dollar;

    3) replacement of our producing industrial economy with a service economy dominated by high finance;

    4) almost continuous warfare with a clear objective of world domination whose purpose is to shore up the dollar as the world’s reserve currency;

    5) ever-deepening public, private, and household debt;

    6) the ever-widening gap between rich and poor, with increasing numbers of the poor, homeless, and hungry who are left out of the nation’s economic life;

    7) a crisis in the nation’s crumbling infrastructure; and

    8) the constant whipsawing of over 200 million ordinary people.

    It’s our citizens who are batted around like ping pong balls between alternating conditions of boom and bust as every few years many of them watch the overnight disappearance of their homes, pensions, savings, health insurance, and jobs. Added to this is the stress that has eroded the health and even life expectancy of the U.S. population.

    It’s a horrible picture created by a filthy system. It’s why religious leaders for thousands of years have characterized usury, and a culture ruled by usury, as a crime against God and humanity. The monetarist rule of the Federal Reserve is legal, institutionalized usury. Over the years they have mastered all the tools of the trade, the objective of which is to continually allow the financial superstructure to skim the cream off the producing economy. Come to think of it, isn’t that how the Mafia used to work with its protection and loan-sharking rackets?

    And can anything be done about it? Of course.

    In previous articles on the Global Research website and elsewhere, this writer has offered a list of reforms–mostly monetary–that can and should be made. They all involve the recognition of credit as a public utility, part of the societal commons, not the private playground of the financiers, with the Fed as their facilitator.

    Low-cost credit overseen by the federal government was the basic building block of the New Deal. It was done by strong people with an ideal of public service, though in many respects they didn’t go far enough and relied too much on World War II and armaments to attain a full-employment economy. We now need a New Deal for the 21st century that would correct the flaws of the last one, resolve the present crisis, and carry us into a future that will benefit everyone, not just the privileged few.


    Richard C. Cook is a retired federal analyst, whose career included service with the U.S. Civil Service Commission, the Food and Drug Administration, the Carter White House, and NASA, followed by twenty-one years with the U.S. Treasury Department. His articles on monetary reform, economics, and space policy have appeared on Global Research, Economy in Crisis, Dissident Voice, Atlantic Free Press, and elsewhere. He is the author of “Challenger Revealed: An Insider’s Account of How the Reagan Administration Caused the Greatest Tragedy of the Space Age.” His website is at
    www.richardccook.com.

    Richard C. Cook is a frequent contributor to Global Research.  Global Research Articles by Richard C. Cook

    Deadly New York Scraper Fire Near Twin Towers Site but no collapse

    0

    By Ann Baker

    Nearly six years after the tragedy of 9/11 and two New York City firefighters have died in a blaze inside a skyscraper abandoned after the World Trade Center attacks.

    The fire broke out on Saturday at the former Deutsche Bank building, sending smoke across Manhattan. The building was in the process of being taken down.

    Five other firefighters were injured battling Saturday’s flames next to the Twin Towers site. The cause of the blaze that started on the 14th and 15th floors, wasn’t known Sunday morning.

    On September 11, 2001, more than 300 firefighters lost their lives when the World Trade Center towers collapsed shortly after bring struck by commercial airplanes piloted by terrorists later linked to Al Queda.

    Only ‘virtual protests’ allowed at North American summit

    0

    Agence France-Presse

    Protesters will be “seen and heard” when North American leaders meet next week in Montebello, near Ottawa, but only virtually — via an audio-video feed set up by organizers.

    And the heads of the United States, Canada and Mexico may opt to change the channel.

    The arrangement is “in compliance with (a Canadian) court’s decision that protesters have a right to be ‘seen and heard,'” said Sandra Buckler, a spokeswoman for host Stephen Harper, the prime minister of Canada.

    However, the novel plan to give protesters a voice, while maintaining strict security for the talks, has riled protesters being kept out by a fence, three meters (10 feet) high and 2.5-kilometers (1.5 miles) around the meeting place.

    “It’s a travesty of democracy,” Sophie Shoen of People’s Global Action told Agence France-Presse. “We must be allowed to directly confront political leaders where and when we choose, not virtually.”

    The hundreds of demonstrators expected to try to disrupt the summit “must be able to make their protests heard by the leaders they are addressing,” echoed Grace Pastine, of the B.C. Civil Liberties Association, in a statement.

    “They must be allowed to protest in Montebello,” a luxury log-cabin hotel nestled in a lush forest between Ottawa and Montreal, she said.

    In defiance, several anti-globalization groups said they planned to try to get as close to the meeting site as possible, refusing to be “caged” in a forest clearing set up for them by summit organizers.

    A parallel counter-summit uniting academics and opposition MPs is also planned in Ottawa.

    A senior Canadian government official said at a briefing: “Protesters have a right to protest and make their view known … (but) it remains our view that what they don’t have a right to do is to preclude leaders from meeting.

    “We will take the steps necessary to ensure that leaders can meet and that protesters will have an opportunity to protest,” she said.

    During the two-day summit, held annually since 2005, Canada’s Prime Minister Stephen Harper, US President George W. Bush and Mexico’s President Felipe Calderon are expected to discuss current market turmoil, trade and security, and strategies to stem pandemics.

    As well, they may confer on product safety, following recent recalls of toys, dog food and toothpaste, and growing worries about defective “made in China” goods, imported into North America.

    “The (US) president is going to Canada to talk to our North American neighbors about making the continent safer and more prosperous,” said White House national security spokesman Gordon Johndroe.

    Bilateral Bush-Harper talks would also touch on climate change, unrest in Afghanistan, and competing Arctic claims by Canada, the United States, Russia, Denmark and Norway, officials said.

    The Arctic “has been very much in the news over the last few weeks and it’s an issue that’s very important to Canada,” a senior Canadian official said. “It would surprise me if the leaders did not spend (some) time talking about (it).

    “They may want to explore what lies beyond the symbolic act on the part of the Russians,” she said, after Moscow planted a flag on the sea floor at the North Pole in early August to bolster its Arctic grab.

    Calderon, meanwhile, is likely to ask for more US aid to curb drug trafficking, and propose a hike in the number of temporary worker visas issued by Canada to Mexican seasonal workers, now at 12,000 annually.

    Activists, labor groups, academics and opposition politicians are decrying the Security and Prosperity Partnership (SPP), a framework for greater trade and security integration of Canada, the United States and Mexico.

    It was launched at the first “Three Amigos” summit in Waco, Texas, in March 2005, but seems to have stalled.

    A Canadian official commented: “I don’t think there is any intent to look for deeper integration (of North America)” at these talks.

    Bush rocked as another key aide resigns

    1

    THE White House press secretary Tony Snow has announced that he will be leaving his job before the end of President George W Bush’s term in office “for financial reasons”.

    Snow, 52, has three children and is suffering from colon cancer. He earns $168,000 (about £84,000) a year and took a large pay cut from his position as a talk show host to become Bush’s most articulate defender.

    “I’m going to stay as long as I can,” he said. News of his impending departure surprised White House colleagues and will further the impression of a lame duck president, who is limping to the end of his term in 2008.

    Karl Rove, hailed as the “architect” of George W Bush’s two election victories, announced his resignation as a White House aide last week. One senior Republican strategist said: “Republicans in Congress were ready to mutiny if he hadn’t left. They have had enough of the politics of division.”

    But Snow’s departure will add to gloom surrounding the Republicans, who feel Bush is inadequately defending his policies. Even Snow said the president’s domestic policy was “listless” before he went to work for him in April 2006.

    “I will not be able to make it to the end of this administration, just financially,” Snow said. “This job has been such a pleasant surprise in how much I like it. I love it.” He had his last scheduled chemotherapy treatment on Friday and will have a CT scan on Monday.

    Despite Snow’s best efforts at presentation, a Gallup poll on Friday revealed that only 29% of voters currently identify themselves as Republicans, compared with 37% as independents and 33% as Democrats. A majority, 56%, said they had an unfavourable view of the Republican party, its worst rating for 15 years.

    It was a shattering verdict on Rove’s attempt to build a lasting Republican majority. The master electoral tactician, known as “Bush’s brain”, was lionised by conservatives until the Republicans lost control of Congress in the 2006 midterm elections.

    Rove’s role will be partly filled by Ed Gillespie, a former lobbyist and chairman of the Republican national committee, who is already serving as counsellor to Bush in the White House.

    Rove’s gifts for probing his enemy’s weaknesses were in evidence last week when gave a farewell interview to Rush Limbaugh, the arch-conservative radio talk show host, and laid into Hillary Clinton as a “fatally flawed” candidate.

    Limbaugh told him he had a bunch of e-mails from listeners “who wanted me to pass on to you that they love you”.

    SILENT WMDs EFFECTS OF DEPLETED URANIUM

    3

    By Admiral Vishnu Bhagwat
    Former Chief of the Naval Staff, India

    Heat not a furnace for your foe so hot ..that it do singe yourself.
    – William Shakespeare

    This brief presentation is aimed at conveying to the primarily Indian participants of the Conference the fateful and disastrous consequences of the indiscriminate use of depleted and non DU munitions on the people of the west, central and south Asian regions, women, children , men , animals, plant and animal life now and in the future, in gross violation of international law, the Hague convention and domestic US military law.

    Official Gamma Ray damage caused studies have been deficient in a number of respects..internal contamination, internal dose to individual cells, omissions of diseases other than cancer, mutagenic, long term degeneration , oncogenesis, effects of the killer isotopes in particular. The case studies of the years 1945-50 were ignored. A recent European Parliament Report ECRR 2003 (European Committee on
    Radiation Risk ) concludes that A Bomb studies underestimate the radiation risk by more than 1000 times and failed to consider the internal exposure and diseases caused by Alpha and Beta rays. They did not consider the Manhattan Project classified memo that, in case the Project objective of producing Plutonium fission and theA Bomb did not succeed , Depleted Uranium munitions would be deployed towards the attainment of the same objective (encl. 1).

    DU weapons emit Alpha particle dose to a single cell from U-238 which is 50 times the annual dose level. Cancer is initiated with one alpha particle, its daughter isotopes effect generations as the isotopes bio-concentrate in plants and animals, and travel up the food chain. It is a nuclear weapon because the energy is derived from the nucleus of the atom. They enter the body through the lungs, the digestive system or breaks in the skin. One gram of DU releases more than 12,000 particles per second. The radiation slowly kills the cells that make life possible. The Gulf War syndrome of 1991 did just that ( reported by Dr Asaf Durakovic, Prof. of Medicine , Georgetown University, and discoverer of the Gulf War Syndrome.)

    We are well aware that the radiation fall-out map Under the Cloud: Decades of Nuclear Testing has demonstrated the effects of 1200 nuclear weapon tests conducted at the Nevada Test Site; and the US Government admitted in Nov. 2002, that every living person in the US between 1958-63 was exposed to this fall out resulting in cancer, gene mutation, heart disease, autism, diabetes, Parkinsons, ALS, asthma, chronic fatigue syndrome , hypothyroidism in new-borns, obesity and learning disabilities. One out of twelve children in the US is disabled. The fall out did not stop at the US borders. It travelled around the world, as atmospheric dust and remains even in the biosphere/ sub-orbital space today. High breast cancer rates have been co-located in the proximity of nuclear power plants in the west and more so in the east coast areas of the US (The Breast cancer map from The Enemy Within: the high cost of living near nuclear reactors, quotes US Govt. Disease Control Centers.

    The Radiation & Public health Report (RPHP), rendered by a group of independent scientists collected 4000 baby teeth and by measuring Strontium 90 levels in the baby teeth ( a built in dosi-meter ) they have been able to co-relate with radiation related diseases in children living near the nuclear power plants; the main path ways being dairy products and drinking water.

    The induction of DU weapons in 1991 in Iraq, the radio-active trash from nuclear plants broke a 46 year taboo. This Trojan Horse of nuclear war, an omnicidal weapon has since then continued to be used more and more. DU remains radioactive longer than the age of the earth ( estimated at 4.5 billion years. )

    The long-term effects from over a decade of DU exposures are emerging in Southern Iraq. They are devastating. The increased quantities of radio-active material ( including non-depleted uranium), used in Afghanistan are 3 to 5 times greater than Iraq 199. In Iraq 2003 they are already estimated to be 6 to 10 times 1991 and will travel through a larger area and affect many more people, babies and unborn. Countries within a 1000 mile radius of Baghdad and Kabul are being affected by radiation poisoning , that includes the Capital, New
    Delhi, where the ruling elite lives. The reported coming of an AIDS epidemic last year in India , down wind, may have a relationship to DU bombing in Afghanistan. If we think cancer is a problem now wait until more DU is released in wars against terror and for regime change, on mistaken Intelligence reports.

    More than 500 tons of DU munitions have been dispensed in Afghanistan. Professor Yagasaki calculated that 800 tons of DU is the atomicity equivalent to 83,000 Nagasaki bombs in a paper presented at the World Uranium Weapons Conference in Hamburg in October 2003 ( 5 months ago ). The amount of DU used in Iraq in 2003 is equivalent to nearly 250,000 Nagasaki bombs ( Busby and Leuren Moret have calculated that 1900 tons of DU is equivalent to 60 TBq of Alfa and Beta particulate activity).

    We need not ennumerate the DU munition types used in Iraq 199, Kosovo 1999, Afghanistan 2001-04 and Iraq 2003. They have been dispensed by all air / ground and sea systems on innocent civilians. DU burns intensely and is very hard. It releases Uranium Oxide. The aerosol contains particles of 0.5-5 microns in size, once they are in the air or dust they are inhaled or ingested, including from contaminated soil. Once in the lungs one such particle is equivalent to having one XRay per hour, for life. Because it is impossible to remove, the victim is gradually irradiated. Still births, birth defects, leukemia, damaged central nervous systems and other cancers have been common in children born since 1991. Child leukemia has risen 600 % in areas of Iraq as reported by the Netherland Visie Foundation. Beyond just the health
    consequences, DU munitions are in fact, weapons of Silent Mass Destruction in so far as the consequences of their usage are vast, indiscriminate and violate all Human Rights Conventions . Tora Bora , Kabu , Paktia , Karises or underwater supply tunnels have been contaminated forever. All this has been documented in a comprehensive paper  Uranium wars : The Pentagon steps up its use of Radio-active Munitions, by Marc W. Herold to whom this paper owes sincere acknowledgement.

    In another paper Dr Mohammed Daud Miraki, Director Afghan DU Recovery Fund, quotes George W Bush , we will smoke them out, condemning the unborn, the living and the future generations of Afghans and the neighbouring people to a pre-determined, death sentence. After the destruction of our village, I realised that the Americans had sentenced us all to death. When I saw my deformed
    grandson I realised my hopes for the future have vanished This time we are part of the invisible genocide brought on by America a silent death from which we will not escape ( Jooma Khan of Laghman province..March 2003.) Similar stories are repeated from Paktita province of Jelly Babies. Pregnant women are afraid of giving birthThis is the legacy of US ushered liberation, freedom and democracy. DU is cheap for the US, utilising nuclear waste, cheaper than titanium and tungsten, not for the liberated (non-DU is still cheaper as it is the uranium feedstock, pre-enrichment).

    The Uranium Medical Research Center (UMRC), Washington DC, and the Bulletin of Atomic Scientists (1991) – Steve Fetter and Frank Von Hippel have reported on extensive research by Field teams of the UMRC in Afghanistan. Testimonies of fathers and mothers are horrifying  What else do the Americans want ? They killed us , they turned our new-borns into horrific deformations, and they turned our farm lands into grave-yards, and destroyed our homes. On top of all this their planes fly over and spray us with bullets.. we have nothing to lose ..we
    will fight them the same way we fought the previous invaders (Sayed Gharib at Tora Bora).

    Radiological dispensing devices or warfare is the latest of the weapons of the new millenium, but it singes even those who use it , as shown in the after effects of the tests at home ground in the US, where evidence of cognitive damage during early infancy have been compiled. For us in Eurasia, Pakistan and India we have a new health epidemic to drain our scarce resources.

    As world citizens we need to focus on a new scourge, the reality of the PNAC – Rebuilding Americas Defenses, Strategy, Forces and Resources for a New Century.

    The Report notes that ,  Much has been written in recent years about the need to transform the conventional armed forces of the United States to take advantage of the Revolution in Military Affairs. Our military requires a dramatic transformation , lest we lose our ability to fight the future unconventional wars .. some may be fought in cyberspace, others under water or in outer space . And some even within our bodies.

    Paul Wolfowitz, William Kristol and others are some of the men representing contemporary power centers, who define US policy. History indicates that the men who define US military policy from the shadows , are worthy of our attention.

    GENETIC BOMBS

    When creating genetic-bombs or weapons to target specific groups; genetic profiles are subtler and more accurate than the coarse pseudo category called race. The group with ADHD ( the Edison Gene) uniquely share common inherited variations in their dopamine regulating genes regardless of race, geography or ethnicity. Thus anybody whos part of a group with a shared genetic profile may be at risk in the future.

    A virus or bacteria may attack only a particular type of person, killing, disabling or sterilising only those of a particular gene profile.
    Threatening a particular type would be sufficient political black-mail.

    Wolfowitz, Kristol and their colleagues suggested that the Pentagon should be thinking about not just germ warfare of which they have plenty of capabilities, but gene warfare.

    Genetic terra-forming could replace diplomacy, or it could change the face of politics if an organism got loose that killed all the people of a particular minority community who tend to vote for a particular political party.

    According to the PNAC, Genetically targeted weapons could change world politics for ever, and the report notes, advanced forms of biological warfare that can target specific geno-types may transform biological warfare from the realm of terror to a politically useful tool

    To conclude 4th generation micro-nukes, with their war-head composition, were deliberated upon and decided at the US Airforce Strategic Command Headquarters at the Offutt Airforce Base, Nebraska, between the top Corporates /weapon manufacturers and the US military brass. The former not only have prior knowledge of numbers and types of all types of nuclear weapons, but the locations of the planned and approved targets, globally.

    This meeting took place on Hiroshima Day, 6th August, 2003, and to reiterate, the aim was to define a new generation of nuclear weapons to be used on a pre-emptive basis against rogue enemies and terrorist organisations. (mini-nukes have an explosive capacity between one-third and six times a Hiroshima bomb).

    In this Strangelovian logic, nuclear weapons are now viewed as a means to ensuring peace and security against non-existent WMDs.

    AT A GLANCE:

    1. In the 2003 war, the IraqiS were subjected to the Pentagons radioactive arsenal, mainly in the urban centers, unlike in the deserts in 1991. The aggregate effects of illnesses and long term disabilities and genetic birth defects will be apparent only 2008 onwards.

    2. By now, half of all the 697,000 US soldiers involved in the 1991 war have reported serious illnesses. According the American Gulf War Veterans Association, more than 30% of these soldiers are chronically ill, and receiving disability benefits from the Veterans Administration.

    3. The number of disabled veterans is shockingly high . They are in their mid-thirties and should have been in the prime of health.

    4. Near the Republican Palace where US troops stood guard and over 1000 employees walked in and out, the radiation readings were the hottest  in Iraq, at nearly 1900 times background radiation levels.

    5. At a roadside stand, selling fresh bunches of parsley, mint, and onions, children played on a burnt out Iraqi tank just outside Baghdad, the Geiger counter registered 1000 times normal background radiation.

    6. The Pentagon and the United Nations estimate that the US and Britain used 1,100 to 2,200 tons of armor piercing shells made of DU during attacks in March-April 2003, far more than the 1991 Gulf War (this does not include air dispensed DU munitions and missiles), wrote the Post Intelligencer.

    7. An otherwise useless by-product of the uranium enrichment process, DU is attractive to military contractors because it is so cheap and often offered for free by the Government.

    8. The long term effects, as Dr Asaf Durakovic elaborates, after the early neurological symptoms are cancer, and related radiation illnesses such as chronic fatigue syndrome, joint and muscle pain, neurological and/or nerve damage, mood disturbances, auto-immuno deficiciencies, lung and kidney damage, vision problems, skin rupture, increase in miscarriages, maternal mortality and genetic birth defects/deformation.

    9. For years the US government described the Gulf War Syndrome as a post traumatic stress disorder. It was labelled as a psychological problem or simply as mysterious unrelated ailments much in the same way as health problems of Vietnam veterans suffering from Agent Orange poisoning.
    ( With acknowledgements to Sara Flounders, for 1-9 above, Coordinator of the DU education program ).

    I also gratefully acknowledge the facts learnt from evidence led by scientists/papers presented and accepted by the International Criminal Tribunal on Afghanistan, at Tokyo on 13-16 Decembe, 2003 and earlier at the World Depleted Uranium Weapons Conference, Hamburg 16-19 October, 2003, by Leuren Moret, whose continuing contribution to this cause against  Silent Wepons of Mass Destruction (SWMD), in defense of humanity, deserves our support.

    Rudy plays the security card: ID for all tourists

    3

    EVERY foreigner in America, including British visitors, would be required to carry an ID card bearing photograph and fingerprints under plans drawn up by Rudolph Giuliani, the frontrunner for the Republican presidential nomination.

    Giuliani is hoping to cement his status as the Republican favourite by promising to enforce immigration and border controls, drawing on expertise in combating crime from his time as mayor of New York. He announced last week that all foreigners, including holiday-makers, would be obliged to carry a “tamper-proof” biometric card, which could be issued at ports of entry.

    “If you don’t have that card, you get thrown out of the country,” Giuliani said. He intends to call it a Safe card (for secure authorised foreign entry).

    The proposal plays to his reputation for being tough on terrorism and shores up his credentials on immigration, but at the price of a row over civil liberties.

    “The question is: in what circumstances will people be asked for their IDs?” said Jay Stanley, a privacy expert at the American Civil Liberties Union. “Will dark-skinned foreigners be asked for their IDs while a Caucasian person isn’t?” Opponents also believe it could be costly, cumbersome and could affect trade and tourism.

    Giuliani said: “I did it back in 1994 with welfare people. It was a big, big, horrible thing that I was doing. I was asking welfare people to be biometrically identified by their fingerprints.

    “It worked. It got rid of the duplicates and triplicates, people who were getting welfare at three different places.”

    Giuliani has a liberal history of supporting immigration, which Mitt Romney, the former governor of Massachusetts and a leading rival for the Republican nomination, is trying to twist against him. Romney accused Giuliani last week of running New York as a “sanctuary” for illegal immigrants while mayor, provoking bitter ripostes about Romney’s own record as governor of the most left-wing state in America.

    Under Giuliani’s plan, illegal immigrants would be allowed to obtain a card, work and ultimately become citizens – a route to legitimacy derided by some hardline Republicans as an “amnesty”. But Giuliani’s success as a former prosecutor and mayor who cracked down on criminals has given him unique credibility. He has vowed to strengthen patrols along the most porous parts of the border with Mexico and deport illegal immigrants who have been convicted of drug dealing and other crimes.

    The intensity of the clash between Giuliani and Romney comes as the former mayor is proving his durability as the Republican favourite, despite many predictions of his demise at the hands of social conservatives.

    Fred Siegel, author of The Prince of the City, a biography of Giuliani, said: “I feel I’m in the ‘I told you so’ position. People didn’t realise how good he is at what he does. He is a tough guy.”

    Giuliani has a 10-point lead over Fred Thompson, the Hollywood actor and former Tennessee senator and his nearest rival for the nomination. Thompson is expected to enter the race officially after Labour Day, September 4, and spent last week gathering support in Iowa, an early voting state. But Thompson has lost some of the momentum and excitement that surrounded early predictions of his White House run, although he still has the potential to unite conservatives and take the lead.

    Romney trails in fourth place in national polls, but remains strong in key states such as Iowa and New Hampshire and is hoping for early success there to propel him to victory in the Republican primaries.

    Tom Edmonds, a Republican consultant who is supporting Giuliani, believes the party is beginning to take a good look at which candidate is the most electable. “We can be hard-nosed and lose or make the camp bigger and increase our chance of winning. The party realises it has to do more than ‘turn out the base’. It has to reach for the undecided voter and turn out the centre.”

    A poll by Rasmussen last week showed Giuliani would beat Hillary Clinton in a head-to-head race by 47-40 points, a wider margin than any other Republican candidate. He has also won support by taking the fight to the Democrats — chiding them, for instance, for being too politically correct to mention Islamic terrorism in their televised debates.

    US agencies train spy satellites on civilians

    0

    ERIC SCHMITT

    FICTIONAL agent Jack Bauer famously uses America’s spies in the sky in his personal war on terror in TV series 24.

    But that’s make-believe. In real life, US civilian agencies have used limited spy-satellite images of their country only to track hurricane damage, monitor climate change and create topographical maps.

    But a plan to allow emergency response, border control and, eventually, law enforcement agencies greater access to the sophisticated satellites and other sensors that monitor American territory has drawn sharp criticism from civil liberties advocates, who say the government is overstepping the use of military technology for domestic surveillance.

    “It potentially marks a transformation of American political culture toward a surveillance state, in which the entire public domain is subject to official monitoring,” said Steven Aftergood, director of the Project on Government Secrecy for the Federation of American Scientists. “There’s the possibility of a recurrence of past abuses: surveillance used against political opponents, as in the Civil Rights and McCarthy eras.

    “There’s also an incidental erosion of personal privacy, in which one now has to assume that anywhere you are, you are subject to overhead surveillance by the government. And that is a change in what it means to be an American.”

    At issue is a newly disclosed plan that Mike McConnell, director of national intelligence, approved in May in a memorandum to homeland security secretary Michael Chertoff, which puts some of the nation’s most powerful intelligence-gathering tools at the disposal of domestic security officials as early as this autumn.

    The uses include enhancing seaport and land-border security, improving planning to mitigate natural disasters, and securing major events, such as the Super Bowl or national political conventions. Eventually, state and local law enforcement officials could be allowed to tap into the technology on a case-by-case basis, once legal guidelines are worked out, administration officials say.

    Spy satellites, which provide higher resolution photographs than commercial satellite imagery, and in real time, have traditionally been used overseas to monitor terrorist movements, such as at al-Qaeda camps in Afghanistan and nuclear tests in places such as North Korea. Their expanded use in domestic surveillance marks a new era in intelligence gathering, conjuring up images of ‘Big Brother’ and raising civil liberties fears.

    “This touches so many Americans. It can’t be allowed to be discussed behind closed doors,” said Caroline Fredrickson, director of the Washington legislative office of the American Civil Liberties Union.

    The new data sharing comes after Congress passed legislation this month that broadened the Bush administration’s authority to eavesdrop without warrants on some citizens’ international communications.

    Administration officials say that after the September 11 attacks, the government has been looking for ways to use spy satellites and other sensors to strengthen US defences.

    This article: http://news.scotsman.com/international.cfm?id=1311872007

    Police gun that makes you sick

    0

    By Justin Penrose

    The latest weapon in the fight against crime is a “sick gun” that makes you vomit.

    It looks like a normal torch but sends out rapidly-changing, different-coloured strobelights which blind and disorientate whoever it is shined at. Like the Taser stun gun it is designed as a “non-lethal” weapon to disable suspects so they can be arrested. And it could soon be used by police forces over here. Authorities in the US have already ordered the LED Incapacitator which has a range of 30 feet. It is expected to be used by border guards and air marshals. Its creator, Bob Lieberman, said: “There are often confrontations with illegal aliens or drugs runners.

    “You don’t want to hurt or kill them, just take them into custody.” The effects of the gun, which can incapacitate several people at once, wear off after a few minutes.

    Developers have come up with the exact frequency and colour for maximum effect. Mr Lieberman said: “There’s one wavelength that gets everyone. We call it the evil colour.”

    Blackwater: The Rise of the World’s Most Powerful Mercenary Army

    0

    By Jeremy Scahill

    Blackwater is a private company that does the dirty work for America in various wars, both covert and those we know about all too well. It began only 10 years ago as a sort of cheerful paintball and shooting range in the Great Dismal Swamp of North Carolina, but these days it has some 20,000 mercenaries on its books (the “whores of war”), not to mention a whole bunch of quasi-military aircraft, a military base, lots and lots of guns and connections with precisely the right people.

    It was brought into existence by Erik Prince, a somewhat right-of-centre Roman Catholic zealot who hails from a singularly unlikable, filthy-rich Michigan dynasty. Prince has the ear of the White House and his firm has been rewarded with plenty of extraordinarily lucrative no-bid contracts for security work in, for example, Iraq — where Blackwater’s most prominent task was to look after the idiotic and fanatical L Paul Bremer III during his term as US administrator immediately after the war.

    Unfortunately, you might feel, they did their job rather well in this regard, and Bremer survived his term of office. Elsewhere, however, Blackwater was conspicuously catastrophic; it was four of its men who, during a singularly ill-advised sortie in unquelled Fallujah, found themselves ambushed, machine-gunned and hacked to bits in the most bestial manner by inflamed locals. Their dismembered bodies were slung above power cables on a bridge in the city — and their murder brought furious and deadly reprisals from the US military, aided once again by more Blackwater employees.

    Jeremy Scahill, a journalist of some repute, is not quite sure if he should blame Blackwater for being incompetent and negligent in sending these men to what was almost certain death, or for playing a far darker game and (in cahoots with the Bush regime) effectively engineering an atrocity to which America had no option but to respond in the most stringent manner. This is symptomatic of a recurrent problem throughout this otherwise meticulously researched and fascinating book: we are in no doubt as to where the author comes from, politically, and his peacenik disposition sometimes distorts his judgment. Given the chance, Scahill would blame Bush and Blackwater for every conceivable crime, all the time (for both gross incompetence and the most astonishing Machiavellian cunning, for example), when a less partial observer might suspect such qualities to be mutually exclusive. Also, and I write as someone who thought the war and occupation of Iraq woefully misguided and criminal, Scahill seems to have much more sympathy for the vicious and medieval Islamists of Fallujah who wish to murder every American on sight than he does for his own people, who want to kill Iraqis only when they themselves are under attack.

    Typical of the tenor of this book is the author’s pious opprobrium when a Blackwater soldier, alone under fire on three sides from 1,200 heavily armed and enraged Iraqis, dares issue the unfortunate exclamation “nigger!”. This undoubted contravention of etiquette merits a couple of pages of concentrated hand-wringing. Appalling though it might seem to Scahill, Blackwater’s mercenary soldiers do not always behave in the manner of Polly Toynbee. They instead comprise macho retired US grunts, former Pinochet guardsmen, pensioned-off members of the Israeli Defence Force, white South African soldiers, cheap-as-chips Colombians and so on. The armed mercenary business is of a distinctly rightish political hue, I think it’s fair to say — and Scahill spends far too long belabouring the point. Some Blackwater executive doesn’t have much time for homosexuals or abortionists — no, you’re kidding? There are bigger issues here and Scahill, good journalist that he is, does eventually get on to them.

    First and foremost is Blackwater’s apparently cavalier attitude towards its employees and its utter lack of accountability. Scahill also does a fine job tying the firm, financially and politically, to the current Bush administration — despite Prince’s considered view that George W is a lily-livered liberal, all too soft on queers and commies. The contracts roll in, usually without competition, and Blackwater cleans up, bending the rules of engagement by occasionally using what is euphemistically described as “unapproved ammunition”, its euphemistically named contractors swanning around Baghdad and Fallujah armed to the teeth, wearing wraparound mirror shades, driving expensive SUVs.

    Clearly, though, they love their work for the excitement, comparatively high wages and other sundry spin-offs: “The chicks dig it,” one cheerful Neanderthal mercenary proclaims of his high-risk, highly paid work. Scahill also discovers Blackwater “contractors” setting up bases in former Russian secret-service headquarters in Georgia and Azerbaijan, their guns pointed in two directions: towards Russia, towards Iran. Ready for the next conflagration. There’s some evidence in the book that the firm was also involved in the “renditioning” of prisoners, transporting suspects for interrogation to countries with an imperfect grasp of what is meant by human rights.

    Blackwater operates in a deliberately hazy area, a private company beholden to the state for its work, yet free from those legal and moral responsibilities imposed upon the state, nationally and internationally. Scahill reports that the same mirror shades, big guns and SUVs were seen tearing around New Orleans in the wake of hurricane Katrina, the contractors charged with the task of keeping order and “confronting criminals”. If so, it is a scary development. You might hope that when the current US administration bites the dust, Blackwater might do so, too. But that would be a bit naive. The relationship between mercenary and government is now far too convenient and lucrative to be abandoned.

    Terror law puts Britons at risk of surveillance by US agents

    1

    Jamie Doward, home affairs editor
    Sunday August 19, 2007
    The Observer

    A new law swept through Congress by the US government before the summer recess is to give American security agencies unprecedented powers to spy on British citizens without a warrant.The Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Act was approved by Congress earlier this month to help the National Security Agency in the fight against terrorism. But it has now emerged that the bill gives the security services powers to intercept all telephone calls, internet traffic and emails made by British citizens across US-based networks.

    As much of the world’s telecoms networks and internet infrastructure runs through the US, the new act will give the security services huge scope for monitoring and intercepting Britons’ private communications, as well as those of other foreign citizens. The new act has led to fears it will see a huge increase in the number of British citizens being extradited to the US.

    ‘Just because it happens to pass through the US they claim they can do whatever they want,’ said Tony Bunyan, director of Statewatch, the civil rights group that campaigns against state surveillance. ‘Where is the EU saying, “What’s going on here, we’ve got to protect the rights of our citizens?”‘

    The Dutch Liberal Democrat MEP Sophie in ‘t Veld has tabled a series of questions demanding answers from the EU parliament. In a statement to European politicians, In ‘t Veld warns the US law will ‘directly apply to EU citizens and constitutes a major violation of privacy and civil liberties’.

    The law has prompted a furore in the US, where it was opposed by Democrats Hillary Clinton and Barack Obama. But other countries seem ignorant of its consequences. ‘There’s been a lot of upheaval in Congress about this new act over fears Bush will use it to eavesdrop on US citizens,’ In ‘t Veld said. ‘But it can and will be used for the communications of Europeans.’

    She pointed out many companies and organisations are based in the US and that the new law will give the US powers to monitor their communications. ‘For example, I would like to know what sort of communications go via the UN,’ In ‘t Veld said.

    Concern over US powers to monitor foreign citizens is growing. European privacy watchdogs have expressed fears that the US authorities are to be handed powers to check the personal details of travellers entering America and store them on databases alongside details such as their sexuality and religious beliefs for up to 15 years. The watchdogs, including the Information Commissioner of England and Wales, Richard Thomas, have been scathing in their criticism of the European Commission for granting the US its demand for the new powers.

    In a coded statement the Information Commissioner’s office yesterday acknowledged concerns that the privacy of some four million Britons who travel to the US each year is at risk because of the new powers.

    ‘We will continue to work alongside our European data protection colleagues to try to ensure that airline passengers’ details are protected by the appropriate data protection safeguards,’ a spokeswoman told The Observer.

    Psychologists group weighs ban on military interrogations

    1

    SUDHIN THANAWALA

    The nation’s largest group of psychologists is set to decide what role, if any, its members can play in interrogating terror suspects at Guantanamo Bay and other U.S. military detention centers.

    The American Psychological Association, which is holding its annual meeting in San Francisco, is scheduled to vote Sunday on two competing measures concerning its 148,000 members’ participation in military interrogations.

    One proposal, which is backed by APA’s board of directors, would reaffirm the group’s opposition to torture and prohibit members from taking part in more than a dozen specific practices, including forced nakedness, mock executions and simulated drowning.

    An APA member who violates the torture resolution could be expelled from the Washington-based organization, which could lead to the loss of the professional’s state license to practice, said spokeswoman Rhea Farberman.

    The other measure would bar members from any involvement in interrogations at U.S. detention facilities where foreigners are held. The moratorium would not be backed by sanctions, but it would carry the APA’s “moral authority,” said psychologist Neil Altman, who wrote the proposed resolution.

    The association’s vote follows reports that have implicated mental health specialists in prisoner abuse scandals at Guantanamo Bay and Abu Ghraib prison in Iraq. Among other things, psychiatrists and psychologists are accused of helping interrogators increase prisoners’ stress levels by exploiting their fears.

    A recently declassified Defense Department report said that since 2002 psychiatrists and psychologists have helped military interrogators develop new techniques to extract information from detainees.

    Military interrogation has become a dominant issue at this year’s meeting of the APA, which represents most of the nation’s psychologists.

    Psychologists for an Ethical APA, which supports the moratorium, rallied Friday outside the Moscone Center, where the conference is being held. Supporters wore buttons that read “Do No Harm” and carried signs condemning torture. A person in an orange jumpsuit and black hood stood in the middle of the crowd.

    Moratorium backers say psychologists should not assist with interrogations where foreigners are held indefinitely and could be tortured because their involvement discredits the profession.

    “We will not be satisfied until we get a resolution that says psychologists cannot be part of interrogations at sites where detainees’ human rights are being violated,” said New York psychologist Steven Reisner.

    Supporters of the moratorium say they want the APA to follow the examples of the American Medical Association and American Psychiatric Association, which have said their members have no legitimate role in interrogations at detention centers like Guantanamo. The U.S. military has indicated it would favor using psychologists, who are not affected by the other groups’ policies.

    Critics of the moratorium say the presence of psychologists helps ensure interrogations are not abusive.

    APA spokeswoman Farberman said psychologists help interrogators build rapport with detainees, so they don’t have to resort to abusive behavior.

    “We want to stay engaged in the discussion about appropriate and effective interrogation techniques,” Farberman said.

    Uncertainty in UK’s ID card plans

    0

    CBR

    The UK government has started the tender process to allow suppliers to join those that will be registered as potentially available to meet the technological requirements of its identity card program. However, there are significant areas of uncertainty as to what the system will encompass and provide.

    Known as the National Identity Scheme (NIS) Strategic Supplier Framework, this marks the stage in this long-running program at which, at last, there exists some formal declaration of what the system will encompass and provide. However, the information published in support of the tender process reveals that even the type of biometrics that will be used to underpin the scheme is yet to be decided.

    Currently, the expectation is that fingerprints will be used as identifying characteristics, but guidance mentions that NIS might yet require iris �prints� to be recorded as well. Given that the scheme has been under consideration for years already, and that both these biometric technologies are well established, it seems surprising that no decision has been reached on what are deemed to be sufficiently rigorous identity criteria.

    Perhaps even more surprising is that the government has stated that it wishes suppliers to be prepared to provide guidance on the way forward. At the very least, this seems to accommodate a potential clash of interests, as suppliers could be motivated to advise a large technology footprint, for the sake of sales rather than benefits.

    In any case, there must be a question as to whether iris recognition technology is appropriate over such a large user population. Although it has one of the lowest rates of error of the range of biometric technologies available, it is expensive to deploy equipment to take iris readings. Additionally, many organizations may feel that asking customers, or other people with whom they interact, to undergo iris readings, might be intrusive and may be detrimental to their relationship.

    Guidance on the cost of ID cards to consumers is now also available, and is stated as an expected GBP30 (extra to the cost of a passport) for a card valid for 10 years. It is also surprising that outline costs for consumers can be so well defined, given the uncertainty as to whether iris biometrics will be included on cards, and leads to the assumption that the government will bear the cost of any extra investment for iris registration. However, if that part of NIS does go ahead, organizations that are required to undertake iris checking will have to invest in new equipment themselves, and it is unlikely that these costs are being reflected within the totals that the government is currently stating.

    A minister from the Home Office (the area of government responsible for the NIS), commenting on the launch of the framework for supplier registration, proudly remarked that “this is a groundbreaking project” – seemingly unaware that, in many experienced minds, the association between the government and “groundbreaking projects” throws up images of out-of-control spending, unfulfilled requirements, and a ‘gravy train’ (now with conveniently online ‘ticket booking’).

    We remain skeptical of any tangible benefit being realized from NIS, and believe that commercial organizations will find it hard to justify the expense and investment necessary to widen its overall participation. Given that there seems to be an iron political will to create the NIS, the public sector, meanwhile, is likely to be propelled by directive to spend on its involvement, regardless of benefits or costs. In late 2005, the London School of Economics revised its estimate of the total cost of all activities in the UK public sector attributable to ID cards, stating that up to GBP30 billion could be spent. It is all too easy to see how such a horrific prospect could come to pass.

    Source: OpinionWire by Butler Group (www.butlergroup.com)

    Concern Over Wider Spying Under New Law

    0

    By James Risen and Eric Lichtblau

    Broad new surveillance powers approved by Congress this month could allow the Bush administration to conduct spy operations that go well beyond wiretapping to include – without court approval – certain types of physical searches of American citizens and the collection of their business records, Democratic Congressional officials and other experts said.

    Administration officials acknowledged that they had heard such concerns from Democrats in Congress recently, and that there was a continuing debate over the meaning of the legislative language. But they said the Democrats were simply raising theoretical questions based on a harsh interpretation of the legislation.

    They also emphasized that there would be strict rules in place to minimize the extent to which Americans would be caught up in the surveillance.

    The dispute illustrates how lawmakers, in a frenetic, end-of-session scramble, passed legislation they may not have fully understood and may have given the administration more surveillance powers than it sought. It also offers a case study in how changing a few words in a complex piece of legislation has the potential to fundamentally alter the Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Act, a landmark national security law. Two weeks after the legislation was signed into law, there is still heated debate over how much power Congress gave to the president.

    “This may give the administration even more authority than people thought,” said David Kris, a former senior Justice Department lawyer in the Bush and Clinton administrations and a co-author of “National Security Investigation and Prosecutions,” a new book on surveillance law.

    Several legal experts said that by redefining the meaning of “electronic surveillance,” the new law narrows the types of communications covered in the Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Act, known as FISA, by indirectly giving the government the power to use intelligence collection methods far beyond wiretapping that previously required court approval if conducted inside the United States.

    These new powers include the collection of business records, physical searches and so-called “trap and trace” operations, analyzing specific calling patterns.

    For instance, the legislation would allow the government, under certain circumstances, to demand the business records of an American in Chicago without a warrant if it asserts that the search concerns its surveillance of a person who is in Paris, experts said.

    It is possible that some of the changes were the unintended consequences of the rushed legislative process just before this month’s Congressional recess, rather than a purposeful effort by the administration to enhance its ability to spy on Americans.

    “We did not cover ourselves in glory,” said one Democratic aide, referring to how the bill was compiled.

    But a senior intelligence official who has been involved in the discussions on behalf of the administration said that the legislation was seen solely as a way to speed access to the communications of foreign targets, not to sweep up the communications of Americans by claiming to focus on foreigners.

    “I don’t think it’s a fair reading,” the official said. “The intent here was pure: if you’re targeting someone outside the country, the fact that you’re doing the collection inside the country, that shouldn’t matter.” Democratic leaders have said they plan to push for a revision of the legislation as soon as September. “It was a legislative over-reach, limited in time,” said one Congressional Democratic aide. “But Democrats feel like they can regroup.”

    Some civil rights advocates said they suspected that the administration made the language of the bill intentionally vague to allow it even broader discretion over wiretapping decisions. Whether intentional or not, the end result – according to top Democratic aides and other experts on national security law – is that the legislation may grant the government the right to collect a range of information on American citizens inside the United States without warrants, as long as the administration asserts that the spying concerns the monitoring of a person believed to be overseas.

    In effect, they say, the legislation significantly relaxes the restrictions on how the government can conduct spying operations aimed at foreigners at the same time that it allows authorities to sweep up information about Americans.

    These new powers are considered overly broad and troubling by some Congressional Democrats who raised their concerns with administration officials in private meetings this week.

    “This shows why it is so risky to change the law by changing the definition” of something as basic as the meaning of electronic surveillance, said Suzanne Spaulding, a former Congressional staff member who is now a national security legal expert. “You end up with a broad range of consequences that you might not realize.”

    The senior intelligence official acknowledged that Congressional staff members had raised concerns about the law in the meetings this week, and that ambiguities in the bill’s wording may have led to some confusion. “I’m sure there will be discussions about how and whether it should be fixed,” the official said.

    Vanee Vines, a spokeswoman for the office of the director of national intelligence, said the concerns raised by Congressional officials about the wide scope of the new legislation were “speculative.” But she declined to discuss specific aspects of how the legislation would be enacted. The legislation gives the director of national intelligence, Mike McConnell, and Attorney General Alberto R. Gonzales broad discretion in enacting the new procedures and approving the way surveillance is conducted.

    The new legislation amends FISA, but is set to expire in six months. Bush administration officials said the legislation was critical to fill an “intelligence gap” that had left the United States vulnerable to attack.

    The legislation “restores FISA to its original and appropriate focus – protecting the privacy of Americans,” said Brian Roehrkasse, Justice Department spokesman. “The act makes clear that we do not need a court order to target for foreign intelligence collection persons located outside the United States, but it also retains FISA’s fundamental requirement of court orders when the target is in the United States.”

    The measure, which President Bush signed into law on Aug. 5, was written and pushed through both the House and Senate so quickly that few in Congress had time to absorb its full impact, some Congressional aides say.

    Though many Democratic leaders opposed the final version of the legislation, they did not work forcefully to block its passage, largely out of fear that they would be criticized by President Bush and Republican leaders during the August recess as being soft on terrorism.

    Yet Bush administration officials have already signaled that, in their view, the president retains his constitutional authority to do whatever it takes to protect the country, regardless of any action Congress takes. At a tense meeting last week with lawyers from a range of private groups active in the wiretapping issue, senior Justice Department officials refused to commit the administration to adhering to the limits laid out in the new legislation and left open the possibility that the president could once again use what they have said in other instances is his constitutional authority to act outside the regulations set by Congress.

    At the meeting, Bruce Fein, a Justice Department lawyer in the Reagan administration, along with other critics of the legislation, pressed Justice Department officials repeatedly for an assurance that the administration considered itself bound by the restrictions imposed by Congress. The Justice Department, led by Ken Wainstein, the assistant attorney general for national security, refused to do so, according to three participants in the meeting. That stance angered Mr. Fein and others. It sent the message, Mr. Fein said in an interview, that the new legislation, though it is already broadly worded, “is just advisory. The president can still do whatever he wants to do. They have not changed their position that the president’s Article II powers trump any ability by Congress to regulate the collection of foreign intelligence.”

    Brian Walsh, a senior legal fellow at the conservative Heritage Foundation who attended the same private meeting with Justice Department officials, acknowledged that the meeting – intended by the administration to solicit recommendations on the wiretapping legislation – became quite heated at times. But he said he thought the administration’s stance on the president’s commander-in-chief powers was “a wise course.”

    “They were careful not to concede any authority that they believe they have under Article II,” Mr. Walsh said. “If they think they have the constitutional authority, it wouldn’t make sense to commit to not using it.”

    Asked whether the administration considered the new legislation legally binding, Ms. Vines, the national intelligence office spokeswoman, said: “We’re going to follow the law and carry it out as it’s been passed.”

    Mr. Bush issued a so-called signing statement about the legislation when he signed it into law, but the statement did not assert his presidential authority to override the legislative limits.

    At the Justice Department session, critics of the legislation also complained to administration officials about the diminished role of the FISA court, which is limited to determining whether the procedures set up by the executive administration for intercepting foreign intelligence are “clearly erroneous” or not.

    That limitation sets a high bar to set off any court intervention, argued Marc Rotenberg, executive director of the Electronic Privacy Information Center, who also attended the Justice Department meeting.

    “You’ve turned the court into a spectator,” Mr. Rotenberg said.

    Military commanders tell Brown to withdraw from Iraq without delay

    0

    By Raymond Whitaker and Robert Fox

    Senior military commanders have told the Government that Britain can achieve “nothing more” in south-east Iraq, and that the 5,500 British troops still deployed there should move towards withdrawal without further delay.

    Last month Gordon Brown said after meeting George Bush at Camp David that the decision to hand over security in Basra province — the last of the four held by the British — “will be made on the military advice of our commanders on the ground”. He added: “Whatever happens, we will make a full statement to Parliament when it returns [in October].”

    Two generals told The Independent on Sunday last week that the military advice given to the Prime Minister was, “We’ve done what we can in the south [of Iraq]”. Commanders want to hand over Basra Palace — where 500 British troops are subjected to up to 60 rocket and mortar strikes a day, and resupply convoys have been described as “nightly suicide missions” — by the end of August. The withdrawal of 500 soldiers has already been announced by the Government. The Army is drawing up plans to “reposture” the 5,000 that will be left at Basra airport, and aims to bring the bulk of them home in the next few months.

    Before the invasion in 2003, officers were told that the Army’s war aims were to bring stability and democracy to Iraq and to the Middle East as a whole. Those ambitions have been drastically revised, the IoS understands. The priorities now are an orderly withdrawal, with the reputation and capability of the Army “reasonably intact”, and for Britain to remain a “credible ally”. The final phrase appears to refer to tensions with the US, which has more troops in Iraq than at any other time, including the invasion, as it seeks to impose order in Baghdad and neighbouring provinces.

    American criticism of Britain’s desire to pull back in southern Iraq has recently become public, with a US intelligence official telling The Washington Post this month that “the British have basically been defeated in the south”. A senior British commander countered, “That’s to miss the point. It was never that kind of battle, in which we set out to defeat an enemy.” Other officers said the British force was never configured to “clear and hold” Basra in the way the Americans are seeking to do in Baghdad.

    Immediate American discontent is said to centre on the CIA’s reluctance to leave Basra Palace, an important base for watching Iran, which may explain why Britain has held on to the complex until now. But last week it was reported that US intelligence operatives were in the process of pulling out. Further ahead, the US is concerned over the security of its vital supply line from Kuwait, with some American commanders saying that if the British withdraw, American troops will have to be sent south to replace them. As the hub of Iraq’s oil industry, Basra is also a tempting prize for the Shia militias battling each other for control.

    There are fears that the bloody power struggle in Basra will escalate sharply if and when British troops depart, but commanders point out that up to 90 per cent of the violence is directed against their forces. They are understood to believe it was never the role of occupation troops to intervene in a “turf war” among factions from the same community, all of which have links to the government coalition in Baghdad.

    Mr Brown will have to take these wider concerns into account, in reaching a decision that has political as well as military implications. At Camp David he stressed that “we have duties to discharge and responsibilities to keep” in support of the Iraqi government and “the explicit will” of the international community. The 15 September report on the progress of the security “surge” by the US commander in Iraq, General David Petraeus, and the American ambassador to Baghdad, Ryan Crocker, will be crucial to British as well as US military plans.

    General Petraeus is expected to report mixed results, and to plead for more time for the surge to work. But the White House, under pressure from Republicans facing disaster in the 2008 elections, is likely to announce at least some troop reductions. British commanders, and some US commentators, believe that will enable the Prime Minister to spell out plans for a British withdrawal when MPs return in October, although the process may last well into next year.

    The Internet is superior medium for news

    People are watching less TV news and increasing number gets their news primarily from the Internet, according to latest studies. There are any reasons: plastic anchors with plastic words and smiles, artificial urgent presentations with teases about what’s up, next or tonight (nothing is in the moment), 20 minutes of commercials an hour, plummeting credibility… The Internet is clearly a superior medium for news, says Cory Bergman, an expert on new television.

    “The straightforward, scannable delivering is refreshing, and when combined with a non-linear presentation, on-demand video and two-way interactivity, the Internet is superior.” “There is room for two thriving news platforms here —TV and the web- but TV has to get more real,” she explains.

    Niche audiences targeted by new streaming services

    Niche programming aimed at narrowly defined audiences that can’t find movies and television shows even on cable systems with 500 or more channels, is coming thanks to new streaming video services, and the fact that 47 percent of American households have broadband connections.

    Take this five samples, featured on the New York Times:

    – The Independent Film Channel streams 22 short films by a relatively unknown artist.

    FEARnet, “the first multiplatform horror network” which is a joint venture of Comcast, Sony Pictures and Lionsgate, also has its programming online; it makes its money from banner advertisements.

    – The nonprofit Jewish Television Network streams music videos by Jewish performers, cooking shows, Israeli news programs and religious services. This short of broadcast is hard to find on mainstream television.

    – Also, the DVD rental company Netfilx allows watching 3,000 television episodes and movies on demand in streaming high-quality video.

    ReelTime who rent titles, for $1 each, to be watched on computers’ screen or on television’s larger screen (once the computer is connected). Some of their contents comes straight from ReelTime, or if are pulled from subscribers’ that have previously downloaded from a peer-to-peer network.

    A BitTorrent for cell phones

    A Malaysian tech firm called mBit is setting up a peer-to-peer system to cell phones. It is a BitTorrent-like service, which grabs small pieces of big files from multiple cell phones simultaneously. So millions of users will be able to send large files, like 50MB movies captured on a cell phone, using a kind of mobile super distribution network.

    mBit firm wants to sell its software to 3G and 4G providers across Asia, like NTT DoCoMo. And they are planning to charge $2.50 per user per month.

    Also, BitTorrent software has been modified for cell phones before, but required an Internet connection, just like a PC.

    A free DVR without ad skipping

    Time Warner Cable, the U.S.’ second-largest cable provider, behind Comcast, will offer its customers in October a free service called Look Back, which will let them record any television show without skipping through the commercials. The fast-forwarding function will be turned off.

    This radically different approach from other companies that sell DVR (Digital Video Recorder) services, gives a sort of control to customers over the television schedule, but does not avoid the unwanted advertising. Unlike DVR services, Look Back will not let people keep a library of older recorded programs.

    DVRs are now in about 17 percent of American households, and that figure is growing rapidly as more cable operators sell the service. For this service, people pay $10 or so every month to cable companies or to TiVo.

    Google Maps embed code coming soon

    Make it easy to embed stuff onto blogs and sites, and you will have instant syndication. Coming soon Google Maps will allow people to embed a map with just a snippet of code, the same way you embed any viral video coming from an advanced platform.

    http://iblnews.com/story.php?id=28489

    Summer meltdown: stock market suffers biggest fall in four years

    0

    Shares plummet around the world; FTSE’s worst day nin four years; Value of UK PLC falls £60bn; Market slumps 13% since June; Pensions surplus wiped out; Fears for housing market; Growing threat to economy

    By Sean O’Grady

    “Crash” is a dangerous word. No one has managed to define it precisely but, like a juggernaut that careers off the highway, slams into your house and parks itself in your lounge, you certainly know when you’ve been hit by one, even when you can’t quite believe it or explain how it happened.

    It feels a little like that now on the world’s stock markets, though the rumble of approaching catastrophe could be detected for some months. When even the United States Treasury Secretary, Henry Paulson, admits the turmoil will “exact a penalty” on the US economy’s growth rate, then things are bad.

    Until yesterday, it was possible to believe the markets were experiencing a “correction”. That term now looks ludicrously euphemistic. Yesterday alone saw a collapse of 250 points in the FTSE 100 index, wiping 4.1 per cent from its value as it slumped to 5,859.9, well below the 6,000 mark, a psychological barrier. It is the biggest fall since March 2003. The loss since Wednesday stands at well over £100bn.

    No market and hardly a stock escaped the carnage; in Tokyo the Nikkei closed down 2 per cent, Singapore lost 3.7 per cent, Korea down 7 per cent, France 2.6 per cent and Germany 1.7 per cent. Most crucially, because of the lead it offers the rest of the world, in New York shares pulled off a late-trading rally to end just 0.12 per cent down on the day – despite losses of about 2 per cent in early trading. But traders there remain nervous. The scale of the losses early in the day and the images of panicky dealers staring at screens a sea of red were reminiscent of the crashes of 1998 and 1987. Indeed then, as now, the abrupt end of a bull market followed a period of unusually easy credit, with excesses and scandals all about.

    The comparison with 1987 is frightful. Then the Dow fell by 3.8 per cent and 4.6 per cent on the Thursday and Friday before Black Monday, at which point it lost 22.6 per cent of its value in one day. Even if it is not as bad as that, the party seems to be over.

    Like a tiny bacillus laying low a vastly larger and, otherwise healthy organism, a crisis in one, relatively small, sector of the US mortgage market – “sub-prime” lending – has multiplied and spread to almost every corner of the global economy.

    Sub-prime lending has been defined by the US Treasury Department as granting funds to those who “have weakened credit histories that include payment delinquencies, and possibly more severe problems such as charge-offs, judgments, and bankruptcies”. In other words, people who probably should not be borrowing money at all.

    Losses in the sub-prime sector are thought to run to about £50bn. Compare that with the hundreds of billions wiped off the value of shares in the past few days alone, and whatever sums it will cost central banks, taxpayers and shareholders to prop up ailing companies. This infection has done harm quite out of proportion to its origins.

    The reason for that is the growing liberalisation, sophistication and globalisation of financial markets. The American banks that undertook this sub-prime lending were able to package up the debts and sell them on to banks, hedge funds and other investors from Zurich to Shanghai. This “securitisation” of the debt was designed to spread the risk, or exposure, around, with investors attracted by the unusually high returns on these funds.

    Fine; except the US housing slump has activated the sub-prime virus and no one has much idea where this flaky debt is now sitting. Hence the panic, the gossip, and the rapid intervention by the Federal Reserve, the European Central Bank and the Bank of Japan to lend huge sums of money to prevent the financial system seizing up (“an injection of liquidity” to the cognoscenti).

    Over the past week, the Fed has injected $88bn (£44.3bn), while the ECB has put up €211bn (£142.6bn). So will the virus spread out of the City and into the “real economy” of jobs, pensions and housing? Yes, because the value of pension funds and savings has already been slashed. When companies find it harder to raise capital – because of the “credit crunch” and the collapse in shares, they find it trickier to fund investment.

    When that vital commodity – “confidence” – goes into short supply, consumers tend to take fright too. We might not get all that goes on in the City, but maybe now is not the moment to splash out on that new car or, indeed, gear up for a bigger house.

    So there is a chance that house prices, already weakening, will start to stagnate, as is happening in the commercial property market. That would be no bad thing – especially for first-time buyers – provided unemployment does not creep up. If that happens then repossessions and a fire sale of buy-to-let property could follow, and we would have our own sub-prime-style crisis. The authorities are haunted by such a turn of events. True, we have a more benign global background of high global growth (about 5 per cent), more broadly based (with China and India) and still low inflation and unemployment. But the Bank of England and the Government will have to do a good deal – cutting the base rate, increasing public spending – to restore confidence.

    A Treasury spokesman said: “The UK economy remains strong, against a background of a strong world economy. There will always be periods of uncertainty in the markets, but the long-term decisions the Government has taken – giving independence to the Bank of England, the fiscal rules and low and stable borrowing – have created a strong platform.

    “The UK economy is experiencing its longest unbroken expansion since records began… Our openness and flexibility continue to position the UK to benefit from the opportunities of globalisation and absorb shocks.”

    The impact on financial sectors

    Pensions

    UK pension funds will have had their value fall in tandem with the exchanges. Those funds that have benefited from putting money into hedge funds and private equity ventures may see some or all of those investments in jeopardy. However, post-Maxwell, new protections should have made abuses less likely.

    Housing Market

    The big danger. If growth slows appreciably and joblessness rises then we could see some panicky selling. A welcome slow down in house price inflation could turn into a slump, with a “rush to the door” by marginal buy-to-let investors and other speculators. Negative-equity misery could re-emerge.

    The Economy

    Much depends on the reaction of the authorities. A loss of confidence in financial markets can easily affect consumer behaviour (spending less, saving more) and companies (who usually hold back on large investment plans). A reduction in interest rates and, in time, a boost from the Budget would help calm nerves.

    Politics

    Can cut both ways. Voters tend to “cling to nanny” in turbulent times, especially if they’re not confident in the Opposition. On the other hand if electors blame Mr Brown for the crisis then things look better for the Tories. In any case, the Prime Minister doesn’t have to go the country until 2010.

    U.S. pre-9/11 memos: Pakistan backs Taliban

    0

    Documents allege nation showed ‘resistance’ to helping nab bin Laden

    AP

    Newly declassified intelligence documents reveal the depth of U.S. officials’ concern that Pakistan was providing funds, arms – and even combat troops – to the Taliban regime in Afghanistan for years before the Sept. 11 attacks.

    They also show rising frustration at what U.S. officials called Pakistan’s “resistance and/or duplicity” toward Washington’s repeated requests for help in getting the Taliban to hand over Osama bin Laden. A top official at one point said hauling Pakistan before the U.N. Security Council should be considered.

    The documents, released under a Freedom of Information Act request by George Washington University’s National Security Archive and posted on its Web site, add detail to what is already generally known about U.S. intelligence on Pakistan’s links with the Taliban as it surged to power in Afghanistan in the mid-1990s.

    The cables and letters between senior U.S. officials – most of them stamped “confidential” and heavily redacted for public release – lay out those concerns in language stripped of diplomatic niceties.

    All but one of the 35 documents deal with the period between December 1994 and September 2000. Sensitive details, including what appear to be names, have been blacked out in many places.

    Pakistan denies claims
    They show that U.S. officials as early as 1994 believed Pakistan’s intelligence services were deeply involved with the Taliban and its takeover that year of the southern Afghan city of Kandahar. It was the first major victory for the then-obscure religious militia that went on to capture the capital, Kabul, in September 1996 and then gain control of almost all of Afghanistan by mid-1997.

    Responding to the new documents, Foreign Ministry spokeswoman Tasnim Aslam reiterated Pakistan’s previous strong denials that the country ever gave military support to the Taliban. She also denied Pakistan ignored U.S. requests to use its influence to persuade the Taliban to surrender bin Laden.

    In 1996, U.S. intelligence officials concluded Pakistan’s Interservice Intelligence was more involved with the Taliban than Pakistani officials had been telling American diplomats. An Oct. 22 cable to Washington said the service was supplying the Taliban with food and fuel, adding that “munitions convoys depart Pakistan late in the evening hours and are concealed to reveal their true contents.”

    Two weeks later, another cable to Washington said large numbers of Pakistan’s Frontier Corps were being “utilized in command and control; training; and when necessary – combat” in Afghanistan. The Frontier Corps were comprised mostly of ethnic Pashtuns, who would not stand out among the Taliban, who were also mostly Pashtuns.

    Aslam denied the cable’s claims. “That’s absolutely baseless. Our troops have never been involved inside Afghanistan,” she said.

    The Taliban regime imposed a version of Islamic rule that was among the world’s strictest – subjugating women, banning music and chopping off the hands of thieves. But the Taliban won support inside and outside Afghanistan because its rise quelled fighting among regional warlords whose battle over power after the Soviet withdrawal in 1989 killed countless civilians.

    “There was a time when everyone supported them, because after the civil war everyone thought that they would bring stability and peace to Afghanistan and they might unify the nation,” Aslam said. Pakistan gave diplomatic recognition to Taliban rule in May 1997; recognition followed from Saudi Arabia and the United Arab Emirates.

    ‘An intrinsic enemy’
    Bin Laden moved to Afghanistan – from Sudan where diplomatic pressure had forced him out – in the chaotic years before the Taliban came to power, and began setting up terrorist training camps. The warlords who let bin Laden in later combined into the Northern Alliance, which with U.S. military support ousted the Taliban in late 2001.

    Among the Taliban’s early backers was Hamid Karzai, a Pashtun leader asked by the Taliban to become their U.N. representative before he became disillusioned with their extremism. Washington later supported Karzai as Afghanistan’s post-Taliban president, a post he still holds.

    In March 1999, Karl F. Inderfurth, Washington’s senior diplomat for South Asia, wrote to then-Secretary of State Madeleine Albright in pessimistic terms about the prospects of peace in Afghanistan. Washington, he wrote, “may have to consider the Taliban to be an intrinsic enemy of the United States and (Afghanistan to be) a new international pariah state.”

    Concerns about the Taliban included its links to opium crops, rights abuses and protection of bin Laden, who at the time was wanted in the United States in connection with the 1998 U.S. embassy bombings in Tanzania and Kenya that killed more than 200 people.

    “Pakistan has not been responsive to our requests that it use its full influence on the Taliban surrender of bin Laden,” Inderfurth wrote. “We should demand that Pakistan help us meet our core goals in Afghanistan and foster a political settlement compatible with Pakistan’s own long-term interests.”

    If not, the United States should consider taking Pakistan before the U.N. Security Council, where military action could be among the options, Inderfurth wrote.

    “If we see continued Pakistani resistance and/or duplicity, we should begin to seriously consider seeking Security Council backing … to ensure that Pakistan and the outside players abide with pledges to cease outside support,” he said.

    Cooperation increased after 9/11
    Aslam said the idea that Pakistan did not respond to U.S. requests on bin Laden was a “baseless allegation.”

    “We tried out best,” she said. “I think the U.S. intelligence agencies have exaggerated Pakistan’s influence, in their own interests.”

    Washington had stepped up efforts to get bin Laden after the African embassy bombings, posting a $5 million reward for the terrorist leader. In 1999, President Clinton met Pakistani Prime Minister Nawaz Sharif, who soon afterward began talking of withdrawing Pakistan’s support for the Taliban unless bin Laden was handed over or expelled from Afghanistan, according to reports at the time.

    Cooperation between Islamabad and Washington on bin Laden lapsed after Musharraf ousted Sharif in a coup in October 1999.

    Musharraf made an abrupt shift in policy after the Sept. 11 attack on the U.S., withdrawing support for the Taliban and becoming a key U.S. ally in the Afghan war by providing logistical support and launching military action in the lawless border region to root out militants.

    Bin Laden and top Taliban leaders escaped the U.S.-led war, and U.S. intelligence officials warned last month that al-Qaida might be regrouping in tribal zone on the border. In Afghanistan, the Taliban have stepped up attacks in the past two years trying to destabilize Karzai’s government and reassert themselves as a force in the country.

    New row over ‘misleading EU treaty’

    0

    By Brendan Carlin

    Pressure for a referendum on the controversial European constitution grew last night amid growing signs of public concern and fresh claims that voters are being misled.

  • Sign the Telegraph EU referendum petition

    Almost 50,000 have now signed The Daily Telegraph’s petition calling for a referendum on the proposed new settlement. All three main parties originally pledged a referendum on the original EU draft constitution. And yesterday, there were claims that the new document was essentially a revival of the constitutional settlement famously rejected by referendums in France and Holland in 2005.

  • The Open Europe think-tank published research showing the new draft was exactly the same length as the rejected constitution and contained similar threats to British sovereignty.

    According to the think-tank, which campaigns for a more flexible, open Europe, the original constitutional treaty ran to 63,000 words. When the new proposals, involving a series of amendments to existing treaties, were put together in a consolidated text, the proposals new treaty came to the same length.

    Open Europe also sought to debunk the Government’s argument that the new draft was substantially different from what went before.

    Neil O’Brien, the Open Europe director, said that although ministers insisted they had now inserted new “red lines” and opt-outs into the revised proposals, those safeguards were in the original constitution.

    Open Europe also raised concerns that the proposed new arrangements would end Britain’s veto in foreign policy in 11 key areas including terrorism and mutual defence.

    ‘We have broken speed of light’

    0

    By Nic Fleming

    A pair of German physicists claim to have broken the speed of light – an achievement that would undermine our entire understanding of space and time.

    According to Einstein’s special theory of relativity, it would require an infinite amount of energy to propel an object at more than 186,000 miles per second.

    However, Dr Gunter Nimtz and Dr Alfons Stahlhofen, of the University of Koblenz, say they may have breached a key tenet of that theory.

    The pair say they have conducted an experiment in which microwave photons – energetic packets of light – travelled “instantaneously” between a pair of prisms that had been moved up to 3ft apart.

    Being able to travel faster than the speed of light would lead to a wide variety of bizarre consequences.

    For instance, an astronaut moving faster than it would theoretically arrive at a destination before leaving.

    The scientists were investigating a phenomenon called quantum tunnelling, which allows sub-atomic particles to break apparently unbreakable laws.

    Dr Nimtz told New Scientist magazine: “For the time being, this is the only violation of special relativity that I know of.”

    A “Slow Motion Train Wreck”

    3

    By Stephen Lendman
    RINF Alternative News 

    These days, financial/market punditry seems to follow two opposite lines of thinking. It ranges from the predominant view that world economies are growing and sound, problems in them minor and fixable, and current volatility (aka turmoil) is corrective, normal and a healthy reassessing and repricing of risk. Contrarians, on the other hand, believe the sky is falling. Most often, extreme views like these turn out wrong and are best avoided. Things are never that simple and hindsight usually proves only Cassandra was good at forecasting although calling market tops and bottoms wasn’t her specialty.

    Amidst all the commentary and sorting out of market Strang und Durm these days, some financial world figures stand head and shoulders above the rest for their wisdom, level-headednessness and believability. One in particular is Jeremy Grantham, called by some the philosopher king of Wall Street even though he’s based to the northeast in Boston. In 1977, he co-founded Grantham, Mayo and Van Otterloo, now known as GMO. In his Quarterly Letters to clients, he assesses current market conditions and usually takes a longer view as well. His commentaries are detailed, scholarly, sober and clear.

    The Vanguard Group of mutual funds founder John Bogle calls Grantham “one of the top two or three individuals in this business (and) If there’s anybody in this whole business who calls a spade a spade (that person is) Jeremy Grantham.” A metaphor for his wisdom, attitude and investing style sits aside his office desk. It’s a huge 9th century stone Buddha signifying “everything in moderation” and one of Grantham’s core beliefs that all markets eventually revert to their mean values from their highs and lows.

    Based on his company’s exhaustive research, there are “no exceptions ever.” Bubbles come and go, but, in time, they all settle back in same place. As Grantham puts it: “We know one principal truth at GMO and that is that we live in a mean-reverting world in investing. (Our research) has shown….that all bubbles….eventually break (and our definition of a bubble is a) 2 standard deviation event – the kind of moves that occur about every 40 years.” Grantham mentions four stock market ones in particular that stand out – the US in 1929, US again in 1965 – 72, 1989 in Japan (in land and stocks) and the still ongoing greatest ever US 2000 bubble yet to come back to its mean.

    Grantham is known in the trade as a value investor. That means buying financial assets at less than their intrinsic value or what famed investor/Columbia University professor Benjamin Graham (1894 – 1976) called a “margin of safety.” Warren Buffett today calls it “finding an outstanding company (or any financial asset) at a sensible price” as opposed to a bargain that may turn out bogus or a booby trap. Grantham correctly called the equity bubble in the late 1990s and believes the 2000 – 2003 bear market is secular, long-term, and unlikely to end before 2010 despite a continuing four year cyclical bull run reprieve from 2003 to the present. Only in the fullness of time will he, and the rest of us, know if he’s right.

    Earlier in the year, Grantham toured the world for six weeks, returned worried, and wrote about it in his April Quarterly Letter titled “It’s Everywhere, In Everything: The First Truly Global Bubble.” It’s “bubble time,” he observed “from Indian antiquities to modern Chinese art; from land in Panama to Mayfair; from forestry, infrastructure, and the junkiest bonds to mundane blue chips.” All the necessary conditions are in place – “fundamental economic conditions” look excellent; central bank supplied liquidity is plentiful and cheap; and there’s so much around, it’s easy to leverage. Since around mid-July or so, the latter condition no longer is true or perceived to be by investors turned cautious and in some cases even panicky.

    Grantham explains human behavior causes bubbles when positive market conditions unleash “animal spirits” to capitalize on opportunities that get carried to extremes when there’s enough cheap credit around as fuel. Even in the best of times, that’s a recipe for trouble with success feeding on itself. It signals by leveraging up, the better investors can do until the music stops as it always does, and the longer and louder it’s been playing, the severer the subsequent headache.

    No one knows for sure when big trouble’s coming next or how bad it’ll be when it arrives. Up to early summer, it was smooth sailing and easy profits, but Grantham says what he sees today is unprecedented: “everyone, everywhere (in all asset classes) is reinforcing one another.” Across the world you hear it confirmed that “they don’t make any more land (and) with these growth rates and low interest rates, equity markets must keep rising (and) private equity (plus merger mania, huge stock buy-backs and plenty of central bank supplied fuel) will continue to drive the markets.”

    It’s become self-reinforcing and the results are “predictable and consistent.” The three major asset classes – real estate, stocks and bonds – are “expensive compared with (their) replacement cost where it can be calculated.” Equally worrisome, risk premiums “reached a historic low everywhere” until just weeks ago.

    Grantham’s conclusion is these are all warning signs spelling eventual trouble because as noted above “Every bubble has always burst (with no exceptions, ever).” When the 2000 bubble deflation resumes, “it will be across all countries and all assets, with the probable exception of high grade bonds.” In addition, risk premiums will widen (and now are) forcing companies to pay higher financing costs for borrowed funds that will depress investor confidence and reduce economic activity.

    No one knows how deep or protracted a decline will be, but Grantham stresses it’s coming because the current global bubble is unprecedented. “No similar global event (of this magnitude ever) occurred before.” Now that’s pretty scary stuff to chew on because economic troubles bite everyone and most of all those most vulnerable and least able to weather the storm. That includes ordinary working people with little or nothing invested.

    During the current bull run, Grantham was troubled as early as January, 2004 when he advised clients that “The outlook for 2004 is not bad, but the (stock) market is very overpriced and all predictors look bad for the next year and the year after.” As things turned out, he was wrong, or perhaps with future hindsight just way early in his judgment. He was troubled again at year end 2005 when he told investors to “prepare for a decline in the performance of equities and other risk assets in 2006.” Once more, his call was either early or wrong as the past 18 months saw considerable strength until just recently.

    His January, 2007 Quarterly Letter assessed what happened saying “Against all odds, Goldilocks tiptoed through the perils of the first (2005) and second (2006) year of the Presidential Cycle….it (2006) was the rarest of rare birds – a perfect year.” As a result, “risk taking also prospered” because of low global inflation, no financial crises anywhere, low interest rates, and “very very” available credit. As things turned out, “this was almost certainly the best year in the entire history of finance for the selling of high credit risks at low premiums.”

    One extreme measure of it was the quadrupling of so-called securitized Collateralized Debt Obligation (CDO) instruments (packages of risky and other debt) to around $2.5 trillion facilitated by the so-called “expanded ‘carry trade’ of borrowing in cheap (low interest) Japanese and Swiss currencies.”

    Downsides often accompany opportunities, and Grantham explained conditions going into 2007 in breathtaking terms. “Goldilocks global conditions, especially cheap and easy credit, have caused the broadest overpricing of financial assets – equities, real estate, and fixed income – ever recorded.” However, he stressed, “Just because risk taking is off the charts does not mean it can’t keep going for another year” or longer.

    The end of a Goldilocks economy was clearly on the minds of people Grantham met on his world tour. Everywhere he travelled he was asked “What is the catalyst for a (market) break” when none was then visible or imminent? He answered citing these vulnerabilities: rising inflation (that’s greater than reported) constraining central bank support for a weakening economy, pointing to the US as an example. This, in turn, will slow economic activity and reduce profit margins that are still way above global norms but will come down.

    Then there’s the housing decline a Center for Economic Policy Research (CEPR) report shows is the result of overbuilding and home prices rocketing 70% in value since 1995 adjusted for inflation. It “created $8 trillion in housing bubble wealth” and an unprecedented oversupply of unsold homes and “vacant ownership units.” CEPR believes the coming housing bubble correction “is likely to throw the economy into a recession and quite possibly a very severe (one).”

    It notes housing construction has to decline, and revaluing $8 trillion in housing wealth excess will reduce consumption and bring saving rates “back to more normal levels.” Consumers need all they can get because, at today’s elevated prices, the average potential home buyer can’t afford one, and, as one analyst observed, lenders are relearning how to say “no.”

    Current economic conditions worry PIMCO’s Bill Gross as well. PIMCO is a 36 year old firm and “one of the largest specialty fixed income managers in the world.” Gross is one its founders and serves as managing director and chief investment officer. In his July Investment Outlook, he said people are “looking for contagion in all the wrong places.” The Bear Stearns and other hedge fund losses are “now primarily history (and) can be papered over with 100 cents on the dollar marks.” The real problem lies in “those millions and millions of homes….not going anywhere….except for their mortgages….going up, up, and up….and so are delinquencies and defaults.”

    He cites a recent Bank of America estimate that about $500 billion of adjustable rate mortgages (ARMs) will be reset in 2007, another $700 billion in 2008, and a large proportion of them are subprimes. He noted 7% of these loans are now in default, and the “percentage will grow and grow like a weed in your backyard tomato patch.” This will affect real money in the hundreds of billions of dollars of “toxic waste” that will spill over into reduced consumption, less new home construction, and even AAA-asset backed commercial paper “feel(ing) the cooling Arctic winds of a liquidity constriction.”

    In Gross’ view, the sky isn’t falling, and “there is no hint yet of a true ‘crisis’ – these developments” may, in fact, have a salutary effect with “easy credit becoming less easy (and) excessive liquidity returning to more rational levels.” Gross still sees strong global growth ahead, but as a bond fund manager, he’s paid to worry.

    In his report, Grantham is worried, too, and notes the housing decline affects prices, credit growth and consumption when subprime and other loan rates are reset higher with a considerable amount coming this year and even more ahead as just noted. In addition, and most significantly, he says rising inflation and widening risk premiums lower “the feasible leverage in private equity deals and place many deals that can be done today (meaning last spring) out of reach, which, in turn, has dire effects on the current stock market (and economy).”

    In his current July client Letter, Grantham conceded “no areas of this unprecedented global bubble had yet gone hyperbolic like the internet and tech stocks did in 1999 (until now):” The “candidate” is “the growth rate of leveraged loans. At (a hugely speculative) $545 billion for the first half of this year, it is running 60% up on last year” that’s about the same size gain dot.com and tech stocks made year over year in 1999 with painful consequences not far behind for investors owning them.

    Grantham’s July commentary mentioned one other likely market headwind after the 2008 election. It’s the expected fallout from “piling on” moves of “more wealth to the wealthy by shifting more of the tax load to sales and income taxes of average taxpayers and away from the capital gains and dividend taxes of the wealthy.” It means “ordinary working stiffs are not doing particularly well….and are getting antsy” enough to worry politicians to raise taxes on the most well-off.

    Grantham expects them to come in higher taxes on capital gains, dividends and top-end ordinary income rates as well as redefining what income is. That will mean more of it will be taxed to reduce the gross disparity between what rich and ordinary folks now pay, and not a moment too soon for those championing fairness, not special privilege. If this happens, however, it “will not be good for the animal spirits of investors” who represent the most important bubble-sustaining input.

    Grantham sums up his current thinking with what he calls a “torture(d) analogy.” He compares the global financial system to a giant suspension bridge. “Thousands of bolts hold it together. Today a few of them have fractures and one or two seem to have failed completely. The bridge, however, with typical redundancy built in (unlike the Minnesota one that collapsed), can (easily) take a few failed bolts, perhaps quite a few….This global financial structure is far too large and has far too many interlocking pieces for weakening US house prices and a few subprime issues to bring it down.”

    What is worrisome is whether or when we reach a “broad-based level of financial metal fatigue” causing simultaneous multiple bolt failures “with ultimately disastrous consequences.” What’s also scary is the global financial structure is heavily “faith based, held together by unprecedented amounts of animal spirits” moving in the same positive direction. If the faith wanes, it’s then “every man for himself” and look out below.

    Also worrisome, but so far contained, is growing subprime mortgage trouble. Until a month ago, equity markets were totally unaffected and may bounce back from their current sell-off. Grantham isn’t panicking but shows concern about flat to declining home prices, a high inventory of unsold homes likely moving higher, and mortgage “honeymoon rate” reset increases up to 2.5 points coming soon for holders “already stretched.” We’re told, he says, that even the subprime market is “contained,” but we have to wonder if “the container, in this case, will turn out to be Pandora’s.”

    Then there’s a slowing economy, inflation concerns, high oil and other industrial commodity prices and now agricultural ones as well “boosted by ethanol production” pressuring consumers. “So two of the three great asset classes (now all three) are having the wobblies in some of their components” – real estate and low grade debt (and since mid-July equities and other type debt instruments as well), “especially real-estate related but increasingly including corporate loans and private equity funding….”

    Grantham may have written this commentary before the the July-mid-August equity market sell-off. However, based on his prior (and long-standing) comments, his current analysis probably still holds true: “stocks (will likely) make it through this third (and traditionally strongest) year of the Presidential (four year market) Cycle.” The third year in the Cycle “has never declined materially and should be considered the bane of short sellers (and equity market naysayers) everywhere.”

    In sum, Grantham says, “a few more bolts in the bridge may fail, but in the end you have to bet the bridge will hold, supported by amazing animal spirits.” At least that’s true up to October when the fourth year of the Cycle begins. Then, the “odds of failure rise” but won’t likely become high until October, 2008 with a new administration and Congress soon to take power. Grantham then gets blunt stating “based on history” (and tax increases he expects), that’s the most likely time for a bear market, and he’s betting on one that could be nasty.

    He concludes saying he’s been trying to come up with a simple way to explain “how serious the situation is for the overstretched, overleveraged financial system.” He does it this way: “In 5 years I expect….at least one major bank (broadly defined) to have failed and up to half the hedge funds and a substantial percentage of the private equity firms in existence today (to have) simply ceased to exist.”

    He continues saying he’s been too bearish at times in the past 12 years but his language “has almost never been this dire.” His feeling is that today we’re “watching a very slow motion train wreck” beyond the point of stopping so watch out ahead. It’s a good idea to be cautious and prepare. If he’s right and economic conditions deteriorate enough, everyone will be affected through job and income losses along with investors losing big from speculative and other investments. All financial bubbles end. Sadly, even those not participating in them get burned, especially those most vulnerable and least able to ride out the storm that could be mean, nasty and long.

    Engineering the Coming Wreck

    Back in October, 2002, Grantham took aim at a financial icon Wall Street and the financial press practically defied when he chaired the Federal Reserve from August, 1987 to end of January, 2006. It didn’t matter to them (and still doesn’t) that he engineered the largest ever stock market bubble and bust in history through incompetence, timidity, dereliction of duty or a combination of all three. In their eyes, Alan Greenspan was above reproach. He could do no wrong, and here’s why. His policies made it possible for wealthy and powerful investors to cash in big as long as the party lasted, and then get plenty of advance warning when to exit.

    Most ordinary investors, on the other hand, were caught flat-footed based on advice from market pundit fraudsters with Mr. Greenspan most deceptive and influential of all. In January, 2000, just weeks short of the market peak, he claimed “the American economy was experiencing a once-in-a-century acceleration of innovation, which propelled forward productivity, output, corporate profits and stock prices at a pace not seen in generations, if ever.”

    Grantham’s reply to this outburst: “Phew!” He might have also drawn an analogy to famed Yale University economics professor Irving Fisher’s comments just before the 1929 stock market crash. He claimed economic fundamentals in the country were strong, the stock market was undervalued, and an unending period of prosperity lay ahead. It just took over a decade to arrive and plenty of pain to go around before it did.

    Grantham spared Fisher, but bashed Greenspan saying: “The internet (highlighted by the dot.com bubble), which had ‘pushed back the fog of uncertainty’ for corporations, was his particular pet.” It’s hard to believe now Greenspan actually said: “Lofty equity prices have reduced the cost of capital. The result has been a veritable explosion of spending on high-tech equipment….And I see nothing to suggest that these opportunities will peter out anytime soon….Indeed many argue that the pace of innovation will continue to quicken….to exploit the still largely untapped potential for e-commerce, especially the business-to-business arena.”

    One week later, the Nasdaq peaked at 5048 and fell to a low of 1114 on October 9, 2002 losing 78% of its value. The broadly based S&P 500 stock index merely dropped from its March 24, 2000 high of 1527 to an October 9, 2002 bottom at 777 for a loss of 49%. Mr. Greenspan was nowhere in sight but was busy reengineering phase two of the bubble with a tsunami of easy money. His successor now continues the same policy despite his high-sounding Fedspeak concerns for inflation and a stable economy. Call it more Fedbaloney pointing to the obvious eventual consequences ahead. The Fed-built credit bubble and other excesses are unwinding. Before it’s over, they’ll be plenty of pain to go around and another culpable Fed Chairman claiming no responsibility and being able to get away with it.

    Grantham was clearly upset in October, 2002 and made his views known to investors. His commentary was titled “Feet of Clay – Alan Greenspan’s Contribution to the Great American Equity Bubble.” He started out with a Fed Chairman’s job description saying “In its earlier years, the Fed’s emphasis seems to have been on economic activity….By the nineties, the heavy emphasis (shifted) to inflation control.” Both objectives are “critical to stability,” because the Fed’s “underlying job” is to maintain “general economic stability,” not fuel bubbles. “Nothing threatens (that stability) more than the deflating of a major stock market bubble.” It’s the Fed’s job to spot and moderate them in time and be willing “to bear the (political) consequences” for its actions. Alan Greenspan failed on all counts.

    “Did he see the (largest in US history) bubble coming,” Grantham asked? He provided generous amounts of liquidity fueling it, and when things began getting out of hand, all he did was suggest “irrational exuberance” might have “unduly escalated asset values” in a December, 1996 speech. He did nothing to curb it then or thereafter whereas he could have raised interest rates, margin requirements and added a lot more jawboning persuasion to cool an overheated market and restore stability.

    Grantham was clear and emphatic: “Had Greenspan been prepared to use all the tools available and shown his determination, it almost certainly would have worked” enough to prevent the market plunge after March, 2000. Not only did he fail to act, but he then denied all responsibility for what Grantham called “the Greenspan fiasco….he has overtaken my efforts with his breathtakingly shameless and complete denial of responsibility….he seems to have believed….this new era nonsense (at its) March 2000 (peak more completely) than anyone else….the title of ‘most credulous’ (and Fed Chairman) belong to the same man.” By his concocted “logic,” he’d have “fail(ed) a Finance 101 final.”

    Even worse, Greenspan “had the knowledge, experience, and belief and failed to act.” Yet, to this day he’s gotten away with it. He’s still extolled in lofty terms, practically elevated to the ranks of sainthood, and is now retired to new “green” pastures of lucrative book deals and speaking engagements (at $100,000 fees) where his every word is still taken as market gospel. In addition, Greenspan Associates began operating in May with his lawyer, Robert Barnett, saying “virtually every major investment-banking firm” in the world is eager to hire him for his rainmaking connections. Better those than his advice best avoided.

    The Greenspan legacy got Grantham to conclude: “You can indeed ‘fool most of the people all of the time.’ ‘Most of the people’ this time probably included Her Majesty who (days earlier on September 26) knighted (Sir Alan) for his global services. My secret hope though is that she justified it by having had a good short position for the last 3 years.” Or “short” of that, been tipped off in time to bail out at the top and let her subjects take the pain.

    Engineering the Coming Wreck – Part II

    Other than rampaging armies on the move, no institution anywhere has more power than central banks. And no central bank has more of it than the US Federal Reserve unless it’s the secretive, unaccountable Bank of International Settlements (BIS) founded in 1930 and based in Basle, Switzerland. The BIS is central banker to its member banks (a sort of financial boss of bosses) that includes the Federal Reserve.

    Some savvy financial experts believe the world’s ruling elites control this bank of banks and intend using it to establish a global borderless financial world controlled by them. It’s no hairbrained conclusion with the European Union in place, talk of a similar one in Africa, and a North American Security and Prosperity Partnership arrangement coming to a head that will create a borderless continent headquartered in Washington and likely will aim next to link with the EU for greater global control.

    So what’s important about the Fed, and why should we care? Despite common belief, the Federal Reserve is not a government agency. It’s a privately owned for profit cartel of powerful banks (including Wall Street ones) protected by law, even though the Federal Reserve Act of 1913 violates the US Constitution. It’s Article I, Section 8 states “The Congress shall have Power To coin Money (and) regulate the Value thereof…” In 1935, the Supreme Court ruled only Congress has this power and cannot constitutionally delegate it to another group or body, and that includes private for profit bankers running the Fed.

    Simply put, commercial banks in charge of printing and controlling the nation’s money supply constitutes criminal fraud. It’s the reason the Federal Reserve was designed to look like a government agency when, in fact, it isn’t. Being headquartered in Washington in the stately mausoleum-looking Eccles building is just part of the clever subterfuge.

    But it’s even worse than that. By establishing the Federal Reserve, Congress and President Woodrow Wilson privatized the nation’s money creation system relinquishing the most important power governments have that got famed banker Baron MA Rothschild once to say: “Give me control over a nation’s currency and I care not who makes its laws.”

    Ever since US private bankers got it, they’ve been empowered to print money in any amount, control its supply and price, and benefit hugely by loaning it out for profit. That includes making government pay interest on its own money it wouldn’t have to do by printing its own. This amounts to no less that government sanctioning the right to counterfeit the national currency for private gain with the Fed and private bankers being world class pirates masquerading as guardians of the public interest.

    It’s no exaggeration to call this the all-time, greatest ever financial scam, still ongoing, and totally beyond the reach of public or any other type scrutiny. If there were any, it would be learned this institution was created as a scheme to transfer wealth from ordinary people to giant banks and Wall Street. It’s worked like a charm, and few people are the wiser.

    But there’s more still to the story, and it keeps getting uglier. Supposedly, the Federal Reserve was established to stabilize the economy; smooth out the business cycle; maintain a steady, healthy rate of sustainable growth; create price stability and control inflation; and work for the betterment of everyone. So let’s grade it on its performance.

    Since 1913, we had economic crashes in 1921, and the major one in 1929 followed by The Great Depression lasting until the outbreak of WW II. Post-war, we then had recessions in 1953, 1957, 1969, 1975, 1981, 1990, 2001, and we’re likely heading for future major trouble resulting from past Fed policy abuses under Alan Greenspan and his successor, Ben Bernanke, carrying on in the same fashion. We also had a serious inflation problem beginning in the 1960s that became crisis-level severe in the 1970s and early 80s. In addition, in the wake of reckless financial market deregulation in the 1980s and lack of government oversight (with the Fed’s blessing), we had a major financial crisis causing more bank failures than ever before or since in our history.

    Further still, under the Fed, we’ve had –

    — soaring consumer debt;

    — record high federal budget and current account deficits;

    — an off-the-charts national debt, far higher than the fictitious reported number;

    — a high and rising level of personal bankruptcies and mortgage loan delinquencies and defaults;

    — an enormous government debt service obligation we’re taxed to pay for;

    — the systematic loss of manufacturing and other high-paying jobs to low-wage countries;

    — a secular declining economy, 84% service-based, and mostly comprised of low-wage, low or no-benefit, non-unionized jobs;

    — an unprecedented wealth gap disparity;

    — growing rates of poverty in the richest country in the world;

    — a decline of essential social services; and

    — a lawless nation devoted to militarism and imperial conquest with the Federal Reserve complicit in supplying all the funds needed to fuel it, and all the while caring not for the public interest it’s supposed to serve.

    This type record adds up to a clear conclusion. Above all else, the Federal Reserve failed to accomplish what it’s supposed to do revealing instead what’s really going on. The Fed doesn’t serve the public interest. It abuses it because that’s how bankers and all corporate predators make money. In the world of finance, ordinary people lose out because giant banks and Wall Street are allowed to pull off the grandest of grand thefts, their thievery continues unabated, and the stakes keep rising.

    Some astute financial observers now believe current excesses and resulting turmoil were caused by the intentional engineering of the US housing bubble with the Fed in on the scheme. Insiders made loads of easy money in the process and now stand to cash in big buying troubled assets for a fraction of their value the way they always do in the wake of market meltdowns. It’s called “vulture” investing with shrewd buyers profiting hugely in good and bad times that are all good for them.

    One analyst calls the subprime mortgage turbulence a global bank run with potential huge yet to emerge consequences. Writer Danny Schechter has another view in his article titled: “Subprime Or Subcrime? Time to Investigate and Prosecute,” and he makes a strong case. He calls the subprime credit squeeze a “sub-crime ponzi scheme (causing) millions of people (to lose) their homes because of criminal and fraudulent tactics used by financial institutions (posing) as respectable players in a highly rigged casino-like market system.” There’s nothing free and open about it.

    The problem is deep, structural and aided by stripped away regulatory protections giving predatory lenders and Wall Street schemers free reign to target unsuspecting victims. Part of Schechter’s fix is calling for a “jailout,” not a “bailout,” but with friends in high places, don’t bet on it beyond a small fry or two. It’s sad and disturbing because this type behavior is part of the American “ethic” to scheme, defraud and prey on the innocent knowing big players nearly always get away with it, and under George Bush, it’s practically guaranteed.

    With a clear field ahead and friends in high places, the “Masters of the Universe” are now heading for their perfect kind of buying opportunity if Jeremy Grantham and other worriers are right. Manipulation aside, Grantham’s persuasive evidence suggests we’re watching an unstoppable “very slow motion train wreck” likely to be pretty ugly on “impact.” By his reckoning, it’s probably too late to undue the enormous damage done no one will escape from. His advice is that to be forewarned is forearmed to prepare as best as possible although for most people it’s practically impossible.

    It’s a good time to think of the ancient Chinese proverb, that’s, in fact, a curse and not of Chinese origin, but it sounds good saying it is: “May you live in interesting times.” Whoever coined the phrase intended it to be ironic and “interesting” meant dangerous, turbulent or uncertain. That, indeed, is true now but to what degree we’ll only know in the fullness of time.

    Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago and can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

    Also visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com and listen to The Steve Lendman News and Information Hour on TheMicroEffect.com Saturdays at noon US central time and now archived for easy listening.

    The Toxic Chemistry of Everyday Products

    0

    By Vanja Petrovic

    Investigative journalist Mark Schapiro discusses why companies that manufacture hazard-free products for the European Union often produce toxin-filled versions of the same items for America and developing countries.

    American industry would have you believe that taking potentially hazardous and toxic chemicals out of everyday consumer products — removing phthalates from children’s toys and cancer-causing coal tar from hair dye — would damage our economy and result in a loss of American jobs. In his latest book, Exposed: The Toxic Chemistry of Everyday Products, Mark Schapiro busts this myth and reveals the grim fact that some companies, whether American or international, often have two production lines: one that manufactures hazard-free products for the European Union and another that produces toxin-filled versions of the same items for America and developing countries.

    Schapiro examines how America, once a leader in environmental protection, came to allow potentially toxic and mutagenic chemicals, banned by the EU, into everyday products. He also looks at how the EU’s economy — almost identical to that of America — continued to thrive even after these chemicals were banned, essentially “calling the bluff” of the American industry.

    Schapiro, an investigative journalist for more than two decades, has built an award-winning track record with a focus on environmental and international affairs. His work has appeared in Harper’s, the Nation, Mother Jones, and the Atlantic Monthly. He has also been a correspondent on NOW with Bill Moyers, Frontline/World, and Marketplace.

    AlterNet spoke with Schapiro in Berkeley at the Center for Investigative Reporting, where he is currently the editorial director.

    Vanja Petrovic: Why did you choose to write this book now?

    Mark Schapiro: I’ve been following the evolution of the European Union for some time now, just because I spent a lot of time working in Europe. I’ve been both a reporter and an editor in Western Europe as well as Eastern Europe after 1989. And I spent quite a bit of time reporting in and out of the European Union. So, I watched as this entity, called the European Union, evolved into a functioning, powerful political and economic body.

    What I think most Americans have missed is that, in the interim, this very powerful political force has emerged within Europe. It has enforced laws from Brussels that are applied now in 27 different countries.

    Traditionally, the United States has been the single most powerful economic force in the world — that’s what we’ve seen until now. Suddenly, the EU has a bigger economy than the United States of America. The EU exports more goods to the rest of the world than the United States of America. The EU has a higher GNP than the United States of America.

    Now, I think, we are in a historic period. There’s an enormous historic shift that’s going on right now. And that shift, when historians look back on this time period, they’re going to look at this enormous tectonic shift in international influence and international power. What they’re going to see is a kind of dramatically dwindling American influence, and that’s partly a result of the foreign policy of the current administration, and it’s also partly a result of the sheer, cold economic numbers, in which the United States is no longer the only dominant economic force in the world. That shift has enormous implications, and I think it’s one of the biggest untold stories of the 21st century. What I wanted to look at is what the environmental implications of that shift are.

    Petrovic: What is the message behind this book?

    Schapiro: The environmental battles in the United States have been kind of repeated over 20 years, and it’s the same battle over and over with different ingredients. The environmental community says, “Take this chemical out of this because it’s dangerous,” and the industry says, “One, it’s not dangerous, and two, it’s not economical, and we’ll fall out of business, and Americans are going to lose their jobs.” And this goes back and forth over and over again — it’s like Kabuki theater.

    So, for the first time what you have is an economic power that’s the equivalent of the United States — it’s the equivalent in terms of affluence, in terms of education, in terms of overall sophistication and overall development — which is saying, “No, we can actually take these particular toxic chemicals out of these products, out of our computers, out of our pajamas, out of our cosmetics, and still be successful as an economy.”

    Cont http://www.alternet.org/healthwellness/59714/?page=2

    Army suicides highest in 26 years

    0

    By PAULINE JELINEK

    Army soldiers committed suicide last year at the highest rate in 26 years, and more than a quarter did so while serving in Iraq and Afghanistan, according to a new military report.

    The report, obtained by The Associated Press ahead of its scheduled release Thursday, found there were 99 confirmed suicides among active duty soldiers during 2006, up from 88 the previous year and the highest since the 102 suicides in 1991.

    “Iraq was the most common deployment location for both (suicides) and attempts,” the report said.

    The 99 suicides included 28 soldiers deployed to the two wars and 71 who weren’t. About twice as many women serving in Iraq and Afghanistan committed suicide as did women not sent to war, the report said.

    Preliminary numbers for the first half of this year indicate the number of suicides could decline across the service in 2007 but increase among troops serving in the wars, officials said.

    The increases for 2006 came as Army officials worked to set up a number of new and stronger programs for providing mental health care to a force strained by the longer-than-expected war in Iraq and the global counterterrorism war entering its sixth year.

    Failed personal relationships, legal and financial problems and the stress of their jobs were factors motivating the soldiers to commit suicide, according to the report.

    “In addition, there was a significant relationship between suicide attempts and number of days deployed” in Iraq, Afghanistan or nearby countries where troops are participating in the war effort, it said. The same pattern seemed to hold true for those who not only attempted, but succeeded in killing themselves.

    There also “was limited evidence to support the view that multiple … deployments are a risk factor for suicide behaviors,” it said.

    About a quarter of those who killed themselves had a history of at least one psychiatric disorder. Of those, about 20 percent had been diagnosed with a mood disorder such as bipolar disorder and/or depression; and 8 percent had been diagnosed with an anxiety disorder, including post traumatic stress disorder – one of the signature injuries of the conflict in Iraq.

    Firearms were the most common method of suicide. Those who attempted suicide but didn’t succeed tended more often to take overdoses and cut themselves.

    In a service of more than a half million troop, the 99 suicides amounted to a rate of 17.3 per 100,000 – the highest in the past 26 years, the report said. The average rate over those years has been 12.3 per 100,000.

    The rate for those serving in the wars stayed about the same, 19.4 per 100,000 in 2006, compared with 19.9 in 2005.

    The Army said the information was compiled from reports collected as part of its suicide prevention program – reports required for all “suicide-related behaviors that result in death, hospitalization or evacuation” of the soldier. It can take considerable time to investigate a suicide and, in fact, the Army said that in addition to the 99 confirmed suicides last year, there are two other deaths suspected as suicides in which investigations were pending.

    7/7 Survivors and relatives demand an independent public enquiry

    0

    Survivors of the 7 July London bombings have threatened legal action over the government’s refusal to grant an independent public inquiry. A group of survivors and relatives of those killed have handed a letter into the Home Office.

    This document outlines the group’s intention to pursue a Judicial Review if the government does not allow a public inquiry to be held.

    The four suicide bombings killed 52 people and injured nearly 800.

    The group of survivors and relatives of the dead have said they would prefer not to pursue a formal judicial challenge and incur potentially costly litigation.

    ‘Unimaginable suffering’

    But James Oury, senior partner of Oury Clark Solicitors, said because the former Home Secretary, Dr John Reid, refused their request earlier this year to grant an independent public inquiry, they had been forced to consider this legal challenge.

    Mr Oury said: “There is continued uncertainty over the events leading up to the attacks on 7 July 2005 and an independent inquiry is seen as an appropriate way to address this concern.

    “Our clients have endured unimaginable suffering in physical and emotional terms and it is unfair and inappropriate for the government to force our clients into an adversarial, costly and complex court setting – a litigation corner”.

    The group say that the Intelligence and Scrutiny Committee report published by government into the bombings is ‘imperfect’.

    They also say they do not accept that any of the investigations or reports carried out so far sufficiently comply with the government’s obligation to protect life.

    BBC

    Britain cuts arms to Israel due to feers of Human rights violations‎

    0

    The British government has blocked almost one third of British military exports to Israel this year, citing possible threats to regional stability and fears the equipment might facilitate human rights violations.

    According to official figures, the value of UK military sales arms to Israel declined by one third last year, and has fallen by a drastic 75 percent since 2005.

    “There is evidence that the British government’s export control policy to Israel may have been tightened up,” said Parliament’s new 2007 Strategic Export Controls report, issued by the Quadrapartite Commission, which comprises representatives from four ministries.

    The change in policy, said the report, reflects a convergence of government attitudes with its own official guidelines.

    The report comes amid a period of uncertainty in Anglo-Israeli relations.
    While the new prime minister, Gordon Brown, has voiced public support for Israel and has appointed several pro-Israel MPs to cabinet positions, he has also promoted a leading critic of US and Israeli policy, former UN deputy secretary-general Mark Malloch Brown, to a key Foreign Office post.
    Outside of government, the opposition Liberal Democrat party has called for a rethinking of arms sales to Israel, while in May the UK’s Legal Services Commission, the state agency that provides funding for attorney’s fees for indigent defendants, agreed to underwrite the costs of litigation brought by a Palestinian man in a British court seeking a ban on arms sales to Israel.
    The August 7 Quadripartite Committee report largely praised the government’s overall handling of strategic exports but warned that the rapid pace of technological change and rising threat of terrorism required increased state vigilance.

    “Any gaps in the legislation could have serious consequences for the UK,” it concluded.

    However, it criticized as “unclear” the British government’s policies on arms sales to Israel.

    While the “case-by-case” approach gave the government a “flexibility” that allowed a “latitude to adjust policy without the need for public explanation,” its arms sales policies towards Israel were “neither transparent nor accountable,” the panel found.

    The committee asked that “the government explain its policy on licensing exports to Israel, Jordan or other countries in the Middle East and that it explain whether it has adjusted its policy since 1997 as events in the Occupied Territories and Middle East have unfolded.”

    “We further recommend that the government explain how it assesses whether there is a clear risk‚ that a proposed export to Israel might be used for internal repression,” it said.

    Statistics published by the committee showed that arms exports to Israel totaled 14.5 million pounds last year (about $29 million), compared to GBP 22.5 million in 2005. Between 1997 and 2006 Britain granted Israel 1561 Standard Individual Export Licenses (SIELs) valued at GBP 113 million. During the same period it authorized 626 SIELs valued at GBP 136.5 million for shipment to Jordan.

    However, over the last 10 years, 190 application for military sales to Israel have been prohibited, comprising 11 percent of all applications for sales of military equipment. During the same period, only two such applications were rejected for military and restricted goods bound for Jordan.

    The British government reported it had approved 37 military SIELs to Israel in the first quarter of 2007 valued at GBP 1.5 million, a rate that if held constant throughout the year would cut British sales to Israel by three quarters since 2005.

    The UK also blocked 11 SIELs to Israel in the first three months of 2007: three for airborne guidance systems, four for information security systems and equipment, one for munitions, one for fire control equipment, one for electronic components, and one for specialty aluminum alloys.

    Three SIELs for the sale of radar and avionics guidance systems to a third country for use in aircraft destined for the IAF were blocked this year also.
    The 14 rejected SIELs violated various “Consolidated EU and National Arms Licensing Criteria,” the Foreign Office stated, citing concerns the shipments would not respect “human rights and the fundamental freedoms in the country of final destination,” would worsen the “the internal situation in the country of final destination;” and would harm “regional peace, security and stability.”

    One SIEL was denied due to the “behavior of the buyer country with regard to the international community; in particular its attitude to terrorism, the nature of its alliances and respect for international law,” while concerns the equipment would be “diverted” for non-approved uses or “re-exported under undesirable conditions” were cited in rejecting three SIELs.

    The Foreign Office said in its annual human rights report to Parliament that “progress on improving the human rights situation” in Israel and the territories had been “limited.”

    Testifying before the committee on March 15, foreign secretary Margaret Beckett stated that the Foreign Office kept a “close eye” on the uses made by the IDF of British military equipment.

    The then-foreign secretary said: “If we discovered that equipment had been sold to Israel and was being used contrary to agreed terms, we would regard that with grave concern and we would make sure we did not issue licenses for such equipment in the future.”

    Beckett said at the time that Britain’s total arms sales to Israel were slight. “I believe something like 0.1% of Israel’s total arms imports comes from the United Kingdom, and we have not sold main equipment like tanks or artillery or warships to Israel since 1997,” she said, noting the Blair government had “visibly conformed” to EU guidelines not to sell equipment that might harm regional peace, security and stability in the Middle East.

    During last year’s Second Lebanon War, the leader of the opposition Liberal Democrat party urged the government to review its arms sales to Israel.
    Sir Menzies Campbell said the government “must now comply with its own arms export rules and institute an immediate suspension of all UK arms exports to Israel.”

    Pressure is also being exerted through the courts to end arms sales to Israel.

    Last November, Public Interest Lawyers, in cooperation with the Palestinian rights group, al-Haq, filed suit against the British government on behalf of Saleh Hasan of Bethlehem. Hasan claimed the sale of military goods to Israel violated British export guidelines and contributed to his “oppression” as a Palestinian by Israel.

    Phil Shiner, head of Public Interest Lawyers, stated the crux of their case was whether the British government had met its own criteria about what it can and cannot do in terms of arms exports where there is a risk of internal repression in another country.

    In May, a spokesman for the Legal Services Commission said Hasan’s lawsuit was receiving legal aid as a test case.

    “The fact that applicants may live abroad is not a factor under the legal aid scheme,” he told The Times. “The key is whether the case involves issues of English law and will be tried in this jurisdiction.”

    The case is scheduled for a court hearing in October.

    israelforum.com

    Rove’s dirty tricks: Let us count the ways

    0

    By Amy Goodman 

    Karl Rove’s resignation as deputy White House chief of staff cements the political future of the waning Bush administration. George W. will have little to do except wield his veto pen; he doesn’t need the steadying hand of Rove for that, or his strategic insight.

    As Rove joins the ranks of discredited politicians who resign “in order to spend more time with family,” a retrospective of his dirty tricks might be in order. Much is attributed to Rove, dubbed “Bush’s Brain” by Texas journalists Wayne Slater and James Moore, yet very little sticks to the man. Bearing in mind that we presume innocence until guilt is proven, read on:

  • In 1970, College Republican Rove stole letterhead from the Illinois Democratic campaign of Alan Dixon, and used it to invite hundreds of people to Dixon’s new headquarters opening, promising “free beer, free food, girls and a good time for nothing,” disrupting the event.
  • In 1973, Rove ran for chairman of the College Republicans. He challenged the front-runner’s delegates, throwing the national convention into disarray, after which both he and his opponent, Robert Edgeworth, claimed victory. The dispute was resolved when Rove was selected through the direct order of the chairman of the Republican National Committee, who at the time was none other than George H.W. Bush.
  • In 1986, while working for Texas Republican gubernatorial hopeful William Clements, Rove claimed that his personal office had been bugged, most likely by the campaign of incumbent Democratic Gov. Mark White. Nothing was proved, but the negative press, weeks before the election, helped Rove’s man win a narrow victory. FBI agent Greg Rampton removed the bug, disrupting any attempt to properly investigate who planted it.
  • When Rove advised on George W. Bush’s 1994 race for governor of Texas against Democratic incumbent Ann Richards, a persistent whisper campaign in conservative East Texas wrongly suggested that Richards was a lesbian. According to Texas journalist Lou Dubose: “No one ever traced the character assassination to Rove. Yet no one doubts that Rove was behind it. It’s a process on which he holds a patent. Identify your opponent’s strength, and attack it so relentlessly that it becomes a liability. Richards was admired because she promised and delivered a ‘government that looked more like the people of the state.’ That included the appointment of blacks, Hispanics and gays and lesbians. Rove made that asset a liability.”
  • After John McCain thumped George W. Bush in the 2000 New Hampshire primary, with 48 percent of the vote to Bush’s 30 percent, a massive smear campaign was launched in South Carolina, a key battleground. TV attack ads from third groups and anonymous fliers circulated, variously suggesting that McCain’s experience as a prisoner of war in Vietnam left him mentally scarred with an uncontrollable temper, that his wife, Cindy, abused drugs and that he had an African-American “love child.” In fact, the McCains adopted their daughter Bridget from a Bangladesh orphanage run by Mother Teresa.
  • According to the investigation of Special Prosecutor Patrick Fitzgerald, Rove played a central role in the outing of undercover CIA operative Valerie Plame to columnist Robert Novak and former Time magazine reporter Matthew Cooper, in retaliation for her husband Joe Wilson’s accusation that the Bush administration falsely claimed that Saddam Hussein sought uranium in Niger.
  • Rove has ignored subpoenas to testify before Congress regarding the Justice Department scandal of the firing of nine U.S. attorneys. He skipped a hearing on improper use of RNC e-mail accounts by White House staff, which allowed them to skirt the Presidential Records Act. Rove claims he enjoys executive privilege, which travels with him as he leaves the White House.These are but some of the dirty tricks attributed to Karl Rove. We are to believe that Rove, born Christmas Day, 1950, is retiring to write books. Former Texas Agriculture Commissioner and populist firebrand Jim Hightower describes Rove’s departure as “a rat jumping off a sinking ship.” But arch-Rove watcher Wayne Slater of The Dallas Morning News knows better. He notes that Rove and his wife have built a house in the Florida Panhandle — the “Republican Riviera” — and that former Florida Gov. Jeb Bush will be 59 in 2012, a ripe age for a run for the White House.

    Regardless, the art and science of the political dirty tricks, learned by Rove in the Nixon years and perfected by him in the George W. Bush White House, will be with us for years to come.

  • Unelected President Bush claims IRAN’s top fighting unit is a terrorist outfit

    0

    By John Blacker

    The Bush crook is warming up for his war in Iraq it would seem. The New Butcher of Baghdad is about to become the Butcher of Earth before he has to go in 2008.

    I suspect he has no idea he could technically get his butt kicked big time. If Iran were to attack Baghdad and cut off reinforcements from Basra, incite all the local Teliban to uprise and hold down any reinforcement support, then get the Israelis preoccupied in Lebanon to keep them tied down, use the Syrian & Iranian air force to preemptively attack carriers in the gulf by flying at low level – Bush & Brown could in theory be beaten in combat.

    Break the supply lines and hold that ground for 1 month and our chaps would have to withdraw or surrender.

    Do you think that would make the UK and USA any safer?

    So what will Bush do – he will use nukes, which could bring China and Russia into the war on the side of Iran to protect their economic interests, if that happened then troops would pour into Canada and take the US because the US has most of its troops in Iraq and Afghanistan.

    Also India may attack the southern boarder with China – recent chinwags between India and china could have mentioned this possibility.

    I have a gut feeling WW3 is here and about to grow big time.

    US to brand Iran Guard ‘terrorist’
    Al Jazeera

    The US government has confirmed that the White House is about to formally designate Iran’s Revolutionary Guard as a terrorist group, a new escalation in tensions between the two nations.

    Iran’s foreign ministry has dismissed the move as “worthless propaganda”.

    Analysts see the move as a reflection of frustration in Washington over Tehran’s nuclear programme and suspected role in Iraqi violence.

    Trita Parsi, an Iranian affairs analyst, said: “This is coming at a time when the Bush administration is seeking Iran’s help to stabilise Iraq.

    “And it’s very hard to see how the administration expects diplomacy to succeed when at the same time it is designating partners in that diplomacy as terrorists.”

    George Bush, the US president, is under pressure from members of congress and members of his own administration, including his vice-president, Dick Cheney, who are frustrated by lack of progress in curbing Iran’s nuclear ambitions.

    The US military also says the Revolutionary Guards provides military support for anti-American fighters in Iraq.

    The terrorist designation would allow the Bush administration to target the group’s extensive business operations, including a crackdown on non-US companies doing business with the Guard’s various financial enterprises.

    The UN Security Council levied sanctions on specific Guard commanders and their businesses this year.

    The Bush administration is expected to formally put the terrorist label on the Guard before the UN General Assembly meeting next month.

    Washington is also pushing the security council to prepare another resolution against Iran over its refusal to give up sensitive uranium enrichment work – but it has had problems getting agreement from Russia and China.

    It would be the first time the US has placed the armed forces of any sovereign government on its list of terrorist organisations.

    The US list of individuals, businesses, charities and groups believed to be engaged in terrorist activities includes al-Qaeda; Hezbollah, the Lebanese Shia movement; and Hamas and Islamic Jihad, both Palestinian groups.

    Troops die from Depleted Uranium poison even before going into battle

    0

    Soldier exposed to depleted uranium in training dies of leukemia caused by toxic weapon residue

    By Mark Anderson 

    Several young U.S. Marines in the same California hospital ward are suffering from the same aggressive form of leukemia, and the cancer may be linked to exposure to depleted uranium (DU). DU is a super-dense radioactive material that’s mainly used as plating on U.S. munitions, functioning as an extremely effective kinetic-energy penetrator to pierce armor.

    At least one Marine, Eric Renner of Oregon City, has died from this form of leukemia. However, Renner reportedly never even went to Iraq. It’s believed DU exposure during live-fire training brought on his illness.

    Renner’s father, Steve, went public with his concerns about DU after hearing that another Marine, 22-year-old Andy Rounds, may have been exposed to DU when a munitions dump exploded at his base in Iraq–an event that resembles the incident at Camp Doha in the first Gulf War that spread enough DU particles and shrapnel around to qualify it for current-day research on DU’s role in Gulf War Illness (GWI), otherwise known as Gulf War syndrome.

    “Rounds’s treatment is not being covered [financially] by the military because he was not diagnosed until after he was out of the Army,” reported KPTV Channel 12, a Fox News affiliate in Portland, Ore. that ran this story regionally. Matters concerning DU rarely make the national news. The state of Oregon is covering Rounds’s expenses.

    The Research Advisory Committee on Gulf War Illness, a VA-chartered panel meeting in Dallas, put DU on its research list but demoted it to a relatively low priority. The committee, with $15 million a year in funding for five years through fiscal 2010, is studying GWI diagnostic techniques and proposed treatments.

    A doctor at the Dallas meeting told AFP that GWI was limited to the first Gulf War, and is not linked with the current conflict. This opinion was later disputed by Dr. Doug Rokke, who served as a DU cleanup specialist in Gulf War I, is himself sick from war exposures and opposes the continued use of DU, which started in Gulf War I by the U.S. military.

    Rokke insists the government needs to follow its established procedures and regulations pertaining to DU exposure (medical testing of urine and feces should be done within 24 hours of suspected exposure to DU aerosols, residue and shrapnel from combat), and he is calling for the military to follow its own guidelines and clean up the environment in the Persian Gulf, as well as in the Balkans and anywhere else DU has been used.

    The Israeli military uses DU as well. Scores of civilians in or near battle zones have been plagued by myriad illnesses, including cancers and birth defects at least partly attributable to DU contamination of soil, water, food, etc., Rokke says, based on his military experiences.

    Meanwhile, as KPTV noted, the U.S. military denies a link: “The military says it has done extensive research and found no connection between depleted uranium and leukemia.” Military spokesmen routinely refer to DU as having “low level” radiation that is “harmless.”

    Back when Renner visited his dying son at a California military hospital, “four other Marines in the same ward were said to be fighting the same cancer,” KPTV reported. “I thought it was kind of strange,” Renner was quoted as saying by KPTV, which on Aug. 2 posted its report on this matter on its web site, complete with a video link. “This is a bigger problem than anybody really knows.”

    Renner, who hopes speaking out about the DU-leukemia connection will help prevent more cases, told KPTV, “Maybe there’s no conclusive evidence, but based on what I’ve seen and read, there is some responsibility on the military’s part and on the government’s part.”

    As for then-Private Rounds, in 2004, he was serving at a post near Kirkuk, Iraq. Rounds says that he and a few friends were walking one night when the sky lit up, due to a munitions dump filled with old weapons that exploded on his base. Because of brain damage and treatments, Rounds barely remembers the incident. But his mother, Lisa Rounds, believes that whatever exploded that night might have poisoned the surroundings.

    “Why would a healthy, young guy get leukemia when it’s mostly very young children who have a genetic predisposition to it or old people who’ve been exposed to radiation for many years?” she told KPTV.

    Tests showed that Rounds had a white blood cell count of more than 400,000, 40 to 50 times that of a normal count, diagnosed as AML, or acute myelogenous leukemia. Rounds had been out of the military for about two years when he passed out on the floor and was rushed to the hospital, the incident that led to his diagnosis.

    Doctor Tibor Kovascovics, a doctor at the Oregon Health & Science University Cancer Institute, was quoted as saying that “he cannot make a connection” between Rounds’ military service and his leukemia.

    Rokke, however, told AFP recently that DU exposure can manifest itself in many ways, from chronic fatigue to respiratory problems, nervous disorders such as ALS (Lou Gehrig’s disease), fibromyalgia, immune system disorders, rashes, decalcification of teeth and cancers. He stresses that unless soldiers are properly checked for DU exposure right away, following established procedures that he says are ignored, time quickly passes and it becomes harder and harder to pinpoint what caused a soldier to develop a given illness.

    Mrs. Rounds, contacted Aug. 7 by AFP, said that the purpose of getting her son’s story out was to sound the alarm. “They have got to stop treating the soldiers like they’re widgets in a machine,” she said. She wants other soldiers and parents of soldiers to know that Rounds, whose health unfortunately was worsening as of Aug. 7, “started with a sinus infection” which seemed relatively minor, at first.

    Everyone in this situation, even if it seems like a minor illness initially, should immediately get a CBC (complete blood count) “before it snowballs,” she stressed.

    Asked if she thinks DU is the culprit, Mrs. Rounds replied, “Oh, definitely,” adding: “A lot of people would choose not to join the military if they knew they were going to be exposed.”

    China’s Toys containing lead too toxic

    0

    By Alan E. Moses

    This has become stupid as we are so concerned about toys from China and disregard the other heavy metals such as Mercury and Aluminum. We don’t complain about the pesticides and other so called chemicals and compounds that have negative effects on ourselves and children. The Mercury and Aluminum are injected into our children yet Lead is what we worry about most.

    Our understanding about the mercury substances ethyl and methyl mercury seems to be less of a priority. The fact is that mercury is the second most toxic substance to man behind plutonium. Is this fact too hard to understand? Your child just may have more access to mercury than lead in these days of seeking causes for developmental disorders.

    I am to the point where I am thinking of just giving up. Genetics and environmental triggers is what we all have been saying for years. Because we took this stand on the mercury preservative in vaccines we are junk scientists? We well understand that civilization has again caused its own demise. Do you really think that those that may have poisoned our children would admit it?

    Just as the Love Canal and Woburn the denials come first and then the studies that are so very expensive we allow those that poison to continue operations. We seem to protect the guilty ones and deny the innocent. Could thimerosal be the only trigger? Are vaccines alone the true blame?

    I as most of the junk scientists and researchers have shown that it is a combination of toxins that causes this upswing in disorders and diseases that we see. In 1999 it was known that little was known about thimerosal. In 2007 the same holds true. Can we allow our immunity to be destroyed any further? Does this not also have a contribution to wht we see?

    This is not that hard to figure out as we can see that all toxins have this name for a reason. The word toxin means that this substance may harm you depending on amount and genetic susceptibility. Your government agencies have known the dangers and only when the junk scientists record enough information can we find answers.

    Is Autism still climbing? How can we know for the toxin was still there until 2003 or 2004. Thimerosal is still used in many vaccines that are on the recommendation charts that doctors use. More than mercury or lead is toxic to our children. The combinations and just plain over exposure result in the diseases and disorders that we see today. This is simple science.

    Is it that we just don’t really understand or is it that we do and allow sacrifices at these rates? Let us boycott lead and all heavy metals may we include pesticides and industrial pollutants? Have we not become so advanced that we have become stupid?

    Keep your children from lead containing toys, however allow the other toxins to be valid as they are accepted in foods, air or water. Makes no sense to me does it to you?

    Just what the Middle East needs — more WMDs‎

    0

    JTA

     Ehud Olmert thanked the Bush administration for boosting U.S. military aid to Israel.

    Undersecretary of State Nicholas Burns flew to Tel Aviv on Wednesday to finalize a deal in which the United States will donate $30 billion in defense grants to Israel over the next decade, a 25 percent increase over the current assistance.

    Burns met with Israeli Prime Minister Ehud Olmert ahead of the official signing ceremony Thursday.

    “The prime minister asked the undersecretary to convey his appreciation and thanks to U.S. President George W. Bush and Secretary of State Condoleezza Rice for the efforts invested,” Olmert’s office said in a statement.

    “The prime minister noted that the U.S. aid deal is a significant development for Israel and proves once more the depth of the relations between the two countries, as well as the commitment of the United States to the security of Israel and the preservation of its qualitative edge.”

    Govt gives anti-Bush school production a bad review

    1

    The Australian Government has accused a Sydney high school of hijacking an annual competition to protest against a visit by United States President George W. Bush at next month’s Sydney Apec summit.But the organisers and the New South Wales education authority have defended the school’s anti-war themed entry in the Rock Eisteddfod Challenge, saying the event is about freedom of expression.

    Bush will be in Sydney when the event is staged on September 6.

    Bad Knight II, the production by northern Sydney’s Davidson High School, depicts Bush as the pilot of a crashing plane and attacks the US-led invasion of Iraq.

    Federal Education Minister Julie Bishop questioned whether the students were performing material of their own choice.

    One pupil involved in the production said the concept for the performance came from one of the school’s teachers and did not represent the views of all the students involved.

    “There appears to be a teacher’s political agenda here,” said Bishop.

    But the NSW Department of Education said while the idea may have come from a teacher, parents and students had been advised of the content of the performance and had been free to withdraw.

    “The department supports the school and the way they have gone about their Rock Eisteddfod production,” a department spokesman said. “No student could participate without signed parental approval.

    “This is not about politics, it’s about the ability of students to express their views in the atmosphere of a stage production,” he said.

    Rock Eisteddfod Challenge executive producer Peter Sjoquist said organisers had no say in the themes schools chose for the event.

    “Our view is that we provide a professional venue and crew to these schools to enable them to perform on stage,” he said. “The choice of theme is up to the school, parents and students. We don’t get involved in censorship.”

    Opposition education spokesman Andrew Stoner said the NSW Government needed to make it clear that politicising the classroom was unacceptable. “The Department of Education should ensure the positives of the Rock Eisteddfod are not overshadowed by divisive politics,” Stoner said. “Students in our public schools must be allowed the chance to develop their own viewpoints as they grow up.”

    NSW Premier Morris Iemma said students should be allowed to express themselves. “I’ve seen George Bush many times on television and I’ve heard him say that he believes in people’s free speech,” he said. “I don’t think George Bush would want any intervention … that would curtail the right of those students to make their point.”

    – AAP

    China’s ‘Big Brother surveillance’ to dwarf UK

    0

    By Richard Spencer

    China has launched an ambitious “Big Brother” surveillance programme using everything from closed circuit television systems that can recognise faces to identity card computer chips to monitor its population.

    A high-tech security company has been awarded a contract for the first phase of a scheme to encode computer chips for the residence permits all Chinese citizens must carry, starting in the southern city of Shenzhen, near Hong Kong.

    The government will use the chips to control the whereabouts of its hundreds of millions of migrant workers. But they will also store data on the number of their children under the one-child policy, education records and ultimately medical and credit histories.

    The company is already setting up television systems throughout the city armed with “intelligent surveillance” software that can recognise faces.

    Police hope eventually to combine the two systems to provide complete surveillance.

    Shenzhen is being used as a testing ground for part of an all-encompassing security system known as the Golden Shield Project. This also includes computer and mobile phone monitoring through the so-called “Great Firewall” of internet censorship.

    Shenzhen is the most developed city in China, having been turned from a village 30 years ago into a pioneer of the country’s “special economic development zones”.

    It now has a population of more than 12 million – almost twice as many as Hong Kong, on whose border it lies and which it was set up to imitate.

    Per head it is the richest city in China but it suffers from widespread crime and prostitution. Virtually all its population has migrated from elsewhere, a major social issue in China, where residence permits assigned at birth dictate where you can live.

    The closed circuit television system and residence card chips will be provided by China Public Security Technology, run by Chinese entrepreneurs but registered in Florida.

    More than 20,000 new cameras will be installed, according to the New York Times. They will be integrated with 180,000 already set up.

    Hu Jintao, the Chinese president, was the first to test the new system when he passed through immigration at the Shenzhen port on his return from a visit to Hong Kong.

    But the extent of Golden Shield has alarmed human rights groups, who say it extends control over all aspects of people’s lives to authorities subject to little or no accountability.

    Some of the data the authorities intend to retain on the new identity cards includes the owner’s police record; employment history; landlord’s telephone number; educational record; medical insurance status and ethnicity.

    While Britain is known around the world for its surveillance culture due to the soaring numbers of CCTV cameras, human rights activists said the scale and sophistication of the Shenzhen project dwarfed the UK.

    “I don’t think they are remotely comparable, and even in Britain it is quite controversial,” said Dinah PoKempner of Human Rights Watch.

    The US has announced that it is to expand the use of spy satellites for domestic surveillance, turning its “eyes in sky” inward to combat terrorism and eventually for law enforcement.

    Bush Administration Spends $1.6 Billion On Propaganda

    1

    By Christopher Lee

    How much is good press worth? To the Bush administration, about $1.6 billion.

    That’s how much seven federal departments spent from 2003 through the second quarter of 2005 on 343 contracts with public relations firms, advertising agencies, media organizations and individuals, according to a new Government Accountability Office report.

    The 154-page report provides the most comprehensive look to date at the scope of federal spending in an area that generated substantial controversy last year. Congressional Democrats asked the GAO to look into federal public relations contracts last spring at the height of the furor over government-sponsored prepackaged news and journalism-for-sale.

    Armstrong Williams, the conservative commentator, had been unmasked as a paid administration promoter who received $186,000 from the Education Department to speak favorably about President Bush’s No Child Left Behind law in broadcast appearances.

    Around the same time, a spat erupted between the GAO and the White House over whether the government’s practice of feeding TV stations prepackaged, ready-to-air news stories that touted administration policies (but did not disclose the government as the source) amounted to “covert propaganda.” The GAO said that it did. The administration disagreed, saying spreading information about federal programs is part of the agencies’ mission, and that the burden of disclosure falls on the TV stations.

    Congress sided with the GAO. Lawmakers inserted a provision into an annual spending bill requiring federal agencies to include “a clear notification” within the text or audio of a prepackaged news story that it was prepared or paid for by the government.

    The new report reveals that federal public relations spending goes far beyond “video news releases.” The contracts covered the waterfront, from a $6.3 million agreement to help the Department of Homeland Security educate Americans about how to respond to terrorist attacks; to a $647,350 contract to assist the Transportation Security Administration in producing video news releases and media tours on the subject of airport security procedures; to a $6,600 contract to train managers at the Bureau of Reclamation in dealing with the media.

    “Careful oversight of this spending is essential given the track record of the Bush administration, which has used taxpayer dollars to fund covert propaganda within the United States,” Rep. Henry A. Waxman (Calif.), ranking Democrat of the House Government Reform Committee, said in a statement yesterday.

    US moves to use spy satellites for domestic surveillance

    0

     AFP

    The United States is moving to expand the use of spy satellites for domestic surveillance, turning its “eyes in sky” inward to counter terrorism and eventually for law enforcement, a US official said Wednesday.

    The director of national intelligence, Michael McConnell, expanded the range of federal and local agencies that can tap into imagery from spy satellites in a memo in May to Homeland Security Secretary Michael Chertoff.

    He also expanded the kind of intelligence that can be made available to include measurement and signature intelligence, which is used to identify and track targets by their particular physical characteristics, the official said.

    “There is no new legal ground being broken here,” said the official, who spoke to AFP on condition of anonymity. The Wall Street Journal was the first to report on the plans Wednesday.

    NASA, the Federal Emergency Management Administration and US Geological Survey have had access to imagery from US reconnaissance satellites in the past.

    But the new authorities raise questions about its implications for US civil liberties, and the extent to which law enforcement agencies will be able to spy on Americans using tools to spy on foreign adversaries.

    The official said the use of satellites by law enforcement would proceed “slowly” to make sure that civil liberties are protected.

    Initially, the satellites will be used for “homeland security” missions like border control, monitoring key infrastructure and disaster response, the official said.

    The Department of Homeland Security will control access through a committee that will draft “proper use memorandums” stipulating what the intelligence can be used for, the official said.

    The committee is not expected to take up law enforcement requests for access until sometime next year.

    The plan has been vetted throughout the national government and the appropriate congressional committees have signed off, approving a reallocation of funds for it, the official said.

    Wikipedia ‘shows CIA page edits’

    1

    By Jonathan Fildes

    An online tool that claims to reveal the identity of organisations that edit Wikipedia pages has revealed that the CIA was involved in editing entries.

    Wikipedia Scanner allegedly shows that workers on the agency’s computers made edits to the page of Iran’s president.

    It also purportedly shows that the Vatican has edited entries about Sinn Fein leader Gerry Adams.

    The tool, developed by US researchers, trawls a list of 5.3m edits and matches them to the net address of the editor.

    Wikipedia is a free online encyclopaedia that can be created and edited by anyone.

    Most of the edits detected by the scanner correct spelling mistakes or factual inaccuracies in profiles. However, others have been used to remove potentially damaging material or to deface sites.

    Mistaken identity

    On the profile of Iranian President Mahmoud Ahmadinejad, the tool indicates that a worker on the CIA network reportedly added the exclamation “Wahhhhhh!” before a section on the leader’s plans for his presidency.

    A warning on the profile of the anonymous editor reads: “You have recently vandalised a Wikipedia article, and you are now being asked to stop this type of behaviour.”

    Screen grab of Wikipedia page

    It is claimed the entry was changed by a CIA computer user

    Other changes that have been made are more innocuous, and include tweaks to the profile of former CIA chief Porter Goss and celebrities such as Oprah Winfrey.

    When asked whether it could confirm whether the changes had been made by a person using a CIA computer, an agency spokesperson responded: “I cannot confirm that the traffic you cite came from agency computers.

    “I’d like in any case to underscore a far larger and more significant point that no one should doubt or forget: The CIA has a vital mission in protecting the United States, and the focus of this agency is there, on that decisive work.”

    Radio change

    The site also indicates that a computer owned by the US Democratic Party was used to make changes to the site of right-wing talk show host Rush Limbaugh.

    The changes brand Mr Limbaugh as “idiotic,” a “racist”, and a “bigot”. An entry about his audience now reads: “Most of them are legally retarded.”

    The IP address is registered in the name of the Democratic National Headquarters.

    A spokesperson for the Democratic Party said that the changes had not been made on its computers. Instead, they said that the “IP address is the same as the DCCC”.

    The DCCC, or Democratic Congressional Campaign Committee, is the “official campaign arm of the Democrats” in the House of Representatives and share a building with the party.

    “We don’t condone these sorts of activities and we take every precaution to ensure that our network is used in a responsible manner,” Doug Thornell of the DCCC told the BBC News website.

    Mr Thornell pointed out that the edit had been made “close to two years ago” and it was “impossible to know” who had done it.

    Voting issue

    The site also indicates that Vatican computers were used to remove content from a page about the leader of the Irish republican party Sinn Fein, Gerry Adams.

    Wikipedia logo

    Wikipedia already collects the IP address or username of editors

    The edit removed links to newspaper stories written in 2006 that alleged that Mr Adams’ fingerprints and handprints were found on a car used during a double murder in 1971.

    The section, titled “Fresh murder question raised” is no longer available through the online encyclopaedia.

    Wikipedia Scanner also points the finger at commercial organisations that have modified entries about the pages.

    One in particular is Diebold, the company that supplied electronic voting machines for the controversial US election in 2000.

    In October 2005, a person using a Diebold computer removed paragraphs about Walden O’Dell, chief executive of the company, which revealed that he had been “a top fund-raiser” for George Bush.

    A month later, other paragraphs and links to stories about the alleged rigging of the 2000 election were also removed.

    The paragraphs and links have since been reinstated.

    Diebold officials have not responded to requests by the BBC for information about the changes.

    Web history

    The Wikipedia Scanner results are not the first time that people have been uncovered editing their own Wikipedia entries.

    Earlier this year, Microsoft was revealed to have offered money to experts to trawl through entries about the company and its products to make corrections.

    Staff at the US Congress have also previously been exposed for editing and removing sensitive information about politicians.

    An inquiry was launched after staff for Democratic representative Marty Meehan admitted polishing his biography

    The new tool was built by Virgil Griffith of the California Institute of Technology.

    It exploits the open nature of Wikipedia, which already collects the net address or username of editors and tracks all changes to a page. The information can be accessed in the “history” tab at the top of a Wikipedia page.

    By merging this information with a database of IP address owners, Wikipedia Scanner is able to put a name to the organisation and firms from which edits are made.

    The scanner cannot identify the individuals editing articles, admits Mr Griffith.

    “Technically, we don’t know whether it came from an agent of that company, however, we do know that edit came from someone with access to their network,” he wrote on the Wikipedia Scanner site.

    A spokesperson for Wikipedia said the tool helped prevent conflicts of interest.

    “We really value transparency and the scanner really takes this to another level,” they said.

    “Wikipedia Scanner may prevent an organisation or individuals from editing articles that they’re really not supposed to.”

    ID cards on track for 2009 as procurement begins

    0

    Procurement process finally gets underway but questions remain over the technical “nuts and bolts” of the project

    By James Murray

    The government has confirmed that it remains on track to deliver the first ID cards by 2009 after it finally began the procurement process for the £5.5bn project.

    After months of delays, which had led to speculation that the controversial project would be further downgraded following the decision last year to ditch some of the biometric data originally planned for the card, the Identity and Passport Service (IPS) has published a notice in the Official Journal of the European Union inviting expressions of interest from potential suppliers.

    The move paves the way for a Framework Agreement, which will see the IPS settle on a list of pre-qualified suppliers and contract terms for the ID card project and related Home Office initiatives to enhance passport security.

    The IPS said it was seeking suppliers with “the ability to deliver large, complex, secure systems; to manage these systems to deliver reliable performance day after day; [and] to respond flexibly as requirements and priorities evolve” .

    IPS chief executive James Hall said that the procurement strategy had been developed following lengthy consultation with potential suppliers. “Feedback from the supplier community has shaped our approach to procurement and will ensure we have a competitive process that enables innovative solutions and value for money,” he said. “I am confident that the supplier community will step up to the mark in helping us construct this key national asset.”

    A spokesman for IT trade body Intellect welcomed the move, claiming the start of the procurement process should bring to an end damaging speculation about contract size and terms and deliver “greater clarity to the market”.

    “We expect there will be significant interest from companies of all sizes in this procurement and we hope that all involved in the scheme continue to engage with the industry to ensure the successful delivery of this programme,” the spokesman added.

    However, any businesses hoping that the start of the procurement process would herald the release of more information on how they could exploit the ID card project are likely to be disappointed, according to Simon Davies, a visiting fellow at the London School of Economics’ Department of Information Systems and a staunch critic of the government’s ID card programme.

    “The procurement document leaves a great deal of scope for alteration and doesn’t tell us a great deal about the nuts and bolts of the project,” Davies observed. “It could be argued that this is right and proper as it should be more of a feasibility assessment at this stage, but the impression is that the people running the project still don’t exactly know what the real world applications will be.”

    Davies added that until more details are disclosed on the technology’s functionality and how businesses and public sector agencies can interface with the register, IT chiefs will find it impossible to ascertain how their organisations can make use of the ID cards.

    MICROCHIPPING CHILDREN FOR THEIR ‘SAFETY’

    5

    By Tom Shelley

    Last month’s ‘appeal’ to identify technologies that could prevent child abduction has moved forward rapidly

    In a letter published last month, prompted by the disappearance of Madeleine McCann, design engineer Peter Fitzsimmons challenged Eureka readers to come up with a device to track lost children. Several readers have written with suggestions — two RFID-based ideas, one of which is in production, are highlighted here.
    At the same time, two competing satellite-based systems — one British, one French — have also been launched recently.
    Maidstone-based Blue Tree Services launched its OurKids child tracking system in the UK and Ireland earlier this year. The device comes in two parts: children wear the Blueranger unit, supplied with a belt similar to a money belt or with a pocket that can be attached to any item. Parents track their child’s movements through BlueMap software either on the internet or via a hand-held PDA. The latter shows its location as well as that of the monitored units.
    The portable units use GPS and the cell phone network to send positioning information — accurate within 4m — to secure servers. These then relay information, which shows the unit location within the UK or Europe.
    The company says: “Although it has been possible for people to carry alarms for some time, these were either linked to a physical location or allowed for only single location requests. With OurKids, continuous tracking avoids the problems associated with not having a ‘position fix’ at critical moments — there is always a ‘breadcrumb trail’.”
    The units incorporate a movement sensor, which detects whether it is being worn —and not left in backpack at a friend’s house — or if it has suffered a shock such as a fall.
    Parents can also set up boundaries through GPS mapping. The system alerts them if the child moves beyond a predetermined area. Height can also be set as a parameter — perhaps to ensure the child isn’t taking part in a dangerous Quidditch match? Other features include an emergency alarm, which lets children tell parents if they are in trouble.
    Managing director Mike Smuts said: “We have seen a huge demand for this product from across all sectors of society. This is a robust and easy to wear product. It’s good to know that parents can allow their children a little more freedom and at the same time manage their independence.”
    French firm Car Telematics has a long waiting list for its Kiditel device according to the BBC. It will be released in the UK soon, and can be put in a pocket or bag. The GPS tracking device beams satellite images of a child’s location to the home computer. It has an SOS button, which sends an SMS and position coordinates to a predefined mobile number if the child is in trouble. A parent can call the child back to find out what the problem is.
    Development director Franck Spinelli told the BBC that the Kiditel was popular with parents of young children.
    Neither of these devices would prevent a kidnapping, and there would be nothing to stop the abductor disposing of the device once found on the child. However, both systems could give police vital information on the child’s whereabouts before he or she went missing.
    Reader Paul Clarke proposed an RFID solution, which could overcome these difficulties. Citing the current level of integration of CCTV systems, he says: “If there was a similar initiative to link the RFID systems used by shops to catch shoplifters, it would be possible to search for an RFID tag that could be surgically implanted under a child’s skin or inserted into the fabric of their clothing.
    “Potentially this could be an international initiative that would mean that if an abductor attempted to take a chipped child into a store that subscribed to the service, store detectives would be notified and by cross-referencing with CCTV footage one could determine the identity of the individual [abducting a child].”
    Surgically implanting an RFID chip under a child’s skin seems a little Orwellian, though putting it into the fabric of clothes seems more acceptable. Are parents likely to go to such extremes to ensure kids are safe, or is it a step too far?
    However, as reader Roger Bamford pointed out, one US firm has already designed a human-implantable RFID chip. VeriChip has developed a passive RFID microchip, inserted under the skin by injection, which contains a unique 16-digit identifier. The number on the chip — which can be read with a proprietary scanner — could be used to access medical records, or determine whether someone has the authority to enter a secure area, the company says.
    Verichip has also designed wearable active RFID chips, designed for use within care homes or hospital wards. The chips sound an alarm if patients — for instance, those with Alzheimer’s — leave a designated area. It can even lock an exit as a patient approaches it. The chips can also be used to prevent the abduction of newborns by raising the alarm if the baby is removed from the ward.

    www.verichipcorp.com/

    www.bluetreeservices.co.uk

    www.kiditel.com/en/

    Eerie CCTV

    0

    By Patrick Goss

    I’ve got a confession to make; whenever I see a security camera I feel inexplicably guilty. So it was with some concern that I read reports that the US government expects to be installing CCTV that will be able to flag up those acting suspiciously automatically.

    Apparently, facial analysis software is becoming so accurate that the first cameras that can ‘recognise’ those people acting guilty or suspiciously and flag them up.

    I already object to CCTV on an intellectual level. As I have written in the past, I feel that we are moving inexorably towards the kind of dystopian world described by George Orwell in 1984. And the United Kingdom in particular has been quick to embrace the notion that cameras deter crime.

    Taking that up a notch to having machines determine if someone is acting in a suspicious way is, as far as I’m concerned, moving into genuinely scary territory.

    CCTV cameras - proliferating

    My first concern is what exactly the repercussions of this are; when you are flagged as ‘acting suspiciously’ I would imagine that, at first at least, you are merely brought to the attention of an operator who can monitor what you are doing.

    But at what point is it going to become okay to stop and search those people that a machine has flagged up? How do you differentiate between say, someone who is conducting an illicit affair (and presumably acting shiftily) and a terrorist?

    Sociology students learn early on that people being observed modify their behaviours, and in a society with increasing numbers of armed police and raised security levels, many people are not going about their daily business in the carefree, innocent fashion that they perhaps would

    It all comes down to the most pressing question of the 21st century so far. Is it okay to impinge on the civil liberties of the many to try to prevent the rise of terrorism?

    Of course, the accuracy of the software is another worry. Would it be that tough to train people to act nonchalantly enough to cheat the computers? I think it’s fair to say that becoming reliant on machines to ‘read’ peoples motivations is opening up the potential for scaling back police presence and that in itself is a dangerous route to go down.

    If the software does prove even a minor success then you are left with the problem that a machine picking out the guilty creates a massively dangerous precedent in terms of the potential to abuse the system. For a start, using the machine as justification, any person could potentially be flagged up for ‘acting suspiciously’ and find their privacy in question.

    CCTV in London © Stephen Kelly/PA Archive/PA Photos

    Databases of suspicious behaviour could be set up, and does someone who has ‘acted suspiciously’ in the past then find their future movements tracked as well — even if the machine was in error in the first case? Will we be informed if we have been tracked by these cameras or will we remain oblivious to the fact that our life is being recorded because a camera decided some facial tick was worthy of note?

    I actually have a hard time accepting that the lesser evil of facial recognition software is truly necessary — although the inevitability of its widespread inception is becoming more and more evident.

    Again the reliance on a system of comparing people to a ‘watch-list’ of suspects does not allow for those who have managed to fly under the radar — not to mention the problematic situation of monitoring those that have never been convicted, or in many cases even accused, of a crime.

    Comparing people against a criminal database is one thing, but it is a very short hop to tracking everybody all of the time and building up an increasingly detailed database about each and every one of us.

    Which brings us back to the old chestnut of ‘Why do I need to worry about his kind of thing if I haven’t done anything wrong?’ This is at the heart of the entire privacy debate and remains a vital discussion.

    For me, the prospect of detailed government databases of our details and the minutiae of our life is a concern because those records remain regardless of whoever is in power.

    Does my religion make much of a difference at the current time? No. But what if a government arrived in the future that DID consider religious views outside of their own beliefs to be a crime? By agreeing to lose privacy in the name of terrorism prevention, you are signing a chit of trust not just for this government, but every government going forward.

    And that, for me, is a level of trust I just don’t have.

    The Anti-Empire Report

    4

    Separation of oil and state
    On several occasions I’ve been presented with the argument that contrary to widespread opinion in the anti-war movement and on the left, oil was not really a factor in the the United States invasion and occupation of Iraq. The argument’s key, perhaps sole, point is that the oil companies did not push for the war.

    Responding to only this particular point: firstly, the executives of multinational corporations are not in the habit of making public statements concerning vital issues of American foreign policy, either for or against. And we don’t know what the oil company executives said in private to high Washington officials, although we do know that such executives have a lot more access to such officials than you or I, like at Cheney’s secret gatherings. More importantly, we have to distinguish between oil as a fuel and oil as a political weapon.

    A reading of the policy papers issued by the neo-conservatives since the demise of the Soviet Union makes it clear that these people will not tolerate any other country or group of countries challenging the global hegemony of the world’s only superpower. A sample — In 1992 they wrote: “We must maintain the mechanisms for deterring potential competitors from even aspiring to a larger regional or global role.”[1] And in 2002, in the White House “National Security Strategy” paper: “Our forces will be strong enough to dissuade potential adversaries from pursuing a military build-up in hopes of surpassing, or equaling, the power of the United States. … America will act against such emerging threats before they are fully formed. … We must deter and defend against the threat before it is unleashed. … We cannot let our enemies strike first. … To forestall or prevent such hostile acts by our adversaries, the United States will, if necessary, act preemptively.”

    As the world has been learning in great sorrow, the neo-conservative world-dominators are not just (policy) paper tigers.

    Japan and the European Union easily fall into the categories of potential competitors or potential adversaries, economically speaking. They both are crucially dependent upon oil imports. To one extent or another so is most of the world. The Bush administration doesn’t need the approval of the oil companies to pursue its grandiose agenda of world domination, using the vast Iraqi oil reserves as one more of its weapons.

    For those who would like to believe that there’s a limit to the neo-cons’ imperial arrogance, that even the likes of Bush, Cheney, Rumsfeld, Bolton, Wolfowitz, Rice, and the rest of the gang would never treat Europe as anything like an enemy, I suggest a look at a recent article by the former US ambassador to the United Nations, John Bolton, which appeared in the Financial Times of London. In it, the Cheney intimate and current senior fellow at the neo-con citadel, American Enterprise Institute, berates British prime minister Gordon Brown for implying that the UK could have a “special relationship” with both the United States and the European Union (which Bolton refers to as “the European porridge”). Like a hurt lover, Bolton exclaims that Britain has been brought to “a clear decision point. … What London needs to know is that its answer will have consequences.” The article is entitled: “Britain Cannot Have Two Best Friends”.

    Bolton goes on to ask: “Why does a ‘union’ with a common foreign and security policy, and with the prospect of a real ‘foreign minister’ have two permanent seats on the UN Security Council and often as many as three non-permanent seats out of a total of 15 council members? France and Britain may not relish the prospect of giving up their unique status, but what is it that makes them different — as members of the ‘Union’ — from Luxembourg or Malta? One Union, one seat. Mr Brown cannot have it both ways (nor will President Nicolas Sarkozy).”

    The Empire has not yet made Europe an ODE (Officially Designated Enemy) like Iran, but, Bolton declares, “If Mr Bush decides that the only way to stop Iran is to use military force, where will Mr Brown come down? Supporting the US or allowing Iran to goose-step towards nuclear weapons?”[2]

    Washington’s exquisite imperial mentality, its stated determination to “act against such emerging threats before they are fully formed”, sees “potential adversaries” in China and Russia as well of course. The United States — with hypocrisy breathtaking even for the Bush administration — regularly castigates China for its expanding military budget; and tries to surround Russia with military bases, missile shields, and countries with ties to Washington and NATO.

    Moreover, the United States has been competing with Russia for the vast oil and gas reserves of the land-locked Caspian Sea area since the 1990s. The building and protection of pipelines in Afghanistan was in all likelihood a major factor in the US invasion and occupation of that country. And in this case we know that the American oil company UNOCAL met with Taliban officials in Texas and in Afghanistan before 9-11 to discuss the pipelines.[3]
    A license to lie that never expires
    I touched upon this a year ago, but our much-esteemed leader and his equally-esteemed acolytes continue to use the same argument in order to deflect attention from their deformed child, the War On Terror — the argument being that since the attacks of Sept. 11, 2001, US counterterrorism policy has worked. How do they know? Because there haven’t been any terrorist attacks in the United States in the six years since that infamous day.

    Right, but there weren’t any terrorist attacks in the United States in the six years before Sept. 11, 2001 either, the last one being the Oklahoma City bombing of April 19, 1995, with no known connection to al Qaeda. The absence of terrorist attacks in the US appears to be the norm, with or without a War on Terror.

    More significantly, in the six years since 9-11 the United States has been the target of terrorist attacks on scores of occasions, not even counting anything in Iraq or Afghanistan — attacks on military, diplomatic, civilian, Christian, and other targets associated with the United States, in the Middle East, South Asia and the Pacific, more than a dozen times in Pakistan alone. The attacks include the October 2002 bombings of two nightclubs in Bali, Indonesia, which killed more than 200 people, almost all of them Americans and citizens of their Australian and British war allies; the following year brought the heavy bombing of the US-managed Marriott Hotel in Jakarta, Indonesia, the site of diplomatic receptions and 4th of July celebrations held by the American Embassy; and other horrendous attacks in more recent years on US allies in Madrid and London because of the war.

    When the Bush administration argues that the absence of terrorist attacks in the US since 9-11 means that its war on terrorism has created a safer world for Americans … why do I doubt this?
    The past is unpredictable
    As the call for withdrawal of American forces from Iraq grows louder, those who support the war are rewriting history to paint a scary picture of what happened in Vietnam after the United States military left in March 1973.

    They speak of invasions by the North Vietnamese communists, but fail to point out that a two-decades-long civil war had simply continued after the Americans left, minus a good deal of the horror which US bombs and chemical weapons had been causing.

    They speak of the “bloodbath” that followed the American withdrawal, a term that implies killing of large numbers of civilians who didn’t support the communists. But this never happened. If it had taken place the anti-communists in the United States who supported the war in Vietnam would have been more than happy to publicize a “commie bloodbath”. It would have made big headlines all over the world. The fact that you can’t find anything of the sort is indicative of the fact that nothing like a bloodbath took place. It would be difficult to otherwise disprove this negative.

    “Some 600,000 Vietnamese drowned in the South China Sea attempting to escape.”[4] Has anyone not confined to a right-wing happy farm ever heard of this before?

    They mix Vietnam and Cambodia together in the same thought, leaving the impression that the horrors of Pol Pot included Vietnam. This is the conservative National Review Online: “Six weeks later, the last Americans lifted off in helicopters from the roof of the U.S. embassy in Saigon, leaving hundreds of panicked South Vietnamese immediately behind and an entire region to the mercy of the communists. The scene was similar in Phnom Penh [Cambodia]. The torture and murder spree that followed left millions of corpses.”[5]

    And here’s dear old Fox News, July 26, reporters Sean Hannity and Alan Colmes, with their guest, actor Jon Voight. Voight says “Right now, we’re having a lot of people who don’t know a whole lot of things crying for us pulling out of Iraq. This — there was a bloodbath when we pulled out of Vietnam, 2.5 million people in Cambodia and Vietnam — South Vietnam were slaughtered.”

    Alan Colmes’ response, in its entirety: “Yes, sir.” Hannity said nothing.  The many devoted listeners of Fox News could only nod their heads sagely.

    In actuality, instead of a bloodbath of those who had collaborated with the enemy, the Vietnamese sent them to “re-education” camps, a more civilized treatment than in post-World War Two Europe where many of those who had collaborated with the Germans were publicly paraded, shaven bald, humiliated in other ways, and/or hanged from the nearest tree. But some conservatives today would have you believe that the Vietnamese camps were virtually little Auschwitzes.[6]

    Has the conservative view of Vietnam post-US withdrawal already hardened into historical concrete? “The agreed-upon historical record”, to use Gore Vidal’s term?
    The way of all flesh, the way of all wars
    In 1967 and ’68 I was writing a column of a type very similar to this report, only it wasn’t online of course; it was for the Washington Free Press, part of the so-called “underground press”. In looking over those old columns recently I found three items whose relevance has not been dimmed by time at all:

    (1) [From the Washington Post, 1968]: “It has never been clearer that the Marines are fighting for their own pride, from their own fear and for their buddies who have already died. No American in Hue is fighting for Vietnam, for the Vietnamese, or against Communism.”[7]
    [Make the obvious substitutions and we have: No American in Baghdad is fighting for Iraq, for the Iraqi people, or against terrorism. And how many of today’s warriors can look around at what is happening in Iraq and convince themselves that they’re fighting for something called freedom and democracy?]

    (2) Arthur Sylvester, Assistant Secretary of Defense for Public Affairs, was the man most responsible for “giving, controlling and managing the war news from Vietnam”. One day in July 1965, Sylvester told American journalists that they had a patriotic duty to disseminate only information that made the United States look good. When one of the newsmen exclaimed: “Surely, Arthur, you don’t expect the American press to be handmaidens of government,” Sylvester replied, “That’s exactly what I expect,” adding: “Look, if you think any American official is going to tell you the truth, then you’re stupid. Did you hear that? — stupid.” And when a correspondent for a New York paper began a question, he was interrupted by Sylvester who said: “Aw, come on. What does someone in New York care about the war in Vietnam?”[8]

    (3) The US recently completed an operation in the III Corps area of South Vietnam called “Resolved to Win”. Now, a new operation is being planned for the same area. This one is called “Complete Victory”, which should give you an idea of how successful “Resolved to Win” was. I expect that the only operation standing a chance of success will be the one called “Total Withdrawal.”
    Libertarians: an eccentric blend of anarchy and runaway capitalism
    What is it about libertarians? Their philosophy, in theory and in practice, seems to amount to little more than: “If the government is doing it, it’s oppressive and we’re against it.” Corporations, however, tend to get free passes. Perhaps the most prominent libertarian today is Texas Congressman Ron Paul, who ran as the Libertarian Party’s candidate for president in 1988 and is running now for the same office as a Republican. He’s against the war in Iraq, in no uncertain terms, but if the war were officially being fought by, for, and in the name of a consortium of Lockheed Martin, Halliburton, Bechtel, and some other giant American corporations, would he have the same attitude? And one could of course argue that the war is indeed being fought for such a consortium. So is it simply the idea or the image of “a government operation” that bothers him and other libertarians?

    Paul recently said: “The government is too bureaucratic, it spends too much money, they waste the money.”[9]

    Does the man think that corporations are not bureaucratic? Do libertarians think that any large institution is not overbearingly bureaucratic? Is it not the nature of the beast? Who amongst us has not had the frustrating experience with a corporation trying to correct an erroneous billing or trying to get a faulty product repaired or replaced? Can not a case be made that corporations spend too much (of our) money? What do libertarians think of the exceedingly obscene salaries paid to corporate executives? Or of two dozen varieties of corporate theft and corruption? Did someone mention Enron?

    Ron Paul and other libertarians are against social security. Do they believe that it’s better for elderly people to live in a homeless shelter than to be dependent on government “handouts”? That’s exactly what it would come down to with many senior citizens if not for their social security. Most libertarians I’m sure are not racists, but Paul certainly sounds like one. Here are a couple of comments from his newsletter:

    “Opinion polls consistently show that only about 5 percent of blacks have sensible political opinions, i.e. support the free market, individual liberty and the end of welfare and affirmative action.”

    “Given the inefficiencies of what D.C. laughingly calls the ‘criminal justice system,’ I think we can safely assume that 95 percent of the black males in that city are semi-criminal or entirely criminal.”[10]

    Author Ellen Willis has written that “the fundamental fallacy of right libertarianism is that the state is the only source of coercive power.” They don’t recognize “that the corporations that control most economic resources, and therefore most people’s access to the necessities of life, have far more power than government to dictate our behavior and the day-to-day terms of our existence.”[11]
    NOTES
    [1] “Defense Planning Guidance for the Fiscal Years 1994-1999”, New York Times, March 8, 1992, p.14, emphasis added

    [2] Financial Times (London), August 2, 2007

    [3] BBC News, December 4, 1997, “Taleban in Texas for talks on gas pipeline”

    [4] Joseph Farah, editor of the conservative WorldNetDaily (worldnetdaily.com/news/article.asp?ARTICLE_ID=56769), August 6, 2007

    [5] Mona Charen, National Review Online, July 20, 2007

    [6] Search Google News: <bloodbath iraq vietnam> for more examples

    [7] Washington Post, February 20, 1968, article by Lee Lescaze

    [8] Congressional Record (House of Representatives), May 12, 1966, pp. 9977-78, reprint of an article by Morley Safer of CBS News

    [9] National Public Radio, Morning Edition, August 9, 2007

    [10] Atlanta Progressive News, June 3, 2007 (www.atlantaprogressivenews.com/views/0024-views.html)
    As far as I can determine, Paul does not deny that these remarks, and others equally racist, appeared in his newsletter, but he claims that a staff member of his is the author of those remarks.

    [11] Ellen Willis, Dissent magazine, Fall 1997

    William Blum is the author of:
    Killing Hope: US Military and CIA Interventions Since World War 2
    Rogue State: A Guide to the World’s Only Superpower
    West-Bloc Dissident: A Cold War Memoir
    Freeing the World to Death: Essays on the American Empire

     Portions of the books can be read, and signed copies purchased, at <www.killinghope.org >
    Previous Anti-Empire Reports can be read at this website at “essays”.
    To add yourself to this mailing list simply send an email to <bblum6@aol.com> with “add” in the subject line. I’d like your name and city in the message, but that’s optional. I ask for your city only in case I’ll be speaking in your area.
    Or put “remove” in the subject line to do the opposite.
    Any part of this report may be disseminated without permission.  I’d appreciate it if the website were mentioned.

    A scary assault on civil liberties

    0

    By Lance Dickie

    As historians tally the incompetence, profligacy and lawless opacity of the Bush administration, a shorthand is already emerging: Katrina, Iraq, Guantanamo, Abu Ghraib, signing statements and epic debt. Each reference speaks volumes.

    Another topic may soon head the list: FISA, surveillance or domestic spying. A word or two will settle into the political lexicon to symbolize an assault on civil liberties by an administration with an aggressive disregard for the law. We will be haunted by this for generations.

    Congress gave the White House permission to eavesdrop without warrants on international telephone calls and e-mails of American citizens. The Bush administration had sought to tinker with wiretap regulations it was already ignoring, when Congress essentially said, “Oh, what the heck, do what you want.” The Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Act, passed in 1978, required the executive branch to seek permission of a secret judicial panel to spy on Americans at home and people overseas if the surveillance took place inside the United States. Revisions and new definitions adopted last week remove virtually all restrictions, and, most incredibly, empower the attorney general and director of national intelligence to settle disputes about what is legal and proper.

    Attorney general, as in Alberto Gonzales, whose favorite responses to Congress are “I don’t know” and “I do not recall.” Partisan appointees become arbiters of two centuries of constitutional protections against a potentially intrusive, abusive federal government.

    These rules and exceptions are set to expire in six months, but expect to be disappointed.

    House and Senate members were easy pickings as they worried more about summer vacation than civil liberties. In 2008, they will be squeezed again by a looming election.

    I will admit it took me way too long to grasp the implications of the “war on terrorism” invoked by President Bush.

    Early on, I was dismayed by the rhetoric of an “axis of evil,” but initially I read no more into the war reference than a speechwriter’s device.

    Little did I suspect the president was using his own version of shorthand to declare and embrace unimaginable perquisites of executive authority. None of the rules or laws applied to him, and an acquiescent Republican Congress was never going to confront him.

    Voters understood, and tossed out a legislatively inept, lazy, corruption-prone GOP majority.

    They could not pass a budget, and they refused to challenge the president over a war of choice built on fear and delusions.

    I expected better from Democrats and, so far, have not been impressed.

    Confronting terrorists and others who would do harm to this nation and its laws and democratic ideals is a real fight. Taxpayers spend lavishly to provide the resources. It was the Bush administration, not American taxpayers of all political stripes, that failed to properly equip the nation’s military in two war zones.

    But I also believe the rough and tumble of ferreting out and stopping terrorism is a specialized kind of crime-fighting, best suited to the skills and tools of law enforcement. Police operate within a set of procedures and regulations, and legal checks and balances adapted to stop crime and protect the rights of the innocent.

    Both efforts are always a tense, dynamic work in progress.

    Consider the pre-Miranda days. Failure to advise suspects of their rights led to a lot of sloppy results. In the absence of rules, the tendency is to get lazy. That’s a scary thought when dealing with institutions that can deprive citizens of their liberty and lives.

    Crime-fighting did not stop because law enforcement had judges and a Constitution looking over its shoulders.

    The United States is launched on a path of domestic spying with the rules decided by government clerks. An arrogant, demonstrably incompetent administration is empowered to do what it wants, never having to explain itself or be held accountable by anyone.

    The Bush administration cannot get body armor and rifle-cleaning kits to Iraq and Afghanistan, yet it can tap phone calls and rummage through e-mails as it sees fit.

    Scarier still, the brash intention or seductive efficiency of operating without oversight will not evaporate with a new crew in the White House.

    Troops denied special Afghan medal

    3

    The Ministry of Defence was facing severe criticism last night for refusing to award a special honour to soldiers fighting the Taliban in Afghanistan.

    By Stephen Adams, Martin Beckford and Duncan Gardham

    British troops serving in Helmand province are being denied a dedicated medal to recognise the intensity of the conflict, campaigners said.

    War veterans, MPs and families of those who have lost loved ones in the fighting – the heaviest British forces have experienced since the Second World War – have urged the MoD to make a special award for the thousands of soldiers and marines who have put their lives at risk on a daily basis fighting insurgents.

    Their calls came as Britain faced up to another grim milestone in the fight against the Taliban – the death of its 70th soldier since the operation began in November 2001, and the seventh fatality since July 7.

    Despite the ferocity of the campaign, those who have fought in Helmand still receive exactly the same medal as those who undertook relatively safe peace-keeping duties in the Afghan capital, Kabul, immediately after the Taliban were deposed.

    Critics say the situation is now “completely different” and believe the MoD is missing out on an easy way to boost morale at a critical time.

    Yesterday, a spokesman for the ministry insisted that the medal which has been awarded to troops who have served in the country for the last six years – and those given for specific acts of bravery – are sufficient to recognise their efforts.

    Figures revealed yesterday show how Britain’s front-line troops in Afghanistan now have a one in 36 chance of dying in a six-month tour of the country, compared to a one in 100 chance during a tour of Iraq. In addition, hundreds have been severely injured. MoD figures also show that, up until July 15, 699 troops have needed hospital treatment due to battle wounds or disease since 2001.

    Tony Philippson, whose son, Capt James Philippson, was the first British serviceman to die in Helmand province after the deployment last year, said the MoD was reluctant to issue a new medal because it would mean effectively admitting that troops were now engaged in a new war.

    Mr Philippson said: “The more they award medals, the more they have to recognise it’s a nasty, dirty war.

    “They have been sent into a cauldron and they are under-resourced. Issuing medals recognises the fact we’re in a real war.”

    Derek Eida, whose son, Capt Alex Eida, was killed in Afghanistan last August, said: “It sounds ridiculous that they won’t award a different medal, this is a completely different deployment and 2002 was a hell of a long time ago.

    “It seems totally petty to me, I just can’t understand their logic. It could be bad for morale when people are putting their lives on the line but not being recognised.”

     
    Campaign medals are awarded to soldiers fighting in Iraq and Afghanistan
    Campaign medals are awarded to soldiers fighting in Iraq and Afghanistan

    But the MoD said it had no plans to create a new campaign medal for Afghanistan.

    “We have one medal for the Afghanistan theatre and that’s it. We don’t want to get into the problem area of loads of medals for different times of operations,” an official said. “Campaign medals are there for people on operations and there are bravery medals for those who do something brave.”

    Nicholas Soames, the former Conservative defence minister, said: “This is typical Ministry of Defence bureaucracy and thoughtlessness.

    “Clearly those who were on an earlier policing operation should get medals which reflect that, but those in the combat operation should get a medal of their own. They are separate deployments and this is not a general service operation.”

    Patrick Mercer, the Conservative MP for Newark, who is a former infantry commander, said: “I think the ferocity of the current operation in Helmand needs special recognition, and it could be in the form of a medal or a bar or a clasp, something that shows how serious the fighting has been.

    “There’s nothing more important to troops than a medal – they are incredibly emotive and they mean the world to soldiers. To have a chest full of medals and to be in a prestigious fighting unit is the business.”

    He said during Victorian times a special award known as the Kabul to Kandahar Star was issued just to British troops who had taken part in one particular part of the Second Afghan War.

    A horizontal metal bar or clasp, usually attached to the ribbon of a medal, is often awarded to indicate that the wearer has been involved in a particular operation.

    The Government has endured criticism for the apparent lack of planning that went into the operation to take on the Taliban in Helmand, which was launched in spring last year.

    John Reid, the then defence secretary, famously declared: “We would be perfectly happy to leave in three years’ time without firing one shot.”

    However, millions of rounds have since been fired and, while more than a thousand Taliban fighters have been killed, the cost to British troops has been severe.

    Maj Gen Patrick Cordingley, the commander of the Desert Rats in the first Gulf War, said: “The situation has changed dramatically and perhaps a bar on the Afghan medal would be more reasonable.”

    Air Vice-Marshal Tony Mason, another veteran of the first Gulf War, added that there was “a horrendous difference between 2002 and 2007”.

    Anti-terror powers used at climate camp

    0

    By Nick Martin

    The police and Downing Street lined up with BAA today to warn climate change protesters not to disrupt Heathrow Airport.

    The camp for climate action is itself still a modest affair, but it is overshadowed by a row about tactics.

    It’s home for the next week to hundreds of climate change activists – who are being watched by hundreds of police.

    Heathrow’s climate camp is designed to raise awareness of the environmental impact of aviation, and the airport’s expansion plans.

    Yet there are fears it could become the base for illegal protests. Downing Street has warned that any disruption would be unacceptable.

    Campaigners, meanwhile, have condemned police for using anti-terrorism powers to question those attending.

    Protesters began setting up the camp yesterday on a large rectangular piece of wasteland. It’s just a few hundred yards north of Heathrow’s perimeter fence.

    Wolfowitz ‘tried to censor World Bank on climate change’

    2

    By Andrew Gumbel

    The Bush administration has consistently thwarted efforts by the World Bank to include global warming in its calculations when considering whether to approve major investments in industry and infrastructure, according to documents made public through a watchdog yesterday.

    On one occasion, the White House’s pointman at the bank, the now disgraced Paul Wolfowitz, personally intervened to remove the words “climate change” from the title of a bank progress report and ordered changes to the text of the report to shift the focus away from global warming.

    But the issue predates Mr Wolfowitz’s appointment as president of the bank in June 2005. According to the Government Accountability Project (GAP), which has tracked efforts to censor debate on global warming, environmental specialists at the World Bank tried unsuccessfully to press for consideration of greenhouse- gas emissions in a paper written – but never published – in 2002.

    It was politics that prevented the publication of that paper, according to one senior bank insider who spoke to the Los Angeles Times, and politics that has been the principal obstacle to progress since. Only now, with the Bush administration on the ropes politically and the scientific evidence for global warming reaching such critical mass that even President George Bush has been forced to acknowledge its reality, are those same bank officials trying again to put the issue on the agenda. “Our biggest obstacle has been that politically, [climate change] is very controversial,” Kristalina Georgieva, the bank’s strategy and operations director for sustainable development, told the LA Times.

    She said that, even under the best of circumstances, it will be at least two years before the bank starts measuring the impact of fossil fuel-related projects on the planet’s health. “We are not moving fast enough,” she added. “It’s not possible to be moving fast enough.”

    The GAP has uncovered evidence of one striking instance of Bush administration censorship. In 2006, the bank’s vice presidents responded to a request from the Group of Eight industrialised countries and commissioned a draft report entitled Climate Change, Energy and Sustainable Development: Towards an Investment Framework. They endorsed the report, according to the minutes of a meeting obtained by the GAP.

    Subsequently, however, Mr Wolfowitz’s office put out a memo asking the team to rework the paper, “shifting from a climate lens mainly to a clean-energy lens”. The edited paper issued a few months later was eventually called Clean Energy and Development: Towards an Investment Framework.

    The World Bank has come under fire from environmental groups for a number of decisions, including a recent grant to develop lignite mining and power plants in Kosovo. Lignite – or brown coal – pollutes the air heavily when burnt and is generally regarded as one of the dirtiest fuel sources on the planet.

    The investment appears to go against the bank’s own policy, from 2001, whereby it decided to try to phase out oil and gas investments by 2008 and to extend an existing moratorium on investments in coal mining.

    The GAP put out a report in March detailing similar problems at other agencies, most notably the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration which, among other duties, tracks hurricanes and other extreme weather phenomena. The report cited “objectionable and possibly illegal restrictions on the communication of scientific information to the media” – including censorship of interviews and press releases.

    More recently, the GAP has reported the Bush administration’s refusal to consider climate change as it prepares to expand the national air transport system threefold over the next 20 years. A multi-agency group called the Next Generation Air Transportation System has simply ignored global warming in its past two annual reports.

    Mr Wolfowitz was forced to step down in June after it emerged that he had given a lucrative sinecure to his girlfriend and offered her excessive pay rises.

    Chemtrails over Morecambe

    2

    By Albert Shine

    I am assuming that the reader is familiar with the difference between ‘Contrails’; that is condensation trails (vapour trails) left behind highflying aircraft, consisting of water vapour that fades away within a few minutes, and what has become known as ‘Chemtrails’ (chemical trails), also from highflying aircraft, that persist across the sky for some considerable time and evolve into wispy longitudinal clouds. With the passage of time the wispy clouds tend to coalesce into an unnatural hazy overcast. Circumstantial empirical observation shows that there is some form of aerosol spraying of artificial chemicals into our atmosphere from considerable numbers of medium and large jet aircraft. The aircraft involved seem to follow flight paths contrived to result in ‘X’s’, grid patterns of parallels or ‘noughts and crosses’. This ‘designer pollution’ has been carried out for about a decade and is an ongoing programme over many parts of the Western World. The origin and purpose of this programme remains unknown to the general population, but coincides with (a) a widespread reduction (by approx 20%) in solar energy reaching the ground, and (b) a huge increase in asthma and other breathing related diseases of almost epidemic proportions. In addition, many folk endure frequent bouts of vaguely flu like symptoms, summer colds etc.

    One day in Morecambe

    Friday 10th August dawned bright with clear blue skies. By around 8am or so (I did not record the exact time), a number of heavy jet planes had started drawing dense chemtrails across the sky over Morecambe. By 9.30am or so the ‘trailing’ had become very obvious, and I took a few pictures of the sky around my flat from 945am:

    2.jpg3.jpg

    The blue of the sky gradually degraded into a misted effect as the aircraft trails spread and coalesced by 10.30am or so:

    4.jpg5.jpg

    I estimate there were perhaps over a dozen aircraft involved in the operation, criss-crossing over Morecambe. The spraying operation continued, and I took further photos at 10.45am, by which time, the persisting trails were spreading out and joining up into a murky overcast:

    7.jpg6.jpg

    By 11.30am the entire sky had clouded over with a sort of milky haze:

    8.jpg9.jpg

    This ‘white-out’ has, so far continued as I write this (3.45pm) and it is quite obvious that the change in the sky has been brought about by the effects of the aerosol spraying of chemicals into our atmosphere. As a contrast, here below is a photo taken at 4pm on7th August (there were no over flights on that day), following is a photo of a natural ‘contrail’ fading at the same rate as the progress of the aircraft across the sky.

    1.jpg10.jpg

    Other researchers have tried to get answers from various agencies (RAF, CAA, DoE etc) as to what is going on and why, but the replies so far blandly maintain these are mere ordinary contrails.

    It is obvious to all who observe this activity that something is definitely going on, possibly involving a dedicated fleet of airplanes spraying over populated areas. It is up to us all to ‘raise our eyes to heaven’, observe and preferably photograph the evidence and push the relevant authorities, not only for answers, but for an end to this pernicious and possibly poisonous behaviour.

    Bush Wants Microchipped Society

    9

    Newsbuster

    The Bush administration tells us the main reason for warrantless wiretapping and searches is, warrantless searches and spying are necessary in order to keep us safe from the terrorist. They imply if we don’t have anything to hide it should not matter if they conduct warrantless searches and that no mater what political party happens to be in power, now or in the future, that this newly granted authority will not be misused. This same line of thinking is parroted mainly by the conservative, bootlicking pundits, bloggers and by what has become known as the graduates of the Joseph Goebbels School of Broadcasting and Propaganda on talk radio.

    The intelligence communities involvement in warrantless searches by intercepting and monitoring generated signals (energy) such as email, faxes, etc., has a long history that is steeped in ongoing fraud and conspiracy.

    Back in 1981 I was involved in a secret government black budget program to intercept and monitor (without a warrant) people’s thoughts. Basically what they were doing was they were intercepting and monitoring the signal (energy) that is generated by the brain, when a person has thoughts. That was documented to some degree through ABC News 20/20, when they stumbled onto their black budget project.

    When Geraldo Rivera was at ABC News 20/20 back in the 70’s he interviewed some people that went to a land development in northwest Arkansas, called Holiday Island Suburban Improvement District (Holiday Island was at one time or another connected with, McCulloch Properties, Pratt Properties, Pratt Holding Company, MCO Properties, MCO Resorts, MCO Holdings, and others, see section below titled MCO Properties and Charles Hurwitz).

    The people Geraldo interviewed on 20/20 claimed they signed some papers at Holiday Island that they had not read, lost everything they had including homes if they owned homes, cars, businesses, they even lost their identity, as they had no records in government databases, such as drivers licenses, birth certificates, marriage licenses, etc., after having signed papers at Holiday Island, and they also claimed they never got their day in court, and all they were left with was their Bibles. The people that were being interviewed also claimed they could work but didn’t get to keep their pay if they were paid by check, and that people from Holiday Island kept doing things to them that made them paranoid. Bagabonds without a home is what I think Geraldo referred to the Holiday Island victims as, Geraldo tried to confront someone that was connected with Holiday Island, about all this. Their comment was, no comment.

    Wireless Surveillance
    Microchipped
    Guinea Pigs

    MicrochipAt one time Holiday Island had a fair amount of people touring their property, from all over the country. One would naturally assume that the people Geraldo was interviewing on 20/20, that claimed the people from Holiday Island “kept doing things to them that made them paranoid”, came from various parts of the country. That means that whoever it was, doing things to these people, as they claimed, had a large network of people working with them or for them.

    In 1981 they were still presenting documents at Holiday Island for those people that they singled out, that was written in a secret code or foreign language, (note the people Geraldo interviewed claimed they signed papers at Holiday Island that they had not read) and they told people, something along the lines that implied it was to verify who you are. No one said, if you sign this your giving up your rights, freedoms, liberties, access to the courts, property, privacy, volunteering into a black-op experiment to monitor your thoughts, and you agree to keep this secret, etc., etc.

    People would naturally be very suspicious and think it very odd to say the least, if they were signing papers written in English, to buy property, and then someone came up with a paper for them to sign that was written in some sort of secret code or foreign language, that they could not make out by reading it. There would be very few people that would ever sign such a paper, under those circumstances, of their own free will and accord and no reasonable person would expect, under normal conditions, that anyone presented with such a paper or document would sign it.

    At one time Holiday Island would give you $50.00 and a night’s lodging in a motel if you agreed to take a tour of their property. What I recall was, the paid for motel office was not opened for the most part, as if they didn’t want any other guests or business. The motel didn’t appear to have anyone else staying there or very few people if any, even though it was in the middle of tourist season. The motel was located in the tourist town of Eureka Springs, Arkansas.

    They isolated their patsy that they singled out for a reason. More than likely, so they could implant them with a microchip. Then they continued their fraud and conspiracy to cover that up, in case they were ever exposed, by hypnotizing their victim, so they would sign a paper the next day at Holiday Island, that was written in a foreign language or some sort of secret code that I referred to above, and was substantiated through ABC’s 20/20, on the show in question, when the people they interviewed stated that “they had signed papers at Holiday Island that they had not read”.

    You might find it interesting to know that shortly after having visited Holiday Island in 1981, I noticed a mark that looks like a scar, that was caused by a fairly deep cut, on my right hand, below my little finger. But I never cut myself there.

    Adventures With The Spooks

    GoldfingerMy experience and adventure in dealing with Holiday Island and those connected with it, are somewhat different, than the people that were interviewed by ABC News 20/20, regarding that land development in Arkansas, in part for the following reasons. When I went to Holiday Island in 1981 I had forgotten that I saw the ABC News show about Holiday Island. Driving back to Kansas from Holiday Island I remembered that Holiday Island was documented by ABC News 20/20. Once they realized that I knew that, they more than likely were somewhat spooked.

    Shortly after having visited Holiday Island I found a note in my apartment saying something along the line that the objective was to create paranoia and it was signed CEPO. Rather that was the actual name of the program or operation they were using, or rather CEPO was being used as a cover in case they were ever exposed, I don’t know.

    It was several years later while looking things up on the internet I came across someone with a private business, that claimed in his qualifications that he had at one time worked as a contractor in a CIA program called CEPO and that program had to do with detecting rather or not a person was telling the truth. Regardless of that, I thought they were monitoring my thoughts, from almost the very beginning, from the way they were acting and what they were doing, It wasn’t that hard to figure out they were trying to screw with my mind by what they were doing and the means they had to do it with.

    If you think about what I just said, it fits in with what the people Geraldo interviewed said, when they claimed that “the people from Holiday Island kept doing things to them that made them paranoid”. That’s makes sense, because if someone knew your every thought and knew your every move because they were intercepting and monitoring your thoughts and decided to use psychology on you, it would naturally make you paranoid as they played with your mind, played on your fears, etc., as they tried to control and manipulate you.

    As far as the vanishing documents that disappeared out of the government databases, the only way I have ever heard of (from experts) to get to get records (such as birth certificates, etc,.) out of government databases, like the Holiday Island victims claimed on ABC News 20/20, is to expatriate (to leave one’s own country, banish, exile, to withdraw (oneself) from residence in or allegiance to one’s native country, also : to renounce allegiance to one’s native country) from America.

    The people that would have benefited the most and had the means to make the Holiday Island victims files vanish out of the governments databases, would have been the CIA. If they were ever exposed, they could then claim that the people they were intercepting while monitoring their thoughts without a warrant, were not really American citizens and they had a document that was signed by the alleged victims to prove it, and therefore, they were not violating constitutional protected rights of American citizens. Being the CIA has never been required to reveal their methods, they would not have to explain how they obtained the document from the alleged victims.

    The number one suspect behind this illegal, unethical, secret operation that I write about and that was substantiated through ABC News 20/20 when they stumbled onto them, would be the CIA and their network.

    From known facts, the most reasonable, logical explanation for what happened to Holiday Island victims was, the CIA was using American citizens to test their thought monitoring technology on, in an experiment or program. They were using the land development to work out of and were using the land sale transaction as a cover for their operation.

    The New World Order Network

    GroveWhatever Holiday Island was at the time, or the companies that owned or controlled it, they were not afraid of the Arkansas government or the Federal Government coming after them, even after having been investigated by the Federal government and after having been exposed on national television by ABC News 20/20 when they stumbled on to them and documented Holiday Island back in the 70’s. That should tell you something.

    It should be obvious by now, that the CIA and their network were not afraid of the oversight committees (a dog and pony show for the American people) that was set up in the 70’s to watch over the intelligence community around the same time this black budget program appears to have first come online.

    So you have the CIA with its documented sordid past of being involved in, overthrowing governments, assassinations, drug running, spying on Americans, conducting human experimentation, corroborating with Nazi war criminals, working with mobsters, money laundering, and here recently being involved in the medieval practice of torture, sneaking around in society for 30 or so years, while having technology to monitor people’s thoughts, building up a network, while hiding behind a cloak of secrecy,

    They used their thought monitoring technology to build up their network, by screwing with people’s minds and terrorizing them in order to manipulate them to do their bidding. Blackmailing others they found useful to further their cause, along with a segment of evil like minded defects they chose to let in their plot.

    These people prey on society like a dangerous spreading cancer. Although their network that I and others talk about and warn you about seems to be made up of a wide cross section of the population, some of the most useful individuals that make up their network, that they use to mold society to their liking, are judges, politicians, civil servants, military officers, a segment of the intelligence community, and of course the press.

    Later on in order to legitimize their covert operation and bring online their technologies for the surveillance society, they (the secret network within the Government and their comrades) staged and/or let 9/11 happen. Then they passed dangerous, draconian legislation trampling the Bill of Rights, the Constitution and the rule of law and started a Global Never Ending War on Terror, that in truth, in fact, in reality, rests and is based on a foundation of lies and fraud.

    These people are best described as double traitors. Not only are they traitors to their own country, they are also traitors to the human race that they seek to control, enslave, and exterminate.

    Common sense should tell you that they never would have tried to pull off the made for tv attack on September 11, 2001 on the World Trade Center had they not of had an embedded network in place to make sure the event happened, the personnel in place to suppress and cover up what really happened, and the means to put out prolonged propaganda in the form of spin and disinformation in order to keep the public distracted, misinformed, dumbed down, confused and terrorized by their continual fear mongering.

    Considering the fact that the illegal Iran Contra affair, (known as the secret government within the government) was trading guns for drugs and went on for five years before it became known and it involved 1000’s of participants, it should not be difficult to fathom what I said above about having a secret network in place to cover for the real criminals that had most to gain from such an event.

    Media Black-Out

    What Holiday Island is today, the companies that owned it or were connected with it, or who owns it today, etc., etc. I don’t know, but when that story first broke on ABC News 20/20, in the 70’s, it must of been the buzz, in the political circles of Arkansas, as you can imagine.

    Several years back I called what I was led to believe was the producers office for ABC News 20/20 and told them about the show in question and had them check their files to find out when it was aired. After a few minutes the person came back on the phone and said, she could not find information on it because she didn’t know what that show was categorized under.

    In the mean time, you have Mrs. Clinton running for president and the controlled media spiking this story, in their attempt to fool the American public into thinking they are going to get something different and better, rather than the conservative neocons if they vote for Mrs. Clinton. In reality, if Mrs. Clinton becomes President the American people are going to get another person with very strong CIA ties, that is of the same ilk as Bush – Cheney.

    Then there was the time I tried to contact ABC News about Holiday Island. As I remember it sometime around August or September of 1981 and I was planning on calling American Broadcasting Corporation in New York in regards to Holiday Island, being 20/20 did a report on them. I called information (or what I thought was information) to get their New York phone number and information told me the number was something like 212- blank, blank, blank, 2020. I thought it somewhat odd at the time, that they would have a main phone number that ended with 2020, plus it spooked me at the time because I thought the people connected with Holiday Island knew I was trying to give ABC News more information on Holiday Island and they were trying to prevent that from happening. So I called back, told information again what I was wanting and this time they gave me a different phone number for ABC. After that number was dialed and connection was made a lady answered by saying “American Broadcasting Corporation.” I then changed my mind and decided to give the lady I was talking to the name of the Holiday Island agent I dealt with when I was there in July of that year and asked to speak to him. After I did that the lady seemed startled and said “you want to talk to who.” I then told her his name again and she said “ah, ah, ah,” then she snapped off “just a minute.” Then there was a oddball click that I have never heard before then silence then another click then more silence. Anyway after all that happened, I hung up because I believed they had intercepted that call and I was not really talking to anyone from the American Broadcasting Corporation.

    The lady may have gotten somewhat confused when I asked to speak to the agent from Holiday Island because if these implants work like I think they do, what they were using to pick up the generated thought signals of others has a strong, sensitive receiving mechanism and at the time there was someone standing in close proximity to me. That’s what may have confused her, because she was also picking up his generated thoughts even though he wasn’t chipped. If that’s true, that would mean that not only did those that they chip have their rights violated, but also anyone that was in close proximity to them.


    In Typical Clinton Fashion Hillary Denies, Denies, Denies

    Hil ClintonOn July 18, 2006 I posted a article on the internet titled “Warrantless Spy Program Monitoring People’s Thoughts”. On July 21, New York Daily News published a article titled “Hil frets chips will be put in kids’ brains”. The article quotes Mrs. Clinton “At the rate that technology is advancing, people will be implanting chips in our children to advertise directly into their brains and tell them what kind of products to buy”. The New York Democrat said the country was performing a “massive experiment”…..

    I can’t help but wonder, what would the odds be of Hillary Clinton talking about such obscure subjects as implanting chips in people’s brains, virtual slaves and massive experiments being performed on Americans, just hours after that post appeared?

    I won’t be surprised if one day someone discovered that their secret network (secret society) uses the press to pass coded directions or information to their fellow comrades in their network. I’ve read main stream news articles on how they could do that through the press. That would not be the first time in history that something like that happened.


    Why Am I Now The Only One Talking About This?

    Did the people interviewed on 20/20 in regards to the program in question, die mysteriously, and under questionable circumstances, like so many other people that the Clinton’s were associated with? Arkan-cided is what some people call it, or CIA-cided like others say, because there is not really any difference between the two. Perhaps the reason other people are not talking about this matter any more is, they were driven insane by the unregulated mind manipulators and their candy store of hidden technology. Perhaps some of their early victims may have been recruited into their network, that I talk about and that is why they are not talking any more?

    The only people that would truly consider me a threat of any kind, would be the network or maybe a better term would be secret society that I write about and try to warn you about.

    Bush Administration Warrantless Spy Program – A Trojan Horse

    George BushRegardless of what The Bush Administration says on alleged changes to their Warrantless Wiretapping, the facts remain that the Eschalon Spy Program has been around long before the War On Terrorism began, intercepting, phone calls, faxes, email, without a warrant. Also the Israeli back door into the phone system, that was documented on Fox News when they did a 4 part series on the largest spy ring ever uncovered in America, can be used to spy on Americans. So you might ask yourself, being Bush and his comrades already are monitoring and intercepting phone calls, email and faxes, what were they really up to?

    I would say, based on my experience and on what other people have said along these lines, along with other factors, that the Bush administration through their warrantless wiretapping program are more than likely trying to legitimize what their secret network has been doing all along. That is, monitoring people’s thoughts without a warrant, by intercepting generated signals.

    I am trying to point out, through this article, that these people, no mater who they are, have already misused this technology against American citizens and this has gone on in administration after administration and the dangers that can cause to a free society.

    If they could sneak up on those Holiday Island victims that were documented by ABC News 20/20, (and others) through stealth, and monitor their thoughts. the question begs to be asked, will they be able to some day sneak up on the rest of the American people, somehow? If they are ever able to do that, it won’t mater how repressive the government gets. If they know your every thought and move, it would make it rather futile to resist, unless there was a way to cloak your thoughts or something along those lines. Being they already have a documented history of trying to sneak up on other people, one would assume that would be their preferred method of operation to implement their technology.

    Perhaps with advancements in this 30+ year old technology that they have, they will be able to turn people into virtual human slaves? That may not be as far out as you think considering that the Washington Post has published a article titled “Mind Games” that claims the military is working on such types of technology.

    In official documents such as Air Force 2025, they admit they want a micro chipped society. The cutting edge of this technology now appears to have evolved toward smart dust devices that are tiny wireless microelectromechanical sensors (MEMS) that can detect everything from light to vibrations. Thanks to recent breakthroughs in silicon and fabrication techniques, these “motes” could eventually be the size of a grain of sand, though each would contain sensors, computing circuits, bidirectional wireless communications technology and a power supply. If their telling us about all that, what else aren’t they telling us about and hiding behind a cloak of national security?

    The security they talk about is in reality, security for themselves, their friends, their embedded political cronies and network, for they can use thought monitoring technology to enrich themselves, in the hopes of enslaving America and then ultimately the world, through their contrived wars, emergencies, dangers and fear mongering, before more people wake up to their evil scams, crimes, fraud, conspiracies and treason.

    If they were truly worried about terrorist attacking America again, they never would have left the borders wide open for the last 6 years and let millions and millions of illegal, undocumented people from all over the world enter this country. Anyone with even a little bit of common sense should be able to see that.

    The people that George Bush and his ilk truly perceive as being the most dangerous, are individuals like me, that are putting out info bombs like this article, trying to wake up others to the truth by exposing The New World Order and their crimes, frauds, conspiracies and treachery.

    Why I Write About This

    Basically I am just corroborating what has already been documented to some extent, through ABC News 20/20 and the people they interviewed, and expanding on what they didn’t tell and/or didn’t know at the time, when the stumbled on to what has all the hallmarks of a secret black budget, illegal, covert, unethical, operation.

    Hopefully by me writing about this, and telling what I know, it will encourage others that have knowledge about this matter to step forward. I also hope that other truth seekers also research this matter for themselves and hopefully help expose what’s going on and/or expand on this research, because this is one of the most vital issues of are time and has enormous implications. Hopefully by exposing their evil plot it will ultimately help make the world a safer, better place, not only for us now here, but also for future generations yet to come.

    I am just an average Joe, that loves life, it’s wonders, beauty, freedom, liberty, privacy and our beloved Republic, and expect good, honest government, and do not like or appreciate other people’s sorry attempt to get me caught up in their ongoing frauds and conspiracies against myself and/or others, by keeping quite about this.

    What qualifies me to tell you what I think about all this and give you my opinion about this, is the fact that I saw the ABC News 20/20 show documenting what I consider to be a slam dunk, government, black budget operation dealing with the subject at hand – That I was at Holiday Island in 1981 – And that I have off and on over the last 26 or so years had to deal with these people, their network, secret society, or whatever you want to call them.

    To those of you that have linked to or reposted this article, in it’s various forms over the last year or so, let me say thank you. Good job! To those of you that have read this article and have not heeded this warning, you’re playing into The New World Order’s hands. Don’t say you have not been warned!


    Documentation & Links
    Note: Click on image if it doesn’t enlarge

    Exhibit #1 Sworn affidavit, by me, from 1997, stating that I saw a program on ABC News 20/20 that dealt with a land development in Arkansas, MCO Properties, and about what other people had documented and said about Holiday Island, etc.

    Exhibit # 2 Letter from MCO Properties stating they had destroyed the records pertaining to this matter dated 1981.


    Exhibit #3 This is the notice to rescind all documents whatsoever, because fraud has been instituted upon me, in regards to this matter etc., etc., and was sent certified mail to CIA in 1995, and signed by them as having been received.

    Exhibit #4 Letter sent from MCO Properties March 30, 1987, to my attorney after I had him send a Freedom Of Information Act request to them. At first they again indicated that they did not have any documents, after they did a search, so I again instructed my attorney to request documents they had. MCO Properties wrote back saying “Enclosed please find all documents, dating back to 1981, pertaining to Mr. Welsh”. I wonder what their definition of all means, as there were several documents that I believe, they never sent back. For instance, the property report for that time period. The property report that I saw had listed as officers and/or directors, psychologists and/or psychiatrists. I never got to read the whole property report when I took a tour of Holiday Island, because the agent I was dealing with was whining, complaining, and trying to rush me, while I was reading it. The property report also had some court cases listed where people had sued them. Also absent was a document that they wanted me to sign that had a part in it that said under the Truth In Lending Law I had certain rights, The agent I was dealing with instructed me to draw a line through the sentence that mentioned the Truth In Lending Law, saying that it didn’t apply, Congress did away with it is what I believe he said, and he asked me to initial it. The Truth In Lending Law Is still on the books. Also absent was what the people that were interviewed on ABC News 20/20, more than likely referred to, when they stated that they had signed papers there that they had not read, and what I referred to as having been written in some sort of secret code or foreign language. When presented with that paper (shortly before that, they all of a sudden came up with a different ink pen for me to use) the agent said something along the line that he had never seen a document like that before, and he called Fred over to the table I was sitting at to explain it. Like I said, Fred indicated to me it was to verify who I was. Those are just some of the documents that I believe, they never sent back.


    Here is more research, done by other people and why the above article (see section on MCO Properties and exhibits, along with Holiday Island being documented by ABC News 20/20) may very well be the story of the century and the real CIA “Family Jewels”.

    It appears from the following research that others have done that MCO Properties and some of the people connected with it had a relationship to, BCCI (Bank of Credit and Commerce International) the worlds biggest banking scandal, the saving and loan scandal, the CIA, junk-bond broker Michael Milken, McCulloch Oil Corporation, Maxxam, Simplicity Patterns, Kaiser Aluminum, Pacific Lumber Company, United Savings Association of Texas, to name just a few.

    Excerpted from History of Milken/Hurwitz relationship Part 1:
    In 1977, MCO bought 51% of Pratt Properties, Inc. from Loren Pratt and all of the land development assets of McCulloch were combined into a subsidiary called Pratt Properties. The real estate developments of McCulloch acquired in the 1960’s (Fountain Hills, Lake Havasu City, Holiday Island and Pueblo West) probably went into this subsidiary.

    In December 1982, UFG and USAT engaged in a land sale transaction with Nu-West Florida. A Board member of Nu-West was Loren Pratt who had been, until late in this period, Vice-President of McCulloch Properties and the director of Pratt Holding Company in Fountain Hills. (Pratt Properties had become MCO Properties in 1980, and was a wholly-owned subsidiary of MCO Holdings.) It is not clear whether Pratt was an officer of any part of the MCO/Hurwitz empire at the time of the land deal. Because so much of the empire was real estate-oriented, and so many opportunities for cross-over existed between the twin worlds of real estate and securities (i.e., deeds, mortgages, etc.), the opportunity for self-dealing was great.

    MCO Properties and Charles Hurwitz

    LA Times – A Donor Who Had Big Allies
    DeLay and two others helped put the brakes on a federal probe of a businessman. Evidence was published in the Congressional Record.

    Jail Hurwitz Web Site

    “Teflon CEO” Hurwitz Evades Federal Regulators Over Collapse Of Maxxam S&L

    Google – Hurwitz MCO Properties

    Google – Hurwitz MCO Resorts

    Also See

    Grand Jury Info to be Shared with CIA

    How the Anti-Terrorism Bill Puts CIA Back in the Business of Spying on Americans

    CIA expands its watchful eye to the US
    It will gather intelligence at home to curb terrorism. Critics see era of Big Trenchcoat.

    Having the intelligence community watch over grand juries is equivalent to having the fox guard the hen house and is another New World Order power grab, to keep themselves safe from the citizens.

    Mind Games
    New on the Internet: a community of people who believe the government is beaming voices into their minds. They may be crazy, but the Pentagon has pursued a weapon that can do just that.

    Super-soldiers may get brain-chip
    US military experts are attempting to create an army of super-human soldiers who will be more intelligent and deadly thanks to a microchip implanted in their brains.

    Scientists believe the implant will vastly improve the memory of troops so that they can recall every detail of their training and become more effective fighters.

    Researchers at the University of Southern California’s bio-engineering department have created the chip, which acts in exactly the same way as the hippocampus the part of the brain that deals with memory.

    The brain scan that can read people’s intentions
    A team of world-leading neuroscientists has developed a powerful technique that allows them to look deep inside a person’s brain and read their intentions before they act.

    The research breaks controversial new ground in scientists’ ability to probe people’s minds and eavesdrop on their thoughts, and raises serious ethical issues over how brain-reading technology may be used in the future.

    Patent Number 3951134: Apparatus and method for remotely monitoring and altering brain waves (30+ year old technology)

    Volume 3 of Air Force 2025,
    It is stated [By the year 2025:] “The civilian populace will likely accept implanted microscopic chips that allow military members to defend vital national interests.” — Chapter 4 of Information Operations: A New War-Fighting Capability: Final Report by the U.S. Department of Defense.

    Smart Dust
    “Smart dust” devices are tiny wireless microelectromechanical sensors (MEMS) that can detect everything from light to vibrations. Thanks to recent breakthroughs in silicon and fabrication techniques, these “motes” could eventually be the size of a grain of sand, though each would contain sensors, computing circuits, bidirectional wireless communications technology and a power supply.

    Dust Networks
    Embedded wireless sensor networking for monitoring and control.

    Gov’t settles with CIA brainwashing survivor
    Janine Huard, 79, accepted an offer to end her class-action lawsuit against the federal government, which jointly funded the experiments with the Central Intelligence Agency.

    Huard was a young mother of four suffering from post-partum depression when she checked herself into McGill’s renowned Allen Memorial Institute in 1950.

    On and off for the next 15 years, she was one of hundreds of patients of Dr. Ewan Cameron subjected to experimental treatments that included massive electroshock therapy, experimental pills and LSD.

    Neural Interfaces
    A Neural Interface is any type of data link between the human nervous system and an external device, such as an electronic or hybrid computer or machine.

    Suspension of American Constitution By Iran Contra Gang – Oliver North
    Oliver North questioned over plans to suspend American Constitution by Jack Brooks. (1 Minute 7 Seconds)

    Student Bill Clinton ‘spied’ on Americans abroad for CIA
    As a member of America’s tight-knit association of retired intelligence officers, he has access to highly privileged information. “It’s an incredible network”…

    Obstruction of Justice – The Mena Connection
    On August 23, 1987, two teenage boys stumbled upon a drug smuggling operation that was sanctioned by federal officials and protected by local law enforcement. The boys, Kevin Ives, 17, and Don Henry, 16, were murdered. Their bodies were laid across nearby railroad tracks and mutilated by a passing train.

    Obstruction of Justice – The Mena Connection (Mena, Arkansas) tells what really happened and gives vivid detail into the cover-up and the state and federal officials who orchestrated it (Video 54 Minutes)

    The Clinton Chronicles
    The crimes of Bill Clinton, including his involvement with the Mena drug smuggling by the CIA and others, and the cover-ups. (Video 1 Hour 21 Minutes)

    “Bush – Nazi Dealings Continued Until 1951” – Federal Documents’
    After the seizures in late 1942 of five U.S. enterprises he managed on behalf of Nazi industrialist Fritz Thyssen, Prescott Bush, the grandfather of President George W. Bush, failed to divest himself of more than a dozen “enemy national” relationships that continued until as late as 1951, newly-discovered U.S. government documents reveal.

    Although the additional seizures under the Trading with the Enemy Act did not take place until after the war, documents from The National Archives and Library of Congress confirm that Bush and his partners continued their Nazi dealings unabated. These activities included a financial relationship with the German city of Hanover and several industrial concerns. They went undetected by investigators until after World War Two.

    Bush family funded Adolf Hitler
    Have you ever wondered how Adolph Hitler a mediocre painter of Austrian origin transformed himself into Germany’s Fuhrer during the 1930s and 1940s?

    The Nazi phenomenon was no historical coincidence, and far less a philosophical whim made real by just one man. Nazism had its followers, many of them exceptionally wealthy, veritable alchemists of the financial world back then.

    According to research carried out over the last few years, Wall Street bankers (amongst others) financed Hitler’s rise to power whilst making large profits at the same time. What is yet still more deplorable is the fact that relatives of the current U.S. president were amongst this group of individuals.

    If Only I Were A Dictator, by George W. Bush
    George W. Bush in his own words.

    George Bush: The Unauthorized Biography (Online)

    Meet the Bush Family
    Before George Bush Jr., there was George Bush Sr. And before him there was Prescott Bush, US financier to the Nazis until the FBI shut him down.

    George Bush Sr. was Director of the CIA during the Jimmy Carter years. How did he get that job?

    Bush Sr. claims he was not in the CIA before becoming Director, but evidence shows that he was not only in the CIA, but also actively involved in the Bay of Pigs invasion and yes, the assassination of John F. Kennedy.

    If you think George Bush Jr., Dick Cheney and Donald Rumseld are the problem, you’re just looking at the tip of a very large iceberg. (22 Minutes 6 Seconds)

    TerrorStorm
    TerrorStorm delivers a powerful sucker punch to the architects of global terrorism and how they stage false-flag events to achieve political and sociological ends.

    Alex journeys from the depths of history from the Gulf of Tonkin, the attack on the USS Liberty to the Madrid and 7/7 London bombings and robustly catalogues the real story behind the government induced fable.

    “A state of war only serves as an excuse for domestic tyranny.”


    What some (of many) other people say along these lines

    “If Tyranny and Oppression come to this land, it will be in the guise of fighting a foreign enemy”
    James Madison (American 4th US President (1809-17), and one of the founding fathers of his country, 1751-1836)

    Ex-Washington Investigative producer for ABC’s World News Tonight James Bamford wrote two books on the National Security Agency.

    Rep. John Conyers of Michigan, convened a Jan. 20 hearing on the warrantless spying. Among those called as witnesses was James Bamford. Bamford is quoted as telling the committee “Today, the NSA is the largest intelligence agency on earth and by far the most dangerous if not subjected to strict laws and oversight. It has the ability to virtually get into someone’s mind.”

    Morton H. Halperin, senior fellow at the Council on Foreign Relations in Washington, DC was quoted in the AP News wire story, titled – National security takes precedence over personal liberties, rights in time of crisis, September 17th 2001, “The intelligence agencies have a long list of things they want done. They’ve been waiting for an event to justify them.”

    In the official government document; Volume 3 of Air Force 2025, it is stated [By the year 2025:] “The civilian populace will likely accept implanted microscopic chips that allow military members to defend vital national interests.” – Chapter 4 of Information Operations: A New War-Fighting Capability: Final Report by the U.S. Department of Defense.

    American journalist, three-time Pulitzer Prize winner, Arthur Krock wrote in The New York Times on October 3, 1963, (50 some days before they murdered President Kennedy, in what The House Select Committee on Assassinations in 1979, concluded when they stated “there was a probable conspiracy in the assassination of President Kennedy.) in a article titled, The Intra-Administration War in Vietnam, The C.I.A.’s growth was “likened to a malignancy” which the “very high official was not sure even the White House (“I will smash the CIA into a thousand pieces and scatter it to the winds.” — John F. Kennedy) could control … any longer.” “If the United States ever experiences [an attempt at a coup to overthrow the Government] it will come from the C.I.A. and not the Pentagon.” The agency “represents a tremendous power and total unaccountability to anyone.”

    President Woodrow Wilson said in The New Freedom (1913) “Some of the biggest men in the United States, in the field of commerce and manufacture, are afraid of something. They know that there is a power somewhere so organized, so subtle, so watchful, so interlocked, so complete, so pervasive, that they better not speak above their breath when they speak in condemnation of it.”

    “The very word “secrecy” is repugnant in a free and open society; and we are as a people inherently and historically opposed to secret societies, to secret oaths and to secret proceedings.

    We decided long ago that the dangers of excessive and unwarranted concealment of pertinent facts far outweighed the dangers, which are cited to justify it.”
    President John F. Kennedy – Address to newspaper publishers, April 27, 1961

    Rhodes Scholar, Carroll Quigley, professor of history at the foreign service School of Georgetown University (1910-1977) (William Jefferson Clinton’s admitted mentor) wrote in The Anglo-American Establishment, From Rhodes to Cliveden, 1981, Books In Focus, NY, NY on pg. 49; Of the Secret Societies goals, and methods of operation, Quigley writes, “The goals which Rhodes, and Milner sought, and the methods by which they hoped to achieve them were so similar by 1902 that the two are almost indistinguishable. Both sought to unite the world, and above all the English-speaking world, in a federal structure around Britain. Both felt that this goal could best be achieved by a secret band of men united to one another by devotion to the common cause, and by personal loyalty to one another. Both felt that this band should pursue it’s goal by secret political, and economic influence behind the scenes, and by the control of journalistic, educational, and propaganda agencies…”

    Rockefeller Admitted Elite Goal Of Microchipped Population
    Hollywood director and documentary film maker Aaron Russo has gone in-depth on the astounding admissions of Nick Rockefeller, who personally told him that the elite’s ultimate goal was to create a microchipped population and that the war on terror was a hoax, Rockefeller having predicted an “event” that would trigger the invasions of Iraq and Afghanistan eleven months before 9/11.

    Note: I don’t know Russo, but Winthrop Rockefeller was Governor of Arkansas 1967-1971, so Nick Rockefeller, should know what he is talking about, when he says, their ultimate goal was to create a microchipped population.

    The illegal Iran Contra affair, the secret government within the government, (enter John Poindexter of Iran Contra fame, Director, Information Awareness Office of DARPA, for Bush administration… (Total Information Awareness – a prototype system — is our answer) was trading guns for drugs and went on for five years before it became known and it involved 1000’s of participants. Don’t tell me that a large group of people can’t keep things like this quiet for a long time, especially with the technology they have, with the help of their comrades in the press and others connected with their network.

    Caveat Emptor

    When reading this article please keep in mind that what I have written here I believe to be true, but like I said their does not appear (for obvious reasons) to be a lot of documentation available to me at this time to go along with all of what I allege. Please also keep in mind that to some degree some of what I have written here are my personal opinions and beliefs.

    WTC Insure Fund Makes A Toxic $350M ‘Blunder’

    0

    NY Post

    The city-run $1 billion fund for claims by sick 9/11 responders has “screwed up” by failing to lock up at least $350 million in coverage, lawyers charge.

    The WTC Captive Insurance Co., run by the Bloomberg administration, failed to promptly notify insurers for the city’s Ground Zero contractors that they could be on the hook for claims, the lawyers allege.

    Dozens of those insurers now say notice came too late for them to honor policies for millions of dollars in coverage for injured workers.

    The city may have now blown its chance to collect some $350 million in primary coverage for 9/11 workers with respiratory illness, cancer and other diseases from toxic exposure.

    “Their failure jeopardizes the ability to get the full compensation available for these heroes,” said Paul Napoli, a lawyer for 10,000 cops, firefighters and other workers.

    “What a screw-up,” said Napoli. “It’s a major goof.”

    Napoli has written to attorneys for the Captive, which manages $1 billion in 9/11 aid funded by Congress, threatening to sue them for malpractice.

    “We believe that both you and the Captive . . . are potentially liable for the amount of lost coverage,” Napoli wrote. The Captive lawyers should have coordinated the notification of all insurance companies, he said.

    Many of those companies say they got first notice only recently – some as late as last month – years after the first lawsuits were filed.

    James Tyrrell, of Patton Boggs, a law firm that has collected millions in fees from the federal fund, denied any missteps.

    In a statement to The Post, Tyrrell said that while his firm defends the contractors, it has no responsibility to notify their insurance companies.

    But David Worby, a lawyer for the workers, charged Tyrrell is not doing his job: “His responsibility is to get as much insurance coverage as possible and to compensate the victims.”

    The Captive recently sued several insurance giants, including Liberty Mutual and Lloyd’s of London, for refusing to honor policies or to pay to defend more than 8,000 suits, forcing the Captive to spend millions more in taxpayer funds.

    Sen. Patrick Leahy (D-Vt.), chairman of the Judiciary Committee, and ranking member Sen. Arlen Specter (R-Pa.), have threatened to hold hearings on the Captive.

    Police agencies want drone sky patrols

    0

    CNET

    Police and public safety agencies across the country are beginning to plot a future in which they can freely launch aerial drones that beam down footage of the scenes below.

    The Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) granted more than 100 certifications for use of unmanned aerial vehicles (UAVs) by various federal, state and local government agencies last year, and is on pace to approve about 70 applications this year. But some officials are complaining that existing federal regulations are inconsistent and confusing, potentially stymieing their plans for takeoff.

    Arguably the most vocal critic on that front is the chairman of the aviation committee for the International Association of Chiefs of Police (IACP), the world’s oldest and largest nonprofit group of police executives. Donald Shinnamon, whose day job is public safety chief for the small city of Holly Hill, Fla. just north of Daytona Beach, charges that the FAA is applying its rules inconsistently and defying federal laws about government-operated aircraft.

    “There is an immediate need by state and local public safety personnel for unmanned aerial systems,” he said at an unmanned systems confab here this week. But by his interpretation, the FAA’s rules mean “it’s OK to fly a model aircraft but not OK to fly an aircraft in search of a murder suspect” without its permission.

    To perform an effective job of aerial surveillance, however, means flying drones at higher altitudes–which takes them directly into the flight path of everything from medical helicopters and Cessnas to commercial jets landing at nearby airports. Pilots don’t object to police use of drones, but say they must follow the same rules (including avoidance procedures) and undergo similar certification procedures as airplanes. Police agencies insist that would be too expensive.

    Drones have been in use for years by the military and appear to be only growing in popularity. Now they’re also becoming alluring to resource-strapped local police departments. They say UAVs can deliver the same–or better–bird’s-eye view as a helicopter or airplane, but at a fraction of the cost and with arguably less training and personnel required. (IACP, for its part, hasn’t taken an official stance on the issue but is tracking it, a spokeswoman said.)

    Say there are swimmers caught in a riptide, and county officials want to send help. It would cost anywhere from $450 to $1,200 per hour for L.A. County Sheriff’s Office Commander Charles “Sid” Heal to send one of its helicopters, but a UAV would cost “cents on the dollar,” he said. “And if it crashes, it goes into the ocean and floats away.”

    The FAA admits it is still wrestling with how exactly to keep tabs on the emerging robots’ use. It is in the process of finalizing a five-year “road map” for introducing UAVs into the national airspace.

    For now, it has imposed a number of rules that attempt to draw lines based on who’s operating the UAV and for what purpose.

    Civilian or commercial UAV users can apply for an “experimental certificate” that allows flights for research and development or crew-training purposes. (As of late June, the FAA had issued 13 of those documents.) Hobbyists who intend to fly the machines like model airplanes–that is, at altitudes less than 400 feet, away from populated or “noise-sensitive” areas–are generally off the hook.

    “Public” users, which include the military and government agencies, are allowed to apply for a permission document known as a Certificate of Waiver or Authorization, or COA for short. They’re supposed to show they can control the aircraft in question.

    If granted, that certificate allows use of a drone in a defined airspace for a particular period of time, usually up to a year. A COA often contains other restrictions, too, such as limiting flight time to daylight hours or requiring that a ground observer or accompanying “chase” aircraft keep visual contact with the airborne UAV at all times.

    Cumbersome certification process
    That process is where officials like Shinnamon say the FAA is off the mark. Generally speaking, manned aircraft operated by military or government agencies can be operated without a pilot’s license or an “airworthiness” certificate, which governs whether a vehicle is fit to fly. In Shinnamon’s view, it’s contrary to public aircraft law for the FAA to require UAVs operated by the same entities to go through a different “cumbersome” certification process.

    He also took issue with the flight limitations imposed by the certificates, suggesting law enforcement and public safety agents need to be as nimble as possible when incidents occur.

    Other proponents of UAV use have argued that if hobbyists are generally off-limits to FAA control, small UAVs operated under similar circumstances should be treated the same. For instance, after L.A. County officials test-launched a 3-pound SkySeer surveillance drone in a park last summer without prior permission from the FAA, the agency indicated it wasn’t allowed.

    The occurrence left Commander Heal, who presides over that project, scratching his head. In a telephone interview, he voiced incredulity that, by his interpretation, teenagers could fly model airplanes in the same parks without the FAA’s permission but a police-operated drone, which he argued could have “immediate” life-saving applications in his region, had to be certified.

    FAA spokeswoman Alison Duquette defended her agency’s practices. The decision to require special permission for UAVs reflects what the FAA views as unique risks presented by unmanned vehicles, which the agency believes aren’t yet technologically capable of making all the perceptions that a manned craft can.

    “Our first role is to do no harm,” she said in a telephone interview.

    The civilian piloting community would like to see the FAA do even more to rein in UAV use, citing grave concerns about the potential for dangerous collisions.

    The Aircraft Owners and Pilots Association (AOPA) has been lobbying for UAVs to be held to the same rules as manned aircraft. The group is also leading a committee under the umbrella of the RTCA, an international aviation standards body, to devise uniform industry guidelines that would likely steer the FAA’s own deliberations about new regulations.

    UAVs “should be safetly integrated into the national airspace system with other users, and what that means is having some ‘see and avoid capability’ to detect other aircraft and the ability to communicate with air traffic control stations,” AOPA spokeswoman Kathleen Vasconcelos said in a phone interview.

    Pilots undergo extensive training on collision detection and avoidance. Planes that fly at night are required to have certain types of lights, for instance. Operating an aircraft near busy airports (in government parlance, “Class B” airports) requires a transponder that broadcasts its altitude. And during all flights that take place in poor weather or higher than 18,000 feet above sea level, the pilot must be in radio contact with controllers.

    Last summer, AOPA reported the Gaston County, N.C. police department to federal authorities when it discovered that the officials were flying a small UAV for surveillance purposes without a certificate, which prompted the FAA to prohibit its use.

    Privacy advocates have also raised alarms about the idea of new digital eyes patrolling the skies. The Electronic Privacy Information Center’s Melissa Ngo, who has written about the privacy implications of increased government use of UAVs, said it’s important to sort out a number of questions about the potential for their misuse and abuse.

    For instance, authorities tout UAVs as being far quieter than their manned counterparts, which some authorities view as the answer to residents’ complaints about helicopter noise levels. But the presence of virtually silent and increasingly smaller machines raises obvious privacy concerns.

    “Have state and local police departments spoken to city councils or the public at large about the use of UAVs to watch the general public in everyday activities?” she said in an e-mail interview. “Civilian use of UAVs by state and local police would create a world of constant, unseen surveillance.”

    Local officials aren’t necessarily looking for unfettered UAV-driving rights, Shinnamon said. Ideally, the FAA will be able to work with state and local government officials to come up with UAV-specific regulations, which address things like how high the drones can fly, how far they can travel from their operator, and whether they need to be in the driver’s line of sight.

    “Once we overcome this regulatory issue, I honestly think the use of this technology will explode at the local government level because it offers just so many benefits to us and the ability to serve our citizens,” Shinnamon said.

    Heal, whose office tested a drone last year but has not yet secured formal permission to use it, said he doesn’t “detect any sense of urgency” on the FAA’s part to make its regulations simpler for local officials to follow.

    “We’re going to do this; this is coming,” he said. “And (the FAA) can jump on this train or they can run along behind it, but it is going to leave without them.”

    Declan McCullagh contributed to this story.

    Karl Rove, top Bush aide, to step down

    0

    By Jim Rutenberg

    Karl Rove, the political adviser who masterminded George W. Bush’s two winning presidential campaigns and secured his own place in history as a political strategist with extraordinary influence, is resigning, the White House said Monday.In an interview published in The Wall Street Journal, which first reported the news Monday, Rove said, “I just think it’s time,” adding, “There’s always something that can keep you here, and as much as I’d like to be here, I’ve got to do this for the sake of my family.”

    Rove said he had first considered leaving a year ago but stayed after his party lost the crucial midterm elections last fall, which put Congress in Democratic hands, and as Bush’s problems mounted in Iraq and in his pursuit of a new immigration policy.

    He said his hand was forced now when the White House chief of staff, Joshua Bolten, recently told senior aides that if they stayed past Labor Day he would expect them to stay through the rest of Bush’s term.

    “He’s been talking with the president for a long time – about a year – regarding when might be good to go,” said Dana Perino, a White House spokeswoman.

    “But there’s always a big project to work on, and his strategic abilities – and our need for his support – kept him here,” she said, adding that Rove would leave at the end of August.

    The White House did not immediately say whether Bolten would name a successor to Rove, who held the title of deputy chief of staff.

    But even if he does, none would have the same influence with the president or, most likely, the same encyclopedic knowledge of U.S. politics.

    Rove will be the latest major figure to depart from the Bush administration’s inner circle. Earlier this summer, Bush lost as his counsel Dan Bartlett, a fellow Texan who had been part of the original group of close advisers that followed Bush from the Texas governor’s mansion to the White House.

    Bush named as Bartlett’s successor Ed Gillespie, the former Republican National Committee chairman, who was a crucial part of Bush’s 2004 campaign brain trust. But Gillespie has neither the history, nor the closeness with Bush, that Rove has.

    Rove was not only the chief architect of Bush’s political campaigns but also the midwife of the president’s political persona itself.

    Rove’s continued presence in the White House had become a source of fascination in Washington as others, like Bartlett, left, and as Democrats homed in on his role in the firings of several federal prosecutors.

    Yet it was nonetheless widely believed both inside and outside the White House that he would walk out the door behind Bush at the end of his term in January 2009 and would help the president solidify his legacy before his exit.

    Rove had vowed to build a lasting Republican majority, and some associates believed he would try to help his party keep the White House. But in his interview with The Wall Street Journal, whose editorial page is a favored outlet for Bush and his aides, he said he had no intention of getting involved in the 2008 presidential race.

    Rove has portrayed the 2006 midterm elections as a temporary setback, and he said in the interview that he believed Republicans were still on track for victory in the next election.

    He predicted that conditions in Iraq would improve – though he did not address speculation that the president will face pressure this fall, possibly even from fellow Republicans, to bring troops home sooner rather than later.

    Rove said he intended to write a book, which had been encouraged by “the boss,” and eventually to teach.

    Throughout Bush’s tenure, Rove vilified Democrats, and they vilified him right back, complaining about his famously bare-knuckle political tactics on the campaign trail and what they considered his overt politicization of the White House.

    He has been the focus in the Congressional investigations into the firings last year of several federal prosecutors, and he was named in the CIA leak case investigation that led to a perjury conviction for Vice President Dick Cheney’s former chief of staff, I. Lewis Libby.

    Rove emerged from the cloud of the investigation to try to stave off Republican defeats last fall. The subsequent failure was his biggest political loss during his tenure at the White House.

    Afterward, he continued to take a central role in major initiatives such as Bush’s failed attempt to create a new immigration law that would have legalized millions of undocumented workers currently living in the United States, many of them Hispanic. A political strategist who solidified his reputation by bringing together the sprawling coalition that put Bush in office, Rove saw Hispanics as a vast new source of Republican voters.

    Rove was in the eye of the political storm once again this year as Congress set out to learn his role in the prosecutors’ firings, which critics charge had been carried out to impede or spark investigations for partisan aims.

    That investigation, and others, have raised new questions about Rove’s dual role as political adviser and a senior policy aide with wide latitude to pull the levers of government – while briefing even members of the diplomatic corps on the political landscape and the electoral vulnerabilities of the Democrats. The White House cited executive privilege in blocking the testimony of Rove before the Senate Judiciary Committee.

    In his Wall Street Journal interview Monday, Rove said he knew that some people might suspect he was leaving office to avoid scrutiny, but added “I’m not going to stay or leave based on whether it pleases the mob.”

    He said he believed the probing would continue after he left the White House because of what he called the “myth” of his influence, which he referred to as “the Mark of Rove.”

    But from the time he leaves office, Rove will no longer have the protection of White House lawyers and will be largely on his own when it comes to dealing with Congressional subpoenas.

    The White House has provided cover for some former aides by issuing letters directing them not to testify about their privileged conversations with the president or to answer only a limited set of potential questions.

    In his interview Monday, which was with the editorial page editor of The Wall Street Journal, Paul Gigot, Rove had a parting shot for his political nemesis, Senator Hillary Rodham Clinton, telling Gigot that he believed she would be the Democratic nominee. Rove called her a “tough, tenacious, fatally flawed candidate” and predicted a Republican victory in the 2008 presidential race.

    It is the sort of political boasting that became Rove’s hallmark.

    A Sit Down With An 9/11 Fire Fighter

    1

    A fire fighter’s testimony about what he experienced whilst fighting the fires on 911 has now been released.

    Official government lies are being challenged not only by hard science, but also by the witnesses who are now recovering sufficiently from their shock and illnesses to tell their story.

    We have a duty to listen with measured consideration so that we can understand. Currently we understand only the fictions; the conspiracy theories and the politically motivated untruths.

    Prepare to be truly enlightened:-

    Nearly 70 British people were murdered on 911 by terrorists – do we not have a personal duty to ensure the real terrorist conspirators are brought to justice?

    If you like me, value true justice, the truth & fair law – then give this link to others who also wish to be set free from the official government lies.

    Indeed, if one is not part of finding the truth, then by default, is one not part of the lie?

    Korea Struggles to Find Lost Uranium

    1

    By Kim Tae-gyu

    The Korea Atomic Energy Research Institute (KAERI) is having a hard time searching for 2.7 kilograms of uranium sent to an incinerator by accident in May.

    The state-run institute learned of the grave mistake on Aug. 6 and formed a task force to find the material that had drawn the attention of the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA).

    Included in the missing material are 1.9 kilograms of natural uranium and 0.8 kilograms of depleted uranium as well as 0.2 grams of enriched uranium, which is still being investigated by the IAEA.

    “Uranium doesn’t burn. So the uranium in question should remain intact at the waste dump. Our staff members will look hard for it,” a KAERI spokesman said.

    “But the hitch is that the uranium was processed months ago and is smaller than the size of a golf ball. We are afraid that it may take months to find it,” he said.

    This means that the KAERI may be unable to meet the request of an IAEA inspector, who visited the Daejeon-based KAERI Tuesday in order to examine the enriched uranium, to find the lost material by the end of the month.

    However, KAERI does not seem overly concerned.

    “We are not required to report the loss of such a tiny amount of uranium to the IAEA. But we reported the matter because it was examined by the IAEA,” the spokesman said.

    “Even under the worst-case scenario _ our failure to find the uranium _ the IAEA is not expected to take serious issue with it,” he said.

    The 0.2 grams of enriched uranium, which has an enrichment level of approximately 10 percent, was made in an experiment to obtain substances used for high-end medical equipment in 2000.

    The material was uncovered in 2004, but KAERI argued that the low-enriched uranium had nothing to do with weapons, which use highly-enriched uranium.

    However, the IAEA sent an investigation team to Korea in 2004 to check the material. In this climate, KAERI staff disposed of the uranium in error while the IAEA investigation is technically still ongoing.

    voc200@koreatimes.co.kr

    9/11: Total Proof That Bombs Were Planted In The Buildings!

    1

    Bombs, explosions, secondary explosions, explosive devices….how many more times do we need to hear these words being said by 9/11 witnesses before we start asking questions about what really happened on that awful day?

    This video shows that many actual 9/11 witnesses heard and saw explosions going off inside the towers, long before they actually fell. These witnesses include police, firemen and mainstream media reporters.

    And what is even more shocking is the fact that all of this has been ignored by the mainstream media.

    We really need to wake up to the facts and ask questions. If we don’t, what does that say about us?

    9/11 Made Saddam More Dangerous

    1

     know this isn’t exactly a current event, but this was a chunk of logic that had always perplexed me. Consider this another one of my open discussion threads, where this time I revisit the “Why the heck did we invade Iraq, again?” question. First, we’re going to take the time machine back to 1994 and visit our pal Dick Cheney (this video seems to be making the rounds). He’s explaining why deposing Saddam would be a BAD idea. WARNING: You are about to enter the Twilight Zone…

    How many additional dead Americans is Saddam worth?”

    Yep, he actually said  ”quagmire”

    Fast forward to March 2003. Cheney is explaining the rationale for war with MTP’s Tim Russert, and mentions 9/11 ten times, al-Qaeda six times and WMD’s dozens of times. Here is the part where Cheney explains why he’s flip-flopped on the issue:

    VICE PRES. CHENEY: Well, I hope not, Tim. Of course, in ’91, there was a general consensus that we’d gone as far as we should. We’d achieved our objectives when we liberated Kuwait and that we shouldn’t go on to Baghdad. But there were several assumptions that was based on. One that all those U.N. Security Council resolutions would be enforced. None of them has been. That’s the major difference. And it was based on the proposition that Saddam Hussein probably wouldn’t survive. Most of the experts believed based upon the severe drubbing we administered to his forces in Kuwait that he was likely to be overthrown or ousted. Of course, that didn’t happen. He’s proven to be a much tougher customer than anybody expected.

    We’re now faced with a situation, especially in the aftermath of 9/11, where the threat to the United States is increasing. And over time, given Saddam’s posture there, given the fact that he has a significant flow of cash as a result of the oil production of Iraq, it’s only a matter of time until he acquires nuclear weapons. And in light of that, we have to be prepared, I think, to take the action that is being contemplated. Doesn’t insist that he be disarmed and if the U.N. won’t do it, then the United States and other partners of the coalition will have to do that.

    Now, I think things have gotten so bad inside Iraq, from the standpoint of the Iraqi people, my belief is we will, in fact, be greeted as liberators. And the president’s made it very clear that our purpose there is, if we are forced to do this, will in fact be to stand up a government that’s representative of the Iraqi people, hopefully democratic due respect for human rights, and it, obviously, involves a major commitment by the United States, but we think it’s a commitment worth making. And we don’t have the option anymore of simply laying back and hoping that events in Iraq will not constitute a threat to the U.S. Clearly, 12 years after the Gulf War, we’re back in a situation where he does constitute a threat.

    Of course, Cheney makes no mention of “quagmire” and he doesn’t touch on the pitfalls of having a occupying force in a “volatile region” or the dangers of having “pieces of Iraq fly off”. Nope. Greeted as liberators. And as we all know, Saddam had nothing to do with 9/11, little to do with al Qaeda, and those WMD’s never really turned up. 

    And what was it about 9/11 that made Saddam more dangerous? I can’t think of anything. It’s a fallacy. this sort of ties into my previous thread: What Does “Post 9/11 World” Really Mean?

    Cheney was actually asked about the “quagmire” sentiment back in February:

    Karl: Back in 1991, you talked about how military action in Iraq would be the classic definition of a quagmire. Have you been disturbed to see how right you were? Or people certainly said that you were exactly on target in your analysis back in 1991 of what would happen if the U.S. tried to go in —

    Cheney: Well, I stand by what I said in ‘91. But look what’s happened since then – we had 9/11. We’ve found ourselves in a situation where what was going on in that part of the globe and the growth and development of the extremists, the al Qaeda types that are prepared to strike the United States demonstrated that we weren’t safe and secure behind our own borders. We weren’t in Iraq when we got hit on 9/11. But we got hit in ‘93 at the World Trade Center, in ‘96 at Khobar Towers, or ‘98 in the East Africa embassy bombings, 2000, the USS Cole. And of course, finally 9/11 right here at home. They continued to hit us because we didn’t respond effectively, because they believed we were weak. They believed if they killed enough Americans, they could change our policy because they did on a number of occasions. That day has passed. That all ended with 9/11.

    Ah, I think we have it right there. They thought we were weak, so of course the perfect way to show them how tough we are would be….invading a country that had nothing to do with it? Something that Cheney himself said would be a extremely risky proposition just a few years earlier. Makes sense.

    I wonder if it ever occurred to Cheney that maybe they knew that if they hit us hard enough, we’d do something stupid and reckless and get ourselves stuck in a “quagmire”?

    Update: This video is really making the rounds. It’s #3 on YouTube right now. Also, the reaction at DailyKos.

    Update: The video was posted over at Hot Air as well. 

    My effing point was to contrast Cheney’s remarkable prescience about the consequences of occupying Iraq in 1994 with the foolhardiness of some of the administration’s planning before invading in 2003. Publicly, at least, they expected an easy time of it. Cheney in 1994 knew better. Why the discrepancy? And why are you so irritated that I’d post this?

    Allahpundit on August 11, 2007 at 2:51 PM

    I’m beginning to like this Allahpundit.

    Source
    9/11 Made Saddam More Dangerous

    Police force employs 16-year-olds

    0

    A police force has defended its decision to recruit two 16-year-olds to work as community support officers. The move means the teenagers could be given powers to guard crime scenes, issue penalty notices or detain suspects until police officers arrive.

    They will also be allowed to confiscate alcohol consumed in public, despite being too young to drink.

    Thames Valley Police said the two met the standard, but 12 other forces said they did not employ under 18s.

    The teenagers, who are currently undergoing training for their new roles, would also have the authority to direct traffic even though they cannot drive.

    Assistant Chief Constable Nick Gargan, of Thames Valley Police, said: “If people have the skills, the ability, the maturity and the aptitudes then we can see no reason why we shouldn’t recruit them.

    “We reject thousands of people who want to come and work for Thames Valley Police, but these two are among the lucky ones who’ve met the standard.

    “What we are not trying to create with our community support officers is policing on the cheap.”

    Forces in Hampshire, Sussex, Lancashire, Northumbria, Kent, London, Staffordshire, Warwickshire, Cleveland, Durham, Cheshire and Gwent said they did have any under-18s as PCSOs.

    Judged on merit

    A spokesman for Sussex Police said he “couldn’t imagine” that his force would recruit anyone so young and that no one aged 16 was working as a police community support officer (PCSO) in the counties it covered.

    Staffordshire Police said age discrimination legislation meant all applicants for PCSO roles had to be judged on merit, but that it did not have any employees below 18.

    Lancashire Police said: “This is a decision made at the interview stage because a lot of the work they do is based on life experiences, and when you’re under 18 you haven’t got that much.”

    Northumbria Police said: “Part of their job is to seize alcohol from under 18s, so it would be inappropriate for a 16-year-old to be in possession of something they are not allowed to have.”

    But a Cleveland Police spokeswoman said: “Anyone who is aged 16 can apply to be a PCSO and their application is treated the same as anybody else’s.”

    Anti-social behaviour

    Humberside Police said they also had a policy where 16-year-olds could apply to be PCSOs.

    A spokeswoman said: “The youngest PCSO we have currently is seventeen-and-a-half years old.”

    Merseyside Police said it had no age limits on applicants for the role, but it had not received any applications from 16-year-olds to date.

    Unlike the police force, which has a minimum age requirement of 18, there is no national age limit for PCSOs.

    The government introduced community support officers five years ago to tackle low-level crime and anti-social behaviour.

    A Home Office spokeswoman said: “PCSOs are an invaluable addition to the police forces.

    “Police staff numbers are historically high and this, among other measures, has led to crime falling by a third over the last 10 years.”

    BBC

    Myths of Mideast Arms Sales

    0

    By William D. Hartung

    The Bush administration’s proposal to send $20 billion worth of arms and $43 billion in military aid to U.S. allies in the Middle East has been promoted by repeating a series of time-worn myths that should have long since been abandoned. With a shooting war in Iraq and a war of words with Iran well under way, the last thing the region needs is a new influx of high tech weaponry.

    The suggestions of Secretary of State Condoleezza Rice and Secretary of Defense Robert Gates that this flood of armaments will be “stabilizing” in the short term while underscoring the U.S. commitment to “moderates” in the region over the longer term is a prime example of this historical amnesia.

    Take Saudi Arabia, which continues to pursue policies that are moderate in name only. Not only is Riyadh one of the most undemocratic regimes in the world, but it has more often than not used its financial resources to promote extremism and repression elsewhere. From financing fundamentalist madrassahs in Pakistan to supporting Sunni insurgents in Iraq, the regime has a long track record of opposing the values of democracy and moderation that the Bush administration claims are the overarching principles of its foreign policy. It’s hard to see how selling Saudi Arabia more military equipment will change this pattern, any more than arming the Shah of Iran in the 1970s and the Afghan rebels in the 1980s promoted stability in those countries.

    Some elements of the proposed package are particularly disturbing. Satellite guided bombs are not “defensive weapons”,” as the administration claims. Using them would be ill-advised, if not disastrous.

    This raises the question of who exactly would Riyadh use these weapons against. Iran? Iraq? Israel? Internal opponents?

    Iran has no intention of invading Saudi Arabia; if it wants to undermine Saudi security it is far more likely to work via proxy, a tactic that the Saudis are well-equipped to counter in kind.

    An attack on Iraq in the context of a civil war would only exacerbate tensions and help savage any remnants of stability that remain there.

    Attacking Israel would be a suicide mission, given Tel Aviv’s substantial military superiority. The only plausible scenarios – and the ones most feared by Israeli officials – would be if a rogue pilot attempted to strike without authorization or an even more extremist regime were to overthrow the current Saudi government.
    Last but not least, using satellite guided bombs against armed extremists within Saudi Arabia would be the wrong tool for the job, like trying to kill a swarm of mosquitoes with a sledge hammer. Good intelligence would be a far more effective tool. What if the Bush administration tried to foster greater intelligence cooperation instead of casting its two top cabinet officials in the role of second-rate arms brokers?

    In the short-term, these scenarios may not be high probability events, but as the U.S. experiences with arming the Shah of Iran and the Afghan rebels demonstrate, weapons supplied now can be used against U.S . interests down the road as political conditions change.

    If a symbol of U.S. commitment to Saudi Arabia is needed, there are plenty of other tools at Washington’s disposal, in the realms of diplomacy, economic cooperation, and coordinated law enforcement efforts, among others. Not to mention the fact that the funds the Saudis expend for this proposed deal would be far more productive – and stabilizing – if they were invested in economic and social programs within the kingdom.

    For all of these reasons, the U.S. Congress must take preemptive action to try to derail or reshape the Middle East arms package. Since Congress was granted the right to stop major arms deals via a joint resolution of disapproval under the Arms Export Control Act of 1976, it has never successfully done so via a formal vote. But there have been instances where the threat of Congressional action has led to the restructuring or delaying of specific deals.

    A successful effort to block or reshape the Mideast arms package must begin with detailed hearings as soon as Congress starts its fall term. Waiting for a formal notification from the executive branch, as skeptics like Senate Foreign Relations Committee chair Joseph Biden and House Foreign Affairs Committee chair Tom Lantos have pledged to do, will be too little too late. Given the inherent problems with this arms package, it is unlikely to withstand public scrutiny. It is up to Congress to take the lead in promoting a real debate on this critical issue.

    William D. Hartung is the director of the Arms and Security Project at the New America Foundation

    Iraqi government on brink of collapse following cabinet walkouts

    0

    By James Cogan

    The political survival of Prime Minister Nouri al-Maliki is in doubt following the withdrawal from his cabinet of two political blocs that derive the bulk of their support from Iraq’s Sunni Arab population. A variety of sectarian and ethnic cliques in Baghdad are reportedly involved in discussion with the Bush administration over ousting Maliki and forming a new government when the Iraqi parliament resumes in September.

    Five ministers from to the Iraqi Accordance Front (IAF) resigned their positions last Wednesday. On July 25, the IAF gave Maliki seven days to announce a major purge of Shiite militia members within the new Iraqi army and police, increased funding for government services in Sunni areas and the release of thousands of Sunnis detained in US and government prisons on suspicion of involvement in the anti-occupation insurgency. In their resignation statement, the Sunni ministers accused Maliki of “arrogance” and having “led Iraq to a level of misery it had not seen in modern history”.

    The IAF functions as the political wing of the powerful Association of Muslim Scholars (AMS), an organisation of several thousand clerics who bitterly resent the loss of Sunni influence following the US overthrow of the largely Sunni-based Baathist regime of Saddam Hussein. Since 2003, Shiite fundamentalist opponents of Baath Party rule have dominated the various US puppet governments in Baghdad. The AMS regularly accuses the Shiite-led government of infiltrating Shiite militias into the security forces to murder Sunni opponents. It also alleges the government deliberately restricts services and reconstruction work in Sunni areas.

    The walkout by the Sunni ministers had one primary aim: to end Maliki’s ability to claim he heads a “national unity” government that represents all Iraq’s sectarian and ethnic groups–one of the Bush administration’s so-called benchmarks. On Monday, they were joined by four ministers from the Iraqi National List of Iyad Allawi, who announced they will boycott all cabinet meetings until Maliki ends his “marginalisation” of Sunnis.

    A total of 17 ministers have now left or are boycotting his cabinet. A member of Allawi’s list resigned earlier this year while six ministers from the Sadrist Shiite movement walked out in April. The Sadrists, who posture as opponents of the US occupation, resigned after Maliki rejected the demand of their leader, cleric Moqtada al-Sadr, for a timetable specifying when all foreign troops would leave Iraq. The latest defections reduce the cabinet to a barely functioning rump.

    There is no doubt that the Bush administration is behind the effort to bring down Maliki’s government. Iyad Allawi is little more than a US stooge. In the lead-up to the war, he had a hand in fabricating the lies that Iraq had weapons of mass destruction and that the Iraqi people would welcome a US invasion. He was rewarded in 2004, when the occupation installed him as the country’s unelected interim prime minister. He undoubtedly harbours ambitions to retake the position and would have sought Washington’s blessing before announcing his List’s boycott of the cabinet.

    Speaking from a luxury villa in Jordan where he spends much of his time, Allawi summed up the US attitude toward Maliki in the New York Times this week: “The national unity government is a myth, not a reality. The political process is going nowhere.”

    US frustrations with Maliki have been growing since he was named by the ruling United Iraqi Alliance (UIA) as its candidate for prime minister in May 2006. He has been repeatedly accused by the US military of thwarting its attempts to destroy the powerful Sadrist militia–the Mahdi Army. While no longer in the cabinet, the Sadrists still provide the main base of support for Maliki within the Shiite UIA, along with his own Da’wa Party. The other major party in the coalition, the Supreme Islamic Iraqi Council (SIIC), wants one of its leaders, current vice-president Adel Abdul Mahdi, to be prime minister.

    This year, Maliki has failed to even secure the necessary support within his own coalition, let alone other factions, for Washington’s “benchmarks”. Among the main US demands are legislation that would open Iraq’s oil industry to foreign investment and an end to the policy of “de-Baathification” that prevents thousands of predominantly Sunni ex-members of Hussein’s party from holding government or military positions. In US circles, the marginalisation of former Baathists is held responsible for a large part of the insurgency in Iraq.

    Fueling US antagonism toward not only Maliki but all the Shiite factions in Iraq are their political and religious relations with Iran. Under conditions of rising tensions between Washington and Tehran, many Shiite politicians still consider Iran the natural ally of a Shiite-dominated Iraqi state. Maliki again caused outrage in Washington by meeting on Wednesday with Iranian leaders and declaring Iran was playing a “constructive role” in stabilising Iraq. A major element of US propaganda against Tehran is the accusation that Iranian special forces are supplying rogue Sadrist militiamen with explosives to attack US troops.

    Throughout this year, the US military has been shifting away from a Shiite-led government in Baghdad. It has sought to develop an alternative base of support for the US occupation in Sunni areas. Millions of dollars have been handed out to secure alliances with Sunni tribal leaders and insurgent groups across Baghdad and western and central Iraq. In the main, these new Sunni allies are utterly hostile to Maliki’s government, which they denounce as a puppet of Iran rather than Washington.

    The 25,000 Sunni militiamen who have been recruited are viewed by Maliki as a threat to Shiite power. His objections, however, have been ignored by the US commander in Iraq, General David Petraeus, and dismissed by the Bush administration.

    The abandonment of Maliki’s government by the Sunni IAF and Allawi’s List is bringing these simmering tensions to a head. With just 21 ministers still loyal to the prime minister out of the original 38, there is tremendous pressure even within the Shiite UIA to propose an alternative leader rather than risk being excluded from power altogether.

    Intense manoeuvring is underway. Saleh al-Mutlaq, the leader of the small Sunni Iraqi National Dialogue Front, told the New York Times this week that he was seeking talks with the IAF, Allawi’s group and the anti-UIA Shiite Fadhila Party over forming a rival coalition. If such a grouping were able to get the support of the 55-strong Kurdistan Alliance (KA) in the parliament, it would have an outright majority and could govern without any of the Shiite fundamentalist parties. Allawi would be the most likely candidate for prime minister.

    According to the Egypt-based Al-Ahram, the Bush administration is working on another option. Bush has reportedly held phone conversations over the past two weeks with SIIC’s leading candidate for prime minister, Adel Abdul Mahdi, as well as the party’s leader, cleric Abdul Aziz al-Hakim. He has also spoken with Kurdish president Jalal Talabani and Sunni vice-president Tariq Hashemi.

    The US is apparently backing the creation of a new coalition consisting of SIIC, factions of Da’wa prepared to abandon Maliki, Allawi’s List, Hashemi’s faction of the Iraqi Accordance Front and the Kurdish parties. Allawi or Mahdi would head such a government. It would exclude Maliki and the Sadrists, as well as Fadhila and Sunni groupings such as Mutlaq’s which are antagonistic toward US demands for the sell-off of Iraq’s oil.

    The price being demanded by the Kurdish parties is clear. They would want Kurdish control over the northern city of Kirkuk and the oilfields that surround it. Hinting at their willingness to be bought, Talabani pointedly declared last week that the Sunni criticisms of Maliki were “mostly fair”. Mahmoud Othman, a Kurdish legislator, told the Al-Ahram Weekly that the Kurdish parties wanted to enhance “reconciliation by including Allawi in the political process”.

    SIIC’s collaboration in a move against Maliki has a similar price. It has been pushing for the creation of an autonomous region in its southern Iraqi stronghold that would control the country’s southern oilfields. SIIC’s regionalism is bitterly opposed and would be resisted by the Baghdad-centred Sadrist movement. If SIIC and the Kurdish parties have their way, Iraq will be effectively partitioned along ethnic and sectarian lines–a move that can only accelerate large-scale ethnic cleansing, sectarian violence and instability, not only in Iraq but throughout the region.

    The Bush administration’s barely disguised efforts to oust Maliki once again make a mockery of its claims to have created a sovereign, democratic government in Baghdad. Whatever the final outcome of its political manipulations, the White House is seeking a new regime that will more effectively implement US demands, particularly for the opening up of Iraqi oilfields to US corporations, and ruthlessly suppress ongoing opposition to the occupation. Moreover, by eliminating or at least diluting Shiite influence in the Baghdad government, the US is clearing the decks for a sharp escalation of its confrontation with Iran, including the use of military force.

    Database of top-secret police phone taps stolen

    0

    By Ruth Elkins

    Police chiefs have launched a major investigation after the theft of a computer database containing thousands of top-secret mobile phone records from terrorism and organised crime investigations.

    Scotland Yard is concerned that crucial evidence from undercover investigations could be lost forever or has found its way into “the wrong hands” after the computer and other IT equipment disappeared from a private firm in Sevenoaks, Kent, last Monday night after a break-in.

    Forensic Telecommunications Services, whose clients include Scotland Yard, The Police Service of Northern Ireland, HM Revenue and Customs and the Crown Prosecution Service, specialises in tapping mobile phone calls made by criminal suspects. The stolen security-protected server contained the minutiae of phone calls it had screened, including the identity of the person who had made the call, as well as the exact time and location of the suspect when the call was made.

    In a statement released to The Mail on Sunday, Forensic Telecommunications Services confirmed that the equipment had been stolen from its offices but denied that its disappearance would impact negatively on current police cases.

    ID cards ‘could be a Big Brother tax trap’

    0

    By Christopher Hope

    Identity cards could provide a back door for the taxman to snoop on people’s affairs using a database of National Insurance numbers.

    The card system will use an existing NI database to log details, potentially making it easier for tax inspectors to keep tabs. Officials had hoped to base ID cards on a National Identity Register but will instead use the Customer Information System run by the Department of Work and Pensions.

    This holds the records of everyone with a NI number, sparking concerns that HM Revenue & Customs could track a person’s personal life through their ID card, which must be produced whenever a proof of identity is required.

    Guy Herbert, spokesman for the NO 2 ID campaign, said people would create an “audit trail” when they used their cards. This would be linked to their NI numbers.

    “Of course ID cards are a tax-gathering tool,” he said. “When the Home Office talks about ‘preventing illegal working’ it is getting you to think of illegal immigrants, but an employer ‘verifying your status’ with the National Identity Register will create an audit trail of precisely who employs whom.”

    Gareth Crossman, policy director at Liberty, added: “The Government sold us the ID card scheme under the guise of terror and crime protection, but the reality is that it has the potential for massive, unanticipated state access into our private lives.”

    Damian Green, the Conservatives’ shadow immigration minister, said: “The public will be alarmed at this sinister Big Brother development.”

    The Government denied that the database would be used for tax enforcement. A spokesman said: “It is not connected to any plans for improved tax enforcement and the information held on NI records will not include any tax records whatsoever.”

    Court Says Travelers Can’t Avoid Airport Searches

    0

    By David Kravets

    U.S. airline passengers near the security checkpoint can be searched any time and no longer can refuse consent by leaving the airport, the nation’s largest federal appeals court ruled Friday.

    The decision (.pdf) by the 9th U.S. Circuit Court of Appeals overturned the circuit’s 34-year-old precedent that over time was evolving toward limiting when passengers could refuse a search and leave the airport after they had checked their bags or placed items on the security screening X-ray machine. Citing threats of terrorism, the court ruled passengers give up all rights to be free of warrantless searches once a “passenger places hand luggage on a conveyor belt for inspection” or “passes though a magnetometer.”

    “…Requiring that a potential passenger be allowed to revoke consent to an ongoing airport security search makes little sense in a post-9/11 world,” Judge Carlos Bea wrote for the unanimous 15-judge panel. “Such a rule would afford terrorists multiple opportunities to attempt to penetrate airport security by ‘electing not to fly’ on the cusp of detection until a vulnerable portal is found.”

    The U.S. Supreme Court has never squarely addressed the limits of the Fourth Amendment in the context of airport searches. The attorney representing a man imprisoned for drug possession who tried to leave the airport rather than be searched is weighing whether to petition the justices to review the decision.

    The case concerns Daniel Aukai, a Hawaiian man arrested with 50 grams of methamphetamine at the Honolulu International Airport in 2003. After he passed the initial screening station to board a flight to Kona, Hawaii, he was placed in a secondary search, as required by government protocol, because he did not have identification. He refused the search and asked to leave. Transportation Security Officials searched him and discovered the drugs and a glass pipe. 

    He was handed 70 months. (See Ryan’s story from last year.) The sentence was upheld by the San Francisco appeals court.

    “This is a post-9/11-bunker mentality,” said Aukai’s attorney, Pamela O’Leary Tower of Honolulu. “He said ‘I want to leave.’ The purpose of an airport search is to keep people off planes with bombs. The opinion seems to gut that.”

    In 1973, the circuit court ruled that airport searches were valid “only if they recognize the right of a person to avoid search by electing not to board the aircraft.” In later rulings, the court began backing off, ruling passengers could not opt out of searches if they had checked luggage or if carry-on items were flagged during the initial screening to enter the terminal area.

    The case is United States v. Aukai, 04-10226.

    America under surveillance

    0

    Granted new power to spy inside the U.S., the Bush administration may be doing more than eavesdropping on phone calls — it could be watching suspects’ every move.

    By Tim ShorrockIn the pre-dawn hours of Sept. 1, 2005, a U-2 surveillance aircraft known as the Dragon Lady lifted off the runway at Beale Air Force Base in California, the home of the U.S. Air Force 9th Reconnaissance Wing and one of the most important outposts in the U.S. intelligence world. Originally built in secret by Lockheed Corp. for the Central Intelligence Agency, the U-2 has provided some of the most sensitive intelligence available to the U.S. government, including thousands of photographs of Soviet and Chinese military bases, North Korean nuclear sites, and war zones from Afghanistan to Iraq.

    But the aircraft that took off that September morning wasn’t headed overseas to spy on America’s enemies. Instead, for the next six hours it flew directly over the U.S. Gulf Coast, capturing hundreds of high-resolution images as Hurricane Katrina, one of the largest storms of the past century, slammed into New Orleans and the surrounding region.

    The U-2 photos were matched against satellite imagery captured during and after the disaster by the National Geospatial-Intelligence Agency. Relatively unknown to the public, the NGA was first organized in 1996 from the imagery and mapping divisions of the CIA, the Department of Defense and the National Reconnaissance Office, the agency that builds and maintains the nation’s fleet of spy satellites. In 2003, the NGA was formally inaugurated as a combat support agency of the Pentagon. It is responsible for supplying overhead imagery and mapping tools to the military, the CIA and other intelligence agencies — including the National Security Agency, whose wide-reaching, extrajudicial spying inside the United States under the Bush administration has been a heated political issue since first coming to light in the media nearly two years ago.

    The NGA’s role in Hurricane Katrina has received little attention outside of a few military and space industry publications. But the agency’s close working relationship with the NSA — whose powers to spy domestically were just expanded with new legislation from Congress — raises the distinct possibility that the U.S. government could be doing far more than secretly listening in on phone calls as it targets and tracks individuals inside the United States. With the additional capabilities of the NGA and the use of other cutting-edge technologies, the government could also conceivably be following the movements of those individuals minute by minute, watching a person depart from a mosque in, say, Lodi, Calif., or drive a car from Chicago to Detroit.

    Prior to Katrina, the NGA had been used sporadically during domestic crises. Its first baptism of fire came after the 9/11 terrorist attacks, when the agency collected imagery to help in the recovery efforts at the World Trade Center and the Pentagon. But the storm of 2005 triggered NGA activity on a scale never before seen inside the borders of the United States. “Hurricane Katrina changed everything with what we do with disasters,” John Goolgasian, the director of the NGA’s Office of Americas, told Salon. In New York after 9/11, the NGA had only a handful of people on the ground, but “with Katrina, we put a lot of people down in the theater,” he said, using a term usually reserved for overseas military battlegrounds. The agency now deploys its staff on a regular basis to hurricane zones and also provides assistance to law enforcement agencies during events such as the Super Bowl, the baseball All-Star Game and political conventions.

    On one level, the engagement of the NGA and the U-2 flights over the Gulf Coast during Katrina were commendable efforts to use America’s vast surveillance powers for the safety and support of its citizens. But at the same time, the incident apparently marked the first time in history that U.S. intelligence agencies created to spy on foreign countries were deployed to collect extensive information on the U.S. “homeland.” Their role during Katrina is just one aspect of an enormous domestic surveillance infrastructure put in place by the Bush administration ever since the Sept. 11 terrorist attacks sparked a radical restructuring and expansion of America’s intelligence system. Although the full scope of domestic surveillance under Bush remains elusive, we now know from press accounts, lawsuits, and Attorney General Alberto Gonzales and other top Bush officials’ descriptions and denials that the NSA has been involved in multiple domestic surveillance programs — in apparent violation of federal law — including spying on Americans’ telecommunications and Internet traffic, as well as data mining.

    In December 2004, the NSA and the NGA announced the signing of an agreement to share resources and staff and to link their “sources, data holdings, information infrastructure, and exploitation techniques.” The document spelling out the agreement itself is classified. But in a press release the NGA explained that the pact allows “horizontal integration” between the two agencies, defined as “working together from start to finish, using NGA’s ‘eyes’ and NSA ‘ears.'”

    The collaboration makes it possible for the agencies to create hybrid intelligence tools that enhance the ability of U.S. forces in combat. By combining intercepts of cellphone calls with overhead imagery gathered by unmanned aerial vehicles (UAVs), for example, intelligence analysts can track suspected terrorists or insurgents in Iraq in real time. Last November, NGA director Robert B. Murrett disclosed that it was through such technology that the U.S. military was able to locate and bomb the safe house where Abu Musab al-Zarqawi, the leader of al-Qaida in Iraq, was staying in June 2006. “Eventually, it all comes down to physical location,” he told reporters. When NSA and NGA data are combined, he added, “the multiplier effect is dramatic.”

    Nine months prior, during Hurricane Katrina, the NGA’s sophisticated surveillance tools, which can create three-dimensional maps, helped first responders identify hospitals, schools and areas where hazardous materials were stored in the Gulf Coast region. And in an unprecedented move, the NGA distributed thousands of unclassified images of stricken areas, via the Internet, to the public. “People could actually see their houses,” said retired Air Force Gen. James R. Clapper, the NGA director at the time of Katrina. In an interview with Salon before his appointment in April as undersecretary of defense for intelligence, Clapper said that the NGA’s work during the hurricane was “the most graphic example in my 40 years of intelligence of coming to the direct aid of people in extreme circumstances.”

    The purpose and utility of such intelligence tools in a disaster area, or in a war zone, are clear. But given the Bush administration’s highly secretive, aggressive policies in the war on terror, what’s to stop the NGA and the NSA from collaborating on other types of real-time surveillance at home?

    This past Saturday, Congress approved legislation expanding the ability of the National Security Agency to eavesdrop, without warrants, on telephone calls, e-mail and faxes passing through telecommunications hubs in the United States when the government suspects terrorists may be involved. The legislation, which expands the 1978 Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Act, or FISA, was negotiated between the White House and lawmakers in response to a federal court ruling this summer determining that the NSA’s past eavesdropping had violated the law. Mike McConnell, the retired Navy admiral who was appointed last January as the nation’s second director of national intelligence, told Congress that the ruling drastically reduced the ability of the NSA to track terrorists, while Bush warned that, because of the ruling, the government was “missing a significant amount of foreign intelligence that we should be collecting to protect our country.”

    The fear of Democratic leaders that their party might be further accused of being soft on terrorism apparently prompted them to vote for the new FISA legislation — handing new unilateral surveillance powers to the executive branch while significantly diminishing judicial oversight. Civil liberties groups and lawmakers opposed to the legislation believe the changes will make it easier for the government to spy on U.S. citizens, because the more loosely defined FISA statute now allows warrantless surveillance of people communicating with others who are “reasonably believed to be outside the United States.” During the House debate last Saturday night, Rep. Zoe Lofgren, D-Calif., described the bill as an enormous loophole that will grant the attorney general the ability to “wiretap anybody, any place, any time without court review, without any checks and balances.”

    President Bush signed the measure into law on Sunday.

    The NGA, which has a staff of 14,000 and an estimated budget of about $2.5 billion (the actual amount is classified), buys most of its imagery from commercial satellite vendors, but it also relies on highly classified overhead photography captured by the National Reconnaissance Office’s fleet of military satellites. According to David H. Burpee, the NGA’s director of public affairs, the agency operates under strict oversight rules that ban it from collecting imagery over the United States without a formal request from a “lead” domestic agency coordinating efforts during a disaster. In the case of Katrina, the NGA’s assistance was requested by the Federal Emergency Management Administration. In a statement to Salon, Burpee said that the NGA collects intelligence “in accordance with Constitutional law, federal law, and executive policies such as Executive Order 12333.” (That order, signed in 1981 by President Reagan, includes a mandate for federal agencies to cooperate with the CIA and other intelligence agencies.) Any questions involving domestic operations would have to be directed to the lead agency requesting NGA support, Burpee added.

    It is unclear how the latest changes to FISA might affect other intelligence agencies besides the NSA. But the zeal with which McConnell and Bush pursued the new legislation unbridling the NSA — which could presumably tap the NGA for assistance with operations at home, just as it does in the war zones — raises stark questions about the administration’s intentions with domestic intelligence.

    A close look at the NSA programs suggests that the Bush administration is casting the widest net possible. To date, President Bush and administration officials have acknowledged only a narrow aspect of domestic spying — referred to as the Terrorist Surveillance Program — which they admitted, in the wake of media reports, included the warrantless wiretapping of phone calls. But in May 2006, USA Today reported on a program that involved the NSA’s gaining access to huge customer databases maintained by AT&T and other telecommunications providers. In another alleged program, discovered by AT&T technician Mark Klein and disclosed in a lawsuit against the telecom provider filed by the Electronic Frontier Foundation, the NSA attached what amounts to an electronic hose to AT&T Internet data lines in San Francisco and other cities and diverted global Internet traffic and phone calls to a special room, where calls and messages were analyzed with powerful computers to find clues to terrorist cells. A Salon report in June 2006 uncovered what appeared to be a nexus for such activity in a secret room at an AT&T facility in St. Louis.

    Then, last month, the New York Times disclosed that a dispute in 2003 between the White House and the Justice Department over NSA operations involved a potential fourth program using “computer searches through massive electronic databases” that contained the records of tens of thousands of domestic phone calls and e-mails. McConnell acknowledged multiple programs, albeit without specifics, in a July 31 letter to Arlen Specter, the ranking Republican on the Senate Judiciary Committee. “A number of these intelligence activities were authorized in one order” by Bush shortly after 9/11, McConnell wrote. With regard to the administration’s Terrorist Surveillance Program, he added: “This is the only aspect of the NSA activities that can be discussed publicly, because it is the only aspect of those various activities whose existence has been officially acknowledged.” Many FISA experts, such as James Dempsey of the Center for Democracy and Technology, have concluded that the NSA was running at least three domestic surveillance programs, including data mining. “I think the TSP was an after-the-fact name given to an activity, or a set of activities, or a whole subset of activities” by the NSA, Dempsey said.

    After 9/11, the paradigm for domestic law enforcement shifted radically, by making it the duty of the government to use its intelligence resources to help law enforcement agencies preempt attacks before they happened, beyond the traditional practice of gathering evidence to prove that a crime had already occurred. The idea that the U.S. homeland was now a battleground (or a “theater”) first took hold in 2002, when the Pentagon established the U.S. Northern Command in Colorado to provide command and control of military efforts within U.S. borders. Northcom was given two primary responsibilities: providing military security during national emergencies, including terrorist attacks and natural disasters; and protecting important U.S. military bases in the 50 states. As part of the Pentagon’s domestic security mission, former Secretary of Defense Donald Rumsfeld created the Counter-Intelligence Field Activity (CIFA) in 2002. But CIFA soon became a weapon against anyone suspected of harboring ill-will against the Bush administration and its policies. CIFA was caught spying on antiwar groups, Quakers and other organizations. Even though Clapper and his boss, Secretary of Defense Bob Gates, have expressed concerns about CIFA’s reach, the agency remains an integral part of the Pentagon’s counterterrorism efforts.

    The link between Pentagon-driven intelligence operations and the homeland was underscored during the Katrina crisis by the NGA’s deployment to New Orleans of a special vehicle called a Mobile Integrated Geospatial-Intelligence System, or MIGS, which is loaded with equipment that allows NGA analysts to download intelligence from U-2s and U.S. military satellites. The vehicles were first deployed by the NGA in Iraq and Afghanistan, and later to the Gulf Coast. “They’re pretty much the NGA in a Humvee — very military,” said Goolgasian, the NGA official. “But it kind of sticks out like a sore thumb if you’re driving into an urban area” in the United States. As a result, the NGA has painted its domestic vehicles blue and renamed them Domestic MIGS, or DMIGS.

    Military, intelligence agency and police work is also coming together in numerous “fusion centers” around the country in a joint program run by the Department of Justice and Department of Homeland Security that has received little public attention. At present, there are 43 current and planned fusion centers in the United States where information from intelligence agencies, the FBI, local police, private sector databases and anonymous tipsters is combined and analyzed by counterterrorism analysts. DHS hopes to create a wide network of such centers that would be tied into the agency’s day-to-day activities, according to the Electronic Privacy Information Center. The project, according to EPIC, “inculcates DHS with enormous domestic surveillance powers and evokes comparisons with the publicly condemned domestic surveillance program of COINTELPRO,” the 1960s program by the FBI aimed at destroying groups on the American political left.

    It doesn’t take much imagination to see how powerful technologies, when combined with secretive, growing interagency collaboration, could be misused in a domestic context. In recent years many U.S. cities have deployed sophisticated video cameras throughout their downtown areas that track activity 24 hours a day. And U.S. intelligence and law enforcement agencies now have at their disposal facial recognition software that can identify one person among thousands in a large crowd. Combine that with the awesome eavesdropping power of the NSA and the ability of the NGA to capture live imagery from satellites and UAVs, and the result could be an ability to track any individual, in real time, as he or she moves around.

    John Pike, the director of GlobalSecurity.org, said the NGA is unlikely to be called upon for surveillance of an individual inside the United States. “NGA imagery is not what you would use to track people,” he said. But as the intelligence infrastructure, including the kinds of local camera-surveillance systems that proved so useful in identifying the perpetrators of the London subway bombings, expands in the United States, it raises the specter of a nationwide surveillance web. “These networks are going to get denser and going to cover more area over time,” Pike said. “At some point in time somebody’s going to drop in an automated face-print recognizer, and then they’re off to the races. Anybody who is currently wanted by the authorities, well, there’s just going to be parts of the country where such a person could not enter.”

    The expanding role of U.S. intelligence agencies on the home front raises serious issues, according to Army Lt. Gen. Russel L. Honoré, the commanding general on the scene in the Gulf Coast during Hurricane Katrina. Last fall, during a national conference on geospatial intelligence, he said, “Most of our capability [in the military] is kept on the classified side because that’s the best way to fight the enemy.” But the situation in the Gulf Coast, as the lines blurred, was complicated by conflicting policy directives. There were some people in government saying, “You’re not going to use the intel stuff on us,” Honoré recalled, while others were saying just the opposite: “Why aren’t you using that intel stuff to tell us what’s going on down there?” And then, there were people sitting back, saying, “They can’t do that inside the United States,” he said, adding, “This is one of the things government has to work out.”

    In light of the mounting revelations about the Bush administration’s domestic spying, civil libertarians no doubt strongly agree.

    Bush’s war adviser says a return to the military draft is worth considering

    0

    AP

    Frequent tours for U.S. forces in Iraq and Afghanistan have stressed the all-volunteer force and made it worth considering a return to a military draft, President George W. Bush’s new war adviser said Friday.

    “I think it makes sense to certainly consider it,” Army Lt. Gen. Douglas Lute said in an interview with National Public Radio’s “All Things Considered.”

    “And I can tell you, this has always been an option on the table. But ultimately, this is a policy matter between meeting the demands for the nation’s security by one means or another,” Lute added in his first interview since he was confirmed by the Senate in June.

    President Nixon abolished the draft in 1973. Restoring it, Lute said, would be a “major policy shift” and Bush has made it clear that he does not think it is necessary.

    “The president’s position is that the all volunteer military meets the needs of the country and there is no discussion of a draft. General Lute made that point as well,” National Security Council spokesman Gordon Johndroe said.

    In the interview, Lute also said that “Today, the current means of the all-volunteer force is serving us exceptionally well.”

    Still, he said, the repeated deployments in Iraq and Afghanistan affect not only the troops but their families, who can influence whether a service member decides to stay in the military.

    “There’s both a personal dimension of this, where this kind of stress plays out across dinner tables and in living room conversations within these families,” he said. “And ultimately, the health of the all-volunteer force is going to rest on those sorts of personal family decisions.”

    The military conducted a draft during the Civil War and both world wars and between 1948 and 1973. The Selective Service System, re-established in 1980, maintains a registry of 18-year-old men.

    U.S. Congressman Charles Rangel has called for reinstating the draft as a way to end the Iraq war.

    Bush picked Lute in mid-May as a deputy national security adviser with responsibility for ensuring efforts in Iraq and Afghanistan are coordinated with policymakers in Washington. Lute, an active-duty general, was chosen after several retired generals turned down the job.

    Chávez condemns U.S. protection of terrorist Posada Carriles

    0

    Chávez condemns U.S. protection of terrorist Posada Carriles
    Granma International
    flamesong

    The United States’ harboring of terrorist Luis Posada Carriles is one more example of how U.S. rulers are threatening the world, said Venezuelan President Hugo Chávez.

    The leader recalled, “It has been more than two years since we applied for the extradition of one of the worst terrorists in the history of the continent.” The U.S. has yet to agree despite the accumulation of evidence supporting the demand.

    “He (Posada Carriles) is a terrorist”, said Chávez, “The whole world knows it, and the U.S. government knows it better than any one else, yet it refuses to extradite him and has only charged him with the violation of immigration laws. Now he is freely walking the streets of Miami.”

    Chávez raised the issue during a press conference as he ended his visit to Uruguay as part of a tour begun in Argentina, also to include Ecuador and Bolivia.

    “He has committed murder, planted bombs, trained terrorists and torturers, yet they accuse him only of violating immigration laws, even though Cuba has handed over exact details showing how, where and with whom he entered the United States.”

    Chávez added that this was why Sean Penn (the U.S. actor) told him in Caracas that the rulers of that country were “a threat to the world”.

    Six Essential DVDs For Just £19.95

    0

    New in stock, 6 essential DVDs that will inform and empower you.
    Order your pack for just £19.95. Amazing value and a massive saving.

    Stealing a Nation
    Award-winning reporter John Pilger exposes how the British Government expelled the population of a group of islands, including Diego Garcia, so the US could build a military base.

    Maxed Out
    Maxed Out shows how the modern financial industry really works, explains the true definition of “preferred customer” and tells us why the poor are getting poorer and the rich getting richer. By turns hilarious and profoundly disturbing, Maxed Out paints a picture of a national nightmare which is all too real for most of us.

    Life and Debt
    By combining traditional documentary telling with a stylized narrative framework, the complexity of international lending, structural adjustment policies and free trade will be understood in the context of the day-to-day realities of the people whose lives they impact.

    Suspect Nation
    Since Tony Blair’s New Labour government came to power in 1997, the UK civil liberties landscape has changed dramatically. Our right to privacy, free from interception of communications has been severely curtailed. The ability to travel without surveillance (or those details of our journeys being retained) has disappeared.

    Iraq For Sale
    This film shows how our tax dollars were wasted! We are paying contractors at prices far higher than what it costs us for the same thing. For example, buying new trucks every time one of them gets a minor maintenance problem. Another example of abuse is the fact that we are paying $99 per bag of laundry to get it washed by a contractor. Still another example of abuse, is that one of the contractors is supplying water to our troops that contains diseases in it for people to shower in.

    China Blue
    Like no other film before, China Blue is a powerful and poignant journey into the harsh world of sweatshop workers. Shot clandestinely, this is a deep-access account of what both China and the international retailers don’t want us to see: how the clothes we buy are actually made.

    Order your pack here

    Gitmo closure not easy says Bush

    0

    Reluctance by other countries to take custody of terrorism suspects held at Guantanamo Bay is delaying Washington’s ability to shut the widely criticised prison camp, US President George W Bush said last night.”I did say it should be a goal of the nation to shut down Guantanamo. I also made it clear that part of the delay was the reluctance of some nations to take back some of the people being held there,” Bush said.

    “This is a fairly steep order. A lot of people don’t want killers in their midst, and a lot of these people are killers. The sooner that tribunals could start for inmates of the camp the better it is. It’s not as easy a subject as some may think on the surface,” he said.

    The US officials did not specify which countries were reluctant to accept prisoners but in the past the US has transferred detainees to countries including Britain,Australia, Saudi Arabia, Kuwait, Iran, Pakistan and others.

    Washington has faced fierce criticism for the detention without charge of suspected Al Qaeda and Taliban members at the Guantanamo prison.

    While members of the Bush administration have repeatedly said they would like to close the facility, they also say it is needed in the US-declared war on terrorism.

    The US holds 355 detainees at Guantanamo, which was set up to handle prisoners captured after the September 11 attacks in 2001. Of those, the Pentagon says 80 are eligible for release or transfer to another country.

    Britain asked the US on Tuesday to release five detainees from Guantanamo who were legal residents of Britain before their detention, although not British nationals.

    Pentagon spokesman said the US government was still reviewing the request and no decision had been made.

    Copyright © 2007 Gulf Daily News

    Bush turns up heat on Pakistani president

    0

    By Norma Greenaway

    Americans expect “swift action” to take out al-Qaida operatives in Pakistan if solid intelligence emerges about their whereabouts, U.S. President George W. Bush said Thursday, but he stopped short of saying the U.S. would do the job if the Pakistan government did not.

    Bush told a White House news conference that Pakistani President Pervez Musharraf has to prove to Americans he is serious about cracking down on Islamic extremists within his borders. A recent U.S. intelligence report said the al-Qaida terrorist organization and the Taliban are using tribal lands along the Afghan border to regroup for battle against forces from Canada, Britain, the U.S. and other NATO countries fighting in Afghanistan.

    “I recognize Pakistan is a sovereign nation,” Bush told reporters, “and that’s important for Americans to recognize that. But it’s also important for Americans to understand that he (Musharraf) shares the same concern about radicals and extremists as I do and as the American people do.”

    The U.S. president also said he pressed his Pakistani ally to hold a “free and fair election.” The advice came amid reports, subsequently denied in Islamabad, that Musharraf, who assumed power in a bloodless coup in 1999, was contemplating imposing emergency rule because of deteriorating security conditions in the country.

    Questions about the stability of Pakistan and Musharraf’s reliability as an ally surfaced when Senator Barack Obama, a leading contender for the Democratic presidential nomination in 2008, said he would unilaterally order U.S. troops into Pakistan if Musharraf refused to take out terrorists.

    A vacation-bound Bush also used the news conference to vigourously reassert his case for staying in Iraq, despite mounting criticism of his strategy from inside and outside his own Republican party.

    He met reporters just hours before flying to Maine to spend a few days with his parents at their seaside compound in Kennebunkport. There, he and his wife, Laura, plan a private lunch Saturday with new French President Nicolas Sarkozy and his wife, Cecilia, on Saturday. Bush then flies to his ranch in Crawford, Texas, to relax and to prepare for a meeting later this month with Prime Minister Stephen Harper and Mexican President Felipe Calderon in the Quebec resort village of Montebello.

    On Iraq, Bush pleaded for patience, and appeared to be bracing Americans for a mix of good and bad news when Gen. David Petraeus, the top military commander in Iraq, goes before Congress next month to give a thorough report on the impact of a controversial surge in American troop levels in Iraq announced seven months ago.

    The president said the challenges in Iraq are huge after decades of tyranny, but the “young democracy” is taking steps towards forming a functioning government.

    Bush insisted anew the cost to the United States of leaving Iraq too soon would be unacceptable.

    “The first question one has to ask on Iraq is, ‘Is it worth it?,’” Bush said. “I could not send a mother’s child into combat if I did not believe it was necessary for our short-term and long-term security to succeed in Iraq.”

    Bush said the second question revolves around whether the U.S. can succeed in Iraq.

    “In my mind, the answer to that is: Absolutely. Not only we must succeed; we can succeed.”

    Ottawa Citizen

    Bush warns Iraq over ties with Iran

    0

    US President George W. Bush sternly warned Iraqi Prime Minister Nuri al-Maliki Thursday against cozying up to Iran, amid what Washington sees as unsettling signs of warming Baghdad-Tehran relations.

    Bush, holding a pre-vacation press conference, said he was not surprised at pictures showing cordial meetings between Maliki and top Iranian leaders in Tehran but that he hoped the prime minister was delivering a tough message.

    “You don’t want the picture to be kind of, you know, duking it out,” when on a diplomatic mission he said, putting up his fists like a boxer.

    But “if the signal is that Iran is constructive, I will have to have a heart to heart with my friend, the prime minister, because I don’t believe they are constructive,” said Bush, who called Iran “a very troubling nation.”

    The US president’s comments came days after he disagreed sharply with Afghan President Hamid Karzai about Iran’s influence after Karzai called Tehran a positive force in combating extremist forces in his country.

    And they came as top US officials worried about the pace of political reconciliation in Iraq, amid misgivings in Washington about whether Maliki, a Shiite, truly wanted or was able to build bridges to minority Sunnis.

    Iran, which the United States blames for fomenting much of the bloodshed in Iraq, earlier gave visiting Maliki its full support for restoring security but told him a pullout of US forces was the only way to end the violence.

    According to the state-run IRNA news agency, Maliki thanked Iran for its “positive and constructive” work in “providing security and fighting terrorism in Iraq.”

    Bush expressed skepticism and warned Iran “there will be a price to pay” if its agents are caught undermining US-led efforts in Iraq.

    “There will be consequences” for any Iranians shipping weapons, including sophisticated roadside bombs, inside Iraq, said the US president, who branded Tehran “a destabilizing influence” in the Middle East.

    Bush cited Iran’s support for Lebanon’s Shiite militant group Hezbollah; Tehran’s suspect nuclear program; and Iranian President Mahmoud Ahmadinejad’s anti-Israel warnings, which he said Washington “cannot live with.”

    “My message to the Iranian people is, ‘You can do better than this current government. You don’t have to be isolated. You don’t have to be in a position where you can’t realize your full economic potential,'” Bush said.

    Asked whether he was confident that, in past talks, Maliki shared his view about Iran, the US president replied: “Does he understand with some extremist groups there’s connections with Iran? And he does. And I’m confident.”

    Maliki’s talks appeared to confirm the increasingly warm relations that have emerged between majority Shiite Iraq and overwhelmingly Shiite Iran following the fall of Saddam Hussein’s Sunni-dominated regime.

    In a highly symbolic move, Maliki met the families of seven Iranian officials arrested in Iraq by US forces on accusations of being members of an elite Revolutionary Guards force on a mission to stir trouble.

    Iran insists the men were diplomats and is livid that the United States has shown no sign of releasing them.

    Bush, who was bound for his family’s oceanside compound in the northeastern state of Maine, also acknowledged difficulties in forging political reconciliation in Iraq — one of the key goals of the US-led crackdown.

    “There is a lot of work left to be done, don’t get me wrong,” he said, noting the failure of Iraqi lawmakers to pass key legislation aimed at soothing disputes that fuel sectarian violence.

    But “if one were to look hard, they could find indications that — more than indications, facts that show the government is learning how to function,” said the president.

    ©2007 AFP

    AT&T apologizes after cutting anti-Bush lines from Pearl Jam song

    0

    CBC Arts

    Webcaster AT&T has apologized to Pearl Jam for editing lyrics critical of President George W. Bush out of a webcast of its Lollapalooza concert Sunday.

    AT&T was simulcasting the Chicago-based concert through its Blue Room entertainment website.

    A delay had been built in to keep out excessive profanity or nudity.

    But when Pearl Jam sang “George Bush, leave this world alone” and “George Bush, find yourself another home” to the tune of Pink Floyd’s Another Brick in the Wall, the lyrics were edited out.

    Pearl Jam complained about the cuts on its website, saying live broadcasts or webcasts should be “free from arbitrary edits.”

    “If a company that is controlling a webcast is cutting out bits of our performance – not based on laws, but on their own preferences and interpretations – fans have little choice but to watch the censored version,” the alternative rock group said.

    AT&T spokesman Michael Coe said the monitors who cut the broadcast went too far and it was a mistake.

    The telecom firm, which showed highlights from the three-day Lollapallooza festival on its Blue Room site, said it would draw up guidelines to prevent future misunderstandings.

    AT&T said it was working to secure the rights to post the entire song, uncensored.

    Ritalin: The ADHD drug may affect the developing brain

    2

    Ritalin — given to around 5 million young Americans diagnosed with ADHD (attention-deficit, hyperactive disorder) — may affect the developing brain.

    Ritalin (methylphenidate) is a stimulant similar to amphetamine and cocaine, and it seems to have a paradoxical effect on ADHD children, and calms them.

    But it may do so at a price, new research suggests. The new study, which monitored the effect of the drug on the brains of rats, found that it altered areas of the brain related to executive functioning, addiction and appetite, social relationships and stress.

    The rats recovered the longer they were off the drug, researchers noticed.

    Although there’s often no direct correlation between the effects on animals and humans, the rats did respond in a similar way when they were first given Ritalin. They lost weight, which often happens in children who first take the drug.

    The fact that the rats soon regained their healthy mental capacities suggests the drug should be taken over a short period of time rather than for years as currently happens, the researchers say.

    (Source: Journal of Neuroscience, 2007; 27: 7196-7207).

    UK orders new gag on armed forces

    0

    Agencies

    New rules barring military personnel from talking about their service publicly have been quietly introduced by the UK Ministry of Defense.

    Soldiers, sailors and airforce personnel will not be able to blog, take part in surveys, speak in public, post on bulletin boards, play in multi-player computer games or send text messages or photographs without the permission of a superior if the information they use concerns matters of defense.

    They also cannot release video, still images or audio – material which has previously led to investigations into the abuse of Iraqis. Instead, the guidelines state that “all such communication must help to maintain and, where possible, enhance the reputation of defense”.

    According to the regulations, issued by the Directorate of Communication Planning, receiving money for interviews, conferences and books which draw on official defense experience has now been banned.

    The MoD document covers “all public speaking, writing or other communications, including via the internet and other sharing technologies, on issues arising from an individual’s official business or experience, whether on-duty, off-duty or in spare time”.

    The rules have provoked consternation among the ranks, with human rights lawyers saying that they could be in contravention of Article 10 of the Human Rights Act, which allows for freedom of expression. The rules apply not only to full-time forces but to members of the Territorial Army and cadets whilst on duty, as well as MoD civil servants.

    Service personnel are currently bound by Queen’s Regulations, which mean they must seek permission before speaking to the press but are free to blog and take part in online debates. However, many have spoken out anonymously on issues such as poor kit, housing and the treatment of wounded service personnel evacuated from combat zones.

    Criticism of the RAF in Afghanistan and the state of the ageing vehicles being used there have all appeared in the press.

    The MoD’s director general of media communications, Simon McDowell, denied that the guidelines were a form of censorship or gagging.

    “We are trying to give straightforward, clear guidance that is up to date. The existing regulations were confusing and didn’t include things like accepting payment. It applies to communicating about defense matters, not personal things.

    “Particular things can impact on operational security; information which somebody can get a hold of. Even a little photograph sent from Afghanistan on a mobile phone could endanger people’s lives and break operational security.”

    MBA/HAR

    Bush says he’ll veto child health funding

    0

    J-W Wire Reports

    President Bush vowed Wednesday to veto bipartisan legislation that would sharply increase funding for a popular health insurance program for poor children.

    In a wide-ranging interview with economic reporters, Bush also shrugged off Wall Street volatility, discounted fears that credit is drying up in the U.S. economy, said the housing-sector’s problems still point to a “soft-landing” and opposed any bailout for homeowners or lenders.

    Bush met with economic writers shortly after reading a statement in the Treasury Department’s ornate Cash Room, flanked by Vice President Dick Cheney and the administration’s entire economic team.

    Bush was seeking to calm both consumers and investors rattled by several weeks of Wall Street volatility.

    “The underpinnings of the economy are strong, 3.4 percent growth in the second quarter, strong unemployment numbers, low inflation, real wages are on the rise, there is a strong global economy that means it more likely that somebody will buy our goods, our services,” Bush said. “The basic fundamentals are good.”

    Asked if he’d veto legislation that increases funding for the State Children’s Health Insurance Reauthorization Act, called S-Chip, Bush answered while the question was still being asked.

    “If S-Chip is used to expand the nationalization of health care, I will veto it,” he said. He said that he’d proposed increasing S-Chip funding in his budget, but by much less than Congress wants.

    Bush proposed a $5 billion increase over five years. Last week the House voted 225-204 for a $50 billion increase over five years, and the Senate voted 68-31 for a $35 billion increase over five years. The Senate margin would override a veto, but the House’s wouldn’t. The two versions must be reconciled before Congress sends the measure to Bush for his signature or veto.

    Bush also said Wednesday that he is considering a fresh plan to cut tax rates for U.S. corporations to make them more competitive around the world, an initiative that could further inflame a battle with Congress over spending and taxes and help define the remainder of his tenure.

    Advisers presented Bush with a series of ideas to restructure corporate taxes, possibly eliminating narrowly targeted breaks to pay for a broader, across-the-board rate cut. Bush said he was “inclined” to send a corporate tax package to Congress, although he expressed uncertainty about its political viability.

    Firms bid for ID cards contracts

    0

    The bidding process for contracts worth up to £500m each to run the UK’s identity card scheme has been launched.

    British citizens will have ID cards from 2009, the government plansFive firms will be chosen to supply computer equipment and manage the application and issuing of cards.

    The government said it was an “important milestone” in delivering the £5.3bn scheme, which will see ID cards issued to UK residents in 2009.

    The smallest contract will be for £50m, while two are expected to be worth up to £500m.

    ‘Institution’

    These are thought to be some of the most expensive ever awarded by the government and will run for up to 10 years.

    A host of firms, including IBM, Accenture, BT and Fujitsu services, are expected to bid for the contracts.

    In June, Home Office minister Liam Byrne said the ID card scheme would become a “great British institution” on a par with the railways in the 19th century.

    The government says the change is needed to fight terrorism, illegal immigration, people-smuggling and identity fraud.

    But opponents, including the Conservatives and Liberal Democrats, have questioned the cost and effectiveness of ID cards, and argue that they will damage civil liberties.

    BBC

    NSA to spy on 38% of world telecom traffic

    0

    The US National Security Agency now has the legal right to monitor some 38% of the world’s telephone, data and internet traffic without requiring a judicial warrant.By Ian Grant

    George W Bush signed the relevant legislation last Sunday.

    According to Telegeography, a research firm that monitors telecommunications traffic flows, some 38% of the world’s total telecommunications traffic starts or finishes in the US. This is down slightly from 43% in 2003.

    “In 2005 (the latest year for which we currently have voice traffic data), approximately 29% of non-US voice traffic transited through a US hub. This is up noticeably from the 20% share in 2002,” said Tim Stronge, a Telegeography spokesman.

    “This only includes traditional, circuit-switched international voice traffic. If one includes voice traffic carried as Voice-over-IP (VoIP), the number would likely be around 33%,” he added.

    Stronge said his firm does not collect data on satellite traffic, but said no more than 1% or 2% of telecoms traffic went over satellite links.

    “Fibre-optic network infrastructure is, bit-for-bit, far cheaper than satellites, and is the dominant medium for international telecommunications,” he said.

    “Taking into account that not all satellite constellations are US-owned, my guess is that less than 1% of the world’s international traffic transits over US-owned satellites.”

    CCTV runs risk of data protection breach

    0

    Code of practice consultation sparks debate whether use of surveillance cameras could create breaches of privacy and data laws.

    By Miya Knights

    CameraWatch has warned UK businesses risk breaching Data Protection Act (DPA) regulations with increased reliance on CCTV technology.

    The UK-wide group welcomed last week’s launch of the Information Commissioner’s Office (ICO) consultation on its redrafting of the CCTV code of practice.

    Paul Mackie, CameraWatch’s CCTV compliance adviser and consultant for data protection specialist Datpro, told IT PRO that many businesses fail to realise the compliance requirements of installing CCTV systems.

    “If you are captured by a CCTV camera, that is your personal information and subject to DPA regulation,” he said. But CameraWatch’s own research has found 90 per cent of CCTV installations are non-compliant.

    “The main function of CCTV is often security, but many businesses are unaware of the compliance implications of using modern systems for things like footfall and staff monitoring,” added Mackie.

    When CCTV imagery was incorporated into the Act in 2001, the introduction of the original ICO code of practice mandated each new installation be registered for its specific purpose.

    But Mackie said often new digital surveillance technology, like systems that can mine data to find specific footage of suspect transactions for example, go beyond the use they were originally registered for.

    He said companies risk having CCTV evidence deemed inadmissible under the law if the imagery used doesn’t comply with the use the system was originally registered for. “Many systems would be found in breach of the DPA for use to access excessive data,” said Mackie.

    “A good example is signage,” he added. “Just as when you sign a form that says your data will be held securely and not transmitted to third parties under the DPA, signage essentially informs people of CCTV use. But many companies don’t have adequate signage, where staff and the public don’t know what the imagery is used for.”

    In particular, he welcomed the ICO calls for greater powers and the introduction of impact assessments to evaluate the need for surveillance technology before budgets have been allocated on expensive new equipment.

    “Often the legal team isn’t even involved,” he added, saying CameraWatch will be studying the draft Code in more detail, raising the issues with industry and users’ representative members of the CameraWatch Forum on 18 September in Edinburgh. “We will then respond to the ICO in full on the draft CCTV code of practice before the consultation period closes on 31 October 2007.”

    CameraWatch, launched on 30 May, is an independent, not-for-profit, self-funding advisory body formed to increase awareness of CCTV and compliance data protection issues.

    Why Are So Many Americans in Prison?

    0

    Race and the transformation of criminal justice

    By Glenn C. Loury

    The early 1990s were the age of drive-by shootings, drug deals gone bad, crack cocaine, and gangsta rap. Between 1960 and 1990, the annual number of murders in New Haven rose from six to 31, the number of rapes from four to 168, the number of robberies from 16 to 1,784–all this while the city’s population declined by 14 percent. Crime was concentrated in central cities: in 1990, two fifths of Pennsylvania’s violent crimes were committed in Philadelphia, home to one seventh of the state’s population. The subject of crime dominated American domestic-policy debates.

    Most observers at the time expected things to get worse. Consulting demographic tables and extrapolating trends, scholars and pundits warned the public to prepare for an onslaught, and for a new kind of criminal–the anomic, vicious, irreligious, amoral juvenile “super-predator.” In 1996, one academic commentator predicted a “bloodbath” of juvenile homicides in 2005.

    And so we prepared. Stoked by fear and political opportunism, but also by the need to address a very real social problem, we threw lots of people in jail, and when the old prisons were filled we built new ones.

    But the onslaught never came. Crime rates peaked in 1992 and have dropped sharply since. Even as crime rates fell, however, imprisonment rates remained high and continued their upward march. The result, the current American prison system, is a leviathan unmatched in human history.

    According to a 2005 report of the International Centre for Prison Studies in London, the United States–with five percent of the world’s population–houses 25 percent of the world’s inmates. Our incarceration rate (714 per 100,000 residents) is almost 40 percent greater than those of our nearest competitors (the Bahamas, Belarus, and Russia). Other industrial democracies, even those with significant crime problems of their own, are much less punitive: our incarceration rate is 6.2 times that of Canada, 7.8 times that of France, and 12.3 times that of Japan. We have a corrections sector that employs more Americans than the combined work forces of General Motors, Ford, and Wal-Mart, the three largest corporate employers in the country, and we are spending some $200 billion annually on law enforcement and corrections at all levels of government, a fourfold increase (in constant dollars) over the past quarter century.

    Never before has a supposedly free country denied basic liberty to so many of its citizens. In December 2006, some 2.25 million persons were being held in the nearly 5,000 prisons and jails that are scattered across America’s urban and rural landscapes. One third of inmates in state prisons are violent criminals, convicted of homicide, rape, or robbery. But the other two thirds consist mainly of property and drug offenders. Inmates are disproportionately drawn from the most disadvantaged parts of society. On average, state inmates have fewer than 11 years of schooling. They are also vastly disproportionately black and brown.

    How did it come to this? One argument is that the massive increase in incarceration reflects the success of a rational public policy: faced with a compelling social problem, we responded by imprisoning people and succeeded in lowering crime rates. This argument is not entirely misguided. Increased incarceration does appear to have reduced crime somewhat. But by how much? Estimates of the share of the 1990s reduction in violent crime that can be attributed to the prison boom range from five percent to 25 percent. Whatever the number, analysts of all political stripes now agree that we have long ago entered the zone of diminishing returns. The conservative scholar John DiIulio, who coined the term “super-predator” in the early 1990s, was by the end of that decade declaring in The Wall Street Journal that “Two Million Prisoners Are Enough.” But there was no political movement for getting America out of the mass-incarceration business. The throttle was stuck.

    A more convincing argument is that imprisonment rates have continued to rise while crime rates have fallen because we have become progressively more punitive: not because crime has continued to explode (it hasn’t), not because we made a smart policy choice, but because we have made a collective decision to increase the rate of punishment.

    One simple measure of punitiveness is the likelihood that a person who is arrested will be subsequently incarcerated. Between 1980 and 2001, there was no real change in the chances of being arrested in response to a complaint: the rate was just under 50 percent. But the likelihood that an arrest would result in imprisonment more than doubled, from 13 to 28 percent. And because the amount of time served and the rate of prison admission both increased, the incarceration rate for violent crime almost tripled, despite the decline in the level of violence. The incarceration rate for nonviolent and drug offenses increased at an even faster pace: between 1980 and 1997 the number of people incarcerated for nonviolent offenses tripled, and the number of people incarcerated for drug offenses increased by a factor of 11. Indeed, the criminal-justice researcher Alfred Blumstein has argued that none of the growth in incarceration between 1980 and 1996 can be attributed to more crime:

    The growth was entirely attributable to a growth in punitiveness, about equally to growth in prison commitments per arrest (an indication of tougher prosecution or judicial sentencing) and to longer time served (an indication of longer sentences, elimination of parole or later parole release, or greater readiness to recommit parolees to prison for either technical violations or new crimes).

    This growth in punitiveness was accompanied by a shift in thinking about the basic purpose of criminal justice. In the 1970s, the sociologist David Garland argues, the corrections system was commonly seen as a way to prepare offenders to rejoin society. Since then, the focus has shifted from rehabilitation to punishment and stayed there. Felons are no longer persons to be supported, but risks to be dealt with. And the way to deal with the risks is to keep them locked up. As of 2000, 33 states had abolished limited parole (up from 17 in 1980); 24 states had introduced three-strikes laws (up from zero); and 40 states had introduced truth-in-sentencing laws (up from three). The vast majority of these changes occurred in the 1990s, as crime rates fell.

    This new system of punitive ideas is aided by a new relationship between the media, the politicians, and the public. A handful of cases–in which a predator does an awful thing to an innocent–get excessive media attention and engender public outrage. This attention typically bears no relation to the frequency of the particular type of crime, and yet laws–such as three-strikes laws that give mandatory life sentences to nonviolent drug offenders–and political careers are made on the basis of the public’s reaction to the media coverage of such crimes.

    * * *

    Despite a sharp national decline in crime, American criminal justice has become crueler and less caring than it has been at any other time in our modern history. Why?

    The question has no simple answer, but the racial composition of prisons is a good place to start. The punitive turn in the nation’s social policy–intimately connected with public rhetoric about responsibility, dependency, social hygiene, and the reclamation of public order–can be fully grasped only when viewed against the backdrop of America’s often ugly and violent racial history: there is a reason why our inclination toward forgiveness and the extension of a second chance to those who have violated our behavioral strictures is so stunted, and why our mainstream political discourses are so bereft of self-examination and searching social criticism. This historical resonance between the stigma of race and the stigma of imprisonment serves to keep alive in our public culture the subordinating social meanings that have always been associated with blackness. Race helps to explain why the United States is exceptional among the democratic industrial societies in the severity and extent of its punitive policy and in the paucity of its social-welfare institutions.

    Slavery ended a long time ago, but the institution of chattel slavery and the ideology of racial subordination that accompanied it have cast a long shadow. I speak here of the history of lynching throughout the country; the racially biased policing and judging in the South under Jim Crow and in the cities of the Northeast, Midwest, and West to which blacks migrated after the First and Second World Wars; and the history of racial apartheid that ended only as a matter of law with the civil-rights movement. It should come as no surprise that in the post—civil rights era, race, far from being peripheral, has been central to the evolution of American social policy.

    The political scientist Vesla Mae Weaver, in a recently completed dissertation, examines policy history, public opinion, and media processes in an attempt to understand the role of race in this historic transformation of criminal justice. She argues–persuasively, I think–that the punitive turn represented a political response to the success of the civil-rights movement. Weaver describes a process of “frontlash” in which opponents of the civil-rights revolution sought to regain the upper hand by shifting to a new issue. Rather than reacting directly to civil-rights developments, and thus continuing to fight a battle they had lost, those opponents–consider George Wallace’s campaigns for the presidency, which drew so much support in states like Michigan and Wisconsin–shifted attention to a seemingly race-neutral concern over crime:

    Once the clutch of Jim Crow had loosened, opponents of civil rights shifted the “locus of attack” by injecting crime onto the agenda. Through the process of frontlash, rivals of civil rights progress defined racial discord as criminal and argued that crime legislation would be a panacea to racial unrest. This strategy both imbued crime with race and depoliticized racial struggle, a formula which foreclosed earlier “root causes” alternatives. Fusing anxiety about crime to anxiety over racial change and riots, civil rights and racial disorder–initially defined as a problem of minority disenfranchisement–were defined as a crime problem, which helped shift debate from social reform to punishment.

    Of course, this argument (for which Weaver adduces considerable circumstantial evidence) is speculative. But something interesting seems to have been going on in the late 1960s regarding the relationship between attitudes on race and social policy.

    Before 1965, public attitudes on the welfare state and on race, as measured by the annually administered General Social Survey, varied year to year independently of one another: you could not predict much about a person’s attitudes on welfare politics by knowing their attitudes about race. After 1965, the attitudes moved in tandem, as welfare came to be seen as a race issue. Indeed, the year-to-year correlation between an index measuring liberalism of racial attitudes and attitudes toward the welfare state over the interval 1950—1965 was .03. These same two series had a correlation of .68 over the period 1966—1996. The association in the American mind of race with welfare, and of race with crime, has been achieved at a common historical moment. Crime-control institutions are part of a larger social-policy complex–they relate to and interact with the labor market, family-welfare efforts, and health and social-work activities. Indeed, Garland argues that the ideological approaches to welfare and crime control have marched rightward to a common beat: “The institutional and cultural changes that have occurred in the crime control field are analogous to those that have occurred in the welfare state more generally.” Just as the welfare state came to be seen as a race issue, so, too, crime came to be seen as a race issue, and policies have been shaped by this perception.

    Consider the tortured racial history of the War on Drugs. Blacks were twice as likely as whites to be arrested for a drug offense in 1975 but four times as likely by 1989. Throughout the 1990s, drug-arrest rates remained at historically unprecedented levels. Yet according to the National Survey on Drug Abuse, drug use among adults fell from 20 percent in 1979 to 11 percent in 2000. A similar trend occurred among adolescents. In the age groups 12—17 and 18—25, use of marijuana, cocaine, and heroin all peaked in the late 1970s and began a steady decline thereafter. Thus, a decline in drug use across the board had begun a decade before the draconian anti-drug efforts of the 1990s were initiated.

    Of course, most drug arrests are for trafficking, not possession, so usage rates and arrest rates needn’t be expected to be identical. Still, we do well to bear in mind that the social problem of illicit drug use is endemic to our whole society. Significantly, throughout the period 1979—2000, white high-school seniors reported using drugs at a significantly higher rate than black high-school seniors. High drug-usage rates in white, middle-class American communities in the early 1980s accounts for the urgency many citizens felt to mount a national attack on the problem. But how successful has the effort been, and at what cost?

    Think of the cost this way: to save middle-class kids from the threat of a drug epidemic that might not have even existed by the time that drug incarceration began its rapid increase in the 1980s, we criminalized underclass kids. Arrests went up, but drug prices have fallen sharply over the past 20 years–suggesting that the ratcheting up of enforcement has not made drugs harder to get on the street. The strategy clearly wasn’t keeping drugs away from those who sought them. Not only are prices down, but the data show that drug-related visits to emergency rooms also rose steadily throughout the 1980s and 1990s.

    An interesting case in point is New York City. Analyzing arrests by residential neighborhood and police precinct, the criminologist Jeffrey Fagan and his colleagues Valerie West and Jan Holland found that incarceration was highest in the city’s poorest neighborhoods, though these were often not the neighborhoods in which crime rates were the highest. Moreover, they discovered a perverse effect of incarceration on crime: higher incarceration in a given neighborhood in one year seemed to predict higher crime rates in that same neighborhood one year later. This growth and persistence of incarceration over time, the authors concluded, was due primarily to the drug enforcement practices of police and to sentencing laws that require imprisonment for repeat felons. Police scrutiny was more intensive and less forgiving in high-incarceration neighborhoods, and parolees returning to such neighborhoods were more closely monitored. Thus, discretionary and spatially discriminatory police behavior led to a high and increasing rate of repeat prison admissions in the designated neighborhoods, even as crime rates fell.

    Fagan, West, and Holland explain the effects of spatially concentrated urban anti-drug-law enforcement in the contemporary American metropolis. Buyers may come from any neighborhood and any social stratum. But the sellers–at least the ones who can be readily found hawking their wares on street corners and in public vestibules–come predominantly from the poorest, most non-white parts of the city. The police, with arrest quotas to meet, know precisely where to find them. The researchers conclude:

    Incarceration begets more incarceration, and incarceration also begets more crime, which in turn invites more aggressive enforcement, which then re-supplies incarceration . . . three mechanisms . . . contribute to and reinforce incarceration in neighborhoods: the declining economic fortunes of former inmates and the effects on neighborhoods where they tend to reside, resource and relationship strains on families of prisoners that weaken the family’s ability to supervise children, and voter disenfranchisement that weakens the political economy of neighborhoods.

    The effects of imprisonment on life chances are profound. For incarcerated black men, hourly wages are ten percent lower after prison than before. For all incarcerated men, the number of weeks worked per year falls by at least a third after their release.

    So consider the nearly 60 percent of black male high-school dropouts born in the late 1960s who are imprisoned before their 40th year. While locked up, these felons are stigmatized–they are regarded as fit subjects for shaming. Their links to family are disrupted; their opportunities for work are diminished; their voting rights may be permanently revoked. They suffer civic excommunication. Our zeal for social discipline consigns these men to a permanent nether caste. And yet, since these men–whatever their shortcomings–have emotional and sexual and family needs, including the need to be fathers and lovers and husbands, we are creating a situation where the children of this nether caste are likely to join a new generation of untouchables. This cycle will continue so long as incarceration is viewed as the primary path to social hygiene.

    * * *

    I have been exploring the issue of causes: of why we took the punitive turn that has resulted in mass incarceration. But even if the racial argument about causes is inconclusive, the racial consequences are clear. To be sure, in the United States, as in any society, public order is maintained by the threat and use of force. We enjoy our good lives only because we are shielded by the forces of law and order, which keep the unruly at bay. Yet in this society, to a degree virtually unmatched in any other, those bearing the brunt of order enforcement belong in vastly disproportionate numbers to historically marginalized racial groups. Crime and punishment in America has a color.

    In his fine study Punishment and Inequality in America (2006), the Princeton University sociologist Bruce Western powerfully describes the scope, nature, and consequences of contemporary imprisonment. He finds that the extent of racial disparity in imprisonment rates is greater than in any other major arena of American social life: at eight to one, the black—white ratio of incarceration rates dwarfs the two-to-one ratio of unemployment rates, the three-to-one ration of non-marital childbearing, the two-to-one ratio of infant-mortality rates and one-to-five ratio of net worth. While three out of 200 young whites were incarcerated in 2000, the rate for young blacks was one in nine. A black male resident of the state of California is more likely to go to a state prison than a state college.

    The scandalous truth is that the police and penal apparatus are now the primary contact between adult black American men and the American state. Among black male high-school dropouts aged 20 to 40, a third were locked up on any given day in 2000, fewer than three percent belonged to a union, and less than one quarter were enrolled in any kind of social program. Coercion is the most salient meaning of government for these young men.¬â€ Western estimates that nearly 60 percent of black male dropouts born between 1965 and 1969 were sent to prison on a felony conviction at least once before they reached the age of 35.

    One cannot reckon the world-historic American prison build-up over the past 35 years without calculating the enormous costs imposed upon the persons imprisoned, their families, and their communities. (Of course, this has not stopped many social scientists from pronouncing on the net benefits of incarceration without doing so.) Deciding on the weight to give to a “thug’s” well-being–or to that of his wife or daughter or son–is a question of social morality, not social science. Nor can social science tell us how much additional cost borne by the offending class is justified in order to obtain a given increment of security or property or peace of mind for the rest of us. These are questions about the nature of the American state and its relationship to its people that transcend the categories of benefits and costs.

    Yet the discourse surrounding punishment policy invariably discounts the humanity of the thieves, drug sellers, prostitutes, rapists, and, yes, those whom we put to death. It gives insufficient weight to the welfare, to the humanity, of those who are knitted together with offenders in webs of social and psychic affiliation. What is more, institutional arrangements for dealing with criminal offenders in the United States have evolved to serve expressive as well as instrumental ends. We have wanted to “send a message,” and we have done so with a vengeance. In the process, we have created facts. We have answered the question, who is to blame for the domestic maladies that beset us? We have constructed a national narrative. We have created scapegoats, indulged our need to feel virtuous, and assuaged our fears. We have met the enemy, and the enemy is them.

    Incarceration keeps them away from us. Thus Garland: “The prison is used today as a kind of reservation, a quarantine zone in which purportedly dangerous individuals are segregated in the name of public safety.” The boundary between prison and community, Garland continues, is “heavily patrolled and carefully monitored to prevent risks leaking out from one to the other. Those offenders who are released ‘into the community’ are subject to much tighter control than previously, and frequently find themselves returned to custody for failure to comply with the conditions that continue to restrict their freedom. For many of these parolees and ex-convicts, the ‘community’ into which they are released is actually a closely monitored terrain, a supervised space, lacking much of the liberty that one associates with ‘normal life’.”

    Deciding how citizens of varied social rank within a common polity ought to relate to one another is a more fundamental consideration than deciding which crime-control policy is most efficient. The question of relationship, of solidarity, of who belongs to the body politic and who deserves exclusion–these are philosophical concerns of the highest order. A decent society will on occasion resist the efficient course of action, for the simple reason that to follow it would be to act as though we were not the people we have determined ourselves to be: a people conceived in liberty and dedicated to the proposition that we all are created equal. Assessing the propriety of creating a racially defined pariah class in the middle of our great cities at the start of the 21st century presents us with just such a case.

    My recitation of the brutal facts about punishment in today’s America may sound to some like a primal scream at this monstrous social machine that is grinding poor black communities to dust. And I confess that these brutal facts do at times incline me to cry out in despair. But my argument is analytical, not existential. Its principal thesis is this: we law-abiding, middle-class Americans have made decisions about social policy and incarceration, and we benefit from those decisions, and that means from a system of suffering, rooted in state violence, meted out at our request. We had choices and we decided to be more punitive. Our society–the society we have made–creates criminogenic conditions in our sprawling urban ghettos, and then acts out rituals of punishment against them as some awful form of human sacrifice.

    This situation raises a moral problem that we cannot avoid. We cannot pretend that there are more important problems in our society, or that this circumstance is the necessary solution to other, more pressing problems–unless we are also prepared to say that we have turned our backs on the ideal of equality for all citizens and abandoned the principles of justice. We ought to ask ourselves two questions: Just what manner of people are we Americans? And in light of this, what are our obligations to our fellow citizens–even those who break our laws?

    * * *

    To address these questions, we need to think about the evaluation of our prison system as a problem in the theory of distributive justice–not the purely procedural idea of ensuring equal treatment before the law and thereafter letting the chips fall where they may, but the rather more demanding ideal of substantive racial justice. The goal is to bring about through conventional social policy and far-reaching institutional reforms a situation in which the history of racial oppression is no longer so evident in the disparate life experiences of those who descend from slaves.

    And I suggest we approach that problem from the perspective of John Rawls’s theory of justice: first, that we think about justice from an “original position” behind a “veil of ignorance” that obstructs from view our own situation, including our class, race, gender, and talents. We need to ask what rules we would pick if we seriously imagined that we could turn out to be anyone in the society. Second, following Rawls’s “difference principle,” we should permit inequalities only if they work to improve the circumstances of the least advantaged members of society. But here, the object of moral inquiry is not the distribution among individuals of wealth and income, but instead the distribution of a negative good, punishment, among individuals and, importantly, racial groups.

    So put yourself in John Rawls’s original position and imagine that you could occupy any rank in the social hierarchy. Let me be more concrete: imagine that you could be born a black American male outcast shuffling between prison and the labor market on his way to an early death to the chorus of nigger or criminal or dummy. Suppose we had to stop thinking of us and them. What social rules would we pick if we actually thought that they could be us? I expect that we would still pick some set of punishment institutions to contain bad behavior and protect society. But wouldn’t we pick arrangements that respected the humanity of each individual and of those they are connected to through bonds of social and psychic affiliation? If any one of us had a real chance of being one of those faces looking up from the bottom of the well–of being the least among us¬–then how would we talk publicly about those who break our laws? What would we do with juveniles who go awry, who roam the streets with guns and sometimes commit acts of violence? What weight would we give to various elements in the deterrence-retribution-incapacitation-rehabilitation calculus, if we thought that calculus could end up being applied to our own children, or to us? How would we apportion blame and affix responsibility for the cultural and social pathologies evident in some quarters of our society if we envisioned that we ourselves might well have been born into the social margins where such pathology flourishes?

    If we take these questions as seriously as we should, then we would, I expect, reject a pure ethic of personal responsibility as the basis for distributing punishment. Issues about responsibility are complex, and involve a kind of division of labor–what John Rawls called a “social division of responsibility” between “citizens as a collective body” and individuals: when we hold a person responsible for his or her conduct–by establishing laws, investing in their enforcement, and consigning some persons to prisons–we need also to think about whether we have done our share in ensuring that each person faces a decent set of opportunities for a good life. We need to ask whether we as a society have fulfilled our collective responsibility to ensure fair conditions for each person–for each life that might turn out to be our life.

    We would, in short, recognize a kind of social responsibility, even for the wrongful acts freely chosen by individual persons. I am not arguing that people commit crimes because they have no choices, and that in this sense the “root causes” of crime are social; individuals always have choices. My point is that responsibility is a matter of ethics, not social science. Society at large is implicated in an individual person’s choices because we have acquiesced in–perhaps actively supported, through our taxes and votes, words and deeds–social arrangements that work to our benefit and his detriment, and which shape his consciousness and sense of identity in such a way that the choices he makes, which we may condemn, are nevertheless compelling to him–an entirely understandable response to circumstance. Closed and bounded social structures–like racially homogeneous urban ghettos–create contexts where “pathological” and “dysfunctional” cultural forms emerge; but these forms are neither intrinsic to the people caught in these structures nor independent of the behavior of people who stand outside them.

    Thus, a central reality of our time is the fact that there has opened a wide racial gap in the acquisition of cognitive skills, the extent of law-abidingness, the stability of family relations, the attachment to the work force, and the like. This disparity in human development is, as a historical matter, rooted in political, economic, social, and cultural factors peculiar to this society and reflective of its unlovely racial history: it is a societal, not communal or personal, achievement. At the level of the individual case we must, of course, act as if this were not so. There could be no law, no civilization, without the imputation to particular persons of responsibility for their wrongful acts. But the sum of a million cases, each one rightly judged on its merits to be individually fair, may nevertheless constitute a great historic wrong. The state does not only deal with individual cases. It also makes policies in the aggregate, and the consequences of these policies are more or less knowable. And who can honestly say–who can look in the mirror and say with a straight face–that we now have laws and policies that we would endorse if we did not know our own situation and genuinely considered the possibility that we might be the least advantaged?

    Even if the current racial disparity in punishment in our country gave evidence of no overt racial discrimination–and, perhaps needless to say, I view that as a wildly optimistic supposition–it would still be true that powerful forces are at work to perpetuate the consequences of a universally acknowledged wrongful past. This is in the first instance a matter of interpretation–of the narrative overlay that we impose upon the facts.

    The tacit association in the American public’s imagination of “blackness” with “unworthiness” or “dangerousness” has obscured a fundamental ethical point about responsibility, both collective and individual, and promoted essentialist causal misattributions: when confronted by the facts of racially disparate achievement, racially disproportionate crime rates, and racially unequal school achievement, observers will have difficulty identifying with the plight of a group of people whom they (mistakenly) think are simply “reaping what they have sown.” Thus, the enormous racial disparity in the imposition of social exclusion, civic ex-communication, and lifelong disgrace has come to seem legitimate, even necessary: we fail to see how our failures as a collective body are implicated in this disparity. We shift all the responsibility onto their shoulders, only by irresponsibly–indeed, immorally–denying our own. And yet, this entire dynamic has its roots in past unjust acts that were perpetrated on the basis of race.

    Given our history, producing a racially defined nether caste through the ostensibly neutral application of law should be profoundly offensive to our ethical sensibilities–to the principles we proudly assert as our own. Mass incarceration has now become a principal vehicle for the reproduction of racial hierarchy in our society. Our country’s policymakers need to do something about it. And all of us are ultimately responsible for making sure that they do.

    Glenn C. Loury is the Merton P. Stoltz Professor of the Social Sciences in the department of economics at Brown University. He is the author of The Anatomy of Racial Inequality, and he was a 2002 Carnegie Scholar.

    Pearl Jam Censored For Anti-Bush Lyrics

    0

    By Conor McKay

    According to Pearl Jam’s website, portions of the band’s Sunday night set at Lollapalooza were missing from the AT&T Blue Room live webcast. Fans alerted the band to the missing material after the show. Reportedly absent from the webcast were segments of the band’s performance of “Daughter,” including the sung lines “George Bush, leave this world alone” and “George Bush find yourself another home.”

    After questioning AT&T about the incident, Lollapalooza was informed that material was indeed missing from the webcast, and that it was mistakenly cut by AT&T’s content monitor. Tiffany Nels of AT&T told CMJ that they are working the matter out with the band. “We regret the mistake,” she explains. “This was not intended and was an unfortunate mistake made by a webcast editor.” She went on to explain that AT&T has a policy for any excessive language, and that it was set up because of its all-ages audience.

    “This, of course, troubles us as artists but also as citizens concerned with the issue of censorship and the increasingly consolidated control of the media,” the band wrote on their website. “AT&T’s actions strike at the heart of the public’s concerns over the power that corporations have when it comes to determining what the public sees and hears through communications media.” The band went on to point out that “most telecommunications companies oppose ‘net neutrality’ and argue that the public can trust them not to censor.”

    The full version of Pearl Jam’s performance of “Daughter” at Lollapalooza will be available on the band’s website in the near future.

    www.pearljam.com

    Face scans planned for NZ airports

    0

    By COLIN ESPINER

    New Zealanders flying home from overseas will be required to have their face digitally scanned at airports under proposed legislation aimed at cracking down on illegal immigrants.

    Immigration Minister David Cunliffe tabled a 350-page Immigration Bill in Parliament yesterday, describing it as the biggest rewrite of immigration law for two decades.

    The bill all but guts the 1987 Immigration Act, slicing the appeals system for would-be refugees and other migrants seeking residency in New Zealand from four tiers to just one.

    It provides tough new powers for Immigration New Zealand to imprison for up to six months those who refuse to sign deportation orders, to use classified information held by the Security Intelligence Service (SIS) in assessing applications for entry, and to collect biometric data on all visitors to New Zealand.

    New Zealand citizens will be exempt from the requirement to provide biometric data such as fingerprinting and iris scans but will have to submit to a digital scan of their face, which will be compared by computer with an image stored on a microchip in their passport.

    Cunliffe said pictures of New Zealanders who were verified would then be deleted.

    Only where there was a discrepancy or fraud was suspected would the picture be stored.

    Late last year, Cunliffe pledged not to subject Kiwis to iris scans at airports, but he did not mention a digital photograph.

    He said yesterday the changes were necessary to strengthen border security and tighten the law against “those who pose a risk to New Zealand’s wellbeing”.

    Council of Civil Liberties chairman Michael Bott called the proposed legislation “a disgrace” and said it ushered in “Stalinist” powers for the state, and the Minister of Immigration in particular, to decide who could reside in New Zealand.

    The process used to detain one of New Zealand’s best-known refugees, Ahmed Zaoui, is being thrown out under the changes.

    The controversial Security Risk Certificate, slapped on Zaoui by the SIS, is being repealed.

    The bill strengthens deportation provisions, allowing non-residents to be deported for a wide range of breaches of the law, from identity fraud and breaching visa conditions to previous criminal convictions and being deemed “a risk to national security”.

    The bill’s passage through Parliament seems assured, with National yesterday welcoming the legislation.

    Immigration spokesman Lockwood Smith said it reflected the changing needs of the 21st century.

    Open government records to the public, legislator says

    0

    By Kori Walter

    Giving the public greater access to government records would restore trust in state government, state Rep. Tim Mahoney, D-Fayette County, said Tuesday at a hearing on strengthening Pennsylvania’s open-records law.

    Mahoney is the main sponsor of legislation that would give residents the right to obtain almost all government documents, ranging from township records to expenditures of state lawmakers.

    “For a long time in Pennsylvania, we as legislators played shell games with the public, the newspapers and everybody else by not letting them know where the money is being spent,” Mahoney told the House State Government Committee. “I believe this bill will let the sunshine in. This is a bill that would put trust back in this House that we desperately need.”

    Rep. Jaret Gibbons, D-10, Ellwood City, said he will back the bill as long as it safeguards personal information of state officials and public employees.

    “The key part of this legislation is opening the financial records of our state, including the Legislature,” Gibbons said. “I am almost certain that sometime this session we will pass a stronger Right to Know Law.”

    Mahoney said he will push for a vote on the bill shortly after lawmakers return from their summer break on Sept. 17.

    The committee spent nearly five hours reviewing the bill and listening to testimony from newspaper editors, government watchdog groups, advocates for victims of domestic violence and others.

    Teri Henning, general counsel for the Pennsylvania Newspaper Association, said the bill needs some fine-tuning.

    Henning said the bill should not exempt public officials’ e-mail messages from the list of records available to the public.

    “It invites agencies, so inclined, to communicate via e-mail about matters they don’t wish to disclose publicly,” Henning told the panel.

    Other concerns focused on a provision that would create a state agency to process all records requests and decide whether documents meet the definition of a public record.

    That could delay the release of records, Henning said.

    Elam Herr, assistant executive director of the Pennsylvania Association of Township Supervisors, said requests for municipal records should be made locally.

    Herr and others said lawmakers must be careful to shield personal information, such as birth dates, Social Security numbers and addresses of crime victims, which could be contained in documents.

    Mahoney said after the hearing that the testimony did not reveal any fatal flaws in the legislation.

    “I think we found out today that we have more support for this bill than I thought we had,” Mahoney said. “I have a commitment from leadership that this is on the top of their agenda.”

    Rep. Paul Clymer, R-Bucks County, agreed the bill had strong bipartisan support in the House.

    “The more information that we can provide to the public through the media and other forms strengthens government,” Clymer said. “I think this bill is a step in the right direction.”

    But Clymer disagreed with Mahoney’s strategy for getting the bill through the House.

    Mahoney urged the committee to vote on the current version and let the full House revise the language during floor debate.

    Clymer warned that’s a blueprint for disaster.

    Lawmakers could insert language on the House floor that could peel off support for the bill and eventually sink it, Clymer said.

    “You have to work out all the problems with the bill in the committee, and then go forward,” he said.

    UK data watchdog issues Big Brother warning

    0

    By Andrew Thomas

    THE UK INFORMATION COMMISSIONER’S OFFICE (ICO) has warned that bureaucrats share citizens’ data with each other willy-nilly and citizens probably don’t even hava clue that it’s going on.

    The body has published new guidance to help individuals understand how and why their personal information may be shared by organisations, and to explain their rights under the Data Protection Act.

    The ICO is an independent organisation set up to enforce and oversee the Data Protection Act, the Freedom of Information Act, the Environmental Information Regulations, and the Privacy and Electronic Communications Regulations.

    Iain Bourne, Head of Data Protection Projects at the ICO, said: “More and more information is being shared about us, often for useful and wholly legitimate purposes. It is important that individuals are aware of their rights under the Data Protection Act.

    “Information about an individual is sometimes shared within the same organisation or between several different organisations for a number of reasons. For example, a local authority may use information supplied on a council tax form to help other departments update their records; the police may share information with a local authority to help counter anti-social behaviour in the area; or a teacher might share information about a child with a social worker and health professional so that the child’s needs can be addressed.”

    The ICO warns that, while information sharing is often expected and reasonable, it can also take place without an individual’s consent and that if an individual is asked to consent to information sharing they should have a genuine free choice.

    Under the Data Protection Act individuals have the right to access the information which organisations hold about them. The guidance states that organisations sharing information should be able to tell the public what the information is, who it is being shared with and why it is being shared.

    ID Card Prints Flawed

    0

    DR 

    THOUSANDS of people will be unable to use the new ID cards to prove who they are, an expert has warned.

    Speaking as the Government publish a report on using biometric data on visas, passports and ID cards, Professor John Daugman has warned the failure rate will be massive.

    The Cambridge expert said plans to use just fingerprints on the cards to check identities will lead to one in 1000 giving a “false match”.

    It will mean when people try to prove their identities to police or border control staff the details of someone else will flash up on the screen.

    Shadow home secretary David Davis said: “Gordon Brown pretends ID cards will secure our identities but tens of thousands of people could be falsely accused of not being who they are.”

    There’s is still time to fight data sharing

    0

    Geraint Bevan
    NO2ID

    The Information Commissioner is right to be concerned about the proliferation of data sharing. Unfortunately, the idea that the risks can be mitigated if only people are aware of their rights is misplaced. The biggest danger is the notion of “transformational government”. This is the driving force behind the national identity scheme that will entail the creation of a vast National Identity Register, specifically designed to help spread data more widely.

    New passport applicants are being summoned to attend the interrogation centre in Blythswood House where, as well as facing the prospect of having biometric data scanned and recorded, they are confronted with personal dossiers compiled from a host of databases. The main purpose of these interrogations is to tidy up existing databases to aid the creation of a national register.

    It is not sufficient that we know our rights. As far as the government is concerned, we have none. The Data Protection Act does not prevent the government from sharing data whenever it believes that to be in the public interest. What government department ever believes any of its actions are not in the public interest? We must all take responsibility for protecting our personal data, but that requires that we learn to say no when asked for too much information unnecessarily. We should prepare to say no when summoned to participate in national identity registration. We can start by writing to our elected representatives and telling them that we intend to refuse to participate.

    Facebook – the CIA conspiracy

    1

    By Matt Greenop 

    Facebook has 20 million users worldwide, is worth billions of dollars and, if internet sources are to be believed, was started by the CIA.

    The social networking phenomenon started as a way of American college students to keep in touch. It is rapidly catching up with MySpace, and has left others like Bebo in its wake.

    But there is a dark side to the success story that’s been spreading across the blogosphere. A complex but riveting Big Brother-type conspiracy theory which links Facebook to the CIA and the US Department of Defence.

    The CIA is, though, using a Facebook group to recruit staff for its very sexy sounding National Clandestine Service.

    Checking out the job ads does require a Facebook login, so if you haven’t joined the site – or are worried that CIA spooks will start following you home from work -check them out on the agency’s own site.

    The story starts once Facebook founder Mark Zuckerberg had launched, after the dorm room drama that’s led to the current court case.

    Facebook’s first round of venture capital funding ($US500,000) came from former Paypal CEO Peter Thiel. Author of anti-multicultural tome ‘The Diversity Myth’, he is also on the board of radical conservative group VanguardPAC.

    The second round of funding into Facebook ($US12.7 million) came from venture capital firm Accel Partners. Its manager James Breyer was formerly chairman of the National Venture Capital Association, and served on the board with Gilman Louie, CEO of In-Q-Tel, a venture capital firm established by the Central Intelligence Agency in 1999. One of the company’s key areas of expertise are in “data mining technologies”.

    Breyer also served on the board of R&D firm BBN Technologies, which was one of those companies responsible for the rise of the internet.

    Dr Anita Jones joined the firm, which included Gilman Louie. She had also served on the In-Q-Tel’s board, and had been director of Defence Research and Engineering for the US Department of Defence.

    She was also an adviser to the Secretary of Defence and overseeing the Defence Advanced Research Projects Agency (DARPA), which is responsible for high-tech, high-end development.

    It was when a journalist lifted the lid on the DARPA’s
    Information Awareness Office
    that the public began to show concern at its information mining projects.

    Wikipedia’s IAO page says: “the IAO has the stated mission to gather as much information as possible about everyone, in a centralised location, for easy perusal by the United States government, including (though not limited to) internet activity, credit card purchase histories, airline ticket purchases, car rentals, medical records, educational transcripts, driver’s licenses, utility bills, tax returns, and any other available data.”.

    Not surprisingly, the backlash from civil libertarians led to a Congressional investigation into DARPA’s activity, the Information Awareness Office lost its funding.

    Now the internet conspiracy theorists are citing Facebook as the IAO’s new mask.

    Parts of the IAO’s technology round-up included ‘human network analysis and behaviour model building engines’, which Facebook’s massive volume of neatly-targeted data gathering allows for.

    Facebook’s own Terms of use state: “by posting Member Content to any part of the Web site, you automatically grant, and you represent and warrant that you have the right to grant, to facebook an irrevocable, perpetual, non-exclusive, transferable, fully paid, worldwide license to use, copy, perform, display, reformat, translate, excerpt and distribute such information and content and to prepare derivative works of, or incorpoate into other works, such information and content, and to grant and authorise sublicenses of the foregoing.

    And in its equally interesting privacy policy: “Facebook may also collect information about you from other sources, such as newspapers, blogs, instant messaging services, and other users of the Facebook service through the operation of the service (eg. photo tags) in order to provide you with more useful information and a more personalised experience. By using Facebook, you are consenting to have your personal data transferred to and processed in the United States.”

    Is the CIA really providing the impetus and the funding behind the monster growth of this year’s biggest dot com success story? Maybe only the men with the nice suits and ear pieces can answer that.

    CIA Spy Comes Out Of The Shadows

    0

    Top Clandestine Official, Head Of The Agency’s National Clandestine Service, To Retire

    One of the CIA’s top spies has come out of the shadows.

    Jose Rodriguez(AP) With little fanfare, Jose Rodriguez, who heads the National Clandestine Service, had his cover lifted about a month ago. CIA spokesman Mark Mansfield said the driving factor was his interest in publicly participating in minority recruitment events. He is also retiring later this year after more than three decades with the agency.

    Rodriguez is the most important man in the U.S. spy game whose name you probably never knew. When he was mentioned publicly before now, he was referred to only as “Jose.”

    Rodriguez became head of the Central Intelligence Agency’s clandestine service in November 2004. With the creation of the National Clandestine Service the following year as part of an intelligence reorganization, Rodriguez rose to be chief of “human intelligence” operations, overseeing the classic spycraft that takes place at a variety of U.S. spy agencies.

    Unlike his recent predecessors, Rodriguez elected to stay undercover as he ordered some of the CIA’s most sensitive cloak-and-dagger operations. These efforts got little publicity because Rodriguez believed the head of the clandestine service shouldn’t have a high profile.

    In national security circles, however, Rodriguez’s identity was not a well-kept secret. Wikipedia users even created an entry about him last year, although the page contains inaccuracies.

    This much is known: Rodriguez, a native of Puerto Rico, spent much of his career in Latin America, including in Mexico.

    Some officials, who spoke on condition that they not be identified while discussing Rodriguez’s past, have said he got into trouble during the 1990s while trying to help a friend who was arrested for narcotics in the Dominican Republic. The Justice Department looked into Rodriguez’s actions, but never brought charges.

    Although the incident led to his removal as head of the CIA’s Latin America Division, his espionage career continued. He served overseas and took over as head of the CIA’s counterterror center less than a year after Sept. 11, 2001.

    “Jose built a reputation for leadership in the field and here at headquarters, and he guided some of the agency’s greatest counterterror victories,” CIA Director Michael Hayden said in a statement.

    “He has done much to protect our country by strengthening its Clandestine Service,” Hayden added.

    Next week, Rodriguez will make his first public appearance when he speaks about diversity at a border security conference in El Paso, Texas, the hometown of the gathering’s Democratic host, House Intelligence Committee Chairman Silvestre Reyes.

    Rodriguez has not set a firm date for his retirement, and a replacement has not yet been announced.

    Security firms working on devices to spot would-be terrorists in crowd

    0

    · Move to analyse behaviour and physiology from afar
    · British expert warns of Minority Report scenario

    By Ian Sample

    Counter-terrorism experts have drawn up plans to develop an array of advanced technologies capable of spotting would-be terrorists in a crowd before they have time to strike.

    Scientists and engineers have been asked to devise ways of analysing people’s behaviour and physiology from afar, in the hope they may reveal clues about their mental state and even their future intentions.

    Under Project Hostile Intent, scientists will aim to build devices that can pick up tell-tale signs of hostile intent or deception from people’s heart rates, perspiration and tiny shifts in facial expressions.

    The project was launched by the US department of homeland security with a call to security companies and government laboratories for assistance.

    According to the timetable set out, the new devices are expected to be trialled at a handful of airports, borders and ports of entry by 2012.

    The plans describe how systems based on video cameras, laserlight, infra-red, audio recordings and eye tracking technology are expected to scour crowds looking for unusual behaviour, with the aim of identifying people who should be approached and quizzed by security staff, New Scientist magazine reports.

    The project hopes to advance a security system already employed by the US transportation security administration that monitors people for unintentional facial twitches, called “micro-expressions”, that can suggest someone is lying or trying to conceal information.

    Studies by Paul Ekman, a psychologist at the University of California, San Francisco, have revealed that involuntary expressions can often betray someone’s true intentions. If you flash your teeth, lower your eyebrows and wrinkle your nose for a fraction of a second while trying to smile, you have just demonstrated the micro-expression for disgust.

    A major hurdle will be developing technology that can make correct decisions quickly. “Right now, screeners have typically less than one minute to examine a traveller’s documents and assess whether they are a threat,” said Larry Orluskie, of the department of homeland security.

    The project is also expected to investigate developing a lie detector-type test that can be used remotely – an advantage because it would not interfere with the flow of a crowd and it could be used without the target’s knowledge.

    Experts yesterday were sceptical that today’s technology will be able to predict hostile intent accurately enough to be useful. Dr Ekman said a terrorist might confound security measures by showing a range of expressions from fear of being caught to distress at the possibility of dying. “I don’t know. No one knows,” he told New Scientist.

    Anthony Richards, a counter-terrorism expert at St Andrews University who has worked on Britain’s ability to pre-empt a major terrorist attack, agreed that the project faced substantial hurdles.

    “There could be all kinds of reasons that might make people behave in certain ways that have nothing to do with terrorism. If you have heightened security and there are a lot of police around, it could be possible that you can feel and look guilty even when you haven’t done anything wrong.

    “We need to reduce the motivation for people doing these kinds of things. We shouldn’t just accept that terrorism will remain as it is or worsen over the next 20 or 30 years and then just put all the technological solutions in place. Technology is certainly important in the fight against terrorism but that shouldn’t detract from the crucially important challenge of finding out what is driving terrorism. We need to have a sensible and honest appraisal as to what is radicalising young people.”

    Peter McOwan, a computer scientist who is developing sensors to detect people’s moods at Queen Mary, University of London, said: “It’s just like something from Minority Report. They have been watching too many Tom Cruise movies.”

    CIA report on 9/11 due Labor Day

    0

    By Helen Fessenden

    The CIA has been ordered to release by Labor Day a declassified summary of an internal report on the agency’s performance prior to the terrorist attacks of Sept. 11, 2001, possibly shedding light on whether senior officials made fundamental lapses in judgment.

    Under the 9/11 bill that President Bush signed into law Friday, the agency must release a public summary within 30 days of the law’s enactment, along with a classified annex for Congress that explains the report’s redactions.

    CIA spokesman George Little told The Hill in an e-mail Monday that the agency “will, of course, comply with the law.”

    Until now, the CIA had refused to disclose any part of the report since its former inspector general (IG), John Helgerson, completed the final draft more than two years ago. The 9/11 bill, which addresses most of the 9/11 Commission’s unfulfilled recommendations, is the first successful legislation to mandate a declassified summary.

    According to previous media accounts, the IG report is more hard-hitting about the CIA’s internal failings than the 9/11 Commission’s 2004 account, and points fingers at specific senior individuals at the agency. Those reportedly include former CIA Director George Tenet, former Deputy Director of Operations James Pavitt, and former CIA Counterterrorism Center Chief Cofer Black. All have left the agency.

    Sen. Ron Wyden (D-Ore.), a member of the Intelligence panel, told The Hill shortly before the bill’s signing that “No one has come even close to giving a good national security argument as to why the public should be denied access to this information.”

    Wyden long had pushed for this and other transparency provisions, including declassification of the intelligence budget total and a more defined role for the independent Pubic Interest Declassification Board, both of which also were codified by the 9/11 legislation. He and other Intelligence panel members have seen the classified CIA report, but are barred by committee rules from discussing its content.

    “All I can say is that it’s an extraordinarily important, independent assessment, written with a specific purpose to learn how we can improve our security,” he said.

    Senate Intelligence Committee Vice Chairman Kit Bond (R-Mo.), who has backed Wyden and Chairman Jay Rockefeller (D-W.Va.) on this issue, said he hoped that the bill’s passage sends “a sufficient signal” to the CIA.

    “Everyone else has taken their lumps, and this should have been declassified a long time ago,” Bond said.

    Congress ordered the report in late 2002, and Helgerson completed the bulk of the work in 2003 and 2004, when Tenet was still CIA director. Following Tenet’s resignation in July 2004, his successor, Porter Goss, reportedly stalled an internal distribution of the report’s draft and asked Helgerson to make changes before it was sent to Congress.

    In August 2005, the congressional intelligence committees received the report as well as responses from the officials cited in the text. Two months later, however, Goss declined to follow the report’s recommendation that the CIA convene “accountability boards” or reprimand specific individuals, according to media reports.

    Tenet, Pavitt and Black did not return calls from The Hill asking for comment. But when Tenet appeared on NBC’s “Meet the Press” last May, he charged that there are “many pieces of this report that many of us felt were terribly flawed.”

    Questions remain as to how much the CIA will declassify. The agency held lengthy negotiations with Congress over the 2003 release of the congressional 9/11 inquiry report and the 2004 report by the Senate Intelligence Committee on prewar intelligence, both of which contained substantial redactions.

    When the Senate Intelligence panel released in September 2006 two further chapters of its prewar intelligence inquiry, Wyden argued that too much had been redacted. “Parts of these reports read like a dictionary with the definitions cut out,” he said at the time in a press release.

    Wyden asked the Public Interest Declassification Board, which reviews classification procedures and disputes, to take up the matter. The board said it would defer until it received clarification on whether it could launch a review ordered solely by Congress. The 9/11 bill stipulated that the panel did indeed have that authority.

    Airlines, Others Sue FBI, CIA To Depose Agents In 9-11 Cases

    0

    By Chad Bray

    Airline manufacturer Boeing Co. (BA), major airlines and several airport operators sued the Federal Bureau of Investigation and the Central Intelligence Agency on Tuesday in a bid to question current and former agency employees in connection with negligence litigation over the Sept. 11th terrorist attacks.

    In separate lawsuits, the airlines and others are challenging decisions by the FBI and the CIA that prevent them from conducting depositions of those employees.

    The airlines include AMR Corp.’s (AMR) American Airlines, UAL Corp.’s (UAUA) United Airlines, US Airways Group Inc. (LCC), Delta Air Lines Inc. (DAL), Continental Airlines Inc. (CAL) and AirTran Holdings Inc. (AAI).

    The Massachusetts Port Authority, which operates Logan International Airport in Boston, and the Metropolitan Washington Airport Authority, which operates Ronald Reagan National Airport and Dulles International Airport in Washington, D.C., also are plaintiffs in the lawsuits.

    The lawsuits, filed in federal court in Manhattan on Tuesday, are related to ongoing negligence litigation over the Sept. 11, 2001, terrorist attacks in New York and Washington, D.C.

    In the FBI lawsuit, the plaintiffs are seeking to conduct depositions of:

    Scott Billings, a FBI special agent formerly assigned to the Joint Terrorism Task Force; Erik T. Rigler, a former FBI special agent; Michael Rolince, a FBI section chief for International Terrorism Operations Section from 1998 to 2002; Coleen M. Rowley, a former FBI special agent and Minneapolis Chief Division Counsel; and Harry Samit, a FBI special agent assigned to the Minneapolis Field office and Joint Terrorism Task Force in August and September 2001.The agents were involved in FBI investigations of the terrorist organization al-Qaeda and its operatives before and after the Sept. 11 attacks, according to the complaint.

    In the CIA lawsuit, they are seeking to depose a former deputy chief of the CIA’s Osama Bin Laden unit code-named “John” and a FBI special agent assigned to that unit code-named “Mary.” They are believed to have information regarding two of the hijackers who carried out the attacks, according to the complaint.

    Special Agent

    Richard Kolko, a FBI spokesman in Washington, said he wasn’t aware of the lawsuits and the FBI wouldn’t comment on ongoing litigation.A call to the CIA’s public affairs office in Langley, Va., wasn’t immediately returned late Tuesday.

    Rudy Giuliani’s Five Big Lies About 9/11

    0

    On the stump, Rudy can’t help spreading smoke and ashes about his lousy record

    By Wayne Barrett

    Nearly six years after 9/11, Rudy Giuliani is still walking through the canyons of lower Manhattan, covered in soot, pointing north, and leading the nation out of danger’s way. The Republican frontrunner is campaigning for president by evoking that visual at every campaign stop, and he apparently believes it’s a picture worth thousands of nights in the White House.

    Giuliani has been leading the Republican pack for seven months, and predictions that the party’s evangelicals would turn on him have so far proven hollow. The religious right appears as gripped by the Giuliani story as the rest of the country.

    Giuliani isn’t shy about reminding audiences of those heady days. In fact he hyperventilates about them on the stump, making his credentials in the so-called war on terror the centerpiece of his campaign. His claims, meanwhile, have been met with a media deference so total that he’s taken to complimenting “the good job it is doing covering the campaign.” Opponents, too, haven’t dared to question his terror credentials, as if doing so would be an unpatriotic bow to Osama bin Laden.

    Here, then, is a less deferential look at the illusory cloud emanating from the former mayor’s campaign . . .


    BIG LIE1. ‘I think the thing that distinguishes me on terrorism is, I have more experience dealing with it.’ This pillar of the Giuliani campaign–asserted by pundits as often as it is by the man himself–is based on the idea that Rudy uniquely understands the terror threat because of his background as a prosecutor and as New York’s mayor. In a July appearance at a Maryland synagogue, Giuliani sketched out his counterterrorism biography, a resume that happens to be rooted in falsehood.

    “As United States Attorney, I investigated the Leon Klinghoffer murder by Yasir Arafat,” he told the Jewish audience, referring to the infamous 1985 slaying of a wheelchair-bound, 69-year-old New York businessman aboard the Achille Lauro, an Italian ship hijacked off the coast of Egypt by Palestinian extremists. “It’s honestly the reason why I knew so much about Arafat,” says Giuliani. “I knew, in detail, the Americans he murdered. I went over their cases.”

    On the contrary, Victoria Toensing, the deputy assistant attorney general at the Justice Department in Washington who filed a criminal complaint in the Lauro investigation, says that no one in Giuliani’s office “was involved at all.” Jay Fischer, the Klinghoffer family attorney who spearheaded a 12-year lawsuit against the PLO, says he “never had any contact” with Giuliani or his office. “It would boggle my mind if anyone in 1985, 1986, 1987, or thereafter conducted an investigation of this case and didn’t call me,” he adds. Fischer says he did have a private dinner with Giuliani in 1992: “It was the first time we talked, and we didn’t even talk about the Klinghoffer case then.”

    The dinner was arranged by Arnold Burns, a close friend of Fischer and Giuliani who also represented the Klinghoffer family. Burns, who was also the finance chair of Giuliani’s mayoral campaign, was the deputy U.S. attorney general in 1985 and oversaw the probe. “I know of nothing Rudy did in any shape or form on the Klinghoffer case,” he says.

    Though Giuliani told the Conservative Political Action conference in March that he “prosecuted a lot of crime–a little bit of terrorism, but mostly organized crime,” he actually worked only one major terrorism case as U.S. Attorney, indicting 10 arms dealers for selling $2.5 billion worth of anti-tank missiles, bombs, and fighter jets to Iran in 1986. The judge in the case ruled that a sale to Iran violated terrorist statutes because its government had been tied to 87 terrorist incidents. Giuliani has never mentioned the case, perhaps because he personally filed papers terminating it in his last month as U.S. Attorney: A critical witness had died, and a judge tossed out 46 of the 55 counts because of errors by Giuliani’s office.

    “Then, as mayor of New York,” Giuliani’s July speech continued, “I got elected right after the 1993 Islamic terrorist attack . . . I set up emergency plans for all the different possible attacks we could have. We had drills and exercises preparing us for sarin gas and anthrax, dirty bombs.”

    In fact, Giuliani was oblivious to the 1993 World Trade Center bombing throughout his mayoralty. A month after the attack, candidate Giuliani met for the first time with Bill Bratton, who would ultimately become his police commissioner. The lengthy taped meeting was one of several policy sessions he had with unofficial advisers. The bombing never came up; neither did terrorism. When Giuliani was elected a few months later, he immediately launched a search for a new police commissioner. Three members of the screening panel that Giuliani named to conduct the search, and four of the candidates interviewed for the job, said later that the bombing and terrorism were never mentioned–even when the new mayor got involved with the interviews himself. When Giuliani needed an emergency management director a couple of years later, two candidates for the job and the city official who spearheaded that search said that the bombing and future terrorist threats weren’t on Giuliani’s radar. The only time Giuliani invoked the 1993 bombing publicly was at his inauguration in 1994, when he referred to the way the building’s occupants evacuated themselves as a metaphor for personal responsibility, ignoring the bombing itself as a terrorist harbinger.

    U.S. Attorney Mary Jo White and the four assistants who prosecuted the 1993 bombing said they were never asked to brief Giuliani about terrorism, though all of the assistants knew Giuliani personally and had actually been hired by him when he was the U.S. Attorney. White’s office, located just a couple hundred yards from City Hall, indicted bin Laden three years before 9/11, but Giuliani recounted in his own book, Leadership, that “shortly after 9/11, Judith [Nathan] got me a copy of Yossef Bodansky’s Bin Laden: The Man Who Declared War on America,” which had warned of “spectacular terrorist strikes in Washington and/or New York” in 1999. As an example of how he “mastered a subject,” Giuliani wrote that he soon “covered” Bodansky’s prophetic work “in highlighter and notes.”

    The 1995 sarin-gas drill that Giuliani cited in his July speech was also prophetic, anticipating many of the breakdowns that hampered the city’s 9/11 response. The drill was such a disaster that a follow-up exercise was cancelled to avoid embarrassment. More than a hundred of the first responders rushed in so recklessly that they were “killed” by exposure to the gas. Radio communications were described in the city’s own report as “abysmal,” with police and fire “operating on different frequencies.” The command posts were located much too close to the incident. All three failings would be identified years later in official reviews of the 9/11 response.

    Giuliani went on, in this stump speech, to list other examples of his mayoral experience confronting terrorism. There was the time, he says, “we had what we thought was a sarin gas attack.” And there were also the 50th anniversary commemoration of the United Nations and the 2000 millennium celebration to contend with, times, he said, “when we had a lot of warnings and had to do a tremendous amount to prepare.” And let’s not forget, he pointed out, the 1997 NYPD arrest of two terrorists who “were going to blow up a subway station.” Giuliani used this thwarted attack as proof of the city’s readiness: “A very, very alert young police officer saw those guys,” he said. “They looked suspicious, [so he] reported them to the desk sergeant. The police department executed a warrant and shot one of the men as he was about to hit a toggle switch.”

    Each of the claims in Giuliani’s self-serving account is inaccurate. The supposed “sarin attack” was simply the discovery of an empty canister marked “sarin” in the home of a harmless Queens recluse. It was sitting next to an identical container labeled “compressed air” with a smiley-face logo. Jerry Hauer, the city’s emergency management director at the time, was in London, on the phone with Giuliani constantly. Hauer finds it ironic that Giuliani is still talking about the incident, since they both thought it was “comically” mishandled then. “The police went there without any suits on and touched all the containers without proper clothing. They turned it into a major crime scene, with a hundred cops lining the street. Rudy at one point said to me, ‘Here we have the mayor, the fire commissioner, the chief of the police department, and one of my deputy mayors standing on the front lawn of this house. Shouldn’t we be across the street in case this stuff ignites?'” This overhyped emergency led to a misdemeanor arrest subsequently dismissed by the district attorney.

    Similarly, the security concerns during the 1995 U.N. anniversary focused on Cuba and China and didn’t involve Arab terrorist threats. The millennium target, well established at subsequent trials, was the Los Angeles International Airport, not New York. While there’s no doubt the Clinton administration did put the country and city on terrorist alert for Y2K and other reasons, it was an arrest on the Washington/Canadian border that busted up a West Coast plot.

    The subway bombing, meanwhile, wasn’t stymied by the NYPD. An Egyptian friend of the bomber–living with him in the apartment where the pipe bomb was being built–told two Long Island Rail Road police officers about it. When the NYPD subsequently raided the apartment, they shot two Palestinians who were there–one of whom, hit five times and gravely wounded, was later acquitted at trial. No one had tried to set off the bomb at the time of the arrest, though news stories reported that; the bomber had reached for an officer’s gun, according to the trial testimony. The news stories also initially suggested a link to Hamas, though the lone bomber was actually an amateur fanatic with no money and no network. As conservative a source as Bill Gertz of The Washington Times wrote that FBI counterterrorism investigators were “concerned that the initial alarmist statements about the case made by Mayor Rudy Giuliani”–apparently a reference to leaks about Hamas and the toggle switch–”will prove embarrassing.”

    Giuliani’s terrorism biography is bunk. As mayor, his laser-beam focus was street thugs, and as a prosecutor, it was the mob, Wall Street, and crooked politicians. He can’t reach back to those years and rewrite such well-known chapters of his life.

    BIG LIE

    2. ‘I don’t think there was anyplace in the country, including the federal government, that was as well prepared for that attack as New York City was in 2001.’ This assertion flies in the face of all three studies of the city’s response–the 9/11 Commission, the National Institute of Standards & Technology (NIST), and McKinsey & Co., the consulting firm hired by the Bloomberg administration.

    Actually, Giuliani didn’t create the OEM until three years after the 1993 bombing, 27 months into his term. And he didn’t open the OEM’s new emergency command center until the end of 1999–nearly six years after he’d taken office. If he “assumed from the moment I came into office that NYC would be the subject of a terrorist attack,” as he told Time when it made him “Person of the Year” in 2001, he sure took a long time to erect what he describes as the city’s front line of defense.

    The OEM was established so long after the bombing because, contrary to Giuliani’s revisionism, the decision to create it had nothing to do with the bombing. Several memos, unearthed from the Giuliani archive and going on at great length, reveal that the initial rationale for the agency was “non-law enforcement events,” particularly the handling of a Brooklyn water-main break shortly after he took office that the mayor thought had been botched. Before that, in December 1994, when an unemployed computer programmer carried a bomb onto a subway in an extortion plot against the Transit Authority, Giuliani was upset that he couldn’t even get a count of patients from the responding services for his press conference.

    Jerry Hauer, who was handpicked by Giuliani to head the OEM, testified before the 9/11 Commission that Giuliani was “unable to get the full story” at the firebombing and “heard about the huge street collapse” that followed the water-main break “on TV,” adding: “That’s what led the mayor to set up OEM.” Hauer went through five interviews for the job, and the only time terrorism came up was when Giuliani briefly discussed the failed sarin-gas drill. He even met with Giuliani’s wife, Donna Hanover; no one said a word about the 1993 bombing. Hauer’s own memos at the time the OEM was launched in 1996 emphasize “the visibility of the mayor” during emergencies (rather than the police commissioner) as a major objective of the agency. The now- ballyhooed new office was, however, so underfunded from the start that Hauer could only hire staffers whose salaries would be paid for by other agencies like the NYPD.

    With that kind of history, it’s hardly surprising that the OEM was anything but “invaluable” on 9/11. Sam Caspersen, one of the principal authors of the 9/11 Commission’s chapter on the city’s response, says that “nothing was happening at OEM” during the 102 minutes of the attack that had any direct impact on the city’s “rescue/evacuation operation.” A commission staff statement found that, even prior to the evacuation of the OEM command center at 7 World Trade an hour after the first plane hit, the agency “did not play an integral role” in the response. Despite Giuliani’s claim today that he and the OEM were “constantly planning for different kinds” of attacks, none of the OEM exercises replicated the 1993 bombing. No drill occurred at the World Trade Center, and none involved the response to a high-rise fire anywhere. In fact, the OEM had no high-rise plan–its emergency-management trainers weren’t even assigned to prepare for the one attack that had already occurred, and the one most likely to recur. Kevin Culley, a Fire Department captain who worked as a field responder at OEM, said the agency had “plans for minor emergencies,” but he couldn’t recall “anybody anticipating another attack like the ’93 bombing.”

    Instead of being the best-prepared city, New York’s lack of unified command, as well as the breakdown of communications between the police and fire departments, fell far short of the efforts at the Pentagon that day, as later established by the 9/11 Commission and NIST reports. When the 280,000-member International Association of Fire Fighters recently released a powerful video assailing Giuliani for sticking firefighters with the same radios that “we knew didn’t work” in the 1993 attack, the presidential campaign attacked the union. “This is an organization that supported John Kerry for president in 2004,” Giuliani aide Tony Carbonetti said. “So it’s no shock that they’re out there going after a credible Republican.” While the IAFF did endorse Kerry, the Uniformed Firefighters of Greater New York, whose president starred in the video, endorsed Bush. Its former president, Tom Von Essen–currently a member of Giuliani Partners–was the fire commissioner on 9/11 precisely because the union had played such a pivotal role in initially electing Giuliani.

    The IAFF video reports that 121 firefighters in the north tower didn’t get out because they didn’t hear evacuation orders, rejecting Giuliani’s claim before the 9/11 Commission that the firefighters heard the orders and heroically decided to “stand their ground” and rescue civilians. Having abandoned that 2004 contention, the Giuliani campaign is now trying to blame the deadly communications lapse on the repeaters, which were installed to boost radio signals in the towers. But the commission concluded that the “technical failure of FDNY radios” was “a contributing factor,” though “not the primary cause,” of the “many firefighter fatalities in the North Tower.” The commission compared “the strength” of the NYPD and FDNY radios and said that the weaknesses of the FDNY radios “worked against successful communication.”

    The commission report also found that “it’s impossible to know what difference it made that units in the North Tower weren’t using the repeater channel,” because no one knows if it “remained operational” after the collapse of the south tower, which fell on the trade-center facilities where the repeater and its console were located. The collapse also drove everyone out of the north tower lobby, leaving no one to operate the repeater console. In addition, the commission concluded that fire chiefs failed to turn on the repeater correctly that morning–another indication of the lack of training and drills at the WTC between the attacks. In the end, firefighters had to rely exclusively on their radios, and the inability of the Giuliani administration to find a replacement for the radios that malfunctioned in 1993 left them unable to talk to each other, even about getting out of a tower on the verge of collapse.

    The mayor had also done nothing to make the radios interoperable–which would have enabled the police and firefighters to communicate across departmental lines–despite having received a 1995 federal waiver granting the city the additional radio frequencies to make that possible. That meant the fire chiefs had no idea that police helicopters had anticipated the partial collapse of both towers long before they fell.

    It’s not just the radios and the OEM: Giuliani never forced the police and fire departments to abide by clear command-and-control protocols that squarely put one service in charge of the other during specified emergencies. Though he collected $250 million in tax surcharges on phone use to improve the 911 system, he diverted this emergency funding for other uses, and the 911 dispatchers were an utter disaster that day, telling victims to stay where they were long after the fire chiefs had ordered an evacuation, which potentially sealed the fates of hundreds. And, despite the transparent lessons of 1993, Giuliani never established any protocols for rooftop or elevator rescues in high-rises, or even a strategy for bringing the impaired and injured out–all costly failings on 9/11.

    But perhaps the best evidence of the Giuliani administration’s lack of readiness was that no one at its top levels had a top-secret security clearance on 9/11. Hauer, who had left the OEM in 2000 to become a top biochemical adviser at the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, was invited to Gracie Mansion within days of 9/11 for a strategy session with Giuliani and a half-dozen of his top advisers, including Police Commissioner Bernie Kerik, Tom Von Essen, and Richie Sheirer, who succeeded Hauer at the OEM. Hauer, who had the highest-level clearance, says that “no one else in the room had one at all.” He was told that the FBI “was trying to get them expedited clearances.”

    Hauer had previously taken Sheirer down to the White House to meet with top counterterrorism brass and learned on his way into the meeting that Sheirer hadn’t “filled out the questionnaire.” When Kerik’s nomination as homeland security secretary blew up in 2004, news accounts also indicated that he’d never filled it out. Von Essen was so out of the loop that he said that prior to 9/11, he was told “nothing at all,” and that he started hearing “talk of an organization called al Qaeda and a man named Osama bin Laden” a few hours after the attack. “It meant nothing to me,” he wrote in his own book.

    “I was reading the daily intelligence in Washington,” Hauer recalled, “and I didn’t feel comfortable talking about things that people weren’t cleared for. Talking in general with Rudy one-on-one was one thing, but talking to Richie and Bernie and Tommy violated my security clearances.” Though Giuliani’s top team had failed to seek the clearances they needed prior to 9/11, Kerik and Giuliani attacked the FBI for not sharing information with local law enforcement officials when they testified a month after the attack at a House subcommittee hearing.


    BIG LIE

    3. Don’t blame me for 7 WTC, Rudy says. In response to his critics’ most damning sound bite, Giuliani is attempting to blame a once-valued aide for the decision to put his prized, $61 million emergency-command center in the World Trade Center, an obvious terrorist target. The 1997 decision had dire consequences on 9/11, when the city had to mobilize a response without any operational center.

    “My director of emergency management recommended 7 WTC” as “the site that would make the most sense,” Giuliani told Chris Wallace’s Fox News Channel show in May, pinpointing Jerry Hauer as the culprit.

    Wallace confronted Giuliani, however, with a 1996 Hauer memo recommending that the bunker be sited at MetroTech in Brooklyn, close to where the Bloomberg administration eventually built one. The mayor brushed the memo aside, continuing to insist that Hauer had picked it as “the prime site.” The campaign then put out statements from a former deputy mayor who said that Hauer had supported the trade-center location at a high-level meeting with the mayor in 1997.

    Hauer doesn’t dispute that he eventually backed the 7 WTC location, but he clearly favored MetroTech. His memo said that MetroTech “could be available in six months,” while it took four and a half more years to get the bunker up and running at 7 WTC. He said that MetroTech was secure and “not as visible a target as buildings in Lower Manhattan”– a prophetic comparison. Listing eight positives about MetroTech, the memo also mentioned negatives, but said they weren’t insurmountable. “The real issue,” Hauer concluded, “is whether or not the mayor wants to go across the river to manage an incident. If he is willing to do this, MetroTech is a good alternative.” Notes from meetings indicate that Hauer continued to push MetroTech in the discussions with the mayor and his top deputy.

    But Hauer says Denny Young, the mayor’s alter ego, who has worked at his side for nearly three decades, eventually “made it very clear” that Giuliani wanted “to be able to walk to this facility quickly.” That meant the bunker had to be in lower Manhattan. Since the City Hall area is below the floodplain, the command center–which was built with a hurricane-curtain wall–had to be above ground. The formal city document approving the site said that it “was selected due to its proximity to City Hall,” a standard set by Giuliani and Giuliani alone.

    The 7 WTC site was the brainchild of Bill Diamond, a prominent Manhattan Republican that Giuliani had installed at the city agency handling rentals. When Diamond held a similar post in the Reagan administration a few years earlier, his office had selected the same building to house nine federal agencies. Diamond’s GOP-wired broker steered Hauer to the building, which was owned by a major Giuliani donor and fundraiser. When Hauer signed onto it, he was locked in by the limitations Giuliani had imposed on the search and the sites Diamond offered him. The mayor was so personally focused on the siting and construction of the bunker that the city administrator who oversaw it testified in a subsequent lawsuit that “very senior officials,” specifically including Giuliani, “were involved,” which he said was a major difference between this and other projects. Giuliani’s office had a humidor for cigars and mementos from City Hall, including a fire horn, police hats and fire hats, as well as monogrammed towels in his bathroom. His suite was bulletproofed and he visited it often, even on weekends, bringing his girlfriend Judi Nathan there long before the relationship surfaced. He had his own elevator. Great concern was expressed in writing that the platform in the press room had to be high enough to make sure his head was above the cameras. It’s inconceivable that the hands-on mayor’s fantasy command center was shaped–or sited–by anyone other than him.

    Of course, the consequences of putting the center there were predictable. The terrorist who engineered the 1993 bombing told the FBI they were coming back to the trade center. Opposing the site at a meeting with the mayor, Police Commissioner Howard Safir called it “Ground Zero” because of the earlier attack. Lou Anemone, the highest-ranking uniformed officer in the NYPD, wrote memos slamming the site. “I’ve never seen in my life ‘walking distance’ as some kind of a standard for crisis management,” Anemone said later. “But you don’t want to confuse Giuliani with the facts.” Anemone had done a detailed vulnerability study of the city for Giuliani, pinpointing terrorist targets. “In terms of targets, the WTC was number one,” he says. “I guess you had to be there in 1993 to know how strongly we felt it was the wrong place.”

    Bizarrely, Giuliani even tried in the Wallace interview to deny that the early evacuation of the bunker left him searching for a new site, contrary to the account of that frantic morning he’s given hundreds of times, often for honoraria reaching six figures. “The way you’re interpreting it,” he told Wallace, “it was as if that was the one fixed command center. It was not. There were backup command centers.” To minimize the effect of the loss of the bunker, Giuliani said that, “within a half hour” of the shutdown of the bunker, “we were able to move immediately to another command center.”

    In fact, as Giuliani himself has told the dramatic tale, he and his entourage were briefly trapped in a Merrill Lynch office, “jimmied the lock” of a firehouse, and took over a deluxe hotel until they realized it was “sheathed in windows.” They considered going to City Hall, but learned it was covered in debris. The only backup center that existed was the small one at police headquarters that had been put out of business when the WTC bunker opened; but Giuliani said its phones weren’t working. “We’re going to have to find someplace,” Giuliani said, according to his Time account, which described it as a “long and harrowing” search. “Our government no longer had a place to work,” he wrote in Leadership.

    They wound up at the police academy uptown and, according to the account Giuliani and company gave Time, “we are up and operating by 4 p.m.”–seven hours, not a half-hour, after the attack. But Giuliani told the 9/11 Commission that they quickly decided the academy “was too small” and “were able to establish a command center” at Pier 92 “within three days,” virtually building it from scratch. Hauer said he’d asked for a backup command center years before 9/11, “but they told me there was no money for it.” After Hauer left, and shortly before 9/11, the city announced plans to build a backup center near police headquarters–a site quickly jettisoned by the Bloomberg administration. Police officials told reporters that they were looking for space outside Manhattan and underground, citing the lessons of 9/11.

    BIG LIE

    4. ‘Democrats do not understand the full nature and scope of the terrorist war against us.’ Giuliani blames what he calls Bill Clinton’s “decade of denial” for the mess we’re in, and uses it to tarnish the rest of Clinton’s party. “Don’t react, kind of let things go, kind of act the way Clinton did in the ’90s” is his favorite way of characterizing the Democratic response to the threat of terrorism. “We were attacked at Khobar Towers, Kenya, Tanzania, 17 of our sailors were killed on the USS Cole, and the United States government, under then-president Clinton, did not respond,” Giuliani told the rabidly anti-Clinton audience at Pat Robertson’s Regent University. “It was a big mistake to not recognize that the 1993 bombing was a terrorist act and an act of war,” he added. “Bin Laden declared war on us. We didn’t hear it. I thought it was pretty clear at the time, but a lot of people didn’t see it, couldn’t see it.”

    This is naked revisionism–and not just because of his own well established, head-in-the-sand indifference to the 1993 bombing. It’s as unambiguously partisan as his claim that on 9/11, he looked to the sky, saw the first fighter jets flying over the city well after the attack, and thanked God that George W. Bush was president. Bob Kerrey, the former Democratic senator who sat on the 9/11 Commission, put it fairly: “Prior to 9/11, no elected official did enough to reduce the threat of Al Qaeda. Neither political party covered itself in glory.”

    Giuliani’s lifelong friend Louis Freeh, the former FBI head who has endorsed him for president, wrote in his 2005 autobiography that “the nation’s fundamental approach to Osama bin Laden and his ilk was no different after the inauguration of January 21, 2001, than it had been before.” As Bob Kerrey noted, the five Democrats and five Republicans on the 9/11 Commission said much the same thing. Freeh added that both administrations “were fighting criminals, not an enemy force” before 9/11, and Giuliani is now making precisely the same policy point, but limiting his critique to Clinton. Even the fiercely anti-Clinton Freeh credited the former president with “one exception,” saying his administration did go after bin Laden “with a salvo of Tomahawk missiles in 1998 in retaliation for the embassy bombings in East Africa.”

    The best example of Giuliani’s partisan twist is the USS Cole, which was attacked on October 12, 2000, three weeks before the 2000 election. The 9/11 Commission report found that in the final Clinton months, neither the FBI, then headed by Freeh, nor the CIA had a “definitive answer on the crucial question of outside direction of the attack,” which Clinton said he needed to go to war against bin Laden or the Taliban. All Clinton got was a December 21 “preliminary judgment” from the CIA that Al Qaeda “supported the attack.” A month later, when the Bush team took office, the CIA delivered the same “preliminary” findings to the new president. National Security Adviser Condoleezza Rice told the commission “there was never a formal, recorded decision not to retaliate for the Cole” by the Bush administration, just “a consensus that ‘tit-for-tat’ responses were likely to be counterproductive.” Rice thought that was the case “with the cruise missile strikes of 1998,” meaning that the new administration was deriding the one response that Freeh praised. Bush himself told the commission that he was concerned “lest an ineffective air strike just serve to give bin Laden a propaganda advantage.” With all of this evidence of bipartisan paralysis, Giuliani has nonetheless limited his Cole attack to Clinton.

    It is all part of a devoutly partisan exploitation of his 9/11 legend. Though Giuliani volunteered to execute bin Laden himself after 9/11, he’s never criticized Bush for the administration’s failure to capture him or the other two top culprits in the attack, Mullah Omar and Ayman al-Zawahiri, a silence more revealing than anything he actually says about terrorism. The old evidence that Bush relied on Afghan proxies to capture bin Laden at Tora Bora, and the new evidence that he outsourced him to Pakistani proxies in Waziristan, evokes no Giuliani bark. Imagine if a Democratic president had done that–or had said, as Bush did, that “I just don’t spend that much time” on bin Laden.

    At the Republican National Convention in 2004, Giuliani began his celebrated speech by fusing 9/11 and the Iraq War as only he could do, reminding everyone of Bush’s bullhorn declaration at Ground Zero that the people who brought down these towers “will hear from us,” and declaring that they “heard from us in Iraq”–a far more invidious connection on this question than Dick Cheney has ever made. Giuliani even went so far, in his 2004 testimony before the 9/11 Commission, to claim that if he’d been told about the presidential daily briefing headlined “Bin Laden Determined to Strike in the U.S.,” which mentioned New York three times, “I can’t honestly tell you we would have done anything differently.” Pressed about whether the city would have benefited from knowing about a spike in warnings so vivid that the CIA director’s “hair was on fire,” Giuliani just shrugged. He’d seen many close friends buried after 9/11, but his answer had more to do with the November election than the September attack that took their lives.

    “They don’t see the threat,” he derides the Democrats wherever he goes, ridiculing even their adjectives. “During the Democratic debates, I couldn’t find one of them that ever mentioned the words ‘Islamic terrorist’–none of them,” he contends. “If you can’t say the words ‘Islamic terrorists,’ then you have a hard time figuring out who is our biggest enemy in the world.”

    In fact, during the three Democratic debates, the candidates referred to “terrorism,” “terrorists,” or “terror” 24 times–only the modifier was missing, though John Edwards did warn in June that “radical Islam” could take over in Pakistan. By focusing on “radical Islam” as opposed to “Islamic terrorism,” the Democrats may actually be avoiding any suggestion that America is engaged in a war against Islam–and even Giuliani would concede that Osama bin Laden is a perversion of Islam. Indeed, though Giuliani is claiming that he’s been “studying” Islamic terrorism since 1975, a search of Giuliani news stories and databases reveals that the first time he was cited using the term was in his May 2004 testimony before the 9/11 Commission: He made a passing reference to the sarin-gas drill and said it simulated an “Islamic terrorist attack.” If the use of this term is a measure of a leader’s understanding of the threat, what does it say about Giuliani’s own decade of denial that he never used it in the ’90s, when he was the mayor of the only American city to have experienced one?

    BIG LIE

    5. ‘Every effort was made by Mayor Giuliani and his staff to ensure the safety of all workers at Ground Zero.’ So read a Giuliani campaign statement in June, responding to a chorus of questions about the mayor’s responsibility for the respiratory plague that threatens the health of tens of thousands of workers at the World Trade Center site, apparently already having killed some.

    The statement pointed a finger at then-EPA administrator Christine Todd Whitman, issuing a list of the many times that “Whitman assured New Yorkers the air was safe.” Instead of also detailing the many times Giuliani echoed Whitman–for example, “the air is safe and acceptable,” he said on September 28–the campaign cited several Fire Department “briefings” about “incident action plans” for the use of respirators, suggesting that the city had tried to get responders to protect themselves from the toxins at Ground Zero. The press release did not make a case that any of these “plans” had ever resulted in any real “action”; nor did it dispute the fact that as late as the end of October, only 29 percent of the workers at the site were wearing respirators. Of course, the workers might have noticed that the photo-op mayor never put one on himself. Instead, the other 9/11 visual we all remember is Giuliani leading at Ground Zero by macho example: The most in the way of protective gear he was ever seen wearing was a dust mask on his mouth.

    When the cleanup effort was widely hailed as under-budget and ahead of schedule, there was no doubt about who was in charge. “By Day 4,” the New York Times reported in a salute to the “Quick Job” at Ground Zero, “Mr. Giuliani, the Department of Design and Construction (D.D.C.), the Office of Emergency Management, contractors and union officials decided it was time to bring order to the chaos.” Giuliani controlled access to the site as if it were his backyard. Yet, when the scope of the health disaster was clear on the fifth anniversary in 2006, he told ABC: “Everybody’s responsible.” Throwing federal, state, and city agencies into the mix, he diffused the blame. On the Today show the same morning, however, he was more accusatory: “EPA put out statements very, very prominent that you have on tape, that the air was safe, and kept repeating that and kept repeating that.”

    The city had its own test results, of course, and when 17 of 87 outdoor tests showed hazardous levels of asbestos up to seven blocks away, they decided not to make the results public. An EPA chief, Bruce Sprague, sent an October 5 letter to the city complaining about “very inconsistent compliance” with respiratory protection. Sprague, who wrote the letter only after unsuccessful conversations with Giuliani aides, likened the indifference in a subsequent court deposition to sticking one’s head “over a barbecue grill for hours” and expecting no consequences. An internal legal memo to a deputy mayor estimated early in the cleanup that there could be 35,000 potential plaintiffs against the city, partly because rescue workers were “provided with faulty or no equipment (i.e. respirators).” Bechtel, the major construction firm retained by the city as its health and safety consultant, urged it to cut the exit-entry points from 20 to two so they could enforce the use of respirators and other precautions, just as was done at the Pentagon, but the recommendation was ignored.

    A Times editorial concluded in May that the Giuliani administration “failed in its duty to protect the workers at Ground Zero,” faulting its “emphasis on a speedy cleanup” and its unwillingness “to insist that all emergency personnel and construction workers wear respirators.” John Odermatt, a former OEM director working at the campaign, couldn’t tell the Times whether Giuliani had lobbied Congress on behalf of sick workers, nor could anyone at the campaign offer any evidence that Giuliani had ever, while earning millions at his new 9/11 consulting business in recent years, tried to secure federal funds for responders.

    Should the current presidential frontrunners square off in 2008, Giuliani’s culpability and subsequent indifference at Ground Zero will, no doubt, be sharply contrasted to Hillary Clinton’s singular role in funding the Mount Sinai programs that have been aiding rescue workers for years. And the public price tag for the mismanagement at the pile (as the site was known among recovery and rescue workers) will run into the billions. Ken Feinberg, who ran the federally funded Victims Compensation Board, has already paid out $1 billion to the injured, concluding after individual hearings that hundreds “were diagnosed with demonstrable and documented respiratory injuries directly related to their rescue service.” Anthony DePalma, whose extraordinary Times stories have lifted the lid on Giuliani’s role, recently reported that the health-care costs for rescue workers could soar to as much as $712 million a year. And the city is administering a billion-dollar liability fund to satisfy the thousands of lawsuits.

    Giuliani’s fellow Republican and former EPA chief Christine Todd Whitman did tell WNBC a couple of months ago that there were “telephone calls, telephone meetings, and meetings in person with the city” every day, with the EPA repeating “the message” and emphasizing the “necessity of wearing the respirators.” Whitman said she “would call my people at midnight after watching the 11 o’clock news and say, ‘I’m still seeing them without the respirators.’ ” The EPA, she said, “was very frustrated.” She also said “the better thing would’ve been to put out the fire sooner,” certainly a function of the city’s Fire Department, adding that it had “burned until January”–a continuous flame held to a smoking, toxic brew. Asked about the mayor himself, Whitman sputtered: “He was clearly in control and doing a good job. Everyone was applauding what was going on. EPA, we had some disagreements with things that were occurring on the pile, like not having people wear respirators–we wanted more emphasis on that. But overall, you know, it’s hard. Those are emotional times.”

    The firefighters’ union pointed out that the respiratory debacle was, like the malfunctioning radios and so many other things, another symbol of the city’s failure to prepare for a major terrorist event. Fire Department memos after the 1993 bombing had urged better protective gear, just as they’d screamed for better radios. The UFA’s leaders pointed out that the department had “ignored many issues related to respiratory protection” for years. The union’s health-and-safety officer, Phil McArdle, likened the long-term effects of working at Ground Zero to Agent Orange in Vietnam. “We’ve done a good job of taking care of the dead,” he said, referring to the hunt for remains, “but such a terrible job of taking care of the living.”


    Wayne Barrett is the co-author, with Dan Collins, of Grand Illusion: The Untold Story of Rudy Giuliani and 9/11, which was just published in paperback by HarperCollins.

    Israel ‘delays’ in shooting inquiry

    0

    Al Jazeera and agencies

    Israel has responded to British demands for a new inquiry into the death of a British journalist shot dead by an Israeli soldier.

    The Israeli attorney-general asked for more information from Britain on Tuesday as a deadline passed for him to respond to a letter requesting he consider expert analysis of a videotape of James Miller’s death.

    But the family sees the move as nothing more than a further delay in the judicial process.

    Miller was killed in the Gaza Strip in 2003 as he worked on a documentary about the effect of the Palestinian-Israeli conflict on people on the ground.

    An inquest into his death held in Britain last year found that he was unlawfully killed by a single shot fired by an Israeli soldier.

    In 2005, the Israeli army had said it would take no action against an officer accused of involvement in the shooting, citing lack of evidence.

    A spokesman for the British attorney-general’s office said on Tuesday: “We have received a letter from the Israeli attorney-general … it asks for further information and we’re making arrangements to take that forward.”

    Video analysis

    Earlier this year, Lord Peter Goldsmith, Britain’s attorney-general at the time, wrote to Meni Mazuz, his Israeli counterpart, urging him to consider the new analysis of the videotape.

    He gave the Israeli government six weeks to reply to a request to reopen the case.

    The Israeli army has claimed that Miller was hit in crossfire as he left a building in a refugee camp in Rafah, but analysis of the sound of the gunfire on the videotape by British police concluded otherwise.

    He is shown on the video wearing a helmet and a bullet-proof vest with “TV” written on before he steps into darkness and the first shot is heard.

    The group can then be heard shouting that they are British journalists before two more shots are fired.

    Anne Waddington, Miller’s sister, told Al Jazeera that she was unimpressed with Israel’s response to British calls to reopen the inquiry.

    “The information that they are requesting they have actually had for four and a half years now and the only difference is that their evaluation was commensurate with their intention to evade any responsibility,” she told Al Jazeera.

    “We would ask the British government to continue to assert pressure on the Israelis until we actually have some form of constructive response not a further delay.”

    Microwave ovens destroy the nutritional value of your food

    3

    By Mike Adams

    The rise of widespread nutritional deficiencies in the western world correlates almost perfectly with the introduction of the microwave oven. This is no coincidence. Microwave ovens heat food through a process of creating molecular friction, but this same molecular friction quickly destroys the delicate molecules of vitamins and phytonutrients (plant medicines) naturally found in foods. One study showed that microwaving vegetables destroys up to 97% of the nutritional content (vitamins and other plant-based nutrients that prevent disease, boost immune function and enhance health).

    In other words, eating raw broccoli provides you with natural anti-cancer medicine that’s extremely effective at halting the growth of cancer tumors. But microwaving that broccoli destroys the anti-cancer nutrients, rendering the food “dead” and nutritionally depleted. There’s even some evidence to suggest that microwaving destroys the natural harmony in water molecules, creating an energetic pattern of chaos in the water found in all foods. In fact, the common term of “nuking” your food is coincidentally appropriate: Using a microwave is a bit like dropping a nuclear bomb on your food, then eating the fallout. (You don’t actually get radiation from eating microwaved foods, however. But you don’t get much nutrition, either.)

    Why microwave users are so unhealthy

    Consumers are dying today in part because they continue to eat dead foods that are killed in the microwave. They take a perfectly healthy piece of raw food, loaded with vitamins and natural medicines, then nuke it in the microwave and destroy most of its nutrition. Humans are the only animals on the planet who destroy the nutritional value of their food before eating it. All other animals consume food in its natural, unprocessed state, but humans actually go out of their way to render food nutritionally worthless before eating it. No wonder humans are the least healthy mammals on the planet.

    The invention of the microwave and its mass adoption by the population coincides with the onset of obesity in developed nations around the world. Not only did the microwave make it convenient to eat more obesity-promoting foods, it also destroyed much of the nutritional content of those foods, leaving consumers in an ongoing state of malnourished overfeeding. In other words, people eat too many calories but not enough real nutrition. The result is, of course, what we see today: Epidemic rates of diabetes, cancer, heart disease, depression, kidney failure, liver disorders and much more. These diseases are all caused by a combination of malnutrition and exposure to toxic chemicals (plus other factors such as emotional trauma, lack of exercise, etc.). Microwaves make malnutrition virtually automatic, and being exposed to toxic chemicals is easy to accomplish by simply eating processed foods (which are universally manufactured with the addition of toxic chemicals that act as preservatives, colorings, flavor enhancers and so on).

    Microwaving is, technically, a form of food irradiation. I find it interesting that people who say that would never eat “irradiated” food have no hesitation about microwaving their food. It’s the same thing (just a different wavelength of radiation). In fact, microwaves were originally called “radar ranges.” Sounds strange today, doesn’t it? But when microwaves were first introduced in the 1970’s, they were proudly advertised as radar ranges. You blast your food with high-intensity radar and it gets hot. This was seen as some sort of space-age miracle in the 1970’s. Perhaps someday an inventor will create a food heating device that does not radically alter the nutritional value of the foods in the process, but I’m not holding my breath on this one. Probably the best way to heat foods right now is to simply use a countertop toaster oven, and keep the heat as low as possible.

    The microwave does work as advertised, by the way. It makes your food hot. But the mechanism by which heat is produced causes internal damage to the delicate molecular structures of vitamins and phytonutrients. Minerals are largely unaffected, however, so you’ll still get the same magnesium, calcium and zinc in microwaved foods as you would in non-microwaved foods, but the all-important B vitamins, anthocyanins, flavonoids and other nutritional elements are easily destroyed by microwave ovens.

    The microwave is the appliance of the living dead. People who use the microwave on a regular basis are walking down a path towards degenerative disease and a lifelong battle with obesity. The more you use the microwave, the worse your nutritional state gets, and the more likely you are to be diagnosed with various diseases and put on pharmaceuticals which, of course, will create other health problems that lead to a grand spiraling nosedive of health.

    Do yourself a favor: Toss your microwave, or donate it to some charity. It’s much easier to avoid using the microwave if you don’t have one around. It will clear up counter space, save you electricity and greatly enhance your dietary habits. When you need to heat something, heat it in a toaster oven or a stovetop pan (avoid Teflon and non-stick surfaces, of course). Better yet, strive to eat more of a raw, unprocessed diet. That where you’ll get the best nutrition anyway. Buy yourself a Vita-Mix and blend up some smoothies. It’s faster than microwaving foods are far healthier. (See my book Superfood Smoothies for recipes).

    I drink a superfood smoothie every morning, and I haven’t used a microwave in years. Protecting health is our own responsibility, and it’s up to us all to make informed decisions about how we buy, prepare and consume our foods. You have to save yourself. Click here to see my CounterThink cartoon on this topic.

    Red Cross confirms Bush administration, CIA used torture in interrogations

    1

    By Patrick Martin

    A confidential report by the International Committee of the Red Cross (ICRC) suggests that Bush administration officials may have committed war crimes in the operation of CIA “secret prisons” overseas, according to a lengthy analysis published on the web site of the New Yorker magazine Sunday.

    The Red Cross report concluded that the methods used in the CIA interrogation of alleged 9/11 terrorist Khalid Sheikh Mohammed and other Al Qaeda prisoners were “tantamount to torture” and that Bush administration officials had likely committed “grave breaches” of the Geneva Conventions.

    The article by Jane Mayer, entitled “The Black Sites,” is the product of a series of interviews with former CIA officers involved in operating the agency’s secret prisons overseas, agents who directly participated in torture sessions and apparently concluded that the methods they were employing were either immoral or counterproductive, or both.

    The New Yorker has become one of the principal conduits for dissent within the military/intelligence apparatus directed against the policies of the Bush White House. Mayer’s colleague, Seymour Hersh, wrote the first extensive report on the abuse of prisoners at the US military prison at Abu Ghraib, near Baghdad, as well as a series of exposés about US preparations for a military strike against Iran.

    Khalid Sheikh Mohammed was captured by Pakistani authorities in early 2003, just before the US invasion of Iraq, and held at secret CIA locations for nearly four years before his transfer to Guantánamo Bay. Last March, the Pentagon made public his “confession” to carrying out or planning no less than 31 separate terrorist atrocities, a statement widely hailed in official circles as proof that torture–or, in Washington-speak, “enhanced interrogation techniques”–was an effective and legitimate practice in the “war on terror.”

    At the time, the World Socialist Web Site noted the dubious character of Mohammed’s self-incriminating statements, in which he claimed responsibility for an improbable number of spectacular plots, including purported plans to destroy the Sears Tower, the Empire State Building and London’s Big Ben, and to assassinate former US President Jimmy Carter and Pope John Paul II. (See: “Washington exploits Guantánamo ‘confession’ to justify its crimes”)

    No politically literate observer doubted that Mohammed had been severely tortured, and many said so, among them journalist Nat Hentoff (“Was Khalid Sheikh Mohammed tortured?”) and Professor Anthony D’Amato of Northwestern University School of Law (“True Confessions: The Amazing Tale of Khalid Shaikh Mohammed”), who compared the 26-page “confession” to the self-indictments by prisoners in the Stalinist purge trials of the 1930s. Mayer’s article confirms, in fact, that the CIA actually employed torture techniques first developed by the Soviet KGB and copied by US intelligence agencies during the Cold War.

    The International Committee of the Red Cross was given access to Mohammed late last year, after his transfer to Guantánamo Bay. The policy of the ICRC is to discuss its findings only with the government holding prisoners in custody, not with the press, in order to insure its continued access to prisoners. But, according to Mayer, the ICRC report on the 15 detainees held in the CIA’s secret prisons was circulated through the very highest levels of the White House, State Department and National Security Council, and to some congressmen on the House and Senate committees that oversee the intelligence agencies.

    Mayer cited “congressional and other Washington sources familiar with the report,” writing that “one of the sources said that the Red Cross described the agency’s detention and interrogation methods as tantamount to torture, and declared that American officials responsible for the abusive treatment could have committed serious crimes. The source said the report warned that these officials may have committed ‘grave breaches’ of the Geneva Conventions, and may have violated the US Torture Act.” Mayer adds, “The conclusions of the Red Cross, which is known for its credibility and caution, could have potentially devastating legal ramifications.”

    In other words, those US government officials who authorized and carried out the torture of CIA prisoners could face war crimes charges before either an American or international tribunal, as could those who subsequently became aware of what was taking place in the secret prisons and covered it up.

    According to Mayer’s article, the CIA use of torture was not a “rogue” operation, but a massive bureaucratic enterprise involving systematic research and development to find the “best” methods for breaking down prisoners. CIA officials reviewed the techniques employed by the Phoenix Program during the Vietnam War as a model for the “war on terror.” The Phoenix Program involved the systematic assassination of an estimated 20,000 cadres, supporters and sympathizers of the National Liberation Front, as well as the widespread torture of prisoners.

    The agency also sought interrogation advice from the secret police of Egypt, Jordan and Saudi Arabia, all of which practice barbaric methods of torture against political prisoners. And one former military interrogator described the techniques of exerting total control over a prisoner’s environment as “the KGB model,” developed during the purges against political dissidents in the former Soviet Union, and subsequently mimicked by the CIA.

    Among the techniques used on Khalid Sheikh Mohammed were prolonged sensory deprivation, continuous shackling while naked, use of a dog leash and female interrogators, forcible slamming into the walls of his cell, suspension from the ceiling of the interrogation room by his arms, and the now-notorious practice of waterboarding, the simulated drowning technique employed as torture since medieval times (when it became known as the “Chinese water torture.”)

    One interrogation expert told Mayer, referring to the victims of the torture sessions: “People were utterly dehumanized. People fell apart. It was the intentional and systematic infliction of great suffering masquerading as a legal process. It is just chilling.”

    The torture was so severe and systematic that it had a profound psychological effect on some of the torturers themselves, according to Mayer, who interviewed one of those who interrogated Mohammed. This interrogator described a fellow torturer who now “has horrible nightmares … It really haunts him. You are inflicting something really evil and horrible on somebody.”

    CIA officials repeatedly voiced concerns that the orders they were receiving from the White House, and particularly from Vice President Dick Cheney, might leave them vulnerable to criminal prosecution, particularly since they were instructed to keep prisoners like Mohammed alive and thereby preserve them as witnesses to their own abuse. As one official told Mayer, in a particularly chilling passage, “It would have been better if we had executed them.”

    A former CIA official told Mayer that many agents had taken out liability insurance to help cover the anticipated legal bills when they face prosecution for prisoner abuse. There is a “high level of anxiety about political retribution,” he said, and “several guys expect to be thrown under the bus,” serving as fall guys for the decision-makers at the highest levels, including Bush, Cheney, former CIA Director George Tenet and Attorney General Alberto Gonzales, who, as White House counsel, supervised the process of giving a legal stamp of approval to torture.

    Several leading congressional Democrats are well aware of the ICRC report, which was circulated to leaders of the Senate and House Intelligence committees, chaired by Senator Jay Rockefeller of West Virginia and Congressman Sylvestre Reyes of Texas. Speaker of the House Nancy Pelosi and Senate Majority Leader Harry Reid were likely “in the loop” as well.

    This fact underscores the complicity of the congressional Democratic leadership, who only two days ago pushed through legislation that greatly expanded the domestic spying powers of an administration which they knew had been branded by the International Committee of the Red Cross as a serial perpetrator of war crimes.

    Despite the sensational character of Mayer’s revelations, there has been relatively little comment on the subject in the American media. The Washington Post, in an article Sunday previewing the New Yorker account, confirmed the existence of the Red Cross report and its circulation at the highest levels in the US capital.

    It cited “sources familiar with the document” as confirming that the detainees interviewed by the ICRC gave similar accounts of their torture even though they were held in isolation from each other and could not coordinate their stories. This reinforces the credibility of their testimony–as does the exporting of these methods from the CIA secret prisons and the Guantánamo Bay concentration camp to the US military prison in Abu Ghraib, Iraq, where digital photographs made public in 2004 caused worldwide revulsion at US torture methods.

    US uneasy as Britain plans for early Iraq withdrawal

    0

    Americans would prefer UK troops to remain in position as long as they do

    Ewen MacAskill in Washington, Julian Borger and Patrick Wintour
    The Guardian

    The Bush administration is becoming increasingly concerned about the impact of an imminent British withdrawal from southern Iraq and would prefer UK troops to remain for another year or two.British officials believe that Washington will signal its intention to reduce US troop numbers after a much-anticipated report next month by its top commander in Iraq, General David Petraeus, clearing the way for Gordon Brown to announce a British withdrawal in parliament the following month. An official said: “We do believe we are nearly there.”

    It is not known whether George Bush expressed concern about the withdrawal of the remaining 5,000 British troops when he met Mr Brown in Washington last week. But sources, who spoke on condition of anonymity, said the administration was worried about the political consequences of losing British troops.

    One source said: “If the difference is between the British leaving at the end of the year or staying through to next year or the year after, it is a safe assumption that President Bush would prefer them to stay as long as the Americans are there.”

    The Bush administration – focused on the north, west and central Iraq and the “surge” strategy that has seen 30,000 extra US troops deployed – has until recently ignored the south, content to leave it to the British. Now, however, it is beginning to pay attention to the region, amid the realisation that what has been portrayed as a success story is turning sour.

    The UK government no longer claims Basra is a success but denies it is a failure, with British troops forced to abandon Basra city for the shelter of the airport.

    On Monday the vice-president, Dick Cheney, warned against an early withdrawal. In words thought to be aimed at Congress rather than the British, he said: “No one could plead ignorance of the potential consequences of walking away from Iraq now, withdrawing coalition forces before Iraqis can defend themselves.” The US defence secretary, Robert Gates, signalled at the weekend he had hoped for a modest US troop reduction by the end of the year but this has been complicated by the political instability gripping the Iraqi government.

    Ken Pollack, a foreign affairs expert at the Washington-based Brookings Institution, who returned last month from an eight-day visit to Iraq in which he spoke to US officers and officials, predicted that US and Iraqi forces would have to go to the south to fill the vacuum with the same level of commitment they were showing with the surge.

    He said Mr Bush would prefer the British to stay: “What Bush needs is for there to be a Union Jack flying somewhere in Iraq so he can trumpet that as full British participation, but that participation has been meaningless for some time.”

    Mr Pollack, who wrote on his return that there were signs that the surge was working, was dismissive of the British contribution over the past 12 to 18 months. He said: “I am assuming the British will no longer be there. They are not there now. We have a British battle group holed up in Basra airport. I do not see what good that does except for people flying in and out.

    “It is the wild, wild west. Basra is out of control.”

    The British say that their forces have handed over to the Iraqi military and the violence is at a much lower level than in Baghdad, with most of it directed towards British forces as Shia militia seek to claim credit for driving them out.

    Mr Brown has insisted that he will make his decision exclusively on the basis of British military advice, and there is no connection between the British and US military withdrawal decisions. He has hinted that British forces will switch from combat to surveillance roles in Basra, allowing them to be reduced and withdrawn to Basra airport, a highly protected base from which British troops could ultimately withdraw.

    Gen Petraeus and Ryan Crocker, the US ambassador to Baghdad, will present an assessment on the impact of the surge to Congress on September 15. Their report is expected to show a mixed picture, with a sufficient number of positive points to justify an end to the surge. In such an environment the scaling down of the British presence in the south would not appear disloyal, the Brown government hopes.

    “The British are doing everything to avoid embarrassing the Americans, while at the same time continuing the withdrawal,” said Rosemary Hollis, the director of research at the Chatham House think-tank.

    However, it is not clear how the prime minister would react if Mr Bush defied expectations once more and decided to press on with the surge next month.

    Colonel Sam Gardiner, who is retired but still carries out war games for the Pentagon, said the violence in the south was problematic for the US military who need secure north-south communications for when they begin to move out of Iraq. He said US forces could be out of the country and into camps in Kuwait within two months, but it would take a further 10 months or so to remove all the heavy equipment – though he believed some of it could be left for the Iraqi security forces. Referring to Basra, he said: “We have trouble in the rear right now. The rear has got problems.”

    Some military analysts argue that private contractors are already protecting the convoy supply lines but Col Gardiner said that a British pull-out would mean “we would have to establish security for the route from Baghdad to Kuwait. Troops would have to be taken from other missions to protect the road.”

    Humans blamed for foot and mouth cases

    0

    Tania Branigan, political correspondent
    The Guardian

    Humans are to blame for carrying the foot and mouth virus from laboratories in Pirbright, investigators into the outbreak in Surrey believe.The initial, inconclusive report from the Health and Safety Executive says there is a “strong probability” that the origin was either the government-funded Institute of Animal Health laboratory or the commercial Merial facility, which share the same site. Both were working on the strain involved in the farm outbreak, although Merial was producing it in large quantities while the IAH was using tiny amounts for research.

    “There are various routes for accidental or deliberate transfer of material from the site,” the report says. “We have investigated site management systems and records and spoken to a number of employees. As a result we are pursuing lines of inquiry.” It adds: “Release by human movement must … be considered a real possibility.”

    HSE investigators need another week’s work to analyse the exact virus types used by each organisation. Both organisations insisted they had found no evidence of a breach in biosecurity. Researchers said there was no evidence of working practices or incidents such as lab spillages which could have caused a release of the strain.

    Environment secretary Hilary Benn admitted the government had to look at the possibility the outbreak was the result of sabotage. Asked if deliberate human contamination was the cause, he said after the publication of the report: “The truth is, we don’t know. We’re very anxious.”

    The report came amid continuing concern about the potential spread of the virus, after a second outbreak was confirmed within the protection zone – prompting Gordon Brown to return to Downing Street from Chequers to chair meetings of the Cobra emergency committee. After the publication of the report, Mr Brown said: “The work goes on to isolate, to contain, control and eradicate the disease.”

    Last night’s report rules out airborne transmission of the virus and suggests that the risk of waterborne transmission alone is negligible. But it does not rule out the possibility that flooding may have played a role. If surface water on the Pirbright site became contaminated, someone moving from there to surrounding land could have carried the virus on their footwear.

    Defra said last night it would investigate unconfirmed reports that a worker at one of the Pirbright labs has an allotment near the farm where the outbreak was first detected on Friday.

    Merial has halted production at the site voluntarily, but is producing 300,000 doses of foot and mouth vaccine for the government. Experts say this poses no risk because the vaccine does not involve the use of a live virus.

    Martin Shirley, director of the Institute for Animal Health, said: “The institute is obviously concerned about the lack of unambiguous evidence at this stage of what has happened and will continue to review our own biosecurity systems as new data becomes available … We continue to be concerned about the effect on the farming community in the UK and you can be assured our staff are working hard to provide evidence for these inquiries.”

    Peter Kendall, president of the National Farmers’ Union, said it was considering legal action for compensation if a commercial company is found to be responsible.

    “It is important to understand that farmers who have lost livestock at the moment are only being compensated for the value of that stock, there’s no [compensation for] consequential loss,” he said. “If this turns out to be a commercial company, that has been and can be shown to have been careless in any way, my members are already very loudly saying, ‘We’ve lost money, our businesses are no longer able to function, we’ve got animals, extra feed costs, problems with capacity being squeezed on farms’. There are many, many costs that have been incurred by farmers through no fault of their own.”

    Peter Ainsworth, shadow environment secretary, said the HSE’s report was “bland and inconclusive”. He added: “It is no surprise but nonetheless shocking that the report identifies a major biosecurity failure at a government laboratory and a laboratory licensed by Defra as the two most likely sources of the outbreak.”

    Microbiology expert Hugh Pennington said: “My impression is that they haven’t found any technical fault and flooding is a potential, but only negligible. What you are left with is human movement.”

    Britain wants Guantanamo detainees

    0

    Channel 4 News

    The Foreign Secretary, David Miliband, has written to the United States government urging the release of five former UK residents still being held in Guantanamo Bay.

    The move reverses the policy of the Blair administration NOT to press for their release because they are not British citizens.

    The Foreign Office said it had reviewed the policy in the light of recent steps taken by the United States to reduce the number of detainees in Guantanamo.

    Previously the government had said that these five men were effectively not Britain’s business as they were not British subjects.

    But today the government said that in the light of US steps to reduce the number of detainees and move towards the closure of the camp it was changing its mind.

    Although the foreign secretary has today written requesting their release, a deal may have been wrapped up at the Prime Minister’s trip to Camp David last week.

    The foreign secretary’s letter is unlikely to be a surprise delivery at the state department.

    Foreign Office statement

    “The Foreign Secretary and Home Secretary have reviewed the Government’s approach to this group of individuals in light of these ongoing developments, our long-held policy aim of securing the closure of Guantanamo Bay, and the need to maintain national security.”

    The five men are all former residents of the UK. They’d been granted refugee status: indefinite or exceptional leave to remain in Britain.

    One of the five – Jamil el Banna – was arrested along with Bishar al Rawi who spoke to Channel 4 News last week.

    In fact the government was already under pressure over Mr el Banna’s detention at Guantanamo. The High Court had given the Home Secretary until Thursday to decide whether he could return to his family in London. Now he will be able to.

    Key to all of this has been a change of US policy to allow countries like Britain to start negotiating over the fate of non-British nationals.

    Negotiations which the Foreign Office has warned could take some time.

    Children find food wrapped in McDonald’s packaging ‘six times tastier’

    0

    By FIONA MacRAE

    Children find food in McDonald’s packaging up to six times more appetising than the identical snacks in plain wrappers, research shows.

    The study, designed to gauge the power of advertising, revealed that boys and girls as young as three found food tastier when they thought it was made by a big brand.

    The phenomenon is not just restricted to fast foods, with youngsters finding that milk and carrots tastier when they believed they had been bought at McDonald’s.

    The research, carried at Stanford University in the US, comes amid growing concern about the influence of advertising on children’s health.

    Child obesity rates have trebled over the last 20 years, with 10 per cent of six-year-olds and 17 per cent of 15-year-olds now obese.

    By 2050, half of all primary school-age boys and a fifth of girls could be so overweight that their health is at serious risk.

    Experts have warned that unless the Government acts now, an entire generation faces an old age blighted by heart disease, cancer, diabetes and other diseases brought on by obesity, with today’s children dying at a younger age than their parents.

    Since April, junk food manufacturers have been banned from advertising their products during TV programmes targeted at under-16s.

    However, critics claim the ban doesn’t go far enough and point out that manufacturers are increasingly advertising on the internet.

    Scroll down for more

    burgerChild obesity rates have trebled over the last 20 years

    Now, research shows just how powerful advertising is.

    During the study, the researchers asked children aged between three and five to rate five foods for tastiness.

    Each child was given two samples of each food, one in McDonalds packaging and one in plain wrapping. Other than the packaging, the samples were identical.

    The researchers said that if the children weren’t influenced by branding, they would find both samples equally tasty.

    However, this was far from the case, with the McDonald’s-wrapped food judged far more appealing.

    The ‘McDonald’s’ fries were judged tastiest by six times as many children as found the plain packaged chips the most appetising.

    Chips and chicken nuggets carrying fast food branding were also deemed more tasty.

    Even milk and carrots, foods not traditionally associated with McDonald’s, were gauged more appealing when carrying the chain’s logo.

    Further analysis showed that the link was strongest among children who ate fast food more often and among those with more than one TV set at home.

    Writing in the journal Archives of Pediatrics & Adolescent Medicine, the researchers said that previous studies had shown that children as young as two are aware of brands.

    They added: “These results add evidence to support recommendations to regulate or ban advertising of the marketing of high-calorie, low-nutrient foods and beverages, or all marketing that is directed to young children.”

    Clever branding could also be used to encourage children to eat fruit and vegetables.

    The researchers said: “Our findings also suggest a need for research on marketing in general, and branding in particular, as strategies to promote more healthful taste preferences and food and beverage choices in young children.”

    Tam Fry, of the Child Growth Foundation said the study underlined the importance of teaching even the youngest children about healthy eating.

    He added: “Gaudy, colourful packaging is tremendously attractive, and if we could do the same with broccoli, it would be wonderful.”

    McDonald’s said it actively tries to promote healthy food to children.

    Abandoned by Britain

    0

    undefined

    Read the letters in full here

    Britain was accused yesterday of abandoning 91 Iraqi interpreters and their families to face persecution and possible death when British forces withdraw.

    The Times has learnt that the Government has ignored personal appeals from senior army officers in Basra to relax asylum regulations and make special arrangements for Iraqis whose loyal services have put their lives at risk.

    One interpreter, who has worked with the Army since 2004 and wanted to start a new life in Britain after British Forces pull out was told by Downing Street that he would receive no special favours and to read a government website.

    There is mounting evidence of a campaign by militants to target “collaborators” as British Forces prepare to leave. Hundreds of interpreters and other locally engaged staff working for the coalition have been kidnapped, tortured and murdered over the past four years.

    Denmark has already made special arrangements to help its Iraqi staff and the Americans are set to accept 7,000 Iraqi refugees.

    Armed with a glowing reference from his commander, Major Pauric Newland, stating that his life would be in danger once British Forces left, A Kinani made a personal appeal to Tony Blair, during his last visit to Iraq as Prime Minister in May.

    His letter was handed to Ruth Turner, a former No 10 adviser, and a reply was sent on June 22 by Nick Banner, a former foreign policy adviser, who informed Mr Kinani that he was not eligible for asylum. He suggested that he went to a third country and applied for a visa and advised him to look at a website for help.

    “This is cowardly,” Mr Kinani told The Times. “The British make us easy food near the lion’s mouth.”

    Last month Denmark granted asylum to 60 former Iraqi staff and their families before its forces withdrew from the south. The US has said it will take in 7,000 Iraqis this year, including former employees.

    But Britain has so far refused to make an exception. The Ministry of Defence and the Foreign and Commonwealth Office said yesterday that Iraqi employees would receive no special help in applying for asylum.

    “Anyone who is seeking to apply for refugee status must do so from within the United Kingdom. There is no exception to that,” said a Home Office spokesman. “Their cases will be dealt with on a case-by-case basis against the criteria of the 1951 Refugee Convention.”

    Senior politicians and serving officers have appealed to the Government to reconsider and there are hints that some ministers are in favour of resettling former Iraqi employees. One senior British officer in Iraq also hinted that Whitehall was beginning to feel the pressure for a U-turn.

    William Hague, the Shadow Foreign Secretary, said: “Britain has benefited from the services of these Iraqis in carrying out our responsibilities in Iraq. As Britain reduces its military presence in Iraq, we ought to look to the safety of those who have risked their lives to help us.”

    David Winnick, a senior Labour MP, said: “I would hope that the authorities here would be no less generous than the Danes.”

    Even former British employees who have escaped from Iraq feel abandoned. Loay Mohammad, an army interpreter who fled to Syria in March, said that the British now wanted nothing to do with him.

    “When I went to the embassy in Damascus, they would not even let me through the door,” he told The Times. “When I run out of money in a few week’s time I will be forced to go home. That day I will become one of the dead.”

    The British position was criticised yesterday by human rights groups. Tom Porteous, the director of Human Rights Watch in the UK, said that the Government should reverse its policy.

    Former Aide: Rudolph Giuliani would be ‘terrible’ president

    0

    By Philip Sherwell

    The former top antiterrorism aide to Rudolph Giuliani has launched a stinging critique of the former New York mayor over the September 11 atrocity, attacking a key pillar of his challenge for the White House.

     
    Rudolph Giuliani
    Rudolph Giuliani’s nomination campaign owes much to his role on September 11

    Jerome Hauer, New York’s emergency management director from 1996 to 2000, said Mr Giuliani was closely involved in locating the city’s crisis control room in the World Trade Centre complex, even though it was a known terrorist target after the 1993 truck bomb attack which killed six people at the site.

    The location proved disastrous in 2001 as the building was set ablaze in the collapse of the adjoining twin towers.

    The condemnation by Mr Hauer, a leading US expert on biological and chemical terrorism, provides fresh ammunition to Mr Giuliani’s foes, who want to undermine the widespread acclaim for his actions in the aftermath of al-Qaeda’s attack on the towers. It follows similar criticism from the main firemen’s union.

    Mr Hauer’s comments signal the sort of scrutiny that Mr Giuliani will face from his political rivals’ research teams if he remains the Republican frontrunner for next year’s election.

    Mr Giuliani’s advisers reject the criticisms as the inaccurate recollections of a bitter man who puts politics over principle, and maintain the command centre was sited at the World Trade Centre on Mr Hauer’s recommendation.

    Mr Hauer, who now runs a consultancy firm, said that the former mayor vetoed his proposal to site the emergency command centre in Brooklyn as he wanted it to be within walking distance of his City Hall offices in Manhattan.

    “Rudy would make a terrible president and that is why I am speaking now,” Mr Hauer told The Sunday Telegraph. “He’s a control freak who micro-manages decision, he has a confrontational character trait and picks fights just to score points. He is the last thing this country needs as president right now.”

    Mr Hauer is a registered Democrat voter but his expertise was so highly rated by the Republican Bush administration that he was chosen in 2002 to co-ordinate America’s public health preparation for future emergencies, including attacks with weapons of mass destruction.

    He has gone public with his criticisms after Mr Giuliani blamed him for the location of the New York command centre during a television interview.

    “That is Rudy re-inventing history,” he said. “We had found a good facility in Brooklyn but Rudy’s people and then the mayor himself made clear that the site had to be walking distance from City Hall.”

    Mr Hauer also accused Mr Giuliani of failing to sort out turf battles between the city’s police and fire departments, and of appointing inexperienced cronies to key positions.

    And he was dismissive of Mr Giuliani’s assertion that Judith Nathan – a former nurse who was then Mr Giuliani’s girlfriend and is now his third wife – had co-ordinated the Family Assistance Centre relief operation after September 11.

    “Rudy told me to find a role for Judy. She came along to some meetings and her heart was in the right place, but it’s baloney to suggest she ran the centre. And now he says he would take her advice on chemical and biological terrorism? Give me a break.”

    Mr Hauer’s assessment has put the focus back on the former mayor’s handling of the aftermath of the outrage. Pro-Democrat firemen’s unions and the relatives of some victims of the atrocity blame Mr Giuliani for failing to introduce an integrated emergency control system.

    They also say he failed to ensure co-ordination between the police and fire brigade, despite the 1993 truck bombing. In addition, they claim city authorities knew that firemen’s radios did not function properly – seen as a key reason why 343 of them died when the towers collapsed, since many would not have heard the order to evacuate.

    Mr Giuliani’s White House campaign owes much to the reputation he gained as “America’s mayor” for his role in the 2001 events and his hawkish national security credentials.

    He holds a comfortable lead in polls of prospective Republican nominees, followed by former Tennessee senator and actor Fred Thompson, who has yet officially to declare his candidacy.

    Brian Haw: ‘It is strange that they are spending so much money prosecuting me’

    0

    By Kim Sengupta

    As the Camp for Climate Action began planning in earnest for next week’s protest at Heathrow, one veteran protester against the Iraq war was also enjoying a moment of vindication.

    The High Court ruled that restrictions imposed by police on Parliament Square anti-war protester Brian Haw, as he continues his peace camp demonstration were unlawful “by reason of lack of clarity”.

    For Mr Haw, by now a veteran of the law courts, it was another triumph in the face of an extraordinary barrage of actions by the Government in an attempt to ban his one man anti-war protest on Parliament Square.

    Lord Phillips, sitting with Mr Justice Griffith Williams, dismissed an appeal by the Director of Public Prosecutions against a ruling that the conditions imposed on 56-year-old Mr Haw were in breach of his human rights to protest.

    The rules limited the area that can be used by his peace camp and required him to ensure nothing on the site should conceal suspicious items. Mr Haw, claimed the police, had breached both those conditions with the area behind his camp covered in disused placards, boxes and sheeting.

    The laws were covered by the recently introduced Serious Organised Crime Act. Mr Haw and his supporters point out the legislation was meant, as the name suggests, to combat serious offences and not to hound a lone protester just because his presence is a matter of continuing embarrassment for the Government.

    Mr Haw, a former carpenter, began his campaign in protest against Tony Blair joining George Bush in invading Iraq almost 1,700 days and nights ago. “Isn’t it strange they are spending so much time and money in prosecuting me and using such heavyweight laws and all I am doing is using my right to protest”, he said. ” Yet Blair has faced no prosecution for genocide and infanticide in Iraq, or for sending British soldiers to their deaths in a war based on lies. When will he face justice ?”

    The regime change at Downing Street will not, Mr Haw fears, lead to a change in official attitude towards him. “The legal moves they have taken are continuing under Gordon Brown. On the question of Iraq, he isn’t exactly rushing to pull troops out, is he? So I don’t see how he can shrug off responsibility for the people being killed now by the Americans.”

    Although the High Court judges found in favour of Mr Haw on the matter of the restrictions, they did allow a challenge by the prosecution, to another ruling by the district judge, that Scotland Yard chief Sir Ian Blair had no right to delegate formulating the conditions to a more junior officer, Superintendent Peter Terry.

    Lord Phillips said, “the challenge made on behalf of Mr Haw to the practicality of the conditions imposed may mean that the police will be driven, in the interests of workability, to impose conditions on him that are simpler and more restrictive.

    “Mr Haw has chosen for his demonstrations a site that is particularly sensitive. He would be well-advised to co-operate with the police in agreeing the conditions of such demonstrations.”

    Superintendent Terry, in describing to the court the difficulties he said he was having in reaching such an agreement with Mr Haw, struck a plaintive note. “The problem is that whenever I do speak to Brian Haw, he stands and shouts at me”.

    Mr Haw accepts he does get impassioned in his views about the Iraq war and what he sees as attempts to muzzle the voices raised against it. His stance and very public protest has come at a personal cost, the end of his marriage and regular contact with his seven children.

    New Yorker: CIA Tactics Amount To Torture

    0

    The Central Intelligence Agency used “enhanced interrogation techniques” synonymous with torture while interrogating September 11 mastermind Khalid Sheikh Mohammed, according to a New Yorker article that appears on newsstands Monday.

    After Mohammed’s capture in Pakistan in 2003, the CIA detained him at one of several secret overseas prisons, known as “black sites,” and subjected him to unusually harsh treatment, according to the article.

    It was under these interrogation methods that Mohammed confessed to 31 criminal plots, including the murder of Wall Street Journal reporter Daniel Pearl, who was captured in 2002 in Pakistan and beheaded, Jane Mayer reports in the New Yorker.

    Mohammed’s interrogation was part of a fine-tuned CIA protocol of psychological coercion against al Qaeda figures, according to sources familiar with an International Red Cross report, Mayer writes.

    “The Red Cross went in and got to interview these people for the first time,” said Mayer on the CBS Evening News. “What these people described was hanging from the ceilings by their arms and being water-boarded, partially drowned, put on leashes and knocked into walls and basically deprived of all kinds of sensory imagery for years.”

    At a hearing in Guantanamo Bay, Cuba, Mohammed said his testimony was freely given, Mayer adds, but he also said that he had been abused by the CIA.

    “He was certainly coerced,” Mayer told Russ Mitchell on Sunday. “These were certainly very coercive techniques. The problem with them is that you can’t really tell what’s reliable, what’s the truth, what’s not after somebody has been through these things.”

    Mayer’s article further described the CIA program of physical and psychological abuse as completely regimented and deliberate.

    “There have always been mistakes made in the past when prisoners have been abused in wars,” Mayer told Mitchell. “But this is the first time it’s been done on purpose.”

    The program was suspended last fall, following a Supreme Court ruling, Hamdan v. Rumsfeld, which ruled that all U.S. detainees must be treated in a manner consisted with the Geneva Conventions.

    In an E-mail to CBS News the CIA responded that the article “recycles old allegations” and concluded by saying “the United States does not conduct or condone torture.”

    (© MMVII, CBS Broadcasting Inc. All Rights Reserved.)